MCAMX2 RefGuide

Reference Guide
Mastercam X2
Reference Guide
August 2007
ii • MASTERCAM X2 / Reference Guide
Mastercam® X2 Reference Guide

Date: August 2007
Copyright © 2007 CNC Software, Inc.— All rights reserved.
First Printing: July 2005
Software: Mastercam X2MR2
ISBN: 1-883310-55-5
IMPORTANT NOTICE! PLEASE READ THIS STATEMENT AND THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
COMPLETELY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE.
BY CONTINUING TO USE THIS SOFTWARE, YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR A
SINGLE ENTITY) INDICATE YOUR INTENTION TO BE BOUND BY AND ACCEPT
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU MAY NOT ACCESS OR
OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE AND WILL IN FACT BE PROHIBITED FROM
DOING SO. THIS COMPUTER SOFTWARE MAY BE USED ONLY PURSUANT TO
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH BELOW, AND SOLELY IN
CONJUNCTION WITH THE ACCOMPANYING SECURITY MECHANISM (UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE "EXCEPTIONS TO SECURITY MECHANISM
REQUIREMENTS" SECTION OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS) WHICH MUST
BE PRESENT ON YOUR COMPUTER (OR NETWORK AS APPLICABLE) AT ALL
TIMES DURING SUCH USE.
Read This If You Have Received This Software From A Third Party: If you received
this Software from someone other than an authorized CNC Software, Inc. reseller,
you do not have a legal software license. (For example, if you acquired this Software
simply by buying a machine or Software from the former owner or from an auction,
you do not have a valid license.) You should contact CNC Software, Inc. (860-875-
5006) in order to obtain a new and valid license. Use of this Software without a
valid software license is unlawful, a violation of the Copyright Act and may expose
you to criminal liability under 17 United States Code Sec. 506, including fines and
damages.
Software License If you have paid a license fee, CNC Software, Inc. ("CNC") a Connecticut
corporation with its principal place of business at 671 Old Post Road, Tolland,
Connecticut, 06084 hereby grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(the "License") to use this software program and its accompanying documentation
(and, if applicable, to permit your authorized employees to use them), solely in
accordance with the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement. You
may use the Software solely for your internal business purposes and solely in
conjunction with the accompanying hardware or software device, method, scheme
or other security measure provided by CNC which allows a user to access the
Software and prevents unauthorized access to the Software (the "Security
Mechanism"). The Software, any updates to the Software through purchase or due
to enrollment in an authorized software Maintenance program (including any that
you download through the Internet), and the Documentation in printed or
electronic form shall hereinafter collectively be referred to as the "Software" and are
all governed by this License.
Restrictions You may not use the Software without a Security Mechanism provided by CNC or
CNC’s suppliers. When CNC or CNC’s resellers provide you with a single-user
Security Mechanism, the Software may only be used (in executable code form only)
on a single computer to which the Security Mechanism is physically attached. In the
event CNC or CNC’s resellers provide you with a multiple-user Security Mechanism
for use over an internal network (a "Network Security Mechanism"), the Software
may be used: (a) in executable code form only; (b) only on end-user computers that
iii
are connected to the internal network to which the Network Security Mechanism is
attached; and (c) only by the number of users and accessed by the number of end-user
computers for which licenses were purchased and as further allowed by the Network
Security Mechanism. You may physically transfer the Software from one computer
equipped with a single-user Security Mechanism to another only if the Security
i1
Mechanism is included in the transfer and is installed with the new computer.
You shall not: (a) copy (except as provided below), adapt, modify the Software; (b)
publish, display, disclose or create a derivative work from the Software or any part
thereof; (c) de-compile or translate, disassemble, create or attempt to create, by reverse
engineering or otherwise, the source code form of the Software from the executable code
i2
of the Software; (d) remove any proprietary notices, labels or marks from the Software;
(e) sell, rent, lease, distribute or otherwise transfer or provide all or any part of the
Software to any person or entity without the prior written consent of CNC; (f ) use the
Software to provide outsourcing, service bureau, time sharing or other services to any
third party; or (g) sublicense, assign, delegate or otherwise transfer your rights in the
i3
Software, under the Software License Agreement or any of the related rights or
obligations for any reason without the prior written consent of CNC. You shall not
i4
circumvent, bypass, modify, reverse engineer, disassemble, disable, alter, enhance or
replicate the function of the Security Mechanism in any manner whatsoever. Any
attempt to do so shall result in automatic termination of this License without prejudice
to all other legal rights and remedies of CNC.
Copying Restrictions You may make one (1) copy of the Software for backup or archival purposes, provided
Non Transferable
that you reproduce all proprietary notices of CNC on any such copy.
You may not transfer or assign the Software or this Software License Agreement or any
rights or obligations hereunder. Any attempt to do so will automatically terminate this
i5
License without the need for notice. This termination is without prejudice to all other
legal rights and remedies of CNC.
Intellectual Property
Rights
The Software is and includes intellectual property of CNC. All associated intellectual
property rights, including, without limitation, worldwide patent, trademark, copyright
and trade secret rights, are reserved. CNC retains all right, title and interest in and
i6
copyrights to the Software, regardless of the form or media in or on which the original or
other copies may subsequently exist. This Software License Agreement shall not
constitute a sale of the Software and no title or proprietary rights to the Software are
transferred to you hereby. You acknowledge that the Software is a unique, confidential
and valuable asset of CNC, and CNC shall have the right to seek all equitable and legal
i7
redress, which may be available to it for the breach or threatened breach of this Software
License Agreement including, without limitation, injunctive relief. Unauthorized
copying of the Software or failure to comply with the above restrictions shall result in
automatic termination of this License and this Software License Agreement without
prejudice to all other legal rights and remedies of CNC. i8
Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of CNC and you
hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a
i9
degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential
information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this
Software License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact
with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with
such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such
persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of
Enforcement
the Software or defeating the Security Mechanism.
In the event you become aware that any person or entity in your employ or under your
i10
Obligations control in a manner not authorized by this Software License Agreement is using the
Software, you shall immediately use reasonable best efforts to have such unauthorized
iv • MASTERCAM X2 / Reference Guide
use of the Software immediately cease. You shall promptly notify CNC in writing of
any unauthorized use of the Software of which you become aware.
Limited Warranties CNC WARRANTS THAT THE MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS DISTRIBUTED
WILL BE FREE OF DEFECTS IN MATERIAL OR WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF
THIRTY (30) DAYS AFTER PURCHASE. THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY
EXCLUDES DEFECTS ARISING OUT OF ACCIDENT, NEGLECT, MISUSE, FAILURE
OF ELECTRIC POWER AND CAUSES OTHER THAN ORDINARY AND AUTHORIZED
USE. EXCEPT FOR THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY, THE SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED "AS IS, WITH ALL FAULTS." YOUR SOLE REMEDY AND CNC’S SOLE
OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE, AT CNC’S SOLE OPTION, REPLACEMENT
OF THE DEFECTIVE MEDIA OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE BY YOU OF THE SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK. THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE ONLY WARRANTY PROVIDED BY CNC REGARDING
THE SOFTWARE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, CNC
DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. CNC IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE ANY UPDATES TO THE SOFTWARE. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE FOLLOWING ITS PURCHASE, YOU (AND NOT
CNC, ITS DISTRIBUTOR, OR RESELLER) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION AND ANY INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Note on Documentation: While CNC makes every effort to ensure that its
Documentation for the Software is accurate and up-to-date, it cannot guarantee the
Documentation at all times represents the latest operation and functionality of the
Software. The content of all documentation, in electronic or printed form, for the
Software is provided for informational purposes only. The content of the
Documentation may be changed without notice to you. CNC expressly disclaims
any warranty or representation that the Documentation is an accurate and/or
current reflection of the Software’s operation and performance.
Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL CNC, OR ITS EMPLOYEES, SHAREHOLDERS, DISTRIBUTORS
OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, SPECIAL,
PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION)
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE
AGREEMENT OR THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF EVEN IF CNC HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. CNC’S ENTIRE LIABILITY
WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE
AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF THE
LICENSE FEE PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Indemnification You shall indemnify and hold harmless CNC, its officers, directors, employees,
resellers and agents from and against all losses, settlements, claims, actions, suits,
proceedings, judgments, awards, damages, liabilities, costs and expenses including,
without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees (collectively "Losses") which arise out
of or as a result of any breach of this Software License Agreement by you or your
employees, agents, resellers, dealers or sub-dealers and shall reimburse CNC for
any and all legal, accounting and other fees, costs and expenses reasonably incurred
by any of them in connection with investigating, mitigating or defending any such
Losses.
v
Educational Pricing If this Software was obtained through or in accordance with a CNC "Educational Pricing"
plan, option, grant, schedule or program, it may not be used by anyone, including you, to
conduct any computer aided design, computer aided drafting, computer aided
machining, or training activities that, directly or indirectly, generate or otherwise result
in monetary revenues for the benefit of any individual or any entity, other than the
i1
school that originally received this Software.
Termination This Software License Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate this
Software License Agreement at any time by returning to CNC all copies of the Software
under your control and by returning the Security Mechanism to CNC. CNC may
terminate this Software License Agreement if CNC determines, in its sole discretion, that
i2
you have violated the terms of this Software License Agreement. Upon termination of
this Software License Agreement, you agree to immediately return to CNC all copies of
the Software, return the Security Mechanism to CNC, and certify to CNC in writing that
all known copies, including backup copies, have been returned. All provisions relating to
confidentiality, proprietary rights, indemnification and non-disclosure shall survive the
i3
termination of this Software License Agreement. You may not transfer this Software to
the purchaser of any equipment on which the Software may be resident. You may not
i4
transfer this Software via liquidation, bankruptcy, auction, close of business, or any
other method that does not involve an authorized Mastercam reseller. This License is
for you alone. In the event you breach the provisions of this Section, CNC shall be
entitled to liquidated damages in the amount of Fifteen Thousand Dollars ($15,000), plus
its reasonable attorney’s fees and court costs.
General This Software License Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with
the laws of the state of Connecticut, USA without regard for Connecticut’s conflicts of law
principles. The sole jurisdiction and venue for any litigation arising from or related to
i5
this Software License Agreement or the subject matter hereof shall be in an appropriate
state or federal court located in Hartford, Connecticut. You hereby submit to the
personal jurisdiction of the US District Court for the District of Connecticut and the
Superior Court of the State of Connecticut. This Software License Agreement shall
constitute the entire agreement between you and CNC with respect to the subject matter
hereof. Any waiver or modification of this Software License Agreement shall be valid only
i6
if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this Agreement is found
invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this
U.S. Government
Restricted Rights
Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably affect the intention of the parties.
The Software provided hereunder is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer
i7
software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48
C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, the Software made available to
the United States of America, its agencies and/or instrumentalities, is provided with only
those rights set forth in this Agreement. Use, duplication or disclosure of the Software by
the government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) and (2) of
i8
the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19, as
amended, or any successor regulations thereto.
Export Restrictions You represent and warrant that you will not, without obtaining prior written
authorization from CNC and, if required, of the Bureau of Export Administration of the
United States Department of Commerce or other relevant agency of the United States
i9
Government, export or re-export, directly or indirectly, the Software from the United
States to (i) any country destination or entity to which export is restricted by the Export
Administration Regulations of the United States Department of Commerce; (ii) any
country or entity subject to sanctions administered by the Office of Foreign Assets
Control, United States Department of the Treasury; or (iii) such other countries or
i10
entities to which export is restricted by any other United States government agency. You
further agree that you are solely responsible for compliance with any import laws and
vi • MASTERCAM X2 / Reference Guide
regulations of the country of destination of a permitted export or re-export, and any

other import requirement related to a permitted export or re-export.
Exceptions to Security CNC Software programs Mastercam Design LT and Mastercam Demo as well as
Mechanism printed and electronic documentation do not require the use of Security
Requirements Mechanisms, and the provisions in this Software License Agreement relating to
Security Mechanisms do not apply to your use of such programs, provided,
however, that such provisions shall apply to your use of all other Software and
documentation provided hereunder.
Survival All provisions of this Software License Agreement relating to confidentiality, non-
disclosure, CNC’s proprietary rights, disclaimers, and limits of liability, or
indemnification by Customer shall survive termination of this License for any
reason.
Reservation of Rights All rights not expressly granted are reserved by CNC.
Trademarks Mastercam® is a registered trademark of CNC.

Windows, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Mastercam Verify is created in conjunction
with MachineWorks Ltd. Mastercam Backplot includes Copyrighted intellectual
property rights owned by NWD.
Printed in the United States of America.

Printed on recycled paper.
vii
Contents
1. Introduction to Mastercam X ......................................... 1

X Starting Mastercam ............................................................. 2
Learning about HASP and NetHASP...................................... 3
X Getting Help........................................................................... 4
Using Online Help.................................................................. 4
Mastercam X Documentation................................................ 6
Mastercam Support and Services .......................................... 9
X The Mastercam Workspace .............................................. 12
Mastercam Terms and Concepts ......................................... 13
Graphics Window ......................................................... 14
Status Bar ...................................................................... 14
Operations Manager ..................................................... 15
Toolpath, Solids, and Art Managers Tabs .................... 20
Toolbars ........................................................................ 21
Interactive Prompts ...................................................... 22
Tool Tips ....................................................................... 23
Dialog Boxes ................................................................. 23
Ribbon Bars .................................................................. 24
Ribbon Bar and Dialog Box Modality ........................... 27
Learning Mode ............................................................. 28
AutoCursor and Visual Cues ........................................ 28
General Selection Ribbon Bar ...................................... 29
Sketcher ........................................................................ 29
Live, Fixed, and Phantom Entities ............................... 30
Chaining ....................................................................... 31
Right–Click Menus ....................................................... 31
Shortcut Keys ................................................................ 33
Machine Definition / Control Definition Managers .... 33
Toolpaths ...................................................................... 34
Libraries (operations, tools, materials) ........................ 35
Function Interruption .................................................. 36
Mastercam’s Calculator ............................................... 36
viii • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
X Mastercam Menus ............................................................. 40

File Menu ............................................................................. 41
Edit Menu............................................................................. 42
View Menu............................................................................ 43
Analyze Menu....................................................................... 44
Create Menu......................................................................... 45
Solids Menu.......................................................................... 46
Xform Menu ......................................................................... 47
Machine Type Menu ............................................................ 48
Toolpaths Menu ................................................................... 49
Screen Menu ........................................................................ 50
Art Menu............................................................................... 51
Settings Menu ...................................................................... 52
Help Menu............................................................................ 53
X The Role of Machine and Control Definitions .................. 54
Toolpath Defaults................................................................. 56
Working with Post Processors.............................................. 57
X Opening and Translating Files ........................................... 58
Saving Files........................................................................... 59
Sharing Files with the Zip2Go Utility................................... 60
Opening Files with Other Applications................................ 62
X Project Manager ................................................................. 64
X Printing and Plotting ........................................................... 67
X File Tracking ........................................................................ 70
Checking the Current File .................................................... 70
Check All Tracked Files ........................................................ 71
Tracking Options.................................................................. 71
X Change Recognition............................................................ 74
Changes in Geometry Only .................................................. 74
Changes Affecting Operations ............................................. 75
Using Change Recognition .................................................. 77
2. Customizing and Configuring

Mastercam X81
X Customizing Your Workspace ........................................... 82
Customizing Toolbar Settings.............................................. 83
ix
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar Files..................... 87

Customizing Toolbar Functions .......................................... 87
Drag and Drop Visual Cues .......................................... 89
Adding Functions and Toolbars ................................... 89
Moving Toolbar Functions ........................................... 90
Deleting Toolbar Functions ......................................... 90
Renaming and Deleting Toolbars ................................ 91
Customizing Drop-down Menus ......................................... 91
Creating Drop-down Menus ........................................ 94
Renaming Drop-down Menus ..................................... 95
Deleting Drop-down Menus ........................................ 95
Adding Drop-down Menu Functions ........................... 96
Moving Menu Functions .............................................. 96
Deleting Menu Functions ............................................ 97
Adding Drop-down Menus to Toolbars ....................... 97
Adding Submenus to Drop-down Menus .................... 97
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu ............... 99
Adding Separators to Toolbars / Menus............................ 100
Creating and Saving Toolbar States................................... 101
Hiding / Showing Toolbars ........................................ 102
Using the Toolbar Right–Click Menu ......................... 106
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts ....................... 107
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping Files .. 108
Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments .............. 109
Removing Shortcut Assignments ............................... 110
X Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) ......... 111
Configuring Mastercam X .................................................. 111
Managing Configuration Files ........................................... 112
Setting Default Values ................................................ 113
Analyze ....................................................................... 115
Backplot ...................................................................... 115
CAD Settings ............................................................... 117
Chaining ..................................................................... 118
Colors .......................................................................... 119
Communications ........................................................ 120
Converters .................................................................. 121
Default Machines ....................................................... 123
Dimensions and Notes ............................................... 125
Files ............................................................................. 131
Post Dialog Defaults ................................................... 135
x • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
Printing ....................................................................... 136

Screen ......................................................................... 137
Shading ....................................................................... 141
Solids .......................................................................... 142
Start / Exit ................................................................... 143
Tolerances .................................................................. 146
Toolpaths .................................................................... 148
Toolpath Manager ...................................................... 149
Verify Interface ........................................................... 153
Wire Backplot ............................................................. 157
Merging Configuration Files .............................................. 158
Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch) ............... 159
3. Drawing and Design Basics ........................................ 161

X Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar ................................... 162
Visual Cues ......................................................................... 162
Entering Position Coordinates........................................... 164
Using FastPoint Mode to Enter Coordinates ............. 165
Customizing AutoCursor Behavior .................................... 166
Using AutoCursor Settings ......................................... 167
Using AutoCursor Override ........................................ 169
Using the Relative Ribbon Bar .................................... 171
X Selecting Entities .............................................................. 174
Using the General Selection Ribbon Bar ........................... 174
General Selection Methods ................................................ 175
Entity Selection Settings .................................................... 177
Masking ...................................................................... 177
Quick Masks ................................................................ 180
Selection Mask Examples................................................... 180
Selection Examples Select All ..................................... 181
Selection Examples Select Only ................................. 181
Entity Selection Tips .......................................................... 182
Selecting Single Entities ............................................. 182
Selecting Multiple Entities ......................................... 182
Selecting All Entities ................................................... 183
Selecting Entities as Chains ........................................ 183
Using Area Selection ................................................... 184
Ending Entity Selection .............................................. 185
Unselecting Entities ................................................... 185
xi
X Chaining ............................................................................. 186

Chaining Wireframe Geometry.......................................... 187
Chaining Solids .................................................................. 189
Wireframe Chaining Tips................................................... 189
X Setting Attributes ............................................................. 190
Setting Attributes for New Entities .................................... 191
Changing Entity Attributes ................................................ 194
Setting/Changing Color ............................................. 197
Setting the Main Level ................................................ 198
Setting Z Depth .................................................................. 198
Working in 2D and 3D Mode ............................................. 199
X Changing the Graphics Window Display ....................... 201
Zooming ............................................................................. 202
Using Viewsheets ............................................................... 203
Setting Viewports ............................................................... 204
X Setting Planes / Views / WCS ......................................... 206
Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems ............................ 206
Standard Views ........................................................... 208
Using Gview / Planes / WCS Status Bar Options ....... 209
Setting the Tplane Different from the Cplane ........... 213
Work Coordinate Systems .......................................... 215
Coordinate Systems and Machine Definitions.................. 215
Displaying Coordinate Information ........................... 216
Displaying Coordinate Axes ....................................... 217
Understanding the Top View............................................. 217
Managing Views ................................................................. 218
Right-Click Menu Options ......................................... 219
Measuring View Origins..................................................... 220
Changing View Origins ...................................................... 221
Creating Views from Selected Entities ............................... 224
Creating Views by Rotating ................................................ 225
Creating Views from Normals............................................ 226
Change the Tplane or the WCS?......................................... 227
Example 1: Changing the Tplane ............................... 228
Example 2: Changing the WCS ................................... 230
Why is there a difference? ........................................... 232
Using WCS and Tplanes to Set Up Toolpaths.................... 233
General Guidelines ..................................................... 233
xii • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
Horizontal Machining Center / Tombstoning ........... 234

Moving the Coordinate System to the Part (Machining
Flat) ............................................................................. 234
Machining Two Parts on Different Fixtures ............... 235
Lathe Coordinate Systems ................................................. 236
Lathe Tool and Machine Definitions ......................... 236
Rotating Lathe Tool Axes ............................................ 237
Lathe Cplanes ............................................................. 238
Vertical Turret Lathes ................................................. 238
X Editing Your Work ............................................................. 240
Undo / Redo ....................................................................... 240
Delete / Undelete ............................................................... 242
Deleting Duplicate Entities ........................................ 242
Delete Duplicates (simple) ......................................... 243
Delete Duplicates (advanced) .................................... 243
Delete Entity ............................................................... 243
Undeleting Entities ..................................................... 244
X Power User Tips................................................................ 245
Drafting .............................................................................. 245
Drafting Dimensions .................................................. 245
Smart Drafting Dimensions ....................................... 246
Baseline, Chained, and Ordinate Dimensions ........... 247
Working with Ordinate Dimensions .......................... 249
Non-Dimensioned Drafting Entities .......................... 252
Associating Drafting Entities with Geometry ............. 255
Defining Drafting Options .......................................... 258
Working with Levels ........................................................... 260
Setting the Main Level ................................................ 260
Using the Level Manager Right–Click Menu .............. 262
Creating Level Sets ..................................................... 262
Reusing Level Names (Save/Get) ............................... 263
Hiding Entities ................................................................... 264
Blanking Entities ................................................................ 264
Copying Entities ................................................................. 265
4. Creating Geometry ........................................................... 267

X Using the Sketcher Toolbar ............................................. 268
Editing “Live” Entities ........................................................ 269
X Creating Points .................................................................. 271
xiii
Create Point Position ......................................................... 271

Create Point Dynamic........................................................ 272
Create Point Node Points................................................... 273
Create Point Segment ........................................................ 273
Create Point Endpoints...................................................... 274
Create Point Small Arcs...................................................... 274
X Creating Lines ................................................................... 275
Create Line Endpoint ......................................................... 275
Creating Angular and Polar Lines .............................. 276
Creating Horizontal and Vertical Lines ...................... 276
Creating Multiple Lines .............................................. 277
Create Tangent Lines ................................................. 277
Create Line Closest ............................................................ 277
Create Line Bisect .............................................................. 278
Create Line Perpendicular ................................................. 278
Create Line Parallel ............................................................ 279
Create Line Tangent Through Point .................................. 280
X Creating Arcs and Circles ................................................ 281
Create Circle Center Point ................................................. 281
Create Arc Polar ................................................................. 282
Create Circle Edge Point .................................................... 283
Create Arc Endpoints ......................................................... 283
Create Arc 3 Points ............................................................. 284
Create Arc Polar Endpoints................................................ 284
Create Arc Tangent ............................................................ 285
Guidelines for Creating Arcs Tangent to Entities ....... 286
X Creating Miscellaneous Shapes ...................................... 287
Create Rectangle ................................................................ 288
Create Rectangular Shapes ................................................ 289
Base Point Method ..................................................... 290
2-Point Method .......................................................... 290
Create Polygon ................................................................... 290
Create Ellipse ..................................................................... 291
Bounding Box..................................................................... 292
Letters................................................................................. 294
Mastercam Fonts ........................................................ 294
TrueType Fonts .......................................................... 295
xiv • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
Create Spiral ....................................................................... 295

Create Helix ........................................................................ 296
Solid to 2D Profile............................................................... 297
Create Relief Groove .......................................................... 298
Create Bolt Circle ............................................................... 301
Create Stair Geometry........................................................ 301
Tips for routing stair stringers .................................... 304
Create Door Geometry ....................................................... 305
X Creating Fillets and Chamfers ......................................... 308
Fillet Entities ...................................................................... 308
Fillet Chains........................................................................ 309
Chamfer Entities ................................................................ 309
Chamfer Chains ................................................................. 310
X Creating Splines ................................................................ 312
Create Manual Spline......................................................... 312
Create Automatic Spline .................................................... 313
Using the Spline End Conditions Ribbon Bar.................... 314
Create Curves Spline .......................................................... 315
Create Blended Spline........................................................ 315
X Creating Curves................................................................. 316
Create Curve on One Edge ................................................. 317
Create Curve on All Edges .................................................. 317
Create Constant Parameter Curve ..................................... 318
Create Flowline Curve........................................................ 318
Create Dynamic Curve ....................................................... 319
Create Curve Slice .............................................................. 319
Create Surface Curve.......................................................... 320
Create Part Line Curve ....................................................... 320
Create Curve at Intersection .............................................. 321
X Creating Primitives ........................................................... 323
Guidelines for Working with Primitives............................. 323
Create Block ....................................................................... 324
Create Cone........................................................................ 325
Create Cylinder .................................................................. 326
Create Sphere ..................................................................... 327
Create Torus ....................................................................... 328
xv
5. Modifying Geometry ....................................................... 331

X Editing Entities .................................................................. 332
Trim / Break Submenu ...................................................... 332
Trim / Break / Extend ................................................. 333
Trim Many .................................................................. 336
Break Two Pieces ........................................................ 337
Break at Intersection .................................................. 337
Break Many Pieces ...................................................... 338
Break Drafting into Lines ........................................... 338
Break Circles ............................................................... 339
Close Arc ..................................................................... 339
Join Entities ........................................................................ 339
Modify Spline ..................................................................... 340
Convert NURBS.................................................................. 340
Simplify .............................................................................. 341
Set Normal .................................................................. 341
Change Normal .......................................................... 342
X Transforming Entities ....................................................... 343
Assigning New Attributes to Transformed Entities ........... 345
Xform Translate ................................................................. 345
Xform Translate 3D ............................................................ 347
Xform Mirror ...................................................................... 348
Xform Rotate ...................................................................... 349
Xform Scale ........................................................................ 351
Xform Offset ....................................................................... 352
Xform Offset Contour......................................................... 353
Xform Project ..................................................................... 355
Xform Rectangular Array ................................................... 357
Xform Roll .......................................................................... 358
Xform Drag......................................................................... 360
Xform Stretch ..................................................................... 360
Stretching Entities ...................................................... 361
Xform STL........................................................................... 362
Xform Geometry Nesting ................................................... 363
X Analyzing Entities ............................................................. 365
Analyze Entity Properties................................................... 366
Analyze Position................................................................. 367
xvi • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
Analyze Distance ................................................................ 368

Area / Volume submenu .................................................... 369
Analyze 2D Area .......................................................... 369
Analyze Surface Area .................................................. 369
Analyze Solid Properties ............................................. 370
Analyze Chain .................................................................... 370
Analyze Contour................................................................. 372
Analyze Angle ..................................................................... 373
Analyze Dynamic ............................................................... 373
Database / Number Submenu ........................................... 374
Analyze Number ......................................................... 374
Analyze Database ....................................................... 375
Test Surfaces and Solids Submenu .................................... 376
Analyze Test Surfaces ................................................. 376
Analyze Check Solids .................................................. 377
Changing Entity Attributes ................................................ 377
6. Toolpath Types .................................................................. 381

X Mill and Router Toolpaths ................................................ 383
Contour Toolpaths ............................................................. 384
Chamfer Contour Toolpaths ...................................... 385
Ramp Contour Toolpaths .......................................... 386
Remachining Contour Toolpaths: .............................. 386
Oscillating Contour Toolpaths ................................... 387
Onion Skin Contour Toolpaths: ................................. 388
Creating Tabs for Contour Toolpaths ........................ 388
Editing tabs ................................................................. 393
Circle Toolpaths ................................................................. 394
Circle Mill Toolpaths .................................................. 395
Helix Bore Toolpaths .................................................. 396
Slot mill toolpaths ....................................................... 397
Thread Mill Toolpaths ................................................ 397
Drill Toolpaths ................................................................... 399
Choosing a Drill Cycle ................................................ 400
Selecting Drill Points .................................................. 401
Sorting Drill Points ..................................................... 403
Editing Drill Points ..................................................... 404
Customizing Drilling Operations ............................... 405
Feature-based Drilling ............................................... 407
xvii
Pocket Toolpaths ............................................................... 409

Wireframe Toolpaths ......................................................... 410
Ruled Toolpaths ......................................................... 411
Lofted Toolpaths ........................................................ 412
Revolved Toolpaths .................................................... 412
Coons Patch Toolpaths .............................................. 413
Swept 2D Toolpaths ................................................... 414
Swept 3D Toolpaths ................................................... 414
Specialized Toolpaths ........................................................ 416
Face Toolpaths ........................................................... 416
Point Toolpaths .......................................................... 416
2D High Speed Peel Mill Toolpaths ........................... 417
Saw Toolpaths ............................................................ 419
Manual Entry Operations ........................................... 421
X Additional Router Toolpaths ............................................ 422
Block Drilling Toolpaths .................................................... 423
Filtering drilling points by depth ............................... 425
Drilling blind holes with the block drilling toolpath .. 426
Working with Aggregate Heads.......................................... 429
X Surface Toolpaths ............................................................. 432
Standard Surface Toolpaths............................................... 432
Surface Rough and Finish Parallel Toolpaths ............ 433
Surface Rough and Finish Radial Toolpaths .............. 433
Surface Rough and Finish Project Toolpaths ............. 434
Surface Rough and Finish Flowline Toolpaths .......... 434
Surface Rough and Finish Contour toolpaths ............ 434
Surface Rough Restmill Toolpaths ............................. 435
Surface Rough Pocket Toolpaths ............................... 436
Surface Rough Plunge Toolpaths ............................... 437
Surface Finish Parallel Steep Toolpaths ..................... 437
Surface Finish Shallow Toolpaths .............................. 438
Surface Finish Pencil Toolpaths ................................. 438
Surface Finish Leftover Toolpaths ............................. 439
Surface Finish Blend Toolpaths ................................. 439
Surface Finish Scallop Toolpaths ............................... 440
Surface High Speed Toolpaths........................................... 444
Answers to surface high speed toolpath FAQs ........... 445
Types of High Speed Toolpaths ................................. 447
Creating Surface High Speed Toolpaths .................... 467
Creating Cutting Passes .............................................. 476
xviii • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
Using the Transition pages ......................................... 494

Linking the cutting passes .......................................... 504
Other Parameter Pages ............................................... 513
X Multiaxis Toolpaths .......................................................... 523
Standard Multiaxis Toolpaths............................................ 523
Selecting Geometry for 5-axis Toolpaths ................... 525
5-axis Curve Toolpaths ............................................... 527
5-axis Drill Toolpaths ................................................. 527
5-axis Swarf Toolpaths ............................................... 528
5-axis Multisurface Toolpaths .................................... 529
5-axis Flowline Toolpaths .......................................... 531
5-axis Port Toolpaths .................................................. 532
4-axis Rotary Toolpaths .............................................. 533
Advanced Multiaxis Toolpaths .......................................... 535
Advanced Interface and Customized Interfaces ........ 535
Creating an Advanced Multiaxis Toolpath ................. 537
Advanced Multiaxis parameter tabs ........................... 539
X Lathe Toolpaths................................................................. 578
General Turning Toolpaths................................................ 578
Lathe Face Toolpaths ................................................. 579
Lathe Rough Toolpaths .............................................. 579
Lathe Finish Toolpaths ............................................... 581
Lathe Groove Toolpaths ............................................. 582
Lathe Drill Toolpaths .................................................. 583
Manual Entry .............................................................. 585
Lathe Point Toolpaths ................................................ 587
Lathe Thread Toolpaths ............................................. 588
Cutoff Toolpaths ......................................................... 590
Quick and Canned Toolpaths ..................................... 591
Mill / Turn Toolpaths......................................................... 593
C-axis Contour Toolpath Types ................................. 594
C-axis Drill Toolpath Types ........................................ 594
C-axis Contour Toolpaths .......................................... 594
C-axis Drill Toolpaths ................................................. 596
Using the CView Utility .............................................. 598
Miscellaneous Operations ................................................. 600
Stock Transfer Operations .......................................... 601
Stock Advance Operations ......................................... 602
Stock Flip Operations ................................................. 603
Chuck Operations ....................................................... 604
xix
Tailstock Operations .................................................. 605

Steady Rest Operations .............................................. 606
X Nesting Toolpaths............................................................. 608
Nesting Tips and Guidelines.............................................. 611
X Engraving Toolpaths ......................................................... 612
Engraving Tips and Guidelines.......................................... 613
7. Working with Surfaces and Solids.......................... 615

X Displaying Surfaces and Solids ....................................... 616
Shading Settings................................................................. 618
Entity Selection .......................................................... 618
Colors .......................................................................... 619
Parameters .................................................................. 620
Lighting ....................................................................... 620
X Surface Creation ............................................................... 622
Surface Representation...................................................... 623
Maximum Surface Deviation ............................................. 624
Base Surface ....................................................................... 624
Surface Display .................................................................. 625
Surface Drawing Density ............................................ 625
Highlighting Surface Backs ........................................ 626
Creating Ruled or Lofted Surfaces ..................................... 626
Creating Revolved Surfaces ............................................... 627
Creating Offset Surfaces..................................................... 628
Creating Swept Surfaces .................................................... 629
Creating Net Surfaces ........................................................ 630
Guidelines for Creating Net Surfaces ......................... 630
Creating Fence Surfaces..................................................... 631
Creating Draft Surfaces ...................................................... 632
Creating Extruded Surfaces ............................................... 633
Filleting Surfaces................................................................ 634
Fillet Surfaces to Surfaces ........................................... 635
Fillet Surfaces to Curves ............................................. 636
Fillet Surfaces to a Plane ............................................ 636
Trimming Surfaces............................................................. 637
Trimming Surfaces to Surfaces .................................. 638
Trimming Surfaces to Curves ..................................... 638
Trimming Surfaces to a Plane .................................... 639
xx • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
Extending Trimmed Surface Edges.................................... 639

Extending Surfaces............................................................. 640
Creating a Surface from a Solid Face ................................. 641
Creating a Surface from a Flat Boundary........................... 641
Filling Holes with Surfaces................................................. 643
Guidelines for Filling Holes in a Trimmed Surface .... 643
Removing Boundaries from Trimmed Surfaces ................ 645
Splitting Surfaces................................................................ 645
Untrimming Surfaces......................................................... 646
Blending Surfaces............................................................... 646
Creating Two-surface and Three-surface Blends ...... 646
Creating a Three-fillet Blend ...................................... 648
X Solids.................................................................................. 650
Creating a Solid Model: Process Overview......................... 651
Solids Associativity............................................................. 652
Selecting Solids .................................................................. 655
Combining Solid Operations ............................................. 656
Working with Solid Functions............................................ 657
Solid Extrude .............................................................. 657
Solid Revolve .............................................................. 660
Solid Sweep ................................................................. 661
Solid Loft ..................................................................... 662
Solid Fillet ................................................................... 664
Solid Face-Face Fillet .................................................. 664
Chamfer Functions ..................................................... 666
Solid Shell ................................................................... 668
Solid Trim ................................................................... 669
Solid Thicken .............................................................. 669
Remove Solid Faces .................................................... 670
Draft Solid Faces ......................................................... 671
Boolean Operations .................................................... 675
Solid Find Features ..................................................... 676
Solid From Surfaces .................................................... 678
Layout ......................................................................... 679
Solids Manager................................................................... 682
Checking Solid Models....................................................... 684
Suppress Solid Operations ......................................... 684
Roll Back a Solid ......................................................... 686
Viewing and Naming Solid Models.................................... 686
xxi
Rename Solids and Solid Operations ......................... 687

Highlight Solid Operations ......................................... 687
Identify a Solid Operation Based on its Geometry ..... 688
Expand and Contract Solid Operation Details ........... 688
Editing Solid Models .......................................................... 689
Edit Solid Parameters ................................................. 689
Edit Solid Geometry ................................................... 690
Edit Solid Attributes ................................................... 691
Delete Solids and Solid Operations ............................ 692
Regenerate Solids ....................................................... 692
Duplicate Solids ......................................................... 694
Change the Order of Solid Operations ....................... 694
8. Setting Up Toolpaths ...................................................... 695

X Machining Process Overview ......................................... 696
X Choosing a Machine and Control Definition .................. 697
X Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files ....................... 700
Using Open dialog box options ......................................... 700
Previewing a File ......................................................... 702
Switching Units of Measure ....................................... 702
Using the Places Bar........................................................... 703
Opening and Importing Files............................................. 704
Merging Pattern Files ......................................................... 706
X Setting Machine Group Properties.................................. 709
Working with the Toolpath Manager................................. 710
Using the Insert Arrow ....................................................... 712
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups .............. 714
Renaming Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups ... 716
Editing Machine Group Properties.................................... 717
Files Tab ..................................................................... 718
Tool Settings Tab ........................................................ 722
Stock Setup Tab .......................................................... 727
Safety Zone Tab .......................................................... 730
9. Working with Toolpaths ............................................... 733

X Toolpath Chaining Techniques ........................................ 734
Working with Open and Closed Chains............................. 735
Chaining Direction ............................................................ 736
xxii • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
Chaining Contour Toolpaths ............................................. 736

Adding to a Chained Contour (Mastercam Lathe) ..... 737
Synchronizing Chains ........................................................ 737
Using the Chain Manager .................................................. 740
Chain Manager Right–Click Menu Options ............... 742
X Selecting Tools .................................................................. 744
Selecting a Tool .................................................................. 744
Working with the Tool Selection dialog box .............. 747
X Using the Toolpath Parameters Right-Click Menu ........ 749
X Editing Toolpath Defaults ................................................. 751
Creating and using machine-specific .defaults files.......... 754
Working with HST defaults ................................................ 756
Configuring how Mastercam applies HST defaults ... 757
X Managing Toolpath Operations ....................................... 760
Using Toolpath Manager Icons.......................................... 762
Displaying Toolpaths ......................................................... 765
Guidelines for Working with Operations ........................... 766
X Editing Operations............................................................. 767
Using the Toolpath Editor.................................................. 767
Guidelines for Editing Toolpaths ............................... 769
Editing a Toolpath Point ............................................ 770
Adding a Point to a Toolpath ...................................... 771
Moving a Point in a Toolpath ..................................... 771
Deleting a Toolpath Section ....................................... 772
Editing Selected Operations............................................... 773
Editing Common Parameters ..................................... 774
Changing the NC File Name ....................................... 777
Changing Program Numbers ..................................... 777
Renumbering Tools .................................................... 778
Renumbering Work Offsets ........................................ 779
Reversing Toolpaths ................................................... 780
Recalculating Feeds / Speeds ..................................... 780
X Backplot and Verify........................................................... 781
Backplotting Operations .................................................... 781
Verifying Operations .......................................................... 784
Running the Verification ............................................ 785
Configuring Verification Parameters ......................... 787
Tool Simulation During Verification .......................... 788
xxiii
Using STL comparison ............................................... 789

X Post Processing ................................................................ 792
Post Processors and Control / Machine Definitions . 793
About PST files ............................................................ 794
About NCI Files .......................................................... 795
Post Processing Toolpath Operations ........................ 797
X Power User Tips ............................................................... 799
Batch Processing Toolpath Operations ............................. 799
Selecting Files for Batch Processing ........................... 800
Selecting Operations from a Batch File ...................... 800
Selecting Batch Operations from Mastercam Files .... 801
Tagging Operations for Batch Processing .................. 801
Running Batch Jobs .................................................... 801
Reviewing Batch Processing Log Files ....................... 802
Importing Operations ........................................................ 802
Guidelines for importing toolpath operations ........... 803
Exporting Operations......................................................... 803
Transforming Operations .................................................. 804
Selecting Operations to Transform ............................ 806
Choosing Transformation Types ............................... 806
Organizing Transform Operations ............................. 807
Associating Work Offsets ............................................ 807
Trimming Toolpaths .......................................................... 807
Tips for Trimming Toolpaths ..................................... 808
10.Machine and Control Definitions.............................. 811

X Understanding Machine and Control Definitions........... 812
Using Machine and Control Definitions ........................... 813
Machine Definition Components .............................. 815
Control Definition Functions ..................................... 818
Post Processor Sections .............................................. 820
Differences in Toolpath/Machine Group (local)
and Disk (master) Copies ........................................... 821
X Managing Machine and Control Definitions .................. 823
Working with Machine Definitions ................................... 823
Using the Machine Definition Manager .................... 824
Machine definition requirements .............................. 828
Working with Default Machine Definitions ............... 831
Selecting a Different Machine Definition .................. 836
xxiv • Mastercam X2 / Reference Guide
Selecting a different .control file ................................ 838

Selecting a Different Post Processor ........................... 841
Locking machine and control definitions .................. 845
Working with Control Definitions ..................................... 847
Using the Control Definition Manager ...................... 848
Editing Post Text ......................................................... 853
Editing Miscellaneous Values ..................................... 861
Adding posts ............................................................... 862
Control Definition Properties ..................................... 869
Index ....................................................................................... 897

Introduction to
Mastercam X
This chapter covers the following topics:
Starting Mastercam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
The Mastercam Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
Mastercam Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 40
The Role of Machine and Control Definitions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54
Opening and Translating Files . . . . . . . . . . . page 58
Project Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 64
Printing and Plotting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 67
File Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 70
Change Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 74
Welcome to Mastercam X! Mastercam X is a powerful CAD/
CAM application you use to design parts and create complete
machining operations. To help you make the most of
Mastercam X, use this guide to:
Get a basic orientation to the interface and functions.
Customize and configure Mastercam for optimum
efficiency.
Understand the fundamentals of using Mastercam to
design and cut parts.
Power User Tips, located at the end the “Drawing and Design
Basics” and “Working with Toolpaths” chapters, go beyond the
basics and introduce you to using advanced Mastercam
features.
2 • MASTERCAM X2/ Reference Guide
Starting Mastercam
This document assumes that you have successfully installed
Mastercam X, have completed the necessary post-installation
procedures, and are ready to begin using Mastercam to design and
machine parts.
Note: For information on installing Mastercam (including using

Mastercam Launcher to set the startup options for a particular
seat of Mastercam), see the Mastercam X2 Installation Guide
included with your software, or contact your local Reseller.
In this section, you will learn about:

Starting up Mastercam
Troubleshooting HASP and NetHASP issues (page 3)
IMPORTANT: If you have upgraded from a previous

Mastercam version, see the Mastercam X Transition Guide for
important information on converting Mastercam files, libraries,
and post processors.
Although you access Mastercam from a single executable, it is actually

a customized suite of modular products, each of which is optimized
for a specific type of machining. The Mastercam family of products
includes Mastercam Design®, Mastercam Router®, Mastercam Mill®,
Mastercam Lathe®, Mastercam Art®, and Mastercam Wire®. Separate
add-on modules are available for Mastercam Solids®, Mastercam
Nesting®, and Mastercam Engraving®.
Note: This document does not include information on Mastercam

Wire and Mastercam Art. For more information, see the PDF
documents “Mastercam X2 Wire Getting Started Guide” and
“Mastercam X2 Art Tutorial,” located in the \Documentation
directory of your Mastercam installation.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Starting Mastercam • 3
X To start Mastercam:
1 Double–click the Mastercam icon on your Windows®
Desktop:
1
Or select Mastercam from the Windows Program menu. By
default, Mastercam starts up in the Design application.
2 To open a machine-specific Mastercam product, such as Mill,
Router, Lathe, or Wire, select a machine definition from the
Machine Type menu.
Note: You can also switch between Mastercam products by

choosing certain functions from the drop-down menus or toolbars,
or by selecting an operation from the Toolpath Manager.
Learning about HASP and NetHASP

Mastercam uses two types of licensing: single-user licensing and
network licensing. A single-user license requires a special piece of
hardware called a HASP (sometimes called a dongle or SIM) attached
to the parallel or USB port on your computer. If you receive the
following message when starting Mastercam, this component is either
missing or not configured properly:
Refer to the Mastercam X2 Installation Guide or contact your local

Reseller for assistance.
Network licensing requires a NetHASP to be installed on a computer
on your network. If any of the following messages display when
starting Mastercam, contact your network administrator for
assistance:
Error checking out a [Mastercam product name] license. No
licenses have been purchased for this product.
Active NetHASP server not found.
All available licenses are in use.
Getting Help
Mastercam X provides you with comprehensive context-sensitive Help
that is always just one click away. This embedded, compiled HTML
Help system is located in the Mastercam \Help directory. You can
access it from any dialog box or ribbon bar, and from the Mastercam
Help menu.
To open Help to its default topic, choose Help, Contents
from the Mastercam menu, or press [Alt+H].
To open context-sensitive help for any dialog box
or ribbon bar, click the help button to open a
related help topic.
Topics in this section include:
Using Online Help
Mastercam X Documentation (page 6)
Mastercam Support and Services (page 9)
Using Online Help

Tabbed dialogs deliver help on dialog boxes and ribbon bars. The
“About” tab provides an overview of the function and may include
guidelines for its use. This tab also lists any shortcut keys you can use
and offers links to related topics.
The How do I get here? link expands into text that provides
navigational information.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Getting Help • 5
Click the Field / Button definitions tab to access definitions for all of
the dialog box fields or ribbon bar buttons.
1
The Field / Button definitions tab provides pop-up topics of dialog

box or ribbon bar controls.
Some topics include drop-down menus that provide links to related

topics. Hover the mouse over the menu to view the links.
Every topic provides an e-mail link you can use to contact CNC
Software Technical Documentation for feedback. Use this link to tell us
about the kind of information you need in our Help and print
documentation. We look forward to hearing from you!
Mastercam X Documentation
The \Documentation folder in your Mastercam installation includes a
suite of documentation tools, training videos, and other resources you
can use to make the most of your Mastercam experience. These
publications and movies are designed to get you up and running
quickly, and to provide ongoing education and support as you work
with basic and advanced features.
In addition to a PDF version of the Mastercam X2 Getting Started Guide
you are currently reading, here are just some of the materials you will
find your Mastercam X \Documentation folder.
Mastercam X2 Installation Guide (printed document and
PDF): Provides detailed instructions for installing HASP and
NetHASP devices, and Mastercam X. It also includes
information on installing upgrades and update codes, on

using Mastercam Launcher to set startup options, and on
troubleshooting. 1
Mastercam X2 Quick Reference card (printed document and
PDF): Provides a graphical summary of Mastercam X key
features and functions.
Mastercam X2 Transition Guide (PDF): Assists Mastercam
Version 9 users with the process of migrating their settings,
libraries, and parts to Mastercam X, and provides guidelines
for Mastercam X users who are updating to Mastercam X2.
Includes PDF checklists to use as migration worksheets.
Mastercam Version 9 to X Function Map (PDF): Maps all
functions available in Mastercam Version 9 to a Mastercam X
equivalent.
Mastercam X2 Reference Guide (PDF): Supplements the
Help and other Mastercam product documentation. Includes
comprehensive conceptual information, detailed overviews,
examples, definition of terms, and workflow-related
information on using Mastercam X and its functions. To open,
choose Help, Reference Guide.
Mastercam X2 Post Parameters (PDF): Describes changes to
the Mastercam X post processors. It introduces the new
parameters for machine definition, control definition, and
machine group properties, and presents examples on how to
access them. It includes a complete list of all the post
parameters available in Mastercam X plus a transition map of
changes to Version 9 parameters.
Mastercam X2 Wire Getting Started Guide (PDF): Provides
information on how to get started with Mastercam X Wire,
including discussions about wire geometry, machine and
control definitions, and the many supported wire toolpaths.
Mastercam X2 Art Tutorial (PDF): Offers process and
functional overviews, and step-by-step tutorials that illustrate
how to create and cut parts with Mastercam X2 Art.
Mastercam X2 Advanced Multiaxis Tutorial (PDF):
Introduces the new advanced multiaxis toolpath strategies.
Two detailed tutorial examples provide a step-by-step
introduction to the key features and concepts. Then a series of
application examples discuss how to apply them to specific
parts and machining situations. Includes sample parts.
Notes:
• You must install Adobe® Reader® (version 5.0 or higher) before
you can view or print PDF documentation.
• All PDF documents are available from the Mastercam X
\Documentation directory.
• Sample part projects for use with Mastercam X tutorial PDFs
are included in subfolders, such as
\Documentation\ExampleParts, and \Documentation\Art
tutorial parts.
X To view a PDF document:

1 From the Mastercam menu, choose Help, Reference Guide.
Or, use Windows Explorer to navigate to your Mastercam
\Documentation folder, and then double–click a PDF file in
the file list.
This automatically opens the Adobe Acrobat Reader to display
the document.
TIP: To display the PDF document in its own window, rather

than in a Web browser window, deselect the option to Display
PDF in browser in the Reader’s Internet preferences page. For
more information on setting this and other preferences, refer to
the Reader Help.
2 To navigate through the document, use the bookmark list in

the leftmost pane of the Reader window, or use the Search
functions.
3 To view information, scroll through the pages using the
mouse wheel or the scroll bar on the right side of the Reader
window.
You can view PDF documents in different page layouts. This affects
how some Reader functions work, and also affects links in the PDF
document. To change the layout, choose View, Page Layout and one
of the following options:
Single Page—Displays all the text on a page of the PDF document
(with the exception of graphics or text that is part of a graphic).
Continuous—Arranges the pages in a continuous vertical column.
Facing—Arranges pages side by side in a one or two page layout.
Continuous-Facing—Arranges the pages side by side, with the first

page displayed on the right.
PDF Guidelines
1
Embedded links in the document are indicated when
the hand icon changes to a pointer as you move the
cursor over text that contains a link.
You can expand and collapse the Bookmark list. To expand a
bookmark (show subtopics), click on its plus symbol (+). To
collapse it (hide subtopics), click the minus symbol (–).
If the Reader toolbar does not appear, press the [F8] key to
display it.
To search for a word or phrase, click the binocular icon
to begin a search.
Note: For more information on working with PDFs, refer to the

Reader Help.
Mastercam Support and Services

Use the following Web sites to find information on Mastercam:
www.emastercam.com Mastercam global user forum
www.mastercam.com CNC Software, Inc. corporate Web

site
www.mastercamedu.com CNC Software, Inc. Educational

Division Web site
For assistance with installing Mastercam, its SIM or NetHASP, or to

obtain more information on using Mastercam, contact your local
Mastercam Reseller. If your Reseller is unavailable, you can call CNC
Technical Support Services Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m.–5:30
p.m., USA Eastern Standard Time.
When calling CNC Software for technical support, please follow these
guidelines:
Be sure you have already tried to contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
Provide the serial number of your SIM HASP or NetHASP.
Be ready to describe the problem in detail. Write down what

happened, particularly if you cannot call immediately after
the problem occurs.
Be in front of your computer when you call.
If possible, try to duplicate the problem before calling. Our
Support Services technician may require you to duplicate the
problem while you are on the phone.
When you call, have ready a complete description of your
hardware, including your operating system (OS), central
processing unit (CPU), graphics card and settings, and
memory.
You can also leave a message for CNC Support Services twenty-four
hours a day, seven days a week via our e-mail or Web site addresses.
When sending e-mail, please include:
The serial number of your SIM HASP or NetHASP.
Telephone number and contact information where you can be
reached.
Files required to reproduce an issue, such as .MCX and post
files.
TIP: Use Mastercam’s Zip2Go utility to gather Mastercam part

data into a compressed .Z2G file. This utility is available from
the Mastercam Help menu, making it easy to provide your
Reseller or CNC Support Services with a file attachment that
contains the information they need. Zip2Go scans the machine
groups in your current part file and captures information such
as your Mastercam configuration, machine definition, and post
files. For more information on using Zip2Go, please refer to the
Mastercam Help.
Important Contact Information 1

Address CNC Software, Inc.
671 Old Post Road
Tolland, Connecticut, 06084-9970
USA
Phone (860) 875-5006
Fax (860) 872-1565
FTP Address ftp://ftp.mastercam.com
Internet Address http://www.mastercam.com
E-mail support@mastercam.com
The Mastercam Workspace

Use this section to learn about:
Mastercam Interface Elements
Mastercam Terms and Concepts (page 13)
Figure 1-1: Mastercam interface element overview
AutoCursor General Selection Function Interactive Graphics

Title bar Menu bar ribbon bar ribbon bar ribbon bar prompt window Toolbar
Prompt area Toolpath, Solids, and Art Managers Status bar Vertically docked tool bar and most
(Operations Manager pane) recently used (MRU) function bar
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 13
Mastercam Terms and Concepts

In this section, you will learn more about the terms identified in 1
“Figure 1-1: Mastercam interface element overview” on page 12, and
fundamental Mastercam concepts and features, including:
Graphics Window Status Bar

(page 14) (page 14)
Operations Manager Toolpath, Solids, and

(page 15) Art Managers Tabs
(page 20)
Toolbars Interactive Prompts

(page 21) (page 22)
Tool Tips Dialog Boxes

(page 23) (page 23)
Ribbon Bars Learning Mode

(page 24) (page 28)
AutoCursor and General Selection

Visual Cues (page 28) Ribbon Bar (page 29)
Sketcher Live, Fixed, and

(page 29) Phantom Entities
(page 30)
Chaining Right–Click Menus

(page 31) (page 31)
Shortcut Keys Machine Definition /

(page 33) Control Definition
Managers (page 33)
Toolpaths Libraries (operations,

(page 34) tools, materials)
(page 35)
Function Mastercam’s Calculator

Interruption (page 36)
(page 36)
Graphics Window
This is the main workspace in Mastercam where you view, create, and
modify geometry, drafting entities, and toolpaths.
Figure 1-2: Mastercam graphics window
Note: Mastercam is configured to display numeric data using a

default Metric or Inch base unit of measure. Mastercam makes it
easy to switch between these measurement systems whenever the
part data requires the change. For more information, see “Setting
Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)” on page 111 and
“Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch)” on page 159.
Status Bar
The Status bar appears along the bottom of the Mastercam window.
You use its functions to edit the current settings for entity colors,
attributes, levels, and groups, and to define the view and orientation of
entities in the graphics window.
Figure 1-3: Mastercam Status bar
Note: You can also access Status bar functions from various
Mastercam menus and toolbars.
To customize the Status bar by changing the order in which the fields
appear or by removing options, click the Status bar configure option
(!). This opens the Customize Status bar dialog box where you can
change the Status bar layout or reset it to the default setting.
1
TIP: Unless you select entities prior to making changes,
changing attributes, views, and planes applies only to the
entities and toolpaths you create; existing entities and toolpaths
retain the attributes that were effective when they were created.
You can use the Status bar right–click and Analyze menu
functions to change attributes associated with existing entities.
For more information, see “Changing Entity Attributes” on
page 377.
Operations Manager
The Operations Manager (shown below) houses the Toolpath
Manager, Solids Manager, and Art Manager. It is located to the left of
the graphics window.
Mastercam displays the Operations Manager by default. To hide it,

choose View, Toggle Operations Manager. Use the Toggle Operations
Manager command to hide and display the Operations Manager as
you work. You can also resize the width of the pane by clicking and
dragging the right edge.
The display/hide and resize settings remain constant from session to
session. In other words, if you hide the Operations Manager and close
Mastercam, the next time you open Mastercam, the pane will still be
hidden. The Operations Manager will also display whichever tab was
active last (Toolpath Manager, Solids Manager, or Art Manager).
Notes:
• When your mouse is over the Operations Manager, the
Operations Manager becomes active. When you move your
mouse back over the graphics window, then that window
becomes active and the Operations Manager is inactive.
• You can dock, undock, re-size, and close the Operations
Manager. See the following “Docking/undocking, re-sizing, and
closing Operations Manager” section for additional
information.
• Ιn the Operations Manager, you can customize the display of
background colors, line colors, and font styles and colors. See
“Customizing the Operations Manager” on page 18 for
additional information.
Docking/undocking, re-sizing, and closing Operations Manager

Mastercam allows you to move the Operations Manager to a different
location, resize its window, and close or re-open it whenever you want.
By default, the Operations Manger is docked to the left side of the
graphics window. You can dock it on the right side of the graphics
window (shown below) by grabbing its title bar and dragging it over to
the right until it “snaps” into place.
You can also undock the Operations Manager, “float” (move) it around
on your screen, place it wherever you want to, and re-size it. This is
especially useful if you are working with a dual-monitor setup, where
you can move the Operations Manager to the second monitor. On the
second monitor, you can enlarge the Operations Manager to improve
your working conditions, while leaving the entire graphics window free
for drawing.
To re-locate the Operations Manager, click its title bar (shown below),
1
drag it to the location you want, and drop it.
Below is an example of what the Operations Manager looks like when

it has been undocked and re-sized.
You can close the Operations Manager by clicking the Close button in
the upper right corner.
- Close button on docked Operations Manager
- Close button on undocked Operations Manager
To open the Operations Manager again, choose View, Toggle
Operations Manager.
Your settings for the Operations Manager are modal between

Mastercam sessions. This means that Mastercam “remembers” and
maintains the position and size of the Operations Manager, even if you
close and re-open Mastercam.
Customizing the Operations Manager

In the Operations Manager, you can customize the display of:
Background colors
Line colors
Font styles and colors
These options can be set differently for each tab (Toolpath Manager,
Solids Manager, Art Manager).
You can do this by clicking the Options button (shown to the left) and
using the Options drop-down menu as shown below:
Choose Background color to open the Windows Color dialog box

where you can select a color as your new Operations Manager
background color (as shown below).
Choose Line color to open the Windows Color dialog box where you
can select a different color for the branch lines in the tree hierarchy (as
shown below). 1
Choose Font to open the Windows Font dialog box where you can
change the font, its size, color, and style of the text in the Operations
Manager (as shown below).
Select Restore Default Attributes from the drop-down menu to

restore the Operations Manager to its default display at any time.
Select Help in the Operations Manager drop-down menu to access
Help specific to the active tab (Toolpath Manager, Solids Manager, or
Art Manager).
Toolpath, Solids, and Art Managers Tabs

The Toolpath Manager, Solids Manager, and Art Manager tabs appear
in the Operations Manager pane, a central location where you can
manage all the elements of the current job.
Figure 1-4: Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager / Art Manager
(Operations Manager pane)
You can show or hide the Operations Manager pane by choosing the
View, Toggle Operations Manager function. Hiding the Operations
Manager expands the graphics window view to fit the full width of the
Mastercam window.
TIP: Use standard Windows methods to resize the Operations

Manager pane, the graphics window, or the entire Mastercam
window, as necessary.
The Toolpath Manager tab is where you define setup

parameters, such as file defaults, tool settings, stock setup,
and safety zones. You also use this tab to view, organize, and
edit machine groups, toolpath groups, and operations. A
toolpath operation consolidates all the information needed to
create a particular toolpath.
If Mastercam Solids is installed, when you work with a solid
model, the Solids Manager tab lists each solid in the current
file. You can expand the tree structure of a solid to view its
history (a list of the operations that were performed to
construct the solid) and its toolpaths.
If your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Art, the

Art Manager tab displays a history tree—a hierarchical
representation of the Art base surface and surface operation
elements that make up your Art model. It lists all Art base
1
surfaces in the Art model and, for each Art base surface, lists
all Art operations and their current status (clean, dirty,
deleted).
Toolbars
Toolbars are collections of functions represented by icons. Arrows in
the toolbar represent a submenu of functions you can view and select
in a drop-down list.
Figure 1-5: Example: Toolbar
Choose a function in the toolbar by clicking it. Mastercam provides a

set of default toolbars to help you get started, but you can customize
them to meet your unique needs. In the Settings, Customize function,
you can choose to show, hide, or redefine toolbars, create completely
new ones, and define a personalized right-mouse button menu that
contains the functions you use most often. For more information, see
“Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)” on page 111.
Interactive Prompts
Some functions use interactive prompts. Prompts appear as small text
boxes in the graphics window after you select a function. They guide
you through the necessary actions required to complete the function.
For example, the following prompt appears when you choose the
Create line endpoint function from the Create, Line menu:
After you select an endpoint in the graphics window, the first prompt is
replaced with another instruction:
In this example, as you create additional lines, the prompts continue

to appear in succession until you choose to exit the function.
TIPS:
• You can drag a prompt to any position in the Mastercam
window. Subsequent prompts appear in the new position.
• You can change the size of the interactive prompt by scaling
it up or down. To do this, position the cursor in the prompt,
right–click, and choose Small, Medium, or Large.
Tool Tips
Tool tips display when you hover the mouse over a function icon or a 1
button in a dialog box or ribbon bar. They help you to identify the
function or option.
Figure 1-6: Example: Tool tips
Button Ribbon bar icon
Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes appear when you must enter information to complete a
selected function. Many dialog boxes allow you to interact with the
graphics window. For example, you can enter values in the dialog box
fields by temporarily returning to the graphics window and selecting a
position, entity, or toolpath.
You can expand some dialog boxes to show additional fields. By
default, they appear in a contracted format.
Figure 1-7: Example: dialog box, contract and expand
To expand or contract the dialog box,

click the double arrow buttons, located
in the upper left corner.
To return to the graphics window and
select a position or point, choose the
Position button.
Ribbon Bars
Ribbon bars function like dialog boxes but look similar to toolbars.
Ribbon bars open when you activate many Mastercam functions. You
use them to create, position, and modify geometry.
Figure 1-8: Example: ribbon bar
TIP: When you create geometry with ribbon bars and dialog
boxes, you can edit an entity as long as it remains live. You will
learn more about entity states later in “Live, Fixed, and Phantom
1
Entities” on page 30.
In the Mastercam workspace, a blank Ribbon Bar displays just above

the graphics window to indicate the default ribbon bar position.
When you choose a function that uses a ribbon bar, the function
ribbon bar replaces the blank Ribbon Bar placeholder. You can change
the default position, and dock or undock the ribbon bar. If you undock
the blank Ribbon Bar, it is removed from the Mastercam window until
you choose a function that uses a ribbon bar. Then the ribbon bar
displays in the last undocked ribbon bar position.
Navigating Ribbon Bars

There are different ways to move between buttons and fields in ribbon
bars.
Use the mouse to click buttons and place the cursor in a
particular field.
Use the [Tab] key to move the cursor between fields.
Press a shortcut key to activate the button or field associated
with that key. For example, type [T] to activate the Tangent
button.
TIP: Use tool tips or Learning Mode to identify shortcut keys.
Note: Some ribbon bar buttons and fields may be unavailable

(appear inactive) depending on the options you choose.
Locking and Unlocking Fields

The data in ribbon bar fields can be frozen (locked) to prevent the
value from changing when you reposition the cursor in the graphics
window. Each field has three states:
Unlocked—The normal and default state of a

ribbon bar or dialog box field is unlocked. This
state allows the field to change to the position of
the cursor in the graphics window.
Soft-locked—When soft-locked, the data is only

frozen for the next entity you create. After an
entity is created, the field returns to the
unlocked (default) state. To soft-lock a field,
type a value into the field. Notice that the button
next to the field appears pressed in, signifying a
soft-locked state.
Hard-locked—When hard-locked, the data is

frozen until you manually unlock the field. You
hard-lock a field to use a specific value
repeatedly, for example, when creating multiple
duplicate entities. To hard-lock a field, enter the
value and click the button next to the field, or
hold down the [Shift] key while using the field’s
shortcut key. The button remains selected and
the field is colored, indicating that the value is
locked. To unlock a field, click the button next to
the field.
Entering Values in Fields

In addition to typing values in ribbon bar and dialog box fields, or
using the cursor to dynamically update fields, you can use one of the
following methods to enter field values.
Click the drop-down arrow in the field to choose from a list of
values previously entered into the field. These values are
saved in the registry and remain available, even after you end
the current Mastercam session.
In many numeric fields, you can right–click in the field to
access a menu of data entry shortcuts.
Mastercam’s calculator lets you enter complex expressions
into most numeric fields. Please refer to “Mastercam’s
Calculator” on page 36 for more information.
Figure 1-9: Data entry shortcuts right–click menu
To choose a shortcut option, select it from the list or type the

corresponding letter. Then select an entity in the graphics window
to automatically enter its specified value in the field.
Docking and Undocking Ribbon Bars

You can undock a ribbon bar by double–clicking in any gray space area
in the ribbon bar or single–clicking and dragging it to the graphics
window. Once the ribbon bar is undocked, you can easily drag and
drop it anywhere in the Mastercam window. You can dock it again by
dragging and dropping it in the toolbar section or by
double–clicking the ribbon bar title bar.
Notes:
• You can dock ribbon bars only in a horizontal position. This
differs from toolbars, which can be docked horizontally or
vertically.
• If you undock and then close a ribbon bar (by clicking the x in
the upper right corner), it is removed from the Mastercam
window. This does not cause a problem; it will display the next
time it is required by the function.
Ribbon Bar and Dialog Box Modality

You can configure the modal behavior of Mastercam ribbon bars and
dialog boxes using the Screen properties page in Settings,
Configuration. (For more information, see “Screen” on page 137.) By
default, the modality option in this configuration page is selected.
When selected, this option allows ribbon bars and most dialog boxes
to retain many of their previous settings, saving you from having to
reenter data, or reselect function buttons, or options in a drop-down
list. The settings remain in their “last used” state for the remainder of
the Mastercam session or until you change them.
For example, if you lock down width and height values in the Rectangle
ribbon bar, those values stay locked even after you close and reopen
the ribbon bar.
Note: Action buttons such as OK, Apply, Chain, or Select are not
modal and are unaffected by the configuration settings.
Learning Mode
Learning mode is similar to a tool tip, but applies only to ribbon bars.
It provides information on the ribbon bar and its functions, including
the default shortcut keys. When Learning mode is active, it appears
when you place the cursor in any ribbon bar button or field.
Figure 1-10: Example: Learning mode
To turn Learning mode on or off, choose Settings, Configuration. In

the Configuration dialog box, choose the Screen properties page and
select/deselect the option to Use Learning Mode prompts.
AutoCursor and Visual Cues

You use the AutoCursor ribbon bar to:
Track cursor position
Manually enter X, Y, and Z coordinates
Detect and snap to points as you move the cursor over
geometry on the screen
AutoCursor is active whenever Mastercam prompts you to select a
position in the graphics window. The AutoCursor ribbon bar works in
conjunction with the cursor to eliminate steps and make it easier to
select and enter points in complicated and congested geometry.
Figure 1-11: AutoCursor ribbon bar
1
When a position is detected, AutoCursor displays a visual cue to the
right of the cursor to identify the type of position. Endpoints and
midpoints of curves, lines, arc center points, and point entities are all
detected and highlighted by AutoCursor. In addition, AutoCursor can
snap to angle, nearest, tangent, perpendicular, horizontal, and vertical
conditions. For more information, see “Using the AutoCursor Ribbon
Bar” on page 162.
General Selection Ribbon Bar

For most Mastercam functions, you use the General Selection ribbon
bar—in addition to or in combination with standard Window’s
selection methods—to select entities in the graphics window. The
General Selection ribbon bar is also active any time you can select
entities prior to choosing a function.
The General Selection ribbon bar has a Standard Selection mode and a
Solids Selection mode. The default mode is Standard Selection. If you
initiate a Mastercam function that might apply to wireframe or solid
entities, you can use options to switch between selection modes.
Figure 1-12: General Selection ribbon bar
For more information on using general selection methods, see

“Selecting Entities” on page 174.
Sketcher
Sketcher is the suite of Mastercam X functions you use to create basic
geometry dynamically by moving the mouse and clicking in the
graphics window. Basic geometry includes points, lines, arcs, splines,
fillets, chamfers, and primitives. It does not include drafting,
transform, modify, surfaces, or solids.
Figure 1-13: Sketcher toolbar
To sketch an entity, choose an entity type from the Sketcher toolbar

drop-down list or from the Create menu, set its ribbon bar or dialog
box options, and sketch the entity in the graphics window. For many
types of geometry, you also use the AutoCursor to create and edit
entity properties.
Live, Fixed, and Phantom Entities

Entities in Mastercam have three states: live, fixed, and phantom.
Live entities are those in the process of being created. You can
edit their properties using options in the selected function
ribbon bar or dialog box, remove them from the graphics
window, or “fix” them.
Entities become fixed entities when they have been accepted,
for example, when you press Enter or click OK or Apply to
complete a function.
When you create entities dynamically using the mouse, they
are drawn with a dashed white line. This is called the phantom
state. When you choose the final position to create the entity,
the entity becomes live.
Note: Dynamic line entities (phantom) are not drawn as dashed

lines. They appear as solid lines. 1
After you create an entity using one of the Sketcher functions, it
remains live until you exit the function, start a new function, or create
another entity. Live entities are designated by a live entity color. When
you accept an entity, it changes to the normal entity color.
After entities become fixed, you can edit them using the Edit, Analyze,
and Xform menu functions.
TIP: To define Mastercam color defaults, choose Settings,

Configuration, and select the Colors properties page.
Chaining
Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so
that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. When
you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves (lines, arcs,
and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Chaining differs from
other selection methods because it associates order and direction to
the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect the way
Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.
Mastercam provides several chaining methods in the Chaining dialog
box, which opens whenever a function requires you to chain entities.
As you chain geometry, the entities appear highlighted in the same
color as selected entities.
The Chain Manager lists all the chains for the operation and provides
the utilities you need to rechain geometry. Since chaining determines
the cut order, tool rapid moves, and the direction of tool movement,
you may find that you need to modify the chaining after generating a
toolpath. For more information, see “Chaining” on page 186 and
“Toolpath Chaining Techniques” on page 734.
Right–Click Menus
Mastercam provides a number of right–click menus. For example, in
the Toolpath Manager tab, right–click to access an extensive list of
functions and submenus for working with machine groups, toolpath
groups, toolpaths, operations, setup sheets and more. In the Toolpath
parameters dialog box and tab, right–click to choose from a number of
functions related to tools, tool libraries, and toolpath parameters for
the selected toolpath operation.
Figure 1-14: Examples: Right–click menus
Toolpath Manager Toolpath Parameters tab
Here are just a few of the places where you can use right–click menus:
Levels Manager View Manager
Toolpath Manager tab Solids Manager tab
Tool parameters tab Art Manager tab

(Mill/Router and Lathe)
Tool Manager Chain Manager
Drill Point Manager Machine Definition

(Mill/Router) Manager
Post Text page (Control Materials List

Definition)
TIP: Right–click menus are common to many Mastercam

functions; when in doubt, right–click to see if one is available. 1
Two special types of right–click menus include the customized right-
mouse button menu (you configure this menu for quick access to your
favorite functions when working in the graphics window), and the
data entry shortcut menu, available in many numeric ribbon bar and
dialog box fields.
Shortcut Keys
Mastercam provides special keyboard assignments you use, instead of
clicking icons, to access ribbon bar and dialog box options. These are
referred to as shortcut keys. For example, you can use the following
shortcut keys when working with the Create Point Segment ribbon bar
function:
[D] - Defines the distance between the points
[N] - Sets number of points
[P] - Applies changes and remains in the function
[O] - OK (fixes live entity and exits function)
You can view shortcut keys using tool tips and by activating Learning
mode. Mastercam help topics also list all available shortcut keys for a
specific function, ribbon bar, and dialog box.
Another type of shortcut key is associated with every Mastercam
function that appears in a menu or toolbar. You use this type of
shortcut to choose a function, instead of using the mouse to select it
from the menu or toolbar. Typically, function shortcuts are associated
with function keys [F1-F12], or a combination of [Shift], [Ctrl], [Alt]
keys and other alphanumeric characters.
IMPORTANT: The default keyboard shortcuts provided with

Mastercam X are consistent with those available in prior
versions of Mastercam. For information on mapping Mastercam
functions to your own, custom keyboard shortcuts, see
“Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts” on page 107.
Machine Definition / Control Definition Managers

Your Mastercam installation includes many default machine
definitions, control definitions, and post processors. Use the Machine
Definition Manager and the Control Definition Manager functions in
the Settings menu to customize or create your own machine and

control definitions, and to associate them with selected post processor
files.
A machine definition describes:
The components of the machine tool and their
interrelationship.
A control definition that provides the post processor with the
information it needs to process toolpaths that meet the
control's requirements.
The post processor appropriate for the specific machine and
control combination.
Note: For more information on using, selecting, and editing

machine and control definitions, see “The Role of Machine and
Control Definitions” on page 54, “Choosing a Machine and
Control Definition” on page 697, and “Power User Tips” on
page 799.
Toolpaths
In Mastercam, a toolpath represents the tool data and movements
used to remove material from stock. The toolpath contains a set of
rules that define the types of chains and parameters allowed, as well as
how they are applied to an operation. Each operation conforms to the
rules of a specific toolpath. An operation typically contains one or
more chains. Each toolpath you create displays as an operation in a
machine group that you can view and edit from the Toolpath Manager
tab.
To create a toolpath, you select a machine type, choose a function
from the Toolpaths menu or toolbar, and chain one or more pieces of
the part’s geometry or select points, surfaces, or solids. You then select
the tool and enter other toolpath parameters. When you accept the
parameters, Mastercam generates the toolpath operation, which
appears in the Toolpath Manager tab under the active machine group.
TIP: You can create different toolpath groups to organize and

manage operations.
Toolpaths and Associativity

Associativity in Mastercam refers to the relationship between
geometry and the drafting entities, toolpaths or wirepaths that are
1
created from it. When you create a drafting entity, toolpath or
wirepath, Mastercam links it to the geometry. This association can be
broken only by deleting the drafting entity, its underlying geometry, or
the toolpath operation. Mastercam warns you if you try to delete
geometry used in a toolpath or associated with a drafting entity.
Associativity lets you regenerate toolpaths or drafting dimensions
when the geometry changes—without requiring you to redefine them.
When you change an operations's geometry or toolpath parameters,
use the Toolpath Manager to regenerate the operation. When you
change geometry associated with a drafting entity, use functions in the
Create, Drafting, Regen submenu to update the drafting dimension,
as necessary.
Libraries (operations, tools, materials)

Mastercam libraries are collections of files that define operations,
tools, or materials. Mastercam provides default tool and material
libraries to get you started, but you can customize the files and create
your own. Once you save a file to a library, it can be used and reused in
a Mastercam part file.
Operation Libraries
Operation libraries are collections of toolpath operations that have an
.OPERATIONS extension. To save an operation to a library, use the
Export function from the Toolpath Manager right–click menu. You can
use the Import function in this menu to import a saved operation, with
or without its geometry, into the current part file, provided it can be
supported by the selected machine definition.
Tool Libraries
Tool libraries store tool definitions that have a .TOOLS extension. Tool
libraries are useful for storing common tools or for storing tools for
specific jobs. You can create a separate library for each machine tool in
your shop or for sets of machines that use similar tools. You can use
one of several tool libraries that come with Mastercam, or you can
create your own tool libraries. Use the Tool Manager to view and
manage libraries and tool definitions.
Note: Although you use different tool managers to define

mill / router and lathe tools, they are stored in a single tool library.
Material Libraries
Material definitions are stored in libraries, just like tool definitions.
When you select a material, Mastercam copies the definition to your
part file. Material definition files have a .MATERIALS extension and
consist of base feed rates and tables of adjustments for different
operation types and tool types. When you select a material and a tool
for an operation, Mastercam can use the information in the material
definition to help calculate proper default feed rates and spindle
speeds for the selected operation and tool.
Function Interruption
Mastercam’s Interrupt mode allows you to pause a function, execute a
secondary function, and then continue the original function where it
was interrupted. For example, you can interrupt chaining, use the
Modify Break function to break a line, and then resume chaining. A
single button click activates Interrupt mode.
To add the Interrupt Mode button to a toolbar, choose Settings,
Customize. Then, in the Category drop-down of the Customize dialog
box, choose Settings. Finally, drag the Interrupt Mode button to a
toolbar, or create a new toolbar by dropping the button on
Mastercam's window.
To use the Interrupt Mode: When in a function (such as chaining) that
you want to pause, click the Interrupt Mode button. Perform the
function you need to complete. When the function is finished,
Mastercam returns you to the original, paused function.
Mastercam’s Calculator
Fields that take number values have a built-in calculator that let you
enter simple formulas directly in the field. For example, type 9/32 in a
field, and Mastercam displays the value 0.28125. With the calculator,
you can:
use a full set of arithmetic operators
use parentheses to create more complicated expressions
enter formulas using algebraic notation
specify units of measure, such as degrees or feet
call mathematical functions
The following sections describe the symbols, operators, constants, and
functions you can use with calculable fields.
Notes:
• Units default to the current system units (inches or millimeters),
1
but may be overridden in any field by using unit symbols. The
calculator converts the entered value to the current units.
• You can use mathematical expressions in both integer and
floating-point fields. However, if you are in an integer field,
Mastercam discards the decimal portion of the result.
• Wherever Mastercam accepts real numbers and formulas, you
can enter an angle value in degrees/minutes/seconds or
gradians/radians format.
• In FastPoint mode, the entry field accepts numbers, fractions,
decimal values, and even formulas. For example, to enter a
point position of X6, Y3, Z0.5, you could type
X(2*3)Y(5-2)Z(1/2).
• The calculator treats a space between values as an addition
operator (+). For example, with Mastercam set to inches, the
entry 5 8 3/4 evaluates to 13.75 inches. As another example, still
assuming inches, the entry 1m 5cm 4 evaluates to 45.338583
inches.
• By default, fields in which the calculator is active have a yellow
background. You can change this color on the Colors page of the
System Configuration dialog box.
Unit Symbols
Use unit symbols to specify a value’s measurement unit. For example,
use the symbol mm to specify millimeters. If a value has no unit
symbol, Mastercam uses the current default units (inches or
millimeters, set on the Start / Exit page of the System Configuration
dialog box). Table 1 lists the unit symbols you can use in Mastercam’s
calculable fields.
Table 1: Unit Symbols

Symbol Description Symbol Description
d degrees m meters
‘ minutes km kilometers
“ seconds um microns
g gradians in inches
r radians ft or f feet
mm millimeters yd yards
cm centimeters
Notes:
• Always place the unit symbol after the numeral (for example,
45mm).
• One or more spaces between the numeral and the unit symbol
are optional. For example, both of these values are acceptable:
25in, 25 in.
• Use parentheses or additional unit symbols to clarify
ambiguous values. For example, suppose Mastercam is set to
millimeters. If you want to divide 3mm by 4cm, the entry 3/4cm
is incorrect. (It's evaluated as 3/4 of a cm.) Instead, write the
expression as 3mm/4cm or 3/(4cm).
• To convert an entire expression to a unit type, multiply by the
desired unit. For example, to convert the expression
(22/7)*2.5^2 to centimeters, type ((22/7)*2.5^2)*1cm. (Note
the parentheses around the original expression.)
Arithmetic Operators
Mastercam’s calculator supports a full set of arithmetic operators, as
listed in Table 2.
Table 2: Arithmetic Operators

Operator Description Example
+ addition 5+3 (result = 8)
- subtraction 5-3 (result = 2)
* multiplication 5*3 (result = 15)
/ division 5/3 (result = 1.666...)
\ integer division 5\3 (result = 1)
^ exponent 5^3 (result = 125)
Mod modulus 5 Mod 3 (result = 2)
Constants
The calculator also defines a set of constants (pre-defined values) that
you can use when typing field entries. Table 3 lists these constants.
Table 3: Constants
Constant Description
#pi pi
#e e
#RadToDeg radians to degrees
#DegToRad degrees to radians
Note: Constants are case-insensitive. For example, the entries #pi,

#Pi, and #PI are equivalent 1
Math Functions
You can use a large set of mathematical functions in your calculations.
Please refer to Table 4 for a complete list.
Table 4: Math Functions

Function Description
Abs() Absolute value
Acos() Arccosine
Asin() Arcsine
Atan() Arctangent
Atan2() Two-argument arctangent
Cos() Cosine
Exp() Exponent (base e)
Fix() Remove the fractional part of a number. For
a negative value x, Fix(x) returns an integer
greater than or equal to x.
Int() Remove the fractional part of a number. For
a negative value x, Fix(x) returns an integer
less than or equal to x.
Log() Natural logarithm (base e)
Sgn() Sign of
Sin() Sine
Sqr() Square root
Tan() Tangent
Note: All trigonometric functions assume angles in degrees.

Mastercam Menus
In addition to using customizable toolbars and right–click menus, you
can access most Mastercam functions through a series of standard,
drop-down menus and submenus located across the top of the
Mastercam window. Primary menus include:
File (page 41) Machine Type (page 48)
Edit (page 42) Toolpaths (page 49)
View (page 43) Screen (page 50)
Analyze (page 44) Art (page 51)
Create (page 45) Settings (page 52)
Solids (page 46) Help (page 53)
Xform (page 47)
This section provides a summary of each menu and its functions.

INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 41
File Menu
Use File menu functions to open, edit, print, save, track, and compare 1
files.
Mastercam provides seamless integration with most popular

CAD/CAM file formats. Converting files from and to non-Mastercam
formats occurs automatically when you open and save files in
Mastercam. When saving files, you can save all or only some of the
entities to a specified format, and include descriptive text and a
thumbnail image of the geometry with the file data.
You can also import and export files to and from specified directories,
and merge data into the current file from a pattern file (for example, a
nut or bolt you use repeatedly in Mastercam files).
The Tracking function notifies you when a newer version of a file is

available. You can set several options to control the way Mastercam
locates new files. You can also specify when Mastercam looks for
newer part-file versions.
The Change Recognition feature compares older and newer versions
of a part file. During the comparison, you can view geometry
differences in various ways, as well as update toolpaths that are
affected by changes.
Edit Menu
This menu provides access to functions you use to edit geometry, such
as the Join entities, Modify Spline, Convert NURBS, and Simplify
functions, and the Trim / Break submenu functions. Other Edit menu
functions allow you to cut, copy, paste, delete, or select all entities in
Use the Undo and Redo functions to reverse or repeat one or more
sequential events that occur as you work with a file. (An event is a
single function-based operation such as create line or transform
entities.)
You can also use the Set Normal and Change Normal functions to set
the direction of multiple surface normals relative to the current
construction plane. 1
View Menu
The View menu helps you manage the appearance and orientation of
the Mastercam graphics window.
The Viewports submenu lets you choose a particular arrangement of

one or more (up to four) viewports. Viewports are partitioned areas of
the graphics window where you can assign different views.
Use other View menu functions to show or hide the Operations
Manager pane, and otherwise modify the graphics window
appearance by fitting, repainting, panning, or zooming.
From the Orient submenu, you can change views, dynamically rotate
the current view, or flip coordinates to reorient the graphics window
view.
Analyze Menu
Use Analyze menu functions to view and edit entity properties.
Some analyze functions provide a report function that lets you save
the information to a file.
You can also use analyze functions to modify the color, line style and
width, or point style attributes of a single entity, or apply the same
attributes to all the entities you select in the graphics window.
Create Menu
This extensive menu includes all Sketcher (Create Geometry), Curve, 1
Surfaces, and Drafting functions.
Use these functions to create points, lines, arcs, splines, curves, fillets,
chamfers, surfaces, drafting entities, and basic geometry, including
rectangles, rectangular shapes, polygons, ellipses, spirals, and helixes.
From the Primitives submenu, you can create a cylinder, cone, block,
sphere, or torus surface. If your installation includes Mastercam
Solids, you can also create solid primitive shapes.
Additional functions allow you to create letters, define a bounding box,
and convert a solid to a 2D profile.
Solids Menu
Functions in this menu are available only if your Mastercam
installation includes Mastercam Solids.
Use these functions to define a solid by extruding, revolving, sweeping,

or lofting chains of curves.
Once you create the base operation, you use other Solids menu
functions to remove or add material, smooth or bevel edges, shell, and
cut entry holes. You can also perform Boolean functions (add solids
together, remove solids from one another, and find common solid
volumes), draft solid faces, and trim solids to a plane or surface.
Note: To define a solid using primitive (pre-defined) shapes, such

as a cylinder, cone, block, sphere, or torus, use the Create,
Primitives functions.
Xform Menu
Use Xform (transform) functions to move or copy selected entities by 1
mirroring, rotating, scaling, offsetting, translating, stretching, and
rolling them.
With some functions, you can join the copied entities to the originals.
When you perform a transform function, Mastercam creates a
temporary group from the original entities and a result from the
transformed entities.
Machine Type Menu

Use this menu to select a machine type by choosing a machine
definition. Your access to the different types of machine definitions in
the menu is based on the Mastercam products you have installed. For
example, you must have a Mastercam Mill license to choose a Mill
machine definition from this menu.
To appear in the list, the machine definition must be installed, and
then added to the Machine Definition Menu using the Manage list
function.
The machine type you choose modifies the Mastercam interface so

that only the toolpath options and limits supported by the machine,
control and post processor are available. This prevents Mastercam
from creating tool motion that cannot be executed by the machine.
In a Mastercam part file, the machine definition is part of the machine
group properties you view and modify in the Toolpath Manager. As
soon as you select a machine type, only the toolpaths available for the
selected machine type are enabled in the Toolpaths menu.
Toolpaths Menu
Functions in this menu allow you to create and edit the toolpaths 1
required to cut the part using the specified machine definition.
Toolpath functions appear in this menu only after you select a
machine definition from the Machine Type menu, or choose a
machine group from the Toolpath Manager. These functions vary
based on the machine type associated with the active machine group
(Mill, Lathe, Router, or Wire). Here is an example of the Mill toolpaths
menu:
When you create a toolpath, an operation is automatically created and

appears in the Toolpath Manager under the active machine group.
Note: The machine group you are working with appears

highlighted in the Toolpath Manager, indicating that it is active.
Screen Menu
This menu is where you specify default settings and manage the
display of geometry in the graphics window. The Clear Colors option
lets you remove the group color (red) and result color (purple) that
occur after performing a transform function (Xform).
You can set system attributes, and activate, deactivate, or customize
the appearance of the selection grid, which is a matrix of reference
points that the cursor snaps to when you sketch a point.
You use other Screen menu functions to temporarily remove and

restore selected entities, repaint, regenerate, or copy images in the
graphics window, and combine all parallel views into a single view.
Art Menu
The Art menu displays only if your Mastercam installation includes 1
Mastercam Art.
For more information on using Mastercam Art functions, refer to the

online Help, and the “Mastercam X2 Art Tutorial” PDF file located in
your Mastercam X \Documentation folder.
Settings Menu
Use the Settings menu functions to set up Mastercam to your
specifications.
You can define, save, or load the default values and preferences
(Configuration) you want to work with. Other functions allow you to
create customized toolbar configurations and states, drop-down
menus, function key mappings, and a customized right-mouse button
menu. The configuration and customization parameters you define
can be saved to named files that you load when you need them, even
on other Mastercam workstations provided they have the same
Mastercam version installed.
From this menu, you can also run third-party applications, VB scripts,
and create, edit, or run Mastercam macros. Ram Saver lets you
optimize your PC’s RAM management when running Mastercam. You
can use the Machine Definition Manager and the Control Definition
Manager functions to set up or modify machine and control
definitions. Finally, you can manipulate viewsheets from the Settings
menu.
Notes:
• Although you can create multiple configuration.CONFIG files,
toolbars and states (.MTB), and key map (.KMP) files, each
containing different values, you can load only one of each file
type at a time. For more information on customization tools,

see “Customizing and Configuring Mastercam X” on page 81.
• Changes made to configuration settings apply only to the
1
current session unless you save them to a configuration file.
Help Menu
This menu provides access to a variety of information about
Mastercam.
This information includes:

Mastercam Help contents
Mastercam X2 Reference Guide PDF (requires Adobe Acrobat
Reader)
Mastercam product information (licensing, version, installed
products, serial number)
Online updates
Zip2Go utilities
Mastercam’s corporate Web site
(www.mastercam.com)
Note: For more information on getting help with Mastercam, see

“Mastercam Support and Services” on page 9.
The Role of Machine and Control

Definitions
Machine Definitions (what they are and why you use them)
Toolpath Defaults (page 56)
Working with Post Processors (page 57)
Mastercam machine definitions are virtual descriptions of the actual
machine tools you will use to cut a part. They determine the functions
and tool parameters you can choose when creating toolpath
operations. With machine definitions, you generate more accurate NC
output because you define each machine tool and its unique
characteristics.
Before you can create a toolpath, you need to select a machine
definition from the Machine Type menu. When you do this,
Mastercam creates a machine group in the Toolpath Manager, which
stores the toolpaths and operations that you will program for that
machine.
Each time you select a new machine from the Machine Type menu,
Mastercam creates a new machine group. A single part file can contain
several machine groups, each one containing operations that will be
performed on a different machine. You can even have multiple
machine groups for different types of machines, letting you create and
save lathe and mill operations in the same Mastercam part file. When
you post the operations, Mastercam automatically saves the output
from different machine groups in different NC files.
Each Mastercam machine definition consists of:
Machine component groups and components
A control definition
A pointer to the proper post processor
These three elements of the machine definition represent a single
machine tool.
Machine Components—The component groups and components you
assemble define the machine tool architecture and how it moves. The
machine type (mill, lathe, router, or wire) determines which
component groups are available for you to assemble.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Role of Machine and Control Definitions • 55
Control Definition—The control definition provides the post

processor with the information it needs to process toolpath data so
that it meets the control's requirements. It is also used to customize
the post text, miscellaneous values, and canned text that are stored in
1
the post file.
Post Processor—Typically, each machine and control definition is
linked to a single post processor. However, the machine and control
definition architecture gives you the flexibility to use the same post
with several machine definitions, or you can configure several posts
for the same machine.
Machine definitions, control definitions, and post processors are all
stored in separate files. When you create a machine definition, you
select the control definition and post processor to use with the
machine.
Figure 1-15: Example: Machine Definition Manager
Highlighted buttons are used only for simulation and event-driven programming functions
New Edit general machine parameters
Open Edit the control definition
Save Edit axis combinations
Save as Set password protection
File containing
Unused control definition
component
groups
Post processor
Component tree
Component
library
Default toolbar state (optional)

When you use the Machine Definition Manager to create and save
machine definitions, Mastercam assigns one of the following file
extensions, based in the selected machine type:
.MMD (Mill) .LMD (Lathe)
.RMD (Router) .WMD (Wire)
TIP: Use one of the following methods to access the Machine

Definition Manager:
• From the Mastercam menu, choose Settings, Machine
Definition Manager.
• From the Toolpath Manager, expand the Machine Group and
choose Properties, Files. Then click Edit in the Machine -
Toolpath copy section.
When you select a machine definition and create a machine group,

Mastercam loads a copy of the machine and control definition in your
part file and saves it with your part. This is referred to as the local copy.
This lets you work on the part even if you move the file to another
workstation that does not have that machine or control definition. You
can also make job-specific changes to the machine or control
definition settings without affecting the master copy stored on your
workstation’s hard drive. The machine group also stores a copy of all
the tools that you use in that group’s operations.
IMPORTANT: Mastercam does NOT store a copy of the post

processor with your part file, only the machine and control defi-
nition.
Toolpath Defaults
Mastercam stores the toolpath defaults in separate files. These have
a.DEFAULTS extension. You have separate .DEFAULTS files for inch
and metric operations. Each control definition points to a set of
.DEFAULTS files—one each for inch and metric values. When you
select the machine definition, Mastercam automatically loads the
.DEFAULTS file specified in its control definition.
If you wish, you can select a different .DEFAULTS file in the machine
group properties. This will be used for only new operations created in
the machine group. Use the Files tab from the Machine Group
Properties dialog box to select a different file.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Role of Machine and Control Definitions • 57
To edit a .DEFAULTS file, you can use either the Files tab from the
Machine Group Properties dialog box, or the Operation Defaults page
in the Control Definition Manager. You can also use either method to
create a new .DEFAULTS file. You can create as many sets of default
1
values as you like, for machine-specific or application-specific
defaults, and save each set in a separate file.
Notes:
• The .DEFAULTS file also stores default values for many machine
group properties, such as the default tool numbering method.
• For more information on working with .DEFAULTS files, see
“Editing Toolpath Defaults” on page 751.
Working with Post Processors

Typically, for each machine definition you will use a single control
definition and a single post processor. This means that when you
select a machine definition to begin creating toolpaths, the post
processor is selected at the same time. To select a new post processor,
go to the machine group properties and select the machine that uses
the desired post processor. Mastercam then validates the toolpaths in
the machine group against the new machine.
The post processor file also stores post text, canned text, and
miscellaneous values. As a convenience, you can use the Text page in
the Control Definition Manager to edit these, even though they are
saved in the post processor file and not in the control definition file.
Mastercam’s machine and control definition architecture also gives
you the flexibility to configure the same post to be used with multiple
machines or controls, or to switch posts without selecting a new
machine. These features can be useful for shops with many machines
or with advanced application requirements. To learn more, see the
“Mastercam X2 Reference Guide” (choose Help, Reference Guide from
the menu), access the online help in the Control Definition Manager,
or consult your Mastercam Reseller.
Opening and Translating Files

Mastercam seamlessly translates files, importing from and exporting
to a variety of popular, proprietary CAD/CAM formats and common
file exchange formats. Although options provide control of the
conversion process, conversion occurs automatically when you use
File menu functions to open and save files—no pre- or post-
formatting is required. This flexibility makes it easy to work with non-
Mastercam files, and with files saved in a prior version of Mastercam.
Mastercam X supports the following file formats:
Mastercam (X–initial Mastercam X Educational

release, V9, and V8)
Pro/Engineer® SAT (ACIS)
VDA (Verband der Rhinoceros® 3D NURBS

Automobilindustrie)
SolidWorks® Solid Edge®
AutoDesk Inventor® ASCII
CATIA® V4 / V5 HPGL Plotter (Hewlett-

Packard Graphics Language)
CADKey® CDL AutoCAD®
Parasolid® StereoLithography
STEP (Standard for the IGES (Initial Graphics

Exchange of Product data) Exchange Standard)
Postscript
Notes:
• If you do not have Mastercam Solids installed, you can still
machine an imported solid. However, Mastercam Solids must
be installed to modify a solid or create additional solids.
• For more information on the conversion options available for
your Mastercam configuration, contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Opening and Translating Files • 59
Saving Files
When you save a Mastercam file to a native .MCX format, you 1
automatically save all geometry, attributes, levels, views, planes,
machine definitions, control definitions, stock setup, machine groups,
toolpath groups, and operations data.
Note: You can save a Mastercam X2 file to previous Mastercam

versions (including Mastercam X .MCX), but only geometry is
saved. Toolpath operations cannot be saved to previous
Mastercam versions.
You can optionally save a bitmap thumbnail image of the geometry.

You can add descriptive text, such as instructions for working with the
file or contact information, and set a default directory where the file
will be saved. You will find the settings for these options in the
Settings, Configuration, Files properties page and its AutoSave /
Backup subpage.
To reduce the amount of navigation required to save files to new file
names, choose directory paths from the Recent Folders drop-down
menu in the Save as dialog box.
To change the Mastercam X file version when saving a file, click the
Options button in the Save As dialog box. Mastercam displays the
Save as X version dialog box, from which you can select Mastercam X
or Mastercam X2 file versions.
WARNING: When saving a Mastercam X version 2 file as a

version 1 file, Mastercam saves only geometry. Mastercam X
version 2 toolpaths cannot be saved to a Mastercam X version 1
file.
TIPS:
• To help you quickly identify the file you want to work with,
view the thumbnail image in the Open File dialog box
Preview pane. You can view the file’s text descriptor in the
Descriptor pane.
• Another helpful function you can use to save only selected
entities is the File, Save Some function. When you choose
this function, use general selection methods—including
masking—to select only the entities to save from the current
file, and then save the entities to a new file.
Sharing Files with the Zip2Go Utility

Use Mastercam’s Zip2Go C-Hook utility to gather Mastercam part data
into a compressed .Z2G file. This utility makes it easy to provide your
Reseller or CNC Support Services with a file that contains the
information they need. Zip2Go scans the machine groups in your
current part file and captures information such as your Mastercam
configuration, machine definition, and post files. You can choose
which files to include. After creating the Zip2Go file, you can view its
contents and add / delete files as necessary.
In addition to the Mastercam part file, you can optionally choose to
add the following file types during the Zip2Go scan:
Current Mastercam configuration files (includes .CONFIG,
.MTB, .KMP, and .FT file types)
Machine definitions (.MMD, LMD, RMD, WMD)
Control definitions (.CONTROL)
Post processors ( .PST)
Toolpath operations (.NC)
Tool libraries (.TOOLS)
Material libraries ( .MATERIALS)
To run the Zip2Go utility, choose Help, Zip2Go Utility.
You can also type [Alt+C] to open to the \chooks directory. Then open
the \Zip2Go folder and double–click Zip2Go.dll.
Zip2Go also creates the following types of reports in a read-only .txt
1
format:
Zip2Go_[MCXPartFileName].txt: Contains a collection of
relevant files used by each machine group in the Mastercam
part file that was scanned.
Zip2Go_SystemReport.txt: Contains information on the
computer system on which the .Z2G was created. For
example:
The version of Microsoft Windows.
The amount of RAM memory on your computer.
A few details on the installed graphics card.
Registry setting data used by Mastercam (the CNC
Software, Inc. registry keys under HKCU and HKLM).
Zip2Go_FileReport.txt: Contains information on all the files
for Mastercam. Only the application system folders are
scanned. The Mill, Lathe, Router, and Wire folders (and any of
their sub-folders) in the Mastercam install folder (MCAMX)
are not scanned. Furthermore, any part files found in any
folder that is scanned will not be is included in this list. This is
to ensure that the collection of data never includes potentially
confidential information.
Zip2Go_HASP.txt: Contains information from the Mastercam
HASP on all the files for Mastercam, including the HASP Serial
# and the products licensed on the HASP. It also detects if
Mastercam Maintenance is enabled, and if so, the report
includes the maintenance expiration date.
Opening Files with Other Applications

Use the File menu, Edit/Open External function to open a file with a
selected, external application in its own window.
Figure 1-16: Edit / Open External dialog box
In the Open as drop-down list, you can choose:

Text: Displays file content as plain text in the currently
selected editor.
Auto: Displays file content in the application associated with
the selected file type, provided the application is installed on
your computer. For example, a file with a .doc extension
opens in Microsoft Word.
Text files open using the default editor specified in the Settings,
Configuration, Start/Exit properties page. However, you can choose
to open any file in any editor.
X To select an editor:
1 Choose File, Edit/Open External.
2 In the Open dialog box, choose Editor.
1
3 In the Choose File Editor dialog box, use one of the following
methods to select the editor:
Choose an editor from the list and click OK.
Note: All of the editors provided with Mastercam display in the list,
along with the most recently used “Other” editors you have
selected.
Or, choose Other from the list and click OK. Complete the
following steps:
a Use options in the Select an editor dialog box to navigate
to the location of the editor program, such as Microsoft®
Excel® or Word®.
b Select the program .EXE file and click Open. This closes the
Select an Editor dialog box and returns you to the Open
dialog box.
4 In the Open dialog box, select the file to edit and click OK. The
editor you chose in Step 3 opens in its own window and loads
the selected file for editing.
Project Manager
Use the Project Manager to select the types of files you want to save in
a common project folder. (The project folder is the location of the
project’s MCX file.) In addition to your MCX file, you can choose to
store some or all of the following types of files in your project folder:
NC program files NCI files
Tool libraries Operation libraries
Operation defaults Power libraries
Material libraries
Saving these file types along with the part file to a single project folder
is a great organizational tool and can be a real time-saver when you
need to move or share projects.
Figure 1-17: Project Manager dialog box
Using the Project Manager to manage files is optional. When the

Project Manager is inactive, Mastercam uses the default paths
specified in the Files tab of the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
(To open this tab, expand the Machine Group in the Toolpath
Manager, and choose Properties, Files.)
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Project Manager • 65
X To activate the Project Manager:

1 Choose File, Project Manager from the Mastercam menu.
2 In the Project File Manager dialog box, select at least one file
1
type in the Files to add to project folder list.
3 Select the option: Apply these settings when adding new
machine groups to this part file.
4 Click OK.
After you activate the Project Manager, you can see the new paths in
the Files tab of the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
Suppose, for example, that you have a part named Gear.mcx. This part
has a single mill toolpath that uses Mastercam’s default file paths
(Figure 1-18). When you save this part and post its toolpath (choosing
to create both an NC and NCI file), Mastercam creates the files in the
locations shown in Figure 1-19: New file paths on page 66. (The file
paths assume that c:\mcamx is your Mastercam installation directory.)
Figure 1-18: Default file paths
To reroute files to the project folder, open the Project Manager, and
click Select All in the File to add to project folder box. When you post
the toolpath, Mastercam creates the resultant files in your project
folder, as shown in Figure 1-19.
Figure 1-19: New file paths
Tips for Using Project Manager

When changing Project Manager paths for existing
operations, Project Manager does not copy already generated
files to the new directory. Depending on the file type, you
must either re-post your operations or manually copy the
affected files to the project folder.
If you use the project folder for .DEFAULTS files, tool libraries,
material libraries, and so on, you must make sure that those
files are in the selected project folder. Failure to place the files
in the project folder may result in “File does not exist”
warnings from Mastercam.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Printing and Plotting • 67
Printing and Plotting

1
You can print or plot entities in the graphics window using any
Windows-based driver that has been configured for your PC, and
optionally map colors to specific line widths and line styles.
Note: Mastercam supports only Windows-based printer drivers.
You can configure Mastercam to use a GDI or OpenGL graphics type.

OpenGL is required to display shaded images in the graphics window
and to print them. You can print wireframe or shaded images based on
the current graphics window display setting. Use the options in the
Shading toolbar to change to wireframe or shaded prior to choosing
the Print or Print Preview function from the File menu.
TIPS:
• Use the Settings, Configuration function Screen properties
page to choose a graphics support type, and the Printing and
Shading properties pages to configure additional settings.
For more information, see “Setting Defaults and Preferences
(Configuration)” on page 111.
• If you choose the Print Preview function directly from the File
menu, the values for your PC’s default printer driver are
used.
X To print or plot entities:

1 From the Mastercam menu, choose File, Print.
2 In the Print dialog box, set paper orientation, margins,

shading, scaling, line width and other options, as necessary.
3 To view and modify the driver’s default properties in the Print

Setup dialog box, choose the Property button. Depending on
the printer driver type, use options in the Print Setup dialog
box or the driver’s Properties dialog box to also enter the
number of copies to print.
4 To reposition the center point of the image, click in the
Preview area where you want to set the new centering
position. The crosshairs that display indicate the new
position. When you choose Print Preview or click OK, the
position marked by the crosshairs becomes the center of the
printed output.
5 To view a sample of the printed output, choose the Print
Preview button. You can print directly from the Print Preview
dialog box, or close it and return to the Print dialog box.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Printing and Plotting • 69
6 To map color to specific line widths, choose the Color / Width

map option and button. Then use options in the Linewidth
Attributes dialog box. 1
Click OK to apply your changes and return to the Print dialog

box.
7 In the Print dialog box, click OK to print or plot the entities.
File Tracking
Turn on file tracking to be notified of newer file versions. Using the File
tracking dialog box, you can specify the files that Mastercam tracks, as
well as customize how Mastercam searches for newer files. To start file
tracking, select a command from the File, Tracking submenu. The
following list shows the available commands:
Check Current File
Check All Tracked Files
Tracking Options
Checking the Current File

Select File, Tracking, Check Current File to have Mastercam search for
a newer version of the currently loaded file. When you choose this
command, the File Tracking Options dialog box displays:
Figure 1-20: The File Tracking Options dialog box
Use the File Tracking Options dialog box to specify how Mastercam
locates newer files, as described in the following list:
Search subfolders searches the current folder and any folders
inside the current folder.
File name must be exact match searches only for files that
have the same file name (not including the file extension). If
this option is off, Mastercam searches for files that begin with
the same file name. For example, if Part.mcx is the currently
tracked file, Mastercam looks for files with names like
Part_new.mcx and Part_revised.sld.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / File Tracking • 71
File extension must be exact match searches only for files

with the same file extension.
Don’t ask again prevents the File Tracking Options dialog box
1
from appearing again during the current session.
If Mastercam finds a newer file, it asks if you want to run change
recognition. Choose Yes to display the Change Recognition dialog box,
from which you can view and update geometry and operations. (See
“Change Recognition” on page 74.) Choose No to return to the
currently open file.
Check All Tracked Files

You can specify a list of files to track, and then use the Check All
Tracked Files command to look for new versions. To learn how to set
up a file list, please see the following section, “Tracking Options.”
Once you have your file list created, choose File, Tracking, Check All
Tracked Files. If Mastercam finds a newer version of one file in the list,
it asks if you want to run change recognition. Choose Yes to display the
Change Recognition dialog box, from which you can view and update
geometry and operations. Choose No to return to the currently open
file.
If Mastercam finds multiple newer files, and you choose to run change
recognition, you must select one of the changed files. That is, you can
run change recognition on only one file at a time.
Tracking Options
To specify tracking options, choose File, Tracking, Tracking Options
to display the File Tracking dialog box.
Figure 1-21: The File Tracking dialog box
Use this dialog box to customize how Mastercam searches for newer
versions of tracked files. Also use this dialog box to set up multiple file
tracking, as described here.
X To set up multiple file tracking

1 Turn on the Tracking option in the upper left corner of the File
Tracking dialog box. Mastercam enables the tracking options.
2 Right-click in the file list pane. A menu displays.
3 Select Add from the menu. The Open dialog box appears.
4 Select a file to add. The file appears in the list.
5 Repeat Steps 2-4 for each file to track.

Use the following options to customize the file tracking function:
Tracking toggles the tracking function. When this option is
off, Mastercam ignores all tracking options.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / File Tracking • 73
Check now checks for new versions of the files in the file list.
Additional folders lets you specify folders for file tracking to
search. To specify a search folder, right-click the Additional
1
Folders box, and choose Add from the pop-up menu.
File name must be exact match searches only for files that
have the same file name (not including the file extension). If
this option is off, Mastercam searches for any files that begin
with the same file name. For example, if Part.mcx is the
currently tracked file, Mastercam looks for files with names
like Part_new.mcx and Part_revised.sld.
File extension must be exact match searches only for files
with the same file extension.
Automatic tracking tells Mastercam to automatically add files
to the tracking list when files are opened.
Check current file at File-Open tells Mastercam to check for a
newer version of the current file as soon as the file is opened.
Check all files at Startup tells Mastercam to check for new
versions of files in the list when Mastercam starts.
Check all files at File-New tells Mastercam to check files
when you choose File, New.
Change Recognition
The change recognition function examines two files and reports on
their differences in various ways. To start this function, select File,
Change Recognition, and then specify the file you want to compare
against. Mastercam then compares the currently loaded file (called the
original file) with the specified file (called the incoming file), and
displays the Change Recognition dialog box. From this dialog box, you
can view differences, as well as update toolpaths.
Changes in Geometry Only

The Change Recognition dialog box has two forms, depending on
whether or not the original file contains toolpaths. If the original file
contains no toolpaths, the simpler form of the Change Recognition
dialog box displays:
Figure 1-22: Change Recognition - Geometry Only dialog box
Use this dialog box to compare the geometry of the original and
incoming files. You can display geometry in various ways:
Features of the original file
Features of the incoming file
Features the two files have in common
Features unique to the original file
Features unique to the incoming file
Both files combined
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Change Recognition • 75
Use the Override geometry colors option to select colors for the
original and incoming geometry. When this option is off, Mastercam
displays the files in the geometry’s original colors. 1
Use the Select geometry to mark as being in both Original
file and Incoming files button to specify features to merge into
the incoming file. Your original file, for example, may contain
geometry that is used only to specify special curves like containment
boundaries. Such geometry assists with the generation of toolpaths,
but does not necessarily represent physical features of the part. This
construction geometry rarely appears in the incoming file. So, to force
change recognition to preserve this geometry and not mark it as
changed, use the Select geometry to mark as being in both Original
file and Incoming files function to add the geometry to the incoming
file.
Before change recognition can identify new features in a file,
the original and incoming geometry must be in the same
position. To this end, the Re-orient incoming file feature lets
you transform your geometry in various ways, including translation,
mirroring, scaling, and rotation.
Changes Affecting Operations

When your original file contains both geometry and operations,
Mastercam displays the larger Change Recognition dialog box:
Figure 1-23: Change Recognition dialog box
Use this dialog box to view and manipulate changes between the
original file and the incoming file. The following controls let you view
and manipulate geometry and operations:
The operation drop-down menu contains a list of operations
for the part. Select the operation to analyze or update.
The icon to the left of the drop-down menu shows the status
of the current operation. The status can be up-to-date,
affected, or dirty, as described in Table 5 on page 77.
The text box below the operation drop-down menu displays

the tool used in the operation.
The slider control provides an alternative way to select

operations. The colors in the slider's channel reflect the status
of each operation, with cyan, red, and magenta indicating up-
to-date, affected, and dirty operations, respectively.
The First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons

manipulate the slider's location.
Draw selected operation displays the toolpath for the current
operation.
Ignore up-to-date operations filters out operations that are
unaffected by changes in the incoming file. That is, only
affected operations will be available for selection.
Geometry display controls the geometry that appears in
Mastercam's graphics window.
Edit geometry opens the appropriate dialog box for
modifying the geometry associated with the selected
operation.
Regenerate regenerates the toolpaths for the selected
operation.
View summary report displays an operation-by-
operation text summary of geometric entities in the
original and incoming files.
Select geometry to mark as being in both in Original
File and Incoming Files lets you specify geometry that
change recognition should not identify as changed.
Select toolpath display colors lets you choose colors
for the selected operation, as well as for the original
and incoming geometry.
Re-orient incoming file lets you reposition the
incoming geometry to match the original file.
Table 5: Operation status symbols.
Up-to-date: No geometry changes affect the operation

1
and the toolpath needs no regeneration. By default,
unaffected and clean operations display in cyan. (You
can change the display colors by clicking the Select
toolpath display colors button, which brings up the
Change Recognition colors dialog box.)
Affected: Geometry changes in the incoming file

affect the toolpath. By default, affected operations
display in red.
Dirty: The toolpath must be regenerated. By default,

dirty operations display in magenta.
Using Change Recognition

Mastercam's change recognition feature compares the geometry of
two versions of a part file. After identifying changed features, change
recognition displays the status of affected operations. You can then
update geometry and regenerate toolpaths, bringing up to date the
older version of the part.
When you use change recognition, the older version of a part file is
called the original file. The original file typically comprises various
types of geometric entities and their associated toolpaths. The newer
version of the part file is called the incoming file. Usually, this file
contains only geometric entities. If the incoming file contains
toolpaths, change recognition ignores them. That is, change
recognition identifies only changed geometry in the incoming file and
how those changes affect operations in the original file.
Suppose you have a part named Part01.mcx, shown with its toolpaths
in the following figure:
Figure 1-24: The Part01.mcx file
Now, a new version of the part, named Part01_Revised.mcx, comes

into your shop. The new version adds four bosses, which look like this:
Figure 1-25: The Rect02.mcx part file
To compare the two part versions, load the original file (the older one)
using File, Open from Mastercam's menu. Then, load the incoming file
(the newer one) by choosing File, Change Recognition. Mastercam
displays the Change Recognition dialog box (Figure 1-23).
Change recognition offers many ways to isolate and view changes in
the part. One way is to select Unique to Incoming from the Geometry
display drop-down list. Mastercam then displays geometry from the
incoming file that is not in the original file, as seen here:
Figure 1-26: Geometry unique to Part01_revised.mcx
This operation's toolpath (from the original file) is red to show that it is
affected by the geometry changes.
To update the operation, click Edit geometry in the Change
Recognition dialog box. In this example, the Chain Manager
dialog box displays, from which you can rechain the toolpath.
Then you can click the Regenerate button to update the
operation.
The chain recognition function features many options that control
how you can view and modify geometry and toolpaths. For more
details about the many controls in the Change Recognition dialog box,
please refer to the Field definitions tab of the Change Recognition
dialog box help topic.
chapter 2
Customizing and
Configuring
Mastercam X
This chapter covers the following topics:
Customizing Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . page 82
Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 111
Customizing Your Workspace

Use the Settings, Customize function to set up toolbars so that the
functions that are most important to you are easily available, and
those that you do not work with, or use infrequently, do not display.
You can also create or modify the drop-down menus that appear in
toolbars, create your own toolbars, and set up a customized
right-mouse button menu for quick access to the functions you use
most often.
Additional customization options allow you to remap default
Mastercam keyboard shortcuts to your own custom key sequences.
This essential customization tool lets you get started quickly and
maintain high productivity because you use the keyboard shortcuts
you already know and rely on.
IMPORTANT: If you are upgrading from a prior version of

Mastercam, the same keyboard shortcuts have been retained,
where possible, to help you transition to Mastercam X.
TIP: Use the Settings, Macro Manager function to reduce the

number of keystrokes you type and ensure consistency when
performing repeated tasks. A macro is a series of Mastercam
functions, commands, keystrokes, and other actions that you
can record, save, and play back at any time. Macros can make
detail work flow more quickly and easily.

Customizing Toolbar Settings (page 83)
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar Files (page 87)
Customizing Toolbar Functions (page 87)
Customizing Drop-down Menus (page 91)
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu (page 99)
Creating and Saving Toolbar States (page 101)
Hiding / Showing Toolbars (page 102)
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts (page 107)
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Customizing Your Workspace • 83
Customizing Toolbar Settings

Customized toolbar settings are stored as toolbar files (.MTB) in the 22
\CONFIG directory of the Mastercam installation location. Toolbar
files are completely portable and allow you to transform any
Mastercam installation in your shop into your own personal
workstation. 2
Each Mastercam toolbar file you create contains the following
information:
For each toolbar you define, a list of its functions, including
drop-down menus and submenus. 24
Functions in the right-mouse button menu.
All toolbar states that were created and saved to the .MTB file.
A toolbar state records the show / hide display status, physical
orientation, size, location, and docked / undocked state of
25
each toolbar at a specific point in time and is used to reload
this configuration.
Mastercam uses only one toolbar file at a time. However, when
running Mastercam, you can change the current toolbar file as often as
necessary.
26
This also applies to toolbar states. Although you can create and save
many named toolbar states in a single toolbar file, you load and work
with only one toolbar state at any given time. Creating separate toolbar
states for different job phases simplifies the interface and helps you
27
quickly locate the functions you need. For example, in your toolbar
file, you could create different toolbar states to facilitate working with
Design, 2D Mill, 3D Mill, Lathe, or Solids functions.
When you load a toolbar state, the workspace immediately changes to
28
the toolbar state configuration. You can also assign a toolbar state to a
machine definition in order to change the toolbar configuration each
time the associated machine definition is active in the Toolpath
Manager.
29
The following examples illustrate two toolbar states, Design and 3D
Router toolpaths.
210
2
Figure 2-1: Example: Design Toolbar State
CAM-related
toolbars hidden
Vertically docked
Sketcher toolbar
Figure 2-2: Example: 3D Router Toolpaths Toolbar State
Vertically docked
Toolpaths toolbars
Mastercam provides a number of standard toolbar files. They are

located in the Mastercam \CONFIG directory.
TIP: To open and load a toolbar file, choose Settings,

Customize, and then click Open. 22
Note: When you start Mastercam, it opens the default toolbar file
specified in the configuration file. You set the toolbar and other
startup parameters in the Settings, Configuration, Start / Exit
2
properties page. You will learn more about configuring Mastercam
defaults in “Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)” on
page 111.
24
To access the Customize dialog box, choose Settings, Customize from
the Mastercam menu. Fields and options in the Customize dialog box
are organized and displayed in two tabs: Toolbars (default) and Drop-
downs / Right-mouse button menu. 25
Figure 2-3: Toolbars tab (Customize dialog box)
26
27
28
29
In the Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, you can:
Remove or add functions in toolbars
210
Create new toolbars
Rename toolbars
Delete toolbars 2
Note: Use the Toolbar States button to access the Toolbar States
dialog box. You can also access this dialog box directly from the
Mastercam Settings menu. For more information on working
with toolbar states, see “Creating and Saving Toolbar States” on
page 101.
To create or modify drop-down menus, including the right-mouse

button menu, click the Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu tab.
Figure 2-4: Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu tab
(Customize dialog box)
In the Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu tab, you can:

Create new drop-down menus
Remove or add functions in drop-down menus
Rename drop-down menus
Delete drop-down menus
TIP: As you work with options in the Settings, Customize

dialog box, toolbars in the Mastercam window are updated so
you immediately see the results of changing the current toolbar
22
file. All Customize dialog box options interact with the
Mastercam window in this manner.
2
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar
Files
Options in the lower left corner of the Customize dialog box allow you
24
to:
Open an existing Mastercam toolbar file. Use the Open file
dialog box options to locate and open the .MTB file you want
to load.
25
Use options in the Save as dialog box to save the current
toolbar settings to a specified location and .MTB file name.
Reset toolbars to the standard Mastercam defaults. These
settings are the “factory defaults” and are stored in proprietary
26
Mastercam files. After loading the defaults, you can customize
them and use the Save as option to save them to an external
toolbar file.
Figure 2-5: Customize Toolbars: Open, Save, Reset
27
28
Open Save as Reset Current Toolbar file
29
Customizing Toolbar Functions
In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, all functions are
grouped by category. To view functions, select a category from the
drop-down list:
210
2
Figure 2-6: Customize dialog box: Category list
IMPORTANT: Categories do not represent standard toolbars.

Standard toolbars typically correspond to fixed Mastercam
menus and submenus. Toolbar categories are more general
groupings of related functions.
When you choose a category from the list, a group of function icons for
the selected category displays in the Commands section of the tab:
Figure 2-7: Example: Edit category functions (Customize dialog
box)
Selected
category
Selected
function
TIP: When you hover the mouse over the function icon, a brief
description (tool tip) of the function displays below the function
list. You can also display tool tips in the Mastercam window by
22
moving the cursor over toolbar icons, or buttons and fields in
ribbon bars or dialog boxes.
Use “drag and drop” methods to quickly add, delete, or rearrange the
2
functions in a toolbar.
Drag and Drop Visual Cues

When you drag a function from an existing toolbar or from the
24
Customize dialog box, Mastercam adds a visual cue to the cursor
pointer. Visual cues indicate what will happen if you drop the function
in the current position. They include: 25
No drop zone: The dragged icon is in a location
where it cannot be dropped. If you drop it there,
no change occurs. The icon remains in the toolbar
from which it was dragged or, if dragged from the
Customize dialog box, it is not added to a new or
26
existing toolbar.
Add function: If you drop the dragged icon to this

location, the function is added either to a selected
toolbar or to a new toolbar. If you do not drop the
27
icon on an existing toolbar, Mastercam
automatically creates the new toolbar.
Remove function: If you drop the dragged icon to 28

this location, it is removed from the selected
toolbar. This does not delete the function from
Mastercam; it is removed only from its position in
the toolbar. 29
Adding Functions and Toolbars
You can drag function icons from the Customize dialog box
Toolbars tab and drop them in an existing toolbar. You can also
210
create a new toolbar by dropping the function anywhere in the
Mastercam window except on an existing toolbar.
For each new toolbar you create, Mastercam assigns a default
toolbar name using a unique numeric identifier, as necessary (for
2
example New Toolbar, New Toolbar [1], New Toolbar [2]).
X To add functions from the Toolbars tab to a new or existing

toolbar:
1 Choose one of the following methods to access the Customize
dialog box:
Choose Settings, Customize from the Mastercam menu.
Right–click in the toolbar area or when the cursor is in a
toolbar and select Customize from the Toolbar Display
menu.
2 In the Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, click the Category
drop-down arrow, and choose a category to display its
functions.
3 Choose a function by selecting it with the left-mouse button.
Then hold down the button as you drag the function from the
Toolbars tab to a new location.
4 If you are adding the function to a new toolbar, skip to Step 5.
Otherwise, to place the function in a toolbar, drag and drop it
in a toolbar position.
TIP: If you drop a function in the wrong position, select it again,

and then drag and drop it in a new position.
5 To create a new toolbar for the function, drag and drop the
function anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not
occupied by a toolbar. Mastercam automatically creates a
toolbar named New Toolbar and adds the function to it.
6 To add additional functions to the new toolbar, repeat
Step 2-Step 4, as necessary. To rename the new toolbar,
continue with “Renaming and Deleting Toolbars” on page 91.
Moving Toolbar Functions

To rearrange toolbar functions in a toolbar, choose Settings,
Customize and just drag and drop the functions in the Mastercam
window from one position to another. Use the same technique to
move functions between toolbars.
Deleting Toolbar Functions

To delete a function from an existing toolbar, choose Settings,
Customize. Then drag the function from the toolbar and drop it in
anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not occupied by a toolbar.
Renaming and Deleting Toolbars
X To rename a toolbar:
22
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, from the
Toolbars list, select the toolbar to rename.
TIP: Toolbars are listed in ascending alphabetical sequence.

2
2 Right–click and choose Rename Toolbar from the menu.
3 In the toolbar name text field, type the new name, and then
press Enter to accept it and exit the name field.
24
X To delete a toolbar:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, select the
toolbar to delete from the Toolbars list.
25
2 Press Delete or right–click and choose Delete Toolbar from
the menu. The toolbar is deleted from the current toolbar file
and no longer appears in the toolbar list or the Mastercam
window. If you delete a standard toolbar, Mastercam displays
26
a warning message on startup informing you that it cannot
find the toolbar.
TIPS:
27
• To add the deleted toolbar back to the toolbar file, you must
recreate it using the procedure for “Adding Functions and
Toolbars” on page 89.
• To remove the toolbar from the Mastercam window without
28
deleting it from the toolbar file, deselect the check box that
appears next to the toolbar name in the Toolbars list.
29
Customizing Drop-down Menus
In the Settings, Customize dialog box and Drop-downs /
Right-mouse button menu tab, the Menus list displays all standard
210
and custom drop-down menus that are configured for your
Mastercam installation.
2
Figure 2-8: Customize dialog box: Menus list
Drop-down menus are collections of functions you add as a group to

toolbars and other drop-down menus. When added, they appear in the
toolbar or menu as a single function icon with an arrow indicating that
it can be expanded.
Figure 2-9: Example: Expanded drop-down menus
Toolbar drop-down arrow

and expanded menu
Drop-down submenu arrow
and expanded submenu
TIP: You can configure Mastercam to always show the icon of

the most recently used function as the drop-down menu icon in
the toolbar. Or you can fix the positions of drop-down and
submenu functions. For more information on setting this and
other screen parameters in the Settings, Configuration
function, see “Screen” on page 137.
Each function position in a Mastercam toolbar can support up to 10

levels of nested drop-down menus, with up to 50 items per drop-down
menu. With this flexibility, a single toolbar could hold every available
Mastercam function!
By incorporating drop-down menus into your toolbar design, you can
22
present many functions in a very compact format. Creating your own
drop-down menus lets you organize functions based on your
preferences and job requirements.
After creating drop-down menus, you use “drag and drop” methods to
2
add them to one or more toolbars in the Mastercam window or to
other drop-down menus in the Menus list.
You can also build your own right-mouse button menu, a special type
of drop-down menu that you access in the graphics window using the
24
right-mouse button.
In this section, you will learn to create a drop-down menu, rename it,
and add, remove, and rearrange its functions. You will also learn to add
a drop-down menu to a toolbar, add a submenu to a drop-down menu,
25
and delete drop-down menus.
For each new drop-down menu you create, Mastercam adds a
sequential counter to the default name, for example, New drop-down
menu, New drop-down menu(1), New drop-down menu(2) and so on.
26
This ensures that a unique name is assigned to each new drop-down
menu you create.
27
28
29
210
2
TIPS: Drop-down menus

that contain other drop-
down menus (submenus)
are indicated by a right
arrow icon.
• To display a popup list
of functions in the
submenu, hold the
cursor over the
submenu title.
• When adding a
function or a drop-
down menu by
dragging it to another
menu, if the target
menu is contracted,
you can expand it by
holding the cursor over it. This allows you to drop the new
items in a selected position. If you drop a function or
submenu in a contracted menu, it is added to the end of the
menu.
Creating Drop-down Menus
X To create a drop-down menu:

1 Choose one of the following methods to access the Customize
dialog box:
Choose Settings, Customize from the Mastercam menu.
Right–click in the toolbar area or when the cursor is in a
toolbar and select Customize from the Toolbar Display
menu.
2 In the Settings, Customize dialog box, open the Drop-downs
/ Right-mouse button menu tab.
3 Press the keyboard [Insert] button, or right–click in the Menus
list and choose the Add drop-down menu option. Mastercam
automatically assigns a unique new menu name, such as
“New drop down menu”, “New drop down menu (1)” and so
on. The new menu item displays at the end of the Menus list.
4 To rename the new menu, continue with “Renaming Drop-
down Menus” on page 95.
5 To add functions to the new menu, continue with “Adding

Drop-down Menu Functions” on page 96.
Renaming Drop-down Menus

22
X To rename a drop-down menu:
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-downs / 2
Right-mouse button menu tab, from the Menus list, select
the menu to rename. (With the exception of the Right-mouse
button menu, you can rename any drop-down menu.)
TIP: Drop-down menus are listed in ascending alphabetical

24
sequence. However, the right-mouse button menu displays at
the top of the list.
2 Right–click and choose the Rename drop-down menu

25
option.
3 In the menu name text field, type the new name and then
press Enter to accept it and exit the name field. 26
Note: Renaming the drop-down menu is associative. When
viewing the Menus list, all references to the renamed menu are also
updated, (for example, the renamed drop-down menu is used as a
submenu in other drop-down menus). However, this is not
27
reflected in the current Mastercam session and occurs only after
you exit and restart Mastercam.
Deleting Drop-down Menus

28
You can delete drop-down menus only if they are not currently used in
toolbars or as submenus in other drop-down menus. Prior to
performing this procedure, you must first remove the drop-down
29
menu you want to delete from toolbars and other drop-down menus.
X To delete a drop-down menu:

1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-downs / 210
Right-mouse button menu tab, from the Menus list, select
the menu to delete.
2 Press Delete or right–click and choose the Delete drop-down
menu option. If the drop-down menu is used in a toolbar or in 2
another drop-down menu, a message informs you and it is
not deleted. Otherwise, Mastercam deletes the selected drop-

down menu, removing it from the Menus list.
Adding Drop-down Menu Functions
X To add functions to a drop-down menu:

1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-downs /
Right-mouse button menu tab, click the Category drop-
down arrow and choose a category from the list to display its
functions.
2 Choose a function by selecting it with the left-mouse button.
Then hold down the button as you drag the function to a
drop-down menu in the Menus list.
3 To add the function to a drop-down menu, drop it in the
menu. If the drop-down menu is not expanded, the new
function is added as the last function. Otherwise, it is inserted
below the function on which it is dropped.
TIP: If you drop a function in the wrong position, select it again,

then drag and drop it in a new position.
4 To add additional functions to the drop-down menu, repeat

Step 1–Step 3, as necessary.
Notes:
• Adding or removing drop-down menu functions is associative.
When you add, remove, or rearrange functions in the “parent”
drop-down menu, all of its submenus immediately change.
• When you modify drop-down menus, you immediately see the
results in the current Mastercam session.
Moving Menu Functions

To rearrange functions in a drop-down menu, expand the menu in the
Menus list. Then drag and drop functions from one position to
another. The function you move is inserted below the function on
which it is dropped. Use the same technique to move functions
between drop-down menus.
Deleting Menu Functions

To delete a function from an existing drop-down menu, expand the 22
menu, select the function, then press the keyboard Delete key.
IMPORTANT: When deleting drop-down menu functions,

carefully choose one of the following options: 2
• To delete a single function from the menu, select it and press
Delete.
• To delete the entire menu, select it and press Delete or use
the right–click menu option Delete drop-down menu.
24
Adding Drop-down Menus to Toolbars 25
To add drop-down menus to toolbars, or create a new toolbar, drag a
drop-down menu from the Menus list and drop it in a toolbar or
anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not occupied by a toolbar.
X To add a drop-down menu to a toolbar:

26
1 From the Menus list in the Customize dialog box Drop-
downs / Right-mouse button menu tab, with the left-mouse
button, select the drop-down menu to add to the toolbar.
2 Hold down the mouse button and drag the drop-down menu
27
to an existing toolbar position. Then drop the menu in the
position.
TIP: To create a new toolbar for the drop-down menu, drop the
28
menu anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not occupied
by a toolbar. Mastercam automatically creates a toolbar (New
Toolbar) and adds the drop-down menu to it. For more
information on configuring toolbars, see “Customizing Toolbar
29
Settings” on page 83.
Adding Submenus to Drop-down Menus 210

Mastercam supports up to 10 levels of nesting for drop-down lists and
submenus. First, define all submenus as drop-down menus (see
“Creating Drop-down Menus” on page 94). Then, in the Customize
dialog box Menus list, select and drag a drop-down menu to a 2
submenu position in another menu. When you drop it, Mastercam
creates a submenu item in the drop-down list.
Figure 2-10: Example: Nested drop-down menus
Figure 2-11: Example: Multi-level drop-down toolbar
Here are a few things to keep in mind when working with submenus:
Creating a submenu item does not move or otherwise change
the drop-down menu on which it is based; it creates only an
associative link, using the name of the submenu.
When you add, remove, or rearrange functions in the “parent”
drop-down menu, all of its submenus immediately change.
To create multiple levels of submenus, begin with the last
drop-down menu in the series and work your way to the
highest menu level. For example, to create a three-level drop-
down menu, first create all three drop-down menus. Then,
drag and drop the third level menu to the second level menu.
Next, drag the second level menu (which now includes a
submenu link to the third level menu) to the first menu.
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu

Mastercam includes a special type of drop-down menu that you access 22
with the right-mouse button any time the cursor is in the graphics
window. To create a convenient list of shortcuts, you can add, remove,
or rearrange functions and submenus in the right-mouse button menu
using the same procedures as with other drop-down menus. For an
alternate method of access, you can even add the right-mouse button
2
drop-down menu to a toolbar, or as a submenu to another drop-down
menu.
Figure 2-12: Example: Right-click mouse button menu 24
25
26
27
Note: You cannot delete or rename the right-mouse button menu

28
from Mastercam. To disable it, remove all of its functions.
29
210
2
Adding Separators to Toolbars / Menus

You can add vertical and horizontal separators to toolbars and drop-
down menus to create a visual break, for example, to isolate a single
function, or group similar functions.
Horizontal and
vertical separators
In the Customize dialog box, the Separator button

displays in the upper right section of each tab.
X To add vertical separators to toolbars:

1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars
tab, choose the Separator button with the left-mouse button.
2 Hold down the mouse button, and drag the separator to a
toolbar position in the Mastercam window.
3 Release the mouse button to drop the vertical separator in the
selected position.
X To add horizontal separators to drop-down menus:

1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-down /
Right-mouse button menu tab, expand the drop-down menu
in the Menus list.
2 Choose the Separator button with the left-mouse button, and
then drag it to a position in the expanded drop-down menu.
Mastercam adds the separator below the menu function on
which it is dropped, so position the separator accordingly.
3 Release the mouse button to drop a SEPARATOR label in the

selected position. When viewing the drop-down menu in the
Mastercam window, a horizontal separator displays in the
SEPARATOR label position.
22
TIP: To reposition a separator, drag and drop it to a new
position in the toolbar or drop-down menu. 2
X To remove separators from toolbars:
1 In the Mastercam window, select the toolbar separator to
remove.
24
2 Drag and drop it anywhere in the Mastercam window that is
not occupied by a toolbar.
X To remove separators from drop-down menus:

25
1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-down /
Right-mouse button tab, expand the drop-down menu in the
Menus list.
2 Select the SEPARATOR label to remove, and press the
26
keyboard [Delete] key.
Creating and Saving Toolbar States 27

A toolbar state is a “snapshot” of the display status (show/hide),
physical orientation, size, location, and the docked / undocked state of
all toolbars in the Mastercam window at a specific point in time.
When you load a toolbar state, you restore a customized toolbar layout
28
to the Mastercam window in order to work with toolbars in a certain
configuration. For example, you might create and save different
toolbar states for working with 2D toolpaths and 3D toolpaths, or with
Lathe, Mill, Router, and Wire machine definitions. 29
TIP: In the Settings, Machine Definition Manager dialog box,
you can assign a toolbar state to a machine definition. When
you open the machine in a machine group (for example, to
create toolpaths for it), the assigned toolbar state automatically
210
loads in the Mastercam window.
Use the Settings, Toolbar States function to access the Toolbar States
dialog box where you can view, create, save, load or delete toolbar
2
states that are stored in the current toolbar file.
Note: You can also access this dialog box by choosing Settings,
Customize and clicking the Toolbar States button in the Toolbar
tab.
Figure 2-13: Toolbar States dialog box
TIP: To set a default toolbar state that loads whenever you

open the toolbar file or start up Mastercam, select a toolbar
state from the list. Then select the Default check box. An
asterisk displays next to the toolbar state name, indicating that it
is the default.
Although you use a separate function to work with them, toolbar states
are stored in binary format within a section of the current toolbar file
(.MTB). To open and load a toolbar file, use the Settings, Customize
function, and then click the Open file button , located in the lower left
corner.
Hiding / Showing Toolbars

Mastercam provides standard toolbars you can modify, rename, or
delete. You can also create an unlimited number of your own toolbars.
Use the Show these toolbars portion of the Toolbar States dialog box
to view all standard and custom toolbars that have been configured for
your Mastercam installation, and to modify display status settings.
Only toolbars with a display status of “show” appear in the Mastercam
interface.
Figure 2-14: Toolbar States dialog box,

Show these toolbars list
22
Show
Hide
2
24
25
26
27
28
29
210
2
When creating or modifying a toolbar state, use the following methods

to set each toolbar’s display status (show/hide):
To show a toolbar in the Mastercam window, select the check
box next to the toolbar name (selected toolbars are indicated
with a check mark).
To hide a toolbar from display, clear the check mark next to
the toolbar name by deselecting it.
As you select / deselect toolbars, they display in, or are removed from,
the Mastercam window.
X To create a toolbar state:

1 Use one of the following methods to access the Toolbar States
dialog box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Settings, Toolbar
States.
In the Settings, Customize function and dialog box, click
the Toolbar States button.
2 Set the toolbar display status for all toolbars you want to hide
or show in the toolbar state.
3 In the Mastercam window, drag and drop toolbars to
reposition, resize, and dock or undock them.
4 To save the layout as a toolbar state, in the Toolbar States
dialog box, type the name of the new toolbar state in the name
field and choose Save. The new toolbar state is added to the
toolbar file and displays in the Toolbar States list.
X To load a toolbar state:

1 To view all toolbar states in the current toolbar file, use one of
the following methods to access the Toolbar States dialog
box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Settings, Toolbar
States.
In the Settings, Customize function and dialog box, click
the Toolbar States button.
2 In the Toolbar States list, select the name of the toolbar state
to load and click the Load button. The Mastercam window is
updated with the selected toolbar state.
3 To close the dialog box, click OK.
X To delete a toolbar state:

1 In the Toolbar States dialog box, choose one of the following
options: 22
To delete a single toolbar state, select the name of the
toolbar state to delete and click the Delete button. The
selected toolbar state is removed from the list.
To delete all toolbar states, click the Delete All button.
2
TIP: To restore deleted toolbar states, click Reset before exiting
this dialog box.
24
2 To close the dialog box, click OK.
25
26
27
28
29
210
2
Using the Toolbar Right–Click Menu

From any position in the Mastercam
window toolbar area, or when the cursor is
positioned in a toolbar, you can right–click
to access the Toolbar Display menu and
view a list of all toolbars and their display
status.
To change the current display status of a
single toolbar and close the menu, select it
from the list. The selected toolbar changes
to show or hide in the Mastercam window,
based on its initial setting.
Use other menu options to access the
Customize and Toolbar States dialog
boxes or to quickly select and load a
toolbar state from the current .MTB file.
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts

Use the Settings, Key mapping function and dialog box to map 22
Mastercam commands to your own keyboard shortcuts.
Figure 2-15: Key mapping dialog box
2
24
25
26
You can map any Mastercam function to a key sequence you define.
Rather than selecting a function from a menu or toolbar with the
27
mouse, use your custom keyboard shortcut to open the function.
Key map files have a .KMP file extension and reside in the \CONFIG
directory of the Mastercam installation location. You can load a new
key mapping file at any time during the Mastercam session. Key
28
mapping files are also portable. You can copy and use them on other
Mastercam workstations, provided you save them in the correct
directory (\CONFIG).
The combinations of key sequences you can use to create keyboard
29
shortcuts are listed below (where Key is the alphanumeric character or
keyboard function keys F1-F12).
[Alt]+[Key] [Ctrl]+[Key] 210

[Ctrl]+[Alt]+ [Key] [Shift]+[Alt]+[Key]
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+[Key]
[F1]-[F12]
[Shift]+[Ctrl]+Alt]+[Key]
2
Note: When mapping shortcut keys, you cannot use a single

alphanumeric key or one in combination with a [Shift] key. These
shortcuts are reserved and used by Mastercam for data entry
shortcuts, AutoCursor power keys, and ribbon bar and dialog box
options.

Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping Files
Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments
Removing Shortcut Assignments (page 110)
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping Files

Options in the lower left corner of the Key mapping dialog box allow
you to:
Open and load an existing Mastercam key mapping file. Use
the Open file dialog box options to locate and choose the
.KMP file you want to load.
Use options in the Save as dialog box to save the current key
map settings to a specified location and .KMP file.
Reset All key mappings to the standard Mastercam “factory
defaults”. After loading the defaults, you can customize them
and use the Save as option to save them to a new key
mapping file.
Figure 2-16: Key mapping: Open, Save, Reset
Current Key
Reset map filename
Open Save as
Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments
X To add or modify a shortcut assignment:

22
1 Choose Settings, Key mapping from the Mastercam menu.
2 In the Key mapping dialog box, click the Category drop-down

arrow, and choose a category from the list to display its
functions.
2
3 In the Commands section, select the icon of the function to
map. If a keyboard shortcut is already assigned, it displays in
the Current keys text field. 24
4 To assign a new shortcut, position the cursor in the Press new
shortcut key field and use the keyboard to type the key
sequence. If Mastercam can assign the shortcut, the entered
sequence displays in the Press new shortcut key field (for
example, Alt+Shift+D).
25
5 To accept the new shortcut, choose Assign.
6 If the shortcut you entered is already assigned to another

function, a message displays, similar to the example below:
26
27
To reassign the key sequence to the selected function,
choose Yes.
28
To keep its original assignment and re-enter a different key
sequence for the selected command, choose No, and go
back to Step 4. 29
Note: If a shortcut is already assigned to the function, Mastercam
does not replace it. The new shortcut is added, allowing you to use
multiple shortcuts to access the function. All active shortcuts
display in the Current keys text field. 210
2
Removing Shortcut Assignments
X To remove a shortcut assignment:

1 Choose Settings, Key mapping from the Mastercam menu.
2 In the Key mapping dialog box, click the Category drop-down

arrow, and choose a category from the list to display its
functions.
3 Select the Command associated with the shortcut to delete.
4 In the Current keys text field, select the shortcut and click
Remove. The shortcut is removed from its assignment to the
selected command and can now be assigned to another
command.
CUSTOMIZING AND CONFIGURING MASTERCAM X / Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) • 111
Setting Defaults and Preferences

(Configuration)
22
This section describes how to use the Configuration function in the 2
Settings menu to configure your Mastercam defaults and preferences,
and how to save this information to a specified configuration file
(.CONFIG).
In this function, you configure Mastercam’s base unit of measurement 24
(metric or inch), choose a graphics support platform such as OpenGL,
set default chaining options, activate Learning mode for additional
ribbon bar support, define the number of functions you want to view
in most-recently used (MRU) toolbars and lists, and much more. 25
This section includes information on:
Configuring Mastercam X (page 111)
Managing Configuration Files (page 112)
Merging Configuration Files (page 158)
26
Note: For more information on working with toolpath defaults
(.DEFAULTS files), see “Toolpath Defaults” on page 56, and
“Editing Toolpath Defaults” on page 751.
27
Configuring Mastercam X 28
Mastercam default settings are stored as files with a .CONFIG
extension in the Mastercam \CONFIG directory. Mastercam uses
settings from the configuration file as default values when you restart
or initialize operations, for example, when creating a new part, or
opening and importing existing parts.
29
Mastercam provides standard configuration files with your initial
installation, in both inch and metric units. You can customize them,
create your own, and even merge configuration files. If multiple users
share a single Mastercam installation, each unique user can
210
automatically load a customized default configuration file when
logging in to the workstation and running Mastercam.
Mastercam uses only one configuration file at a time. However, when
running Mastercam, you can change the configuration file as often as
2
necessary.
Use the Settings, Configuration function and System Configuration

dialog box to review and set Mastercam default values, and to manage
the configuration files that store these values.
Managing Configuration Files

The changes you make to configuration settings can be temporary,
affecting only the current session, or you can save them to a
configuration file for reuse. In the System Configuration dialog box,
you can modify and save changes to the current configuration file,
create a new configuration file, or open another configuration file and
merge selected settings into the current file.
Figure 2-17: System Configuration Save options
Save As Merge Current configuration file

Save As: Opens the Configuration name dialog box, which lets
you save the current configuration file using the same or a
different file name. You can also use the drop-down list to
select an existing configuration file to overwrite.
Note: The .CONFIG file type and a fixed “save as” location
(Mastercam \CONFIG directory) are required and cannot be
changed.
Merge: Opens the Configuration File Merge dialog box that

lets you merge configuration files and select which defaults
you want to retain in the resulting file.
Current: Displays the name of the configuration file currently
in effect and to which the defaults defined on all System
Configuration pages will be saved. To select a different
configuration file as the current file, click the arrow and
choose a file from the list. All .CONFIG files stored in the
Mastercam \CONFIG directory display in the list for selection.
Setting Default Values

The System Configuration dialog box consists of various properties 22
pages that group related default values and settings. To access a
properties page, click its name in the list of configuration topics in the
left pane.
Figure 2-18: System Configuration dialog box 2
24
25
26
27
When you change a setting on a page, a check mark displays in front of
it so that you can track where you have made changes during an
editing session. To save these changes, you must save the
configuration file. Otherwise, the changes are applied to the current
28
session and persist only until you close and restart Mastercam.
29
210
2
In this section, you will review some of the configuration settings in

the following properties pages:
Analyze (page 115) Printing (page 136)
Backplot (page 115) Screen (page 137) and Grid

Settings (page 139)
CAD Settings (page 117) Shading (page 141)
Chaining (page 118) Solids (page 142)
Colors (page 119) Start / Exit (page 143)
Communications (page 120) Tolerances (page 146)
Converters (page 121) Toolpaths (page 148)
Default Machines Toolpath Manager (page 149)

(page 123)
Dimensions and Verify Interface (page 153)

Notes (page 125)
Files (page 131) and Wire Backplot (page 157)

AutoSave / Backup
(page 133)
Post Dialog Defaults

(page 135)
For detailed information on specific parameters, access the
online Help by clicking the Help icon on any properties
page. Then click the Field Definitions tab and choose a
parameter to display more information.
Analyze
Use this page to set the default precision (the number of places after 22
the decimal point) with which the Analyze function displays values.
You can also set the default precision and measurement unit
specifically for the Analyze distance dialog box. The precision setting
for the Analyze distance dialog box depends on whether the selected
measurement unit is decimal or fractional, as follows:
2
Decimal values can be displayed with 0 to 8 decimal places−
for example, 1.345.
Fractional values can be displayed with a fractional precision 24
setting of 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, 1/32, or 1/64−for example, 2 3/4”.
(Fractional values apply only to the Feet Inches Fractional
unit of measurement.)
Figure 2-19: Analyze properties page (System Configuration) 25
26
27
28
29
Backplot
Use this property page to set parameters that affect how a tool moves 210
and appears on the screen during a backplot operation. These
parameters include:
General Settings (Tool Motion)

Step speed and increments
2
Screen cleanup on operation and/or tool change
Milling tool display options

Tool Appearance
Tool color and material
Holder color and material
Motion colors
Figure 2-20: Backplot properties page (System Configuration)
The parameters you choose are for display purposes only and do not
affect the part when it is machined.
Although the General Settings display parameters are available for
each Mastercam toolpath type, the following options affect only the
display of milling tools during backplot:
Simulate Axis Substitution
Simulate Mill Cutter Compensation
Show move to/from Mill Home Position
Simulate Rotary Axis
Similarly, the following Tool Appearance options also apply only to the
display of milling tools during backplot.
Plain, Fluted, and Shaded tool options
Tool color and material
Show holder, holder color, and holder material
CAD Settings
The CAD Settings properties page is where you set design and drafting 22
preferences, including defaults for:
Automating and formatting arc center lines
Center line attributes (line style, line width, point style)
Spline and surface creation type
2
Surface drawing density and back highlighting
Whether to update Cplane and Tplane when changing Gviews
Xform preview settings 24
Managing duplicate entities created by Xform functions
Arc center point display
Entity Attribute Manager settings
Figure 2-21: CAD Settings properties page
25
(System Configuration)
26
27
28
29
Note: You can override many of these defaults using Status bar
options and when using functions to create, edit, and analyze
210
geometric and drafting entities.
2
Chaining
Use this page to define the way Mastercam chains entities, including:
Chaining mask options
Methods for sorting multiple, nested chains
Default chaining mode and direction
The values you set in this page are used as defaults in the Chaining
dialog box. This dialog box displays whenever you are required to
chain geometry.
You chain entities in preparation for a function such as toolpath or
surface creation by selecting them in a specific order. Chaining
sequences the entities in the toolpath operation and determines the
direction of tool travel during machining. When creating surfaces and
solids, chained geometry makes up the surface sections or boundaries.
You can use chaining as an efficient method for entity selection in
Analyze and Create functions.
Figure 2-22: Chaining properties page (System Configuration)
TIP: You can override the defaults you set in the

Settings, Configuration, Chaining properties page by
selecting the Chaining options button in the Chaining
dialog box.
Colors
You can set default colors for many different aspects of the Mastercam 22
interface, such as the graphics background (including gradients),
geometry, construction origin, grid, groups, and various Mill, Lathe,
Solids, and Surfaces components.
Figure 2-23: Colors properties page (System Configuration) 2
24
25
26
27
Notes:
• To preserve changes to default color settings for subsequent
Mastercam sessions, you must save the configuration file.
28
• To temporarily change default colors for selected entities or new
entities you create during the current Mastercam session, use
the Color function from the Status Bar. 29
210
2
Communications
Use the fields on this page to configure the default serial
communications settings between the control and the computer
running Mastercam. The settings you enter here are default values that
Mastercam loads when it starts. They can be changed when you post
the operations from the Post processing dialog box.
Figure 2-24: Communications properties page
Converters
When you open part files that are not in the current .MCX Mastercam 22
format or when you save them to an external file format, Mastercam
automatically runs a conversion program, based on the selected file
type (for example, IGES, VDA, STEP, SAT, Parasolid, DWG, or DXF.)
In the Converters properties page, you set defaults for file conversions, 2
including:
How solids are imported and exported
How STL files are exported
The level used for untrimmable surfaces
24
How units are converted
The method used to convert solids:
Convert the solid to a Mastercam solid (without 25
operation history). If you do not have Mastercam Solids
installed, you can still machine the imported solid.
However, Mastercam Solids must be installed to modify
a solid, or create additional solids.
Convert each face to a trimmed surface. With either of
26
these options, you can elect to convert edges to curve
geometry (line, arc, or spline). With the Solids option,
you can also attempt to repair broken solids during
import.
27
28
29
210
2
Figure 2-25: Converters properties page

TIP: When converting files, use the File, Open function and
choose Options to override or set additional conversion
parameters.
Default Machines
Use this property page to set default machine definitions for 22
Mastercam Mill, Mastercam Lathe, Mastercam Router, and Mastercam
Wire. Once you make these selections, you can create a machine group
from the default machine by choosing the Default command in the
Machine Type submenus. 2
Figure 2-26: Default Machines properties page
24
25
26
27
For example, suppose you want to make the GENERIC HAAS 4X MILL
machine definition the default for the mill machine type. In the
28
Default Machines property page, select the GENERIC HAAS 4X MILL
machine definition:
29
210
Now, to setup a machine group with the default mill, choose Machine
Type, Mill, Default:
2
In the Operations Manager, Mastercam creates a machine group using

the GENERIC HAAS 4X MILL machine definition:
Notes:
• To change default settings for other types of files, use the Files
property page.
• To select a machine definition for Mastercam to load at startup,
use the Default machine option in the Start/Exit property
page.
Dimensions and Notes

Use the following properties pages to set parameters and defaults for 22
different types of drafting dimension entities:
Dimension Attributes (page 126)
Dimension Text (page 127)
Dimension Settings (page 128)
2
Note Text (page 129)
Leaders / Witness (page 130)
TIPS:
24
• As you modify options in the drafting dimension properties
pages, you immediately see their effect in the preview
diagram area of each page. Use the preview to verify your
selections.
25
• To temporarily change drafting default parameters for the
current Mastercam session, choose Drafting Options from
the Create, Drafting submenu. 26
27
28
29
210
2
Dimension Attributes
You define the following defaults in the Dimension Attributes
properties page:
Display format and scale
Text centering
Symbols or units used to display radius, diameter, and angular
dimensions
Tolerance settings for linear and angular dimensions
Figure 2-27: Dimension Attributes properties page
Dimension Text
The default text properties you can set for drafting dimensions in this
page include:
22
Text height, width, and spacing
Text path or direction
Point dimension text display 2
Ordinate dimension: display negative sign
Line and borders
Font
Text alignment/orientation
24
Slant and rotation
Figure 2-28: Dimension Text properties page
(System Configuration) 25
26
27
28
29
If you select the Factors option, dimension text height also determines
tolerance text height, dimension arrowhead height and width, and
witness line gap and extension, based on factors you enter in the
Factors of Dimension Text Height dialog box.
210
If you do not select the Factors option, you can set these parameters
directly on the Dimension Text properties page (tolerance text height)
or the Leaders/Witness properties page (witness line and arrow head
parameters).
2
Dimension Settings
The Dimension Settings properties page lets you associate
dimensions, labels, leaders, and witness lines with entities as the
entities are created. You can set the method Mastercam uses to
regenerate associated drafting entities. You can limit the views in
which entities can be displayed, and define increments used for
baseline dimensions.
Figure 2-29: Dimension Settings properties page
Use the Save/Get functions on this tab to save drafting parameters to a

.CAD file, get drafting parameters from a selected entity, load
parameters previously saved in a .CAD file, or get original,
system-defined default parameters.
Note Text
Drafting notes and labels are blocks of text (one or more lines) that you
insert into a drawing.
22
Notes are standalone blocks of text, whereas labels have one or more
leader lines used as pointers.
When you create note and label drafting entities, Mastercam uses the 2
following settings in the Note Text properties page to format the text.
Text height, width, and Lines and borders

spacing 24
Text path or direction Font
Horizontal and vertical Mirroring

alignment 25
Angle, slant, and rotation
Figure 2-30: Note Text properties page (System Configuration)
26
27
28
29
If you select the Factors option, note text height also determines note/
210
label arrowhead height and width, based on factors you can enter in
the Factors of Note Text Height dialog box. If you do not select the
Factors option, you can set the note/label arrowhead height and width
parameters directly in the Leaders/Witness properties page. 2
Leaders / Witness
In Mastercam, leader lines (drafting lines with single arrowheads that
function as pointers) most often point from a dimension’s text to its
witness lines.
Witness lines are lines that project from a dimensioned object to
indicate the extent of the leader lines.
Use this page to set the default properties for:
Leader lines: Style, visibility, and arrow direction
Witness lines: Visibility, gap, and extension
Arrows: style, Height, and width
Figure 2-31: Leaders / Witness properties page
Files
Use the Files properties page to select the files you want Mastercam to 22
use as defaults, define the default data paths for saving different file
types, configure Most Recently Used (MRU) drop-down menu settings,
and define options for opening and saving files.
Figure 2-32: Files properties page (System Configuration) 2
24
25
26
27
The Data Paths column lists files formats you can save out from
Mastercam and allows you to set a default data path for saving each
type, for example, C:\Metric\MCX\.
28
The Files Usage column lists all the file types for which you can open a
default file during Mastercam processing, for example, libraries,
control and machine definitions, and post processors. Mastercam
opens the default files you set in this list, when necessary.
29
In the Data Paths and File Usage lists, first select an item in the list.
Then use the Selected item field, located below the list, to specify the
default value.
In the Files Usage section, you specify a default machine definition for
210
each Mastercam product (Mill, Lathe, Router, or Wire). When you
convert a part file created prior to Mastercam X, or you choose to
create a new Mastercam X file, the default machine definition for the
product type is assigned. If the default machine definition is
2
incompatible with the part, a special Mastercam read-only default
machine definition is used instead.
The Apply last machine definition check box in the Files properties
page allows you to change this behavior. When you select this option,
Mastercam applies the most recently used machine definition in the
current Mastercam session, for each product type. If one has not been
used, or if it is incompatible with the part, the default machine
definition you specified in the Files Usage list is used. If this default is
incompatible, the read-only default machine definition is applied.
AutoSave / Backup
Use this page to activate Mastercam’s AutoSave and Incremental
backup functions. AutoSave lets you save the current geometry and
22
operations automatically at specific time intervals (for example, every
10 minutes). Use these options to define the AutoSave and backup
behaviors that can reduce data loss in the event of a hardware or
power failure. 2
Figure 2-33: AutoSave / Backup properties page
24
25
26
27
28
Incremental Backup
When you activate the MCX Backup Files option (located in the Files
page of the Configuration dialog box), Mastercam stores not only the 29
210
2
current version of your MCX file, but also previous versions. You can
then easily return your project to a previously saved state.
Specifically, when you save an MCX file with MCX Backup Files active,
Mastercam creates a backup using the values specified in the MCX
Backup Files options. For example, suppose you have a file named
Test.MCX. Suppose also that you have Delimiter set to a hyphen, Start
set to 100, Increment set to 1, and Max Limit set to 3. Here is what
Mastercam does with your MCX saves:
The first time you save Test.MCX, Mastercam creates the
backup file Test-100.MCX. You now have two copies of the file,
Test.MCX and the first backup, Test-100.MCX.
The second time you save Test.MCX, Mastercam renames
Test-100.MCX to Test-101.MCX and creates a new Test-
100.MCX from Test.MCX. Now you have three files, which are
the original and two backups.
The third time you save, Mastercam renames Test-101.MCX to
Test-102.MCX, renames Test-100.MCX to Test-101.MCX, and
creates a new Test-100.MCX from Test.MCX. Now you have
four files: the original and three backups. Note that, in this
example, three backups is the currently set Max Limit.
The fourth time you save, Mastercam deletes Test-102.MCX
(because Mastercam has reached the Max Limit number of
backups), renames Test-101.MCX to Test-102.MCX, Test-
100.MCX to Test-101.MCX, and creates a new Test-100.MCX
from Test.MCX. Now you still have four files: the original and
the most current three backups.
Note that the most current backup version has the Start number. That
is, the higher the version number appended to the file, the older the
file.
Post Dialog Defaults

The properties you define in this page set the default post processing 22
parameters for new control definitions. When creating a new control
definition, you can choose to keep the defaults or specify new settings
in the Post processing dialog box.
These settings include, for example, whether to save the NCI and/or 2
NC file or to edit the existing file. For each file save, you can choose to
overwrite the existing file automatically, or have Mastercam ask you
whether to overwrite it. You can set up Mastercam to create an ASCII
NCI file (called an Operation file), and specify the NC file extension.
You can also send the NC program to the machine automatically.
24
Figure 2-34: Post Dialog Defaults properties page
25
26
27
28
29
210
2
Printing
Use this page to set initial, default parameters for printing part
drawings, including line width, color printing, header name, and date.
Figure 2-35: Printing properties page (System Configuration)
When you choose File, Print to print entities in the graphics window,
you can use options in the Print dialog box to temporarily override the
settings you define here.
Notes:
• When printing, use the Print dialog box to preview, modify
default settings, and to set other options, such as orientation,
page margins, image scaling, and line widths.
• To change printer driver properties, choose Property from the
Print dialog box, and then choose Properties from the Page
Setup dialog box.
Screen
Use the Screen properties page to set the graphics parameters that 22
control how Mastercam looks and operates, and to define your
personal display and selection preferences.
Figure 2-36: Screen properties page (System Configuration)
2
24
25
26
27
Screen Appearance Options
Select a graphics support platform (GDI or OpenGL) based on
your installed graphics card and acceleration. Hardware
acceleration is enabled You can optionally choose to disable
28
hardware acceleration or disable the front buffer.
Enable part information display, including world coordinate
axes and part scale.
Use large or small toolbar buttons.
29
Enable the most recently used (MRU) toolbar in the
Mastercam window and define how many buttons it can
display.
Enable drop-down toolbar menus to move the MRU function
210
to the top of the list so that it displays directly in the toolbar
for easy selection.
Configure Auto-highlight to select complete solids or just
faces.
2
Display Learning Mode prompts when you move your mouse

pointer over certain interface elements to display extra screen
help.
Show or hide viewport and working coordinate system (WCS)
axis markers.
Select unrestricted part rotation with dynamic spin.
Show tooltips when the mouse hovers over icons, fields,
buttons, and other interface elements. Set the tooltip delay.
Middle Mouse Button / Wheel Options
You can configure the action that occurs in the Mastercam window
when you hold down the middle mouse button / wheel and move the
mouse:
Pan: Maintains the current Gview, but drags the entities in the
graphics window in the direction of the mouse (the entities
are not physically moved in space, only the display changes).
Spin: Dynamically rotates the entities in the graphics window
in 3D space and changes the Gview settings.
Reverse: Reverses the zoom direction associated with the
mouse wheel.
Entity Selection and Display Options
Allow pre-selection of screen entities.
Set Level Manager dialog display defaults.
Make the main level always visible.
Specify number of entities for dynamic rotation.
Notes:
• To set default colors for Mastercam screen and entity display,
use the Colors properties page.
• To turn off the ability to pre-select entities before choosing a
function, deselect the Allow Pre-selection check box.
• To set default shading parameters for Mastercam geometry, use
the Shading properties page.
Grid Settings
Use this page to configure the default settings for Mastercam's grid
function. By setting up a grid in the graphics window, you can force
22
entities to "snap" to specific positions. For example, to draw entities
whose locations and dimensions are always multiples of a half inch,
set your grid X and Y values to 0.5.
Figure 2-37: Grid Settings properties page
2
24
25
26
27
Specifically, the selection grid is a matrix of reference points that the
cursor snaps to when you sketch a point. Snapping to the selection
grid provides a finer level of precision than sketching points freehand.
28
29
210
2
The following picture shows a set of rectangles drawn on a 1/2-inch

grid. The dashed lines represent the X and Y axes. The dots mark each
1/2-inch location in the grid.
Note: To modify the grid settings for the current drawing, choose
Screen, Screen Grid Settings from the Mastercam menu. The
changes you make from the menu override the initial
configuration parameters for the remainder of the current session.
Shading
Shading values determine how surfaces and solids appear when 22
shaded. Use this page to set default shading parameters such as color,
ambient lighting, spot lighting, hidden edges, and other properties.
Figure 2-38: Shading properties page (System Configuration)
2
24
25
26
27
Notes:
• To temporarily override default shading parameters during the
current Mastercam session, choose Shade Settings from the
Screen menu or Shading toolbar. This opens the Shading
28
Settings dialog box.
• To make permanent changes to shading parameter defaults, use
the Settings, Configuration function and Shading properties
page. Then save the changes to your .CONFIG file.
29
210
2
Solids
Options in this page allow you to pre-define how Mastercam creates
and displays solids, including:
Where to add new solids operations in the Solids Manager:
ahead of toolpath operations or in the order in which they are
performed.
Enable/disable the Auto-Highlight for Solids Manager.
Specify a radial display curve angle for circular faces.
Set defaults for stitching surfaces into solids.
Figure 2-39: Solids properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
• You can also enable or disable Auto-Highlight from the Solids
Manager right-click menu.
• To change default shading parameters for solids display during
the current Mastercam session, choose Shade Settings from
the Screen menu or Shading toolbar to open the Shading
• To specify whether Auto-Highlight selects complete solids or just
faces, use the Configuration, Screen page.
• To set default shading parameters for Mastercam geometry,
including solids, use the Configuration, Shading page.
Start / Exit
This page is where you set the default values to use during Mastercam 22
startup and to automate certain functions when you exit Mastercam.
You can select the default editor that launches when you edit NC files
after post processing and specify the add-on programs that run when
you start or exit Mastercam. 2
Figure 2-40: Start / Exit properties page
24
25
26
27
Start/Exit properties you can customize include: 28
Startup configuration file: Select one of the startup
configuration files included with Mastercam. The startup
configuration file contains all the settings in effect when you
start Mastercam. The file name may indicate the Mastercam
product (for example, MILL) and the units (for example,
29
Metric).
Note: Mastercam provides two default configuration files that

display in the drop-list as DEFAULT (English) and DEFAULT
210
(Metric). The configuration files cannot be deleted.
Default toolbar and key map files: Set a default Mastercam

toolbar (.MTB) file to load stored toolbar settings and a default 2
key mapping (.KMP) file containing stored key mappings.
Custom key mapping files are created using the Settings, Key
mapping function. You can select any key map file that is
saved to the Mastercam \CONFIG subdirectory.
Default startup product: From the drop-down list, select the
product to load at startup, such as Design, Mill, Lathe, Router,
or Wire.
Default construction plane (2D or 3D mode): Select the
default construction plane (Cplane) where geometry is
created. The list options include: Top, Front, Right, Bottom,
Back, and Left. The +XZ, -XZ, +DZ and -DZ planes are used
only in Mastercam Lathe. You can also select a 2D (XY) or 3D
(XYZ) default Cplane.
Default file editor: Indicates the default editor that
Mastercam uses when you open external application files. To
change this setting, select another editor from the drop-down
list. File editors included with your Mastercam installation
are:
Mastercam Editor (default) - A full-featured,
proprietary text editor that offers menu, toolbar, and
key mapping customization tools, intelligent full-text
editing—including support for specialized NC
functions, flexible serial communications built on
portable XML machine configuration files, and faster
performance when working with large NC files.
Cimco - A special version of Cimco Edit, licensed for
use with Mastercam.
PFE32 - Programmer's File Editor (32-bit Edition).
MCEDIT - An editor that provides utilities for editing
NC and NCI files along with optional transmission
capabilities.
Notepad - The default editor for Mastercam's Draft and
Demo products.
To use any other editing application that may be available to
you, choose Other, and use the Select an editor dialog box to
navigate to and select the executable file of the editor you
want to use. The selected editor is added to the Editor drop-
down list and becomes your startup default editor.
Default MCX part file name: Specify a default Mastercam part
filename prefix, such as MyPart. This filename appears as a
default in Mastercam Save and Save as dialog boxes. The
default file extension is .MCX (MyPart.MCX).
Current configuration’s units: Indicates or lets you select
default configuration units, as follows:
Inch: When selected, indicates that the current

configuration file units are English (inches).
Metric: When selected, indicates that the current
22
configuration file units are metric (millimeters).
Note: These options are available only when a user-defined (not a

DEFAULT) configuration file is loaded. 2
Startup, exit, or default add-in programs: Set up a third-party
C-Hook program (.DLL) that you want Mastercam to run on
startup or shutdown, and also define a default add-in
program (.DLL or .VBS) to associate with the Alt+C keyboard
24
shortcut.
Undo operations: To optimize your PC’s performance, we
recommend that you limit the number of Undo events that
Mastercam saves in RAM for your session. When checked, the
25
Undo operations field enables fields that let you limit Undo
events by number as well as by the memory required to store
the states associated with these events.
26
27
28
29
210
2
Tolerances
The options you define in the Tolerances properties page control the
precision with which Mastercam performs certain operations, for
example, how close entities must be to be considered coincident or
chained, and how smooth curves and surfaces will be. Smaller
tolerances produce more precise parts, but also generally create larger
files.
Figure 2-41: Tolerances properties page
Tolerance fields include:

System Tolerance: Define the maximum distance by which
two positions can be separated and still be considered
coincident. This value also defines the minimum line length
because two endpoints that are closer than the system
tolerance will be considered coincident.
TIP: To edit this field, select the check box.
Chaining Tolerance: Set the maximum distance that two

endpoints can be apart and still be chained. Mastercam stops
chaining and prompts for the next entity if the distance
between two adjacent entities exceeds the chaining tolerance.
Planar Chaining Tolerance: Specify the maximum distance an

entity can be separated from a plane and be considered to lie
in that plane. Cplane chaining uses this tolerance to
determine which chained entities are planar. Mastercam uses
22
chained geometry to calculate toolpaths (contours or
pockets).
Minimum arc length: Define the smallest arc Mastercam can
create. An appropriate minimum arc length prevents creation
2
of very small arcs, for example, when pocketing or creating
fillets.
Curve minimum / maximum step size: Set the shortest and
longest distance Mastercam can step along a curve when
24
creating toolpaths or breaking a spline into arcs, and so on.
Curve chordal deviation: Define the maximum distance
allowed between a line segment or edge and a curve. It
controls how precisely curves, surfaces, and toolpaths fit
25
underlying geometry. You can redefine this tolerance when
you create flowline curves, and also net and swept surfaces.
Maximum surface deviation: Specify the maximum distance
by which a surface can be separated from its generating 26
curves.
Toolpath tolerance: Set the tolerance used to calculate
toolpaths.
27
28
29
210
2
Toolpaths
Use this page to configure how toolpaths are created, maintained, and
displayed, and to define the setup sheet program to use.
Figure 2-42: Toolpaths properties page
Default toolpath parameters you can set include:

Toolpath display during creation
How drive and check surfaces and tool containment
boundaries are selected (for surface toolpaths)
Criteria for keeping or deleting recut files
Buffering size (the approximate maximum amount of
memory that Mastercam will use, on average, while making
lengthy toolpath calculations)
Prompting for a CAD file during toolpath creation
Options for associativity warnings, tools use when importing
operations, display of surface/plane intersections, wirepath
previews.
IMPORTANT: Tool display parameters affect how Mastercam

displays toolpaths as it generates them. It does not affect
Backplot.
Notes:
• To change tool display parameters for a selected operation, click
22
Parameters in the Toolpath Manager, and choose Tool Display
in the Tool Parameters tab.
• Although tool display defaults are in effect when Mastercam
starts, if you change them, subsequent toolpaths of the same
type that you create or import (for example, contour) use the
2
modified parameters for the duration of the Mastercam session.
Toolpath Manager 24
Use this page to specify names for machine groups, toolpath groups,
and NC files. These names appear in the Toolpath Manager, using the
options you select. For machine and toolpath groups, you can enter a
user-defined name, or choose to use the MCX file name or the
25
machine name (from the machine definition). You can name NC files
after the MCX file name, the machine name, the toolpath group name,
the last operation's name, or a user-defined name. You can also have
Mastercam prompt for an NC file name only for the first operation you
26
define or for every operation you define.
Figure 2-43: Toolpath Manager properties page
27
28
29
210
2
TIP: To avoid duplicate entries in Toolpath Manager, use the

Append Values option to automatically add sequential numbers
to the specified names. Mastercam increments the numbers
based on the values you choose. For example, suppose you set
the Machine Group Name to the user-defined value “Machine
Group.” Mastercam names the first machine group you create
“Machine Group-1,” the second “Machine Group-2,” and so on.
(The actual numbers depend on your Append Values settings.)
Notes:
• If you choose to use the MCX file name as the basis for names in
Toolpath Manager, save your MCX file before creating your
machine groups, toolpaths, and NC files. Otherwise, Mastercam
uses the default MCX file name from the Start / Exit page of the
System Configuration dialog box.
• You cannot turn off the Append Values options for machine
group or toolpath names, but you can turn it off for NC file
names.
The following figure shows machine group, toolpath, and NC file

names as they appear in Toolpath Manager.
Figure 2-44: Example: Toolpath Manager
22
2
24
25
26
27
Parameters you can set for machine and toolpath groups include:
Prompt: Select this option to have Mastercam ask for a group
name when you create the group.
MCX file name: Select this option to use your current MCX file
28
name as the group name.
Machine name: Select this option to use the machine name as
the group name.
User defined name: Select this option to enter a group name
29
in the provided text box.
Delimiter: Specify the character that separates the appended
number from the group name.
Increment start: Specify the number to append to the first
210
group created.
Increment value: Specify the increment between appended
numbers. That is, each appended number is the previous
number plus the increment value.
2
Parameters you can set for NC files include:

Prompt: Select this option to have Mastercam ask for a file
name when you create a toolpath operation. You can choose
to be prompted for every operation or for only the first
operation.
MCX file name: Select this option to use your current MCX file
name as the NC file name.
Machine name: Select this option to use the machine name as
the NC file name.
Toolpath group name: Select this option to use the toolpath
group name as the NC file name.
Last operation’s NC file: Select this option to use the last
operation's name as the NC file name.
User defined name: Select this option to enter an NC file
name in the provided text box.
Append: Select this option to activate the Append Values
function.
Delimiter: Specify the character that separates the appended
number from the file name.
Increment start: Specify the number to append to the first file
created.
Increment value: Specify the increment between appended
numbers. That is, each appended number is the previous
number plus the increment value.
Verify Interface
Use this property page to customize the default settings Mastercam 22
uses with the Verify function. Mastercam loads these settings at
startup. Then, when you use the Verify function, Mastercam sets the
Verify dialog box options to these defaults.
Note: Changes you make to settings in the Verify dialog box remain
2
in effect for the remainder of the session, unless you reset the
configuration options in the Verify Interface property page.
Figure 2-45: Verify Interface properties page

24
25
26
27
28
Options you can set on this page include the following: 29
Turbo: Display no tool. This is generally the fastest option.
Simulate tool: Display a solid tool without a holder.
Simulate tool and holder: Display the tool holder and a solid
tool. In Lathe, holders display only in TrueSolid mode.
210
Moves/step: Set the number of tool moves performed each
time you choose the Step button in the Verify controls dialog
box.
Moves/refresh: Set the number of tool moves performed
2
before the screen refreshes.
Speed Quality: Set the relationship between verification

speed and image quality. Faster processing may reduce image
quality. Displaying a better quality image can take more
processing time.
Update after each toolpath: Show the stock after each
toolpath. This option is best used in Standard or TrueSolid
Turbo mode.
Stop on collision: Pause the verification process when a
collision occurs in the toolpath. Press the Machine, Step, or
Fast forward button to continue the verification.
Stop on tool change: Pause the verification process when an
actual (not a null) tool change occurs in the toolpath. When
the verification pauses, the tool moves to the defined home
position. If you select this option, and you do not set the home
position, the system uses the default home position and may
cause gouging. Press the Machine, Step, or Fast forward
button to continue the verification.
Stop after each operation: Pause the verification process after
completion of each toolpath operation and display the
updated part. Press the Machine, Step, or Fast forward
button to continue the verification.
Verbose: Open the Verify ribbon bar, which displays
additional details about the current machine state as you step
through each move or any time the verification pauses or
stops. Information displayed varies with toolpath content and
machine type.
Simulation speed: Set the speed of the simulation. Use the
buttons to set the slowest or fastest speed. Use the slider to
choose a speed between the slowest and fastest.
To change Verify configuration parameters during the current

Mastercam session, initiate a Verify operation, and then in the Verify
controls dialog box, choose the Options button to open the Verify
options dialog box.
22
Figure 2-46: Verify Configure button
2
24
Note: For more information, see “Verifying Operations” on
page 784.
Verify Settings
25
Use this property page in the System Configuration dialog box to
define initial, default configuration parameters for toolpath
verification operations initiated from the Toolpath Manager. 26
Figure 2-47: Verify Settings properties page
27
28
29
210
Parameters you can set include:
2
Stock settings: shape, initial size source, cylinder axis and

diameter, stock file, translucent stock
Tool profile
Tool and STL tolerances
Colors for stock, tool, collision, and cut stock for the first 10
tools
Miscellaneous options, including: use TrueSolid, display XYZ
axes, compare to STL file, remove chips, etc.
Wire Backplot
If your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Wire, the settings 22
in this property page allow you to define how the wire moves and
appears on the screen during a backplot operation. You can define
general settings such as the step speed/increments, the screen
cleanup, and the simulated wirepath display. You can also set up the
motion colors and color loop options.
2
Figure 2-48: Wire Backplot properties page
24
25
26
27
28
Notes:
• The parameters you choose are for display purposes only and do
not affect the part when it is machined. 29
• Selections on this property page are established as system
defaults. To change Wire backplot settings during the current
Mastercam session, backplot an operation. Then, in the
Backplot Options dialog box, choose the Options button to
open the Backplot options dialog box where you can make the
210
necessary changes.
2
Merging Configuration Files

The Merge button in the System Configuration dialog box lets
you combine system configuration settings from other files
with the current configuration file.
You can merge:
An entire startup or other configuration file
Standard inch or metric defaults
Specified sections of system configuration settings
Figure 2-49: Merge files dialog box (System Configuration)
In this dialog box, select the configuration settings you want to merge
with the current configuration file and specify which sections to
merge.
TIP: To quickly select / deselect all options, select the All on / All
off buttons, located in the bottom leftmost section of the dialog
box.
Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch)

When you open a part file that uses different units (metric or inch) 22
from those currently in use, Mastercam displays the System
Configuration dialog box, which informs you that Mastercam is
switching units and loading an alternate default configuration file.
Figure 2-50: System Configuration
English (inch) / Metric dialog box
2
24
25
To complete the operation, you must select one of the following
options:
Units: Uses only the units from the new configuration file.
(default)
26
All settings: Loads all settings from the new configuration file.
Note: You can also use the Current field near the bottom of the
System Configuration dialog box to switch current units by
27
selecting an alternate configuration file.
28
29
210
2
chapter 3
Drawing and Design
Basics
This chapter introduces the concepts, functions, and
techniques that you use to create geometry. Drawing in
Mastercam can be as free and dynamic as a pencil sketch or as
mathematically precise as you need it to be. The cursor and
mouse are your drawing tools, and the Create and Xform menu
functions are your primary drawing aids. Mastercam Design
also provides many other CAD functions to make your job
easier.
With Mastercam Design, you can create wireframe, surface,
and primitive surface geometry. If your installation includes
Mastercam Solids, you also have extensive tools for creating
solid models.
Note: For more information on working with Mastercam

Solids, see “Solids” on page 650.
In this chapter, you will learn about:

Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar . . . . . . page 162
Selecting Entities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 174
Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 186
Setting Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 190
Changing the Graphics Window Display page 201
Setting Planes / Views / WCS . . . . . . . . . . page 206
Editing Your Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 240
Power User Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 245
Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar

The AutoCursor ribbon bar becomes active whenever Mastercam
prompts you to enter position data. It shows the current cursor
position (XYZ coordinates) and also allows you to override the position
manually.
The AutoCursor ribbon bar makes it easier to select and enter position
data in complicated and congested geometry. Use it to:
Track cursor position.
Enter X, Y, and Z coordinates manually.
Detect and snap to specific types of positions as you move the
cursor over geometry on the screen.
The AutoCursor ribbon bar is dockable. You can leave it docked in the
toolbar area or drag it to another position. When docked, it remains
visible even when inactive. When undocked from the toolbar area and
positioned elsewhere in the Mastercam window, it automatically
closes when it is not needed (inactive). When activated by your
selections, it reappears where you last placed it.
When you move the cursor over geometry on the screen, you can
configure AutoCursor to display a visual cue when it detects a specific
position type (for example, origin, arc center, endpoint, or midpoint).
Visual Cues
Visual cues are graphic symbols that appear to the right of the cursor
when AutoCursor detects a specific position type. They identify the
type of position AutoCursor has highlighted to ensure that you select
the correct entity and position. For example, if you set AutoCursor to
detect and snap to the endpoints of existing entities, as soon as you
move the cursor close to an endpoint, it snaps to that position and the
visual cue for endpoints appears.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar • 163
Mastercam visual cues include:
3
Origin Midpoint
Arc Center Point 323

Endpoint Quadrant
3
Intersection Nearest
Horizontal /
Vertical Tangent
36
Perpendicular 37
Note: AutoCursor does not recognize endpoints on surfaces.
38
You can limit the types of positions AutoCursor detects. For more
information, see “Customizing AutoCursor Behavior” on page 166.
In complex geometry, there may be more than one position located
within the detection range of the cursor. In these cases, AutoCursor 39
uses the order shown below to detect and snap to positions.
1 Point entities
2 Endpoints of curves or lines 310

3 Midpoints of curves or lines
5
Quadrant points of arcs
Centers of arcs
3
6 Real curve or line intersections
(not intersections projected by Mastercam)
7 Positions on the active selection grid

TIP: When AutoCursor is active, you can temporarily deactivate

its snap-to settings by holding down the [Ctrl] key as you click
to select a position.
Entering Position Coordinates

Use the AutoCursor ribbon bar to enter coordinates when Mastercam
prompts you to enter position data.
Current cursor coordinates FastPoint mode
AutoCursor settings
AutoCursor override
You can enter coordinates in several ways

Enter values into the X, Y, and Z fields by placing your cursor
in each field and typing a value. Press [Enter] or [Tab] to apply
3
the value and move to the next field (from left to right).
Press [X], [Y], or [Z] to open a field, and then type a value. You
can enter fractions or decimal values (example, 3/8 or .375)
and formulas, including addition (+), subtraction (-),
323
multiplication (*), division (/), and parentheses. You can even
enter inch values (example, 3in) or metric values (124mm). If
necessary, Mastercam’s built-in calculator converts an inch or
metric value to the currently used unit type. For more
information on the calculator, please refer to “Mastercam’s
3
Calculator” on page 36
Click the drop-down arrow to choose from a list of previously
entered values.
Right–click inside the field to access a menu of data entry
36
shortcut options you can use to define the coordinate value.
Use FastPoint Mode.
Click in the graphics window to select a position. 37
Press [Shift+Click] to create a new position relative to an
existing entity. For more information, see “Using the Relative
Ribbon Bar” on page 171.
Using FastPoint Mode to Enter Coordinates

38
Use the AutoCursor FastPoint Mode to replace the separate X, Y, Z
fields with a single, consolidated field. In this field, you can specify a
position by typing the XYZ coordinates separated by commas, or you
39
can use the data entry shortcuts or enter mathematical formulas.
To use AutoCursor FastPoint Mode whenever the AutoCursor ribbon
bar is active, do one of the following
Press the space bar on your keyboard.
310
Click the FastPoint button located on the AutoCursor ribbon
bar.
Figure 3-3: AutoCursor FastPoint Mode 3
FastPoint entry field FastPoint button

X To enter coordinates:
1 Type the values separated by commas, for example, 2,2,5.
2 Press [Enter] to apply the value or [Esc] to cancel.

You can enter fractions or decimal values (example, 3/8 or .375). The
FastPoint field also accepts formulas, including addition (+),
subtraction (-), multiplication (*), division (/), and parentheses.
In FastPoint mode, you can also convert numbers to the base unit of
measure defined in your current Mastercam configuration. When
entering values to convert, type the number immediately followed by
its unit of measure, such as in or mm. If you have configured
Mastercam to work in inches, you can type in a metric value in
FastPoint mode (for example, 27mm) and Mastercam converts it from
millimeters to the correct length in inches. You can use this conversion
function for most numeric data entry fields located in Mastercam
dialog boxes and ribbon bars.
TIP: Use algebraic notation when entering formulas. For

example, for a position of X6, Y3, Z0.5 enter
X(2*3)Y(5-2)Z(1/2), or 6,3,.5. The Fastpoint entry method is
consistent with prior versions of Mastercam.
Note: FastPoint mode is modal; when you activate it, you cannot
move outside of the field into any part of the application,
including other AutoCursor buttons, until you press [Enter] or
[Esc].
Customizing AutoCursor Behavior

You can customize AutoCursor to detect only specific types of
positions, or to snap to a specific angle, or to the nearest, tangent,
perpendicular, horizontal, and vertical positions. You have the
following options for customizing the way AutoCursor behaves when
you use it to select entities in the graphics window:
To configure settings that apply to all selections and remain in
effect until you reconfigure them, use AutoCursor
Configuration.
To change behavior for a single position selection, use the
AutoCursor Override drop-down list, and left–click on the
entity type you want to select.
To lock the override for multiple selections, right–click on the

entity type in the AutoCursor Override drop-down list.
Using AutoCursor Settings

3
X To customize AutoCursor
1 In the AutoCursor ribbon bar, click the AutoCursor
323
Configuration button.
Figure 3-4: AutoCursor Configuration button
3
AutoCursor configuration
2 In the AutoCursor Settings dialog box, select the position
36
types to detect and snap to.
Figure 3-5: AutoCursor Settings dialog box
37
38
39
310
Note: If the position type is not selected, AutoCursor does not detect
3
it.
3 You can also choose to:
Set FastPoint mode as the default.

Enable one-character power key overrides.

4 Click OK to accept your settings and exit. The AutoCursor
settings remain in effect until you use this procedure again to
change them.
AutoCursor Override Power Keys

If you enable power keys in your AutoCursor configuration settings,
when AutoCursor is active you can press a power key to temporarily
snap only to the point type associated with the power key—regardless
of the current AutoCursor settings. For example, to force AutoCursor to
detect only arc center points, position the cursor in the graphics
window and press the Arc Center power key [C].
AutoCursor power keys include:
[O] - Origin [C] -Arc Center
[E] - Endpoint [I] - Intersection
[M] - Midpoint [Q] - Quadrant
[P] - Point
In the following example, you will use AutoCursor Settings to create a

series of lines at 45 degrees from the axes.
X To create angular lines using AutoCursor

1 Choose Create, Line, Create Line Endpoint from the menu
bar at the top of the screen. Mastercam prompts you to
specify the first endpoint, and the AutoCursor ribbon bar
buttons become active.
2 Click ! in the AutoCursor ribbon bar to display the AutoCursor
3 Click Disable All to clear all selections.
4 Select Angular, and then enter 45 in the field next to it.
5 Click OK.
6 In the graphics window, click any position to specify the first

endpoint.
7 Now move the cursor. Notice that the line snaps in 45-degree
increments as you move the cursor around the selected
endpoint. Move the cursor so that the line forms a 45-degree
angle up, and to the right of the first endpoint then click to
specify the second endpoint and create the line. The line is a
“live” entity at this point and can be edited.
8 Draw additional lines or, to fix the line and exit the function,
click OK.
3
TIP: Remember to clear AutoCursor settings when they are no
longer needed. If you forget that you have customized
AutoCursor behavior, you can experience unexpected results
when working with other Mastercam functions. 323
Using AutoCursor Override
You can temporarily modify AutoCursor settings for a single
position selection. To do this, when AutoCursor is active, click the
3
AutoCursor Override drop-down button in the AutoCursor ribbon
bar.
Figure 3-6: AutoCursor Override button 36
37
AutoCursor override
From the list, select the position type you want AutoCursor to snap to
(applies only to the current selection). This feature is particularly
useful when the geometry is crowded or confusing and you need help
identifying a specific entity and position type.
38
39
310
3
Figure 3-7: AutoCursor Override drop-down list
X For example, to create a line from the midpoint of another line

1 Choose Create, Line, Create line endpoint from the menu
bar.
2 Click two positions in the graphics window to define the
endpoints of a line.
3 For the next line, click the drop-down arrow next to the
AutoCursor Override button, and then click Midpoint. The
Override button changes to the midpoint icon and becomes
active. Rather than prompting you to specify the first
endpoint, Mastercam prompts you to select a line, arc, or
spline.
4 Click anywhere on the first entity. Mastercam snaps to the
midpoint and prompts you to choose the second endpoint. At
this point, the AutoCursor Override is inactive and the
standard AutoCursor settings are used.
5 Click a position to define the second endpoint of the second
line.
6 Click OK to fix the line and exit the function.
Locking AutoCursor Overrides

When AutoCursor is active, you can lock an AutoCursor Arc Center,
Endpoint, Intersection, Midpoint, Point, or Quadrant override by
3
right–clicking to select it in the Overrides drop down list.
A locked AutoCursor override remains in effect until you perform one
of the following actions: 323
Right- or left–click the Override button in the AutoCursor
ribbon bar to release it.
Use an AutoCursor power key.
Press [Esc]. 3
Choose File, New.
Open the AutoCursor Settings dialog box.
Exit Mastercam. 36
TIPS:
•When you hover the mouse over an AutoCursor override
that can be locked, the mouse pointer changes to indicate
that you can right–click to select it.
37
• Once activated, the override appears as a pressed button on
the AutoCursor ribbon bar.
38
To cancel the override without selecting a point, right- or
left-click this button to release it, or press [Esc].
39
Using the Relative Ribbon Bar
When creating a new entity with a Sketcher function, you can
position any new point relative to an existing entity. To do this,
310
press [Shift+Click] when choosing a position, or choose
Relative from the AutoCursor override list. The current function
ribbon bar or dialog box is suspended, and the Relative Position
ribbon bar displays. 3
lta Figure 3-8: AutoCursor Override Relative Position ribbon bar

De
Distance and Angle Length on a selected entity
TIP: Choose Select in this ribbon bar to activate the

Along mode and create a new entity along an existing
entity. When prompted, select a line, arc, or spline at a
position nearest to the endpoint from which you will specify the
along length. When you select the entity, the Delta, Distance,
and Angle fields become inactive and you are prompted to
enter a length value. To directly access the Along mode, choose
it from the AutoCursor ribbon bar override drop-down list.
Note: When you press [Enter] to apply the specified values, the
Relative Position ribbon bar closes. Use the current function’s
ribbon bar or dialog box to select additional positions or modify
the live entity.
You can enter relative position values using one of the following
methods.
X To specify the new position using Delta coordinates

1 If you used the Shift+click method to select a position and
open the Relative Position ribbon bar, skip to Step 2.
Otherwise, after selecting Relative from the AutoCursor
Override list, choose an existing position to which the new
entity will be relative.
2 In the Delta field, type the rectangular or polar XYZ
coordinates to position the new endpoint from the selected
position.
3 Click OK to accept the entered coordinates and exit the
Relative Position ribbon bar.
X To specify a position using distance and length

1 If you used the Shift+click method to select a position and
open the Relative Position ribbon bar, skip to Step 2.
Otherwise, after selecting Relative from the AutoCursor
Override list, choose an existing position to which the new
entity will be relative.
2 Type values in the Distance and Angle fields to establish the

distance away from the selected position, and the angle at
which the new endpoint will be placed. 3
3 Click OK to accept the specified values and exit the Relative
Position ribbon bar.
X To specify a position along an entity 323

1 In the Relative Position ribbon bar, click the Select button to
activate the Along mode and select a line, arc, or spline
nearest to the endpoint from which you will specify the along
length. 3
2 In the Length field, type the distance from the selected entity
endpoint where you want to create the current position for
the new entity. You can extend the new position along the
selected entity and enter positive or negative length values. 36
3 Press [Enter] or click OK to accept your entries and exit the
Relative Position ribbon bar
IMPORTANT: When you select a closed arc (circle) in Along

mode, the endpoint is always the zero degree quadrant
37
position. If you click the circle anywhere in the bottom half, the
along distance from the zero position is calculated in a
clockwise direction. If you click the circle anywhere in the top
half, the along distance is calculated in a counter clockwise
38
direction.
39
310
3
Selecting Entities
When creating geometry, you can use several selection methods to
select positions and other entities in the graphics window, including:
Clicking with the left mouse button to choose one or more
entities, usually at the prompting of a function.
Choosing General Selection ribbon bar options.
Chaining (page 186).
Using the General Selection Ribbon Bar

The General Selection ribbon bar operates in two different modes
Standard Selection and Solid Selection. The availability of either mode
is based on the types of entities that are in the current file and the
functions you choose from Mastercam menus and toolbars.
If you choose a Mastercam function specific to a solid entity, the
General Selection ribbon bar automatically switches to the Solid
Selection mode.
Figure 3-9: General Selection Solid Selection mode
Solid Selection options
Note: For more information on Solid selection techniques, see

“Selecting Solids” on page 655.
If there are no solids in your file, the Solid Selection mode is not
available; you can use only Standard Selection options.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Selecting Entities • 175
Figure 3-10: General Selection Standard Selection mode
3
Verify selection toggle
323
Masking Entity selection
Cancel current selection
Selection method list
Accept current selection
If the General Selection ribbon bar is available for use when no other
3
function is active, you can select entities prior to choosing a function
by using the cursor or combinations of the cursor and keystrokes, such
as [Shift+Click]. Then choose a function to apply to the selected
entities. 36
Some functions work in conjunction with the General Selection ribbon
bar. In these functions, the General Selection ribbon bar becomes
active when you are prompted to select entities for the function.
37
General Selection Methods
Use the General Selection method drop-down list to set the method by
which you select entities in the graphics window. Selecting a method
option limits selection to that method. You can left–click a method to
38
choose it for a single selection event, or right–click a method to lock it
for multiple selections.
Once you have chosen one of the following selection
methods, you can return to the standard selection method
39
by clicking the Standard Selection button.
To finalize multiple-entity selections, you can press [Enter], or
click the End Selection button in the ribbon bar. 310
Note, however, that you can end a series of selections by double-
clicking the last entity of the selection. For example, to select three
lines using the single selection method, click the first two lines. Then
double-click the third line to end the selection process. (The
double-click method does not work with polygon and vector
3
selections, which instead use the double-click to complete the
polygon or vector.)
From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose one of the following
Selection methods to lock the method in place and disable the others.
Chain: Select/chain entities that are connected to other

entities. For example, clicking one side of a rectangle
selects all four sides, and clicking one line that is
connected to another selects both lines.
*Window: Select entities by drawing a window around

them.
*Polygon: Select entities by drawing a polygon around

the entities. Double–click to complete the polygon.
Single: Select individual entities by clicking them with

the mouse.
Area: Select multiple nested shapes with a single mouse

click.
Vector: Select multiple entities by drawing a vector line

through them. All entities the vector intersects are
selected.
*The Window and Polygon selection methods are controlled by the

choices you make in the Entity selection settings drop-down list.
You will learn more about this in “Entity Selection Settings” on
page 177.
Note: All selection methods, including the Solids selection

methods, can be added to toolbars and your graphics window
right–click menu using Settings, Customize.
Window and Single selection are Mastercam’s standard selection

methods; both are active at the same time. When these options are in
effect, you can use the mouse and either a single [Click] or
[Shift+Click] to select one or more entities. Or, you can drag a window
and select all entities that are completely inside the window.
TIP: You can switch from any selection method to Window by

holding down the [Ctrl] key and selecting the first window
position in the graphics window.
When you choose a selection method from the drop-down list, it

remains set until you perform one of the following actions
Click the Standard Selection button in the General

Selection ribbon bar to reset it to the Window
method. 3
Choose another method from the list.
Hold down the [Shift] or [Alt] keys to override the default (see
Tips below for override details.)
323
TIPS:
• In Standard selection mode, you can switch from the
Window method to Vector selection by holding down the
[Alt] key. 3
• To override any selection method and toggle between the
Chain and Area selection methods, hold down the [Shift] key
when selecting an entity or a position. If you place the cursor
on an entity while holding down the [Shift] key, the Chain
method is active; otherwise, the Area method is active.
36
Entity Selection Settings 37
The Entity selection field in the General Selection ribbon bar
determines how the Polygon and Window selection methods choose
to include entities. Before selecting entities with these methods, use
this field to choose one of the following:
38
In / Out Select only entities that lie completely inside or
In + / Out+
outside the window.
Select entities that lie completely inside or

39
outside and entities that intersect the window.
Intersect Select only entities that intersect the window.
TIP: To instantly reverse entity selection (deselect

310
selected entities and select unselected entities), click
the Invert Selection button.
3
Masking
A selection mask is a defined set of criteria you use to quickly select
entities in the graphics window. Using a selection mask with a complex
part file ensures that you select only and all of the specific entities you
want.
When working with selection masks, you can:

Define a selection mask to use once and discard (default).
Make the selection mask active until you turn it off or exit the
Mastercam session.
Save the selection mask criteria to a file (.MASK) that you can
later open and reuse.
Open an existing selection mask file and apply it.
Use left– and right–click Quick Masks to select all or only
specific entity type. (You will learn more about this later in
“Quick Masks” on page 180.)
To use a mask for selection, click the All or Only buttons in the General
Selection ribbon bar.
Choosing All opens the Select All dialog box. Use this dialog
box to define and apply a mask that automatically selects all
entities in the current file that match the mask criteria. You
can choose to apply the criteria and select all entities, or only
entities in a specified group, including groups created by
Xform functions.
Choosing Only opens the Select Only dialog box. Use this
dialog box to set restrictions on the entities that are available
for selection in the graphics window. When you apply the
Only mask, you use other General Selection methods to select
only those entities that match the mask criteria you define.
Until you clear the mask, you are restricted from selecting
entities that are excluded by the mask.
Figure 3-11: Masking Select All / Select Only dialog boxes
3
Option buttons 323
Criteria type
check boxes
and buttons
3
Criteria options
to Select Entity,
36
Select All, or
Clear All
37
Criteria list
38
Additional
39
masking
parameters
310
In the Select All or Select Only (Masking) dialog box, you can open an
existing mask file to apply or choose the mask criteria, including any
3
combination of entity types, colors, levels, line styles, line widths,
point styles, arc diameter, or line lengths that match a specified value
and filter.
Quick Masks
Mastercam's Quick Masks are time-saving functions that
allow you to select entities by type with a single mouse click,
without having to open the All or Only dialog boxes.
Figure 3-12: Quick Masks Toolbars
By default, the Quick Masks toolbar is docked vertically,

directly below the MRU toolbar along the rightmost edge of
the Mastercam window.
Quick Masks (QM) functions support different right–click
and left–click actions.
Left–clicking sets masking to select all entities of the
specified type.
Right–clicking sets masking for a single selection.
For example, suppose you have a rectangle that comprises

four lines. If you left–click the QM Lines function, Mastercam
selects all four of the rectangle's lines. If you right–click the
function, you can select lines (and only lines) one by one.
QM functions include Points, Lines, Arcs, Splines, Surfaces, Solids,
Drafting, Wireframe, Surface Curves, Color, Level, Xform Group, and
Xform Results.
Use the General Selection category in Settings, Customize to add QM
functions to toolbars. You can also set up keyboard shortcuts for QM
functions by choosing the General Selection category in Settings, Key
Mapping. For more information, see “Customizing and Configuring
Mastercam X” on page 81.
Selection Mask Examples

Here are some examples of how you can create and apply All and Only
masks. To use these examples, you must open or create a part that
contains lines and entities in more than one color.
Selection Examples Select All
X To select and delete all line entities in the current part file
3
1 From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose All.
2 To view and edit the Entities mask criteria, choose the Entities
check box. 323
3 In the Entities criteria list, double–click the Lines check box
(under Wireframe) to immediately apply the mask and exit the
dialog box.
4 All line entities are selected in the graphics window. To delete
3
all lines from the part, press the keyboard Delete key.
X To select all entities of a specific type and color in the current

part file 36
1 From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose All.
2 In the Select All dialog box, choose the Entities check box.
3 In the Entities criteria list, select one or more entity types to

include.
37
4 To set the Colors criteria, choose the Colors button.
5 Select the check box next to the color of the entities to include.
6 Click OK to apply the mask and exit the dialog box.

38
7 All entities of the specified type and color are selected in the
graphics window. Continue with the current function, if
applicable, or choose a function to perform on the selected
entities.
39
TIP: If you are creating a mask using multiple criteria, to quickly
apply the mask and exit the dialog box, hold down the Ctrl key
and double–click when selecting the last criteria item.
310
Selection Examples Select Only
3
X To restrict the entities you can select to only line entities
1 From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose Only.
2 In the Select Only dialog box, choose the Entities button and
check box.
3 In the Entities criteria list, double–click the Lines check box

(under Wireframe) to immediately apply the mask and exit the
dialog box.
4 In the graphics window, select the lines you want to work with.
Until you clear the mask, you cannot select any other entity
type.
5 Use one of the following methods to clear the mask
Complete the selection.

Reopen the Select Only dialog box and clear the selections.
TIP: Use the “Maintain Only Mask” check box in the Select
Only dialog box to apply a mask until you close the Mastercam
session or choose to deselect the Maintain check box.
Entity Selection Tips

In this section, you will learn to quickly and efficiently select entities in
the graphics window by reviewing techniques for
Selecting Single Entities (page 182)
Selecting Multiple Entities (page 182)
Selecting All Entities (page 183)
Selecting Entities as Chains (page 183)
Using Area Selection (page 184)
Ending Entity Selection (page 185)
Unselecting Entities (page 185)
Selecting Single Entities

Click an existing entity to select it. When selected, Mastercam
highlights the entity in the selection color (default is yellow).
Selecting Multiple Entities

To select multiple entities, click individual entities. Notice that
selected entities are highlighted, indicating selection.
To select multiple entities using the Window selection
method, click an area of the graphics window that is not
directly on an entity, hold down the mouse button, and start
to drag the mouse to anchor the first point. Then release the
button and continue to draw a rectangular window around

the entities you want to select. Click to set the final position.
All entities completely contained within the window are
selected.
3
To select multiple entities using the Vector selection method,
hold down the Alt key, and then click and drag a line through
the entities you want to select. All entities that the line
intersects will be selected
323
To select multiple entities using the Area selection method,
hold down the Shift key and click inside the outermost entity,
but outside the inside entities. Make sure that the cursor is not
close enough to an entity to highlight it before you click.
3
TIP: To improve your view of the selection area when using the
Window selection method, after selecting the first window
point, use the Pan, Zoom or Fit to screen function before 36
selecting the second point.
Selecting All Entities 37

To select all entities in the graphics window, hold down the
Ctrl key and press A.
In the General Selection ribbon bar, choose All. Then click the
All Entities button in the Select All dialog box. 38
Selecting Entities as Chains
Use the chain selection method to temporarily link connected entities
in order to perform a function with them collectively.
39
Note: This selection method does not physically create a chain in
the Mastercam database or otherwise link the entities. It is used
only to simplify the selection of connected entities.
310
To select a chain of entities, hold down the Shift key to
activate Chain selection and select an entity that is connected
to other entities, such as a line used in a rectangle. All
3
connected entities are automatically selected in a single chain
(in this example, the entire rectangle). Continue to use this
method to select other connected entities as chains.
Alternatively, you can lock in the Chain option from the
General Selection ribbon bar drop-down list then select
connected entities.
To select a partial chain of connected entities, activate the

Chain selection method using either method described above
and select an entity connected to others. Then click again in
the location where you want to chain selection to end. The
remainder of the entities in the chain are automatically
unselected.
Using Area Selection

The area selection method allows you to select multiple nested shapes
with a single mouse click.
Instead of drawing a box around the entities to be selected (as with the
Window method), area selection selects all closed boundaries around
the position where you click the mouse.
To use the area selection method, hold down the Shift key and click
inside the outermost entity, but outside the inside entities. Make sure
that the cursor is not close enough to an entity to highlight it before
you click.
Figure 3-13: Examples Area selection (nesting on and off)
3
1
Click here to select the set of curves Click here to select all of the curves
marked 1, 2, and 3 (infinite nesting in marked within and including the
area chaining is off). Selected curves outermost boundary (infinite nesting in
are shown in bold. area chaining is on). Selected curves
are shown in bold.
TIP: To enable the selection all of the shapes or chains within a

closed boundary, in the Settings, Configuration, Chaining
properties page, you must selection the option for Infinite
3
nesting in area chains.
Ending Entity Selection 323

To end any of the selection methods, press [Enter] or choose the
End selection option in the General Selection ribbon bar.
Unselecting Entities
3
Use one of the following methods to cancel or unselect entities.
Click a single entity again to unselect it. Or, if Mastercam is at
the root level (that is, not inside a function), press [Esc].
36
Choose another selection method. All entities selected in a
single action, such as Window selection, are unselected.
Choose the Unselect all option in the General Selection
ribbon bar to clear all selections.
37
38
39
310
3
Chaining
Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so
that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. This
fundamental Mastercam concept has important applications in both
design and machining functions.
When you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves (lines,
arcs, and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Chaining differs from
other selection methods because it associates order and direction to
the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect the way
Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.
When chaining is required for a selected function, Mastercam displays
the Chaining dialog box. If the current part file contains wireframe and
solid entities, you can use the buttons at the top of the dialog box to
choose the type of entities you want to chain. Otherwise, the entity
type is pre-selected.
Figure 3-14: Chaining dialog box, selection type buttons
Select wireframe entities

Select solid entities
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Chaining • 187
Figure 3-15: Chaining dialog boxes
Wireframe Solid 3
323
3
36
37
38
39
310
3
Chaining Wireframe Geometry
Chaining wireframe entities is similar to using the standard mode in
General Selection. The entities you select when chaining appear in the
selection color. Use options in the Chaining dialog box to choose:
Geometry plane: You can chain entities only in 3D or the

current construction plane (Cplane). Chaining in 3D allows
the chain to span planes. Cplane chaining is
two-dimensional; all entities must lie in a single plane.
Selection method: Like General Selection, chain selection
methods include chained entities, single entity, window,
polygon, and vector selection. You can also chain a series of
non-adjacent points (useful in spline and surface creation)
and create partial or open chains consisting of all adjacent
entities between a start point and an end point. The Window
and Polygon methods allow you to control whether entities
are selected inside or outside of the selection area.
Use the following functions in the Chaining dialog box to change or
correct chains as you create them.
Last: Reselect the last chain of entities you

created. For example, choose this option when
correcting chains for a surface that did not
generate properly. Mastercam rechains the
entities so that you can edit the chains and
correct chaining direction or order without
having to manually rechain all the entities.
Unselect: Unselect all selected entities.
End Chain: End a chain but remain in the

chaining function. You can also end the chain
when defining partial chains or branch points
by typing the keyboard shortcut [E].
Reverse: Reverse the chain direction.
Start / End of chain: Use these buttons in the

Start and End fields to move the start or end of
the chain from one entity endpoint to another.
Note: You can move the chain Start position only
on open chains. The option to move the chain
End position is available only for open and
partial chains.
Dynamic move start/end of chain: Change the

start or end points dynamically by using the
cursor to move them.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Chaining • 189
Chaining Solids
In Solids mode, the Chaining dialog box provides options to chain 3
solid entities. The chain solids buttons act as toggles, allowing you to
include or exclude certain types of solid elements from chain
selection, including:
Edge: Select solid edges on a model or exclude them

323
from selection.
Face: Select solid faces on a model or exclude them

from selection. 3
Loop: (available only when chaining solids for
toolpath creation) Create a closed chain (with no
branch points)—in which you select an edge, a
reference face, a resulting loop, and a start point.
36
Partial Loop: (available only when chaining solids for
toolpath creation) Create an open chain—in which
you select a starting edge, a reference face, and an 37
ending edge.
From back: Select solid edges or faces only on the

back of a model. When deactivated, you can select
solid edges or faces only on the front of a model.
38
Use other options in this dialog box to unselect and re-select solid
chains, reverse chaining direction, and move the start of a chain.
39
Wireframe Chaining Tips
To quickly select a chain of entities, hold down the [Shift] key
and click a boundary.
Use Partial chaining to create open chains. Click the first
310
entity for a chain. Then click the last entity in the chain.
Intersecting entities cannot be chained unless there is a break
at the intersection, which creates a branch point for the chain. 3
If the chain stops unexpectedly, choose Analyze Chain from
the Analyze menu to check for overlapping entities. You can
then use trim functions in the Edit menu to trim adjacent
entities together in order to chain them.
Setting Attributes
All Mastercam entities have basic attributes (physical characteristics).
Based on the entity type, attributes can include:
Color
Point style
Line style and width
Level
Note: You set default attributes in the CAD Settings page of the
System Configuration dialog box and save these settings to a
Mastercam configuration file (from the Mastercam menu, choose
Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings). When you run
Mastercam, attribute settings are loaded, along with other
configuration parameters, and appear as default values in the
Status bar fields.
Changing physical attributes when you are working with complex

parts is a very powerful technique you will use often to organize your
work. Use the Status bar fields to quickly and easily select new entity
attributes.
Figure 3-16: Status bar
Set attributes Set main level Configure Status bar fields

Status bar help

Setting Attributes for New Entities (page 191)
Changing Entity Attributes (page 194)
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Attributes • 191
Setting Attributes for New Entities

The attributes you set using the following methods are automatically 3
applied in the current Mastercam session to the new entities you
create. You can set new entity attributes in several ways.
X To use an existing entity to set color, line, point, and level

attributes:
323
Press [Alt+X] on the keyboard and select an entity in the
graphics window. The Status bar color, point style, line style,
and line width fields are changed to the selected entity’s
attributes.
3
X To set a specific attribute:
1 Choose one or more attribute fields and specify the value.
a Color: Choose Select from the System color

36
drop-down list and select an entity in the
graphics window. Or, click the current color
field to select a color from the Colors dialog box. (You will
learn more about this in “Setting/Changing Color” on 37
page 197.)
b Point Style, Line Style, and Line
Width: Select new values from the
drop-down lists. 38
c Level: To set the main level:
Type the level number in the
field.
Click the arrow and choose a
39
level from the most recently used list.
Click Level to open the Level Manager dialog box, and
select an existing level, or create a new level.
(For more information, see “Setting the Main Level” on
310
page 198.)
d Attributes: Click to open the Attributes
dialog box where you can specify color,
level, point and line styles, and line width.
3
Click OK to accept the new attributes and close the dialog
box.
Figure 3-17: Attributes dialog box
TIP: You can also access the Entity Attributes Manager from the
Attributes dialog box to specify attributes by entity type.
X To set attributes for specific entity types (such as points, lines,

arcs, solids, surface, and drafting dimensions):
1 Click the Attributes button in the Status bar.
2 In the Attributes dialog box, select the EA Mgr (Entity
Attributes Manager) check box, and then click the EA Mgr
button.
3 In the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box, select the entity
types, and set the attributes you want to use in the current
Mastercam session.
Figure 3-18: Entity Attributes Manager dialog box
3
323
3
36
37
38
To open the Color palette dialog box and choose a color,
double–click the color sample.
Note: You can also use the EA Mgr to apply attributes to files you
39
convert from other programs. Select the option to Include entities
created during File-Open.
4 When all entity attributes are set, click OK to accept them and
310
return to the Attributes dialog box.
IMPORTANT: If you deselect the EA Mgr check box in the

Attributes dialog box, the Entity Attribute Manager dialog box
3
settings are not used.
Changing Entity Attributes

Use the following methods to change the attributes of existing entities.
Note: These methods do not change the values that appear in the
Status bar attributes fields; they apply only to the entities you select
in the graphics window.
X To change attributes using the right–mouse button:

1 (optional) Use general selection methods to select the entities
to change.
2 In the Status bar, position the cursor over the label of the
attribute you want to change until the mouse pointer
changes to indicate that a right–click option is available.
Then right–click.
TIP: To change multiple attributes, right–click the Status bar

Attributes button.
3 If you selected entities in Step 1, skip to step Step 4.

Otherwise, when prompted to select the entities to change,
use general selection methods to select the entities. Then
press [Enter] or choose End selection in the General selection
ribbon bar.
4 Based on the attribute you chose in Step 2, use one of the
following dialog boxes to make the necessary changes:
Figure 3-19: Attributes

dialog box
Figure 3-20: Line Style
dialog box
3
323
3
Figure 3-21: Line Width
dialog box
36
37
38
Figure 3-22: Point Style
dialog box
Figure 3-23: Change
Level dialog box
39
310
3
Figure 3-24: Colors dialog box
5 Click OK to apply the change to the selected entities and close

the attribute dialog box.
X To change the attributes of all of a specific type of entity (such as

all points, or splines):
1 In the Status bar, click the Attributes button.
2 In the Attributes dialog box, select the EA Mgr (Entity

Attributes Manager) check box, and then click the EA Mgr
button.
3 In the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box, select the entity
types and attributes to use when creating new entities in the
current Mastercam session.
4 To update all of the selected types of entities that exist in the
current file and close the dialog box, click Apply to existing
entities.
Note: To continue to use these attributes for new entities, leave the
EA Mgr check box selected in the Attributes dialog box. To use
different attributes, deselect the check box.
TIP: You can also use Analyze functions to modify entity

attributes and other properties. For more information, see
“Analyzing Entities” on page 365.
3
Setting/Changing Color
Mastercam supports a palette of 256 colors, which you can customize.
323
You can reduce the palette to 16 colors by choosing the 16 Colors
button in the Colors dialog box, or by deselecting the Show 256 colors
check box when setting up system configuration parameters in
Settings, Configuration, Colors.
3
Use one of the following methods to access the Colors dialog box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Screen, Geometry
Attributes and select the colors palette button. 36
Click the System Colors field in the Status bar.
Figure 3-25: Colors dialog box

37
38
39
310
3
To select a color:
Type its ID number in the Current color field.
Click the color in the color palette.
Choose the Select button and click an entity in the graphics
window with the color you want to use.
Choose the Customize tab and use the fields to create a
custom color.
Setting the Main Level

Levels are a primary organizational tool in Mastercam. For example, a
Mastercam file can contain separate levels for wireframe, surfaces,
drafting entities, and toolpaths.
You are always drawing on the main level. The main level is not a fixed
level; it is only the level you choose to work with at any given time. To
help you keep track of the current main level, it appears in the Status
bar Level field which is always visible in the Mastercam window.
Use the Status bar Level fields to set the main level to work with in the
graphics window.
To set the main level:
Type the level number in the Level field.
Click the drop-down arrow and choose one from the most
recently used list.
Click the Levels button to open the Level Manager dialog box
where you can select an existing level, or create a new level.
Note: For more information on levels, see “Working with Levels” on

page 260.
Setting Z Depth
Use the Z field in the Status bar to set the Z-depth value for the
geometry and toolpaths you create. Set the Z depth using one of the
following methods:
Type a value in the field.
Click the drop-down arrow and choose one from the most
recently used list.
Click the Z label and select a position in the graphics window
to use its Z depth value.
Working in 2D and 3D Mode

When creating geometry, use the 2D / 3D Status bar toggle button to 3
set the drawing mode. The default setting is 3D. Click this button to
switch between drawing modes.
In 2D mode, all geometry is created parallel to the current
Cplane and, unless specified, at the current Z-depth setting. 323
You can override the Z-depth setting by typing coordinate
values that include a Z-depth value different from the current
Z-depth setting.
In 3D mode, the X, Y, and Z coordinates are all read from
AutoCursor when sketching dynamically. The Z-depth setting
3
in the Status bar is not used. When working in a 3D
environment, you can create entities whose points lie in
different planes, or create entities (such as arcs or 2D splines)
in planes other than the predefined planes.
36
In both modes, use AutoCursor or the selected function ribbon bar or
dialog box fields to enter coordinate values. Some exceptions to this
apply to specific entity types.
37
IMPORTANT: The 2D / 3D setting has no effect on analyze and
toolpath functions.
The following functions always provide 3D solutions, regardless of the

38
Status bar 2D / 3D setting:
Fillets and chamfers
Convert to NURBS
Surfaces and solids
Close Arc
39
Modify Spline Simplify
Xform: Translate, Translate 3D,

Mirror, Rotate, Rectangular Array, Scale
310
3
Notes:
• In 3D mode, if you choose to bisect two lines that are not in the
same plane or are not parallel to the current Cplane, a message
informs you that a 3D solution does not exist and asks you to
specify the Z depth to use for the 2D solution.
• When editing entities using the Trim or Break functions, all
solutions are calculated based on the current Cplane setting. If
the entities cannot intersect in the current Cplane through a 2D
projection, they cannot be modified using these functions.
TIP: Overlooking the current Cplane and Z depth is a common

source of error, which can cause you to create the geometry in
unintended orientations. To avoid this mistake, set the graphics
view (Gview) to the same setting as the Cplane or to Isometric.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Changing the Graphics Window Display • 201
Changing the Graphics Window Display

3
The View menu and toolbar provide several functions and methods
you can use to change the appearance of the geometry and toolpaths
in the graphics window. In addition to the functions listed below, this
section includes information on using zoom and unzoom techniques,
323
and setting up multiple viewports in the graphics window.
Fit geometry to screen: Maximizes your view of visible

geometry in the graphics window. This function positions
3
and sizes the displayed geometry to fill as much of the
graphics window as possible.
Pan: Imagine the graphics window as a camera lens

through which you view geometry. Using the keyboard
36
arrow keys, move the “lens” left or right, or up and down
over the geometry. Or, if you have set the Middle Button /
Wheel use field to Pan in the Settings, Configuration,
Screen properties page, press and hold the mouse wheel
to drag the image in any direction.
37
Set screen center: Repositions the center of the graphics
window, based on the new center point you specify.
38
Repaint screen: Refreshes the graphics window to restore
images that appear incomplete or distorted. This may
occur as the result of frequent changes to entities,
particularly where they overlap. The quality and stability
of images in the graphics window is influenced by the
39
graphic capabilities of your PC, and the amount of
available memory.
Note: If Repaint does not completely restore the graphics

310
window, use the Screen, Regenerate Display List function to
rebuild the display list.
Regenerate screen: Rebuilds the display list at the current

3
screen scale. Regenerating the display list may also
improve display speed and performance.
Zooming
Mastercam also offers a number of zoom functions, including:
Zoom window: Magnifies a portion of the graphics

window. Click an area of the graphics window that is not
directly on an entity to anchor the first window point.
Then draw a rectangular window by moving the mouse
around the entities you want to zoom. Click to set the final
position and fill the graphics window with the contents of
the selection window.
Note: To improve your view of the selection area when

using this method, after selecting the first window
point, use the Pan, Zoom target, or Fit to screen
function before selecting the second point.
Zoom target: Expands a specific area defined by two

selected points. The first position you select indicates the
center of the target area. As you move the cursor to select
the second position, you draw and drag a rectangular area
that defines the target boundary. When you select the
second position, everything in the target area expands to
fill the graphics window, centered around the first point
you specified.
Unzoom previous / .5: Restores zoom to its previous

setting. If no previous setting exists for the current
Mastercam session, this function reduces the size of the
displayed geometry to 50% of its current size.
Unzoom .8: Reduces the size of the displayed geometry to

80% of its current size.
Zoom in/out: Dynamically zooms in or out from a selected

point. First, select a focal point in the graphics window.
Then use one of the following techniques to zoom:
Slide the mouse forwards and backwards.
Spin the mouse wheel in either direction.
Consecutively press the [Page Up] and [Page
Down] keys.
Zoom selected: Works only with pre-selected entities.

Automatically scales the entities you select to fit the
graphics window.
3
TIP: You can use the mouse wheel or middle button any
time—without selecting a function—to dynamically spin or pan
the contents of the graphics window. You set the spin or pan
behavior using the Settings, Configuration, Screen properties
323
page and Middle Button/Wheel use field.
3
Using Viewsheets
Use viewsheets to create different part views, each on its own
viewsheet tab. With a viewsheet you can define a specific view
orientation and scale, store modified level settings, and use a
36
bookmark to define a restorable viewsheet state.
By default, viewsheets are off. To enable viewsheets, choose Settings,
Viewsheets, Viewsheets Enabled from the menu bar. The main
viewsheet tab then displays at the bottom of Mastercam's window, as
37
shown below.
38
39
When you have viewsheets enabled, manipulate them as follows:
310
X To define a new viewsheet:
Select Settings, Viewsheets, Create New Viewsheet from
the menu bar, or right-click a viewsheet tab, and select New
Viewsheet from the pop-up menu. 3
X To copy an existing viewsheet:
Select Settings, Viewsheets, Copy Current Viewsheet from
the menu bar, or right-click a viewsheet tab, and select Copy
Viewsheet from the pop-up menu.
X To rename a viewsheet:
Select Settings, Viewsheets, Rename Current Viewsheet
from the menu bar, or right-click a viewsheet tab, and select
Rename Viewsheet from the pop-up menu.
X To delete a viewsheet:
Select Settings, Viewsheets, Delete Current Viewsheet from
the menu bar, or right-click a viewsheet tab, and select Delete
Viewsheet from the pop-up menu.
Note: You cannot rename or delete the main viewsheet.
X To save a viewsheet bookmark:

Select Settings, Viewsheets, Save Current Viewsheet
Bookmark from the menu bar, or right-click a viewsheet tab,
and select Save Viewsheet Bookmark from the pop-up
menu.
X To restore from a viewsheet bookmark:

Select Settings, Viewsheets, Restore from Current
Viewsheet Bookmark from the menu bar, or right-click a
viewsheet tab, and select Restore from Viewsheet Bookmark
from the pop-up menu.
Setting Viewports
A viewport is an area within the graphics window that displays a
particular graphics view of the geometry you are working with. A
viewport configuration is an arrangement of one or more (up to four)
viewports. By default, Mastercam displays geometry from the top view
in a single viewport that occupies the entire graphics window.
To divide the graphics window into multiple viewports, or panes, each
capable of displaying a different graphics view, choose an option from
the View, Viewports menu.
Mastercam offers four viewport configurations. The following graphic

shows the default views assigned to each viewport configuration.
3
VP1 VP1 VP2
VP1 VP1 VP2
VP2 VP3 VP4
323
VP1 = Top view VP2 = Isometric view
VP3 = Front view VP4 = Right side view

3
X To change the view that appears in a viewport:
1 Use the cursor to select the pane. Then use one of the
following methods to choose a different view:
Choose View, Standard Views. Then select a standard
36
graphics view from the drop-down list.
Choose View, Orient, Named Views. In the Views
Selection dialog box, select a named view from the list of
standard and custom defined views.
37
From the Status bar, click Gview and select the view from
the list.
2 In the active pane of a multi-viewport configuration, move the
mouse over the axes coordinate display until the cursor
38
changes to an arrow. Click the axes marker to enlarge the
viewport and make it the only visible viewport.
TIP: To change the size of the viewport panes, grab and drag
39
the vertical or horizontal inside edge.
310
3
Setting Planes / Views / WCS

The Work Coordinate System (WCS) is the active coordinate system in
use by Mastercam at any given time. It contains the orientation of the
XYZ axes plus the location of the zero point (the origin). Manipulating
the WCS and setting planes and views to simplify the creation of
geometry, solids, and toolpaths are essential Mastercam skills you will
use often. In this section, you will learn about:
Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems
Displaying Coordinate Information (page 216)
Understanding the Top View (page 217)
Managing Views (page 218)
Measuring View Origins (page 220)
Changing View Origins (page 221)
Creating Views from Selected Entities (page 224)
Creating Views by Rotating (page 225)
Creating Views from Normals (page 226)
Change the Tplane or the WCS? (page 227)
Lathe Coordinate Systems (page 236)
TIP: Mastercam saves the most recently used plane, view, and
WCS selections for each machine group, and restores them
whenever you activate the machine group. For example, if one
machine group has toolpaths on the front of the part, and
another machine group has toolpaths on the side of the part,
when you activate either machine group, Mastercam
automatically activates the views and planes you were using the
last time the group was active.
Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems

Mastercam uses a 3D Cartesian coordinate system to locate your work
in three-dimensional space. The positions of geometry and toolpaths
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Setting Planes / Views / WCS • 207
are expressed in terms of three coordinate axes: X, Y, and Z. Each axis is

signed to indicate a positive (+) and a negative (-) direction.
+Z
3
+Y
-X +X 323
-Y -Z
Machining jobs often require you to work with coordinate locations in

sophisticated ways. Mastercam includes several useful tools you can
use to transform, overlay, slice, and otherwise manipulate the
3
coordinate system so that you can draw and machine a part any way
you choose.
To apply coordinate systems in Mastercam, you use functions to set
specific views. A view consists of two main parts:
36
A plane, or slice through the coordinate system
An origin, or zero point
You can use views as graphics views (Gviews) to view the part, as
37
construction planes (Cplanes) to orient geometry, and as tool planes
(Tplanes) to orient toolpaths.
Gviews define the perspective from which you view the part
38
Cplanes represent the planes in which you create new
geometry.
Tplanes are the cutting planes for the toolpaths you define.
Standard and custom views have assigned names, are saved with the
39
part information (making them portable), and can be selected as you
work with the part to change its orientation in 3D space.
310
3
TIPS: Use the following mouse and keyboard methods to

quickly change the Gview:
• To zoom in and out, spin the mouse wheel forward and
backwards.
• In Settings, Configuration, Screen properties, you set the
middle mouse button / wheel action to spin or pan. To
temporarily change this setting to the alternate behavior,
position the cursor in the graphics window, hold down the
[Alt] key and press down on the middle mouse button /
wheel to grab the contents of the graphics window. Continue
to press down while moving the mouse to either spin or pan.
• To move the image around, use the up, down, left, and right
keyboard arrow keys.
• To spin the image, hold down the [Alt] key and use the up,
down, left, and right arrow keys.
Standard Views
Every Mastercam part includes standard views that correspond to the
six faces of a cube (Top, Front, Back, Right, Left, Bottom) plus an
Isometric view. Standard views are available in all Mastercam files.
Their names and coordinates cannot be modified.
Figure 3-26: Standard Views
The Status bar Gview, Planes, and WCS menus provide options you
use to select standard views, create custom views, and set the Gview,
Tplane / Cplane, and WCS.
Use options in the Gview menu to orient the graphics view
and control the perspective from which you view the part. You
can also use options in the Mastercam View menu to modify

the graphics window display.
To draw geometry or create toolpaths on a specific plane, use 3
options in the Planes menu options to change the
construction plane and tool plane. The options in this menu
set both the construction plane and the tool plane at the same
time. Each function in this menu lets you set both the planar
orientation and the origin.
323
TIP: To set the Cplane and Tplane independently, you must use
the Status bar setup option [!] to add a Cplane and Tplane pane
to the Status bar. In the Customize status bar dialog box, use the
3
right–click menu to insert the Tplane and Cplane fields. After
saving the changes, use the Tplane and Cplane Status bar
menus to set each plane to a specific orientation.
36
The WCS menu options allow you to align the work
coordinate system with a specific view. You can select a
standard view, access the list of saved views, or create a new
view based on part geometry or by manipulating the current
view.
37
Because Mastercam breaks views and planes into separate functions,
you can maintain the plane selections for each function
independently.
For example, you can be looking at the part in an isometric view
38
(Gview = Isometric) while drawing geometry on the front of the part
(Cplane = Front).
Note: For simple 2D geometry, the Top Tplane / Cplane (default)

39
corresponds to the standard XY plane .
Using Gview / Planes / WCS Status Bar Options 310

Many of the same options are available from the Status bar Gview,
Planes, and WCS menus. Use these options in a similar manner to set
the specified plane. 3
Figure 3-27: Gview / Planes / WCS Status bar menus
Gview Planes WCS
If you configure the Status bar to include separate Cplane and Tplane
panes, these menus also share many common fields.
Figure 3-28: Cplane and Tplane Status bar menus
Cplane Tplane 3
323
3
36
37
To help you become familiar with using view, planes, and WCS Status
bar menu options, descriptions and tips for each option are provided
38
below, organized by the their general category.
Standard views: Select Top, Front, Back, Right, Left, Bottom,
or Isometric to quickly set a standard plane. When selecting a
standard view from the Gview or Planes menus, the plane
39
you set is relative to the current WCS. This is why (WCS) is
part of the standard view name in these menus. Standard
planes line up with a cube which has been shifted so that it is
parallel to the WCS axes.
310
TIP: To reset the Gview or Cplane / Tplane to the default Top
system view, regardless of the WCS setting, select Named, and
then choose Top from the View Selection dialog box. 3
Named views: Options that include “by Name” or “named

views” orient the selected view or plane with a view you select
from the View Selection dialog box. This dialog box displays
all the views that have been created and saved with the part,
including standard and custom views.
Geometry / Entity: Aligns the selected plane with geometry
that you select from the graphics window. For example, if you
select a face of the part, the plane is oriented as if you are
looking straight down on a line normal to the part face. When
you choose this option, you must select an arc, two lines, or
three points to define the plane.
Solid face: Similar to the Geometry option, but aligns the
plane to a selected solid face.
Note: For step-by-step instructions on using the Geometry and

Solid face functions, see “Creating Views from Selected Entities”
on page 224.
Rotate: Creates a new view by rotating the current view about

any or all of the axes by a specified number of degrees.
Dynamic: (Gview only) Creates a new view by rotating the
view perspective as you drag the mouse.
Note: For step-by-step instructions on using the Rotate and

Dynamic functions, see “Creating Views by Rotating” on page 225.
Last: Sets the plane equal to whatever it was oriented to

before the current selection.
Normal: Creates a new view using a selected line that is
normal to the desired plane. You must also select the
orientation of the coordinate system relative to the normal
line. For step-by-step instructions, see “Creating Views from
Normals” on page 226.
= Gview: Sets the selected plane with the same view as the
current Gview.
=Tplane, =Cplane: Aligns the selected plane with the same
view as the current Tplane or Cplane.
= WCS: (Planes only) Sets the Tplane and Cplane equal to the
same view as the current WCS.
Planes Always = WCS: (Planes only) Links the Tplane and
Cplane to the WCS so that if you change the WCS, it will also
update the Tplane and Cplane. Selecting this option disables

the other options in the menu.
Origin: Displays the origin of the selected view / plane and, if 3
enabled, allows you to click and change it. Using this method
to change the origin automatically creates a new view that you
can name and save to the view catalog. You can also use the
View Manager to change the origin of an existing view and
update the origin of all planes that are linked to the view,
323
including the WCS.
Saved as: Indicates whether the new view has been saved and
displays its name.
Name and Save: (Gview only) If the current view has not been
3
saved, use this option to open the New View dialog box where
you can set parameters and save the custom view. (If the
current view has not been saved, Mastercam displays Gview:
Not Saved in the graphics window.)
36
Setting the Tplane Different from the Cplane
You can set the tool plane and construction plane to the same view at
the same time using the Planes function on the Status bar. However,
37
some applications may require you to set these planes independently.
Use one of the following methods to accomplish this:
From the Status bar, choose WCS, View Manager. Use the
View Manager dialog box to select different views for each
38
plane. Use other dialog box options to customize the origin
and assign work offsets.
39
310
3
Figure 3-29: View Manager dialog box
When creating a toolpath, choose the Planes button in the

Toolpath parameters tab. Then use the Toolpath Coordinate
System dialog box to select the different views.
Note: Using this method affects only the current toolpath.

Choose the Status bar configure option [!] and use the
right-click menu to insert separate Cplane and Tplane planes
into the Status bar. Then use the Status bar Cplane and Tplane
menu functions to set the planes independently.
3
Work Coordinate Systems
You can shift and move the Mastercam coordinate axes to create a
323
work coordinate system (WCS). Defining a WCS lets you easily move
the coordinate system to your part when creating geometry, solids, or
toolpaths. Using this technique eliminates the need to perform
complex calculations, or otherwise transform the part to the
coordinate system. Instead of moving the part, you are moving its
3
orientation.
Gviews, Cplanes, and Tplanes are all measured relative to the WCS and
its origin. However, you change the WCS in exactly the same way that
you change other views: create a view which captures the orientation
36
and origin that you want to work with, then set the WCS equal to it.
X To realign or create a new work coordinate system:

From the Status bar, choose WCS. Then select an option in
37
this menu to align the WCS with a different view. You can
select a standard view, access the list of saved views, or create
a new view based on part geometry or by manipulating a
current view.
38
Note: From the WCS Status bar menu, choose the View Manager
option to access the View Manager dialog box. This dialog box
provides a central location for working with all views that have
been created for the part. You can modify existing views, create
39
new ones, and set the Cplane, Tplane, and the WCS to selected
views.
310
Coordinate Systems and Machine
Definitions 3
The WCS and custom views are not used to model your machine tool
or axis orientation. Instead, the properties of the machine definition
are used to accomplish this.
Mastercam maintains a separate coordinate system, called the world
coordinate system, to model the machine tool. The machine definition
defines how the axes of the machine tool are physically laid out and
oriented, for example, the orientation of the Z axis on a horizontal mill.

When you create a toolpath and select its tooling, the machine
definition provides the necessary information on axis combinations,
turret and spindle orientations, and how the machine tools are
mounted. This information is available to the post processor.
You can move a part file transparently from a vertical mill to a
horizontal mill, or from one spindle of a lathe to another, without
having to manually transform the coordinate system in the part file.
Displaying Coordinate Information

Mastercam integrates several different status indicators into the
graphics window so you can tell at a glance how your work is oriented.
The following information always displays in the lower left corner of
The picture of the coordinate axes (the gnomon) shows the orientation
of the current Gview.
The lower line displays the name of the views aligned with the Gview,
WCS, Cplane, and Tplane.
Note: The Tplane view information displays only when a machine

definition or machine group is active.
The following picture shows the same display when a machine is

active. In this example, the Tplane and Cplane are set to the same view
(the front of the part):
The following picture shows the same display when the Tplane and
Cplane are oriented differently. In this case, both are set to align with
different custom views: 3
323
Displaying Coordinate Axes
At any time, you can press F9 to display the coordinate axes and origin.
The default color for these axes is brown. The axes for the Cplane and
3
Tplane views also display, if they are different (the Cplanes axes in
blue, and the Tplane axes green).
To see an enhanced axis display that includes additional gnomons,
press Alt+F9:
36
In the upper left corner of the graphics
window, a gnomon shows the Cplane
orientation.
37
In the upper right corner, another
gnomon shows the Tplane orientation.
38
A third gnomon displays at the WCS
origin to indicate its orientation. It
appears in the color assigned to the WCS 39
view in the View Manager.
Understanding the Top View 310

When you work in the default WCS, the Top view is parallel to the XY
plane. If you have simple 2D geometry, you are looking straight down
on it in the Top view. This perspective gets more complicated when the
WCS is aligned with a different view. Remember, the Gview, Tplane, 3
and Cplane are all measured relative to the WCS. When the WCS
changes, the Top plane also changes to remain parallel to the WCS.
You can work with the Top view in the following ways:
Regardless of the current WCS setting, you can always return
to the standard, pre-defined Top view. In the example below,
the T/Cplane is set to Top. Whenever you see Top displayed in

this way, whether it is for a Cplane, Tplane, Gview, or WCS, it is
in reference to the standard Top view.
Use the View Selection dialog box to select the standard, pre-
defined Top view. You can choose this view without affecting
the view used to align the current WCS. For example, if the
WCS is aligned to a custom view but you want to draw
geometry in the default XY plane, from the Status bar, choose
Planes, Named. Then select Top from the View Selection
dialog box.
To select the Top plane relative to the WCS, from the Status
bar, choose Planes, Top (WCS). When you look at the status
area, instead of Top, the same view name as the WCS displays,
instead of Top, indicating that the top plane is now parallel to
the WCS instead of to the system XY plane.
If you create 2D geometry in this orientation, it will be parallel

to the WCS view, not the XY plane.
Managing Views
The View Manager dialog box is a central point where you can select,
edit, create and manage views.
Figure 3-30: View Manager dialog box
3
323
3
36
Some of the tasks that you can accomplish here include:
Applying selected views to the Cplane, Tplane, and the WCS
37
Editing the origin of a view
Assigning a work offset to a view (when you select the view for
a toolpath, the work offset code is automatically generated)
Creating a new view relative to existing views or by copying
38
existing views
The list contains all of the views that have been defined in the current
part file. Click a view to select it, then use the buttons in the Set
current view and origin section to apply it to the WCS, Cplane, or
39
Tplane.
Right-Click Menu Options 310

The View Manager right–click menu provides quick access to
additional view management options, including:
Rename: Change the name of a custom view; you cannot
rename a standard view.
3
Delete: Permanently remove a custom view from the view list
and part file; you cannot delete a standard view.
Import: Import views from another part and add them to the
view list. First, choose a part file that contains the views to
import. Then, in the View Selection dialog box, select one or
more views to import. The selected views are added to the

current file.
Info: Display a report with detailed information about all the
views in the view list.
Measuring View Origins

When you work with the origin of a view, you often see its location
expressed in view coordinates. The coordinate values of the origin
express a vector from the original system origin to the view origin,
which is measured along the view axes.
This might be easier to understand with an example. Consider the
following rectangle, anchored at the point indicated in the following
graphic. The anchor point has coordinates X2, Y1.5, Z0.
Using this example, suppose we create a view aligned with this

rectangle, with its origin at the anchor point. If the axes of the new
view are parallel to the system axes, its origin in view coordinates is the
same as the original coordinates of the point (as displayed in the View
Manager).
Next, create another view anchored on the same point but with the X
and Y axes flipped. In the View Manager, you will see that the
coordinate values for its origin are reversed.
3
323
Finally, consider what happens if you rotate the rectangle 25 degrees

3
about its edge closest to the X axis, and create a new view. The anchor
point has not moved, but the axes are aligned, as shown below.
36
37
In this example, the X axis orientation is the same as the standard

38
system view, but the Y and Z axes are rotated. The X coordinate of the
origin is X=2, and the Y and Z coordinates reflect the axis rotation.
39
310
3
Changing View Origins
You can use several techniques to change the origin of a view. You can
use the View Manager to edit the origin, or you can select a new origin
for the Tplane or Cplane. When you do this, you can apply the new
origin to the view which is currently mapped to those functions, or
create a new view.
Note: When you change the origin for an existing view, Mastercam
automatically updates the tool origin for any toolpaths created in
that view. These toolpaths will need to be regenerated before they
can be posted.
X To change the origin from the View Manager:

1 From the Status bar, choose WCS, Display View Manager.
2 In the View Manager dialog box, select a view from the list.
3 In the Origin section, enter the coordinates of the new origin

in any of the following ways:
Type the coordinates of a new origin in the X-Y-Z fields.

Choose the Select button to choose a new origin from the
graphics window.
Choose the Reset button to reset the origin to 0,0,0.
TIPS:
• Deselect the Enable origin check box if the selected view sets
3
only the orientation of a plane, and you do not want to change
the origin.
• Select the Associative check box to maintain a link to
geometry in the graphics window. For example, you might
create a view aligned with a face of your part. If you select
323
the Associative option, Mastercam updates the view's
orientation and origin when the underlying geometry moves.
Deselect this option if you are creating the view from
temporary guides or construction lines that you plan to
3
delete.
4 Click OK to save the changes and exit the function. The origins
of any functions that are currently aligned with the view (such
as the Tplane or Cplane) are immediately updated to reflect
36
the new origin.
X To change the origin from the Planes menu:

1 From the Status bar, select Planes, Cplane and Tplane Origin.
37
2 In the graphics window, select the point for the new origin.
3 In the Update Origin or Create New View dialog box, choose

one of the following options:
38
To modify the origin of the view currently assigned to the
Cplane / Tplane, click Update. This completes the
procedure.
To create a new view at the new origin, click Create new
39
and continue with the next step.
4 In the New View dialog box, use the following steps to define
a new view:
a Type in a new name for the view.
310
b Reset the origin for the view, as necessary, by clicking the
Select button and picking a point in the graphics window.
c To associate a work offset with the view, select the Work
3
Offset # check box. Then type the number of the offset in
the field, or choose Get unique to assign the next unused
offset number.
d To immediately align the work coordinate system to the
new view, choose the Set as WCS option.
e Click OK to save the new view and add it to the view

catalog stored in the part file.
Creating Views from Selected Entities

Use these steps to create a new view from entities you select in the
graphics window. The steps are similar whether you create the view
from wireframe or surface geometry, or a solid face.
X To create a new view from wireframe or surface geometry:

1 From the Status bar Planes or WCS menu, select the option to
define planes / WCS “by Geometry”.
2 Select sufficient geometry to define a plane. Select either:
Three points (these must be individual point entities, not

locations based on other entities, like endpoints,
midpoints, or intersections)
Two intersecting lines
A flat 2D entity, such as an arc or flat surface (not a solid
face)
Note: Use general selection methods to select entities in the

graphics window. To select a hidden face, use the Select from
back option in the General Selection ribbon bar (available only in
Solids mode).
3 Use the following steps in the Select View dialog box to select
the positive directions for the axes:
a Click the arrows to preview different sets of axis
combinations.
b Click OK to accept the displayed axis combination.
4 Use options in the New View dialog box to define the new
view.
Mastercam displays default origin coordinates based on
the selected geometry, but you can use the Select button
to choose a different location.
Select the Set new origin check box to align the Cplane,
Tplane, and/or the WCS origins relative to the view origin
when applying the view. If unselected, when you work in
the view, its planar orientation is applied to the WCS,
Tplane and Cplane functions, but their origin does not

change in.
To make the view associative with the geometry that you 3
just selected, select the Associative check box. If selected,
when the geometry moves, the definition and origin of the
view are automatically updated.
5 Choose OK to save the view. It is immediately applied to the
function that was active when you started this process. For
323
example, if you started from the WCS menu, the new view is
applied to the WCS.
X To create new Gviews from geometry

3
You can also create a new graphics view from selected
geometry using one of the following methods:
From the Gview Status bar menu, select View by Entity.
From the View menu, choose Orient, View by Entity.
36
The new view is created and applied to the Gview
immediately after you select geometry or an entity, but it is
not named or saved. To save the new view, choose Save from
the Gview Status bar menu. Then use options in the New
37
View dialog box to name the view, set the origin and other
parameters and save it to the part file.
38
Creating Views by Rotating
You can create new views by rotating the current view either a fixed
angular amount in each axis, or dynamically. 39
X To rotate a view by a fixed amount:
1 From the Planes or WCS Status bar menu, select the option to
Rotate planes. / WCS
2 In the Rotate view dialog box, type the angle of rotation about
310
each of the axes and choose OK. A preview of the orientation
displays in the graphics window as you enter each value and
tab to a new field (you might need to move the dialog box to
see it).
3
3 Use options in the New view dialog box to name the view, set
the origin and specify other parameters.
4 Choose OK to save the view. It is automatically applied to the
function that was active when you started. For example, if you
started from the Planes menu, the new view is applied to the
Tplane /Cplane.
Note: You can also select Rotate Graphics View from the Gview
Status bar menu. To name and save the new view you create using
this method, you must choose Save from the Gview Status bar
menu and complete the fields in the New View dialog box, as
described.
X To rotate a view by dragging it in the graphics window.

1 Use one of the following methods to select the Dynamic
Rotation function:
From the Mastercam menu, choose View, Orient,
Dynamic Rotation.
From the Gview Status bar menu, choose Dynamic
Rotation.
Right–click in the graphics window and choose Dynamic
Rotation from the right–click menu.
2 Set a rotation point by clicking a point in the graphics window.
3 Drag the mouse to rotate the Gview about the selected point.
4 To fix the view and exit the function, click the mouse again.
The status display in the graphics window should read Gview:
Not saved:
To cancel the rotated view, from the Gview Status bar

menu, choose Previous View.
To save the rotated view, from the Gview Status bar menu,
choose Save. Complete the fields in the New View dialog
box and click OK to save the view and exit the function.
Creating Views from Normals

The normal of a line is perpendicular (90°) to it. Use the Normal
function in the Planes and WCS Status bar menus to quickly create a
new view by defining a plane perpendicular to a selected line. The Z
axis lies on the line that you select. Use the New View Orientation
ribbon bar and the Select View and New View dialog boxes to:
Specify a rotation value

(to fix the angular position of the X Y axes about the Z axis)
Choose an axis orientation
3
Set the rotation point
Name and save the new view
X To define a new normal view:

323
1 From the Planes or WCS Status bar menu, select the option to
set “by / to Normal”.
2 In the graphics window, select the normal line and press
[Enter] to set the Z axis parallel to the selected line.
3
3 Use the Select View dialog box to cycle through the possible
axis orientations and choose the one you want. Click OK to
accept the view orientation. 36
4 If you entered a rotation value in Step 3, you are prompted to
select a rotation point for the selected axes orientation. Click a
point in the graphics window and drag the mouse to preview
the axis orientations at different index positions. For example,
if you entered an angle of 30 degrees in the ribbon bar, drag
37
the mouse around the rotation point to see the axes at every
30 degree position. Press [Enter] to fix the axes in position.
5 Use options in the New View dialog box to name the view, set
the origin and specify other parameters.
38
6 Choose OK to save the view. It is automatically applied to the
function that was active when you started. For example, if you
started from the WCS menu, the new view is applied to the
WCS.
39
Note: You can also create a normal view from the Gview functions.
You can select Normal from the Gview Status bar menu, or, from
the Mastercammenu, choose View, Orient, Normal View. To
310
name and save the new view you create using these methods, you
must choose Save from the Gview Status bar menu and complete
the fields in the New View dialog box, as described.
3
Change the Tplane or the WCS?
To machine a part that is not lying flat in the XY plane, do you change
the tool plane or the WCS to get the correct NC output? To help you
answer this question, this section uses examples to illustrate the
practical differences between each approach. An important difference

to consider is that changing the Tplane typically results in a rotary
motion code (A, B, or C) when you post the toolpath (assuming that
you are using a post processor configured for rotary output), while
changing the WCS does not.
The part we are using in this example consists of a contour toolpath
around a block that sits at a 20-degree angle about the Y axis.
A custom view has been created which aligns with the rectangle; it has
been named SLANT 20 DEG and saved to the view list. The examples
which follow show the effect of changing the Tplane or the WCS to
align the toolpath with the part geometry.
Example 1: Changing the Tplane

In the first example, you will not modify the WCS. Instead, you will
align the Tplane with the part. Click Planes on the status bar, choose
Named, and select the SLANT 20 DEG view. The status display in the
graphics window should look like this.
Next, create a simple contour toolpath around the rectangle. In the

Toolpath Parameters tab, click the Planes button to open the
Toolpath Coordinate System dialog box and verify the plane settings.
Figure 3-31: Example 1 Toolpath Coordinate System dialog box
3
323
3
36
When you backplot the toolpath, you can see that the tool axis is
normal to the part geometry.
37
38
39
When you post the part with a 5-axis post processor, a B20 code is
310
output, rotating the tool axis or table 20 degrees before the part is cut.
The Tplane selection is what triggered the rotary motion.
3
Example 1 NC Code:
...
N140 ( 1/4 FLAT ENDMILL TOOL - 1 DIA. OFF. - 0
LEN. - 0 DIA. - .25 )
N150 T1 M6
N160 G0 G54 G90 X1. Y-1.125 C0 B20. S2139 M3
...
If the part will be mounted on a rotary fixture, this would be the proper
approach.
Example 2: Changing the WCS

In this example, you will create the exact same toolpath on the same
part as in Example 1, but instead of setting the Tplane to the SLANT 20
DEG view, you will set the WCS to this view. (Click WCS on the status
bar, then Named and select SLANT 20 DEG from the list). After setting
the WCS, click Planes in the status bar and choose Top (WCS). The
status display in the graphics window should look like this.
The T/Cplane displays SLANT 20 DEG because the Top view that you
selected for the T/C plane is relative to the WCS. Since this matches a
named view from the catalog (SLANT 20 DEG), Mastercam displays
the view by name.
Next, you will create the same contour toolpath. In the Toolpath
Parameters tab, click the Planes button to verify the plane settings.
Figure 3-32: Example 1 Toolpath Coordinate System dialog box
3
323
3
36
The Tplane matches Example 1, but the WCS is different. Select the
Display relative to WCS option to see the relationship between the
Tplane and the WCS. 37
38
39
310
3
When you backplot the toolpath, the toolpath and tool orientation
look exactly the same, but when you post it, there is no rotary motion.
Example 2 NC Code:
...
N140 ( 1/4 FLAT ENDMILL TOOL - 1 DIA. OFF. - 0
LEN. - 0 DIA. - .25 )
N150 T1 M6
N160 G0 G54 G90 X1. Y-1.125 C0. B0. S2139 M3
...
If the part will be mounted flat on the table instead of a rotary fixture,
this would be the proper approach.
Why is there a difference?

In Example 1, selecting the Tplane told Mastercam that it needed to
produce the rotary motion. In Example 2, the Tplane was the same.
However, because the WCS was set to the same plane—and
Mastercam measures tool and construction planes relative to the WCS,
the part appeared to be lying flat in the XY plane and so no rotary
motion was created.
Use the Tplane technique described in Example 1 when the part, or a

portion of the part, will be physically mounted at an angle or rotated in
the machine tool, for example, when tilting the tool axis, or rotating a
fixture or table. Tombstoning applications also require you to change
3
Tplanes for each face of the fixture to produce the proper rotary
output.
Use the WCS technique in Example 2 when the part will be machined
flat but the part geometry is at an angle and you do not want to, or
323
cannot, transform it. Use the WCS to bring the coordinate system to
the part, instead of the other way around.
3
Using WCS and Tplanes to Set Up
Toolpaths
In this section, you will review common machining situations and
36
examples of how you might use WCS and Tplanes to set up specific
jobs. While the details of your specific machining problems are
unique, reviewing this information can help you determine when to
create a new WCS and when to use Tplanes. 37
General Guidelines
If you are programming moves that the machine can
accomplish in one setup, use a single WCS.
38
If the application requires you to manually change the part
orientation in the machine, use a different WCS.
For most common milling applications on a 3-axis knee mill
or VMC, leave the WCS aligned to the Top view and use the
39
Top tool plane for your work.
If you have a rotary axis, do the following:
If the fixture rotates continuously while cutting the part,
leave the WCS and Tplane alone, and use the Rotary
310
options from the Toolpath parameters tab.
If the fixture must rotate to a fixed position before the
toolpath starts to machine a regular 2D or 3D toolpath, set
the Tplane to the desired plane before creating the
3
toolpath.
For 5-axis machines and multiaxis toolpaths, use tool planes
to work on the various faces.
Horizontal Machining Center / Tombstoning

If you are machining a block on the B axis of an HMC, as you work your
way around the block for each toolpath, set the Tplane equal to the
Front, Right, Back and Left views accordingly, with respect to the WCS.
Moving the Coordinate System to the Part (Machining

Flat)
Suppose a part must be machined lying flat on the table. The drawing
in the Mastercam file is oriented in a non-standard plane and you
cannot rotate, transform, or move the geometry in the file.
To address this situation, create a new view aligned with the part
geometry. Choose WCS from the Status bar, select WCS by Geometry,
and select either two lines from the contour or one of the arcs. When
the New View dialog box displays, assign a name, locate the origin at a
suitable point, and, optionally, assign a work offset for the view. Click
OK to save the new view.
Select the new view for the WCS, and then align the Tplane and Cplane
to it. Choose Planes from the Status bar, then Top (WCS). Create a 2D
toolpath as usual. When you post the part, 2D tool motion commands
are dimensioned from the part origin, as if the part is lying flat.
Machining Two Parts on Different Fixtures

Suppose you must create operations to machine two different parts. 3
Each part is mounted on a different fixture on the table.
323
3
In this situation, assign a different work offset to each fixture. Then,
when you create the toolpaths for each part, include the offset number
in each toolpath. By basing each toolpath on an offset number instead
of a coordinate position, you can run the job without worrying about
36
how the fixtures are positioned on the table. Before running the job,
the operator needs only to touch off the parts properly to set each
offset position in the control.
To accomplish this in Mastercam, choose View Manager from the
37
WCS Status bar menu and use the View Manager dialog box to create
a new view for each fixture. To create each view, click on the Top view,
and choose Copy. Then type a name for the new view and enter the
offset for the fixture. To define an origin for the view, in the Origin
section, choose Select and pick a point on the fixture as shown in the
38
above picture.
Before creating operations for each part, choose Named from the
Planes Status bar menu, and select the view you created for the fixture.
When you post the operations, Mastercam automatically outputs the
39
correct offset codes and creates tool positions relative to the origin
specified for each fixture.
310
3
Lathe Coordinate Systems

Traditional lathe applications use a very different coordinate system
from milling applications. Instead of a 3D, XYZ space, a typical lathe
coordinate system is 2D with the tool axis perpendicular to the spindle
(Z axis) instead of parallel to it.
Lathe 2D, XY Mill 3D, XYZ
+Z
+X
+Y
-Z +Z
-X +X
-X
-Y -Z
Mastercam includes a number of functions you use to create lathe

parts and toolpaths for different types of lathes. These tools include
machine definitions, Cplanes, and the WCS. In the following sections
you will learn techniques for working with lathe coordinates.
Lathe Tool and Machine Definitions

Tool and machine definitions provide important information that
allows Mastercam to interpret the lathe coordinates.
The machine definition describes where the spindle and tool
turrets are mounted, and the direction and orientation of each
of the machine axes, including the angle of a slant-bed lathe.
For sophisticated multi-turret and multi-spindle lathes, where
individual axes can exist on several components, you can set
up axis combinations that link the axes of specific
components together.
The tool definition specifies the turret/spindle where the tool
is mounted, its orientation, and mounting direction. When
you select a tool (and axis combination, if applicable) for an
operation, the turret, spindle, and tool orientation are read
from the tool definition.
For the most part, axis orientation information from the machine
definition is not used by the Mastercam interface; it is read by the post
processor. You use standard views and planes to work with part
geometry. When you post operations to create the NC code, the post
processor reads machine-specific axes information from the machine
definition.
Rotating Lathe Tool Axes

Mastercam supports “B-axis” lathes where the tool is mounted on a 3
rotary axis (typically B) similar to a mill. The rotary axis can be
swiveled to change the angle at which the tool is used. The tool can
also be rotated about its long axis to a specific orientation; this allows
you to use the same tool on both the main and sub-spindles. 323
To generate the proper rotational output, rather than change the
Tplane as you might with a mill, enter the tool angle for a lathe
toolpath by clicking the Tool Angle button in the Toolpath parameters
tab. 3
Note: This option is available only if the appropriate rotary axes
have been defined in the active machine definition.
Use the Tool Angle dialog box that displays to enter the angle of the
36
tool. You can enter the angle directly in the field, or select a line
parallel to the Feed Direction or Plunge Direction by clicking the
appropriate button. Then enter the rotation angle of the tool about its
axis. You can select 0 or 180, or choose Other and type the desired 37
angle in the field.
TIP: You can also store a tool angle in the tool definition.
Typically, this is done to support lathes without a B axis in order
to create tools that are at an angle to the primary axes. For
38
lathes with true B-axis capability, enter a tool angle of 0 in the
tool definition so that the tool is parallel to the axis for
compatibility with a tool changer. Then use the Tool Angle
button and dialog box to set the desired tool angle for each
39
operation.
IMPORTANT: The angle entered in the Tool Angle dialog box 310
is measured relative to any tool angle stored in the tool
definition; it does not simply replace or overwrite it.
3
Lathe Cplanes
Mastercam provides special lathe construction planes that allow you
work in familiar lathe coordinates. For conventional 2D turning
applications, use the Status bar Planes menu to select the coordinate
system. Select Lathe Radius or Lathe Diameter coordinates, and then
specify the desired X and Z directions.
This sets the Cplane and Tplane; there is no need to change the WCS.
For conventional 2D turning applications, you can leave the WCS as
the system Top view.
Vertical Turret Lathes

Mastercam includes a special system-defined view which transforms
the lathe coordinate system for a vertical turret lathe. From the Status
bar, choose WCS, View Manager. Then select LATHE Z = WORLD Z.
Click the Set WCS icon to align the work coordinate system with this
view and choose OK.
This maps the lathe Z axis so that it is vertical. You can now choose a
diameter or radius coordinate system from the Planes menu. When
you work with the part in the graphics window, it is oriented vertically,
as it will be on the machine.
Note: Prior to Mastercam X Lathe, when you generated a lathe

turning toolpath, Mastercam automatically wrote the coordinates
to the NCI file in terms of a typical lathe coordinate system. Instead
3
of using the standard XYZ axes like Mastercam Mill, the
coordinates in the NCI file were written using standard lathe axes.
This is no longer true. In Mastercam X Lathe, you can still work in

323
familiar lathe coordinate systems (either radius or diameter) by
selecting them from the Planes menu on the Status bar.
However, if you are a post writer and familiar with creating posts
for earlier versions of Mastercam Lathe, your post processors may
3
now need to perform this initial coordinate transformation rather
than just reading it from the NCI file.
For more information on MP post processors or detailed

36
information about the NCI file, see the “MP Post Processor
Reference Guide”, available on CD from your Mastercam Reseller.
37
38
39
310
3
Editing Your Work

Functions in the Edit menu allow you to undo / redo and delete /
undelete actions you perform when working with CAD functions. You
will use these functions often, particularly when you are learning to
use Mastercam.
TIP: You can also use functions in the Xform and Analyze
menus to modify entities. For more information, see “Modifying
Geometry” on page 331.
Undo / Redo
You can undo and redo one or more sequential events
that occur while working with the current file and
design functions.
An event is defined as a function-based operation. There is no
difference between creating a single line or using an Xform function
that creates 100 lines. Each is a single event.
By default, Mastercam can save up to 2 billion undo / redo events,
restricted only by the amount of random access memory (RAM)
available on your PC. To enhance your PC performance, you can
configure Mastercam to store only a specific number of events and
allocate a maximum amount of RAM to the undo / redo functions. For
more information, see “Setting Defaults and Preferences
Notes:
• Each time you open a part file or create a new file, the list of
undo / redo events is cleared from memory. However, saving or
merging the current file does not clear this list.
• Due to the complex and associative nature of creating and
modifying toolpaths, you cannot undo or redo toolpath-related
functions.
• You can undo / redo the creation of a solid and Xform events
involving a solid. However, other Solids functions, including
changes you make to solid operations in the Solids Manager, are
not stored as undo / redo events.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Editing Your Work • 241
The events you can undo and redo are limited to Mastercam CAD
functions, including those you use to create or edit geometry, drafting
entities, file annotations, and entity attributes. If your Mastercam
installation includes Mastercam Solids, you can also undo / redo
3
solids creation and transform operations.
323
3
36
37
38
39
310
3
The following CAD functions are not saved as events:

Editing live entities. However, fixing the entity by exiting the
function is saved as an event. If you undo this type of event,
you delete the entity.
Delete / undelete
Blank / unblank
Hide / unhide
Setting system attributes (color, level, point and lines styles)
Status bar functions (Gview, Cplane, Tplane, WCS, Z depth,
Levels, Groups, 2D / 3D construction)
Zooming or panning images in the graphics window
Delete / Undelete
The delete and undelete functions in the Edit, Delete submenu allow
you to permanently remove or restore one or more selected entities
from the graphics window and from the part file. You can also use the
Delete Duplicates (simple) and Delete Duplicates - Advanced
functions to find and automatically delete duplicate entities in the
current file. This section describes each delete and undelete function
and how and when to use it.
Deleting Duplicate Entities

Duplicate entities make files larger than necessary and interfere with
chaining. Mastercam provides a number of options you use to delete
duplicate entities.
File Open: Configure Mastercam to automatically find and
delete duplicate entities every time you open a file, and
provide an online summary of the types and number of
duplicate entities that were deleted. For more information,
see “Start / Exit” on page 143.
Translate /Join: When you translate and join entities,
duplicate lines sometimes result. You can configure
Mastercam to automatically delete all duplicate lines created
during join operations. For more information, see “CAD
Settings” on page 117.
Editing: Use the Delete duplicates and Delete duplicates
(advanced) functions in the Edit menu to find and delete
duplicate entities in the current file. Each function is
described below.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Editing Your Work • 243
Delete Duplicates (simple)

You can automatically delete duplicate entities based on 3
their XYZ position and entity type. If you select entities
before choosing this function, Mastercam searches only for
duplicates that match the selected entity types. Otherwise, it
locates and deletes all duplicates for all entity types. An online
summary informs you of the entities that were deleted.
323
Figure 3-33: Example: Delete Duplicates summary
3
36
Delete Duplicates (advanced)
Use this function to find and delete duplicate entities in the
current file based on their XYZ position, selected entity type,
37
and the entity attributes you specify, including:
Color
Level
Line Style
Line Width
Point Style
38
This function also provides an online summary of the entities that
were deleted.
Delete Entity
39
You can use different methods to delete entities, based on
whether you select entities before or after choosing the
Delete function.
310
First use the General Selection ribbon bar options to
select entities. Then press the Delete key on your PC keyboard
or choose the Delete entity function from the Edit menu.
First choose the Delete entity function. Then select the
3
entities to delete and press the [Enter] key or choose the End
selection button in the General Selection ribbon bar.
Notes:
• To recover the entities you delete in error, use the Undelete or
Undo functions.
• To temporarily remove selected entities from the graphics
window, use the Hide or Blank functions. For more
information, see “Hiding Entities” on page 264 and “Blanking
Entities” on page 264.
Undeleting Entities
Use the Undelete functions to restore one or more deleted entities to
the current file. You can undelete only the entities you deleted while
working with the current file. For example, if you delete entities from
File 1, you can “undelete” them only until you open File 2.
Undelete functions include:
Undelete entity: Restores the last entity you deleted.
You can continue to select this option to
incrementally undelete entities.
Undelete # of entities: Restores the number of
specified entities by reversing the sequence in
which they were deleted. For example, if you deleted
20 entities and wanted to only delete the first 15,
choose this function and type 5 in the field. The last 5 entities
that were deleted are “undeleted” and restored to the part file.
Undelete entities by mask: Opens the Selection
mask dialog box where you can specify the criteria
you want to use to select the entities to undelete.
TIP: To recover the entities you delete in error, you can also use
the Undo function.
DRAWING AND DESIGN BASICS / Power User Tips • 245
Power User Tips

3
Power user tips go beyond design basics to help you master advanced
Mastercam CAD features, including:
Drafting (page 245)
323
Working with Levels (page 260)
Hiding Entities (page 264)
Blanking Entities (page 264) 3
Copying Entities (page 265)
Drafting 36
Use functions in the Create, Drafting menu and its submenus to work
with drafting entities. In this section, you will learn to create and
modify different types of drafting entities, and apply them effectively.
For more information, see: 37
Drafting Dimensions on page 245
Smart Drafting Dimensions on page 246
Baseline, Chained, and Ordinate Dimensions on page 247
Working with Ordinate Dimensions on page 249
38
Non-Dimensioned Drafting Entities on page 252
Associating Drafting Entities with Geometry on page 255
Defining Drafting Options on page 258 39
Drafting Dimensions
Drafting dimensions measure the size of geometric entities or the
distances or angles between entities. All dimensions contain text, up to
310
two leader lines, and/or up to two witness lines.
3
Figure 3-34: Drafting dimensions
To create drafting dimensions for geometric entities, you use functions

in the Drafting Dimension and Ordinate submenus. Mastercam
supports linear, angular, and radius/diameter dimension formats, and
for each format, a variety of dimension types.
Linear dimensions measure the length of a line or the
distance between two points and include the following
dimension types: horizontal, vertical, parallel, perpendicular,
baseline, chained, and tangent. You can also use horizontal
and vertical dimensions to measure the radius or diameter of
arcs and circles.
Radius/diameter dimensions display rotating leader lines
and measure the radius or diameter of arcs and circles.
Angular dimensions measure the angle formed by any of the
following: two non-parallel lines, two points and a line, three
points, or by a line and a horizon (a virtual line is defined by
specifying an angle relative to the X axis of the Cplane).
Note: For more information on baseline, chained, and ordinate

drafting entities, see page 247.
TIP: You can assign drafting entities to their own level, which
makes it easy to filter the display of drafting entities, as
necessary.
Smart Drafting Dimensions

Smart Drafting Dimensions is an intelligent, modal drafting
environment you use in conjunction with the Dimension
ribbon bar to quickly create and edit dimensions applied to
geometric entities. To activate Smart Drafting Dimensions,
choose the Smart Drafting Dimensions function in the Create,

Drafting submenu.
Most of the singular dimension functions that appear in the Create,
3
Drafting, Dimensions and Ordinate submenus (such as Horizontal,
Vertical, Parallel) can be accessed directly from the Dimension ribbon
bar.
Figure 3-35: Dimension ribbon bar
323
rs
de
3
mo ers
lea
n
r ti l
tio
Ve onta
di r
Re ead
t
Ar ered
Ra ete
ve
Di ber
ran
Up s
Ce ness
te
Lo a l
ta
Nu h t
ws
n
Bo us
c
tio
Al e
da
dl
ien
am
riz
ad
m
ig
ign
ck
nt
gl
nt
ro
xt
x
He
it
Ad
Op
Ho
An
Qu
Fo
Or
W
Te
Witness Position Format / Type Alignment Leaders Options

36
With Smart Drafting Dimensions, you can dynamically create and edit
dimensions for lines, circles, and arcs using select, drag, and draw
techniques—without selecting any other Drafting menu functions.
You can also edit and reposition notes and labels. 37
Dimension Ribbon Bar Shortcut Keys
All Dimension ribbon bar functions have shortcut keys, making it easy
to modify the type and format of drafting entities. For example, when
dimensioning a closed arc in Smart Drafting Dimensions, the default
38
dimension type is diameter (D). To change to radius, type [R] after
selecting the dimension, or as you drag and draw the dimension. To
change it back to diameter, type [D].
39
TIP: To become familiar with ribbon bar shortcut keys, activate
Learning Mode in the Settings, Configuration, Screen page.
When Learning Mode is active, you can view all shortcut keys
associated with ribbon bar options by moving the mouse over
the ribbon bar.
310
Baseline, Chained, and Ordinate Dimensions 3
Baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions are similar in that they
reference other dimensions and are created as a series of dimensions.
These dimensions are useful in applications such as sheet metal
design, where you specify a grid pattern for drilling holes.
To create these types of dimensions:
From the Create, Drafting, Dimension submenu,

choose Baseline Dimension.
From the Create, Drafting, Dimension submenu,

choose Chained Dimension.
Choose a function from the Create, Drafting,
Dimension, Ordinate submenu (For more information, see
“Working with Ordinate Dimensions” on page 249.)
Dimensions that reference a single base point (baseline or ordinate) or
an adjacent dimension (chained) and highlight the distances within or
between entities can be easier to understand and to program than
dimensions that measure individual geometry.
There are some differences in how baseline, chained, and ordinate
dimensions measure and display distances. These differences are
discussed below and may affect your choice of which dimension is
most appropriate in a given situation.
Figure 3-36: Baseline, chained, and ordinate dimensions
Baseline Dimensions
Baseline dimensions reference an existing linear dimension which
becomes the base, or zero point, for all baseline dimensions in the
series. Baseline dimensions inherit their orientation from the initial
dimension but are not associated. Create baseline dimensions when:
Associativity is not important
“Stacked” display and orientation suits the rest of the drawing
Measurement from a common reference point is desired

Chained Dimensions
Chained dimensions, like baseline dimensions, are linear. However,
3
instead of referencing a single base point, each dimension in a chain
references the previously created dimension. Chained dimensions
inherit their orientation from the initial dimension but are not
associated. Create chained dimensions when:
323
Relative associativity is important
“Stacked” display and orientation suit the rest of the drawing
Measurement of interval between points is desired 3
Ordinate Dimensions
Ordinate dimensions reference an initial base ordinate dimension that
you create or select and whose position Mastercam designates as zero.
Because they are not linear, ordinate dimensions give you greater
36
flexibility with regard to positioning, alignment, and orientation. Base
(parent) or secondary (child) ordinate dimension may be associated
with geometry. Create ordinate dimensions when:
Associativity is important
37
Non-linear display and flexible positioning, alignment, and
orientation suit the rest of the drawing
Measurement from a common reference point is desired 38
Working with Ordinate Dimensions
While non-linear in format, ordinate dimensions can display
tolerances. The base dimension is an initial ordinate dimension that
you create or select and whose position Mastercam designates as
39
0.0000. For each child dimension, Mastercam calculates its distance
from the base dimension to determine its text value. Base or child
ordinate dimensions may be associated with geometry independently
of each other. However, if a change in geometry causes an associated
310
base ordinate dimension to become dirty, all children of that
dimension become dirty as well. (For more information, see
“Associating Drafting Entities with Geometry” on page 255.)
Use the following options from the Drafting menu to create and
3
modify ordinate dimensions.
Ordinate, Horizontal Ordinate Dimension

Choose this function to create horizontal ordinate
dimensions that measure the horizontal distance, from a
common base point, along the X axis of the current Cplane.
Figure 3-37: Ordinate, Horizontal Ordinate Dimension
Ordinate, Vertical Ordinate Dimension

This function allows you to create vertical ordinate
dimensions that measure the vertical distance, from a
common base point, along the Y axis of the current Cplane.
The following example shows a vertical ordinate dimension.
Figure 3-38: Ordinate, Vertical Ordinate Dimension
Ordinate, Parallel Ordinate Dimension

With this function, you can create parallel ordinate
dimensions that measure the distance, from a common base
point, along the axis formed by two points that you enter.
The following example shows a parallel ordinate dimension.
Figure 3-39: Ordinate, Parallel Ordinate Dimension
3
323
3
Ordinate, Add to an Existing Ordinate Dimension
Use this function to add secondary, or child, ordinate
36
dimensions to an existing ordinate base dimension that you
select and which Mastercam designates as 0.0000.
Ordinate, Window Ordinate Dimension 37

To create multiple sets of ordinate dimensions from a
common origin (base point), choose the Ordinate, Window
function. Then set parameters for dimensioning the selected
entities in the Ordinate Dimension: Automatic dialog box. 38
Figure 3-40: Drafting, Ordinate Window dialog box
39
310
3
Once you set a base point and other dimension parameters,
Mastercam automatically creates a base (parent) dimension and all
possible child dimensions relative to this point based on the selected
parameters and entities.
You can create horizontal and/or vertical ordinate dimensions, and

create dimensions at the center points of arcs, the endpoints of arcs,
and/or the endpoints of lines, splines, and surface curves. Using this
method saves time because you create many ordinate dimensions at
once, eliminating the need to enter individual points.
The ordinate dimensions you create using this method are not
associated with any geometry; however, child dimensions are
associated with the base point.
Ordinate, Align Ordinate Dimension

Choose this function to select, reposition, and align the text
of all related ordinate dimensions along a common axis.
Aligning ordinate dimensions can improve neatness in a
drawing while highlighting their relatedness. However, if
aligning the ordinate dimensions interferes with other entities in the
drawing, you can use the Dimension Ribbon bar Align option to move
a selected ordinate dimension independently from the others.
Non-Dimensioned Drafting Entities

Non-dimensioned drafting entities do not measure the size of
geometric entities or the distances or angles between entities. They
consist of freestanding witness and leader lines, notes, and hatch
patterns. Each Drafting function you use to create non-dimensioned
drafting entities is described below.
Create Witness Line

Use this function to create freestanding witness lines. You
can associate freestanding witness lines with the geometry
you select during their creation or by entering points relative
to an entity, such as midpoints, endpoints, center points, or
quadrant points.
Create Leader Line

In Mastercam, leader lines (drafting lines with single
arrowheads that function as pointers) most often point from
a dimension’s text to its witness lines. Unless you turn off the
display of leader lines, Mastercam creates leader lines
automatically when you create dimensions. You can use this function
to manually add leader lines with or without note text to create labels
or freestanding leader lines.
Create Note
This function allows you to create drafting notes and labels,
and as an alternative way to create freestanding single,
3
segmented, or multiple leader lines. Drafting notes and
labels are blocks of text (one or more lines) which you can
insert into a drawing. Notes are standalone blocks of text, whereas
labels have one or more leader lines used as pointers. 323
Figure 3-41: Drafting Note dialog box
3
36
37
You enter note or label text by typing it or by loading it from an ASCII

38
file. You can also create line and paragraph breaks within a block of
note or label text.
Create X-Hatch 39
To fill a selected closed curve boundary with a specific hatch
pattern, use the Hatch function and choose from standard
and user-defined patterns.
310
3
Figure 3-42: Drafting Hatch dialog box
Figure 3-43: User-defined Hatch dialog box
You can also customize the spacing, and rotation angle of the selected
pattern.
Note: Hatch patterns fill closed boundaries, with the exception of

nested chains which form holes in the pattern. 3
Associating Drafting Entities with Geometry
In Mastercam, you can associate drafting entities (dimensions, labels,
leaders, and witness lines) with geometric entities. If the geometry
323
changes size or position, you use functions in the Drafting, Regen
submenu to regenerate associated drafting entities to reflect the
change. Regenerating associated drafting entities eliminates the need
to recreate new drafting entities each time the geometry changes.
3
Note: Use the Settings, Configuration, Dimensions and Notes,
Dimension Settings properties page to activate drafting
associativity and further define its parameters. For more
36
information, see “Dimensions and Notes” on page 125.
Read the following topics for more information on:

Creating Associated Drafting Entities (page 255)
37
Changing Associated Drafting Entities (page 256)
Associated Drafting Entity Status (page 256)
Regenerating Associated Drafting Entities (page 256) 38
Creating Associated Drafting Entities
You can configure Mastercam to turn associativity on or off for drafting
sessions. For most drafting applications, you work with associated
entities because of their labor-saving benefits.
39
You can associate labels, freestanding leader lines and witness lines,
and the following dimension types:
horizontal vertical
310
parallel perpendicular
baseline
circular (diameter, radius)

angular
ordinate (base only)

3
tangent point
Notes:
• Chained dimensions cannot be associated with geometric
entities.
• For more information on setting drafting configuration
parameters, see “Defining Drafting Options” on page 258.
To be associated, you must use Mastercam to create a drafting entity

for a selected geometric entity when the Associativity parameter is
selected (active) for the drafting session.
TIP: For preliminary drawings, it may be easier to work with

non-associated drafting entities when geometry is frequently
changing, parts are not drawn to scale, precise or current
dimensions are not essential, or you want to lock original
dimensions in place.
Changing Associated Drafting Entities

Once a drafting entity is created, you cannot change it from associated
to non-associated, or vice versa. You can only delete the existing
drafting entity and create a new one that has the desired property. If
you delete geometry with an associated drafting entity, Mastercam
prompts you to delete the associated entity or dissociate it.
Associated Drafting Entity Status

The status of an associated drafting entity is clean or dirty, depending
on whether it currently matches its associated geometry. Each status is
defined below.
Clean—The drafting entity's position and value (if a dimension) match
the geometry. This status applies to a newly created or regenerated
dimension.
Dirty—The drafting entity's position and/or value do not match the
geometry. This status occurs if you move or resize an object without
regenerating associated dimension. Dirty dimensions are highlighted
in a specific color (red is the default color).
Regenerating Associated Drafting Entities

When you create associated drafting entities, changing the size or
position of geometry changes the status of associated drafting entities
from clean to dirty.
Regenerating the drafting entity updates its position and/or value so

that they match the geometry. You typically regenerate associated
drafting entities after you: 3
Resize an entity to update the associated dimension’s value.
Move an entity to also move the associated dimension.
Modify / trim an arc so that a dimensioned quadrant point is
no longer valid. Mastercam prompts you to convert the
323
dimension to a radius/diameter format or to dissociate it.
Notes: Use one of the following methods to specify regeneration

parameters: 3
• Dimension Settings page under Dimensions and Notes in
Settings, Configuration.
• Settings tab of the Drafting Options dialog box (Create,
Drafting, Drafting Options).
36
To regenerate associated drafting entities, choose one the following
Regenerate options from the Create, Drafting, Regen submenu.
Automatic Dimension Regen—Use this function to
37
regenerate all associated drafting entities automatically
during the current drafting session, whenever a change in
geometry requires it.
Select Dimension for Regen—This function allows you to
38
select the associated drafting entities you want to
regenerate.
Regen All Dimensions—Choose this function to immediately
regenerate all associated drafting entities.
39
Validate Dimension Regen—This function lets you
regenerate all drafting entities—associated and non-
associated. It runs each entity through the regeneration
310
process, recreating or reformatting the entity based on the
Drafting Options parameters used in the current drafting session.
Note: Only associated drafting entities can be regenerated.

3
However, you can validate both associated and non-associated
drafting entities.
Defining Drafting Options

To edit parameters that define drafting entities, choose the Drafting
Options or Dimension Multi-Edit function from the Create, Drafting
menu. Both functions open the Drafting Options dialog box. However,
you use the Options function to make changes that apply only to all
new drafting entities that you create. Use the Multi-Edit function to
change the characteristics of existing drafting entities that you select
Figure 3-44: Drafting Options dialog box
Another important difference between these functions is that the

Options function lets you view and modify all Drafting Options pages,
(Dimension Attributes, Dimension Text, Dimension Setting, Note Text,
and Leaders/Witness).
With the Dimension Multi-Edit function, you view and modify only the
pages with parameters that are associated with the drafting entities
you select. For example, if you do not select drafting entities that are
notes, the Notes Text page does not appear.
To set drafting parameters in the Drafting Options dialog box, define
parameters in each page.
IMPORTANT: The changes you make using the Drafting

Options and Dimension Multi-Edit functions apply only to the
current Mastercam session. To save drafting parameters with
3
your Mastercam configuration file, use the Settings,
Configuration function.
323
3
36
37
38
39
310
3
Working with Levels

A Mastercam file can contain separate levels for wireframe, surfaces,
drafting entities, and toolpaths. By organizing your files into levels, you
control the areas of the drawing you want to be visible at any time and
the entities you can select. This control makes it easier to work with
the file, and helps prevent you from affecting areas of the drawing you
do not want to change. You can name levels and organize multiple
levels into Level Sets, which you can hide or display as a group.
Using the Level Manager Right–Click Menu (page 262)
Creating Level Sets (page 262)
Reusing Level Names (Save/Get) (page 263)

In Mastercam, you can create and name up to 2 billion levels and set
any one to be the main level. For each level you create, you assign a
unique number and, optionally, a name. The main level is the current
working level. Any geometry that you create is always placed on the
main level. There can be only one main level at a time, but you can
change the main level as often as necessary to work with the part. The
current main level appears in the Level field in the Status bar to help
you keep track of the level you are working in.
To set the main level using the Status bar
Level field:
Type the level number in the field.
Click the drop-down arrow in the Level field and choose a
level from the MRU list.
Click the Levels button to open the Level Manager dialog box.
Figure 3-45: Level Manager dialog box
Column sorting arrow

Visible level indicator
3
Main level
Hidden level
323
3
36
37
38
Set main level by typing the number Set main level by selecting an entity
in the graphics window 39
In the Level Manager dialog box, the main level is highlighted
in yellow. Take any one of the following actions to set the main
level:
Click once on the level number in the Number column. 310
Choose a level to select it. Then right–click and choose
Make Main.
Type a number in the Main Level, Number text box.
Choose the Select button. The Levels Manager dialog box
3
minimizes so that you can return to the graphics window
and select an entity on the level that you want to use. When
you select the entity, the Level Manager dialog box expands
and shows the main level set to the level of the selected
entity.
Using the Level Manager Right–Click Menu

The Level Manager offers an extensive right–click menu you can
choose from, including:
Make Main: Set the selected level as the main level.
Get Named Levels: Load a previously saved .CSV (comma
separated value) file containing a level and level set naming
scheme into the current file.
Save Named Levels: Save all levels and level set names in the
current file as a .CSV file for reuse in other Mastercam files.
Report: Create a text-based report of all level details defined in
the Levels Manager dialog box. You can edit, print, and save
this report to a file.
Contrast Rows: Enhance visibility between rows by shading
every other row in the Level Manager list.
Refresh levels list: Redraws the information displayed in the
levels list.
The following options are enabled only when you right–click in the
Level Set column.
All Level Set On: View a set of levels based on their Level Set
name.
All Level Set Off: Hide a set of levels based on their Level Set
name.
Creating Level Sets

Creating sets of levels helps you to organize levels. Only one set name
can be assigned per level.
X To create a set or assign a level to a set:

1 In the Levels Manager dialog box and Level Set column,
double-click to access an editable cell.
2 Type the level set name.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all levels you want to assign to the
same named set.
Notes:
• To sort all levels by set name, click the Level Set column
3
heading.
• To show or hide a set of levels based on their Level Set name,
right-click in the Level Set column cell of one member of the set
and choose All Level Set On or All Level Set Off. 323
Reusing Level Names (Save/Get)
Use the Get Named Levels and Saved Named Levels functions
3
(available in the right-click menu of the Levels Manager dialog box) to
save all levels and level set names and reuse them in other Mastercam
files. This allows you to standardize a naming scheme and use it in
other Mastercam files without having to manually recreate it in each
file. This standardization makes it easier to share files between work
36
stations, other departments in your organization, and with other
companies.
X To save all levels to a file:

37
1 After you define levels and set names in the Levels Manager
dialog box, right-click in any column and choose Save
Named Levels.
2 Use the fields in the Save As dialog box to save the named file
38
to a specified location.
Notes:
• The CSV file format is compatible with many applications,
39
including Microsoft® Excel®.
• You can also manually create a CSV file in Excel. An Excel CSV
file usually contains three columns of information: level
number, level name, and level set name. Level number and level
310
name columns are required, while the set name column is
optional.
3
X To get saved levels from a file:
1 Right–click in any column in the Level Manager and choose
Get Named Levels.
2 Use the fields in the Open file dialog box to navigate to the file
location and select the .CSV file to use.
3 Click Open to copy the levels and level set names defined in
the specified file to the current file.
Hiding Entities
To temporarily remove and restore selected entities in the graphics
window display, use the following Hide and Unhide functions,
available from the Screen menu.
Hide Entity
Use this function after selecting the entities you want to keep
in the graphics window. It temporarily removes all
unselected entities from view in the graphics window,
allowing you to focus on a small amount of geometry. If
hidden entities already exist in the file, this function acts as a toggle to
“unhide” them.
Hide More Entities

This function is available only if hidden entities already exist
in the file. It allows you to select additional entities from the
current display and remove the unselected entities, hiding
even more entities from view.
Unhide Some
You use this function only if you are already working with a
file that contains hidden entities. It displays only the entities
that are hidden and allows you to select the entities you want
to “unhide” and add back to the graphics window view.
Blanking Entities
You use the following Blank and Unblank Screen menu functions to
selectively remove and restore a limited number of entities from the
graphics window view.
Blank Entity
To reduce the complexity of the screen display, choose this
function and select the entities to remove from view in the
graphics window. You can select entities on any level.
Unblank Entity
If blanked entities exist in the file, use this function to
“unblank” them and restore all previously blanked entities to
3
IMPORTANT: There are important differences between the

Blank and Hide functions:
323
• With Hide, you select the entities that will remain in the
graphics window; all unselected entities are removed.
• With Blank, you select only the entities to remove.
• You can save blanked entities with a file; hidden entities are
3
not saved.
• Choose Hide to remove many entities from the display, or to
quickly restore hidden entities.
• Choose Blank to selectively remove and restore a limited
36
number of entities from the display.
37
Copying Entities
The Edit menu provides you with basic Cut, Copy and Paste functions.
You can also access these functions using their keyboard shortcuts,
[Ctrl+X], [Ctrl+C], and [Ctrl+V], respectively. These functions allow
38
you to cut, copy, and paste selected entities between different
Mastercam files.
IMPORTANT: Only geometry and drafting entities are copied 39

between files. Toolpath operations and machine, control, and
toolpath-related data are not transferred with the selected
entities.
310
X To cut, copy, and paste entities:
1 Use general selection methods to pre-select the entities to cut
or copy.
2 Choose the Cut or Copy function or type [Ctrl+X] or [Ctrl+V].
3
This places a copy of the selected entities in the Windows
clipboard.
Note: Cut entities to remove them from the existing file. To leave
the existing file unchanged, Copy the entities.
3 To save the selected entities to another file, choose one of the

following methods:
Close the current file, open a new or existing file, and
choose Paste or type [Ctrl+V] to paste the entities.
Open another Mastercam session and file (new or
existing), and choose Paste or type [Ctrl+V] to paste the
entities. When you paste the selected entities, they are
“live”.
4 Use options in the Paste ribbon bar to override the entity
attributes for color, level, line style, point style and line width.
Figure 3-46: Paste ribbon bar
t t in lin tyle
lev th
e
ain wid
tyl
ts
o m ne s
o m olor
el
o m oin
om e
t t in p
c
li
ain
ain
a
om
tt
tt
tt
Se
Se
Se
Se
Se
5 To exit the paste function, press the [Esc] key, or choose

another Mastercam function.
chapter 4
Creating Geometry
This chapter introduces the functions and ribbon bars you use
to create a broad range of geometric entities. You will learn to
create geometry and work with essential Mastercam CAD
functions, including:
Using the Sketcher Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . page 268
Editing “Live” Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 269
Creating Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 271
Creating Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 275
Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 281
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes . . . . . . . . page 287
Creating Fillets and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . page 308
Creating Splines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 312
Creating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 316
Creating Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 323
Using the Sketcher Toolbar

Sketcher is the suite of Mastercam functions you use to dynamically
create basic geometry by moving the mouse and clicking in the
graphics window. Basic geometry includes points, lines, arcs,
miscellaneous shapes (such as ellipse, polygon, helix, letters), fillets,
chamfers, splines, and primitive surfaces and solids.
The Sketcher toolbar groups the Sketcher functions in drop-down lists,
organized by each entity type.
Figure 4-1: Sketcher toolbar
es
s
ap
f er
sh
m
ric
ha
es
et
s/c
itiv
es
s
om
es
int
lin
let
cs
m
Lin
Ge
Sp
Pri
Po
Ar
Fil
TIP: Other toolbars, such as the Solids and Surfaces toolbars,

offer additional functions for geometry creation. You can access
all of these functions and more from the Create menu.
Sketching basic geometry in either 2D or 3D mode is free-form, fast,

and easy. Simply select a Sketcher function from the drop-down list,
and then use the mouse to click in the graphics window and create the
entity. For many Sketcher functions, you also use the function ribbon
bar or dialog box options to define or edit the live entity. If you prefer
keyboarding, you can use shortcut keys to access most ribbon bar
options.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Using the Sketcher Toolbar • 269
Notes:
• For many types of geometry creation, you use the AutoCursor in
4
conjunction with the selected Sketcher function to create and
edit entities. For more information, see “Using the AutoCursor
Ribbon Bar” on page 162.
• You can customize the Sketcher toolbar by adding or removing
functions. For more information, see “Customizing Toolbar
42
Functions” on page 87.
• Sketcher functions do not include drafting, transform, modify,
surfaces (with the exception of shapes), or solids (with the
exception of primitives).
43
Editing “Live” Entities 4
Mastercam provides flexible options for editing basic entities. When
you first create an entity, it is considered live and can be edited within
the ribbon bar or dialog box function you used to create it. The live
color is light blue by default, although you can customize it. Once the
45
entity becomes fixed, you must use other functions to edit it.
Note: For more information, see “Editing Entities” on page 332.

46
X For example, to create a line and edit it while it is live:
1 Choose Create, Line, Create Line Endpoint from the menu
bar at the top of the screen. The Line ribbon bar displays. 47
s
int
h
po
tal
le
gt
48
ne
ng
t
nd
on
l
en
en
ca
i-li
ea
it e
riz
ng
el
rti
ult
Ho
Lin
Ve
Lin
Ta
Ed
2 To create the endpoints of the new line entity, click two

positions anywhere in the graphics window. The line appears
in the live entity color.
3 Click the Edit Endpoint 1 button.
49
4 Move the cursor to a new position for the first line endpoint,
and then click again.
5 Click the Edit Endpoint 2 button.
410
6 Move the cursor to a new position, then click again.
7 Repeat Steps 3–6 until you are satisfied with the endpoints.
8 To change the line length:
a Press [L] or click the Length button.
b Type a new length and press [Enter].

9 To change the angle:
a Press [A] or click the Angle button.
b Type a new angle and press [Enter].

10 Use one of the following methods to fix the entity:
To stay in the function and continue to create lines, pick a

position in the graphics window as the first endpoint of a
new line, or click Apply in the ribbon bar.
To exit the function, press [Esc], click OK or choose
another function.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Points • 271
Creating Points
4
In this section you will learn to create points using the following
functions:
Create Point Create Point

42
Position(page 271) Dynamic(page 272)
Create Point Node

Points(page 273)
Create Point
Segment(page 273) 43
Create Point Create Point Small
Endpoints(page 274) Arcs(page 274)
You access the point functions from the Sketcher toolbar point drop-
down list, or from the Create, Point submenu.
4
Figure 4-2: Sketcher Points drop-down list
45
46
TIPS: To exit a function: 47
• Click OK.
• Press the [Enter] key.
• Press the [Esc] key.
• Choose another function.
48
Create Point Position 49
For simple point creation, use the Point Position function to
sketch individual points by using the mouse to click and
create point positions in the graphics window. While a point
is live, use AutoCursor to set its position.
410
Figure 4-3: Create point position ribbon bar

int
po
it
Ed
Note: When you choose the next point position, the prior point
becomes a fixed entity.
Create Point Dynamic

Choose this function to create one or more points and/or
lines anywhere along an existing entity. When you select an
entity in the graphics window, a dynamic arrow appears. For
each point or line you want to create, move the cursor to
slide the arrow to the new point position then click.
Figure 4-4: Create point dynamic ribbon bar
t1
oin
dP
e
n
nc
E
t
it
fse
ta
int
Ed
e
Dis
Lin
Po
Of
Fli
Use the Line and Point options to specify the type of entity to
create. You can create a line, a point, or both.
Use the Flip button to set the side of the selected entity on
which an offset point or line appears. (Flip has an effect only
when Offset is non-zero.)
Use the ribbon bar Offset field to create the point or line
perpendicular to the selected entity, offset by a specified
distance.
Use the Distance field to specify the distance along the entity
from its nearest endpoint where you want to create the point
or line. You can use the this field independently or in
conjunction with the Offset field.
When you are placing a point or line along a line or an arc, you can
create it beyond the selected entity, extended in either direction.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Points • 273
Create Point Node Points

This function allows you to create points at the node points 4
of existing splines. When you choose the Create point node
points function, no ribbon bar appears but the point node
points function is active and you are prompted to select a
spline. 42
IMPORTANT: When you choose this function, the node points
are immediately created as fixed entities and the function ends.
43
Create Point Segment
You can quickly create multiple, uniform points along an
existing entity with this function. Just select an entity in the
4
graphics window and enter the number of points to position
along the entity or enter the distance to create between each
point.
45
TIP: You can also set the distance or number of points before
selecting an entity.
Figure 4-5: Create point segment ribbon bar 46

e
er
nc
mb
sta
Nu
47
Di
When you enter a number or distance value, Mastercam automatically

calculates the necessary point positions.
If you use the Number field to create points, Mastercam always places
points on each endpoint of the entity. However, if you use the Distance
field, Mastercam creates the first point at the endpoint nearest where
48
you selected the entity, and then, at multiples of the specified distance.
It is possible that a point may not be created at the final endpoint.
Note: This function creates points only along the physical entity.
49
No points are created on an extended projection of the entity.
410
Create Point Endpoints

Use this function to automatically create point entities at the
endpoints of all visible lines, arcs, and splines. This is
especially useful for determining the boundaries of an
individual curve in a chain of curves.
TIP: To quickly remove all endpoints created by this function,

from the Mastercam menu choose Edit, Undo.
Create Point Small Arcs

Creating points at the exact center of arcs and/or circles is
fast and easy when you use this function. You define the
maximum size of the arcs you want to use, select the arcs,
and press Enter.
Figure 4-6: Create point small arcs ribbon bar
s
ius
arc
arc
rad
e
al
let
ax
r ti
De
Pa
M
To create points at the center of arcs and circles, choose the Partial
arcs option. If this option is not selected, point will be created only in
the center of circles (closed arcs).
To delete the selected arcs and circles after the points have been
created, choose the Delete arcs option.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Lines • 275
Creating Lines
4
Mastercam offers a variety of flexible functions you use to quickly
create lines, including:
Create Line Endpoint Create Line Closest

42
(page 275) (page 277)
Create Line Bisect

(page 278)
Create Line Perpendicular
(page 278) 43
Create Line Parallel Create Line Tangent
(page 279) Through Point (page 280)
To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Line

drop-down list, or from the Create, Line submenu.
4
Figure 4-7: Sketcher Line drop-down list
45
46
Create Line Endpoint
Use this simple but powerful function and ribbon bar to
47
create a variety of different line types with two endpoints,
including:
Angular and polar 48
Horizontal and vertical
Multiple lines connected at their endpoints
Lines tangent to arcs and splines
Figure 4-8: Create line endpoint ribbon bar
49
s
int
410
h
po
l
gle
ta
gt
ne
t
nd
on
l
en
len
ca
an
i-li
it e
riz
ng
rti
e
ult
Ho
Lin
Ve
Ta
Lin
Ed
M
To dynamically create endpoints, click in the graphics window, or type

values in the Line Length and Line angle fields and then click in the
graphics window to position the line. Use AutoCursor to precisely
define the line endpoint positions.
Creating Angular and Polar Lines

To create lines with specific angles, hard lock a value in the Line angle
field before you create the line. You can set polar angles in this field.
The angle is calculated in a counterclockwise direction from the
positive horizontal axis that runs through the known point in the
current construction plane. To calculate angles in a clockwise
direction, enter a negative value.
For angular lines, you can also set the AutoCursor to snap the angle of
the line by a specified number of degrees while selecting the second
endpoint. This is referred to as the “angular mode.” To do this, in the
AutoCursor ribbon bar, click the Option button to open the
AutoCursor dialog box, select the Angular option, and set the degrees
to snap in the Angular field (shown below).
This value is applied in increments. For example, using a 5 degree

angular mode causes lines to snap every 5 degrees (5, 10, 15, 20, 25,
and so on). The snap to angular mode remains set for the duration of
the Mastercam session unless you manually change it.
Creating Horizontal and Vertical Lines

Before creating the line, choose the Horizontal or Vertical option in
the Create line endpoint ribbon bar to define the line orientation.
Then use AutoCursor to draw the line. After picking the second
endpoint, you are prompted to enter the X or Y coordinate of the line.
You can easily create horizontal and vertical lines without choosing
the Horizontal or Vertical options if AutoCursor is set to detect and
snap to points. (For more information, see “Customizing AutoCursor
Behavior” on page 166.) After you define the first endpoint and begin
creating the line, when the line comes close to a horizontal position,
the horizontal / vertical visual cue appears next to the cursor,
indicating that you can click to snap the endpoint to that position.
Regardless of the method you use to create the line, it remains live
after you choose the second endpoint so you can use the Line Length
field to specify an exact length, or use the AutoCursor fields to specify
an exact position. The entity becomes fixed when you press Enter or
click the Apply button.
4
Creating Multiple Lines
To create connected multiple lines, choose the Multi-line option, then
click in the graphics window to set each of the connecting endpoints.
To complete the last line, double–click the final endpoint or press Esc.
42
Create Tangent Lines
Use the Tangent option to create lines that are tangent to arcs and
splines.
43
When creating a line tangent to an arc, first select the arc.
Mastercam dynamically draws the tangent line as you move
the cursor. When the line reaches the tangency you want, click
to set the second endpoint.
4
When creating a line tangent to a spline, first select the spline,
and then select the second endpoint. Mastercam creates a
tangent line, or displays a message if it cannot. 45
Notes:
• When creating a tangent line, including lines that are

perpendicular to a line and tangent to an arc, you can create
46
the line on an extended portion of the selected entity.
• Use the AutoCursor visual cues to help identify a tangency,
especially when creating a line tangent to a spline. Right-click
in the graphics window, choose AutoCursor, and then select
47
Tangent in the AutoCursor Settings dialog box.
Create Line Closest

48
You can quickly create a line between two entities at the
position at which they are closest. When you choose the
Create line closest function, no ribbon bar appears but the
function is active, allowing you to create a single line by
49
selecting two entities.
IMPORTANT: When you choose this function, the line is

immediately created as a fixed entity and the function ends.
410
Create Line Bisect

Use this function to create a bisecting or midline line
between two line entities. For intersecting lines, Mastercam
creates a bisecting line. For parallel lines, Mastercam creates
a midline, which begins midway between the start of the first
selected line and the closest endpoint of the second selected line.
Under certain circumstances, Mastercam creates multiple possibilities
for bisecting lines and you must select the one to keep.
Figure 4-9: Create line bisect ribbon bar
th
ng
Le
To set the length of the bisecting line, enter a value in the Length field,
press Enter, then select the two lines to bisect.
Create Line Perpendicular

To create a line perpendicular to existing entities, choose
this function, select an existing line, arc, or spline and create
the perpendicular line endpoint by clicking in the graphics
window.
Figure 4-10: Create line perpendicular ribbon bar
int
po
nd
t
en
th
it e
ng
ng
Ed
Le
Ta
To set the length of the perpendicular line, type a value in the Length
field and press Enter. Then select the entity and a position.
You can also use this ribbon bar to create a line perpendicular to a line
and tangent to an arc by choosing the Tangent option and selecting a
line or arc and then an arc or line. In this circumstance, Mastercam
creates multiple possibilities for perpendicular lines and you must
select the one to keep.
Notes:
• To use the tangent feature of this ribbon bar, you must have at
4
least two entities in the graphics window, and one of them must
be an arc.
• When creating lines perpendicular to arcs, you can create the
line on an extended portion of the selected arc. 42
• When creating lines perpendicular to arcs or splines, select the
entity close to the area from which you want to draw the line.
43
Create Line Parallel
Choose this function to create a line parallel to an existing
line by selecting a line and clicking a point in the graphics
window. You can also use the ribbon bar fields to create a
4
line parallel to a line and tangent to an arc by selecting an
existing line and then an arc.
Figure 4-11: Create line parallel ribbon bar 45
int
po
nd
t
e
en
nc
it e
ng 46
sta
p
Ed
Ta
Fli
Di
The parallel line is created at the same length as the existing line. To
offset the parallel line, enter a value in the Distance field then indicate
the offset direction.
Use the Flip option to set the position of the parallel line relative to the
47
primary line. This button has three toggle states:
Selected: (default) Creates a parallel line on the selected side
of the primary line.
Opposite: Creates a parallel line opposite the selected side of
48
the primary line.
Both: Creates a parallel line on both sides of the primary line.
Note: When creating tangent lines, you can create the line on an
49
extended portion of the selected entity.
410
Create Line Tangent Through Point

Use this function to create a line that is tangent at one end to an arc or
a spline. Just select an arc or spline, choose the tangency point on the
arc or spline, and then specify the line’s second endpoint or its length.
Figure 4-12: Create line tangent through point ribbon bar
s
int
po
Ed c t
nd
th
le
it E
se
ng
Re
Le
Notes:
• If you have the Length field locked, Mastercam creates two
tangent lines and asks you which line to keep.
• If you pick a tangent point that is not on a selected arc,
Mastercam moves the point onto the arc. It does this by
projecting the selected point along a vector from the point and
through the arc's center point.
• If you pick a tangent point that is not on a selected spline,
Mastercam moves the point onto the spline. It does this by using
the Nearest function to project the selected point.
• After you choose Edit Endpoint 1 or Edit Endpoint 2, you can
use AutoCursor to reposition the line’s endpoint.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Arcs and Circles • 281
Creating Arcs and Circles

4
When creating arcs and circles, you can choose from a variety of
time-saving functions., including:
Create Circle Center Create Arc

42
Point(page 281) Polar(page 282)
Create Circle Edge

Point(page 283)
Create Arc
Endpoints(page 283
)
43
Create Arc 3 Create Arc Polar
Points(page 284) Endpoints(page 284
) 4
Create Arc
Tangent(page 285)
IMPORTANT: Mastercam calculates circles in a

45
counterclockwise direction.
Choose a function from the Sketcher toolbar Arc drop-down list, or

from the Create, Arc submenu. In most functions, you can create arcs
46
or circles tangent to existing entities, such as curves, lines, or points.
Figure 4-13: Sketcher Arcs drop-down list
47
48
49
Create Circle Center Point
This function makes it easy to create full circles from a center
point. Click in the graphics window to set a center point and
410
then click again to set an edge point.
Figure 4-14: Create circle center point ribbon bar

int
por
te
r
te
en
t
en
s
e
it c
diu
am
ng
Ra
Ed
Ta
Di
Alternatively, you can enter a value into either the Radius or Diameter
field to set the size of the circle and then click in the graphics window
to set the center point to position the circle.
You can use AutoCursor to position the center point and/or the edge
point of the arc. You can also create circles tangent to other entities.
Create Arc Polar

To create polar arcs, choose this function and click in the
graphics window to set a center point. Then click to set two
edge points that define the radius, start point, and end angle.
To create a full circle with the start position at 0 degrees,
double–click the first edge point (you are not prompted to select a
second edge point).
Figure 4-15: Create arc polar ribbon bar
t
oin
rp
gle
te
le
er
en
ng
an
t
et
en
s
diu
it c
da
am
art
ng
p
Ra
Ed
En
St
Ta
Fli
Di
Alternatively, you can manually enter values in the ribbon bar fields to
set the circle size, start angle, and end angle. You can then select the
center point in the graphics window to position the arc and use
AutoCursor to position any or all of the three points of the arc.
You can also create arcs tangent to curves and points.
TIP: Use the Flip option to set the direction of the arc. This
button has two toggle states; clockwise (left) and
counterclockwise (right).
4
Notes:
• If you choose the Tangent button in the ribbon bar, you must
42
select an entity as the first edge point selection (radius and arc
start point). The selected entity is the tangent entity for the
resulting arc.
• To create a full circle, enter 0 for the start angle and 360 for the
43
end angle.
Create Circle Edge Point

4
Use this function to create circles with two or three edge
points. To create circles with two edge points, first select the
Two Point button (selected by default). Then click in the 45
graphics window to select the first edge point, and click
again to select the second. Mastercam creates the circle with the two
points acting as the equator.
To create circles with three edge points, select the Three Point button, 46
and then click the first, second, and third edge points in the graphics
window.
You can also create circles tangent to curves and points, and use
AutoCursor to position any or all of the three edge points of the arc. 47
Figure 4-16: Create circle edge point ribbon bar
48
ts
oin
ep
int
ree t
er
Th poin
po
dg
t
et
en
s
it e
diu
am
ng
o
Tw
Ra
Ed
Ta
Di
49
Create Arc Endpoints
You can create arcs with defined endpoints and one edge
point using this function. Click in the graphics window to set
410
the endpoints and then click to set the edge point.
Figure 4-17: Create arc endpoints ribbon bar

s
int
po
er
nd
t
et
en
s
it e
diu
am
ng
Ra
Ed
Ta
Di
You can also create arcs tangent to curves and points, and use
AutoCursor to position any or all of the three points of the arc.
Notes:
• If you choose the Tangent button in the ribbon bar, Mastercam
accepts any locations for the first two positions but you must
select an entity for the third position. The selected entity is the
tangent entity for the resulting arc.
• You can select up to two collinear points.
Create Arc 3 Points

To create three point arcs, choose this function and click in
the graphics window to set each of the three edge points. You
can create arcs tangent to curves and points, and use
AutoCursor to set the position of any or all of the three edge
points of the arc.
Figure 4-18: Create arc 3 points ribbon bar
ts
oin
ep
dg
t
en
it e
ng
Ed
Ta
Create Arc Polar Endpoints

You can create polar arcs from either a defined start or end
point. Choose this function and click in the graphics window
to set the first point. Then enter values in the ribbon bar
fields to define the radius/diameter, start angle, and end angle.
Figure 4-19: Create arc polar endpoints ribbon bar
4
int
gle
po
En oint
le
t
er
oin
nd
an
ng
et
p
s
it e
dp
diu
da
am
art
art
Ra
Ed
En
St
St
Di
42
Create Arc Tangent
Use this flexible function to create arcs with the following
tangent conditions:
43
Tangent to one, two, or three entities
Tangent through a point
Tangent with a centerline 4
Dynamically tangent (dynamically draws the arc with your
cursor movement)
You can also use this function to create circles tangent to three entities.
Figure 4-20: Create arc tangent ribbon bar
45
nt ties
s
46
diu nt 3 e s
itie
Ra ange ent titie
2 e nti
Cir an ang ne
Ar le Ta nt 3 ncy
n
ng o y
c T t rli
c T ng e
Ta nt p ntit
c ge e
Ar amic ente
Dy ent int
t
oin
e e
ng 1
n c
p
er
Ta ent
to
et
s
am
ng
ap
Ta
Sn
Di
To set the size of the arc, enter a radius or diameter in the

47
corresponding ribbon bar field, choose the tangent condition you
want to use, and follow the prompts to create the arc. Under some
circumstances, Mastercam displays four possible arcs and you must
select the one you want to keep. 48
Note: When choosing lines to create an arc, those lines cannot be
parallel to one another.
49
410
Guidelines for Creating Arcs Tangent to Entities

Here are some guidelines to keep in mind when creating arcs tangent
to entities:
You can create arcs on an extended portion of the selected
entity.
If the point you enter for an arc to be tangent with does not lie
on the selected line or arc, Mastercam projects the point along
the normal vector of the selected entity.
When creating a circle tangent to two curves, the radius of the
circle must be greater than or equal to half the distance
between the closest points on the two curves.
When creating an arc tangent to a line or arc with a defined
edge point, the radius of the arc must be greater than or equal
to half the distance between the selected entity and point at
the closest pass between them.
When you create arcs tangent to one entity, you can enter the
X, Y, and Z values in AutoCursor for the tangent point. With
arcs tangent to a point, you can enter the X, Y, and Z values in
AutoCursor for the through point. For dynamically tangent
arcs, you can use the fields in AutoCursor to set the arc
endpoint.
When you create arcs (including circles) tangent to two or
three entities, you must select entitles in the graphics window
rather than entering values into the AutoCursor ribbon bar.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Miscellaneous Shapes • 287
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes

4
The Create menu offers a number of functions you use to create
complete geometric shapes. Mastercam generates all the entities in
the shape collectively; you do not have to draw the individual entities.
When using the Rectangle, Polygon, and Ellipse functions, you can
42
choose to create surfaces in addition to wireframe geometry.
Wireframe entities and a surface are created when you select the
Surface check box in these dialog boxes.
Use other functions in the menu to create bounding boxes and letters.
43
If Mastercam Solids is installed, you can also extract 2D geometry from
a 3D solid.
In this section, you will learn to create basic shapes using the following
functions:
4
Create Rectangle Create Rectangular
(page 288)
Create Polygon
Shapes(page 289)
Create Ellipse
45
(page 290) (page 291)
Bounding Box
(page 292)
Letters
(page 294) 46
Create Spiral Create Helix
(page 295) (page 296)
Solid to 2D Profile
(page 297)
Create Relief Groove
(page 298)
47
Create Bolt Circle Create Stair Geometry
(page 301)
Create Door Geometry

(page 301)
48
(page 305)
To choose a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Miscellaneous

Geometry drop-down list, or from the Create menu. 49
410
Figure 4-21: Sketcher Miscellaneous Geometry drop-down list
Create Rectangle
This commonly used function lets you quickly create a
rectangle by defining two points. To draw the rectangle, click
to set the base point that anchors the rectangle. Then drag
the anchor point and click to set the second corner. You can
use AutoCursor to precisely position the two points on the rectangle.
Figure 4-22: Create rectangle ribbon bar
su ter
ce
n
ea ce
rfa
ts
Cr r to
oin
te
t
o
h
igh
it p
ch
idt
An
He
Ed
Use other ribbon bar fields to draw the rectangle from a center point,
or create it as a surface within the rectangle. The rectangle remains a
live entity until you click the Apply button or click to start drawing
another rectangle.
TIP: To quickly create multiple rectangles using the same

dimensions, lock the Width and Height fields in the ribbon bar.
Each time you click in the graphics window, a complete
4
rectangle of the defined dimensions is created.
42
Create Rectangular Shapes
Use this function to dynamically create a rectangular shape
(rectangle, obround, single D, or double D), by choosing one
from the Shape section in the expanded dialog box.
43
Figure 4-23: Rectangular shapes dialog box (expanded)
4
45
46
47
48
49
410
Note: The rectangle is the default type.
You can create the shape using a base point or 2-point method. The
dialog box options change, depending on the method you select.
However, both methods let you set a corner fillet, rotation angle,
general shape, and surface creation.
Base Point Method

Choose this method and select an anchor position on the rectangle
for the base point. After you sketch the base point, Mastercam uses
it as an anchor as you draw the rectangle from that position. Use
the AutoCursor to dynamically change the base point position,
length, or width before fixing the rectangle.
2-Point Method
Choose this method and sketch a corner base point, then draw the
rectangle and sketch the second point. Use the AutoCursor to
change either the base point or second point.
Note: The default rectangle creation method is Base point.
Create Polygon
This function allows you to quickly create a polygon as
wireframe geometry and, optionally, a surface. Use the
Corner or Flat options to determine whether the radius is
measured from the base point to a corner, or to the midpoint
of a side.
Figure 4-24: Create polygon dialog box (expanded)
4
42
43
4
45
Create Ellipse
You can create an ellipse as wireframe geometry and,
optionally, a surface, using this function and dialog box. To
46
create a partial ellipse, enter a start angle greater than 0
degrees and/or an end angle less than 360 degrees.
47
48
49
410
Figure 4-25: Create ellipse dialog box (expanded)
Bounding Box
Use this function to check the overall dimensions of a part by
creating a rectangular or cylindrical boundary around
selected entities. You can create the boundary as wireframe
geometry, a solid model, or a stock model.
Figure 4-26: Example: Bounding box
Bounding box
Figure 4-27: Create bounding box dialog box (expanded)
Rectangular Cylindrical 4
42
43
4
45
46
47
48
49
410
TIP: To enable the Stock and Solid options in the Create

section, enter a value for Expand Z (for a rectangular shape) or
Expand Radius (for a cylindrical shape). These option may be
used if all the selected geometry is 2D and lies in the same
plane.
Letters
The Create Letters dialog box allows you to add
alphanumeric characters consisting of lines, arcs, and
NURBS splines to your file. You can use one of the fonts
provided by Mastercam, including special drafting fonts, or
choose from any TrueType® font installed on your PC.
Figure 4-28: Create letters dialog box
Mastercam Fonts
Mastercam contains predefined letter fonts, including Block, Box,
Roman, and Slant, and a number of specialized drafting fonts, such as
Dayville, European, Hartford, Old English, and more. You can also
choose a custom font for letters by selecting Other from the font list
and navigating to the folder where your font is stored to select it.
When you select a drafting font, you can choose the Drafting Options
button and format letters using the Drafting Options dialog box and
Note Text options. The Note Text parameters you define will overwrite
the Font and Height settings that appear in the Create Letters dialog
4
box.
TrueType Fonts 42
You can choose any TrueType font installed on your PC to format the
letters you create in Mastercam files. To use one of these fonts, choose
the TrueType button, select one from the Fonts dialog box and click
OK. 43
TIP: When using TrueType fonts, the height of the actual letters
may not match the value that you entered for letter height
because Mastercam scales the letters based on all of the
information encoded into the TrueType font, including blank
4
space around the letters. Use the Xform, Scale function to
resize them as needed.
45
Create Spiral
Use this flexible function to create spiral geometry as a series
of NURBS splines. You can specify the initial and final pitch
46
in both the XY and Z planes, set the number of revolutions or
height, and choose the direction (CW/CCW).
47
48
49
410
Figure 4-29: Create spiral dialog box
Figure 4-30: Example: create spiral
Note: To create a spiral with a taper angle, use the Create, Helix
function.
Create Helix
This function lets you create a tapered spiral as a continuous
NURBS spline. You can define the inward and starting
angles, radius, number of revolutions or height, pitch, and
direction (CW/CCW).
Figure 4-31: Create helix dialog box
4
42
43
Figure 4-32: Example: create helix 4
45
46
Note: To create a helix using dimensions in the XY and XZ planes,
use the Create, Spiral function.
47
Solid to 2D Profile 48
If you work with 3D solid models for manufacturing
purposes, you can use this function to easily extract 2D
geometry from a 3D solid in order to create the necessary
toolpaths.
49
The Solid to 2D Profile function blends together incremental 2D
profiles, or perpendicular slices, taken as the 3D solid is rotated along
a specified axis. The incremental cross-sections are blended together
to create one set of curves that represent the net outermost and
410
innermost 3D shape. You use the ribbon bar options to define the axis
of rotation, the incremental distance along the axis for creating each
profile, and the type of 2D output (lines/arcs, points, or spline).
Figure 4-33: Create Solid to 2D profile ribbon bar
t
lec
ep
pe
is
Ax
Se
St
Ty
The resulting 2D wire frame can be trimmed to allow for chaining and
used with other Mastercam functions.
You can view the resulting slices on the solid model before accepting
the 2D profile, and modify the increment and axis until you create an
acceptable result.
IMPORTANT: Mastercam defines sharp corners as those that

are more than 30 degrees and less than 150 degrees. If sharp
corners are detected, an arc is fit using the system chordal
deviation tolerance.
Create Relief Groove

Use this function and dialog box to create DIN standard
relief grooves. You can create thread relief grooves or plain
shaft relief grooves, and, optionally, trim all horizontal and
vertical lines that intersect the endpoints of the groove to
these endpoints.
X To create a relief groove based on DIN standards:

1 From the Mastercam menu, choose Create, Create Relief
Groove.
2 In the DIN Relief Groove Parameters dialog box Shape
section, select the shape of the groove you want to create. The
graphic in this section changes to illustrate your selection.
Figure 4-34: DIN Relief Groove dialog box
4
42
43
4
45
3 Choose the Select From Table button. In the Relief Groove
Table dialog box:
46
47
48
49
410
a Choose a relief groove measurement from the table of

standard relief grooves. This table corresponds to the
selected shape.
Note: If you are working in English (inch) units of measure, the

converted English values in the table approximate the metric-
based DIN standards.
b Click OK to accept your selection and return to the DIN

Relief Groove Parameters dialog box. The Dimensions and
d position fields update, based on the table selection.
4 Set an orientation and indicate whether to trim or break the
horizontal and vertical lines that intersect the endpoints of
the groove geometry.
5 Set the relief groove position.
Note: To view the relief groove in the graphics window before

geometry is created, choose Preview Groove. Press Enter to end
the preview.
6 To create the relief groove geometry, click OK.

Create Bolt Circle

Use the Create Bolt Circle function and dialog box to enter
4
bolt circle dimensions and create a specific number of holes
(arcs), with or without center point entities.
Figure 4-35: Bolt Circle dialog box
42
43
4
45
TIPS:
46
• Select Create Holes to create both arcs and center point
entities; deselect this option to create only the center points.
• The Create Bolt Circle function is useful when you are
running Mastercam Design, and you cannot access drill
47
toolpaths.
• You can also use Mastercam's Drill Point Selection function
(choose Toolpaths, Drill Toolpaths) to automatically drill bolt
circles without creating geometry.
48
Create Stair Geometry 49
This function is available only if your installation includes Mastercam
Router. Use the Create Stair Geometry function and dialog box to
create open and closed stair stringers. In the Stair dialog box, you
define a stair type and enter stair dimensions. You can also define stair
wedge and specify how stringers are displayed.
410
Figure 4-36: Stair dialog box

The pictures below show a closed stringer and the dimensions

required to create the stair geometry in Mastercam Router. The same
dimensions apply to both closed and open stringers. 4
42
43
4
45
46
47
X Use the following procedure to create stairs:
1 Choose Create, Create Stair Geometry. The Stair dialog box
opens.
48
2 Set the stair style by selecting either Open stringer or Closed
stringer in the Style section.
3 Enter the total rise of the stairway in the Finish to finish floor
height field.
49
4 Enter the total horizontal distance of the stairway in the Total
run field.
5 Enter the desired number of stairs in the Number of stairs
410
field.
6 Enter the width of each stair in the Stair run field.
7 Determine the thickness of material to be used for both the

tread and the riser, and enter these values into the appropriate
fields.
8 Enter the width of material to be used for the stringer in the
Stringer width field.
9 Enter the distance you want the tread to extend beyond the
riser in the Overhang Amt field.
10 Enter values in the Top riser offset field and Bottom riser
offset field to create lines to close the stringer boundary.
11 Select the Wedges check box to add additional space in the
routed channel on a closed stringer. Enter values for the short-
side height and tall-side height and for the length of the
wedge. The value in the Angle field will update automatically
based on these width and height values.
12 Select which side of the stringer to view in the graphics
window by selecting either Draw right side stringer or Draw
left side stringer.
13 Select Rotate stringer/s to x axis to draw the stringer along
the X-axis in the graphics window.
14 Click OK to close the dialog box.
15 Click in the graphics window or use AutoCursor to position

the stair geometry.
16 Press [ESC] to exit the function.
Note: The Stair rise and Stair angle fields are computed
automatically by Mastercam, based on the values you enter. These
fields cannot be directly edited.
Tips for routing stair stringers

Stairs can be cut in two operations. The first operation is a
contour toolpath that cuts the stringer away from the
material. The picture below shows a left-side stringer, rotated

to the X axis, as simulated in Verify.
4
42
To finish the risers with mitered corners, use a contour
chamfer toolpath. The contour chamfer toolpath requires a V-
groove tool, such as a chamfer bit. The picture below shows
the mitered risers. The gold represents the 2D chamfer
toolpath.
43
4
Creating a contour chamfer toolpath on the risers requires
using Single chaining so that you can pick only the riser
45
geometry from the stair stringer. Because chaining sets the
cutting direction, select each riser near the top of the riser. You
also need a chamfer tool with an outer diameter at least twice
the depth of the chamfer, and lead-in moves at least 50% of
the V-groove diameter. Do not use lead-out moves because
46
they will cut into the stringer.
Create Door Geometry 47

This function is available only if your installation includes Mastercam
Router. Use it to quickly create geometry for solid doors with panels.
When you choose Create Door Geometry from the Create menu, the
48
Door dialog box displays options you use to select a door type and
enter door dimensions.
49
410
Figure 4-37: Create Door dialog box
You can define the door features and attributes, such as such as color
and line style for the geometry, horizontal or vertical mullions, or a
radius for rounded corners. You can also make multiple copies of the
door you define.The picture below shows the door components that
require dimensions when using the Door dialog box.
X To create one or more copies of a door:

1 Choose Create, Create Door Geometry. The Door dialog box
opens.
4
2 Select the style from the Door style drop-down list.
3 Select Mirror arch to copy and mirror the arch style on the
bottom of the door. 42
4 Enter the dimensions for the various heights and widths of the
door in the Door Dimensions section of the dialog box.
5 Click the Attributes buttons for the Outer Geometry and
Inner Geometry to edit options such as color, level, and line
43
style in the Attributes dialog box.
6 Select the Horizontal mullions check box to add horizontal
cross pieces to the panel. Enter values in the Mullion width
and Number of mullions fields.
4
7 Choose an option from the Space mullions from drop-down
menu to determine the vertical placement of the horizontal
mullion.
8 Select the Vertical mullions check box to add vertical cross
45
pieces to the panel. Enter values for in the Mullion width and
Number of mullions fields.
9 Enter an arc radius in the Outside corner radius field to create
rounded corners on the door.
46
10 Select the Multiple copies check box and button to create
copies of the door.
11 Select Export to separate MCX files to output door geometry
47
to separate MCX files or to a specified directory. Click the
Browse button to designate a path for exported MCX files.
12 Click OK to close the dialog box.
13 Click in the graphics window or use AutoCursor to position

48
the door geometry.
14 Press [ESC] to exit the function.
49
410
Creating Fillets and Chamfers

Creating fillets and chamfers in entities or chains is fast and efficient in
Mastercam. In this section, you will learn to use the following
functions:
Fillet Entities Fillet Chains

(page 308) (page 309)
Chamfer Entities Chamfer Chains

(page 309) (page 310)
To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Fillets and

Chamfers drop-down list, or from the Create, Fillet and Create,
Chamfer submenus.
Note: AutoCursor is unavailable during the use of fillet and

chamfer functions.
Figure 4-38: Sketcher Fillets and Chamfers drop-down list
IMPORTANT: For each fillet / chamfer function, you define

whether to trim the filleted / chamfered entities by selecting the
Trim or No Trim options in the function ribbon bar.
Fillet Entities
Before you select the entities to which you will apply the
fillet, use the Fillet ribbon bar fields to define the fillet style
(normal, inverse, circle, clearance) and enter the necessary
radius value. You can also define whether to trim the
selected lines to the fillet. Trimming is set as the default so if you do
not want the entities trimmed, just deselect the Trim button.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Fillets and Chamfers • 309
Figure 4-39: Fillet entities ribbon bar
m
s
Tri
diu
yle
m
No
Ra
Tri
St
When you move you mouse near an entity, Mastercam displays a
preview of the fillet, if one can be created with an adjacent entity. To
42
immediately create the fillet as a fixed entity, click one of the
previewed entities.
Note: This function does not recognize chains. Use the Fillet Chain 43
function to fillet chained entities.
Fillet Chains 4
Use this function to fillet entities that have sharp corners
and can be recognized as a single chained entity (i.e.,
rectangles and polygons). The ability to fillet only inside or
outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful
45
during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies).
These parts often require different radius values on inside and outside
corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance.
When you choose this function, the Fillet Chains ribbon bar displays
46
and the Chaining dialog box opens. Use the dialog box options and
cursor to chain the entities to fillet. When you close the Chaining
dialog box, a preview of the chained entities appears in the graphics
window with the fillet entities highlighted. 47
Figure 4-40: Fillet chains ribbon bar
48
n
m
o
s
cti
Tri
diu
ain
yle
m
re
No
Ra
Tri
St
Ch
Di
To edit the resulting fillets, use the ribbon bar fields. To accept them,
click Apply. 49
Chamfer Entities
Use this function to apply chamfers to existing entities.
Before you select the entities to chamfer, choose the chamfer
410
method and enter the necessary distance and angle values.
Figure 4-41: Chamfer entities ribbon bar
e2
e
m
nc
nc
Tri
gle
sta
sta
yle
m
No
An
Tri
St
Di
Di
Select the first entity. As you move the mouse over the second entity, a
preview of the chamfer displays. When you select the second entity,
the chamfer is immediately created as a fixed entity.
Notes:
• To chamfer chained geometry, use the Chamfer Chains
function.
• You can chamfer arcs using the 1 Distance and 2 Distance
methods.
Chamfer Chains
This function allows you to chain entities and create
chamfers at sharp corners. When you choose this function,
the Chamfer Chains ribbon bar appears and the Chaining
dialog box opens. Use the dialog box options and cursor to
chain the entities to chamfer. When you close the Chaining dialog box,
a preview of the chained entities appears in the graphics window with
the chamfer entities highlighted.
Figure 4-42: Chamfer chains ribbon bar
h
dt
wi
e/
m
nc
Tri
ain
sta
m
No
y
Ch
Tri
St
Di
To edit the resulting chamfers, use the ribbon bar fields. To accept
them, press the Apply button.
The Style field in the Chamfer Chains ribbon bar is a multi-purpose
field that is used in conjunction with the Distance/Width field, which
is also a multi-purpose field. You use these fields to set both the
chamfer distance and width.
To set the chamfer distance, choose 1 Distance from the Style
field list, then type the distance to use in the Distance/Width
field.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Fillets and Chamfers • 311
To set the chamfer width, choose Width from the Style field
and type the width in the Distance/Width field.
4
42
43
4
45
46
47
48
49
410
Creating Splines
Mastercam provides a number of functions that define the method
used to create a spline. Their corresponding ribbon bars allow you to
further define the resulting geometry. Spline functions include:
Create Manual Spline Create Automatic Spline

(page 312) (page 313)
Create Curves Spline Create Blended Spline

(page 315) (page 315)
Choose the function from the Sketcher toolbar Splines drop-down

menu, or from the Create, Spline submenu.
Figure 4-43: Sketcher Splines drop-down list
TIP: When a spline is live, use the ribbon bar fields to edit it.
Notes:
• To set the default spline type (Parametric, NURBS, curve-
generated) choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings, and
select a Spline / Surface creation type.
• You use the AutoCursor to specify point positions only with the
Manual spline function.
Create Manual Spline

Choose this function to manually create a spline by clicking
in the graphics window to define each of the spline’s control
points.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Splines • 313
IMPORTANT: To further define the spline by setting the

tangency of its endpoints, before you click in the graphics
window to create the spline, you must choose the Edit End
4
Condition button in the Manual Spline ribbon bar. When you
finish defining the spline, double–click on the last point, choose
Apply or press Enter. The function ribbon bar closes and the
Spline End Conditions ribbon bar appears, allowing you to set
42
the spline endpoint tangencies. For more information, see
“Using the Spline End Conditions Ribbon Bar” on page 314.
To position any spline control point, use AutoCursor to enter 43

coordinates before creating the next node point.
Figure 4-44: Create manual spline ribbon bar
4
s
t
ion
oin
dit
ep
on
on
dc
up
en
ck
it
45
Ba
Ed
To end spline creation and fix the spline entity:

Double–click the last point.
Choose Apply in the ribbon bar.
Press [Enter].
46
Create Automatic Spline 47
You can automatically create a spline from a string of points
(three or more) that lie in a defined pattern. Choose this
function, then define the spline by clicking three points in
the graphics window. The spline passes through the first two
points that you select then through all other points that lie within the
48
pattern until it reaches the third selected point.
49
410
TIPS:
• You can create a closed spline by selecting the same point for
the first and last points.
• Mastercam uses a combination of distance and direction
from point to point to place the points in a sensible order. To
avoid distorting the intended shape of the spline, delete or
blank extraneous points.
Using the Spline End Conditions Ribbon

Bar
Use this ribbon bar to set endpoint tangencies when creating splines
with the Manual Spline or Automatic Spline functions.
IMPORTANT: To use the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar to

set the spline endpoint tangencies, before creating a spline,
choose the Edit End Condition button in the function ribbon
bar.
The Spline End Conditions ribbon bar appears after you

finish defining the spline only if you choose the Edit End
Condition option in the function ribbon bar before you
create the spline.
Figure 4-45: Spline end conditions ribbon bar
r
r
to
to
od
ec
ec
gle
th
ho
gle
yv
yv
me
t
an
me
an
nc
nc
t
int
oin
ge
e
t
t
oin
oin
ng
po
tan
p
ta
dp
dp
art
art
p
En
En
St
St
Fli
Fli
Use the Start Point and End Point fields to define the tangent vector of
the spline’s endpoints. Choose from the following selections.
3 Pt Arc: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to the endpoint of
an arc Mastercam calculates from the spline’s first or last three
points, based on whether you are defining the Start or End
point condition.
Natural: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to Mastercam’s
calculation of the optimal tangency condition that results in a
minimal curve length. This is the default end condition.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Splines • 315
To entity: Sets the endpoint tangent vector based on the

tangent vector of a curve at the point that you select it.
To end: Sets the endpoint tangent vector to the endpoint of a
4
selected curve. Be sure to select the curve close to the
endpoint whose tangent vector you want to use.
Angle: Sets the endpoint tangent vector based on the value
you enter in the Angle field. 42
Create Curves Spline
To create a spline based on the geometry of existing curve,
43
choose the Curves Spline function. After chaining the curves
you want to work with, Mastercam creates a separate spline
for each chain that you select.
Figure 4-46: Create curves spline ribbon bar
ve
s
4
45
ur
n
lc
itio
na
ain
l
va
ve
igi
De
Ch
Le
Or
You can set a deviation tolerance that determines how closely each
resulting spline matches the selected curves, and you can choose to
keep, blank, or delete the original curves once the splines have been
46
created, or move them to a different level.
Create Blended Spline 47

Choose this function when you want to create a spline
tangent to two curves. You use the ribbon bar fields to set the
magnitude and trimming options, then click on existing
curves in the graphics window to define the spline. After 48
selecting each curve, when prompted, slide the arrow to the tangent
position on the curve.
Figure 4-47: Create blend spline ribbon bar
49
de
itu
de
rve e
gn
itu
cu urv
ma
rve ve
gn
nd nd c
r
ma
410
st t cu
Se seco
irs
tf
cu
t
lec
lec
co
m
Se
Se
Fir
Tri
Creating Curves
When working with surfaces and solids, use functions in the Create,
Curves submenu to generate curves on solid and surface edges.
Notes:
• For untrimmed NURBS and parametric spline surfaces,
Mastercam creates exact curves where possible. Chord height,
tolerance-fitted curves are created for all other surface types.
• For trimmed surface edges, a chord height, tolerance-fitted
cubic NURBS curve is created.
Create Curves functions include:
Create Curve on One Edge Create Curve Slice

(page 317) (page 319)
Create Curve on All Edges Create Surface Curve

(page 317) (page 320)
Create Constant Parameter Create Part Line Curve

Curve (page 318) (page 320)
Create Flowline Curve Create Curve at

(page 318) Intersection (page 321)
Create Dynamic Curve

(page 319)
Choose a function from the Create, Curves submenu. Then use the
ribbon bar options for these functions to further define the curves.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Curves • 317
Figure 4-48: Create Curves submenu
4
42
43
4
Create Curve on One Edge
Use this function to create a curve on a single surface edge. 45
Figure 4-49: Create curve on one edge ribbon bar
46
g le
an
k
ea
Br
After you select a surface, move the dynamic arrow to the edge on
which you want to create the curve. Then enter a break angle and press
[Enter].
47
Mastercam looks ahead on the straight line of the surface edge and
calculates the end of the edge at the point where the line turns by a
value greater than or equal to the defined break angle.
48
Create Curve on All Edges
Choose this function when you want to create curves on all the
edges of a surface, solid body, or solid face. When you select all
49
edges, you also have the option to create curves only on edges
that do not share other edges (open edges).
410
Figure 4-50: Create curve on all edges ribbon bar
es
gle
dg
an
e
t
k
le c
en
ea
Op
Se
Br
Create Constant Parameter Curve
This function allows you to create a curve in one or both
surface directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on
the surface.
Figure 4-51: Create constant parameter curve ribbon bar
ty
ali
Qu
rve
p
Cu
Fli
An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to

look at its wireframe display. In the following example, the green lines
represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent
the two constant parameter curves created on the surface, one in each
direction. The point where the constant parameter curves intersect is
the fixed position, or constant parameter.
Choose the curve quality and select a surface in the graphics window.
After you select the surface, Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on
the surface. You can move the arrow to the point on the surface where
you want to create the curve.
Create Flowline Curve

Flowline curves are multiple curves along an entire surface
that flow in one constant parameter direction. This function
makes it easy to create flowline curves on surfaces.
Figure 4-52: Create flowline curve ribbon bar
y
t it
ty
an
ali
qu
qu
rve
rve
p
Cu
Cu
Fli
Use the ribbon bar fields to define the number of curves to create and
how closely the curves fit the surface on which they are created.
42
After setting the curve quantity and quality, select a surface in the
graphics window. As soon as you select the surface, the curves are
created and remain live. While the curves are live, you can edit both
the number and the surface fit of the curves.
43
Create Dynamic Curve 4
Use this function to create curves on surfaces. When you select
the surface on which to create the curve, a dynamic arrow
appears and you are prompted to create the endpoints of the
curve and any additional points along the curve. 45
Figure 4-53: Create dynamic curve ribbon bar
ty
46
ali
qu
rve
Cu
To finish the curve, double-click the last endpoint or press [Enter]. The
curve appears and remains live. While the curve remains live, you can
change the chord height but not the endpoint locations.
47
Note: The resulting curve passes through the points in the order
you enter them. You must enter a minimum of two points, one for
each endpoint of the curve.
48
Create Curve Slice 49
You can create curves on surfaces and points on curves by
slicing selected surfaces and solids with a plane. When you use
this function, Mastercam creates the curves along the
intersections of the plane with the selected entities. You can choose to
create the curves at offset positions, to create curves at a defined
410
spacing interval from the intersections, and to join the resulting curves
into one entity.
Figure 4-54: Create curve slice ribbon bar
es
i pl
ult
ing
dm
t
ne
fse
ac
in
Pl a
Fin
Sp
Jo
Of
Set all the options on the ribbon bar, press [Enter], select the surface,
and press Apply.
While the curves or points are live, you can change any of the settings
and watch the entities change dynamically. When finished, press
[Enter] again to fix the curves or points.
Create Surface Curve

Use this simple function to quickly create a surface curve.
When you choose this function, no ribbon bar appears.
Instead, you are prompted to select a surface on which you
want to create the curve. When you select a surface, the curve is
automatically created as a fixed entity and the function is exited.
Note: If no curves exist, Mastercam exits the function.
Create Part Line Curve

Parting lines are the horizon line of a surface or solid where
the surface or solid wraps out of view with respect to a specific
view.
This function gives you options to define the quality of the parting line
curve and its angle.
Figure 4-55: Create parting line curve ribbon bar
ty
gle
ali
an
qu
ng
rve
rt i
Cu
Pa
In the following graphic, the red line represents the parting line curve,
where the surface wraps out of view. The green lines represent the
front of the surface (positive surface normal), and the gray lines
represent the back of the surface (negative surface normal).
4
42
Notes:
• This function is often used with mold-making.
• This function uses the construction plane (Cplane) to determine
43
what line(s) to create.
4
Create Curve at Intersection
Choose this function to create curves at the intersections
between two sets of surfaces. Mastercam pairs each entity in
the first set with each entity in the second set and creates
45
curves at the intersecting locations.
Figure 4-56: Create curve at intersection ribbon bar
46
es
ty
i pl
ali
ult
qu
ir
t1
t2
pa
dm
rve
t1
t2
fse
fse
in
k
Pi c
Fin
Se
Se
Cu
Jo
Of
Of
The following graphics show two shaded intersecting surfaces, and the
47
same surfaces in wireframe view.
48
49
410
The red lines in the wireframe picture are the curves that were created
along the surface intersections.
TIP: When this ribbon bar first displays, its options are
unavailable until you select both sets of surfaces, as indicated
by the interactive prompts that appears in the graphics window.
If you choose to intersect only surfaces, you may select them in one set
containing a minimum of two surfaces. In this case, Mastercam
attempts to create curves by pairing each surface in the set with every
other surface in the set. In certain instances, however, having only one
set of surfaces could prove more time consuming.
For example, if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface
floor in one set, Mastercam looks for intersections between all walls
and the floor. If, however, you select the walls as one set of surfaces
and the floor as the second set of surfaces, Mastercam looks for
intersections only between each wall and the floor.
CREATING GEOMETRY / Creating Primitives • 323
Creating Primitives
4
Mastercam makes it easy to create primitive surfaces. You can sketch
them in 3D, enter specific values, or use a combination of these
techniques. If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, you can
optionally create solid primitives. In this section, you will learn to use
42
the following functions to create primitive shapes.
Create Block (page 324) Create Cone (page 325) 43

Create Cylinder Create Sphere (page 327)
(page 326)
Create Torus (page 328)

To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Primitives
4
drop-down list, or from the Create, Primitives submenu.
Figure 4-57: Sketcher Primitives drop-down list
45
46
Guidelines for Working with Primitives 47
To create multiple copies of a primitive, lock the dialog box
fields.
To view all available options for creating the primitive,
choose the dialog box Expand button. By default, the
48
dialog box appears in a contracted format.
Setting the start angle to 0 and the end angle to 360 creates a
fully revolved primitive. Varying the start and end angles
creates one or more quadrants of the primitive. For example, 49
entering a start angle of 90 and an end angle of 180 creates
one quarter of the cylinder.
You can use the mouse to set the height of three-dimensional
primitives provided that the Mastercam window is set to an
Isometric Gview or a similar view.
410
After creating a solid primitive, use the Solids Manager to

change its name. For more information, see “Solids” on
page 650.
Create Block
Use this function create a block primitive as a solid or
surface model. To draw the block, click in the graphics
window to set the base point, drag outward to set the length
and width, then drag up or down to set the height.
While the block is live, use the dialog box fields to adjust the
dimensions, extend it in any of the three directions, select a new base
point, rotate it, or change the primary axis.
Figure 4-58: Create primitive block dialog box (expanded)
4
42
43
4
45
46
47
48
Create Cone
To create a cone primitive as a solid or surface model,
choose this function. To draw the cone, click in the graphics 49
window to set the base point, drag outward to set the radius,
then drag up or down to set the height. While the cone is live,
use the dialog box fields to adjust the dimensions, extend it in two
directions, select a new base point, change the primary axis, set the
top radius, or change the sweep to create a slice of a cone.
410
Figure 4-59: Create primitive cone dialog box (expanded)
Create Cylinder
You can create a cylinder primitive as a solid or surface
model using this function. To draw the cylinder, click in the
graphics window to set the base point, drag outward to set
the radius, then drag up or down to set the height. While the
cylinder is live, use the dialog box fields to adjust the dimensions,
extend the cylinder in two directions, select a new base point, change
the primary axis, or change the sweep to create a slice of a cylinder.
Figure 4-60: Create primitive cylinder dialog box (expanded)
4
42
43
4
45
46
47
Create Sphere 48
This function allows you to create a sphere as a solid or
surface model. Draw the sphere by clicking in the graphics
window to set the base point. Then drag outward to set the
radius. While the sphere is live, use the dialog box fields to
49
change the base point, radius, and sweep angle.
410
Figure 4-61: Create primitive sphere dialog box (expanded)
Create Torus
Choose this function to create a torus as a solid or surface
model. Draw the torus by clicking in the graphics window to
set the base point, and dragging outward to set the major
radius. After setting the major radius, drag the minor radius
to the position you want then click to set the minor radius and create
the torus. While the torus is live, use the dialog box fields to change the
base point, major and minor radius, sweep angle and the axis.
Figure 4-62: Create primitive torus dialog box (expanded)
4
42
43
4
45
46
47
48
49
410
chapter 5
Modifying Geometry
Mastercam offers a variety of functions and techniques you use
to modify geometry. In this chapter, you will learn about:
Editing Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 332
Transforming Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 343
Analyzing Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 365
Changing Entity Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . page 377
Editing Entities
You access basic editing functions from the Edit menu or Trim / Break
toolbar in order to:
Modify or join lines, arcs, splines, and drafting entities.
Convert certain types of entities to NURBS splines and
NURBS surfaces.
Simplify splines by breaking them into arcs and lines.
This topic introduces these functions and includes examples of how to
use them.
TIP: To trim a surface, choose one of the Trim Surface

functions from the Create, Surface submenu. For more
information on working with surfaces, see “Surface Creation” on
page 622.
Trim / Break Submenu

From the Edit menu, the Trim / Break submenu provides various
functions you use to trim entities. These functions trim entities by
cutting them back or extending them at their intersections.
Note: Splines are not extended beyond their original endpoints.
IMPORTANT: If the 2D / 3D Status bar toggle is set to 2D, the

entities you choose to trim or break must lie in the same Cplane.
If the intersection between two entities offers variable solutions,
be sure to select each entity on the part you want to keep.
When trimming or breaking entities in 3D, the curves must have
an actual intersection; otherwise a message informs you that
the entities do not intersect and cannot be modified.
In this section, you will learn about each Trim / Break submenu
function, including:
Trim / Break / Extend (page 333)
Trim Many (page 336)
Break Two Pieces (page 337)
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Editing Entities • 333
Break at Intersection (page 337)

Break Many Pieces (page 338)
Break Drafting into Lines (page 338)
5
Break Circles (page 339)
Close Arc (page 339)
Trim / Break / Extend

52
Use this flexible function and ribbon bar to:
Trim 1, 2 or 3 selected entities
Trim to a selected point or position
53
Trim, break or extend an entity to a specified length
Divide entities, based in the nearest intersection
Break and automatically extend selected entities
54
Figure 5-1: Trim / Break / Extend ribbon bar
5
Di 3 e ties
s
h
Tri e itie
int
gt
Tri 2 en ty
m nti
m ti
en
vid nt
po
l
Tri 1 e
to
to
k
ea
m
m
Tri
Tri
Tri
Br
When this ribbon bar appears, you can begin trimming to one entity
by selecting the entity to trim then selecting an entity in the location
56
you want to trim to. Or, you can trim two entities by selecting the first
entity then double–clicking the second. For other ribbon bar options
(for example, Trim 3 entities, or Trim to length), choose the option,
then select one or more entities and specify parameters, as necessary.
57
Trim 1 Entity
The following examples illustrate how to use the Trim 1 option to
select and trim a vertical line to a horizontal line. The result varies 58
depending on where you select the vertical line (the entity to trim)
before selecting the horizontal line (the entity to which you are
trimming). The visual cue (+) in the left-most image shows where you
select the vertical line; the right-most image shows the resulting trim
after you select the horizontal line.
59
510
Example 1
Example 2
Trim 2 Entities
The next examples show how to use the Trim 2 option to select and
trim two lines to their intersection. Again, the result varies depending
on where you select the lines.
Figure 5-2: Example Trim 2

Trim 3 Entities
The following example illustrates how to use the Trim 3 option. The
first two entities that you select are trimmed to the third, which acts as
5
a trimming curve. The third entity is then trimmed to the first two. This
function is useful for trimming two lines to a circle that is tangent to
both lines. You select the arc last, and the results vary depending on
whether you click the top or the bottom of the arc (the portion you
want to keep).
52
53
54
Divide Entities
When you choose the Divide function and select an entity in the
5
graphics window, Mastercam uses the nearest two intersections on
each end to divide the entity. It trims the line or arc into two disjointed
segments by removing the segment that lies between two dividing
intersections. The following example shows a line trimmed between 56
two arcs.
Figure 5-5: Example Trim Divide
57
58
Note: If only one intersection exists, the selected entity is trimmed
to the single intersection. If no intersection is found on the selected
entity, no change occurs. 59
Trim to Point
Use this option to trim or extend an entity to a point or any defined
position in the graphics window. If the point that you enter does not lie 510
on the selected entity, Mastercam calculates the closest position on
the entity and trims the entity to that point. The following example
shows an arc that is trimmed (in this case, extended) to a point that
does not lie on the curve.
Figure 5-6: Example Trim to Point
Trim to Length
This option makes it easy to trim or extend a selected entity based on a
specified length. To use this option, first type a value in the Length
field. Then select an entity endpoint in the graphics window. The
specified value will be added to or subtracted from the endpoint of the
selected entity.
To extend the entity beyond the selected endpoint, type a
positive number.
To trim the entity from the selected endpoint, type a negative
number.
Note: If you select the entity before setting a value in the Length
field, the default value is used (0.1 inch or 1 mm, based on the
current configuration unit setting).
Trim / Break
Use these buttons to toggle between trimming or breaking the entities
you have selected in the graphics window. Selecting Break
automatically extends selected entities that do not intersect.
Trim Many
The Trim Many function and ribbon bar lets you trim (or
break) multiple lines, arcs, or splines to a selected entity
without modifying the trimming curve.
Figure 5-7: Trim Many ribbon bar
5
t
k
lec
ea
m
p
Se
Tri
Br
Fli
After choosing this function, select one or more entities to trim. Then
choose the entity to trim to and indicate the side of the trimming curve
52
you want to keep. You can preview the results before accepting the
changes. Before accepting the change, you can also flip the results
from one side of the trimming curve to the other, and switch the
results between trimming or breaking the selected entities. The
example below shows four arcs that are trimmed to a line. The dashed
53
line shows the portion of each arc that is trimmed, which varies
depending on which side of the curves you select to keep.
54
5
Note: When you choose the Break option rather than Trim, it
56
disables the Flip function and the option to select a side of the
trimming curve to keep.
Break Two Pieces

57
Use this command to break an entity at any specified point.
After selecting Break Two Pieces, choose an entity in the
graphics window, and then click where you want the break. 58
For more precise selections, use AutoCursor to choose the break point.
For example, to break a line at its center, select the AutoCursor
Midpoint option, and then click a line. Mastercam splits the line at its
midpoint, regardless of where you clicked. 59
Break at Intersection
Use this simple function to select one or more intersecting
line, arc, or spline entities and break them at each
510
intersection. First, select one or more intersecting entities to
break. Then, press Enter or choose the end selection function in the
General Selection ribbon bar to break the selected entities where they
intersect.
Break Many Pieces

Use this function to break selected lines, arcs, and splines
into uniform segments based on the specified number of
segments or the distance between them (segment length).
Figure 5-8: Break Many Pieces ribbon bar
nk
Bla
ce
an
p/
de ce
ist
un tan
e
Ke
dd
ce
Ro t dis
ce
r
e/
be
ran
an
es
m
let
ac
cs
st
le
Lin
Nu
De
Ex
Ar
Di
To
When breaking an entity, you choose to delete, keep, or blank the

underlying geometry.
Use the Lines and Arcs options to switch between breaking
the selected entity into multiple lines or arcs.
For splines, you can enter a segment Number and Distance or
you can specify a Tolerance based on chord height.
The Exact distance option creates segments of the exact
length specified in the Distance field. If the selected entity
cannot be divided evenly, Mastercam creates as many
segments of the exact length as possible, along with a shorter
“remainder” segment.
The Rounded distance option changes the entered Number
and/or Distance values so that the function creates segments
of all equal lengths.
Break Drafting into Lines

You can break selected drafting entities into geometric
entities in a manner similar to the Break Many Pieces
function. Choose the Break Drafting into Lines function
when you want to:
Break drafting dimensions, notes, labels, witness lines, and
leader lines into lines, arcs, and NURBS splines.
Break lines in a crosshatch pattern into line entities. The

newly created lines retain the same line style as the crosshatch
pattern. 5
Break a copious data entity into points or lines, based on the
original form of the copious data entity.
CAUTION: Numbers and letters break into small, individual

lines, arcs and splines that, typically, are not collinear and
52
cannot be rejoined.
To break the selected drafting entities, press [Enter]. 53

Break Circles
This last function in the Trim / Break submenu allows you to
break circles into any number of equal length segments you
specify. After choosing the function, select one or more
54
circles to break, type the number of arcs you want to break
the circles into and press Enter.
TIP: Use the Close arc or Join entities functions to join arcs
5
into circles.
Close Arc 56
Use this function to select and convert all arcs that are less
than 360 degrees to complete circles by extending their ends
to close the arc. 57
In addition to the trim / break /extend functions, the Edit
menu also includes the following functions you use to join and modify
entities:
Note: For more information on working with surfaces, see

58
“Displaying Surfaces and Solids” on page 616 and “Surface
Creation” on page 622.
59
Join Entities
This function is useful when you want to join collinear lines,
arcs that have the same center and radius, or splines that
510
were originally created as the same entity.
Note: If the two entities you select to join have different attributes,
Mastercam creates a new entity using the attributes of the first
entity you select. For example, if you select a dashed line and a
solid line, the lines are joined to create a single dashed line.
Modify Spline
Use this function to change the shape of a NURBS or
parametric spline entity. From Mastercam's menu, choose
Edit, Modify Spline, and then select a spline entity. All entity
control points appear in yellow and remain visible for as
long as you work with the selected entity.
To modify the selected entity, click and drag a control point.
Mastercam draws the modified shape or surface using a dashed line
style in the highlight color. This drawing style lets you easily
distinguish the modified entity from the original.
Before accepting a change, preview the modification, based on the
new control point position. To accept the new position, click again to
release the control point. Continue to select control points, or exit the
function by pressing [Enter].
Note: When you choose to modify a parametric spline, the Modify

Spline ribbon bar displays. Use the End point tangent buttons on
the ribbon bar to maintain tangency conditions.
Convert NURBS
This function allows you to:
Convert lines, arcs, and parametric splines to
NURBS splines.
Convert curve-generated and parametric surfaces to NURBS
surfaces.
When you choose this function, no ribbon bar appears but the
function is active and you are prompted to select a line, arc, spline or
surface to convert to a NURBS entity. After selecting one or more
entities, press Enter to convert them.
TIP: To change the shape of a NURBS entity, use the Modify

Spline function. 5
Simplify
You can create arcs based on the geometry of circular-
52
shaped splines by using the Simplify function to convert
them to arcs. When working with arcs instead of splines, you
can more easily and accurately reference the centers of the
circular geometry or dimension the circles. 53
You can also use this function and ribbon bar to convert splines that
define lines into line entities.
Figure 5-9: Simplify ribbon bar 54
nk
Bla
p/
5
e
Ke
ce
e/
an
t
lec
let
ler
De
Se
To
Notes: 56
• Use this function when working with file conversions if
geometry that is supposed to denote circles, arcs, or lines
appears as splines.
• The Xform menu provides additional functions you can use to 57
modify entities. For more information on using Xform
functions, see “Transforming Entities” on page 343.
Set Normal
58
Use this function to set the direction of multiple surface normals to the
current construction plane (Cplane). You can select surfaces before or
after choosing the function. 59
510
Figure 5-10: Select normals ribbon bar
No als
als
de m
rm
H i Nor
t
lec
ow
p
Se
Sh
Fli
A surface normal is a vector (direction) that is perpendicular to the

tangent plane of a surface at the point of tangency. In the following
pictures, the arrow shows the normal vector directions of a surface at
the position of the base of the arrow.
Change Normal
This function makes it easy to view and reverse a surface normal.
When prompted, select a surface. A normal direction arrow displays.
Figure 5-11: Change normal ribbon bar
Click the surface to reverse its normal. You can then select another
surface, or click OK to finalize your changes.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Transforming Entities • 343
Transforming Entities
5
Transforming entities is similar to editing, but offers more advanced
functions for manipulating fixed entities. In a single operation, you
can move selected entities and optionally create copies of them by
mirroring, rotating, scaling, offsetting, translating, stretching, rolling,
52
and dragging. With some transform functions, you can also join the
copied entities to the originals to quickly and easily create more
complex geometry.
When transforming entities, you can preview and modify the results
53
before accepting them. Previewing lets you view a detailed live image
of the move, copy, or join results set in the graphics window, placed in
the position you choose in the function dialog box or ribbon bar. To
conserve resources when transforming, scaling, mirroring, or rotating
54
larger models (for example, those containing multiple solids and
surfaces or a large number of entities), instead of detailed entities, the
preview image is a 3D cube or a 2D rectangle sized in proportion to the
results set area. 5
You access transform functions from the Xform menu or toolbar. In
this section, you will learn to use the following functions to modify
geometry:
Xform Translate Xform Translate 3D

56
(page 345) (page 347)
Xform Mirror (page 348) Xform Rotate

(page 349) 57
Xform Scale (page 351) Xform Offset (page 352)
Xform Offset Contour Xform Project

(page 353) (page 355) 58
Xform Rectangular Xform Roll (page 358)
Array (page 357)
Xform Drag (page 360) Xform Stretch

(page 360)
59
Xform STL (page 362) Xform Geometry
Nesting (page 363)
When you perform a transform function, Mastercam creates a

510
temporary group from the original entities and a result from the
transformed entities. The system-generated group and result are

indicated by a color change that stays in effect only until you use the
Screen, Clear Colors option or perform another transform function.
The default colors are red for the original group and purple for the
result.
TIP: When you translate and join entities, duplicate lines

sometimes result and can interfere with chaining. You can
configure Mastercam to automatically delete duplicate lines
created during a join operation by setting this default in the CAD
Settings page of the System Configuration dialog box. For more
information on this and other configuration options, see
“Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)” on page 111.
Assigning New Attributes to Transformed

Entities 5
The Use New Attributes checkbox is available in each Xform dialog
box. When you select this option, the Level and Color fields that
display allow you to assign a unique level and color to the transformed
entities. 52
53
54
Creating the transformed entities on a different level and in a different
color from the original entities can make them easier to identify. To
create transformed entities using the attributes of the original entities,
deselect this option. 5
Xform Translate
Choose the Xform Translate function to move, copy or join
entities within the same view (plane) without altering their
56
orientation, size, or shape. You can translate all geometric
and drafting entity types using:
Rectangular coordinates (X, Y, Z) 57
Polar coordinates (vector and length)
Between two points (base and new base)
Before accepting the translation, you can preview and flip the results
from the first direction, based on the specified values, to the opposite 58
direction or, choose to create results in both directions.
59
510
TIP: To make the new geometry easy to identify, use the

Attributes check box and fields to create it in a unique color and
on a specified level.
Notes:
• To translate between different views (planes), use the Translate
3D function.
• When you translate and join entities, duplicate lines sometimes
result and can interfere with chaining. You can configure
Mastercam to automatically delete duplicate lines created
during a join operation by selecting Delete duplicate entities in
File, Open on the Files property page in the System
Configuration dialog box.
• When performing a transform function, Mastercam creates a
temporary group from the originals (red) and a result (purple)
from the transformed entities. These system groups appear in
the Groups dialog box. However, they stay in effect only until
you use the Screen, Clear Colors function or perform another
transform function.
• If you are transforming multiple solids, multiple surfaces, or a
large number of lines or arcs, and the Preview check box is
selected, Mastercam displays a 3D cube (for 3D geometry) or a
2D rectangle (for 2D geometry) as a preview. The final geometry
only displays when you choose OK or Apply.
• All edit fields are reset to 0 (zero) each time you enter the dialog
box. You can enter a value or select a value from the MRU (most
recently used) drop-down list.
• When translating entities, if intersecting entities have been
partially selected using a window selection method, you can
optionally stretch (lengthen or shorten) selected lines. Lines are
stretched when they cross or intersect the window used to select
the entities. The line endpoints that lie within the selection
window are translated, while the endpoints that lie outside the
selection window maintain their original positions.
Figure 5-12: Xform Translate dialog box
5
52
53
54
5
56
57
The translation result remains live until you accept it. This flexibility
allows you to preview and flip the direction of the results, or create
results in both directions.
58
Xform Translate 3D
Use this function to move or create copies of selected
59
entities between views (from one plane to another) without
altering their orientation, size, or shape.
510
Figure 5-13: Xform Translate 3D dialog box
To move, rotate, and translate geometric and drafting entity types in

3D, select the two views you want to work with and define a translation
vector using the distance and angle between any two points you
choose in the graphics window. Mastercam automatically calculates
the vector between the views. The first point that you choose is relative
to the first view (source plane). The second point is relative to the
second view (destination plane).
Xform Mirror
You can create mirror images of geometric and drafting
entities with this function. The entities are reflected
symmetrically with respect to the axis you choose, including:
Horizontal axis of the current construction plane
Vertical axis of the current construction plane
Specified angle
Selected line
Theoretical line defined between two points
TIP: If your selection contains one or more drafting notes or

labels, select the Mirror label and note text check box to mirror
the text relative to the selected positions. To prevent mirrored
5
text from being turned upside down or reversed, deselect this
option.
Figure 5-14: Xform Mirror dialog box

52
53
54
5
56
57
When mirroring entities, you can move, copy or join the original 58
entities within the drawing. First, choose the entities you want to work
with. Then, select the type of mirror image to create. If necessary, you
also select specific reference points in the graphics window where you
want to place the mirrored entities. 59
Xform Rotate
This function makes it easy to move, copy, or join selected
geometric and drafting entities around a center point. You
510
can translate or rotate the entities around the selected center
point by a specified angle. Translating will rotate the transformed

entities without changing the axis orientation. Rotating transformed
entities changes the axis orientation.
Figure 5-15: Xform Rotate dialog box
The angle is calculated relative to the horizontal axis of the current

construction plane. Entering a positive angle results in a
counterclockwise rotation, and a negative angle results in a clockwise
rotation.
When creating more than one copy of the selected entities, you can
apply the specified angle between each copy, or to the entire sweep of
copies. You can also choose to remove selected copies from the results
set.
Figure 5-16: Example Translate rectangle
5
52
Figure 5-17: Example Rotate rectangle
53
54
5
Xform Scale 56
Scaling allows you to increase or decrease the size of entities
by a factor or percentage relative to a defined point. You can
scale all geometric and drafting entity types using either a
uniform or XYZ scale method. 57
Uniform: Scales the entities by a single factor or percentage
on all three axes. The entities change size while maintaining
their original shape.
XYZ: Applies a different scale factor or percentage to each of
58
the axes (XYZ). The entities not only change size but may
change shape as well, appearing to be stretched or squeezed
from their original shape.
59
510
Figure 5-18: Xform Scale dialog box
When scaling selected entities, you can also choose to move, copy or
join them.
Note: If you apply XYZ scaling to a solid, the solid’s history is lost
and the resulting entity is a brick.
Xform Offset
Use this function to offset one entity at a time. You can move
or copy a single entity parallel to the original; displacing it by
a defined distance and direction. The direction is
perpendicular to the entity along every point, and relative to
the current construction plane.
Figure 5-19: Xform Offset dialog box
5
52
53
54
5
You can create multiple copies and use the Direction button to create
parallel entities on either side of the selected entity or on both sides.
Xform Offset Contour

56
Use the Xform Offset Contour function to move or copy one
or more chained entities; displacing them by a defined
distance and direction and, optionally, a depth. 57
Offsets are created perpendicular to the selected entity
chains at every position, relative to the current construction plane.
58
59
510
Figure 5-20: Xform Offset Contour dialog box
The offset direction is controlled by the chaining selection

sequence. If the preview shows offset results that are in the
wrong direction, use the Direction button to reverse the
results.
Choose one of the following Corners options to manage the
gaps that result when you offset a chain of curves outward:
None: Extends the entities until they connect when
offsetting the boundary outward.
Sharp: Creates arcs at sharp corners to connect the entities

when offsetting the boundary outward. A sharp corner has
135 degrees or less. 5
All: Creates arcs at all corners to connect the entities when
offsetting the boundary outward.
Note: When you offset the boundary inward, the system trims the
boundary at corners.
52
Xform Project 53
When you choose this function, Mastercam offers a variety
of different methods you can use to project selected entities,
including:
Depth: Projects selected entities to the Z-depth you
54
choose in the current construction plane.
Plane: Projects selected entities in various positions in 3D
space and squashes them into a flat, 2D plane. Mastercam
converts NURBS splines if they are not parallel to the
5
construction plane.
Surface: Projects curves onto surfaces and solids.
56
57
58
59
510
Figure 5-21: Xform Project dialog box
When projecting points onto surfaces, select the Points / Lines check
box and button to access the Project Points dialog box.
Figure 5-22: Project Points dialog box
5
52
53
Use this dialog box to optionally:
Create additional points and lines from the preview
54
Specify line length
Flip the results of the lines without having to flip the surface
normal or use a negative value for the length
Output the results to a named APT or XYZ file format
5
Xform Rectangular Array
This function makes it easy to quickly create an array (grid)
56
of entities by copying selected entities simultaneously in one
or two directions, relative to the construction plane. For each
direction, you can specify a unique number of copies to
create, and the offset distance and angle.
57
58
59
510
Figure 5-23: Xform Rectangular Array dialog box
Xform Roll
Use the Xform Roll function to wrap lines, arcs, and splines
about an axis as though around a cylinder, or unwrap rolled
entities to make them lie flat.
Figure 5-24: Xform Roll dialog box
5
52
53
54
5
56
57
To roll or unroll entities, Mastercam breaks the entities relative to a

58
specified angle tolerance or two points you select in the graphics
window. The points are used to calculate the translation distance of
the rolled / unrolled entities.
The new geometry, called target geometry, is created based on the
59
break points. Use the Type field to choose the type of target geometry
to create, for example Line / Arcs, Points, or Splines.
Note: The rotation axis is relative to the current construction

510
plane.
Xform Drag
Use the mouse with the Xform Drag function and ribbon bar
options to select entities and dynamically move or copy
them to a new position by dragging and translating or
rotating them.
Figure 5-25: Xform Drag ribbon bar
ta e
Ro slat
tc h
te
t
lec
Co e
py
ign
n
re
ov
Tra
Se
St
Al
M
When translating entities, if intersecting entities have been partially

selected using a window selection method, you can optionally stretch
(lengthen or shorten) selected lines. Lines are stretched when they
cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. The line
endpoints that lie within the selection window are translated, while
the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their
original positions.
Notes:
• You cannot drag shaded surfaces.
• The Translate, Rotate and other Xform functions offer more
advanced and precise transformation methods than are
available by dragging entities.
Xform Stretch
Use this function to stretch entities within a single, 2D plane.
You can stretch all geometric and drafting entity types using:
Rectangular coordinates (X, Y, Z)
Polar coordinates (vector and length)
Points (between two locations)
Before accepting the stretch, you can preview and flip the results. You
can even create results in both original and flipped directions.
TIP: To make the new geometry easy to identify, use the

Attributes check box and fields to create the geometry in a
unique color and on a specified level.
5
When performing a stretch function with the Preview option selected,
Mastercam creates a temporary group from the original entities (red)
and a result (purple) from the transformed entities. These system
52
groups appear in the Groups dialog box. However, they stay in effect
only until you use the Screen, Clear Colors function or perform
another transform function.
53
Note: All edit fields are reset to 0 (zero) each time you enter the
dialog box. You can enter a value or select a value from the MRU
(most recently used) drop-down list.
54
Stretching Entities
The following examples show a rectangle that is stretched out of its
original shape using the Stretch function. First, use the AutoCursor 5
window selection method to select two of the rectangle’s intersecting
lines. In the Stretch dialog box, specify the translation position for the
selected entities.
Figure 5-26: Example 1, Windows selection 56
57
58
59
510
Figure 5-27: Example 2, Transform Stretch
Xform STL
STL is an acronym for StereoLithography, a 3D model file
type developed by 3D Systems, Inc. An STL file is a large
collection of oriented triangles that represent surface and
solid models. If you work with STL files, you use this function
to mirror, rotate, scale, offset, and translate STL files.
Select the Bounding Box check box and button to access the Bounding
Box dialog box, and create rectangular or cylindrical boundary around
the STL file.
Figure 5-28: Xform STL dialog box
5
52
53
54
5
You can save the results to the same file or to a new file.
Xform Geometry Nesting

56
The Nesting add-on to Mastercam fits parts onto a sheet of
material for best yield. Nesting operates on geometry or
toolpaths. For geometry nesting (Xform menu, Geometry
57
Nesting) Mastercam can nest geometry consisting of a closed
boundary. Open chains can be selected and will be nested along with
the boundary in which they are contained, as can drafting notes.
X Follow these general guidelines to nest geometry.

58
1 Add sheets.
Open a file or chain geometry.

Set sheet quantity.
59
Set the sheet origin.
2 Add geometry.
Chain geometry from the current MCX file or import

geometry from another file.
510
Set minimum part quantity.
Create filler parts or fill all sheets.

Set margins and spacing.
3 Fine tune to increase yield.
Use the step angle option on the Parts tab to control part
rotation.
Change the spacing between parts.
When material surface finish is the same on both sides of
the material, use Mirror to flip parts horizontally.
TIPS:
• Have Mastercam create as many sheets as needed to
accommodate the number of parts by choosing Create
necessary sheets on the Sheets tab.
• On the Parts tab, use Fill all sheets to have Mastercam
automatically create parts to fill up the material (up to 3500
parts per sheet). Use Filler Quantity to create a specific
number of parts within the nested area.
• Use colors and levels to organize results by setting these
options in the Nesting configuration dialog box.
• Save common sheet sizes to sheet libraries or in individual
MCX files.
• Save common parts in MCX files.
• When you require a controlled number of each part in the
nesting results, create a group.
• To read a detailed report about the nesting results, choose
Details in the Nesting Results dialog box.
MODIFYING GEOMETRY / Analyzing Entities • 365
Analyzing Entities
5
Use the Analyze menu functions to retrieve analytical data for most
elements that appear in the graphics window. This includes the
following entity information: 52
entity type properties 2D and surface
(including solids) areas
database properties
distances
positions
chains
53
contours angles
For most functions, you can modify some or all of the information in
analyze dialog box fields.
54
This topic defines each analyze function and provides you with
general instructions for its use. Analyze menu functions include:
Analyze Entity Analyze Position

5
Properties (page 367)
(page 366)
Analyze Distance
(page 368)
Area / Volume submenu
(page 369)
56
Analyze Chain Analyze Contour
(page 370)
Analyze Angle
(page 372)
Analyze Dynamic
57
(page 373) (page 373)
Database / Number
Submenu
(page 374)
Test Surfaces and Solids
Submenu (page 376) 58
Changing Entity
Attributes
(page 377) 59
510
Analyze Entity Properties

Use the Analyze Entity Properties function to view entity
properties and edit some or all of the data, based on the
entity type. You can select one or more entities before or
after choosing the Analyze function. You can analyze the
following entity types:
Lines, arcs, points, and splines (parametric and NURBS)
All surfaces and solids
Drafting entities
Figure 5-29: Example: Analyze Entity Properties dialog box
When you select more than one entity to analyze, a single properties
dialog box appears for the first entity type. The left and right arrow
buttons in the dialog box indicate that you are analyzing more than
one entity, and allow you to cycle through the previous or next entity in
the selection group.
5
52
The Analyze function remains active until you press the Esc key or
close the properties dialog box, allowing you to select and analyze
additional entities.
Entity attribute fields for Level, Color, line Style and Width, or Point
53
style appear in all properties dialog boxes. Use these fields to modify
the attributes of a single entity, or use the Propagate Attribute
Changes apply button to assign the same attributes to all selected
entities. (This button is available only when multiple entities are
selected or when attributes are changed.)
54
5
56
Analyze Position
You can view the XYZ coordinates of a selected position or
point entity using the Analyze Position function.
57
Figure 5-30: Analyze Position dialog box
58
59
This function remains active until you close the dialog box so you can
continue to select and analyze different points or positions.
510
TIP: This function provides read-only information. To modify

the point or position XYZ values, use the Analyze function.
Analyze Distance
Use this function to analyze the distance between two
selected entities or positions by creating one or more
theoretical lines.
Figure 5-31: Analyze Distance dialog box
Based on your selections, you can view information on the point

positions (XYZ coordinates), angle between points or entities, and
either the 2D and 3D lengths or, the minimum and maximum
distance. The 3D XYZ delta values (differences) between the selected
points or entities also displays.
Note: This function does not create geometry or update the

properties of the selected entities.
Area / Volume submenu

This submenu offers functions for analyzing 2D and surface areas and,
if Mastercam Solids is installed, for analyzing solid properties.
5
Analyze 2D Area
Use this function to analyze an area you define by selecting
52
curve boundaries relative to a specified chord height
tolerance.
Figure 5-32: Analyze 2D Area dialog box 53
54
5
You can view details on the boundary and perimeter areas, center of
gravity, and moment of inertia about the X and Y axes and about the
center of gravity. You can save the data to a specified file type,
56
filename, and location.
Analyze Surface Area

57
You can generate information on the total surface area of the
surfaces and solid faces you select, relative to the chord
height tolerance you specify.
Figure 5-33: Analyze Surface Area dialog box 58
59
You can optionally save the resulting data to a specified file type,
filename, and location.
510
TIP: A smaller chord height tolerance value results in a more

precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area.
Analyze Solid Properties

If Mastercam Solids is installed, this function lets you
analyze data on the solid volume and mass relative to a
defined density, the center of gravity, and the moment of
inertia relative to a selected axis line.
Figure 5-34: Analyze Solid Properties dialog box
In addition, you can save the solid data to a file.
Analyze Chain
This function allows Mastercam to analyze the chains you
select in order to identify one or more subtle problems that
might be overlooked, including:
Only overlapping entities that are adjacent or all overlapping
entities, regardless of their relative position.
Positions where the chain reverses direction by a value that
exceeds the minimum angle you specify.
Short entities; those with a length smaller than the maximum
length value you define.
Figure 5-35: Analyze Chain dialog box
5
52
53
54
After analyzing the selected chains, Mastercam reports the number of
each type of problem it finds and highlights the problem areas in the
5
graphics window.
Figure 5-36: Example: Analyze Chain summary
56
57
You can optionally create geometry to mark problem areas as they are
detected during the analyze process. This geometry helps you zoom in
on problem areas in order to fix them. Mastercam creates red arcs
58
(circles) for overlapping entities, yellow point entities for direction
reversals, and blue arcs (circles) for short entities.
Note: To avoid missing overlapping or short entities, we

59
recommend that you use the Window chaining method when
selecting the chains you want to analyze.
510
Analyze Contour
Use the Analyze Contour function to generate a text report
containing the properties of all the entities in one or more
chained curves. The curves can contain lines, arcs, or points
(no splines). You can analyze either 2D or 3D contours. For
2D contours, you can analyze a contour which is offset from the
chained curve, and which uses cornering options, simulating a simple
contour toolpath.
Figure 5-37: Analyze Contour dialog box
Figure 5-38: Example: Analyze Contour summary

The generated report opens in your default text editor and lists the
properties of each entity in the chained curves. Before saving the file to
a specified location, you can view and edit the data or add comments,
as necessary.
5
Analyze Angle 52
This simple function lets you analyze the angles between
two lines or three point that you select in the graphics
window. Mastercam displays values for the first angle and
the supplementary angle. 53
Figure 5-39: Analyze Angle dialog box
54
5
56
You can also choose a method for measuring the angle:
Cplane: Shows the angle based on the current Cplane.
3D: Shows the actual angle of the lines in the plane they
define.
57
Note: If the lines do not lie in the same plane and do not intersect,
only the Cplane option is available; the 3D option is unavailable. 58
Analyze Dynamic
You can dynamically view information on any position you
59
choose along an entity. When you select the entity, you use
the cursor to move the arrow endpoint that appears along
the entity to the position you want to analyze.
510
Figure 5-40: Analyze Dynamic dialog box
The information that appears in the dialog box fields for the selected
entity type includes:
Lines—Point and tangent XYZ coordinates.
Arcs and splines—Point and tangent XYZ coordinates and the
radius of curvature.
Surfaces and solid faces—Point XYZ coordinates, the normal
XYZ coordinates, and the minimum radius of curvature.
In the Vector section, you can type a length to view the corresponding
endpoint XYZ coordinates of the vector.
Database / Number Submenu

This submenu offers functions you use to view information based on
an entity’s database properties. Each function and its use is described
below.
Analyze Number
Use this function to easily identify and view the properties of
an entity using only the entity number (a database property
automatically assigned to all entities).
Figure 5-41: Analyze Database Number dialog box
5
52
When you type the number of the entity you want to analyze and
choose OK, the properties dialog box for the entity appears and the
selected entity is highlighted in the graphics window. 53
Notes:
• You can also use the Analyze Entity Properties function to
select one or more entities to analyze in the graphics window. 54
• To identify the entity number of a specific entity, use the
Analyze Database function.
Analyze Database
5
This function provides database-related information about a
selected entity. You can view the entity number, creation
date and time, and number of references for associations to 56
the entity including:
Geometry (surfaces and dimensions)
Solids
Toolpaths
57
Figure 5-42: Database Properties dialog box
58
59
510
This function remains active until you close the dialog box, allowing
you to continue to select and analyze the database properties of
different entities.
Test Surfaces and Solids Submenu

This submenu allows you to analyze surfaces and solids. You can test
the integrity of surface and solids models using customized
parameters.
Analyze Test Surfaces

Use this function to perform one or more of the following
analyses on a surface model.
Check model: Checks for self-intersections,
backups, and internal sharp ridges against a tolerance you
specify.
Small surfaces: Checks for surfaces that lie on top of other
surfaces with the area size you define.
Normals: Analyzes the normal vector of the selected surfaces
and reports the number of bad surfaces whose normal vector
reverses direction abruptly in one or more locations.
Base surfaces: Checks for base surfaces and allows you to
optionally blank or unblank them in the graphics window.
Figure 5-43: Test Surfaces dialog box
Analyze Check Solids

If Mastercam Solids is installed, you use this function to
identify error conditions that may pose problems in solid
5
modeling operations. If errors are detected, the Check Solid
dialog box appears and lists the default maximum number
of errors (10).
Figure 5-44: Check Solids dialog box
52
53
54
5
56
57
If no errors are detected, a confirming message appears. When errors
are detected, you can select an error from the list to highlight its
location in the graphics window.
58
TIP: It is possible that there are more errors than can be
displayed, based on the maximum number of errors you set in
this dialog box. Reset the Maximum number of errors to a high
value and recheck the solid to see if additional errors exist. 59
Changing Entity Attributes 510
Entity attributes are physical characteristics you assign to an entity
that include its color, level, line style, line width, and point style. When
working with complex geometry, assigning entities to different levels,

colors, line styles and widths helps you quickly locate and isolate
points, lines, arcs, and other entities, and simplifies your design and
machining processes. You have several options for assigning and
changing entity attributes.
X To store initial entity attributes in a configuration file:

Use the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box
(choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings). After saving
entity attributes, when you start a new drawing session or open a
new file, initial attributes are loaded from the Mastercam
configuration file.
X To set entity attributes only for the current drawing session:

Access the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box by choosing
Attributes from the Status bar. Then, choose the EA Mgr button in
the Attributes dialog box. The changes you make will override the
initial configuration parameters and apply to all entities created
during the remainder of the current drawing session.
X To modify entity attributes for one or more selected entities, use

one of the following methods:
In the Status bar, position the cursor in the attribute
field you want to modify; this activates the right–click
mouse option, indicated by a change in the mouse pointer.
Right–click to choose the option, then select the items to
change. When you press Enter, the dialog box for the selected
attribute displays, allowing you to make and apply changes to
all selected entities.
Choose a function from the Analyze menu. Entity attribute
fields for level, color, line style and width, or point style appear
in all analyze properties dialog boxes. You can modify the
attributes of a single entity, or use the Global apply button to
apply the attributes to all selected entities.
X To modify solid entity attributes:

Choose the Solids tab from the Operations Manager pane. Select a
solid, right-click on the selected solid, then choose Attributes.
TIP: You can also use the Status bar Color, Point style, Line
style, Line width, and Level fields to modify the specific
attribute for selected entities, or for entities you will create in the
5
current session.
52
53
54
5
56
57
58
59
510
chapter 6
Toolpath Types
Mastercam includes an extensive number of intelligent
toolpath functions you can use to quickly build toolpaths for
specific applications. Your ability to access toolpath types and
features depends on both your license level and the capabilities
of the active machine and control definition. Most of the
Mastercam Mill toolpaths described in this section are also
available if your installation includes Mastercam Router and
the appropriate Plus or Pro license, or Mastercam Lathe for
mill/turn applications.
In this chapter, you will learn about the different toolpath types
you can create in Mastercam, including:
Mill and Router Toolpaths (page 383)
Additional Router Toolpaths (page 422)
Surface Toolpaths (page 432)
Multiaxis Toolpaths (page 523)
Lathe Toolpaths (page 578)
Nesting Toolpaths (page 608)
Engraving Toolpaths (page 612)
Notes:
• If your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam
Wire, you can also create toolpaths (wirepaths) for EDM
machines. For more information, refer to the
“Mastercam X2 Wire Getting Started Guide” PDF located
in your Mastercam installation \Documentation folder.
• If Mastercam Art is installed, you can create Art
toolpaths for your Art models using the Art, Toolpath
Art Base Surface function from the Mastercam menu.
For more information, refer to the online Help or the
“Mastercam X2 Art Tutorial” PDF in your Mastercam
\Documentation folder.
X The process of creating most Mastercam toolpaths consists of

the following basic steps:
1 Select the machine definition from the Machine type menu.
2 Choose a toolpath type from the Toolpaths menu.
3 Use the dialog boxes and prompts that display to chain

geometry or select points or other entities, as necessary.
4 In the Toolpath Parameters tab, select the tool and refine the
tool parameters.
5 Use the other tabs in the Toolpath Parameters dialog box to
define and create the toolpath operation for the selected
toolpath type.
You will use a different process to create high speed surface toolpaths
and advanced multiaxis toolpaths. For details, see “Creating Surface
High Speed Toolpaths” on page 467, and “Creating an Advanced
Multiaxis Toolpath” on page 537.
TIP: You can also select pre-defined toolpath operations from a

library and apply the operation to selected geometry. For more
information, see “Importing Operations” on page 802 and
“Exporting Operations” on page 803.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Mill and Router Toolpaths • 383
Mill and Router Toolpaths

6
Mastercam Mill has several types of toolpaths that you can create on
wireframe, surface, and solid geometry. In this section, you will learn
more about creating different types of Mastercam Mill toolpaths,
including:
62
Contour Toolpaths (page 384)
Circle Toolpaths (page 394)
Drill Toolpaths (page 399)
63
Pocket Toolpaths (page 409)
Wireframe Toolpaths (page 410)
Specialized Toolpaths (page 416)
You can create these toolpath types with 2- or 3-axis mills, including
64
those with two linear axes plus one rotary axis. When chaining
geometry for these toolpaths, you can select either wireframe
geometry or the edges/faces of solids. 65
To drive tools along surface geometry, use surface toolpaths.
You can also use wireframe toolpaths to simulate surface
machining with wireframe geometry, or you can create curves
along surfaces or their boundaries and chain those.
Use multiaxis toolpaths when your tool has 4 or 5
66
programmable axes and the operation requires this type of
tool motion.
Note: Mills that support multiaxis toolpaths also support the other
6
types of toolpaths described in this section.
TIPS: 68
• When working with toolpaths, you can use functions to
transform, trim, or wrap the toolpath around a cylinder with
axis substitution.
• To wrap the toolpath, choose the Rotary axis check box and
69
button in the Toolpath Parameters tab for the selected
operation.
• For more information on how to transform or trim operations,
see “Transforming Operations” on page 804 and “Trimming
Toolpaths” on page 807.
610
Contour Toolpaths
Use contour toolpaths to drive the tool along a path. This toolpath type
is appropriate for both roughing and finishing applications. Contour
toolpaths remove material along a path defined by a chain of curves;
they do not clean out an enclosed area. You can also cut the contour in
depth cuts and/or multiple passes in the cutting plane, and create
remachining operations.
When creating contour toolpaths, you can select an unlimited number
of chains for each toolpath, creating either 2D or 3D contour
toolpaths.
2D contour toolpaths cut geometry in a single plane (typically
XY) at a constant depth (Z), although you can create multiple
passes at different depths. Mastercam automatically selects
this type if all the geometry lies in the same plane.
3D contour toolpaths cut geometry in XY and Z, where the Z
depth can vary over the toolpath. Use this type if the geometry
for each cutting pass is not contained within a single plane.
To begin creating a contour toolpath, choose Contour Toolpath from
the Toolpaths menu. After chaining geometry and selecting a tool, use
the Contour parameters tab to choose a contour type and enter values
for different cutting parameters and compensation options. Select
check boxes in the lower right of the dialog box to activate advanced
toolpath features. These let you create lead in/out moves, depth cuts,
multiple cutting passes, and filter toolpaths for more efficient output.
Note: With the exception of 2D, selecting a contour type

activates the Contours parameters button located next
to the field. Click this button to set additional options for
the contour type.
Figure 6-1: Example: Contour Tab
6
62
63
64
65
Chamfer Contour Toolpaths
Use this toolpath type to cut a chamfer around a contour as a stand-
66
alone operation. For example, to cut a contour 30mm deep with a
2mm chamfer, create one toolpath to cut the contour to the desired
depth. Then create a separate contour chamfer toolpath to place the
2mm chamfer. 6
68
69
To begin creating a chamfer toolpath, choose Contour toolpath from
the Toolpaths menu. After chaining geometry and selecting a tool, use
the Contour parameters tab to choose the Chamfer button. Then set 610
the chamfer dimensions in the Chamfering dialog box.
Typically when creating a chamfer toolpath, you will set the Depth (on
the Contour parameters tab) to 0.0 relative to the chained geometry
and let Mastercam calculate the tool depth from the chamfer
dimensions. Enter a non-zero depth, (+) or (-), only if you want to
locate the top of the chamfer at a distance from the chained geometry.
IMPORTANT: You must select one of the following tool types

when creating a chamfer toolpath; otherwise a warning
message displays and the toolpath is rejected:
• Bull-nose cutter
• Ball (spherical) cutter
• Chamfer mill
Ramp Contour Toolpaths

Use ramp contour toolpaths to transition smoothly between depth
cuts by creating a continuous ramp instead of individual plunge cuts.
You can ramp by a set angle, by a set depth, or plunge directly between
depth cuts. This technique is especially useful in high speed
machining.
Note: Contour ramping is available for only 2D contour toolpaths.
To begin creating a ramp contour toolpath, choose Contour toolpath

from the Toolpaths menu. After chaining geometry and selecting a
tool, use the Contour parameters tab to choose the Ramp button.
Then set the chamfer dimensions in the Ramp Contour dialog box.
Remachining Contour Toolpaths:

Remachining calculates areas where the roughing tool could not
machine the stock and creates a second toolpath to clear the
remaining material. Slightly different options are available depending
on whether you are remachining a contour or pocket toolpath. You can
choose three methods to calculate how much stock the new toolpath
will remove:
The stock left by all previous operations
The stock left by the most recent previous operation
The size of the roughing tool. Use this method when the
roughing operation is not included in the current part file;
Mastercam will figure out how much stock would be left based
on the size of a roughing tool that you enter.
The tolerance value also affects the toolpath. A low tolerance creates a
more accurate toolpath. For remachining, a low tolerance may result
6
in more areas being machined. If you type the tolerance value
information into one value field, the other value field automatically
recalculates. (For pocket toolpaths, use the Advanced dialog box to set
the remachining tolerance.)
62
If you choose the Display stock option, Mastercam will lead you
through a series of previews which display the calculated stock to be
removed and how much of that stock would be removed with the
current remachining settings.
63
Notes:
• If you base a remachining operation on a previous operation,
and then change the order of the operations in the Toolpath
64
Manager so that the remachining operation is before the
roughing operation, the remachining operation will not be able
to correctly calculate the area of the roughing operation.
• Do not use compensation in control with remachining
65
operations.
• Contour remachining “keep tool down” moves between
remachining passes are not gouge checked! Take the necessary
precautions to eliminate the risk of gouging. This applies only
66
for contour remachining toolpaths, and only if you choose the
option to “keep tool down” for depth cuts or multiple passes.
Oscillating Contour Toolpaths

6
Adding oscillation in the Z axis along your contour toolpaths uses
more of the cutting length of the tool, and can reduce tool wear in that
axis. This is especially useful when cutting thinner materials or 68
laminated materials such as kitchen counter tops. Mastercam provides
an oscillation strategy for its mill and router contour toolpaths.
When creating a contour toolpath, you can add an oscillation strategy
by selecting Oscillate as the Contour type in the Contour parameters 69
tab.
Then click the Contour parameters button to open the Oscillate
Contour dialog box and define your strategy. You can choose a linear
(zigzag) or a smoother highspeed (sine-curve style) oscillation 610
movement. You also define the maximum Z depth and the distance
along the contour for the oscillating tool movement.
Notes:
• The Top of stock that you enter in the Contour parameters tab
sets the maximum Z height for the oscillating contour toolpath.
However, the tool will not exceed the maximum Z depth that
you specify in the Oscillate Contour dialog box.
• The Distance along contour that you set in the Oscillate
Contour dialog box determines how far the tool moves in X or Y
before changing direction in the Z axis.
• If you edit the operation and modify the tool, Mastercam
automatically verifies that the flute length of the tool is
sufficient. A message warns you if the flute length is less than
the overall oscillation distance.
Onion Skin Contour Toolpaths:

Available only with Mastercam Nesting. Small parts can present a
problem on a CNC router if the area of the final piece being produced
is not big enough to maintain adequate vacuum (and keep the part
from moving) during a cut. A strategy commonly referred to as “onion
skinning” offers a solution. Mastercam Nesting provides intelligent
onion skin options in the Toolpath Nesting dialog box, Parameters
tab to support this strategy. When you choose the Onion skin check
box in this tab, Mastercam automatically adds an onion skin final
return cut for the original contour operation.
Note: For more information on creating onion skin contour

toolpaths, refer to the Mastercam Help.
Creating Tabs for Contour Toolpaths

For some contour toolpaths, you may need to create and use tabs, for
example, when you are cutting out small parts, multiple parts, or
nested parts. Tabs are uncut areas of a contour toolpath that assist in
holding down a part. While the tool is cutting the contour, it retracts at
the tab location to leave a small amount of stock, and then plunges
back to the normal cutting depth.
When you define mill and router contour toolpaths, to create tabs, first
select the Tabs check box in the Contour parameters tab. Then click
the Tabs button to access the Tabs dialog box.
Figure 6-2: Example: Contour Parameters tab
6
62
63
64
65
66
6
68
69
610
Figure 6-3: Tabs dialog box
Mastercam also provides options for editing and cutting off the tabs.
Use the procedures below to learn more about:
Creating tabs
Editing tabs (page 393)
X To create tabs for a mill or router contour toolpath:

1 In the Tabs dialog box, use the fields in the top section of the
dialog box to configure the tab size. You can create Full tabs or
Partial tabs. Full tabs are the full stock height; at the tab
locations, the tool retracts fully from the part. Partial tabs are
less than the full stock height; you use the Tab thickness field
to define how far to pull back from the cut depth (typically,
partial tabs are thin).
2 After choosing the type of tab to create, enter the Width of the
tab to define how far it extends along the toolpath.
3 Use the Tab Position section to set one of the following
methods that the toolpath will use to locate the tabs along the
contour.
To create tabs equally spaced along the contour, choose

one of the following options:
Automatic - specify number of tabs: After choosing 6
this option, enter the number of tabs to create.
Mastercam evenly divides the distance along the
contour to define the spacing, and creates the specified
number of tabs.
Automatic - max distance between tabs. After
62
choosing this option, enter the maximum distance you
want between tabs. Mastercam calculates and creates
the fewest number of tabs that can be evenly spaced
along the contour without exceeding the maximum
63
distance parameter.
Notes:
• If a tab position will overlap a corner, the tab will wrap around
64
it.
• Additional options let you specify a size threshold for creating
tabs, so that Mastercam creates only tabs that meet or exceed
the dimensions you define. This avoids creating tabs for smaller
65
parts where they are not necessary.
Choose Manual, and then Position to manually select each

tab location in the graphics window. 66
Choose Manual, and then Use square point for tab
position to place tabs at each square point along the
contour.
4 Select the type of Cutoff Operation. 6
No cutoff operation: Leaves the tabs uncut so that they
can be removed by hand. Typically, when selecting this
option, you will create partial tabs instead of full tabs and
use a small tab thickness. 68
After all contour chains: Cuts the tabs after cutting all the
chains in the operation. For example, if you are cutting
several parts, first all the parts are cut and then all the tabs
are cut. 69
After each contour chain: Cut a contour then cuts the tabs
before moving to the next contour. For example, if you are
cutting several parts, the tabs are cut from the first part
before the second part is cut.
If you select this option, you can also choose to Cut tabs
610
with first finish pass. Consider using this option when
your contour toolpath have both roughing and finishing

passes; for example, when you are using depth cuts. In this
case, Mastercam will leave the tabs during the roughing
passes, and cut them off with the finish pass, rather than
creating a separate cutoff pass.
Separate operation: Creates a separate Tab Cutoff
operation and includes it in the Toolpath Manager so that
you can edit or customize it. You can select a different tool,
edit the feed rate or coolant options, or change other
parameters that you would like to be different from the
original contour operation, such as the lead-in / lead-out
entry and exit moves.
If you do not create separate Tab Cutoff operations,
Mastercam applies the lead-in and lead-out parameters set
in the original contour operation for each individual tab
cutoff operation.
Note: The option to create a separate tab cutoff operation is

available only when you first create the operation. When editing
the contour parameters from the Toolpath Manager, you cannot
add a separate tab cutoff operation.
5 To access more advanced tab options, click the Settings

button to define ramped tabs or set a size threshold for the
parts to be automatically tabbed. 6
62
63
64
65
When finished, click OK to exit and return to the Tabs dialog
box.
66
6 When finished setting up other toolpath parameters, click OK
to close the dialog box and create the contour toolpath and, if
defined, the tab cutoff operations.
6
Editing tabs
Once you have added tabs to a contour toolpath, use one of the
following methods to edit them: 68
To access the Tabs dialog box, click the Parameters icon for
the contour toolpath in the Toolpath Manager. Use the Tabs
dialog box to view and edit the original tab parameters.
Changes you make using this method affect all the tabs in the
toolpath. The only function you cannot access is the option to
69
create a separate cutoff operation.
To edit individual tabs, click the Geometry icon for the
contour toolpath in the Toolpath Manager. This opens the
Chain Manager where you can add, delete, or move individual
610
tab locations. You can also change the size and shape of an
individual tab.
X To edit individual tabs:

1 In the Toolpath Manager, click on the Geometry icon for the
contour toolpath which contains the tabs.
2 In the Chain Manager, right-click on the desired chain and
choose Edit tabs.
Note: The Edit tabs option is available only when you right-click
on a chain; it does not appear if you click elsewhere in the Chain
Manager dialog box.
3 Use the Edit tabs ribbon bar options to:
Move tabs
Add a new tab location
Edit the size or attributes of a specific tab location
Delete a single tab location, or delete all tab locations
Figure 6-4: Edit tabs ribbon bar
s
ab
ll t
De tab
Ad tab
ea
Ed b
ab
a
e
e
dt
let
let
it t
ov
De
M
IMPORTANT: If you have created a separate cutoff operation

for the tabs, the changes you make to the tabs in the original
operation are not associative; they do not affect the cutoff
operation. Therefore, any additions, deletions or modifications
you make to tabs in the original operation must also be made—
using the same method—in the cutoff operation.
Circle Toolpaths
Circle toolpaths efficiently mill a circle when you select just a single
point, or other circle toolpaths for related applications. After milling
the center of the circle, Mastercam calculates an entry arc before
approaching the perimeter and then a similar exit arc. You can add
enhancements such as multiple passes, multiple depth cuts, and
helical plunge moves, and fine-tune the entry and exit arcs.
In this section, you will learn more about:

Circle Mill Toolpaths (page 395)
Helix Bore Toolpaths
6
Slot mill toolpaths (page 397)
Thread Mill Toolpaths (page 397)
TIP: Use helix bore toolpaths for operations with non-center

62
cutting insert cutters.
Circle Mill Toolpaths 63

Use circle mill toolpaths to mill circular pockets based on a single
point. You can select either point entities or the center points of arcs.
Mastercam pockets out a circular area using the diameter and depth
that you specify. After milling the center of the circle, Mastercam
64
calculates an entry arc before approaching the perimeter and creates a
similar exit arc. The following picture shows a circle mill toolpath with
helical entry:
65
66
6
Here is the same toolpath with a straight plunge entry:
68
69
610
To begin creating a circle mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle

Paths, Circmill Toolpath. Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog box
to select one or more hole locations for the toolpath.
After selecting the tool, use the Circmill parameters tab to enter values
for different cutting parameters and compensation options.
Helix Bore Toolpaths

Helix bore toolpaths are designed for a non-center cutting insert
cutter. This high-speed boring tool cuts downward in a helical motion
for roughing; steps over to finish at the bottom; then performs a finish
pass in a helical upward motion. Like a circle mill toolpath, you can
chain only a single point to create the toolpath; the hole’s outer
diameter is determined by your toolpath parameters.
To begin creating a helix bore toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle

paths, Helix bore toolpath. Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog
box to select one or more hole locations for the toolpath.
After selecting the tool, use the Helix bore parameters tab to enter
values for common cutting parameters and compensation options.
Then choose the Rough /Finish parameters tab and complete
entering toolpath information.
Note: There is no specific tool type for Felix tools. When creating a
tool definition for a Felix tool, create it as a flat endmill.
Slot mill toolpaths

Use slot mill toolpaths to efficiently machine obround
slots. Obround slots consist of two straight lines and
6
two 180-degree arcs at the ends.
Slot mill toolpaths automatically calculate plunge, entry, and exit
points appropriate for slots by: 62
Calculating the plunge point
Placing the entry/exit arcs at the midpoint of the contour
Creating an entry ramp to plunge gradually to the cut depth 63
64
65
To begin creating a slot mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle paths,
Slot mill toolpath.
66
Thread Mill Toolpaths
Thread mill toolpaths create a series of helixes for machining a thread
with a thread mill or other suitable tool. For inside diameter (ID)
6
threads, you must drill a hole first. For outside diameter (OD) threads,
you must create a boss first. You can use point entities or arc center
points for the toolpath. If you select duplicate geometry, or both an arc
and its center point, Mastercam warns you and displays the duplicate
68
geometry in red.
The number of active teeth, top of thread, thread depth, and thread
pitch parameters all indirectly determine the number of revolutions
that the tool makes while machining the thread. If the number of
69
revolutions is less than one, Mastercam automatically adjusts the top
of thread to create at least one revolution.
610
In this example, a slot mill was used to cut the coarse threads around
the top of a valve core:
To begin creating a thread mill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle

paths, Thread mill toolpath. Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog
box to select one or more hole locations for the toolpath.
After selecting a tool, use the Thread mill tab to define the Taper angle
and other thread mill parameters.
Use the following guide to help orient your thread mill toolpath so that
it cuts the threads in the intended manner.
ID / OD Right- / Left- Machining Milling

thread hand thread direction direction
ID Right-hand Top to bottom Conventional
ID Right-hand Bottom to top Climb
ID Left-hand Top to bottom Climb
ID Left-hand Bottom to top Conventional
OD Right-hand Top to bottom Climb
OD Right-hand Bottom to top Conventional
OD Left-hand Top to bottom Conventional
OD Left-hand Bottom to top Climb

Drill Toolpaths
Mastercam supports many types of standard drill cycles. Standard drill
toolpaths provide flexible options for selecting drilling points, such as
6
selecting either points or arcs; automatically selecting all the points
from a previous operation; or choosing drilling patterns such as grids
or bolt holes without first creating geometry. The general process of
creating a standard drill toolpath is straightforward.
62
Note: You can also customize drilling operations and create
entirely new drilling cycles. For more information, see
“Customizing Drilling Operations” on page 405.
63
To begin creating a drill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Drill toolpath.
Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select one or more
hole locations for the toolpath and choose the sort order. 64
After selecting a tool, use the drill type parameters tab (such as Simple
drill - no peck in the sample below) to choose a drill cycle from the
Cycle drop-down list, and set drill cycle parameters. Edit the fields and
settings in other drill toolpath tabs, as necessary. 65
Figure 6-5: Example: Drill Cycle Parameters tab
66
6
68
69
610
Choosing a Drill Cycle

The drill cycle you choose determines the parameters you can set for
the drill toolpath. Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Router include all of
the standard drill toolpaths and features described below. In addition,
Mastercam Router provides support for block drilling and aggregate
heads.
Notes:
• Drill cycle availability is determined by the control definition
and is machine- and control-dependent. For more information
on using a control definition with a specific machine definition,
see “Choosing a Machine and Control Definition” on page 697.
• The post must support the selected cycle.
Drill/Counterbore: Recommended for drilling holes with

depths of less than three times the tool diameter.
Peck Drill: Recommended for drilling holes with depths of
more than three times the tool diameter. Retracts fully out of
the drilled hole to remove material chips. Used often with
chips that are hard to remove. (Individual peck drill moves do
not backplot – the code only displays after you create the NC
file.)
Chip Break: Drills holes with depths of more than three times
the tool diameter. Retracts partially out of the drilled hole to
break material chips which aids chip removal.
Tap: Taps right or left internal threaded holes.
Bore #1 (feed out): Drills holes with feed-in and feed-out
motion. This creates a straight hole with a smooth surface.
Bore #2 (stop spindle, rapid out): Drills holes with feed-in,
stop spindle, and rapid-out motion.
Fine bore (shift): Stops the spindle at the end of each drill
point, then spins to orient the tool to a pre-defined angle,
shifts off the wall of the drill hole, and retracts.
Custom cycles: Drills holes using customized parameters.
TIP: Multiaxis drill toolpaths (which let you rotate the drill axis
and change it from hole to hole) are an optional feature. For
more information, contact your Mastercam Reseller.
Selecting Drill Points

When you choose Drill Toolpaths
or Circle Paths, Circmill Toolpath
6
from the Toolpaths menu, the Drill
Point Selection dialog box displays.
It provides you with many flexible
options for selecting drill holes for
62
the toolpath.Each option is
described below.
Selecting points from the graphics
window—Choose one of the
63
following methods to select points
from the graphics window.
Select: Returns the cursor
to the graphics window
64
where you can use general
selection techniques to
select individual points.
Automatic: Lets
65
Mastercam automatically
find drill points. When you
return to the graphics
window, select the first
point; then a second point
66
to set the search direction;
and finally, a third point
which is the last point in
the toolpath. Mastercam
6
finds and selects all the
points within the defined
area.
Entities: Places drill points 68
at the endpoints of entities
you select in the graphics
window and sorts them
based on the order that
the geometry was created.
69
If you select closed arcs, the drill points are placed in the
center of the arcs.
Window Points: Returns the cursor to the graphics window
where you can click and drag a rectangle around the points to
610
be drilled.
Reusing points from a previous operation—Choose one of the

following options to reuse points from a previous toolpath:
Subprograms: Lets you select a previously created drill
toolpath and apply the new operation to its points.
Mastercam creates subprograms for both operations to reuse
the point locations.
Last: Mastercam creates a drill toolpath using the drill points
and sorting order of the previous drill operation.
Masking on an arc—Enter a Diameter value to drill at the center point
of all the arcs whose diameter is within the specified tolerance, or
choose Mask on Arc to select an arc from the graphics window. The
selected arc can be either open or closed.
Pattern drilling—Select the Pattern check box and set additional
options on this section for creating a grid of holes or a bolt circle.
Predefine points or geometry are not needed to use these functions.
Sorting Drill Points

Once you have selected all the points, in the Drill Point Selection
dialog box, choose Sorting to specify the drill order. The Point Sorting
6
dialog box makes it easy to choose a sort order for a specific type of
drilling application.
Figure 6-6: Point Sorting dialog box 62
63
64
65
66
6
The 2D sort, Rotary sort, and Cross sort tabs provide various patterns
you can choose for specific application types. Each tab and its
application is described below. To choose a sort pattern, click the
button in the selected tab and set additional options, as necessary. 68
Choose a 2D sort pattern when the points are
generally distributed in a flat plane. Select the Point
to Point option to sort the points by the shortest
distance from one point to the next (Mastercam will 69
prompt you to select the first point.
Choose a Rotary sort pattern for circular toolpaths.
Choose a Cross sort pattern when the points are wrapped
around a cylinder. 610
The picture on each sort pattern button gives you an idea of how the
points will be sorted relative to the starting point, which is indicated
on the button by the red cross. Hold your cursor over each button to
see the name of the sort pattern.
Notes:
• Only the drill points in the current toolpath are sorted, not all
drill points in the graphics window.
• The start point of the drill toolpath is marked with a red point.
Editing Drill Points

Use the Drill Change at Point dialog box to make point-specific
changes to a drill toolpath, add canned text, or otherwise customize
the toolpath at one or more specific points.
To access this dialog box:
When creating a drill toolpath, choose the Edit button in the
Drill Point Selection dialog box .
After creating a drill toolpath, click the Geometry icon in the
Toolpath Manger to access the Drill Point Manager. Then
right-click a point in the Drill Point Manager and choose
Change at point.
The values displayed in the fields

are the values currently in effect.
Select the check mark in front of a
field to activate it, and then type a
6
new value. You can apply the
change to just the selected point,
or to every point going forward.
62
Customizing Drilling
Operations
To customize drill operations, you
63
must first define or enable the
features you want in the control
definition for the machine you are
using. The custom parameters
you define for the control
64
definition are added to the
toolpath parameter dialog boxes
that display when you create a
drilling operation, such as the
65
Drill cycle parameters tab. Use
these and other toolpath
parameters to modify the drilling
operation, as necessary. 66
Here are some of the ways you can
customize your drilling
operations:
Associate canned text
6
with any drill point or
points. Use the Control Definition Manager Text properties
pages to define the canned text commands you can choose
from. 68
Customize the list of drill cycles and their parameters which
appear in the Drill cycle parameters tab. Use the Control
Definition Manager Machine Cycles properties page to select
the cycles. To customize the names of the cycles and their
parameters, use the Control Definition Manager Text
69
properties pages.
Define custom parameters for each cycle. Values for these
parameters can be set on an operation-specific basis using the
Custom drill parameters tab. To define custom parameters
610
for a particular cycle, use the Control Definition Manager Text

properties pages.
You can also define custom integer and floating-point variables for the
control definition. These are available when you create any toolpath
type, not just drilling. For more information on setting up control
definitions, see “Working with Control Definitions” on page 847.
Feature-based Drilling
Use the feature-based drilling functions described below to
automatically create a complete series of drill operations for a set of
6
points or arcs.
Automatic Drill Toolpaths (page 407)
Solid Drill Toolpaths (page 408)
62
Start Hole Toolpaths (page 408)
Feature-based drilling toolpath functions automate the process of
searching for drill points, selecting the appropriate tools from the tool
library, and creating complete sequences of drilling operations.
63
Automatic Drill Toolpaths
Use this toolpath type to automatically create a complete series of drill
operations for a set of points or arcs. For example, after selecting a set
of holes, you can automatically create a sequence of spot drilling, pre-
64
drilling, tapping, and chamfering operations. Mastercam
automatically picks the appropriate tools from the tool library for you,
based on the tool type you select.
To begin creating automatic drill toolpaths, choose Toolpaths, Circle
65
paths, Auto drill toolpath.
Use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select one or more hole
locations for the toolpaths. After selecting points, the Drill Point
Manager dialog box displays all of the holes that will be drilled or
66
machined, in the current drill order. Use this dialog box to edit the set
of points, as necessary.
Note: You cannot use the Drill Point Manager to edit the “points” of
6
Solids drilling operations.
Then use the tabs in the Automatic Arc Drilling dialog box to set
parameters for the drill operations that will be automatically created.
68
The drill cycles used in each operation created for automatic drill
toolpaths are determined by the cycle stored with each tool definition.
Only cycles that have been enabled in the Machine Cycles section for
the active control definition can be used.
69
Note: If you select a flat endmill as the finish tool type, a drill/
counterbore drill cycle is used for the finish drill cycle.
610
The result of the automatic drilling process is a series of individual drill

operations that display in the Toolpath Manager. The operations are
not associative with each other after they have been generated; if you
change one operation after it has been generated, Mastercam does not
change any others in response. You can use the Toolpath Manager to
view, modify, move, or regroup each operation individually without
affecting the others.
Solid Drill Toolpaths

Choose Toolpaths, Solids, Solid drill toolpath to access the solid
drilling function. This function searches for all the holes in a solid and
then automatically creates drill operations for them. You can create a
complete series of drill operations for a set of points or arcs. After
selecting a set of holes, you can automatically create a sequence of
spot drilling, pre-drilling, tapping, and chamfering operations.
Mastercam automatically picks the appropriate tools from the tool
library for you.
You can filter the list of holes, or otherwise delete any unwanted holes
from the list generated by Mastercam. The same set of operations will
be applied to all the holes in the list, so holes that require different
types of drill operations (for example, right-hand tap vs. a bored hole)
should be grouped together. When creating a solid drill toolpath, you
can choose either Basic or Advanced options.
Basic options create only finish operations and do not include
spot or step drilling. They include automatic hole detection
and let you set hole detection parameters.
Advanced options let you also set tool, depths, group, library,
custom drill, and pre-drilling parameters so that you can
select spot drilling, pre-drilling (roughing), and finish drill
cycles.
TIP: The automatic drill function is similar to solid drilling; use

auto drill for wireframe geometry, and solid drill for solids.
Start Hole Toolpaths

Use the Start Holes toolpath to automatically create drill toolpaths at
the plunge points for one or more selected operations. Mastercam
intelligently scans individual depth cuts and passes for each
operation, and creates toolpaths for multiple plunge points if
necessary.
To begin creating start hole toolpaths, choose Toolpaths, Circle paths,
Start hole toolpath.
Then use the Drill Start Holes dialog box to select all of the operations
that need drill start hole toolpaths. Mastercam automatically
determines where plunge holes are required for the selected
operations, and will calculate the dimensions of the start holes based
6
on the sizes of the tools used in those operations.
To create just a simple drill operation, choose Basic.
To include pre-drill or spot drill cycles or use other advanced 62
drilling features, choose Advanced.
Note: To add space to the start holes so that they are a little bigger
than the tool, use the Additional diameter amount and
Additional depth amount fields.
63
Finally, select the tool library in which Mastercam will look for the
drills it needs to match the sizes of the start holes. If an exact match is
not available in the selected library, a drill whose diameter is within
64
the specified Diameter match tolerance of the hole will be used.
IMPORTANT: Start hole toolpaths are not associative. If you

change the original toolpath, the Start Hole toolpaths are not
65
automatically updated. When you regenerate the original
toolpath after editing it, the start hole toolpaths associated with
the operation are deleted unless they have been manually
edited, in which case you must manually edit them as
necessary.
66
TIP: The Start Holes toolpath function works with all toolpath
types but is especially effective when used together with the
6
Align plunge entries for start holes feature found in Surface
Rough Pocket. This feature organizes all of the plunge points so
that one pre-drilled hole can serve as the plunge position for
multiple depth cuts. 68
Pocket Toolpaths
With Mastercam pocket toolpath functions, you can integrate
69
roughing and finishing cuts in the same operation, or simultaneously
create separate roughing and finishing operations. You can create
separate entry/exit moves for each type of cut, and choose from many
different roughing patterns, including open pockets and high speed
610
pocketing with trochoidal loops to minimize tool burial. Finishing
options include feed rate and spindle speed overrides, thin wall
finishing, spring passes, and remachining.
To begin creating a rough or finish pocket toolpath, choose Toolpaths,
Pocket Toolpath. Then chain the geometry for the pockets. All
geometry used to define a pocket and any islands must be in the same
construction plane. Mastercam automatically interprets closed
boundaries within the chained geometry as islands and adjusts the
toolpath accordingly.
Notes:
• You cannot select a 3D chain for a pocket toolpath type.
• To machine a pocket with complicated geometry, consider using
a surface pocket toolpath.
After selecting a tool, use the Pocketing parameters tab to select the
pocket type, based on the chained geometry, and set the pocket depth
and other general cutting parameters. Pocket types can include:
Facing or island facing: Mastercam automatically adjusts cut
depths for islands.
Open pockets: Mastercam automatically enters and exits the
pocket through the opening.
Remachining: Mastercam calculates the stock remaining from
a previous operation that used a larger diameter roughing
tool, and machines only the leftover stock.
In the Roughing/Finishing parameters tab, select a cutting method
and set other options for the roughing passes. Mastercam offers
different cutting patterns so you can choose the one best suited to
your part geometry and application requirements. You also use this
tab to create a finish pass with separate lead in/out moves distinct
from the entry moves for the roughing passes. You can override the
feed rate and spindle speed and set special options for thin wall
pockets. The finish pass can be created as a separate operation, so that
you can further edit and refine it separately from the roughing
operation.
Wireframe Toolpaths
Use wireframe toolpaths to use surface machining styles without
having to create or select surface entities. Mastercam calculates the
surfaces from your wireframe geometry. In this section, you will learn
about the different types of wireframe toolpaths you can create from
the Toolpaths, Wireframe submenu, including:
Ruled Coons Patch

6
Toolpaths(page 411) Toolpaths(page 413)
Lofted
Toolpaths(page 412)
Swept 2D
Toolpaths(page 414) 62
Revolved Swept 3D
Toolpaths(page 412) Toolpaths(page 414)
Note: Creating wireframe toolpaths can be faster and easier than

63
creating and machining surfaces. However, Mastercam offers you
more options and greater flexibility when creating surface
toolpaths. For more information, see “Surface Toolpaths” on
page 432. 64
Ruled Toolpaths
Use this toolpath type to create a linear blend between chains of
65
curves, simulating a ruled surface over several chains of geometry.
66
6
To begin creating a ruled toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Wireframe,
Wireframe Ruled toolpath and use the Chaining dialog box to select
between 2 and 100 chains. 68
After selecting chains and a tool, use the Ruled Parameters tab to
enter the toolpath parameters. First, select a cutting method to define
the pattern that the tool will follow over the part surface. Then enter
other toolpath dimensions and compensation options. 69
Finally, select the trimming options. You can define up to two
trimming planes for the toolpath. Each trimming plane consists of a
value along one of the coordinate axes. If the toolpath would extend
past the trim plane, it is clipped; if the trim plane is outside the
toolpath, the toolpath will be extended to it.
610
Lofted Toolpaths
Use lofted toolpaths when you want to create a smooth, curved blend
between chains of curves or cross-sections, simulating a lofted surface
over several chains of geometry.
To begin creating a lofted toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Wireframe,

Wireframe Lofted toolpath and use the Chaining dialog box to select
between 2 and 100 chains.
After selecting chains and a tool, use the Lofted Parameters tab to
enter the toolpath parameters.
First, select a cutting direction, across the calculated surface
or along it, and enter the step sizes for each cutting pass.
Then select a cutting method to define the pattern that the
tool will follow over the part surface and enter other toolpath
dimensions and compensation options.
TIP: When you are chaining the geometry for ruled or lofted
toolpaths, select the chains in order and make sure that the
chaining direction is consistent for all the chains so that the
toolpath does not “twist.”
Revolved Toolpaths
Use the Toolpaths, Wireframe, Wireframe Revolved toolpath
function to create a surface of revolution from a cross-section. This
toolpath type is calculated in the current construction plane, then
transformed into the current tool plane. You can trim the toolpath to a
given height or width (relative to the construction plane) and generate
a convex or concave shape. You must select a ball endmill for this
toolpath type. The following picture shows a part profile lying flat in
the XY plane, and the revolved toolpath created from the geometry.
6
62
63
64
Coons Patch Toolpaths
Coons path toolpaths simulate patches between chains of across and
along contours by using points, lines, arcs, or splines to construct four-
65
sided patches. These patches may be machined separately or
machined with additional patches.
66
6
68
To begin creating a coons patch toolpath, choose Toolpaths,
Wireframe, Wireframe Coons toolpath and enter the number of
patches to create in both the along and across directions. You can
select up to 50 patches in each direction.
69
After chaining the across and along contours and selecting a tool, use
options in the Toolpath parameters and Coons parameters tabs to
define the tool, and set the cutting direction, cutting method, and
other toolpath parameters and compensation options.
610
Swept 2D Toolpaths
Use the Toolpaths, Wireframe, Wireframe Swept 2D toolpath
function to create 2½D toolpaths by sweeping one boundary (the
across contour) along a second contour (the along contour). A swept
2D toolpath can have only one along boundary. The across and along
boundaries are blended to generate a 2½D toolpath.
Boundaries for a swept 2D toolpath must meet these conditions:

The boundaries may not contain splines.
The along boundary must lie parallel or perpendicular to the
current tool plane, or to the XY plane (top view) if you do not
define a tool plane. This only applies when the final toolpath
contains arcs. The final toolpath contains arcs when either the
along boundary contains arcs or when you select an option to
roll the toolpath around corners.
TIP: Swept 2D toolpaths have an advantage over swept 3D

toolpaths in that they output arcs and create much shorter NC
files. However, swept 3D toolpaths give you much more
flexibility.
Swept 3D Toolpaths
You can simulate a surface with any of the following sets of boundaries
using the Toolpaths, Wireframe, Wireframe Swept 3D toolpath
function:
One across boundary and one along boundary. Unlike 2D
swept toolpaths, the geometry does not have to be confined to
a plane.
One across boundary and two along boundaries.
Two across boundaries and one along boundary.
These boundaries may consist of any combination of lines, arcs, and

splines.
6
62
The longer of the two matching boundaries (along or across) is broken 63
into a number of segments based on the cut distance you define. This
number of segments is then applied to the other matching boundary.
64
65
66
6
68
69
610
Specialized Toolpaths
In this section, you will learn about the types of specialized toolpaths
you can create, including
Face Toolpaths (page 416)
Point Toolpaths (page 416)
2D High Speed Peel Mill Toolpaths (page 417)
Saw Toolpaths (page 419)
Manual Entry Operations (page 421)
Face Toolpaths
Use a facing toolpath to quickly clean the stock from the top of a part,
qualify the top of the part, and create a flat surface for future
operations. You can base the toolpath on either chained geometry or
on the current stock model. Mastercam provides additional options
for zigzag and one way cutting methods to minimize burring or
chipping on the final pass along the opposing edge of the face.
To begin creating a face toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Face toolpath.
Select the across and along contours in the graphics window. Then use
the Chaining dialog box to select the part geometry, or simply choose
OK without selecting anything to use the stock model.
After selecting a tool, use the Facing parameters tab to enter the
toolpath parameters and complete the toolpath.
TIPS:
• When facing the stock, it is important to have the tool overlap
the edges of the part by at least 50% of its diameter to
prevent leaving scallops of material at the edges of the stock.
• To face islands, consider using a pocket toolpath, which
includes an automatic island facing feature.
Point Toolpaths
Positioning the tool at a specific point or making it follow a series of
specific points is a helpful technique you can use to avoid a fixture or
clamp, or to get the tool into or out of a tight area or an awkward
shape. You might also use this type of toolpath to position the tool
between cutting operations.
Point toolpaths let you build a series of tool movements by selecting a

series of individual locations in the graphics window, rather than have
the tool follow geometry. 6
To begin creating a point toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Point toolpath
and use the Point Toolpath ribbon bar to create the toolpath.
Figure 6-7: Point Toolpath ribbon bar
62
e
pid od
Ra e m
e
rat
M ve
up
g
mo
ed
an
ov
63
ck
Ch
Re
Fe
Ad
Ba
When you begin creating the toolpath, you are prompted to select the
first point to which the tool will rapid from the home position. To add
additional points, click the locations in the graphics window. Use the
G0 (rapid) or G1 (feed rate) buttons to define the type of move before
64
selecting points, or to edit them afterwards.
For rapid moves to the point, the control definition determines
whether the rapid move is broken up into separate moves for each axis
or interpolated in multiple axes.
65
For feed rate moves, the tool moves to the new points at the
feed rate you set.
Use the Back up button to delete points and back up to the previous
point. Click OK when you finish selecting the points.
66
Use the Tool parameters tab to select a tool, coolant, and set other
toolpath options. To achieve the desired tool motion, try disabling the
reference points feature (deselect the Ref points check box). 6
2D High Speed Peel Mill Toolpaths
Mastercam's 2D high speed peel mill toolpath allows for efficient
constant climb milling between two selected contours or along a
68
single contour. It uses a trochoidal style of motion with accelerated
“back” feed moves when the tool is not engaged in material. For single
chains, you define the width of the cut. Otherwise, the width is defined
by the area between the two contours. 69
610
Figure 6-8: Peel mill toolpath examples: between two contours

and along a single contour
When cutting hardened material, use the peel mill toolpath to make
many fast, shallow cuts, rather than using a straight toolpath to make
fewer slow, deep cuts. This technique avoids burying the tool, easing
the cutter into and out of the material.
Note: This toolpath incorporates and enhances functionality

formerly found in the Mastercam Tslot and Tslot2 C-Hooks.
X To begin creating a 2D high speed peel mill toolpath:

1 Choose a Mill or Router machine definition from the Machine
Type menu.
2 Choose Peel mill toolpath from the Toolpaths menu.
3 Mastercam displays the Chaining dialog box and prompts you

to select the first chain for the toolpath. Select one or two
chains of entities in the graphics window. Then choose OK to
close the dialog box and continue.
4 Use the Mill / Router toolpath properties pages to enter the
toolpath parameters and complete the toolpath. For more
information on each properties page, click the Help button at
the bottom of each page.
Saw Toolpaths
Use a saw toolpath to drive a saw blade cutting along a straight line.
With Mastercam's saw toolpath—available only with Mastercam
6
Router—you can program multiple saw cuts using a single tool plane
(for example, TOP) in a single operation.
62
63
64
65
66
Note: Typically, the axis of rotation of the saw blade is parallel to
the sheet. Use the Machine Definition Manager to define a right
angle aggregate for the machine definitions used with this
6
toolpath.
When selecting chains for a saw toolpath, you indicate a kerf direction
(cut side) for each selected chain. Mastercam allows for kerf direction
68
differences on a per-chain basis within the same operation and stores
this data with each chain so you can modify it as needed.
You also control the arbor side based on the selected cutting direction
(Climb or Conventional).
69
610
Here is an example of a sample saw toolpath application:
X To begin creating a saw toolpath:

1 Choose a Router machine definition from the Machine Type
menu.
2 Choose Saw toolpath from the Toolpaths menu.
3 Mastercam displays the Chaining dialog box and prompts you
to select the first chain for the toolpath. Select a chain of
entities in the graphics window, and, when prompted, choose
a point to set the kerf side for the chain. Repeat this process
until all chains have been selected for the toolpath.
4 When finished selecting chains, choose OK to close the dialog
box and continue.
5 Use the Mill / Router toolpath properties pages to enter the
toolpath parameters and complete the toolpath. For more
information on each properties page, click the Help button at

the bottom of each page.
Manual Entry Operations

6
Use this toolpath function to directly insert text, comments, or Gcodes
into your NC programs. You can store text directly with the operation,
or reference an external text file that Mastercam reads when post
62
processing. You can insert the literal text as Gcode commands or
format them as comments.
IMPORTANT: You must ensure that the text or codes are 63

appropriate for your control and post processor and are
formatted correctly, and that the post processor is written to
properly handle the comments.
To begin creating a manual entry operation, choose Toolpaths,

64
Manual Entry and use the Manual Entry dialog box to define the text
to insert. You can select a file or enter the text right in the dialog box (a
maximum of 750 characters).
If you select a file, you can choose to copy the text to the part
65
file (saving it with the part), or create an external link to the
source file used when you post.
If you choose to create an external link to the text file, you can
edit the file whenever you wish without modifying the
66
operations in Mastercam. The updated text appears in your
programs the next time you post.
Note: To manually insert text, codes, or commands at specific

6
points within a toolpath or operation, use the Drill Change at
Point dialog box. You might also consider using canned text to
create custom codes or program segments.
68
69
610
Additional Router Toolpaths

Besides all of the Mastercam Mill toolpath types, Mastercam Router
provides all the controls you need to create block or “gang” drill
toolpaths, including those used with straight and “T” block drills.
Block drill toolpaths optimize the drilling routine by dropping the
correct drills according to the drill pattern you specify.
Mastercam Router supports a wide variety of tool shapes and types,
including Right Angle (RA) and Compound Angle (CA) head control.
This aggregate head programming allows you to apply RA and CA
heads to your traditional toolpaths. To learn more about this, see
“Block Drilling Toolpaths” on page 423.
Mastercam Router features include VBScript support and cabinet
design software links. Depending on the Mastercam Router product
you have installed, you may also have Nesting and Engraving toolpath
functions.
Nesting allows you to fit parts onto a sheet of material for best
yield. Nesting operates on geometry or toolpaths. For more
information, see “Nesting Toolpaths” on page 608.
Engraving gives you the effect of classic hand-carved art using
your CNC machine. Sharp inside corners, created by the Z-
axis climbing in the corners, give the finished piece a crisp
edge, which is unattainable with conventional machining. For
more information, see “Engraving Toolpaths” on page 612.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Additional Router Toolpaths • 423
Block Drilling Toolpaths

Mastercam Router shares the Mastercam Mill drill toolpaths and also
allows you to create block drilling operations. Block drill toolpaths
6
create holes in parts at specified locations using tooling containing
multiple drills. To create these toolpaths, the size and spacing of the
arcs must match the size and spacing of the drills on the block.
In the example below, the holes in the furniture panel would require a
62
drill block with 5 mm drills spaced 32 mm apart.
63
5 mm arcs spaced
32 mm apart
64
65
Note: Use the Machine Definition Manager to create definitions for
drill blocks or aggregate heads. For more information, see
66
“Machine and Control Definitions” on page 811.
Drill blocks contain multiple drills and are required to create Block
Drill toolpaths in Mastercam Router. The Block Drill toolpath is
specially designed to use multiple tools for drilling in a single
6
operation. Drill blocks cannot be used for any toolpath other than
Block Drill.
68
69
610
The example below shows a drill block and offsets needed by

Mastercam when defining the tooling.
Figure 6-9: Example: Block Drill head and tool offsets
Lead drill
Offset from
lead drill to Offset from
second drill lead drill to
third drill
Both head and tool position offsets
are relative to the lead drill
In the following section, you will learn to use the block drilling
toolpath in Mastercam Router to filter drilling points by depth, and to
drill blind holes using a drill block that includes brad point drills. If the
drill block contains different tool types of the same diameter as the
arcs to drill, Mastercam gives preference to brad point drills when
drilling blind holes.
“Filtering drilling points by depth” on page 425 shows how
Mastercam can filter out arcs in the same location but at
different depths. This technique eliminates the need to delete
extra geometry or use masking to remove it from cabinet parts
imported from other CAD programs.
“Drilling blind holes with the block drilling toolpath” on
page 426 shows a technique for drilling blind holes by adding
brad point drill bits to a drill block, and defining stock.
Filtering drilling points by depth

When importing geometry from other CAD programs into Mastercam
Router, sometimes the hole geometry is drawn like this:
6
62
63
64
65
Mastercam filters out the hole geometry automatically so you can
easily avoid drilling the same hole twice. 66
X Selecting hole geometry for a block drilling toolpath
Before beginning, you must have hole geometry on the screen and
a router machine group in the Toolpath Manager (choose Machine
Type, Router, and select a machine).
6
1 From the Toolpaths menu, choose Block drilling toolpath.
2 Enter a name for the NC file and click OK. The Drill point
selection dialog box opens.
68
3 Choose Sorting.
4 In the 2D Sort tab of the Sorting dialog box, choose an option
under Depth filtering: 69
Use entity at lowest Z depth keeps the drill points at the
lowest Z depth and filters out any drill points at other
depths.
610
Use entity at highest Z depth keeps the drill points at the

highest Z depth and filters out any drill points at other
depths.
Filter the entities by the highest or lowest Z depth.

5 Choose OK to return to the Drill point selection dialog box.
6 Choose the Entities option.
7 Window-select the drill geometry for the toolpath and choose

OK.
Mastercam automatically filters the drill geometry, and uses the
geometry at the highest or lowest depth, depending on your
selection in the Sorting dialog box.
Drilling blind holes with the block drilling toolpath

Blind holes are drilled partially through the stock, often using a brad
point drill. By using the following technique, you can set up
Mastercam to automatically detect blind holes using the block drilling
toolpath. Mastercam gives preference to the brad point drills for
creating these holes. To drill blind holes, you will need to:
Set up the drill block by adding brad point drill bits of the
diameter of the blind holes. Drill blocks are the component
Mastercam uses to represent gang tooling.
Set up the stock.
Create a block drill toolpath to drill blind holes.
Setting up the drill block

Blind holes are typically drilled with brad point drills. 6
X Adding brad point drills to a drill block
Drill blocks are defined and stored in the Machine Definition
Manager. Before beginning, decide if you want to save the drill
block in the disk copy of the machine definition, or in the toolpath 62
copy.
To edit the disk copy of the machine definition, choose
Machine Definition Manager from the Settings menu.
To edit the toolpath copy of the machine definition, choose
63
Files from the machine group properties, then choose the
Edit button next to the machine definition.
64
65
Once you have opened the router machine definition, follow
these general steps to add one or more brad point drills to the
drill block. 66
X Adding a brad point drill to an existing drill block
1 Select the drill block, and then right-click and choose
Properties.
2 Right–click and choose Add from the menu
6
3 In the Tool Type tab, select BradPt Drill.
4 For the tool diameter, enter the size of the holes that you will
be drilling.
68
5 Choose OK.
6 Enter an offset from the lead drill as X-Y-Z coordinates, and a

work offset if necessary. 69
7 To add additional brad point drills, use the Copy and Paste
commands from the right–click menu.
8 Choose OK to close the Drill block properties dialog box, and
then choose OK to close the Machine Definition Manager.
610
Setting up the stock

Mastercam requires a stock definition so that it can tell the difference
between through holes and blind holes. Mastercam looks at all the arcs
selected for the toolpath. Arcs that are above the bottom of the stock
and lower than the top of the stock are drilled as blind holes. Arcs at
the bottom of the stock or lower are drilled as through holes.
IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive tear-out, Mastercam will not

use the brad point drill tools in a block drill to drill through holes.
X Setting up the stock

If you have not loaded a router machine into the Machine Defini-
tion Manager, choose Router from the Machine Type menu and
select the router to which you added the drill block equipped with
brad point drills.
1 Choose Stock Setup from the machine group properties in
the Toolpath Manager.
2 Select the stock shape. Many router jobs use Rectangular
stock.
3 Enter the stock dimensions as X-Y-Z coordinates, or use one
of the methods Mastercam provides for defining stock (Select
Corners, Bounding Box, NCI Extents, All Surfaces, All
Solids, or All Entities.
4 Enter the stock origin to locate the stock relative to your part.
5 Optionally, choose Display to show the stock in the graphics

window.
6 Choose OK.
Creating a block drill toolpath to drill blind holes
X Creating a block drill toolpath to drill blind holes

1 Choose Block Drilling Toolpath from the Toolpaths menu.
2 Use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select the holes.
Mastercam automatically places you in window selection
mode. Since you must select arcs instead of points, some of
the other selection tools are unavailable.
3 If the arcs in your geometry look like the following picture,

choose Sorting in the Drill Point Selection dialog box:
6
62
4 The Sorting dialog box allows you to filter out either the upper
or lower arc so that the hole is drilled only once. In the 2D Sort
tab, choose an option under Depth Filtering to use the arcs at
the highest or lowest Z depth.
63
64
Then click OK to close the dialog box.

65
5 In the Drill Point Selection dialog box, choose Entities.
6 Window select the arcs and choose OK.
7 When the Block drill dialog box appears, right-click in the tool
66
selection window and choose Get block drill.
8 In the Drill Block Selection dialog box, select the drill block
that is equipped with the brad point drills. Expand the drill
block and use the right–click menu to edit view the tools in the
6
block.
9 Enter the other drilling parameters and choose OK to create
the toolpath. 68
10 Backplot the toolpath to view the blind holes.
Working with Aggregate Heads 69

Mastercam organizes aggregate tooling information in a hierarchy of
heads, blocks, and tool stations.
Heads are complete assemblies that respond to axis
commands and move as a unit.
610
Blocks are mounted on heads and hold the individual tool

stations.
Tool stations are mounted on the block and hold individual
tools.
Large or complicated routers might have several heads, each of which
can contain several blocks. Each block, in turn, can have multiple
tools. When creating an aggregate head, you work at the block level to
define individual blocks and their tool stations. In some instances, you
will find that what is commonly referred to as an “aggregate head”
outside of Mastercam is defined as a block in Mastercam.
Mastercam supports right-angle, compound-angle, and vertical

blocks. The offset is the distance from the center of the block base to a
known position on the machine tool. 6
The offset is represented as a coordinate position. For example, X100
Y0 Z0 would place the aggregate block 100mm in X from the reference
point.
Z
62
Y
X
Aggregate position offset
shown in side view
63
64
65
66
6
68
69
610
Surface Toolpaths
In this section, you will learn about Mastercam’s standard surface
toolpaths and surface high speed toolpaths.
Standard rough and finishing toolpaths include parallel,
radial, project, flowline, and contour. Additional roughing
toolpaths are available for restmill, pocket, and plunge
strategies. Standard surface finish toolpaths also include
steep, shallow, pencil, leftover, scallop, and blend. Each
standard toolpath type is described in more detail below.
Surface high speed toolpaths produce the smoothest, most
efficient tool motions when machining surface models (or
solid faces). For more information, see “Surface High Speed
Standard Surface Toolpaths

Use surface toolpaths to drive the tool along drive geometry. At least
one drive surface, solid face, solid body, or CAD file is required for the
toolpath to be created. In this section, you will learn about creating
toolpath surface operations using functions in the Toolpaths, Surface
Rough and Surface Finish submenus.
You can select different geometry to enhance tool control. Geometry

types are indicated by special icons on the Toolpath Manager, and
include:
Drive geometry: The surfaces, solid faces, solid

bodies, or CAD files that will be cut.
Check geometry: The surfaces, solid faces, or solid

bodies that you want the tool to avoid.
Tool containment boundary: A closed chain of

curves that limits tool motion.
CAD file: An STL or other graphics data file used for

drive geometry.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Surface Toolpaths • 433
Other geometry specific to the selected toolpath type can be

used, such as flowline geometry for a flowline toolpath, or
blend curves for a blend toolpath. See “Using Toolpath
6
Manager Icons” on page 762 for geometry icon examples.
Surface Rough and Finish Parallel Toolpaths

To create surface parallel toolpaths, choose the appropriate type
62
(rough or finish) from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish
submenu. Use a surface rough parallel toolpath to remove the bulk of
the material quickly. It makes multiple depth cuts. Similarly, use the
finish parallel toolpath to machine over all the surfaces in parallel
63
passes.
64
65
66
Surface Rough and Finish Radial Toolpaths 6
To create surface radial toolpaths, choose the appropriate type (rough
or finish) from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish
submenu. You use radial toolpaths to cut from a center point outward,
creating cuts like the spokes of a wheel.
68
69
610
Surface Rough and Finish Project Toolpaths

Surface project toolpaths project either geometry or a toolpath from
an earlier operation onto surfaces. To create surface project toolpaths,
choose the appropriate type (rough or finish) from the Toolpath,
Surface Rough or Surface Finish submenu.
Surface Rough and Finish Flowline Toolpaths

Flowline toolpaths follow the shape and direction of the surfaces and
create a smooth and flowing toolpath motion. Choose this toolpath
type from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish submenu.
Surface Rough and Finish Contour toolpaths

Use surface rough or finish contour toolpaths to make multiple cuts
using constant Z steps. Surface contour toolpaths work well for parts
that have steep walls, such as steep-walled bosses. The rough and
finish contour toolpaths allow the tool to step down gradually in the Z
axis instead of stepping over in the X and Y axes. Choose this toolpath
type from the Toolpath, Surface Rough or Surface Finish submenu.
6
62
63
64
Surface Rough Restmill Toolpaths
65
Restmilling is a roughing toolpath that cleans up remaining stock with
a planar (constant Z) cut motion. To create this toolpath type, choose
Toolpath, Surface Rough, Rough restmill toolpath. The graphic
below shows the stock remaining after a pocket rough toolpath: 66
6
68
69
610
The next graphic shows the part after a restmill operation:
Surface Rough Pocket Toolpaths

Rough pocket toolpaths remove a lot of stock quickly. It creates a series
of planar or constant Z cuts, which is a preferred cutting method for
many roughing tools. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath,
Surface Rough, Rough Pocket toolpath.
Surface Rough Plunge Toolpaths

Rough plunge toolpaths rough a part quickly using a drilling-type
motion. Shops that use these toolpaths often invest in special plunge
6
roughing tools.
62
63
64
To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Rough, Rough
Plunge toolpath. You can select one of the following methods to
define rough plunge toolpaths:
65
The zigzag method defines a rectangular grid and the tool
plunges at intervals along it.
The NCI method lets the tool plunge at intervals by following 66
a previously created toolpath.
Surface Finish Parallel Steep Toolpaths

A finish parallel steep toolpath removes material from surfaces that fall
6
between two slope angles, for example, you could create a parallel
steep toolpath to remove material from surfaces that slope between 50
and 90 degrees. A parallel steep toolpath is usually used after a finish
68
69
610
parallel toolpath. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath,

Surface Finish, Finish Parallel steep toolpath.
Surface Finish Shallow Toolpaths

A finish shallow toolpath removes material from surfaces that fall
between two slope angles. The graphic below shows a shallow toolpath
that removes material from surfaces that slope between 0 and 10
degrees. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Finish,
Finish Shallow toolpath.
Surface Finish Pencil Toolpaths

A finish pencil toolpath follows the path where two surfaces meet. It
cleans out material by driving the cutter tangent to two surfaces at a
time. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Finish,

Finish Pencil toolpath.
6
62
63
64
Surface Finish Leftover Toolpaths
The finish leftover toolpath removes material left behind by the larger
tool of a previous operation. It calculates how much stock is left over 65
and uses that information when creating tool motions.
66
6
68
To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Finish, Finish
Leftover toolpath.
Surface Finish Blend Toolpaths

69
Surface blend toolpaths offer powerful machining for surfaces that
require cuts to conform to the part shape. A blend toolpath creates
motion that is defined by curves that you create along the drive 610
geometry. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface

Finish, Finish Blend toolpath.
Note: In the part above, the blend curves are the arcs on either side
of the solid.
Surface Finish Scallop Toolpaths

Use a finish scallop toolpath to create a consistent scallop height over
the whole part regardless of whether the surface becomes steep or
shallow. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpath, Surface Finish,
Finish Scallop toolpath.
Corner smoothing for scallop toolpaths

Mastercam’s standard scallop finish toolpath includes an option to
smooth sharp corners and replace them with curves. Eliminating
sharp changes of direction results in a more even load on the tool and
lets you consistently maintain a higher feed rate.
For example, consider the following mold, where a scallop toolpath

might be used to finish the cavity.
6
62
63
64
65
As the tool moves into the narrow arms of the mold, the toolpath will
contain many sharp changes of direction. The new corner rounding
parameters will replace sharp corners with arcs, resulting in much
smoother transitions and tool motion. 66
6
68
69
610
Figure 6-10: Corner smoothing for scallop toolpaths
These two pictures show the effect of the corner smoothing function. In the top picture, you can see
that as the tool moves into the narrow spines, many sharp corners are created. The bottom picture
shows the same region with corner smoothing turned on. In this case, the Max rounding value was
20% of the stepover.
Corner smoothing is found on the Finish Scallop Parameters tab.

Use the Angle to specify how sharp a change of direction

needs to be for Mastercam to consider smoothing it.
Mastercam will measure the included angle between the
approach to and departure from a calculated tool position. A
6
larger value will increase the number of locations considered
for smoothing but will increase the toolpath processing time.
Use the Max rounding to control how much smoothing to
apply. This is a linear distance that represents the maximum
62
deviation between the original calculated position and the
smoothed toolpath. The actual size of the arc that Mastercam
inserts into the corner is a function of the Max rounding
distance and the included angle. A typical value is 25% of the 63
stepover distance.
The following picture shows how to use Max rounding to control the
smoothing:
64
Smoothed
toolpath
Original
65
toolpath
Max rounding 66
Not every eligible corner will be smoothed by the Max rounding
distance. If the arc created by Max rounding would gouge the part,
Mastercam will attempt to insert a smaller arc. If, after several such
6
attempts, Mastercam does not find a suitable curve, it will leave the
sharp corner unchanged. Also, if there are several sharp corners close
together, Mastercam will reduce the size of the inserted arcs so that the
smoothed segments do not interfere with each other. 68
Because this is a 3D toolpath, the smoothing curve can be either an arc
or 3D spline. If the curve does not lie in the XY, YZ, or XZ plane,
Mastercam will linearize it to ensure that the part is not gouged.
69
Note: The corner smoothing is calculated after Mastercam
calculates the 3D collapse tool motions, but before toolpath
filtering. Since the smoothing curve is linearized, a coarse filter
setting might undo some of the corner smoothing. 610
Surface High Speed Toolpaths

Surface high speed toolpaths are a set of machining strategies that are
specially designed to produce the smoothest, most efficient tool
motions when machining surface models (or solid faces). Mastercam
uses two main techniques to achieve this:
Each cutting pass can be configured with advanced
smoothing techniques to reduce the impact of corners, sharp
angles, and other discontinuities so that you can maintain a
constant load on the tool.
An advanced suite of linking tools lets you optimize the
transitions between cutting passes and the lead in/out to each
cutting pass.
In addition, high speed toolpaths extend Mastercam’s gouge checking
capabilities to include the tool holder. A holder definition page is
incorporated into the high speed toolpath interface, letting you define
custom holder shapes and save them in holder libraries.
Another difference between the surface high speed toolpaths and

Mastercam’s other toolpaths is how they use defaults. Most Mastercam
toolpaths read default values from the .DEFAULTS file for each
operation type. The surface high speed toolpaths, however,
6
dynamically calculate default values based on the selected tool.
Whenever you select a new tool for an operation, Mastercam updates
the toolpath parameters.
All of the high speed features are integrated in the Surface High Speed
62
Toolpaths dialog box (see Figure 6-24 on page 469) where you select a
machining strategy and configure the cutting passes and linking
strategies. It also provides access to many other toolpath options.
This section includes the following topics.
63
“Answers to surface high speed toolpath FAQs” on page 445
“Types of High Speed Toolpaths” on page 447 provides an
overview of each of the ten toolpath types and how you can 64
apply them.
To get started more quickly, skip ahead to “Creating Surface
High Speed Toolpaths” on page 467. It describes the process
you use to select tools and holder definitions, and includes an
overview of the high speed toolpath interface.
65
In “Creating Cutting Passes” on page 476, you will learn how
to apply strategies for cutting your parts.
“Linking the cutting passes” on page 504 explains how to link
and create transitions between the cutting passes.
66
“Other Parameter Pages” on page 513 describes the other sets
of parameters such as coolant, miscellaneous values, and
filtering. Experienced Mastercam users will recognize these
from other Mastercam toolpaths.
6
Answers to surface high speed toolpath FAQs
Can I still use Mastercam’s other surface toolpaths? Why would I use
68
those toolpaths instead of the high speed version?—The surface high
speed toolpaths introduced with Mastercam X are in addition to the
standard surface toolpaths available in previous versions of
Mastercam. There are still many applications where a standard surface
toolpath might be a better choice than a high speed toolpath.
69
Some types of tool motion, such as plunge roughing, are not
supported by or are unsuitable for high speed machining.
If your application (or your machine tool) is not appropriate 610
for the higher feed rates associated with high speed toolpaths,
you might achieve better results with Mastercam’s regular
toolpaths. The surface high speed toolpaths will tend to create

more retract moves, for example.
Mastercam’s regular surface toolpaths might have options and
parameters that are not in the high speed versions, such as
more options for entering / exiting the part—particularly for
roughing toolpaths.
Do high speed surface toolpaths support check surfaces?—Currently,

check surfaces are only supported by some of the toolpath types:
waterline
6
raster
spiral
radial
In your Mastercam configuration file settings, you can choose to
62
automatically use all non-drive surfaces as check surfaces. Because
not all of the high speed toolpaths support check surfaces, this option
should be set to None or Prompt. 63
If you select check surfaces, and then select a toolpath strategy that
does not support them, Mastercam automatically treats the check 64
surfaces as additional drive surfaces. When it does this, you will see the
following message:,
65
66
6
You can find this setting in the Toolpaths page of the System
Types of High Speed Toolpaths 68

The surface high speed toolpaths support both roughing and finishing
operations. The following toolpath types are available:
Table 1: Surface High Speed Toolpath Types

69
Roughing Finishing
Core roughing (page 448)
Area clearance (page 449)
Rest roughing (page 450)
Horizontal area (page 457)
Pencil (page 453)
Raster (page 458)
610
Table 1: Surface High Speed Toolpath Types (Continued)

Roughing Finishing
Scallop (page 456)
Waterline (page 460)
Radial (page 461)
Spiral (page 465)
Core roughing toolpaths

Core roughing toolpaths are designed for machining cores which can
be approached from the outside. They minimize the need for helical
ramp moves or full-width cutting. Core roughing toolpaths are
generated from a set of surface profiles that describe the shape of your
surfaces at different Z heights, plus a set of offset profiles that let you
rough out stock as you approach the part from the outside.
Figure 6-11: Core roughing toolpaths
Core roughing toolpaths are ideal for boss-type parts. On each Z level,
the tool approaches the part from the outside with multiple offset
Core roughing passes can extend horizontally beyond your surface

boundaries by a small distance; this ensures that all the material lying
within the boundaries will be cleared.
Another important feature of core roughing is that Mastercam can
change the machining strategy within the same operation if your part
has, for example, a mixture of bosses and cavities. In these cases,
Mastercam will cut the cavities inside to out (like an area clearance
cutting pass), and machine the bosses from the outside like in the
preceding picture. Use the Minimize burial option on the Trochoidal
motion page to have Mastercam automatically insert trochoidal loops
6
in your toolpath in areas where the tool might be fully buried for
example, in the valley between two bosses.
The top set of profiles is not typically included in the toolpath, since
Mastercam assumes that these lie on the very top of the block. To
62
machine these profiles, set the Minimum depth on the Steep/Shallow
page to a Z height above the top of your part (see page 502).
Area clearance toolpaths 63

Area clearance toolpaths are designed to rough out cavities, pockets,
or other areas that can be most efficiently machined with an inside to
outside toolpath. They are generated from a set of surface profiles that
describe the shape of your surfaces at different Z heights, plus a set of
offset profiles that rough out stock as the tool moves away from the
64
center.
Area clearance toolpaths maximize the amount of time that the tool is
in contact with your part, and can result in significantly fewer retract
moves than a standard pocket toolpath. Typically, the only retract
65
moves will be when the tool is moving from one pocket or cutting
region to another.
66
6
68
69
610
Figure 6-12: Area clearance toolpaths
Area clearance toolpaths are an excellent choice for any parts that need to be machined from the
inside out, like pockets, cavities, and molds. Mastercam creates offset surface profiles at each Z level
and machines them starting with the innermost one. You can create a helical entry or create a ramp
entry parallel to the cut profile.
Area clearance toolpaths share most of the same parameters as core

roughing toolpaths. The major difference is that area clearance
toolpaths cut inside to outside, while core roughing cuts outside to
inside.
Rest roughing toolpaths

The high speed toolpath suite includes a rest roughing strategy.
Instead of calculating roughing passes over the entire drive surfaces,
Mastercam calculates the cutting passes on only the stock left over
from one or more previous roughing operations.
For each area of remaining stock, Mastercam calculates area clearance

cuts, using the same machining strategies as the area clearance
roughing toolpath.
The following pictures show an example of a rest roughing operation.

The part was roughed out with a core roughing operation. The rest
roughing operation cleans out enough stock in the saddle and the
corners so that a finish tool will not encounter an excessive amount of
6
stock.
62
63
64
65
66
6
68
69
610
Figure 6-13: High speed rest roughing operation
Although the entire part was selected for the drive surfaces, Mastercam
limits the cutting passes to only those areas that couldn’t be cut by the
roughing tool. In each area of leftover stock, Mastercam calculates
multiple Z-cuts at a cut depth you specify.
This picture shows the same toolpath using a larger tool—in this case, a
0.375-inch bullnose endmill instead of the 0.250-inch ball cutter used in
the previous picture. Although it still cleans out the saddle and the
boundary around the boss, it stays out of the smaller corners.
Mastercam gives you several options for calculating the stock model:
If the roughing operations are in the same Mastercam file as

the rest roughing operation, you can choose to use all the
previous operations, or you can select one specific operation.
The previous operations do not need to be high speed surface
6
toolpaths; they can be any Mastercam toolpath.
If there is no previous roughing operation, you can choose to
calculate the stock left by a roughing tool whose dimensions
you enter here.
62
You can also select a stock model saved to an STL or other
CAD file. This is especially useful for castings.
High speed pencil toolpaths 63
Pencil toolpaths are used to clean out the corners of a job. The tool
follows a contour defined by the intersection of two or more surfaces.
You can create pencil toolpaths with either single or multiple passes.
High speed pencil toolpaths are similar to Mastercam’s standard pencil
toolpaths, but are enhanced to produce the smoother, free-flowing
64
tool motion and transitions necessary for high speed machining.
Figure 6-14: High speed pencil toolpaths
65
66
6
Use high speed pencil toolpaths to clean out corners and boundaries
between surfaces. You can define the size of the cutting zone by creating
68
multiple offset profiles from the surface boundary.
Select a Cutting method to organize and orient the cuts. You

can choose to create one-way cuts in either direction; zigzag
69
cuts in both directions; or up/down mill.
Control the number of cuts by selecting the Limit # of offsets
option and entering the maximum number of cutting passes
that you want created. When specifying multiple cuts, use the
610
Reference tool diameter as a guide to what the total

machining area will be.
Note that the total number of passes will be twice the number
of offsets, plus one. For example, if you enter 2 for the number
of offsets, Mastercam will actually create five cuts: two cuts on
each side of the boundary, plus one cut along the boundary.
Use the Overthickness and Bitangency angle parameters to
control which areas get machined.
Overthickness lets you calculate the areas to be
machined based on a larger tool size. The amount you
enter here is added to the tool radius to determine the
size of the surface fillets that will be machined. See
“Overthickness” on page 482 to learn more about how
overthickness is applied.
The Bitangency angle lets you control which
intersections are to be machined based on the
sharpness of the angle between them. For best results,
use 165 degrees for the bitangency angle.
Bitangency angle - Toolpaths will only
be created for angle within this range
Surfaces to be machined
Reference tool diameter for pencil toolpaths—When creating a high

speed pencil toolpath, it is important to know the size of the
machining area, so that you can make sure that you are in fact
machining all of the areas that were missed by the roughing tool.
Mastercam calculates a special parameter called the Reference tool
diameter that can help guide you.
This setting is available on the Cut parameters page for pencil
toolpaths when you specify multiple offsets. When you create several
cuts, the area that is machined is a function of several parameters:
the finish tool size
the number of cutting passes
the stepover between passes
Based on the values that you enter for these parameters, Mastercam
calculates the Reference tool diameter. This is the size of the
theoretical roughing tool that would have machined the cutting zone
defined for the pencil toolpath.
Figure 6-15: Calculating the reference tool size for pencil toolpaths
6
62
finish tool radius
stepover 63
# of offsets 64
Reference tool radius Reference tool radius
The picture at left shows how the reference tool size is calculated. (In the dialog box, enter twice
the radius to get the Reference tool diameter.) The picture on the right shows how the
65
theoretical roughing tool defines the machining zone for the finish toolpath. The calculated
Reference tool diameter should be smaller than your actual roughing tool to ensure that the
pencil toolpath finishes all the area left by the roughing tool.
In other words, if the Reference tool diameter is smaller than the

66
actual tool you used for your roughing operation, you can be confident
that the pencil toolpath will reach all of the areas that could not be
roughed. If necessary, consider increasing the number of passes until
it is larger. You could also increase the stepover, or select a larger
6
finishing tool. [
If you manually override the calculated Reference tool diameter with
a different value, Mastercam will adjust the number of offsets to the
proper number. In other words, if you know how wide your machining
68
zone needs to be, you can enter that value in the Reference tool
diameter field and Mastercam will automatically calculate the proper
number of cutting passes. Once you manually override the calculated
value, though, Mastercam will not automatically change it again. 69
This distance is measured from each side of the surface boundaries. In
other words, if the Reference tool diameter is 20mm, the machining
zone will be 40mm wide with the surface boundary in the middle.
610
High speed scallop toolpaths

High speed scallop toolpaths differ from other finish toolpaths in that
the stepover distance is a 3D value which is measured along the
surface, instead of parallel to the toolplane. This ensures a consistent
scallop height across the surface, regardless of the surface direction.
This is an ideal strategy to use on the boundaries generated by rest
machining, or in any circumstances where you want to ensure a
constant 3D distance between passes.
Figure 6-16: High speed scallop toolpaths
Scallop toolpaths are also known as constant stepover toolpaths. Since

the stepover is measured along the surface, the spacing between cuts is
maintained as the surface angle varies, producing a consistent scallop
height across the surface.
Select a Cutting method to organize and orient the cuts. You

can choose to create one-way cuts in either direction; zigzag
cuts in both directions; or up/down mill.
You can express the spacing between cutting passes in terms
of either the Stepover amount or the desired Scallop height.
The two fields are linked so that when you change one value,
the other automatically updates.
Horizontal area toolpaths

Use a horizontal area toolpath to machine the flat areas of your surface
model. Mastercam will create cutting passes at the Z height of each
6
area. For example, in the toolpath shown below, there are two flat
areas: one at the top of the boss, and another at the base. Mastercam
creates a set of cutting passes at each level. The passes within each set
are at the same Z height, but the tool does not cut as it moves from one
area to the other. Mastercam cuts from inside to out within each
62
cutting area.
Figure 6-17: Horizontal area toolpaths
63
64
65
66
Horizontal area clearance toolpaths are used to finish flat areas.
Mastercam creates the same surface profiles as an area clearance
6
roughing toolpath, so they are often a good finishing option for area
clearance toolpaths.
Mastercam analyzes the selected drive surfaces and automatically

68
identifies the flat areas within each surface. This means that you do
not need to create special containment boundaries or other guides to
limit the tool to the flat areas. Even if the drive surface as a whole is not
flat, Mastercam will identify and machine only the flat areas.
Mastercam will automatically calculate the toolpath in such a way that
69
the tool does not exit on a sidewall.
Horizontal area toolpaths act on only completely flat areas (within the
cut tolerance). If a surface has even a small gradient, it will not be
detected. You can adjust the cutting tolerance on the Arc Filter/
610
Tolerance page to control how much deviation from perfect flatness
will be accommodated, or to handle small irregularities in the surface

model.
This toolpath is often used for semi-finish operations, and includes
several parameters to support these applications.
You can specify a number of depth cuts and a stepdown value,
if your part has a large amount of stock remaining.
You can specify an amount of stock to leave on the floor of the
part and on adjacent walls.
You can also use the Minimize burial option to have Mastercam
automatically insert trochoidal loops in your toolpath in areas where
the tool might be fully buried: for example, in the valley between two
bosses.
Because the surface profiles created by this toolpath are equivalent to
the last set of profiles created by an area clearance toolpath, this is
often a good finish option for an area clearance toolpath.
Raster toolpaths
Raster toolpaths are comprised of a set of parallel passes with a
stepover along a line at a set angle. This machining strategy is most
effective on shallow (nearing horizontal) surfaces, or steeper surfaces
that are perpendicular to the angle of the passes.
Figure 6-18: Raster toolpaths
6
62
63
64
Raster toolpaths create parallel cutting passes across the surface. You can
adjust the angle at which the passes are oriented to accommodate
65
different part features.
In the above example, the passes are parallel to the X axis. In the detail
on the right, you can see that the passes are evenly spaced. In the
66
detail on the left, where the surface is at an angle to the cutting pass,
you can see the consistency of the spacing starts to degrade. In these
areas, you can adjust the Machining angle for better results.
Select a Cutting method on the Cut parameters page to
6
organize and orient the cuts. You can choose to create one-
way cuts in either direction; zigzag cuts in both directions; or
up/down mill.
Then, enter values for the Stepover and Machining angle.
68
Unlike scallop toolpaths, the Stepover is a 2D value measured
parallel to the tool plane. Enter a Machining angle that fits
your part geometry.
69
610
Figure 6-19: Machining angle for raster toolpaths
The picture on the left shows a toolpath created with a machining angle of
0 degrees. The picture on the right shows the same toolpath recreated
with a machining angle of 25 degrees. You can see that the cutting passes
are better aligned with the geometry.
Waterline toolpaths
Waterline toolpaths are created from a set of profile curves along the
cut surfaces. The profiles are separated by a constant Z amount. They
are similar to finish contour toolpaths, but use Mastercam’s high speed
toolpath techniques for a smoother, more efficient tool motion. They
are typically used for finishing and semi-finishing operations.
Waterline toolpaths are best suited for surfaces whose angles are
between 30 and 90 degrees. This is because the distance between
passes is measured along the tool axis. Where the surfaces are
shallower, material typically won't be removed as efficiently. However,
you can configure the toolpath to generate extra cuts in shallow or flat
areas.
You can see from the following picture that the passes are nicely
spaced on vertical surfaces, but there are two problem areas where the
surface gets shallower. One is at the neck of the bottle. Here, the
toolpath overlaps on two sides to create a herringbone effect. The
other is where the surface nears a horizontal aspect at the bottom and
the passes are too far apart. Both problems could be avoided, or at
least minimized, by limiting the waterline passes to contact angles
between 30 and 90 degrees and using another, more suitable, strategy
to machine the shallower areas. The Steep/Shallow page in the
Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box lets you control this.
Figure 6-20: Waterline toolpaths
6
62
63
Waterline passes produce best results on steep areas, like the wall of this
64
mold, but are less-well suited for flat areas. Use the Steep/Shallow page
to control the cutting area by surface angle.
65
Use the Cutting method options on the Cut parameters page to
orient the cutting passes. You can select either Climb milling,
Conventional milling, or Zigzag. With Zigzag, each pass is machined
in the opposite direction to the previous pass. A short linking motion
connects the two ends.
66
Radial toolpaths
Use radial toolpaths to create cutting passes that radiate outwards
from a central point. This machining strategy is most effective on areas
6
with shallow curved surfaces and circular areas. Since the stepover
between each pass is a 2D value calculated in the XY plane only, the
cuts might not be appropriate for steep areas. This is especially true
when the steep contour is perpendicular to the cutting direction. In
such areas a waterline or spiral toolpath might produce better results.
68
69
610
Figure 6-21: Radial toolpaths
Waterline passes produce best results on shallow round parts. You

can specify a minimum radius to limit overmachining near the part
center, like in this part. This part also uses a zig-zag cutting motion
which results in high-speed transition loops at the end of each cut.
To define the machining zone, you need to enter the radius of the
circle to be machined, and the coordinates of its center point.
Mastercam will project this circle onto your selected drive surfaces
and calculate the toolpath within this area.
TIP: Right-click in a field to select the radius or center point

coordinate based on geometry in your part file.
Using start and end angles—You can also limit the machining zone by
specifying a starting and ending angle. The start and end angle are
positive values measured from the X-positive axis. The following
pictures show some examples of toolpaths created by different angle

spans.
Start angle = 0
6
End angle = 90
62
Start angle = 80
End angle = 200
63
Start angle = 0
End angle = 360
64
65
Calculating stepover—You can specify the stepover between cutting

66
passes in either of two ways:
entering a 2D stepover distance
specifying a maximum scallop height 6
The two fields are linked so that when you change one value, the other
automatically updates. The stepover is calculated at the outer radius of
the machining zone as entered in the Cut parameters dialog box.
68
69
610
IMPORTANT: The stepover and scallop height are based on

what the cutting pass would be at the radius entered in the Cut
parameters page in the Radii—Outer field:
This is true even if the toolpath never actually extends to this

radius—for example, if the outer radius extends past the
boundaries of your drive surfaces.
Preventing overmachining—One problem that can occur with radial

toolpaths is overmachining in the area when the cutting passes
converge, as shown in these two parts.
In these cases, you can restrict the tool motion by specifying an inner
radius. Mastercam will not calculate cutting passes for the area of the
circle inside this radius.
Spiral toolpaths
Use a spiral toolpath to create cutting passes where the tool feeds into
the part in a continuous spiral instead of several discrete passes at a
6
constant Z height. The spacing between each pass is a 2D distance
measured in the XY plane, so this toolpath type works best on shallow
parts whose features can be effectively machined with a circular
motion. The following picture shows an example of a spiral toolpath. 62
Figure 6-22: Spiral toolpath
63
64
65
66
To define the machining zone, you need to enter the outer radius of
the spiral, and the coordinates of its center point. Mastercam will
project this circle onto your selected drive surfaces and calculate the
6
toolpath within this area. This is different from, say, a waterline
toolpath, in which each cutting pass represents the actual profile of
the drive surface at a particular Z depth. If the center point and radius
of the spiral do not match your drive surfaces, Mastercam will simply
cut that portion of each spiral pass that lies on the drive surface, as
68
shown in the following picture.
69
610
Figure 6-23: Poorly chosen centerpoint for spiral toolpath
Orienting the spiral—Use the Cutting method together with the

Spiral clockwise option to orient the cutting passes. For most
applications, the One way cutting method will cut from the center
point outwards, while the Other way cutting method will cut from
outside in.
Calculating stepover— You can specify the stepover between cutting
passes in either of two ways:
entering a 2D stepover distance
specifying a maximum scallop height
The two fields are linked so that when you change one value, the other
automatically updates.
Creating Surface High Speed Toolpaths
X Follow this general outline to create surface high speed

6
toolpaths.
1 Select Surface high speed toolpaths from the Toolpaths
menu.
2 Select the drive surfaces. You can use any of several different
62
techniques:
Use the General Selection ribbon bar to choose the drive
surfaces.
Press [Enter] to display the Surface Selection dialog box
63
where you can edit the drive surfaces, select a containment
boundary, or choose an approximate start point.
64
65
66
6
Note: This dialog box will appear only if the following option is set 68
in your .CONFIG file (Settings, System Configuration,
Toolpaths properties):
69
Also, check surfaces are supported for only waterline, raster, spiral,
and radial toolpaths.
Mastercam then displays the Surface High Speed Toolpaths 610

dialog box as shown in Figure 6-24 on page 469.
3 Select Roughing or Finishing. Then choose the desired

toolpath type.
4 Use the Tool page to select the tool and to enter feeds and
speeds.
IMPORTANT: When you select or change the tool, Mastercam

automatically updates values on the Cut parameters and
Linking parameters pages, including values you may have
entered manually. Many of the default values on these pages
are associated with the tool selection. After changing a tool for a
surface high speed toolpath, you should also verify settings in
the Cut parameters and Linking parameters pages. See
“Working with HST defaults” on page 756 to learn how to
configure this behavior.
5 Use the Holder page to select or create a tool holder.

Mastercam can gouge-check the toolpath with the tool holder,
or display it while backplotting and verifying.
6 Use the Cut parameters pages to define the cutting strategy
and configure the cutting passes. Cut parameters include all
the settings for when the tool actually comes in contact with
the part.
7 Use the Linking parameters pages to configure the tool
movements between cutting passes. These pages generally
affect tool moves through air.
8 Use the remaining pages to set other operation parameters.
Each one is described in a different section in this guide.
9 Click OK to create the toolpath and add it to the Toolpath
Manager.
Figure 6-24: Using the Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box
Open Tool Manager. Select or change toolpath type. 6
Toolpath
62
settings are
organized in
pages. Pages
with a green
check mark 9
63
have settings
that have Edit or reselect toolpath geometry.
been edited.
64
65
66
Quick View settings summarize key operation
data no matter which page is displayed.
The Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box organizes all of your toolpath settings in one place.
When you select or change the toolpath type, Mastercam changes the list of pages so that it displays
6
only the relevant settings.
68
69
610
X Creating other operations on the same part

The high speed toolpath interface makes it easy to create additional
operations on the same set of surfaces—for example, finishing
operations.
1 In the Toolpath Manager, copy and paste the original
operation to create additional copies.
2 Click the Parameters icon on the new copy.
3 Use the Toolpath Type page to edit the set of drive surfaces or
tool containment boundary. For example, you might limit a
finish pass to only certain surfaces or areas of the part.
4 Select the desired type of toolpath or finish operation.
Mastercam updates the list of pages so that it shows only the
settings relevant to the selected toolpath type.
5 Use the Tool page to select the finishing tool. Mastercam
updates the cutting and linking parameters for the new tool.
6 Edit or update other operation parameters, as necessary.
7 Click OK to save the change.
8 Regenerate the operation.
Selecting Tools and Feed Rates

Use the Tool page to select a tool, edit its properties, and enter feeds
and speeds.
Selecting a tool—Use the large window to select a tool for the
operation. Use any of these techniques:
The window by default displays all the tools that have been
added to or are used in the current machine group. Click on a
tool to use it in the operation.
If the tool you want to use is not displayed, choose Select
library tool. This lets you select a tool from the tool library,
and lets you change tool libraries if you wish.
Use the right-click menu to create an entirely new tool. The
new tool definition will be stored only in the current machine
group unless you choose to save it to a tool library.
When you select a tool, the other fields on the tab update with default
values. You can override any of them by just typing in the desired
values.
Figure 6-25: Surface High Speed Toolpaths
6
62
63
64
65
66
Click on a tool in the large window to use it for an operation. Click Select library tool to get a new
tool from the tool library. The green check mark next to a tool name means that it is used in an
operation in the current machine group, but not necessarily the current operation.
Use the right-click menu in the large window to see many more options for managing feeds, speeds,
6
and tools.
TIP: The Machine group properties tell Mastercam where to

get the default values for many of the parameters. 68
To simplify the display, choose Tool Filter to display only the tools
from the library that meet filtering criteria.
Use right-click menu options to customize the display. If the tools are
69
displayed as a list, click on column headers to sort the list. Reorder
columns by dragging them.
Double–click a tool to edit its tool definition, or use the right–click
menu.
610
TIP: You can select a tool from the library just by entering its
tool number if you have the Search tool library option set in
your Machine group properties.
Feeds and speeds—As soon as you select a tool, Mastercam inputs

default feed rates and spindle speed. You can get the defaults in either
of two ways:
Read them directly from the tool definition.
Dynamically calculate them from the material, operation
type, and tool characteristics.
Use the Machine group properties to tell Mastercam which type of
default you prefer. Use the Feed/speed calculator from the right–click
menu to calculate different values by adjusting the tool and material
characteristics. You can always override all of the defaults by simply
typing in the values you want. You can enter separate values for
plunging into the part or retracting from it, or you can choose to
retract from the part with a rapid move.
The feed rate and spindle speed that you enter here are typically in
effect for the entire operation. However, you can use the Change at
Point function in the Chain Manager right–click menu to change them
for specific moves. (You will learn more about this in “Using the Chain
Manager” on page 740.)
More information on these features is available in the online help
when you click the Help button.
Configuring Automatic Tool Inspection

Use the Tool inspection/change options to force a retract move at set
intervals so that the machine operator can inspect the tool. You can
specify the interval in either of two ways:
the total distance that the tool has cut
the amount of time that the tool has been cutting
Mastercam looks only at the current operation when calculating when
the tool should be inspected.
When the tool reaches an inspection point, it will retract and rapid off
the part to the clearance plane according to the retract settings on the
Linking parameters page. Once the inspection has been completed,
the Linking parameters page settings also determine how the tool
returns to the part.
Implementing tool inspection in the post—To support the tool
inspection feature, a new flag has been added to the rpd_typ$
variable, with the value of 70000. This value will be used only to
indicate a tool inspection stop. Mastercam will write this value to the
NCI file on the final move to the clearance plane. 6
62
63
64
65
66
6
68
69
610
Working with Holders

Holder definitions for mill
and router operations let you
model tool holder geometry
so that it can be used for
gouge checking.
Holder definitions can be
saved to libraries just like tool
definitions, so that they can
be selected for operations.
Holder libraries are stored in
files with a .holders extension.
The holder displays when you
backplot or verify the
toolpath.
Use the Holder page to work
with tool holders. Choose a
holder for the current
operation by selecting it from
the list. You can add holders
to the list in several ways:
Click the Open library button and select a library of holders.
Mastercam replaces the entire list with the contents of the
library.
Define new holders. Click New holder, or right–click in the
window and choose New special holder to create a holder of
a pre-determined type.
When you select a holder, Mastercam displays a preview of its
geometry. Each holder consists of a stack of trapezoidal segments. Edit
the selected holder by clicking on a segment and changing its
dimensions, or click New segment to add a new segment to the
bottom of the holder.
Using holders for gouge checking—Select Use holder for gouge
checking to activate the gouge checking feature. When Mastercam is
calculating the toolpath while this option is active, it will check to
make sure that the holder as defined in the Holder page does not
come into contact with any part geometry.
Use the Holder clearance field to establish the minimum
separation between the holder and your surface model.
When the gouge checking option is turned on, Mastercam

displays the approximate holder clearance zone in red.
6
62
If you are leaving unmachined stock on the walls of your part,

63
the holder clearance should be at least as large as your stock-
to-leave value.
Mastercam displays a warning message if the toolpath was
modified to eliminate possible gouges from the holder. This
64
alerts you that the toolpath might not remove all the stock that
you intend. If the toolpath does not need to be modified, no
message will be displayed.
Regardless of whether you use the holder for gouge checking, the
65
holder is always available for backplotting and verifying the toolpath.
Creating a tool holder

Follow these steps to create a new mill/router holder definition for a 66
high speed surface toolpath and, optionally, save it to a holder library.
X Creating a tool holder

1 If it is not already displayed on your screen, open the Holder
page in the Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box.
6
2 If you want the new holder to be part of an existing library,
click Open library and select the desired library.
The Holders window lists all the holders from the selected
68
library.
3 Click New holder. It is added to the list with a default name.
4 Right-click on the new holder in the list and choose Rename

holder. Type in the desired name for the holder.
69
5 Click New segment. Mastercam displays the topmost
segment of the holder profile, with default dimensions.
6 Edit the dimensions to the desired values.
610
7 Click New segment to add each additional segment. You can

use up to 20 segments to define the holder.
8 If you want to save the new holder in the holder library, click
Save Library. If no library is currently open, you will be
prompted to enter a name and Mastercam will create the
library.
Creating Cutting Passes

The Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box includes three sets of
pages that are used to configure cutting passes. These pages together
describe all the tool motions where the tool is in contact with the part.
Cut Parameters pages are used to configure the tool motion
within each cutting pass.
Transition pages control how the tool enters each cutting
pass.
Steep/Shallow pages let you limit the cutting passes to
specific areas of your part.
For each type of page, Mastercam maintains different versions for each
toolpath type. Each page displays only the options relevant to the
selected toolpath type.
Using the Cut Parameters pages

Mastercam includes several different groups of cut parameters for
specific toolpath features. The different topics listed below describe
how to apply each of them. The Cut Parameters page for each toolpath
type displays only the features that are relevant to the toolpath type, so
not all sections are applicable to all toolpaths.
This section includes the following topics:
“Configuring Z spacing and adaptive stepdown” on page 477
“Cutting methods for surface finish toolpaths” on page 480
“Overthickness” on page 482
“Smoothing toolpaths” on page 484
“Tool containment” on page 485
“XY stepover” on page 487
Not every available cut parameter is described in these sections; click
the Help button on any dialog box page to see detailed information
about each field.
Configuring Z spacing and adaptive stepdown

Use the Stepdown options to configure how Mastercam spaces the
cuts in Z.
6
Figure 6-26: Adding cuts with adaptive stepdown
Stepdown (constant Z)
62
Min stepdown
63
64
Max profile stepover
Use the Add cuts feature to add additional cuts in shallow areas of the part. Use Max profile stepover
to limit the horizontal spacing as the surface gets flatter. Use the Min stepdown value to ensure that
65
too many passes do not get created with very small differences in Z depth.
Mastercam can maintain a constant stepdown between passes, or you

can choose the Add cuts option to configure adaptive stepdown
strategies.
66
6
68
Core roughing, area clearance, and waterline toolpaths all use the
Stepdown value on the Cut parameters page to maintain a constant
Z spacing between cutting passes. However, in areas of your part
69
where the profile is close to flat, maintaining a constant Z spacing can
result in an unacceptably broad distance between cutting passes. Use
the Add cuts feature to insert additional cutting passes in these areas.
Figure 6-26 shows how this works. Each horizontal line is a cutting
610
pass seen from the side, separated by the Stepdown. The picture on
the right shows the additional passes created by Add cuts. Use the Min
stepdown and Max profile stepover values to configure the added
cuts. Mastercam will add enough new cuts to maintain the maximum
profile stepover, while spacing them each by at least as much as the
minimum stepdown.
The Add cuts option will also result in cuts being added to island faces
and similar flats, but the additional cuts are not guaranteed to be at the
exact level of the island. The amount of stock remaining on the island
face could be as much as the minimum step down amount.
IMPORTANT: For most applications, the Max profile stepover

should be greater than the Stepdown. Otherwise, toolpath
calculation time can increase significantly. If you think that your
toolpath is taking too long to calculate, check to make sure that
the Max profile stepover is less than the Stepdown.
Adjusting the rest material stock model

The Rest material page includes a series of options that you can use to
adjust the apparent size of the stock model and the amount of stock to
be machined. The two Adjust… options approximate the effect of
increasing or decreasing the size of the tool used to rough the part.
Choose Adjust remaining stock to ignore small cusps to simulate the

effect of a stock model created from a larger tool. Because the tool is
larger, Mastercam thinks that there is less stock remaining than there
actually is, and so the rest roughing operation is created only in areas
where the tool encounters a relatively large amount of stock. This
decreases the area that is machined.
Figure 6-27: Adjusting the stock model to ignore small cusps
6
62
63
Consider the part shown above, a simple
hemisphere.
• A typical roughing operation would leave
the stock shown in the top-right picture.
64
Large cusps would be left at the top of the
part and smaller cusps towards the bottom.
• A rest roughing operation would machine
each of the cusps as shown in the middle
picture. (A flat tool was used to make the
65
cusps easier to see.)
• Selecting the option to Adjust remaining
stock to ignore small cusps produces
the results shown in the bottom picture.
66
Mastercam ignores the small cusps on the
bottom of the part and machines only the
larger cusps between the red lines. This
technique is ideal for a semi-finishing
operation.
6
The other stock adjustment option (Adjust
remaining stock to mill small cusps) would
not have any noticeable effect on this part, since
the rest material boundary already covers the
entire part and all parts of the model can be
68
easily reached by any tool.
69
Choose Adjust remaining stock to ignore small cusps to simulate the
effect of a stock model created from a larger tool. Because the tool is
610
larger, Mastercam thinks that there is less stock remaining than there
actually is, and so the rest roughing operation is created only in areas
where the tool encounters a relatively large amount of stock. This
decreases the area that is machined.
Choose Adjust remaining stock to mill small cusps to simulate the
effect of a stock model created from a smaller tool. This is a more
specialized strategy than the previous type of stock adjustment. In this
case, because the tool is smaller, Mastercam thinks that there is more
stock remaining than there actually is, and Mastercam creates cuts in
areas that have already been machined. Even though this typically
results in increased air cutting, it can be a useful strategy for certain
applications:
If you are rest roughing a small area, you can use this strategy
to create more room for an entry or exit move.
If the rest material boundary is very irregular, this strategy
might result in a smoother boundary.
Stock adjustment options are not available when you are using a CAD
file as the stock model.
Cutting methods for surface finish toolpaths

High speed scallop, pencil, and raster toolpaths let you select from
several different cutting methods. These determine the direction and
orientation of the cutting passes.
One way—Select One way to machine all the passes in a single default
direction. Mastercam tries to maintain a climb milling orientation
relative to the surface boundaries.
The example below shows a scallop toolpath applied to a surface
which has an outer boundary plus an inner boundary around an
island. Mastercam creates surface profiles which represent the surface
boundaries offset by the stepover amount. The passes are linked so
that they go in a one-way direction, to be climb-milled.
The inner, smaller circular arrow indicates the tool direction

for passes near the island boundary.
The outer, larger circular arrow indicates the tool direction for
machining the outer boundaries.
In this example, most machining occurs in a counterclockwise 6
direction, as the tool works outwards from the innermost profile to the
outside boundary. It then machines around the outer offset of the
inner boundary, working inwards, in a clockwise direction.
The example below shows a typical pencil toolpath. Usually, the inner 62
pass will be a single (open) pass, and the outer passes will form loops.
63
64
Other way—This option organizes the cutting passes in the same basic
manner as One way, but simply reverses the direction, to maintain a
65
conventional milling orientation.
Zigzag—Each pass is machined in the opposite direction to the
previous pass. A short linking motion connects the two ends. 66
6
68
Down mill, Up mill—Select this option to break each pass into
segments such that each piece is machined in a downward or upward
direction. This is especially useful when you are using insert cutters
69
that are restricted to a specific cutting direction. Flat sections can be
machined in either direction; the Cut parameters page lets you
specify a threshold angle to define which areas are considered flat. You
can also specify an overlap distance to ensure that no cusps or 610
unwanted scallops are left in the transition area where several passes
begin in different directions.
Overlap
Cutting pass 1 Cutting pass 2
This picture shows how the overlap distance would be applied to down
milling cutting passes. After down milling Cutting pass 1, the tool
retracts to the start point for Cutting pass 2. When Mastercam
calculates the start point for the second pass, it overlaps the first pass by
the overlap distance.
Inside to out cutting for scallop toolpaths—Mastercam includes an

option that lets you cut scallop toolpaths from inside to out, instead of
just outside to in. This option is available for the One Way, Other Way,
and Zigzag cutting methods.
With the One Way cutting method, cuts from the inside to out are
counter-clockwise. This will mimic climb cutting in most (but not all)
cases. With Other Way, the cuts are reversed to mimic conventional
milling—again, in most, but not all cases.
Overthickness
Overthickness applies only to pencil toolpaths. Typically, Mastercam
will create a pencil pass only where the radius of the filleted material
between two surfaces is less than, or equal to, the radius of the tool.
Use the Overthickness parameter to make the tool seem bigger than it
really is and “force” a cutting pass where Mastercam otherwise would
not create one.
Overthickness is often used when the tool is the same radius (or
nearly the same) as the fillets between the surfaces. In these cases, you
can get a certain amount of chatter in the toolpath, because at any
given point the tool might be seen as slightly larger or smaller than the
6
fillet, depending on the cut tolerance. Using an overthickness value in
these situations can eliminate this effect and result in a smooth
toolpath along the entire region. For this type of application, we
suggest an overthickness value of 10 times the cut tolerance.
62
The pictures below show how overthickness is applied to your
toolpath. Note that it does not result in either gouging or extra material
being left on the part.
Figure 6-28: Applying overthickness
63
The corner radius of the
original tool is smaller
than the surface fillet, so 64
without overthickness, no
cutting pass would be
created here.
65
An overthickness amount
66
is applied to the tool,
increasing its corner radius
to larger than the surface
fillet. 6
Mastercam calculates the
points where the larger
tool would contact the
surface.
68
69
610
The toolpath is projected

back onto the surface so
that the original tool
contacts the surface
properly.
To take advantage of this feature, enter an Overthickness amount in

the Cut Parameters page for high speed pencil toolpaths.
Smoothing toolpaths
Use the Smoothing option to have Mastercam round the corners of
the toolpath. This lets the machine tool maintain a higher feed rate
and reduces wear on the cutter. This feature is often used when
roughing. It lets you remove large amounts of material quickly, without
worrying about the exact rendering of edges.
Figure 6-29: Toolpath smoothing.
Profile/offset tolerance
Max radius
– Original toolpath – Smoothed toolpath
The amount of smoothing is determined by the offset/profile tolerances

and the size of the radius Mastercam is allowed to insert in the toolpath.
The profile and offset tolerance measure the maximum deviation
between the computed toolpath and the smoothed one. Use the profile
tolerance for the outermost profile, and the offset tolerance for the inner
profile.
To use toolpath smoothing, select Smoothing in the Cut parameters

page. Then, tell Mastercam how much smoothing you want. The
amount of smoothing is constrained by the maximum radius that you
enter, and the profile/offset tolerances, which determine the variance

between the smoothed toolpath and the original toolpath.
6
62
Use the Max radius to limit the size of the arcs Mastercam will
create to round the corners. A larger value will result in a
smoother toolpath but with greater deviation from the
63
unsmoothed version.
Use the Profile tolerance to determine the maximum
deviation between the smoothed and unsmoothed toolpaths.
The Profile tolerance is applied only on the outermost profile
64
or cutting pass. The lower the value entered here, the less
material will be missed by the smoothed toolpath.
Use the Offset tolerance in the same way as the Profile
tolerance, but it is applied to all the inner passes. Unlike the 65
Profile tolerance, changing the size of this value does not
result in material being missed. (This value is not used for
waterline toolpaths, since only a single offset profile is
created.)
Because Mastercam first calculates the unsmoothed cutting pass, you
66
need to make sure that the offset tolerance is less than the minimum
XY Stepover on the Cut parameters page. Otherwise, the smoothed
profile of one cutting pass could overlap the unsmoothed cutting pass
at the next profile, and no further material would be cut.
6
Turning on toolpath smoothing often results in more cutting passes
being created, so the actual stepover between each pass will tend to be
smaller.
68
TIP: In addition to the smoothing function on this page, use the
Arc Filter/Tolerance page to eliminate or consolidate multiple,
very small moves for even greater optimization.
69
Tool containment
Use tool containment boundaries to control the tool’s position around
the boundary of your part or the area being machined. Tool
containment gives you an additional measure of control by restricting
610
the tool inside a set of curves.
The tool containment boundary is a closed set of wireframe curves.

The curves do not have to be part of the surfaces that are machined.
For example, you can create custom guide geometry to precisely limit
the tool movements.
You can select tool containment boundaries in either of two ways:
When you are selecting the surfaces to be machined.
From the Toolpath type page.
Use the tool containment options on the Cut parameters page to tell
Mastercam how the tool behaves at the tool containment boundary.
You can choose to limit the tool to the outside of the boundary, or
inside it. The following pictures show how the different containment
options restrict the toolpath.
Inside—Entire tool stays inside the

containment boundary.
Outside—The toolpath is created inside the

boundary, but the edge of the tool can travel on
the outside edge of the boundary.
Center—The boundary limits the center of the

tool.
Finally, for inside or outside containment, you can choose to adjust

the tool position by entering an additional offset distance.
Enter a negative value to ensure that the edge of the tool
6
overlaps the boundary by a small amount.
Enter a positive number to ensure that the tool is completely
clear of the boundary.
The default option is to Add offset distance to tool radius. If you
62
deselect this option, the distance from the center of the tool to the
containment boundary will be the Offset distance that is entered here,
regardless of the tool size. Figure 6-30 shows the difference.
63
TIP: Use the SilhouetteBoundary C-Hook or CreateBoundary C-
Hook to quickly create a boundary curve that you can use for a
containment boundary.
64
Figure 6-30: Offset distance for toolpath containment
65
66
6
Offset distance
Offset distance = Total offset distance

Total offset distance 68
u can offset the tool from the containment boundary in either of two ways. You can enter an offset
stance as an absolute number (left picture), or add it to the tool radius (right picture).
69
XY stepover
Each Z level in a toolpath consists of a surface profile, which is the slice
of curves created by the intersection of the drive surfaces and the tool
610
plane, plus a series of concentric offset profiles that let the tool
gradually approach the surfaces. Use the XY stepover parameters to

configure the spacing between the passes.
The spacing between each profile is determined by the minimum and

maximum XY stepover values. Mastercam will use the largest value
possible (up to the maximum XY stepover) that does not leave
unwanted upstands of material between the passes. However, it will
not separate the passes by less than the minimum stepover.
Generally, if each profile is offset by no more than the tool radius, then
the whole area will be cleared. In certain cases where the profile is very
smooth, it is possible to offset the profiles by as much as the tool
diameter and still clear the area. Obviously, spacing the profiles by
more than the tool diameter will leave many upstands between the
passes, looking somewhat like a maze. Between these two extremes—
the radius and the diameter—there is an ideal stepover where the area
will be cleared leaving no upstands. Mastercam uses an advanced
algorithm to find this ideal value.
IMPORTANT: If you are using toolpath smoothing, make sure

that the minimum stepover is greater than the Offset Tolerance
value and less than the radius of the tool shaft. The maximum
stepover should be less than twice the minimum stepover.
TIP: The XY stepover is a 2D value measured parallel to the

tool plane. If you wish, you can use a scallop toolpath to
maintain a constant stepover measured along the surface.
6
Leaving stock on drive and check surfaces
When specifying how much stock to leave on your drive surfaces,
Mastercam lets you enter separate values for the wall and floor
62
surfaces. This feature is available for both roughing and finishing
operations.
For roughing operations, specify stock to leave for a finishing 63
operation.
For finishing operations, you can use these values to
accomplish specific application goals. For example, when
machining shallow areas, you can use a large stock to leave
amount to keep the tool away from walls. Or you can use them
64
to create a spark gap when machining electrodes.
Note that the stock to leave on walls must be greater than or equal to
the stock left on the floor. The only exception is for horizontal area
finish passes.
65
For surfaces that are not exactly horizontal or vertical, Mastercam will
interpolate between the wall and floor values. When calculating the
toolpath, Mastercam adds the stock to leave amounts to the tool
radius in each direction. The following diagram shows how this is
66
calculated for a part with 3mm stock left on the wall, and 1mm on the
floor.
6
68
69
610
Figure 6-31: Calculating stock to leave for non-flat, non-

vertical surfaces
Actual tool
Calculated Leftover
toolpath stock
Mastercam calculates stock to leave by creating a virtual

tool. It does this by adding the stock to leave amounts to
the actual tool, and then calculating a toolpath. When you
cut the part with the actual tool, it will leave the stock
shown above.
For toolpath types that support check surfaces, the stock left on the
check surface will be the larger of the Stock to leave amount for the
walls or floors.
Minimizing tool burial

Mastercam’s high speed surface toolpaths have been specially
designed for high speed machining and hard milling applications.
Because of this, it is important to detect and avoid circumstances
where the tool is fully buried or is engaging too much material for the
high speed strategies to be safely employed. Select Minimize burial on
the Trochoidal loops page to have Mastercam automatically insert
trochoidal loops in your toolpath in areas where the tool might be fully
buried. This option is available for the following toolpath types:
Core roughing
Area clearance
Horizontal area
Figure 6-32: Minimizing tool burial with trochoidal loops
6
62
63
Loops minimize tool burial in area
between bosses.
64
65
66
6
With Minimize tool burial turned off,
the tool moves straight through the area
with greater than expected tool burial
68
For example, in the part shown at right, you can see the loops that
Mastercam inserts as the tool approaches the area between the two
bosses. As the tool is forced to engage more material because of the
part geometry, Mastercam calculates smaller loops. Hold your mouse
over the picture to see the same toolpath with Minimize tool burial
69
turned off. You can see that the tool will be fully buried as it passes
between the bosses.
Note: Inserting the loops typically results in increased machining time.
If you are confident that a fully buried tool does not pose a problem for
610
your application, you can de-select the Minimize burial option. For
most applications, however, this should be turned on by default, since

Mastercam only inserts the loops if it detects problem areas in the
toolpath.
Configuring trochoidal loops—Use the options on the Trochoidal
motion page to control how Mastercam minimizes tool burial.
Use the Initial loop radius to determine how large the loops
are. Specify the size of the radius as a percentage of the tool
diameter.
Initial loop radius
Use the Stepover adjustment to control the spacing between

the loops. This is specified as a percentage of the Maximum
stepover from the Cut parameters page. This value increases
the amount of material that the tool is allowed to engage
before Mastercam begins creating loops. The default is 0
(zero), meaning that the amount of tool engagement that is
allowed will be no greater than what would be allowed by the
Maximum stepover. Increase this value to create fewer loops.
Fewer loops will result in decreased machining time, but

greater tool burial.
6
62
Expected material
Stepover adjustment
engagement
63
If Mastercam does not have enough room to create loops at
64
the initial size, it will create successively smaller loops. The
Retry loop radius specifies how large each new loop will be as
a percentage of the previous loop.
65
66
Retry loop radius 6
For example, if your Initial loop radius is 16mm, and the
Retry loop radius is 50, Mastercam will create an 8mm loop if
the 16mm loop is too large. If the 8mm loop is too large, it will
68
then create a 4mm loop.
69
610
Use the Minimum loop radius to specify the smallest loop

that Mastercam will create. This is also set as a percentage of
the tool diameter.
Minimum loop radius
If the Minimum loop radius is still too large to fit, Mastercam

will continue the toolpath with no loops. For these segments,
you can specify a Feedrate adjustment to slow down the tool.
Use the slower feedrate to compensate for the greater tool
burial in those portions of the toolpath. This is specified as a
percentage of the value on the Tool page.
Feedrate adjustment
Using the Transition pages

Transition pages typically describe how the tool approaches each Z
level. The strategies are quite different for roughing and finishing
toolpaths.
“Entry moves for roughing toolpaths” on page 495 describes
ramp and helical entry options.
“Entry and transition moves for finishing toolpaths” on

page 496 describes the high speed transition options available
for most finishing toolpaths. 6
“Transition moves for raster toolpaths” on page 499 describes
the more limited options for raster toolpaths, which typically
do not have the same Z transitions as other toolpaths.
Entry moves for roughing toolpaths 62
Use the Transition page to configure the entry move that the tool will
make as it transitions between Z levels. You can choose to create either
a ramp entry, or helical entry move. You can also choose whether to
apply the regular feed rate, or the plunging rate to these moves. 63
The difference between these moves and the approach/retract moves
on the Linking parameters page is that the linking moves connect
multiple cuts on the same Z level, while these moves control the
transition to a new set of cuts on a different Z level. 64
Helical and ramp entries are used by the following toolpath types:
Core roughing
Area clearance 65
Horizontal area
Ramp entry—For entry ramps, Mastercam creates an entry move that
parallels the profile that is being machined, instead of a simple straight
line. Enter a Minimum profile distance that tells Mastercam how large 66
the profile needs to be for the entry ramp to fit. Mastercam will not
create an entry ramp if the length of the profile to be cut is less than
the Minimum profile value. Mastercam will always create a ramp move
so that the ramp length is at least as long as the radius of the tool. 6
The ramp starts at the Z clearance distance above the level of the
previous cut, so that the tool transitions smoothly from the rapid
approach into the stock. The Plunge angle that you enter is a
maximum value; Mastercam will calculate an appropriate angle that
will be no larger than the value you enter.
68
69
610
Figure 6-33: Entry ramp for roughing toolpath
Top of stock left by previous cut

Z clearance
Plunge angle
Minimum profile
Depth of next
programmed cut
Entry helix—You can also choose to create a helical entry to each

cutting level. Enter the desired Radius of the helix; if the profile is too
small to create a helix of this size, Mastercam will create a ramp move
instead. Like an entry ramp, the helix starts at the Z clearance distance
above the level of the previous cut.
Figure 6-34: Entry helix for roughing toolpath
Radius
Top of stock left by previous cut Z clearance
Depth of next Plunge angle

programmed cut
If your control does not support helical arcs, deselect the Output arc
moves option. Mastercam will instead approximate the helix with
many small linear moves.
Entry and transition moves for finishing toolpaths

Use the Transition page to configure the entry move that the tool will
make as it transitions to new Z levels. The difference between these
moves and the approach/retract moves on the Linking parameters
page is that the linking moves connect multiple cuts on the same Z
level, while these moves control the transition to a new set of cuts on a
different Z level. This section applies to all finish toolpath types except
raster and horizontal area toolpaths.
6
Select Tangential ramp to create a true high speed transition
between the cutting passes. Mastercam inserts arcs at the
beginning and end of the ramp for the smoothest tool motion
into and out of the move.
62
63
Front view Side view

64
Select Ramp to move between passes with a straight line at an
angle that you specify.
65
66
Front view Side view
Select Straight to move between passes with a simple vertical

line.
6
68
Front view Side view 69
610
Minimum profile controls for avoiding small pockets

The Transitions page for roughing and horizontal area toolpaths
includes additional controls that let you avoid pockets if they are
smaller than a threshold that you specify.
Use these controls to solve the problem where Mastercam thinks that a
pocket is large enough to accommodate the tool, but the entry move is
so compressed that the tool is effectively plunging into the part.
Use the Skip pockets smaller than field to specify the
smallest pocket that you want Mastercam to consider cutting.
Pockets smaller than this value will be skipped over. A typical
value is 110% of the tool diameter.
Use the Preferred profile length to also define the smallest
allowable pocket, but as a function of the length of the entry
ramp. The Preferred profile length replaces the Minimum
profile parameter from earlier versions of Mastercam.
Mastercam will try to maintain this preference, but this is not
guaranteed. In this case, the Skip pockets smaller than field
serves as a backup by letting you specify an absolute
minimum size that Mastercam will not violate.
Transition moves for raster toolpaths

Use the Transition page to configure the type of transition between
raster passes.
6
Select Smooth to create high speed arc moves between each
pass. Each transition move consists of an arc move into and
out of the transition, plus a spline curve which approximately
follows the boundary.
62
63
64
65
Smooth transition
Select Straight to connect each pass with a simple straight

line. 66
6
68
Straight transition 69
The difference between these moves and the moves on the Linking
parameters page is that the linking moves control how the tool
retracts from the part between cutting passes. For example, when you
have selected a one-way cutting method, and the tool rapids across the
610
part to begin each pass, Mastercam uses the moves in the Linking
parameters page. The moves shown in the pictures above would be
useful for zigzag cutting methods or down/up milling when the end of
one pass is very close to the beginning of the next one.
Using the Steep/Shallow pages

Use the options on the Steep/Shallow pages to limit how much of
your drive surfaces will be machined. Typically these options are used
to create machining passes in steep or shallow areas, but they can be
useful for many different part shapes.
“Using surface angle to create a machining zone” on page 500
describes how to create cutting passes on only those areas of
the part where the surface angle lies between specific values.
For example, to machine only the areas that are flat or almost
flat, you might enter an angle range of 0 (zero) to 2.
Note: The Angle options are not available for roughing or

horizontal area toolpaths.
“Using Z limits to create a machining zone” on page 502

describes how to restrict the cuts to the zone created by
minimum and maximum depth values. For example, if you
enter 10 and 50, the highest cutting pass will be at 10mm, and
the deepest will be at 50mm.
“Using contact areas to create a machining zone” on page 503
describes how to force Mastercam to create cutting passes
only where the tool is actually in contact with a drive surface.
This can eliminate circumstances where Mastercam might
otherwise create cutting passes through air. For example, in a
surface with a boss that is being machined, multiple “cuts”
might be created around the outer boundary where no stock
actually exists.
Using surface angle to create a machining zone
Mastercam lets you limit the toolpath to only areas of the drive
surfaces that lie between a minimum and maximum angle that you
specify. This lets you limit the toolpath to areas that are best suited to
the toolpath type, your part, and your specific machining application.
For example, waterline toolpaths are most effective on steeper
surfaces. This is because the spaces between the passes are calculated
from the stepdown value, and on areas of your surfaces where there is
little change in Z height, the spaces between the passes can be too
large to produce satisfactory results. In the following toolpath, the
machining zone was limited to surface angles between 30 and 90

degrees:
6
62
63
64
Enter the desired range of angles on the Steep/Shallow page. Enter
values between 0 and 90 only; Mastercam will automatically account
65
for the direction of the surface. For example, 30 degree and 150 degree
angles are considered the same. The picture below shows how the
minimum and maximum angles are applied.
Figure 6-35: Using surface angle to limit cutting passes
66
Machining zone
Min angle
Max angle
6
68
69
Note: Surface angle limits are not available for roughing toolpaths
or horizontal area toolpaths. 610
Using Z limits to create a machining zone

Use the Z limit settings to establish the heights of the highest and
lowest cutting passes, regardless of the drive surface geometry. Select
the Use Z depths option on the Steep/Shallow page to apply Z limits,
and then enter the Minimum and Maximum Z depths. You can also
click Depth limits to pre-set the Minimum and Maximum fields with
values from the selected drive surfaces, and then edit as necessary.
Note that Minimum refers to the minimum depth—in other words, the
highest point in your toolpath.
If Use Z depths is not selected, Mastercam will automatically
create cutting passes at all depths on your drive surfaces
(consistent with your other cutting parameters).
Figure 6-36: Using Z limits to define the cutting area
Cutting passes
Cutting passes with Z limits applied
Minimum
Z depth
Maximum
Z depth
You can use a maximum Z depth to prevent the tool from falling
indefinitely if it moves off the edges of the surface. In the example
below, with a maximum Z depth applied, when the tool moves off the
surface, it continues at the maximum Z depth and falls no further.
6
62
63
You can set your minimum Z depth higher than the highest point on
your drive surface to effectively add extra machining height. You can
also set it below the top of your surfaces; for example, when you want
to cut a deep cavity using several separate cutter paths.
64
Using contact areas to create a machining zone
Mastercam’s surface high speed toolpaths include an option to create
cutting passes only where the programmed tool position would
actually contact a surface. This is useful for toolpaths where
65
Mastercam might create cutting passes along unnecessary areas such
as the outside border of a drive surface. To use this feature, select the
Contact areas only option in the Steep/Shallow page. To disable it
and create cutting passes along the entire surface and boundary, select
66
Contact and inside.
The following picture shows a waterline toolpath created with the
Contact and inside option. Cutting passes have been created along
both the central boss and the outer boundary. You can see that the
6
passes along the boundary are cutting only air. (To show this more
clearly, we did not create cutting passes in the flat areas.)
68
69
610
To eliminate the passes along the outer boundary, select Contact

areas only. Mastercam limits the toolpath to the boss, where the tool is
in contact with the surface, and eliminates the air cutting passes.
Linking the cutting passes

Linking strategies are a more advanced application of the gap settings
used in other Mastercam toolpaths. Use them to optimize the
transitions between cutting passes for high speed tool motions and to
control the tool movements when the tool is not in contact with the
part.
There are two sets of pages:
Linking parameters pages let you create the transitions
between passes.
Home/Ref.point pages let you define intermediate points that
are used when the tool is rapiding towards or away from the
part.
Using the Linking parameters pages
Use this page to create the links between the cutting passes. In general,
you can think of linking moves as air moves where the tool is not in
contact with the part, compared to the cutting moves that are
configured on the Cut parameters page. There are several
components to creating the linking moves:
“Retract methods” on page 505 determine how the tool will
move between the end of one pass and the beginning of
another.
“Retracts and leads” on page 508 describes how the tool
moves onto and off of the part at the start and end of each
cutting pass.
“Fitting and trimming high speed toolpaths” on page 510

describes how the entry and exit arcs will be fitted into each
pass. 6
Note: Mastercam will create linking moves only when the spacing
between cutting passes is greater than the Keep tool down within
distance on the Cut parameters page.
62
Retract methods
The Linking parameters page lets you select either of three retract
methods. 63
64
These determine how the tool moves from the end of one cutting pass
to the beginning of the next one.
Minimum distance—Mastercam calculates a direct route from one
65
pass to the next, incorporating curves on/off the part and to/from the
retract height to speed progress. You can specify a minimum height
that the tool must maintain above the part, otherwise the height is
determined by the size of the entry and exit arcs. The pictures below
show a toolpath that uses Minimum distance retract. The red moves
66
show the retract and linking moves. You can see how in a part with an
irregular profile like the one in the picture, this retract method
provides for significantly more efficient tool motion between each cut.
To learn more about how to configure each retract component for this
6
method, see “Retracts and leads” on page 508.
68
69
610
Figure 6-37: Minimum distance retract method
Minimum vertical retract—The tool moves vertically to the minimum

Z height needed to clear the surface. It then moves along this plane in a
straight line, and drops down vertically to the start of the next pass.
The minimum height of the retract is set by the Part clearance.
Figure 6-38: Minimum vertical retract method
Mastercam applies the Lead parameters from the Linking parameters

page to the cutting pass to calculate the base location for each
approach and retract move. These include entry/exit arcs and linear
entry/exit extensions.
Figure 6-39: Parameters for minimal vertical retract
6
rapid move to start of next pass
Linear exit
Part clearance
Linear entry
62
Vertical arc entry
Vertical arc exit
63
Full vertical retract—The tool moves vertically to the clearance plane.
It then moves along this plane in a straight line, and drops down
vertically to the start of the next pass. The height of the move is set by
64
the Clearance plane value.
Figure 6-40: Full vertical retract method
65
66
6
68
69
Mastercam applies the Lead parameters from the Linking parameters
page to the cutting pass to calculate the base location for each
approach and retract move. These include entry/exit arcs and linear
entry/exit extensions.
610
Figure 6-41: Parameters for full vertical retract

Clearance plane
Linear exit Linear entry
Vertical arc entry

Vertical arc exit
The Linking parameters page also includes an option to convert the

rapid move between passes to a feed rate move. You might wish to do
this when the tool needs to make many irregular moves per pass to
jump between different areas of the part. This option is also useful for
older machines which create dogleg moves for rapids. Select Output
feed move and enter the desired feed rate.
Retracts and leads

Mastercam divides the moves that
link cutting passes into a number of
discrete components so that you can
have the maximum degree of control
over them. These are available on the
Linking parameters page.
Figure 6-42 shows the relationship
between the different parameters
when you select the Minimum
distance retract method. Mastercam
divides the move into two zones: to/
from the retract plane, and to/from
the part. Each move is a separate arc.
Curl down is the radius of
the arc as the tool moves
away from the retract height.
Vertical arc entry is the
radius of the arc as the tool
moves toward the part.
Vertical arc exit is the radius of the arc as the tool comes off
the part.
The Linear entry/exit distance extends the entry and exit

vectors.
Curl up is the radius of the arc as the tool moves to the retract 6
height.
Use the Fitting parameters on the Linking parameters page to modify
how the entry and exit arcs are actually applied to the cutting pass.
(See “Fitting and trimming high speed toolpaths” on page 510.) 62
Figure 6-42: Parameters for minimum distance retracts
6. Curl up
1. Curl down 63
5. Linear exit 2. Linear entry
Part clearance (minimum)
4. Vertical arc exit cutting pass 3. Vertical arc entry
64
65
Each numbered element, as well as the Part clearance, corresponds to a
field on the Linking parameters page. The left side of the picture shows
how the tool retracts from the part to the retract plane, and the right side
shows how the tool approaches the part from the cutting plane. 66
Typically, the height of the retract move is determined by the size of the
arcs that you enter. Use the Part clearance to define the minimum
height that the tool needs to maintain over the part. Mastercam will
automatically extend the linear entry/exit moves if necessary to
6
maintain the skim distance.
Note: Waterline and horizontal area finish toolpaths also include

options to create horizontal entry/exit arcs, to ensure that the tool
68
remains clear of sidewalls or other part geometry.
69
610
Fitting and trimming high speed toolpaths

Use the Fitting options on the Linking parameters page to choose
how the entry and exit arcs fit to the ends of the cutting passes.
Machine entire pass—The path of the tool will match the surface,
including vertical surfaces and the corners. An arc will be inserted only
at the end of the pass, and then only if it can be done safely without
hitting the part.
Fully trim pass—In cases where it is important to prevent over-

machining, select the Fully trim strategy. The pass is trimmed back so
the entire arc fits into it, but no nearer than a full machine pass link
would be.
Trimming distance
Minimize trimming—The path of the retract will be as close to the

surface as possible, maintaining a minimum distance from the surface
to fit the arc. 6
Minimum spacing
62
63
Using the maximum trimming distance—Use the Max trimming
distance parameter to limit the amount of trimming applied to non-
horizontal passes. When a lead arc is added to a horizontal machining
pass, the length of pass trimmed off will be at most the radius of the 64
arc. However, when adding an arc to a steep finishing pass, the total
length of pass trimmed—that is, the trimming distance—can be much
greater, as shown in the picture below. To avoid this, the Max trimming
distance limits the trimming distance; if the amount trimmed would
exceed this value, then no arc is used. Instead, the whole pass is
65
machined, and a straight vertical motion is added.
Figure 6-43: Applying maximum trimming distance
66
6
Trimmed
toolpath
68
Original
toolpath
69
Amount trimmed
610
Figure 6-44: Reference points and home positions
Home position
Reference pt – Retract
Reference pt – Approach
Home / Ref. Points page

Use this page to define reference points, a home position, or both.
A reference point is a location that the tool moves to between
the home position and the start or end of the toolpath.
The home position is typically where the tool moves for tool
changes and at the end of the NC program.
You can create separate reference points for approach and retract
moves.
The next move between the reference position and your part is
typically to the clearance plane, as defined on the Linking parameters
page.
Defining a home position—Specify the home position in one of three
ways:
Enter coordinate positions directly in the fields. Enter
coordinate values relative to the current Tplane and Tplane
origin.
Choose From machine to read the home position from the
machine definition.
Click the button to select a point from the graphics

window.
Defining reference positions—First, select Approach or Retract to

enable the reference point feature for that move. If neither type is
selected, the tool will rapid directly from the home position to the first
programmed position in the operation.
6
Second, set the coordinates of each point. Use any of the following
techniques.
Type the coordinate positions directly in the dialog box fields.
62
Use the X-Y-Z check boxes to activate each axis. For example, if
X and Y are cleared and only Z is selected, the tool will rapid
straight up to the specified Z height at the end of the toolpath
with no change in X or Y. 63
Choose From machine to read the home position from the
machine definition. Reference points are stored as part of the
axis combination properties. Each axis combination can have
a different set of reference points associated with it that you
can load here.
64
Click the button to select a point from the graphics
window.
Choose Absolute to set the reference point relative to the origin (0,0,0)
65
or choose Incremental to set the reference point relative to the first/
last move in the toolpath.
Other Parameter Pages 66

The Surface High Speed Toolpaths dialog box also includes several
other parameter pages that let you further customize your operation
and configure it for your machine tool. These are common to all
toolpath types.
6
“Arc Filter/Tolerance page” on page 514 controls the cut
tolerance and lets you filter very small moves from the
toolpath. It also provides a create toolpath fillets option.
“Canned Text page” on page 517 describes how to insert
68
canned text commands that have been defined in your post
processor.
“Coolant page” on page 518 describes how to control the
coolant options that have been defined in the current
69
machine definition.
“Miscellaneous Values page” on page 519 describes how to set
values for custom variables that have been defined in your
post processor.
610
“Planes (WCS) page” on page 520 lets you define the planes in
which the toolpath is created.
Use the“Axis combination page” on page 520 to select an axis
combination for this operation. Axis combinations identify
which components of the machine correspond to each axis in
the current coordinate system.
Experienced Mastercam users will recognize these pages from other
Mastercam toolpaths.
Arc Filter/Tolerance page

Use this page to control toolpath tolerances. Typically, this involves the
following sets of parameters:
Filter ratio and total tolerance—Mastercam is a total tolerance
system, based on the sum of the cut tolerance and filter tolerance and
the ratio between them. For example, you can tell Mastercam to
maintain a 2:1 ratio between the filter and cut tolerance, and a total
tolerance of .003 inches. Mastercam automatically sets the filter
tolerance to .002 inches, and the cut tolerance to .001 inches.
Whenever you change one value, Mastercam automatically updates
the others.
Typically, the ratio of filter tolerance to cut tolerance is 2:1. Using the
total tolerance prevents assigning too large or too small a ratio of filter
tolerance to cut tolerance.
Select Custom to override the preset ratios with your own
specific values for cut and filter tolerance.
Select Off to disable toolpath filtering.
Filter settings—Toolpath filtering lets you replace multiple very small
linear moves—within the filter tolerance—with single arc moves to
simplify the toolpath.
Select the planes in which your control is capable of creating
arcs.
Enter minimum and maximum arc radius values to control
the size of the arcs Mastercam creates in the filtered toolpath.
Toolpath fillets—Select the Toolpath fillet option to have Mastercam
insert an arc of the specified radius in the toolpath at sharp corners.
The radius value that you enter here should be at least as large as the
radius of the finish tool.
Note: The fillets are created as tool motions only. They are not
saved as part of your surface model, and they have no effect on
your part geometry.
6
Filleting toolpaths
Use toolpath fillets to create a toolpath that automatically leaves fillets
at the corners between the surfaces. The fillets are created entirely by
62
the programmed tool motion, and have no effect at all on your surface
model or part geometry. For many parts, this can be much easier and
faster than actually creating the surface fillets in your part geometry.
This feature is available for all surface high speed toolpaths.
63
Figure 6-45: Toolpath fillets
64
65
66
These two pictures show how you can use toolpath fillets to help create the smooth, free-flowing tool
motions needed for high speed machining. The picture on the left shows the original toolpath with no
oolpath fillets. You can see the sharp corners as the tool transitions between part features. The picture
on the right shows the same part with toolpath fillets applied. When creating the fillets, make sure
6
hat the fillet radius is larger than the tool radius.
Note that the fillets are created not only along the direction of the tool
motion, but across it as well. For example, consider a toolpath that 68
69
610
machined the inside corner shown here with a series of waterline

passes down the walls:
With filleting turned off, the cutting passes would look like this:
Top view
Side view
With toolpath filleting turned on, Mastercam would create fillets in

both the vertical corner and along the bottom edges. The cutting
passes would then look like this: 6
Top view
62
63
64
Side view 65
Toolpath filleting can seem similar to toolpath smoothing, but there is
an important difference. Toolpath filleting looks at your part model to
66
calculate the fillets, while toolpath smoothing looks directly at the
calculated tool motion. For example, if you cut a 6mm fillet with a
12mm ball mill, the toolpath will still have a sharp corner. Toolpath
smoothing, on the other hand, would identify and apply an arc to that 6
corner.
To create the fillets, select the Toolpath fillet option on the Arc Filter/
Tolerance page and enter the desired radius of the fillets. The radius
that you enter here should be larger than the radius of the tool. 68
Canned Text page
Use this page to insert canned text commands in your NC program.
Canned text commands selected here will be inserted at the tool
change block for the operation. You can choose to insert the
69
commands either immediately before or after the tool change block, or
as part of it.
610
Note: The canned text commands that are available to you depend
on the current control definition.
To insert commands in your program, follow these steps.
X Inserting canned text commands

1 Click on a canned text command in the left window to
highlight it.
2 Choose Before, With, or After to tell Mastercam where you
want the command inserted relative to the active point or tool
change block.
Mastercam copies the selected command to the proper
window.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to build lists of commands at the desired
locations in your program.
You can add as many commands as you wish to the list, as well as
multiple instances of the same command.
Note: Depending on how the coolant settings for your control and
post are defined, you might also see coolant options included in
the list of available canned text options. If this is the case, selecting
a canned text coolant option here has the same effect as choosing it
in the Coolant page.
TIP: Use the Change at point dialog box to insert canned text
at specific points in the toolpath, other than the tool change
block.
Coolant page
Use this page to turn coolant on or off. The coolant options that are
available to you are defined in the active machine definition. For each
type of coolant, you can set a maximum of two states:
Turn the coolant on, off, or maintain the current state (as set
by a previous operation or point).
Apply the change at the current location/block, before it, or
after it.
Your machine definition might not allow all possible states. For
example, you might be limited to a simple On/Off toggle. You can also
turn on several different coolant options at the same time, if your

machine definition allows it.
Generally, you will be able to turn different coolant options off
6
individually. However, for some machines, the first coolant off code
will turn off all coolant. The coolant section of the machine definition
contains this setting.
62
Note: Each tool definition can include a default coolant selection;
this will be automatically used for an operation if the Use tool’s
step, peck, coolant option is turned on in the Tool Settings tab
of the Machine Group Properties dialog box. 63
Miscellaneous Values page
Use this page to enter values for custom parameters that have been
defined for the current post processor. For each post processor, you 64
can define up to ten variables with (floating point) values, and ten
variables with integer values. You can set the values for them in any of
four ways:
Enter values directly in each field. The values are stored with
65
the operation.
Choose Set to post values to read the default values stored in
the post processor file. You can edit or override the default
values by entering new values here. The values are stored with
the operation.
66
Choose Set to op defaults to read the default values stored in
the .defaults file. You can edit or override the default values by
entering new values here. The values are stored with the
operation.
6
Use the Misc Int/Real page in the Control Definition
Manager to manage the default values and behavior. The
exact appearance of this dialog and the fields that it displays
will vary depending on the selected machine. Choose
68
Automatically set to post values when posting to disable all
the other fields and controls on this dialog box. Mastercam
will disregard all the information from this dialog and will
read the values from the post processor when you post. This 69
lets you use updated values whenever your post processor
changes, without needing to edit each operation. No values
are stored with the operation.
610
Planes (WCS) page

Use this page to set the planes in which your toolpath will be created.
The tool plane (Tplane) is typically the plane normal to the tool axis,
while the construction plane (Cplane) is the plane in which the tool
movements are created. For most applications, these will be the same.
Use the left/right arrow buttons to copy plane
selections and origins to other sections.
Click on the View Selection button to select a
new view for either the Tplane, Cplane, or work
coordinate system (WCS).
You can also use this dialog box to enter a new origin point for
either plane. Type the coordinates of the new origin directly in
the dialog box, or choose the Select button and click on the
desired location in the graphics window.
If you wish, you can also enter a work offset code that will be output
with the operation when you post it.
TIP: You can display the work offset number with the operation
in the Toolpath Manager.
Click the Help button in this page to learn more about planes, WCS, or
using work offsets.
Axis combination page

Use this page to select an axis combination for the current
operation.
Axis combinations are used to identify which components of the

machine correspond to each axis in the current coordinate system.
They are typically needed when a machine tool has several
components that use the same axis; for example, on a multi-spindle

lathe, each spindle uses the Z axis. An axis combination would identify
the set of spindle and turret components to be used in a particular
operation that together define the axes in the coordinate system.
6
Axis combinations are defined and stored with the machine definition.
Every machine definition includes at least one axis combination,
named Default. Typically, only multi-axis/multi-turret lathes require
you to set up additional axis combinations. For most mills and routers,
62
the default axis combination will be sufficient.
If your machine definition has more than one axis
combination defined, they will be as shown above. Each line
lists the name of the axis combination, the components it
63
includes, and the axes that they control. Click on an axis
combination to select it.
If this page only displays a single axis combination, you do not
need to do anything. Mastercam will automatically use the
64
displayed axis combination.
Axis control page
Use this page to configure rotary axis motion for your toolpath. Select
one of three types of rotary motion:
65
Use Rotary axis positioning to index the part to a specified
tool plane. The tool can then move in three axes.
Use 3-axis to rotate the part while the tool axis stays parallel to
66
the axis of rotation. Also called polar conversion, this replaces
linear motion in X, Y, or Z with rotary motion. For example, if
this is enabled about the Y axis, instead of the tool moving
linearly in Y, the part will rotate to the Y-axis position. This is
typically used to machine a toolpath on a face of a part.
6
Use Axis substitution to wrap a toolpath around a cylinder.
The geometry can be either flat or already properly oriented in
3D space (select the Unroll option if this is so).
Once you select the type of rotary motion, select the axis about which
68
the part will rotate.
Before you can create rotary axis motion, you need to properly
configure the rotary axis components in your machine definition. You
will only be able to select rotary axis options which are supported by
69
your machine definition.
610
Note: Mastercam can simulate the rotary axis performance while

backplotting the toolpath. To enable this feature, go to the
Backplot Options dialog box and select Simulate Axis
Substitution or Simulate Rotary Axis.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Multiaxis Toolpaths • 523
Multiaxis Toolpaths
6
Standard Multiaxis Toolpaths
Advanced Multiaxis Toolpaths (page 535)
62
Standard Multiaxis Toolpaths
Multiaxis toolpaths allow freedom of motion in the tool axis rather
63
than restricting tool motion to the Z axis as with other toolpath types.
You can create multiaxis toolpaths when working with 4-axis and 5-
axis machine tools. Based on the selected machine tool, you can
choose a 3-, 4-, or 5-axis toolpath output format, as outlined below.
64
Machine Tool Toolpath Output Format
4-axis
5-axis (except with Swarf,

3- and 4-axis
3-, 4-, and 5-axis

65
Multisurface, Flow, and Port
toolpaths)
5-axis with Swarf, Multisurface,

Flow and Port toolpaths
4- and 5-axis 66
Multiaxis toolpaths require the machine definition to have one rotary
axis for 4-axis output, and two rotary axes for 5-axis output. To enable
the multiaxis toolpath menu selections and toolbar, select a multiaxis
6
machine as the current machine definition.
Then set the output format and other options in the geometry
selection dialog box for the selected multiaxis toolpath type. Each
output format is described below.
68
3-axis: Limits the tool positions to a single vector (direction).
This output type drags the contact point of the tool over the
selected curves. 3-axis does not provide any additional tool
axis control.
69
4-axis: Provides one plane of axis rotation that is
perpendicular to the 4th (rotary) axis. Choose the 4th axis
button in the Geometry selection dialog box to select the axis
about which the 4th axis rotates, or make the 4th axis 610
selection on the Multiaxis parameters tab. For example, to set
the rotary axis A to rotate about X, choose the X axis in the

dialog box. Tool axis control is available for 4-axis toolpaths.
5-axis: Provides tool axis rotation in any plane.
In this section, you will learn to create multiaxis toolpaths using

functions in the Toolpaths, Multiaxis drop-down menu. These
toolpath functions provide you with enhanced flexibility in the
generation of tool axis vectors, the flow of tool movement over surfaces
6
and solids, and the projection of curves, points, or surfaces onto
surfaces or solids.
5-axis Curve Toolpaths 5-axis Flowline Toolpaths

62
(page 527) (page 531)
5-axis Drill Toolpaths 5-axis Port Toolpaths

(page 527) (page 532) 63
5-axis Swarf Toolpaths 4-axis Rotary Toolpaths
(page 528) (page 533)
5-axis Multisurface
Toolpaths (page 529)
64
Note: Generating multiaxis toolpaths for a machine tool usually
requires post processor customization. For more information on
customizing the post processor for a multiaxis machine tool and
control, contact your Mastercam Reseller.
65
Selecting Geometry for 5-axis Toolpaths 66
After selecting a 5-axis toolpath type from the Toolpaths, Multiaxis
menu, you use an interactive dialog box to define parameters, and
then return to the graphics window to select the geometry for the
5-axis toolpath. Although each dialog box is different, they share many
of the same parameters, as illustrated in the examples below.
6
68
69
610
Figure 6-46: Curve 5-axis dialog box
Figure 6-47: Drill 5-axis dialog box
Follow these general guidelines when selecting geometry for a 5-axis

toolpath (not all options may apply, based on the selected toolpath
type):
The Output Format determines which options are available
for geometry selection. Select 3-axis, 4-axis, or 5-axis.
Select the Curve Type or Entity Type, and then select the
geometry for the tool to follow.
Select the method for Tool Axis Control. Mastercam aligns

the tool axis to the selected geometry or a plane.
Choose a Tip Control method to set tool tip compensation. 6
Select the Surfaces to be cut, either the cut pattern or the part
surfaces (Comp to surfaces).
Select Check Surfaces (the areas in the part to be aware of but
stay away from). 62
Note: To edit the geometry selection after creating the toolpath,
double–click the toolpath’s Geometry icon in the Toolpath
Manager. 63
5-axis Curve Toolpaths
Use curve 5-axis toolpaths to cut 3D curves or surface edges. You can
compensate the tool tip to the actual curve, or project the curves onto
64
surfaces. Curve 5-axis supports several methods for controlling the
tool axis through planes, chains, points, or surfaces.
65
66
6
To begin creating this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, 5-
axis Curve Toolpath.
68
5-axis Drill Toolpaths
Drill 5-axis toolpaths allow you to control the tool axis at each drill
position in the operation. The tool tip can be compensated to a
surface, to a projected point along the tool axis vector, or to the entity
69
selected for the drill position. The example below shows a drill 5-axis
610
toolpath using lines and points, where the tool axis vectors are set by
the lines.

axis drill toolpath.
5-axis Swarf Toolpaths

Use a swarf 5-axis toolpath to cut along part walls using the side of the
cutter. The example below shows a swarf 5-axis toolpath with the tool
tip compensated to a plane which defines the floor.
Swarf 5-axis toolpath parameters include an optional fanning option

to allow the tool to be as vertical as possible. The fan distance
determines the minimum distance that the tool travels between the
corner position and a position where the tool is perpendicular to the

cut direction. A larger fan distance creates a wider fan.
6
62
63
axis swarf toolpath.
64
5-axis Multisurface Toolpaths
Multisurface 5-axis toolpaths use a set of pattern surfaces to control
the flow of tool motion and can compensate to a different set of
surfaces. Tool axis vectors can be generated through points, a plane,
65
surfaces, or through a chain of curves. To begin creating this type of
toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, 5-axis multisurface toolpath.
66
6
68
69
610
Figure 6-48: Multisurface 5-axis dialog box
Figure 6-49: Example: Surface Selection

Box cut pattern
(shown with thickness)
Z
Part surfaces selected as
cut surfaces (Comp to surfaces)
X
Front view
In the example below, a box cut pattern was used to generate the flow
of motion and tool axis vectors. Then the tool tip was compensated to
the part surfaces. 6
62
63
64
65
5-axis Flowline Toolpaths
Flow 5-axis toolpaths allow precise control of the scallops left on the
part or constant distance stepovers, creating an exact, smooth finish.
The 5-axis output provides 2 degrees of freedom for the tool vectors in
66
any direction. You can use flow 5-axis toolpaths on a row of adjacent
drive surfaces or on a single surface. The example below shows a flow
5-axis toolpath using a spiral cutting method.
6
68
69
610

axis flowline toolpath.
5-axis Port Toolpaths

Use this specialized toolpath type to simplify the process of machining
a cylinder port, for example, when working with automotive head
porting applications. It eliminates fishtail (butterfly) motion,
preventing gouges that can occur when programming a tool radius
larger than the surface radii.
Port 5-axis toolpaths require the following criteria:

A machine definition with at least one rotary axis
Port surfaces that form a closed shape
Lollipop or ball tool types
You can use two different techniques to machine ports. You can select
pattern and cut surfaces that are identical, with the surface normals
pointing toward the inside of the port. Or, you can apply
compensation to a different set of surfaces than those selected for the
cut pattern. Using the latter technique allows you to create a second
set of surfaces within the port that are compensated to the port
surfaces.
axis Port toolpath.
Based on the geometry and parameters you choose in the Port 5-axis
dialog box and the toolpath parameters you specify, Mastercam
applies the following “order of operations” to create the 5-axis port

toolpath:
Calculates tool positions on the pattern surface
6
Compensates to the port surfaces
Applies point generators
Modifies the tool vectors
Applies axis limits
62
Applies check surfaces
Checks for gouges
63
4-axis Rotary Toolpaths
Rotary 4-axis toolpaths work best on closed surface parts. Like other 4-
axis toolpaths, the tool is kept in a plane that is perpendicular to the
rotary axis. You can select the X, Y, or Z axis about which the rotary axis
64
rotates. For example, to set the rotary axis A to rotate about X, choose
the X axis in the dialog box. In this example, all vectors would be
limited to the YZ plane. Rotary 4-axis toolpaths use only ball tools.
The example below shows a rotary 4-axis toolpath using a rotary cut.
65
66
6
68
To create this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Multiaxis, 4-axis
rotary toolpath. Use general selection techniques when prompted to
69
select Drive and Check surfaces for the toolpath. Then, use the
Toolpath / Surface Selection dialog box to modify and accept your
selections.
610
Figure 6-50: Toolpath / Surface Selection dialog box

Advanced Multiaxis Toolpaths

The Advanced Multiaxis machining option on the Toolpaths menu
provides enhanced 5-axis multisurface machining strategies. This
6
section describes the new multiaxis machining options.
Advanced Interface and Customized Interfaces introduces the
new interface and explains how it is organized for different
applications
62
Creating an Advanced Multiaxis Toolpath on page 537 intro-
duces you to the new toolpath interface and options.
Advanced Interface and Customized Interfaces

63
You can choose to work the advanced multiaxis toolpaths in either of
two ways. One choice is to work with a full interface that gives you
access to all of the available parameters and options. These are
64
organized in several tabbed pages as shown in the following picture.
Figure 6-51: Advanced Multiaxis Toolpaths - full interface
65
66
6
68
69
Or, you can choose from a number of simplified interfaces that have
610
been customized for specific applications and machining strategies.
Figure 6-52: Advanced Multiaxis Toolpaths - custom interface

selection
When you choose a pre-defined interface, Mastercam shows you only

a small subset of the options, organized in a custom, easy-to-use tab.
Figure 6-53: Advanced Multiaxis Toolpaths - custom interface
All hidden options are preset to values appropriate for the selected
application.
Once you are familiar with parameters in the advanced interface, you
6
will find the customized interface easy to learn. You can switch from a
customized interface to the advanced interface by clicking the Switch
to advanced interface button on the Misc tab.
62
However, once you switch from the customized interface to the

63
advanced interface, you cannot return to the customized interface for
that operation.
Creating an Advanced Multiaxis Toolpath

64
The advanced multiaxis toolpaths require
you to load a multiaxis machine in the
active machine group. 65
These toolpaths work on surfaces, solids,
and solid faces. Solid selection is available
for most advanced multiaxis toolpath
strategies, with the following exceptions: 66
Toolpaths that require the selection of a defined edge
(solid edge)
Toolpaths that require the selection of only a single surface
(solid face)
6
When first using the advanced multiaxis toolpath in the advanced
interface mode, you may find it easier to work with one tab at a time.
Begin by generating the tool motion using the Surface Paths tab. Next,
add the tool axis control. From there you can set up roughing and
finishing passes on the Roughing tab, add the linking motion between
68
passes, and then perform the gouge checking.
69
610
X Creating an advanced multiaxis toolpath

1 Choose Advanced Multiaxis from the Toolpaths menu.
2 In the Select User Interface dialog box, choose 5-axis Multi

Surface to open the full user interface for advanced multiaxis
machining. You can also select one of the other options to
open a customized interface for a specific application. These
let you access only a subset of the advanced multiaxis options,
with most of the others preset and hidden. The remaining
steps in this procedure assume that you have selected the full
user interface option.
3 In the Toolpath parameters tab, select a tool and set feeds and
speeds.
4 Use the Surface paths tab to select drive surfaces, set the
general flow of tool motion (Pattern), corner handling,
whether you need the surfaces trimmed or extended, where to
start cutting, and set tolerances for surface finish.
Some pattern types require additional geometry. The
geometry selections displays when you select a pattern. The
following picture shows geometry selection controls.
5 Use the Tool axis control tab to set the direction of the tool
axis, and the method used to tilt the tool axis, and to specify
the tool contact point on the surfaces.
6 Use Gouge check to set up gouge checking on the tool tip,
tool shaft, arbor, and holder. Up to four gouge checking
strategies can be set up for each operation. Also, you can
select different sets of check surfaces (one set per strategy)
and perform gouge checking against the drive surfaces as
well.
7 Use the Link tab to set up tool motion between cutting passes
and to set up entry and exit moves.
8 Use the Roughing tab to define stock, set up plunge moves,

select a pocket roughing method, and set up roughing and
finishing passes using Multipasses and Depth cuts. 6
9 Use the remaining tabs as needed to set other operation
options. These tabs are described in the following sections in
this guide.
10 Choose OK to generate the toolpath.
62
Note: In the Toolpath Manager, you can open the Advanced
Multiaxis dialog box by clicking either the Geometry icon or
Parameters icon for a multiaxis toolpath. 63
Advanced Multiaxis parameter tabs
The following sections describe in greater detail how to use each of the
64
other tabs.
Toolpath parameters tab

The Toolpath parameters tab will be the first tab you see when you
create an advanced multiaxis toolpath. This tab will be familiar to
65
experienced Mastercam users.
For new Mastercam users, choose the Help button to learn more about
selecting a tool and setting feeds and speeds for a Mastercam toolpath. 66
6
68
69
610
Surface paths tab

Use this tab to select drive geometry for an advanced multiaxis
toolpath. Mastercam generates the toolpath on the side of the surface
with the surface normal. If you need to machine the back side of a
surface, change the surface normal. Choose Change normal from the
Edit menu in the main Mastercam window.
Selecting a cut pattern—The Pattern option sets the general tool

movement for the drive surface. Choose the Drive surface button to
select the toolpath surfaces. Use the Drive surfaces offset option to
leave stock on the surfaces for finishing toolpaths. Each pattern type is
described in the following sections. Some of the pattern types require
additional geometry. The geometry selections appear when you

choose the pattern.
6
62
63
Parallel cuts— This option creates a toolpath where the cuts
are parallel. The direction of the cuts is defined by the two
angles. The angles in X, Y and in Z determine the direction of
the parallel cuts of the toolpath. Imagine slicing an apple:
64
parallel slices from top to bottom or from left to right. The
pictures below show parallel cuts at 0 and 30 degrees in XY,
and 90 degrees in Z.
65
66
Select Constant Z to create cuts at parallel depths.
Cuts along curve—This option generates motion that is 90

68
degrees to a leading curve so the cuts do not have to be
69
610
parallel to each other. Use the Lead button to select the curve.
The chain direction defines the cut order or step direction.
Note: If the cuts cross over one another, you may need to change
the shape of the curve.
Morph between two curves—This option creates cuts that

change shape from one curve to a second curve. This option is
suitable for machining steep areas in moldmaking. The more
accurate the leading curves are to the real surface edges, the
more accurate the results.
Parallel to curve—This option aligns the cut direction along a

leading curve. Advanced Multiaxis can handle convex
surfaces, which are common in injection molds and forging

dies. Click Single Edge and select the curve.
6
62
63
Project curves—This option generates a single cut along a
curve projected onto the drive surface. Click the Projection
button and select a curve.
64
65
66
6
Morph between 2 surfaces—Use this option when the drive
surface is located between two surfaces, such as for impeller
68
machining. This option has a few specific requirements:
The tool must be a ball (sphere) endmill.
The Area type has to be set to Full, start and end at
exact surface edge because the distance between the
69
margin and the first cut depends on the exact position
of the surface edge.
To create a double tangency (pencil tracing), you have
to select Calc based on tool center in the Utility tab. If
610
the calculation is not based on the tool center, the

toolpath will be incorrect.
When selecting geometry for the Morph between 2 surfaces
pattern type, you will need to select two check surfaces,
andthen the drive surface. The drive and check surface must
share the same edge. The check surfaces must enclose the
drive surfaces.
To compensate the tool to both the drive and check surfaces

in the left and right corners of the workpiece, you will need to
enter the tool radius as a margin. Choose the Advanced
button in the Area section of the tab. Enter the tool radius for
both the start and end margins. The start margin is applied to
the first check surface and the end margin is applied to the
second check surface.
Parallel to surface—This option creates cuts on the drive

surface that are parallel to a check surface. This option is
useful for creating tool motion that is patterned after an

irregular or wavy check surface.
6
62
63
Choose the Single edge button to select the check surface you
64
want to make the parallel cuts from. Be sure to activate gouge-
checking to make certain that the tool will not cut into the
check surface. The selected Single edge surface becomes the
check surface used in gouge-checking.
65
To add surface margins, be sure that a ball (sphere) endmill is
selected as the tool, and select Calc based on tool center in
the Utility tab.
Cutting area—The Area section of the Surface paths tab controls the
66
following options:
Type —Controls how Mastercam handles surface edges.
Round corners —Finds and removes small radius areas and 6
inside corners in a surface model. Inside corners can cause
“fish tails” in a toolpath. Round corners can also be
considered as a fillet generator. The surface model is rounded
(filleted) in the direction of toolpath slices with a radius to
avoid small radii and inner sharp corners. The applied radius
68
is the main tool radius plus the current stock to leave value.
The fillet generation is independent of tool type and shape. In
most cases, this option is used with a ball cutter, lollipop
cutter, or a conical cutter with ball tip. If you are swarf 69
machining (side cutting), you can also use cylinder or torus
cutters with this option.
Extend/trim —Extends or trims the drive surface. A positive
value extends the surface tangentially to the geometry. A
negative value trims the surface.
610
Sorting—The Sorting section of the Surface Paths tab controls the

order in which cuts are made in the toolpath.
Flip stepover—Toggles between the cutting directions:
Cutting method—Machining can be One way, Zigzag

(bidirectional), or Spiral.
One way cutting has additional options, including
selecting the direction for one way cutting (clockwise,
counterclockwise, climb, and conventional).
Zigzag (bidirectional) requires you to select the cut
order. Mastercam calculates the cut order when you
select Standard.
Spiral machining can be used with all patterns and the
spiral shape is projected back to the original surfaces.
This helps to assure the requested surface tolerances.
The first and last cut is parallel to the surface edge
shape.
Note: Note: Due to the projection, the calculation time for spiral
machining is higher as compared to the other cutting methods.
When machining open geometry, or surfaces that

contain gaps or holes, select the option Enforce cutting
direction (assume closed contours). This option
generates motion so that the geometry seems closed
and makes for more efficient machining. This option is
only available for One way cutting combined with
Cwise or Ccwise direction.
Cut order—In the cut order menu, you can choose between
three options:
Standard sets a default cut order. 6
From center away starts machining in the center of the
surface and progresses outwards.
From outside to center starts machining at the outside
of the surface and progress inwards. 62
63
64
From center away From outside to inside
65
Start point—Lets you select an approximate start point for
the toolpath.
Surface quality—Use the Surface quality section of the Surface paths 66
tab to enter parameters that affect the surface finish.
Cut tolerance—Controls the accuracy of the toolpath. This
value is the chordal deviation of the toolpath against the
surfaces to be machined. A small cut tolerance gives you more 6
tool positions on the drive surface, is more precise to the
surface, and results in better surface quality. However, the
toolpath will take longer to calculate.
Distance—Sets the spacing between tool positions. This
option is useful for flat surfaces. Although the cut tolerance
68
also generates the spacing between tool positions, using
Distance generates more tool positions on flat surfaces.
Setting a small value results in more tool positions.
Maximum stepover—Sets the spacing between two cuts.
69
610
Tool axis control tab

This tab defines the tool orientation relative to the surface normal and
sets machining limit angles. Additional options will display depending
on the the tool axis strategy you select.
Output format—The output format can be set to 3-, 4-, or 5-axis.

For 3-axis output, click the [...] button to define the tool axis
direction.
For 4-axis output, select the rotary axis to be about the X, Y or

Z axis.
Maximum angle step—The Maximum angle step is the maximum
angle value between two toolpath points. Depending on the surface
curvature and this angle, Mastercam may generate more or fewer tool
positions. A smaller angle generates more tool positions while a larger
angle generates fewer.
Tilting strategies—Advanced multiaxis provides numerous strategies

for tilting the tool axis. Some strategies require additional geometry,
such as lines, points, or curves. You can keep the tool normal to the
surface or tilt it relative to the cutting direction.
6
Select the tool tilting strategy from the Tool axis will... list:
62
63
Not be tilted and stays normal to surface—This option

64
aligns the tool axis to the surface normal.
65
66
Be tilted relative to cutting direction—This strategy lets you
set a Lead angle which tilts the tool into the cutting direction. 6
68
69
610
The Tilt angle tilts the tool toward the side of the cutting
direction.
Side tilt definition defines the direction when tilting the tool
axis relative to the cutting direction. Side tilt definition is
used for side milling to ensure contact between the tool and
the surface.
Tilted with the angle—In this strategy, the tool axis is will be
tilted away from the surface normal direction toward the tilt
axis. The tilt axis can be the X,Y, and Z axis, or any line created
in the geometry. Imagine that the tilt axis and surface normal
define a vector plane. The tool can tilt only on this plane.
6
62
63
Tilted with fixed angle to axis—In this strategy, the tool axis
is will be tilted from the tilt axis toward the surface normal.
64
The tilt axis can be the X,Y, and Z axis, or any line created in
the geometry. Imagine that tilt axis and surface normal define
a cone. The tool can tilt only on the cone.
65
66
6
Tilted around axis—In this strategy, the tool axis has the same
direction as the surface normal, but is tilted around an axis.
This axis can be the X, Y, Z or any line created in your
geometry. In the following picture, the tool axis direction is the 68
69
610
same as the surface normal but tilted with a 45-degree angle

around the Z axis.
Tilted through point—In this strategy, the tool axis is always

pointing to a geometry point.
Tilted through curve—In this strategy, the tool axis is aligned

to a curve that you create, or that Mastercam creates for you
(the Automatic curve option under Curve Tilt Type). Click on

Tilt curve and select the curve from the graphics area.
6
62
63
Tilted through lines—The tool axis will be approximated to
the lines you create in your geometry. In the following picture
64
are four lines and the generated toolpath. When the tool axis
passes near the lines, the tilt matches the direction of the line,
and gradually changes until the tool axis aligns with the next
line it encounters in the toolpath. 65
66
6
68
69
610
Tilted from point away—The tool axis is always pointing

away from a point in the geometry. This strategy is the
opposite of tilting through a point.
Tilted from curve away—During machining on your drive

surface, the tool points away from the tilt curve. Depending
on your curve tilt type, the tool orientation and alignment to
the curve changes.
Run tool
This parameter defines the contact point of tool to the drive surfaces.
Mastercam keeps the tool tangent to the drive surfaces.
6
62
63
Auto—The automatic setting causes the tool touch point to

64
move from the tip to the radius when orientation changes
from the tool axis tilt setting. Auto maintains tangency
between the tool and the surface.
At center—When Run tool is set to At Center, the tip of tool is
65
touching the surface contact point.
66
6
68
69
If the tool axis orientation is changed due to tilting options,
the tool will be tilted around the tool tip center point. In this
case, the tool and surface are no longer tangential and the tool
will gouge the surface. To avoid this condition, activate a 610
gouge-checking strategy on the Gouge check tab to retract the

tool from the drive surfaces.
At radius—When Run tool is set to At Radius, the tangency is

maintained at the radius of the tool. For a bull nose tool, the
radius always touches the surface. The tool tip is not used as a
touch point on the drive surfaces.
At front—The option At front, similar to At Center, forces the

tool touch point to be a fixed point on the tool. This point is
the beginning of radius of a bull nose tool in the direction of
tool motion. All changes to tool orientation are made around
this pivot point, and this can gouge the drive surfaces.
Actvating a gouge-checking strategy is critical for this Run
tool option. In the following picture, the front of the tool
touches the surface.
At user given point—Use this setting to select the contact

point on the tool. You enter this point as an offset from the
front and side of the tool. The following picture shows a front
offset of the touch point.
6
62
63
64
65
Limits—Use the Limits option to set a range of tool motion for a rotary
axis that limits the amount of head tilt relative to the tool position.
Tool angle allowed on XZ plane between— Select XZ to limit 66
the tool on the XZ plane between angle b1 and b2.
6
68
69
610
Tool angle allowed on YZ plane between—Select YZ to limit

the tool on the YZ plane between angle a1 and a2.
Tool angle allowed on XY plane between—Select XY to limit

the tool on the XY plane between angle c1 and c2.
Contain tool within conical angles—Use this option to limit

the tool between two angles starting from the toolpath slice
normal vector. Imagine two cones with different opening
angles w1 and w2. The tool axis direction is forced between
these two cones. The orientation of the cones depends on the
cone axis settings. You can set the orientation to X, Y or Z, or to
a user-defined direction.
Note: If you selected Cuts along curve as the Cut pattern in the
Surface Paths tab, you can set the cone axis to Dynamically using
leading curve to limit the tool axis along the curve and its
6
toolpath.
Gouge check tab

The Gouge check tab lets you select up to four gouge-checking
62
strategies. Gouge-checking is supported for all tool types (flat, ball,
conical and bull nose).
Mastercam gouge-checks each calculated tool position. Mastercam
looks at the toolpath and the surfaces to determine whether any of the
63
tool components are gouging the surfaces. You can also select
additional sets of check surfaces.
64
65
66
6
68
69
Status—Use the Status check box to turn on each gouge-
checking strategy. When all strategies are deselected, gouge-
checking is disabled.
610
Check—Each gouge-checking strategy can check against any or all of

four tool components. The following picture identifies the tool
components used in gouge-checking.
Strategy—The Strategy option tells Mastercam what action to take

when a gouge is encountered in the toolpath.
Retracting tool along tool axis—In this strategy, the gouge is
avoided by retracting the tool. In some cases, this strategy may
cause material being left that should be machined. You can
have Mastercam report these areas by selecting Report
remaining collisions. Mastercam will show the tool positions
before retractions and surface points used to calculate the
next position as points. A line is drawn between the two

points.
6
62
63
64
Moving tool away—This strategy assigns the direction in
which the tool has to move away from the check surface.
While retracting the tool, Mastercam uses the smallest
distance to avoid the check surface, but only moves in the
selected direction.
65
66
6
68
69
Tilting tool away with max angle—In this strategy, a gouge is
avoided by tilting the tool. In the picture below, the tool tilts
610
horizontally with a 65 degree angle orthogonal to the surface

normal.
Note: This gouge-checking strategy may take time to calculate. We

recommend using limit angles, tilt angles, and other options for
tool axis control to create a gouge free toolpath, and then use
Report remaining collisions to ensure the toolpath is gouge free.
Leaving out gouge points—This strategy trims the toolpath

when a gouge is detected.
Stop toolpath calculation—In this strategy, Mastercam

creates the toolpath only to the point that the first gouge is
detected. 6
62
63
64
65
Drive surfaces, check surfaces—Select Drive surfaces to gouge-check
the drive surfaces you selected for the toolpath. You can also select
Check surfaces to include with the drive surfaces. Mastercam
supports up to four different sets of check surfaces. You can use the
same surfaces in more than one set.
66
Check gouge between positions—Select this option to check for gouges
between tool positions. The 5-axis sweep move from one position to
the next position is used to check for gouges with drive and check
surfaces. Keeping this option selected is recommended.
6
Link tab
Use this tab to set gap motion and to set entry and exit moves for the
toolpath. Frequently, surfaces that define the part can have gaps and
68
holes. The options on this tab define the tool motion when these gaps
are encountered. For example, small gaps can be ignored and milled
69
610
without retracting the tool, while larger gaps cause the tool to retract to
the rapid plane to avoid the gap.
First entry, Last exit—First entry is the initial approach of the tool
toward the part. You can specify the distance from which the tool will
enter the part and whether or not there will be a simple move or a
macro move. Macro refers to a more complex motion that you can
configure in detail; see “Entry and Exit macros” on page 568 to learn
more.
From clearance area is the default setting. The tool moves
from the clearance area, to the rapid distance, then to the feed
distance before entering the part. Using Rapid distance or
Feed distance moves the start point closer to the part.
Last Exit defines how the tool will exit the part when the
toolpath is finished, and where the part should move to. The
default setting for Last exit is Back to Clearance area. The
tool moves from the drive surface to the feed distance, then to
the rapid distance and finally to the clearance area. If you
select Feed distance or Rapid distance, the machining ends

with this distances.
Click the Clearance Area button to define the area where the 6
tool can travel in the air without hitting the workpiece.
62
63
64
Gaps along cut—If Mastercam detects gaps, you can select how the
tool should pass the gap and continue machining.
65
66
6
68
69
610
Direct—The tool uses the shortest path, a straight line, to the

other side of the gap without retracting and at the machining
feed rate.
Broken feed—The tool retracts along the tool axis to the feed
distance. The tool leaves the surface at the rapid speed and
moves to the next toolpath point at the machining feed rate.
Broken feed and rapid distance—The tool retracts along the

tool axis to the rapid distance. The tool leaves the surface at
the rapid speed and moves to the next toolpath point at the
machining feed rate.
Clearance area—The tool moves to the clearance area at the

rapid speed and returns to the drive surface at the machining
feed rate. 6
62
63
Follow surfaces—The tool follows the geometry and
generates motion that matches the surface as it crosses the
gap. In the following picture, the green surfaces are the drive
surfaces and the red surface is a check surface. The tool
follows the check surface as it passes the gap.
64
65
66
Blend spline—The blend spline connects the drive surfaces
with a toolpath which leaves and enters the drive surfaces
tangentially. The result is a very smooth connecting motion
even on edgy gaps.
6
68
69
Entry and exit macros—Selet this option to customize the
gap motion by creating entry and exit macros. See “Entry and
Exit macros” on page 568 to learn more. 610
Links between slice—This option defines how Mastercam moves the

tool between cuts. Like Gaps along cut, you can specify the size that
defines a small movement as a percent of tool motion, and have
Mastercam made different movement between small and large links.
Mastercam calculates the size difference as a percentage of the
maximum stepover set on the Surface paths tab.
For example, if this value is set to 150% and the maximum stepover
value is 0.1mm the gap threshold is 0.15mm. Mastercam checks all
stepover moves from one toolpath slice to the next slice 0.15 mm and
determines whether the gap is smaller or larger than this value.
As an alternative, you can select As value to have Mastercam define a
small move as the amount you enter, rather than as a percentage of the
maximum stepover.
Links between passes—Select either the Multipasses or Depth Cuts
option on the Roughing tab to enable the Link between passes
options. Select the type of tool movement between passes, or use an
entry or exit macro.
Entry and Exit macros—Use the entry/exit macro parameters to
define the tool entry into or exit from the drive surface. Macros provide
additional motion to the link strategies you have selected for the
toolpath. Selecting a macro as a gap action enables the options shown

in the following picture.
6
62
63
64
Clearance area—Clearance area is the place where the tool can travel
through air without hitting the workpiece. This can be a plane at a
65
given height, a cylinder, or a sphere. The tool travels at the rapid speed
from the clearance area to the rapid distance, and the head turns to its
final orientation. Once the tool reaches the rapid distance, it is in the
correct orientation for the first cut.
66
The options available for clearance area depend on the drive surface
and machining strategy.
Distances—When the tool comes from the clearance area to the Rapid
distance, the head turns to the orientation for the first cut. The tool
6
maintains this orientation from the rapid to the Feed distance. The
feed rate from rapid distance to feed distance is rapid speed.
68
69
610
The Feed distance is usually close to the drive surface. Once

the tool reaches the Feed distance, the speed changes to the
machining feed rate.
The Air move safety distance is a minimum distance

between the tool clearance area and the drive and check
surface.
Roughing tab
Use this tab to define stock and to set up multipasses and depth cuts. 6
62
63
64
65
66
Stock definition—All tool moves in the air that do not remove material
will be trimmed using the stock definition. You can select surfaces
from the part geometry to define the stock, or use the stock setup you
have set up in the Machine Group Properties.
6
Multipasses—Select Multipasses to set up roughing and finishing
passes. The toolpath is machined from the top down. To remove a
large amount of material, select Roughing passes and enter the
number and spacing. If the toolpath will be finishing the part, select
68
Finishing passes and enter the number and spacing of the passes. For
both Roughing and Finishing passes, the spacing is the distance
between each cut.
69
610
Next, sort the passes by slices (vertical layers) or passes (horizontal

layers).
Plunge—Select the Plunge option to move the tool along the tool axis
to the drive surface using a plunging motion. Step length sets the
offset between the plunged holes. Side length sets the depth of the
plunged holes. Plunge height is the depth of the plunge measured
from the tool position on the surface.
Morph pocket—Use Morph pocket to generate toolpaths for simple

pockets.
Move sets the machining direction: outside to inside or inside
to outside.
Stepover sets the maximum distance between two cuts.
Pocket area defines wether you want to machine the whole

pocket, or if you want to stop machining after certain number
of cuts. 6
Number of cuts sets the number of roughing cuts for a morph
pocket. Use this parameter when you do not want to machine
the entire pocket.
Spiral machining changes parallel cuts to a spiral machining
toolpath.
62
Depth cuts—Depth cuts are similar to multipasses. With Multipasses
selected, the toolpath is generated from the top down. With Depth
cuts selected, the toolpath is generated from outside to inside. Use
Roughing passes when you need to remove a large amount of
63
material. If the toolpath will be closer to the final surface, use Finishing
passes to make thinner cuts. Enter the number and spacing (depth)
for both roughing and finishing passes.
Mastercam moves from one pass to the next in the direction of the tool
64
side tilt angle.
Next, sort the cuts by slices or passes.
65
66
Slices Passes
6
68
69
610
The Ramp option changes the slices into one spiral slice. The
tool starts and stops on the same position with or without the
ramp option selected.
Area roughing—This function is only for impeller floor machining.

The result is similar to Morph between 2 Surfaces but in the area
roughing dialog box, you can define a splitter blade, where the tool
works around.
Transform / Rotate—This option lets you choose a direction vector for
the axis around which to rotate the toolpath. Use additional
parameters to:
Choose a base point of rotation.
Set the number of rotations to be applied (steps).
Define the starting angle for the first rotated toolpath, relative
to the non-rotated toolpath position.
Set the rotation angle for each rotation step.
Select a sorting type. You can choose to rotate the whole
toolpath completely, by passes, or by slices. You can also
choose to rotate only a portion of the toolpath, based on a
percentage you specify.
Connect slices by shortest distance—Use this option along with
Multipasses and Depth cuts.
When you select Connect slices by shortest distance, Mastercam will

use the shortest distance to the next cut. The result is a zigzag
machining within each slice. 6
62
63
Utility tab
64
This tab contains special functions for custom applications.
65
66
6
68
69
610
Feed rates—Select Feed rates to use the feed rate optimizer. This
optimizer uses the machining feed rate that you supplied on the
Toolpath parameters tab and modifies it based on the surface
curvature. The surface curvature is calculated at each toolpath
position where the surface contact point of the tool is known.
Calculation based on tool center—With Calc based on tool center
disabled, the tool touch points (yellow dots) and the drive surface are
on the same level.
When you select Calc based on tool center, the tool centers (red dots)
are on the same level.
Axial shift—Axial shift adds an offset to the tool along its axis. This
offset can be positive or negative.
6
62
63
TIP: For engraving applications, use this parameter to set the
depth of cut. 64
Machine definition tab
Thee machine information entered into this tab is used only if you
have the machine simulation module (available separately). These 65
values are not read from Mastercam’s Machine Definition Mananger.
See your Mastercam Reseller for more information about machine
simulation.
66
6
68
69
610
Lathe Toolpaths
With Mastercam Lathe, you can create many different toolpaths for
turning machines, from roughing and finishing inside and outside
diameters to C-axis (mill/turn) programming. Mastercam Lathe also
includes grooving, threading, drilling, facing, and cutoff toolpaths for
all your lathe machining needs.
When you choose a Lathe machine definition from the Machine Type
menu, the Toolpaths menu displays the lathe toolpath types you can
create. This includes a number of mill toolpaths you choose from the
Toolpaths, Mill submenu.
Note: For more information on using Mill toolpath functions, see

“Mill and Router Toolpaths” on page 383.
IMPORTANT: When creating a Mill toolpath with a Lathe

machine definition, you must manually set the tool plane
(Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane). You can use the
Toolpaths, Mill, CView utility or the Planes function in the
Status bar. For more information, see “Using the CView Utility”
on page 598 and “Setting Planes / Views / WCS” on page 206.
In this section, you will learn about the different toolpath types you
can create with Mastercam Lathe, including:
General Turning Toolpaths (page 578)
Mill / Turn Toolpaths (page 593)
Miscellaneous Operations (page 600)
General Turning Toolpaths

Use the following lathe toolpath types in applications where the stock
rotates on a spindle and the tooling is fixed. Typically, these are 2D
toolpaths in which all tool motion takes place within a single plane.
General turning toolpath types include:
Lathe Face Toolpaths Manual Entry

(page 579) (page 585)
TOOLPATH TYPES / Lathe Toolpaths • 579
Lathe Rough Toolpaths Lathe Point Toolpaths

(page 579)
Lathe Finish Toolpaths

(page 587)
Lathe Thread
6
(page 581) Toolpaths (page 588)
Lathe Groove Toolpaths

(page 582)
Cutoff Toolpaths
(page 590) 62
Lathe Drill Toolpaths Quick and Canned
(page 583) Toolpaths (page 591)
Lathe Face Toolpaths

63
Use this type of toolpath to prepare the face of the part for further
machining. Once the face of the part is clean, you can use it to set tools
or determine tool offsets. An example of a face toolpath is shown
below.
64
65
You do not chain geometry to create the toolpath. Instead, choose
Lathe Face Toolpath from the Toolpaths menu and use the Face
Parameters tab to specify how much stock to remove.
66
Note: If you use the stock model for the start and end positions of
each pass and the stock changes, the positions of each pass are
automatically updated when you regenerate the toolpath.
6
Lathe Rough Toolpaths
Rough toolpaths quickly remove large amounts of stock in preparation
68
for a finish pass. Roughing passes are typically straight cuts parallel to
the Z-axis; however, you can set options for plunging into undercut
areas. Standard rough toolpaths also include a semi-finish option, in
which the roughing tool makes a final pass which follows the part
69
contour, like a finish pass.
To create this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Rough
Toolpath. After chaining geometry or selecting points, select a tool.
Then use the Rough parameters tab to select whether the cutting
610
direction is One-way or Zig-zag, and define the toolpath orientation

by choosing one from the Rough direction / Angle drop-down list.
Note: Compared to other types of lathe roughing toolpaths, this

tab offers you the most complete set of roughing options.
Use the pictures as a guide for entering the different toolpath

dimensions. Options on the right side of the tab allow you to select the
type of cutter compensation and complete the toolpath by adding
advanced features such as a semi-finish pass, lead in/out moves, and
toolpath filtering.
Figure 6-54: Example: Lathe Rough toolpath,
Rough parameters tab
Mastercam provides additional lathe rough toolpath types, including:

Quick rough toolpaths, which let you quickly create simple
rough toolpaths with fewer options than standard rough
toolpaths.
Canned rough toolpaths, which use your machine tool's
canned cycles to create the most efficient code.
Canned pattern repeat toolpaths, which create roughing

passes in the shape of the part contour, rather than cutting
parallel to the Z-axis. 6
For more information, see “Quick and Canned Toolpaths” on page 591.
Lathe Finish Toolpaths

Finish toolpaths follow the part geometry, making final cuts on the
62
part and, if applicable, refining the roughing toolpath. Unlike the
quick finish and canned finish toolpaths, when you create a “standard”
lathe finish toolpath, a roughing toolpath is not required.
To create this type of toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Finish
63
Toolpath. After chaining geometry or selecting points, select a tool.
Then use the Finish parameters tab to define the toolpath.
Figure 6-55: Example: Lathe Finish toolpath,
Finish parameters tab
64
65
66
6
68
Mastercam provides additional lathe finish toolpath types, including 69
Quick finish toolpaths, which follow the part geometry,
making final cuts on the part and refining the roughed part.
The Quick finish toolpath function lets you chain a contour or
select an existing rough operation. Finish passes are created
parallel to any OD, ID, or facing contours.
610
Canned finish toolpaths, which cut parallel to the part

geometry, making one final cut on the part and refining the
canned roughing or pattern repeat toolpath. For each canned
finish toolpath you want to create, an existing canned rough
or canned pattern repeat operation must exist in the part.
For more information, see “Quick and Canned Toolpaths” on page 591.
Lathe Groove Toolpaths

Groove toolpaths are useful for machining indented or recessed areas
that are not otherwise machinable by roughing toolpaths or tools.
Mastercam can machine many types of grooves based on the location
of just a corner point or points; this lets you create groove toolpaths
without having to create or chain geometry. You can also use chained
geometry to specify complicated or intricate groove contours.
You can machine several grooves in a single operation, even if their
geometry never connects. Mastercam also integrates roughing and
finishing passes, each with separate parameters, in a single operation.
X To create a groove toolpath:

1 Choose Machine Type, Lathe and select a lathe machine
definition from the drop-down list.
2 Choose Toolpaths, Lathe Groove Toolpath.
3 If Mastercam is not configured to ask for an NC filename

when a new operation is created, skip to the next step.
Otherwise, type the new file name in the Enter new NC name
dialog box and click OK.
Note: See the configuration chapter for more information on

configuring the toolpath manager.
4 In the Grooving Options dialog box choose a method for

defining the grooves (1 or 2 points, 3 lines, chain) and another
for selecting points (manual or window).
5 When prompted, select points in the graphics window using

the specified point selection method.
6 Then, use the Lathe Groove Properties dialog box tabs to
6
define the toolpath, as follows:
a Select and define a tool in the Toolpath parameters tab.
(For more information, see “Selecting a Tool” on page 744.)
b Choose the Groove shape parameters tab to define the
62
shape, angle, and orientation (for example, ID, OD, face) of
the grooves in the toolpath, including automatic
chamfers/radii on corners. You also use the options in this
tab to specify the groove boundaries. Groove shape 63
parameters apply to all the grooves in the toolpath.
c To create roughing cuts for the groove toolpath and set
options for pecking and depth cuts, choose the Groove
rough parameters tab and select Rough the groove to
enable the options in this tab. To create only a finish
64
operation, make sure this option is deselected.
Note: There is no cutter compensation option in the groove rough

parameters tab; internally, the compensation is set to Computer
65
and Mastercam determines the direction.
d To create finishing cuts for the groove toolpath, choose the

Groove finish parameters tab and select Finish groove to
66
enable the options in this tab. To omit the finishing pass
and create only a roughing groove operation, deselect this
option.
7 Click OK to accept the toolpath parameters and close the
dialog box.
6
In addition to the standard groove toolpaths, which include all the
grooving capabilities described above, Mastercam also includes quick
groove and canned groove toolpath types for less-demanding
applications. For more information, see “Quick and Canned
68
Lathe Drill Toolpaths 69

Mastercam Lathe offers several different types of drill cycles for drill
toolpaths. Lathe drill toolpaths typically drill into the face of the part
along the centerline.
610
TIP: To drill off-center or in a different plane, use one of

Mastercam's C-axis toolpaths.
You do not select geometry or drill points in the graphics window to

create a Lathe drill toolpath. Mastercam creates the toolpath entirely
from parameters you set in the Lathe Drill dialog box tabs.
Mastercam offers the following standard drill cycles:
Drill/Counterbore (long) Bore #1 and #2
Peck Drill (long) Misc #1 and #2
Chip break (long) Custom cycle 9 - 20
Tap
The exact list of cycles varies, depending on the active control

definition. You can customize both the drill cycles and how they are
displayed using the Control Definition Manager, Machine Cycles
properties page. You can also use the Control Definition Manager to
define and name custom drill cycles which are added to the list you
can choose from when creating a drill toolpath. Any custom drill
parameters you define for the control definition display in the Lathe
Drill dialog box Custom parameters tab. The post processor used with
the control must also be configured to support canned cycles.
Note: For more information on setting up drill cycles for the

control, see “Machine Cycles” on page 887.
To create a drill toolpath, choose Lathe Drill Toolpath from the

Toolpaths menu to access the Lathe Drill Cycle parameters tab (the
exact name of this tab changes depending on the selected drill cycle).
When you create a drill toolpath, there are three Z-axis dimensions you
must enter in addition to the drill point (the location of the hole).
Depth: How deep to drill the hole.
Clearance: A safe point along the drilling axis to which the
tool rapids before approaching the part.
Retract: The position the tool rapids to from the clearance
point, then feeds into the part.
You can enter these distances as absolute or incremental values.
6
Clearance 62
Depth
Retract
Clearance
Retract
63
Depth
Absolute Incremental
When using absolute, each distance is calculated from the
64
construction origin.
When using incremental, each distance is calculated from the
drill point, or, optionally, from the stock face. 65
Manual Entry
Use this toolpath function and dialog box to create an operation which
does nothing except insert a block of text, comments, or Gcodes into
66
an NC program when you post it. You can store text directly with the
operation, or you can reference an external text file that Mastercam
will read when posting. You can either insert the literal text as Gcode
commands or have them formatted as comments. 6
68
69
610
Figure 6-56: Manual Entry dialog box
To create the operation, first tell Mastercam where to read the text
from. Choose Enter text to type the text right into the dialog box, or
choose Use text file to select an external file which contains plain
ASCII text. If you wish, you can choose one of the Edit buttons to open
the original file or a copy to review it or make changes.
If you have selected a file, you next need to tell Mastercam how you
want to include it. Choose Save in MCX file to save the text with your
part file, or choose Read only when posting if you want to be able to
edit the text without going into your Mastercam file, or if the same file
will be used many times.
Finally, choose how you want the text formatted. You can choose to
format it as comments in your program, or as code to be executed.
IMPORTANT: It is entirely your responsibility to ensure that the

text or codes are appropriate for your control and post processor
and are formatted correctly, and to ensure that your post
6
processor is written to properly handle the comments.
Note: To manually insert text, codes, or commands at specific 62

points within a toolpath or operation, use the Change at Point
dialog box. You might also consider using canned text to create
custom codes or program segments.
63
Lathe Point Toolpaths
Positioning the tool at a specific point or making it follow a series of
specific points is a helpful technique you can use to avoid a fixture or
clamp, or to get the tool into or out of a tight area or an awkward
64
shape. You might also use this type of toolpath to position the tool
between cutting operations.
Lathe point toolpaths let you build a series of tool movements by
selecting a series of individual locations in the graphics window, rather
65
than have the tool follow geometry.
To begin creating a point toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Point
Toolpath and use the Point Toolpath ribbon bar to create the toolpath. 66
Figure 6-57: Point Toolpath ribbon bar
6
an e ak
Ch rat bre
de
mo
ed ith
M ve
Fe d w
ge
up
mo
Ra d
ov
ck
pi
pi
d
Re
Ad
Ra
Ba
When you begin creating the toolpath, you are prompted to select the
68
first point to which the tool will rapid from the home position. To add
additional points, click the locations in the graphics window. Use the
G0 (interpolated rapid / rapid with break), or G1 (feed rate) buttons to
define the type of move before selecting points, or to edit them
afterwards.
69
For each point in the toolpath, you can program the following types of
tool movement:
Rapid: The tool rapids to the new point in a straight line
610
(interpolated in multiple axes).
Rapid break: The tool rapids to the new point, but each axis is
interpolated separately; in other words, first the Z-axis
component of the move is performed, then the X-axis move
(the actual order of the axes depends on the tool orientation
and the direction of movement).
Feed rate: The tool moves to the new points at the
programmed feed rate (G1).
Change mode: Changes the type of motion to a particular
point when editing a point toolpath. First select the button for
the desired type of motion (Rapid, Rapid break). Then choose
Change mode and click on the point to change. You can select
more than one point. Press [Enter] when you have finished
selecting points.
Use the Back up button to delete points and back up to the previous
point. Click OK when you finish selecting the points.
Use the Toolpath parameters tab to select a tool, coolant, and set
other toolpath options. To achieve the desired tool motion, try
disabling the reference points feature (deselect the Ref points check
box).
Lathe Thread Toolpaths

Use this toolpath type to create spiral shapes on a part to make a screw,
bolt, or nut. You can program straight or tapered threads on the
outside, inside, or face of a part.
A threading toolpath is typically the last toolpath performed on a lathe
part because of the need for accuracy. A threaded part has to fit
precisely into another part. You can program threads on the OD
(outside diameter) or ID (inside diameter) to secure parts to each
other.
Mastercam provides several thread tables with hundreds of pre-
defined thread sizes. You can also calculate your own thread sizes for
non-standard diameters using pre-defined thread formulas.
With Mastercam, you do not select geometry to create a thread
toolpath. It is created entirely from the thread parameters you enter.
Choose Lathe Thread Toolpath from the Toolpaths menu. Choose a
tool, then use the Thread shape parameters and Thread cut
parameters tabs to define the thread toolpath.
Figure 6-58: Lathe Thread Toolpath,

Thread shape parameters tab
6
62
63
64
65
In the Thread shape parameters tab, there are three main parts to the
parameters you define:
Thread form geometry: Select the dimensions from a thread
66
form table; compute them from a formula, or just enter the
values directly into the fields.
Thread orientation: Program threads on the ID, OD, or face/
back. You can also enter a taper value, or cut threads from the 6
other side of the X-axis by selecting the proper options. The
guide pictures update as you make different selections.
Thread allowance values: Choose these from a table, or enter
the values directly. 68
TIP: To preview the thread geometry in the graphics window,
choose Draw geometry. You can also use the picture in the tab
to verify your selections. 69
Use the Thread cut parameters tab to enter toolpath and cutting
parameters for a thread toolpath.
610
Figure 6-59: Lathe Thread Toolpath,

Thread cut parameters tab
Cutoff Toolpaths
Cutoff toolpaths vertically cut off pieces of the part, such as sections of
bar stock. When you choose Toolpaths, Lathe Cutoff Toolpath, you do
not chain any geometry for the cutoff toolpath. Instead, you select the
point where the part is cut off. Then select a tool and use the Cutoff
Parameters tab to define the toolpath.
Figure 6-60: Lathe Cutoff Toolpath,

Cutoff parameters tab
6
62
63
64
65
In the following example of a cutoff toolpath, the dotted line shows the
toolpath. The boundary is marked with a circle.
66
6
68
Quick and Canned Toolpaths
Mastercam provides special types of toolpaths for turning
applications: quick toolpaths for simple parts and canned toolpaths,
which take advantage of your machine tool's canned cycles.
69
Notes:
• Canned toolpaths are machine- and control-dependent. To
610
create canned toolpaths, the control definition used with the
selected Lathe machine type must allow the corresponding

canned cycles. You set these parameters in the Control
Definition Manager, Machine Cycles properties page. For more
information, see “Machine Cycles” on page 887.
• The post processor used with the control must also be
configured to support canned cycles.
Quick toolpaths—The Toolpaths, Lathe Quick menu includes quick

rough, finish, and groove toolpaths, which let you create simple
toolpaths by entering only a few parameters.
Quick rough toolpaths: Coarsely cuts the part geometry in
preparation of a finish toolpath. Choose this toolpath type to
quickly create a simple roughing operation and do not need
Mastercam's more advanced roughing features.
Quick finish toolpaths: Useful for placing finish passes on an
uncomplicated part where you do not need all of Mastercam's
more advanced finishing options. You can chain geometry for
this toolpath or simply select an existing roughing operation.
Quick finish toolpaths are also associative.
Quick groove toolpaths: Creates simple, symmetrical grooves.
Quick groove toolpaths offer you a subset of Mastercam's
grooving options.
Canned toolpaths—Use functions in the Toolpaths, Lathe Canned
toolpath menu to create very efficient NC programs using your CNC
machine controller’s canned cycle programs. Another benefit of
creating canned toolpaths is that you can change the toolpath by
editing canned cycle parameters at the control level using the Control
Definition Manager, instead of recreating the NC program. Mastercam
Lathe canned toolpath types include:
Canned rough toolpaths: Creates a roughing toolpath based
on your machine tool control's canned cycles. For example, a
Fanuc-compatible post would typically output a G71.
Canned finish toolpaths: Creates a finish pass for a canned
rough or pattern repeat toolpath which is based on your
machine tool control's canned cycles. For example, a Fanuc-
compatible post would typically output a G70 for this
toolpath.
Canned groove toolpaths: Use canned groove toolpaths to
machine a groove using your machine tool control's canned
cycles. For example, a Fanuc-compatible post would typically
output a G75.
Canned pattern repeat: Creates a roughing toolpath in which

the cutting passes follow the part contour. Each cutting pass
offsets the contour by a stepover percentage which you
control. Use this toolpath type when the stock to be removed
6
is similar to the shape of the part contour and a regular
roughing pass would cut mostly air. The code produced by
this toolpath is based on your machine tool control's canned
cycles. For example, a Fanuc-compatible post would typically
62
output a G73.
Notes:
• Using canned toolpath types results in a very compact NC
63
program, but you do not have access to all of Mastercam's
features for the selected toolpath type (roughing, finishing,
grooving, and pattern repeat).
• The canned toolpath dialog boxes display only those parameters 64
that are supported by your machine controller’s canned cycle
programs.
• Use the Lathe canned cycles section in the control definition to
configure which canned cycles will be available and which
toolpath features will generate canned cycle output.
65
• If canned cycle output is not enabled, Mastercam will generate
“long-hand” output; in other words, individual Gcodes for
every positioning and cutting move. 66
Mill / Turn Toolpaths
Mill / turn toolpaths use “live” tooling in which the tool rotates in its
6
own spindle. The part can be stationary in the chuck or the part
spindle can be programmed as a rotary axis (C-axis). You use tool
planes (Tplanes) to specify how the tool is oriented with respect to the
part. 68
Mill / turn machines come in two styles: C-axis and Y-axis.
The C-axis machine, which is more common, provides linear
motion in the X and Z axes and rotary motion around the C
axis.
69
Y-axis machines support the C-axis motion and have an
additional linear axis that allows the milling tool to move
above and below the spindle's center line.
In this section, you will learn how to create the following mill/turn
610
toolpath types.
C-axis Contour Toolpath Types
C-axis Contour Toolpaths Creates a rotary toolpath that wraps

(page 594): around the spindle axis.
C-axis Cross-contour Cuts parallel to the spindle axis, for

Toolpaths (page 595): example, to cut a slot lengthwise on
the part.
C-axis Face Contour Machines chained geometry or a

Toolpaths (page 596): contour on the face of a part.
C-axis Drill Toolpath Types
C-axis Drill Creates a rotary axis drill toolpath that

Toolpaths wraps around the spindle axis (axis
(page 596): substitution).
C-axis Cross Drill Drills from the side towards the centerline
Toolpaths or off-center.
(page 597):
C-axis Face Drill Drills on the face of the part parallel to the
Toolpaths centerline, but not necessarily on the
(page 597): centerline.
C-axis Contour Toolpaths

Use C-axis contour toolpaths to cut geometry which wraps around a
cylinder. To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis
Toolpaths, C-axis Contour Toolpath. A typical application would be to
cut text on a round part. Mastercam sets the tool plane (Tplane) and
construction plane (Cplane) to the top. This way, the tool is placed
perpendicular to the spindle axis, which is the axis of rotation.
Choosing this toolpath sets the default cutter compensation to Off so

that the center of the tool follows the chained geometry. (You can
override this, as necessary.) 6
Mastercam
creating a C-axis
contour toolpath
62
63
C-axis contour toolpaths automatically set the rotation type to Axis
substitution around the Z axis. This gives you the choice of chaining
either flat geometry which will be rolled around the cylinder, or
geometry which is already properly positioned in 3D space.
64
To access the Rotary axis dialog box, choose the Rotary axis check box
and button in the Toolpath Parameters tab for most toolpaths. If the
geometry is already properly positioned, select the Unroll option. If
the geometry is flat, deselect this option. Flat geometry should be in the
65
Top Cplane at a Z-depth of 0 (zero).
C-axis Cross-contour Toolpaths

Use cross-contour toolpaths to cut parallel to the axis of rotation.
66
These toolpaths are most often used to cut slots. Mastercam sets the
tool plane (Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane) so that the tool is
placed perpendicular to the axis of rotation (typically, the part
spindle). To create this toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis
Toolpaths, Cross Contour Toolpath.
6
The following picture shows a cross contour toolpath which cuts slots
along the outside of the cylinder. The tool cuts the slot by following the
single straight line in the middle of each slot. 68
69
610
Note: Choosing this toolpath type also sets the default cutter
compensation to Off so that the center of the tool follows the
chained geometry.
C-axis Face Contour Toolpaths

Face contour creates a toolpath on the face of the part with the tool
parallel to the axis of rotation. Mastercam automatically sets the tool
plane (Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane) to the side so that the
tool is placed perpendicular to the face of the part. To create this
toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, Face Contour
Toolpath.
The following picture shows a face contour toolpath. The dotted line
represents tool movement.
Set the rotation type to C-axis in the Rotary Axis dialog box to produce
polar-conversion output for a C-axis lathe, or select Y-axis rotation to
produce X-Y-Z coordinate output.
C-axis Drill Toolpaths

Use C-axis drill toolpaths to drill holes perpendicular to the part's
spindle axis, as when drilling holes in a cylinder. To create this toolpath
type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, C-axis Drill Toolpath. You
can choose points which are already in their correct 3D positions
around the Z axis, or you can choose points which are in the top
construction plane and let Mastercam roll them around the axis of
rotation. The toolpath is then created by converting the X coordinate
of each point in the top Cplane to an angle about the Z axis. The
position is determined by the rotary axis diameter entered in the
Rotary axis dialog box. The resulting toolpath is then displayed in its
rolled state.
If the points are already in their correct 3D positions, you must choose
the Rotary Axis button in the C-axis drill dialog box and check Unroll.
Even if the points lie in different planes, you can select all the points
that you want to drill at the same time without having to specify the
6
tool plane for every hole.
Note: C-axis drill toolpaths are similar to C-axis cross drill

toolpaths. The difference is how they produce the rotary motion.
62
For more information, see “Comparing C-axis Drill and Cross-drill
C-axis Cross Drill Toolpaths

63
Use these toolpaths to drill holes perpendicular to the part’s spindle
axis, as when drilling holes in a cylinder. Mastercam uses the side tool
plane (Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane) so that the tool axis
will be perpendicular to the axis of rotation. To create this toolpath
64
type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, Cross Drill Toolpath.
Cross drill toolpaths also let you choose arcs instead of points to
identify the drill points. When you select arcs, the drill point is the arc
center point and the drilling direction is the arc normal. Select arcs
65
instead of points when you are drilling off-center, because Mastercam
will use the plane of the arc as the Tplane.
Comparing C-axis Drill and Cross-drill Toolpaths 66

C-axis drill toolpaths and C-axis cross-drill toolpaths are both used to
drill perpendicular to the axis of rotation, but they each use different
rotary axis parameters.
When creating a C-axis cross-drill toolpath, use the side
6
Tplane and select a rotary axis in the Rotary axis dialog box to
create the rotary axis codes (Y-axis or C-axis).
When creating a C-axis drill toolpath, create the toolpath in
the top Tplane and use axis substitution. This gives you the
flexibility to select either points that are properly positioned
68
in 3D space around the rotation axis, or point that lie in the
top plane. Select the Unroll option if the drill points are
already properly oriented, or deselect it if the points are in the
top plane.
69
C-axis Face Drill Toolpaths
Face drill toolpaths allow you to drill holes in the face of the part.
Because this toolpath uses live tooling on a stationary part, you can
drill holes that are not on the centerline.
610
Depending on how the post processor is configured, this toolpath

typically outputs a mill drill cycle such as G81, whereas a regular lathe
drill toolpath outputs a lathe drill cycle such as G99. To create this
toolpath type, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, Face Drill
Toolpath.
When selected, Mastercam sets the Tplane and Cplane to the side so
that the tool is placed perpendicular to the face of the part.
Using the CView Utility

Many C-axis toolpaths automatically set the Tplane and Cplane for
you. However, mill toolpaths do not. Use the CView Utility function
and dialog box to set Tplanes and Cplanes for these toolpath types.
X To run the Cview utility:

1 Prior to creating a mill toolpath, from the Machine Type
menu, select a lathe machine definition that supports this
type of toolpath.
2 From the Mastercam menu, choose Toolpaths, Mill, Cview
utility.
3 In the Cview dialog box, use the following procedure to define
the toolpath orientation:
a In the C-axis Milling Type section, set the general

orientation of the toolpath. This selection determines the
Tplane. 6
Choose Cross if the toolpath will move along the side or
along the length of the part.
Choose Axis substitution to wrap the toolpath around
the part. 62
b In the Construction Plane (Relative to Tplane) section,
define how the Cplane will be oriented relative to the
Tplane:
Choose Parallel to set the Cplane equal to the Tplane. 63
Choose Perpendicular or Swiss to set the Cplane to
either of the two planes perpendicular to the Tplane.
For example, for Cross milling—which sets the Tplane
to Back—the Perpendicular option would set the
Cplane to Top. Swiss would set it to Left, which is the
64
other perpendicular plane.
c Choose an Initial Angle Adjustment to rotate the part so
that a particular section or face is aligned to the Tplane/
Cplane that you have selected. Choose the Select button to
65
return to the graphics window and select an entity.
Select a point to rotate the part so that the tool plane is
normal to an imaginary line drawn from the point
perpendicular to the X-axis.
66
Select a line to rotate the part so that the Tplane is
normal to an imaginary line drawn from a point along
the selected line to the X axis. The imaginary line is
perpendicular to selected line and the X axis.
6
Select an arc to set the Initial Angle normal to the arc's
plane.
TIP: Choose Display to temporarily close the dialog box and 68

view a representation of these settings in the graphics window.
The tool displays its orientation in the Tplane; the white
rectangle represents the Cplane. Press Enter to exit the display
and return to the Cview dialog box. 69
4 Click OK to accept the settings and exit the dialog box.
5 To begin creating the toolpath using the orientation you have

defined, choose Toolpaths, Mill and select a Mill toolpath
type.
610
IMPORTANT: The Tplane and Cplane orientation you set with

the CView utility function remains in effect until you change it,
either by using the Planes function in the Status bar, or by
choosing a toolpath type from the Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths
menu. These toolpath types have a pre-defined orientation that
is automatically set.
Miscellaneous Operations
You use miscellaneous operations to manipulate the stock and
program the movements of peripherals like tailstocks, chucks, and
steady rests. These toolpaths might output M-codes or G-codes. You
can program miscellaneous operations only for peripherals that are
supported by the active machine definition.
Lathe Stock Transfer Lets you program operations on the

operation: opposite side or back of a lathe part in the
same Mastercam file.
Lathe Stock Creates an operation that repositions the

Advance operation: stock in the spindle or controls a bar
feeder.
Lathe Stock Flip Outputs a comment and program stop in

operation: the NC code, which lets the operator
manually remove the stock and reposition
(flip) it in the chuck. You can program
stock flip operations on the opposite side
and back of a lathe part in the same
Mastercam file.
Lathe Chuck Creates an operation that will clamp,

operation: unclamp, and reposition the chuck.
Lathe Tailstock Creates an operation to reposition the

operation: tailstock.
Lathe Steady Rest Creates an operation that repositions the

operation: steady rest.
Choose from the following operation types:
Stock Transfer Chuck Operations

Operations (page 601) (page 604)
Stock Advance Tailstock Operations

Operations (page 602)
Stock Flip Operations

(page 605)
Steady Rest Operations

6
(page 603) (page 606)
Stock Transfer Operations 62

This toolpath type lets you program operations on the opposite side or
back of a lathe part in the same Mastercam file.
Figure 6-61: Lathe Stock Transfer Properties dialog box 63
64
65
66
6
IMPORTANT: Before programming a stock transfer operation,
you must first use Stock Setup in the Toolpath Manager to
define the stock and chuck boundaries. Define stock only for a
68
single spindle; Mastercam cannot create the transfer operation
if stock has been defined for both spindles. The sub-spindle
does not have to be defined in Stock Setup, but if it is not, it
cannot be simulated in the backplot function. 69
To create a stock transfer operation, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Misc
Ops, Lathe Stock Transfer. In the Lathe stock transfer tab, use the
following process to create an operation which transfers the stock to a
chuck on the other spindle.
610
Transfer the geometry—Choose the Transfer geometry option. This

creates a copy of your part geometry aligned with the repositioned
stock. (The original geometry is left unchanged.) Choose the Select
button to return to the graphics window and select the specific entities
or chains that you want to copy. You can specify a different level for the
new geometry, as necessary.
Locate the stock—Enter the original and new positions for the stock.
You can select the locations, or choose From stock back face to
automatically use the back face of the stock as currently calculated by
Mastercam. The point you choose does not have to be on the face of
the stock. You can choose any convenient reference point.
Control the chucks—Use the Main Spindle Position section to enter
the location of a reference point on the chuck which is currently
holding the stock. Enter the current location and the location to which
the chuck will move after the stock has been picked-off or Select the
locations.
Then, enter the coordinates of a reference point of a chuck on the sub-
spindle which will be receiving the stock. Enter its current location,
and the location where it will pick-off the part. The relationship
between this Z-coordinate and the current stock location determines
how much of the stock will be clamped. If you choose the Get dia.
from stock option, Mastercam automatically calculates the current
stock diameter at the Z coordinate you enter for the pick-off position.
The final location of the chuck after it picks off the part is determined
by the Transferred Position you specify for the stock.
Move the coordinate system—Choose Construction Origin or Tool
Origins to relocate the coordinate system to the new spindle. Select
the desired “Move...” option and Z position of the source and
destination locations.
Stock Advance Operations

To create a stock advance toolpath, choose Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe
Stock Advance from the Toolpaths menu. Use the options in the
Lathe Stock Advance Properties tab to create a stock advance
operation that repositions the stock in the spindle or controls a bar
feeder.
Figure 6-62: Lathe Stock Advance Properties dialog box
6
62
63
64
TIP: If the current bar feeder is not capable of measuring how

65
far it has advanced the stock, use the Toolpath parameters tab
in this dialog box to select a tool used to stop the stock from
advancing or to pull the stock to its new position.
66
Stock Flip Operations
Stock flip operations output a comment and program stop in the NC
code, which lets the operator manually remove the stock and
6
reposition (flip) it in the chuck. To program operations on the opposite
side or back of a lathe part in the same Mastercam file, choose
Toolpaths, Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe Stock Flip. Use the Lathe stock flip
tab to enter parameters for the new operation. 68
69
610
Figure 6-63: Lathe Stock Flip Properties dialog box
Chuck Operations
Use this operation to clamp, unclamp, or reposition the chuck. This
lets you take advantage of the automatic clamping and unclamping
features on your machine. Mastercam’s collision avoidance features
prevent the tool from making a move into the chuck.
IMPORTANT: To create a chuck operation, you must first

define the chuck in the Toolpath Manager Stock Setup tab.
Also, the machine and control definition must support the
operation.
To create a chuck toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe

Chuck. Use the Lathe chuck tab to enter parameters for the new
operation.
Figure 6-64: Lathe Chuck Properties dialog box
6
62
63
64
If your machine has two spindles, select the active spindle for
the operation.
Select the type of operation. You can create operations to 65
clamp, unclamp, or move the chuck.
Enter the original and final positions of the chuck, or choose
the Select button to select the locations from the graphics
window. 66
To restrict the chuck's movement to X-axis moves only, choose
the Diameter only option. This is especially useful for Swiss
machines where the chuck moves in Z instead of the tool.
Tailstock Operations
6
Use this operation to reposition the tailstock.
IMPORTANT: To create a tailstock operation, the tailstock must

68
already be defined in the Toolpath Manager Stock Setup tab and
the machine and control definition must support the operation.
To access the Lathe Tailstock Properties tab and define the operation,
69
choose Toolpaths, Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe Tailstock.
610
Figure 6-65: Lathe Tailstock Properties dialog box
In the Operation section, select Advance or Retract to indicate

whether the operation is moving the tailstock towards the part or
pulling it away. Mastercam automatically advances or retracts the quill
based on your selection.
Then, enter the original and destination positions of a reference point
on the tailstock, or choose the Select button to select the locations
from the graphics window. If you have created a stock model and
drilled a 60-degree center hole in the face, choose the Auto option to
automatically position the tailstock in the hole.
Steady Rest Operations

Steady rest operations allow you to use the automatic steady rest
repositioning features on the machine. Mastercam’s collision
avoidance features prevent the tool from making a move into the
steady rest.
IMPORTANT: To create a steady rest operation, you must first

define a steady rest in the Toolpath Manager Stock Setup tab.
Also, the machine and control definition must support this type
6
of operation.
To create an operation that repositions the steady rest, choose

Toolpaths, Lathe Misc Ops, Lathe Steady Rest use the Lathe steady
62
rest tab to define the operation.
Figure 6-66: Lathe Steady Rest Properties dialog box
63
64
65
66
Enter the original and destination positions for a reference point on
the steady rest. You can choose Select to return to the graphics
window and select the locations if you wish. The point you choose can
6
be any convenient reference point on the steady rest.
68
69
610
Nesting Toolpaths
Nesting is the process of fitting multiple copies of a part within a
boundary (material sheet) for best yield. Parts can be nested next to
each other or even within each other to provide the most efficient use
of the material. Mastercam Nesting is an add-on to other Mastercam
products, such as Mastercam Router, Mill, and Wire.
You can choose to nest geometry or toolpaths. You can bring in
geometry from a file or chain it in the graphics window. To use
toolpaths for nesting, they must already be defined in the current part
file.
Nesting provides several methods for defining sheets of material. A
sheet definition consists of the sheet geometry, length and width
dimensions, quantity of that sheet to be used in the nesting session,
position of the lower left corner (origin), and the grain direction. Each
material sheet you define can be used in the current nesting session.
You can also save the sheets to a nesting sheet library file (.NSL) for
reuse.
Both geometry parts and toolpath parts can be added as clusters. A
cluster is a collection of parts that are nested as a single unit and
maintain their spatial relationship with each other.
The parts in a nesting session or operation can lie at different Z depths.
Nesting generates the session at the current Z (construction) depth.
The Nesting add-on to Mastercam provides two modes of operation:
Rectangular and TrueShape.
Rectangular nesting places a bounding box around the part
and uses the box as the part boundary for nesting.
Rectangular nesting supports a subset of the TrueShape
TOOLPATH TYPES / Nesting Toolpaths • 609
nesting functionality and is provided with Mastercam Router

Entry and Router Pro.
6
62
63
64
65
66
6
68
69
610
TrueShape nesting extends nesting functionality beyond

Rectangular nesting by creating interlocking copies of
different parts to provide maximum material usage. The
graphic below shows a part (geometry only) nested with
TrueShape nesting. Copies of the part or toolpath are fitted
together using the part shape, a rotation angle, reversing the
copy (mirror), and other parameters. With TrueShape Nesting,
Mastercam nests the parts or toolpaths within the sheet
boundary regardless of its shape, allowing you to use irregular
shaped sheets.
Note: TrueShape nesting is a separately-purchased option for

Mastercam Design, Router, Mill, and Wire. For more information,
contact your local Mastercam Reseller.
X Use the following guidelines to create nesting operations:

1 In Mastercam, create or import the geometry or toolpaths that
define the parts you want to nest.
2 Create or open a nesting session by choosing Xform, Xform
Geometry Nesting (geometry-based nesting) or Toolpaths,
Toolpath Nesting (toolpath-based nesting).
3 In the Nesting dialog box, choose material sheets by selecting
or defining them.
4 Select or create nesting parts based on chained geometry
(imported from a file or selected in the current Mastercam
file), or from predefined toolpaths selected in the Toolpath
Manager.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Nesting Toolpaths • 611
5 Set nesting parameters.
6 View and refine nesting session results.
7 Save the nesting session, sheets and parts, as necessary.

6
Nesting Tips and Guidelines
Save common sheet sizes to nested sheet libraries (.NSL files)
62
or in individual MCX files.
To create as many sheets as needed to accommodate the
number of parts, choose Create necessary quantity in the
Sheets tab.
63
Save common parts to nested part libraries (.NPL files) or in
MCX files.
When you are satisfied with the nesting results, save the
nesting session to create a .NST file you can reuse. The .NST
64
file contains part information and nesting session parameters.
When you require a controlled number of each part in the
nesting session, create a group.
To read a detailed report about the nesting results, choose
65
Details in the Nesting Results dialog box.
When you nest a part that contains a block drilling operation
and allow it to rotate to a new orientation on the sheet,
Mastercam automatically creates a single block drilling
66
operation for the entire sheet. This allows you to regenerate
the block drilling operation, as necessary. If the nested part
contains two sheets of material with block drilling operations
on both sheets, two block drill operations are added. Each
6
new block drilling operation is inserted in the Toolpath
Manager directly above the nesting result.
68
69
610
Engraving Toolpaths
When creating Engraving toolpaths, you can define roughing,
finishing, and remachining operations. Engraving generates a
contour-like finish pass as part of the roughing operation.
TIP: Although engraving toolpaths do not require roughing,

you can use roughing to clean out cavities as an alternative to
pocketing.
X Use the following general steps to create an engraving toolpath:

1 Choose a router machine definition from the Machine Type
menu.
2 Select Toolpaths, Engraving toolpath.
3 Select an appropriate tool, such as an engraving bit or

chamfer bit, and set tool parameters.
4 Choose the Engraving parameters tab to set the clearance,
retract plane and feed plane heights, machining depth and
direction, top of stock, and the amount of stock to leave for a
finish pass. You can also set the toolpath to roll around sharp
corners, wrap a toolpath on a curved surface, filter points
from the toolpath for smoother motion, specify the number
and type of depth cuts, and remachine the toolpath.
Note: If you use a flat cutter to machine out a cavity and plan to
remachine the corners, you can enter an Angle for flat cutter
offset that offsets the tip of the straight (flat) bit to match the V-
groove tip position. This ensures that the roughing operation does
not gouge the engraved edge.
5 In the Roughing / Finishing parameters tab, define the

roughing, finishing, or remachining operations for the
toolpath. You can select from several roughing methods or
patterns. The one you choose depends on the shape of the
part. Use Parallel spiral and Clean corners on round parts;
Zigzag and One way for rectangular parts. You should also
use One way if the material has a grain that you want to cut
only in one direction.
TOOLPATH TYPES / Engraving Toolpaths • 613
Note: The rough cutting methods are unavailable when you create
an engraving remachining operation. Remachining toolpaths
always use the zigzag cutting pattern.
6
6 Click OK to accept the toolpath parameters and close the
dialog box.
62
Engraving Tips and Guidelines
Engraving requires closed boundaries and a V-groove tool,
such as an engraving bit or chamfer bit.
63
Inner boundaries are islands you can emboss by selecting
Rough in the Roughing/finishing tab.
To remove material from a cavity, use an engraving roughing
toolpath and a straight (flat) bit. In the Engraving parameters
64
tab, enter an Angle for flat cutter offset that matches the tool
you selected. Set the XY stock to leave value to leave material
for the finish pass. After creating the roughing operation,
reselect the geometry and create an engraving toolpath to 65
carve the geometry with the selected tool.
When creating a roughing operation for engraving, set the
Tolerance in the Roughing/Finishing tab to a value smaller
than the XY stock to leave value (specified in the Engraving
parameters tab) but larger than the default. A looser tolerance
66
will reduce the size of the NC program. After creating the
roughing operation, reselect the geometry and create a
remachining operation to clean up areas of material left by the
roughing operation.
6
An engraving remachining toolpath uses a smaller tool to
remove material that cannot be removed by the roughing tool,
and then makes a finish pass. You can calculate the material to
be removed either from the previous operation or from the
68
dimensions of the roughing tool.
Note: If you use a previous operation to calculate the remaining

stock for an engraving remachining operation, you cannot
rearrange the operations later in the Toolpath Manager.
69
610
chapter 7
Working with Surfaces
and Solids
This chapter provides information on Mastercam functions
and concepts that are required to create more complex parts.
You will find information on:
Displaying Surfaces and Solids . . . . . . . . . page 616
Surface Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 622
Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 650
Displaying Surfaces and Solids

You can display both surfaces and solids in two ways:
wireframe (unshaded)
shaded
Figure 7-1: Example: Wireframe and shaded display options
The following additional options that appear in the Shading toolbar

area available for Solids only:
dimmed wireframe
no hidden wireframe
outlined shaded
Figure 7-2: Shaded examples
Shaded with outline Shaded with hidden lines removed

WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Displaying Surfaces and Solids • 617
X To display surfaces and solids as wireframes:

Choose the Wireframe button on the Shading toolbar (if
shading a solid, choose Dimmed Wireframe or No
7
Hidden Wireframe).
X To set the parameters that control shading for the current

Mastercam session:
Choose the Shade Settings button the Shading toolbar,
72
or choose Screen, Shade Settings. For more
information, see “Shading Settings” on page 618.
X To shade surfaces and solids:

73
Choose the Shaded button from the Shading toolbar (if
shading a solid, choose Outlined Shaded ), or choose
Screen, Shade Settings, and select Shading Active.
74
TIP: Press [Alt+S] to toggle shading on or off. This shortcut key
does not affect the type of shading, nor the wireframe outline
setting.
756
X To set the default shade settings:
Choose Settings, Configuration, Shading. You will learn more
about this in ““Shading Settings” on page 618”. 7
78
79
710
7
Shading Settings
Shading settings control the appearance of shaded surfaces and solids.
The Shading Settings dialog box provides this control. Choose Screen,
Shade Settings to open the Shading Settings dialog box:
Figure 7-3: Shading Settings Dialog Box
Activate or deactivate
shading; shade all entities
or only selected entities.
Define or edit material

appearance.
Select “Mouse dynamics”

to move shaded images;
deselect to move
wireframe images.
Define characteristics of
and turn on/off spot lights.
Define the angle between

radial display lines used to
represent the surfaces of
closed, circular solids.
Entity Selection
You can shade all surfaces and solids in the current job or only selected
entities.
X To shade all entities:

1 Choose Screen, Shade Settings.
2 Enable both Shading active and All Entities.
X To shade only selected entities: 7

2 Enable Shading active and disable All Entities. Mastercam

prompts you to select entities for shading.
3 Select entities.
72
4 End selection to shade the selected entities.
TIP: If you want to shade all surfaces of a three-dimensional 73

object, make sure you select all surfaces.
Colors 74
To control the shading color, choose Screen, Shade Settings, and
then:
To use the color of the entity as the shading color, choose
Entity color.
756
To select a shading color from the color palette, choose Select
color. The current shading color displays. To change it, choose
the Colors button, and then select a color from the palette.
To use a material color, choose Material, and then select a
7
material from the list. You can create or edit material color
settings using the Material dialog box.
Defining Material Colors
You can define shading colors that simulate materials. Several
78
standard material definitions are provided (brass, bronze, chrome,
copper, gold, silver, various colors of plastic and rubber). You can edit
the standard materials and create new ones.
The material color definitions consist of amounts of red, green, and
79
blue for each of three kinds of light: ambient, specular, and diffuse. You
can also define a shininess value.
X To define material colors for use in shading:

710
2 Make sure Shading active is enabled.
3 In the Colors group box, choose Material. 7

4 Choose the Materials button.
a To edit an existing material, choose the material from the

list, and then choose Edit Material.
b To create a new material, choose New Material.
5 Enter the desired values and name.
Parameters
Note: Shading active must be enabled to set these parameters.
To set the tolerance used to calculate shading, enter a Chord

height. A smaller chord height results in smoother shading.
You can control how Mastercam moves the shaded image
during dynamic rotation. To maintain a shaded appearance
during rotation, enable Mouse dynamics. To rotate images as
wireframes and reapply shading after rotation has ceased,
disable Mouse dynamics; this option permits faster display of
complex surfaces.
You can make shaded entities translucent, which allows you
to see through them so that entities behind them are partially
visible. Enable Translucent to display them this way.
Lighting
Mastercam provides many lighting options that allow you to create
shading effects:
Ambient light is diffuse light shining onto the entity from all
directions.
Spot lights are directional lighting. Spot lights can
simulate the diffuse light from a light bulb, or a
focused cone of light from a conventional spot light.
You can light the entity using multiple spot lights.
You can control the intensity and color of both ambient and spot
lighting.
X To control shaded entity lighting:

2 Make sure Shading active is enabled.
3 In the Lighting group box, use the slider or enter a value

between 0 and 100 to control the intensity of ambient light.
4 To create spot lighting, choose the Spot lights button.
5 Choose the spot light angle you want to activate:

Figure 7-4: Shading Spot Lights
7
72
73
6 To turn the spot light on, enable Power:

74
Figure 7-5: Shading Spot Light Options
756
7
78
79
7 Choose a light type, intensity, and color.
710
Note: You can turn on more than one spot light at a time. A yellow
image in the spot light angle display indicates that the light is on.
7
Surface Creation
Mastercam X offers a wide range of surface creation functions:
Creating Ruled or Creating Net

Lofted Surfaces Surfaces
(page 626) (page 630)
Creating Revolved Creating Fence

Surfaces (page 627) Surfaces
(page 631)
Creating Offset Creating Draft

Surfaces (page 628) Surfaces
(page 632)
Creating Swept Creating

Surfaces (page 629) Extruded Surfaces
(page 633)
TIP: You can also use Create menu functions to make simple
surface rectangles, rectangular shapes, polygons, ellipses, and
primitives. For more information, see “Creating Miscellaneous
Shapes” on page 287.
In this section, you will learn more about surface modification

functions, including:
Filleting Surfaces Filling Holes with

(page 634) Surfaces (page 643)
Trimming Removing Boundaries

Surfaces(page 637) from Trimmed Surfaces
(page 645)
Extending Trimmed Splitting Surfaces

Surface Edges (page 645)
(page 639)
Extending Surfaces Untrimming Surfaces

(page 640) (page 646)
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Surface Creation • 623
Creating a Surface Blending Surfaces

from a Solid Face
(page 641)
(page 646) 7
Creating a Surface
from a Flat Boundary
(page 641) 72
Surface Representation
Mastercam can represent surfaces in three ways: 73
parametric
NURBS
curve-generated
Not all surface types are appropriate for all surface creation methods.
74
756
7
78
79
710
7
A parametric surface is analogous to a parametric spline. A parametric

surface expands each curve segment in another direction, resulting in
a patch. A patch is a surface area bounded by four segments of the
generating curves. A parametric surface requires a large amount of
data storage space.
A NURBS (non-uniform rational B-spline) surface is analogous to a
NURBS curve or spline. A NURBS surface expands a string of control
points in another direction, resulting in a grid. It requires less data
storage space than a parametric surface but takes longer to process.
A curve-generated surface stores a direct reference to the original
curve. It requires less data storage space than either a parametric or a
NURBS surface. Swept, net, and blend surfaces cannot be curve-
generated.
Note: You define the default surface type by choosing Settings,

Configuration, CAD Settings, and then selecting a Spline/Surface
creation type.
Maximum Surface Deviation

The maximum surface deviation determines how precisely a
parametric or NURBS surface fits its generating curves. A smaller
deviation results in a surface that fits the curve more closely but
requires more memory.
Note: Use the Settings, Configuration, Tolerances properties page

to set the maximum surface deviation. The default is 0.001 inch.
Base Surface
When Mastercam creates a trimmed surface (for example, fence
surface or flat boundary surface), it also creates an untrimmed,
blanked base surface or parent surface. It uses the base surface for
future modifications of the surface. In some cases (flat boundary
surfaces, for example), the base surface boundaries may extend
beyond the visible surface boundaries.
In most cases, you will not use or be aware of the base surface. The
sections that follow note occasions when the base surface has an effect
on an action.
TIP: To display a base surface, unblank it by choosing Screen,

Unblank entity. To redisplay the trimmed surface, choose
Screen, Blank entity.
7
Figure 7-6: Example: Surface and base surface
72
Surface
73
Base surface
74
Surface Display 756
In addition to the shading settings, you can control the appearance of
surfaces and solids by setting:
Surface drawing density.
Highlight on the back of surfaces (wireframe only). Displays
7
the side opposite the surface normal in a different color (the
surface background color).
Surface background color. Used in wireframe display to
highlight the side of the surface opposite the surface normal.
78
Surface motion color.
Surface Drawing Density 79

Surface drawing density is the concentration of display curves (not
geometric entities) used to show wireframe (unshaded) surfaces and
solids in the graphics window. Mastercam determines the appropriate
number of curves for a density value based on the composition of the
surface. Surface density settings do not affect shaded surfaces.
710
Surface drawing density is measured by a value between 1 (least
dense) and 15 (most dense). Entering a density of zero displays the
outline of the surface and one curve in each of the surface directions. 7
X To set the surface drawing density:

1 Choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings.
2 Enter a value between 1 and 15.
Highlighting Surface Backs

Highlighting the backs of surfaces (the side opposite the surface
normal) makes it easier to visualize and work with surfaces.
X To highlight the backs of surfaces:

1 Choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings.
2 Select the Draw highlight on back of surfaces check box.
X To select the color to be used for background highlighting:

1 Choose Settings, Configuration, Colors.
2 Select Surface back side color from the entity list.
3 Select a color.
Creating Ruled or Lofted Surfaces

A ruled or lofted surface is created by blending a minimum of
two curves or chains of curves. Although they are similar, a
ruled surface is a linear blending of the curves, while a lofted
surface is a smooth blending of the curves.
Figure 7-7: Ruled/lofted surface ribbon bar
d
led
ain
fte
Ch
Ru
Lo
Figure 7-8: Example: Loft surface

Figure 7-9: Example: Ruled surface
7
72
73
When you select curves for a ruled surface, the selected ends of each
pair of curves (curve one and two, two and three, and so on) compose
one edge of the surface. When you select a curve or chain of curves, a
temporary arrow displays at the closest endpoint to show which end is
74
selected.
TIPS:
• To better match curves, or chains of curves, select the curves
756
using the Sync chaining method (Chaining Options dialog
box). This method allows you to match curves manually or
by entity, branch, node, or point.
• As long as the surface is live, you can rechain the curves and
7
switch the surface between ruled and lofted.
Creating Revolved Surfaces

78
A revolved surface is created by revolving one or more chains
of profile curves about a single line axis of rotation. You can
control the start angle and the sweep of the revolution to 79
create a partial revolution.
Figure 7-10: Revolved surface ribbon bar
710
gle
le
ng
an
file
da
art
is
p
Pro
Ax
En
St
Fli
7
Figure 7-11: Example: Revolved surface
Creating Offset Surfaces

An offset surface is a surface created at a distance and
direction relative to the surface normal of a selected surface.
It is identical point for point to the original surface. You can
switch the normal of the original surface, or flip the offset surface to be
opposite the normal. You can also create a copy of the original surface
or delete the original surface and keep only the offset surface.
Figure 7-12: Offset surface ribbon bar
ce
an
xt
Ne
ist
lip
td
f
/
t
le
e
l ec
le
fse
y
ov
g
p
c
p
Sin
Se
Co
Cy
Of
M
Fli
Figure 7-13: Example: Offset surface

Creating Swept Surfaces

A swept surface is created by sweeping chains of curves 7
along a path. The chains that you select to sweep are called
across curves. These chains define cross-sections of the
resulting surface. The chains that define the path or
trajectory of the sweep are called along curves. 72
Figure 7-14: Swept surface ribbon bar
73
e
s fac
ail u r
oR oS
ne
Tw a l T
pla
Ro late
No e
eC
rm
ain
tat
ns
Tra
Ch
Us
74
You can define a swept surface using the following combinations of
across (section) and along (path) chains.
1 across/1 along - Mastercam sweeps one across curve down
one along curve. You have the option to translate or rotate the
756
across curve chain along the path.
2 or more across/1 along - Mastercam transitions from one
across curve to the next in the order in which you define them
while following one along curve. This is known as a linear
blend.
7
1 across/2 along - Mastercam proportionally scales one across
curve between two along curves.
Figure 7-15: Example: Swept surface, 1 across/2 along 78
79
710
7
Figure 7-16: Example: Swept surface, shaded
Creating Net Surfaces

A net surface is created from a network of intersecting
curves, generally a minimum of two across curves and two
along curves; there is no maximum. The curves need not be
trimmed, and may be chained in any order. You can also
define an apex point, which is necessary when two or more of the
curves meet at a single point.
Figure 7-17: Net surface ribbon bar
t
oin
p
ain
ex
yle
Ap
Ch
St
Figure 7-18: Example: Net surface
Guidelines for Creating Net Surfaces

When creating a net surface where all of the across contours
meet at one or both ends, the net surface to be created will
have more than one possible apex point. Therefore you must
manually position the apex point of the net surface. In these
cases, you must have the ApexPoint button selected before

you chain the curves.
A curve may or may not be trimmed in order to create a net
7
surface. For contours that are not trimmed, the net surface
will be created by trimming the curves appropriately to form
the net of curves.
You can chain the contours in any direction and in any order. 72
The Net Surface function will sort the chains out for accurate
results.
You can create a net surface closed in one direction if the
across contours are all closed. A mix of open and closed across
contours will not create a new surface.
73
There is no maximum limit to the number of contours you
select.
Mastercam does not allow sharp cornered surfaces to be
created. Instead, it creates different surfaces along the sharp
74
corners.
Note: The maximum angle allowed in chaining is 10 degrees. This

will prevent partial chaining from succeeding if you enter an angle
756
value of more than 10 degrees. A warning message will display and
you will need to create smoother chains (10 degrees or less for a
maximum angle).
7
Creating Fence Surfaces
A fence surface is a ruled surface that originates from a curve
lying on a surface, emanating in a direction perpendicular to
78
the surface for the length of the curve. You can create three
kinds of fence surfaces:
a constant distance and angle relative to the curve 79
a linear taper where you define the start and end distance and
angle
a cubic blend where you define the start and end distance and
angle 710
You can also flip the surface, which creates the same curve but in an
opposite direction from the base surface normal.
7
Figure 7-19: Fence surface ribbon bar
od
ac
t
th
igh
gle
urf
ht
le
me
ei g
ts
he
an
ng
nd
ain
lec
dh
da
art
art
p
Ble
Se
Ch
En
En
St
St
Fli
TIP: If the curve used to create the fence surface is not trimmed
to the base surface, the fence surface will not be trimmed. Trim
the curve before creating the fence surface.
Figure 7-20: Example: Fence surface, cubic blend, untrimmed
Creating Draft Surfaces

A draft surface is an angled extruded surface or tapered wall
created from one or more chains of curves. You can create a
draft surface in two ways:
Define an angle and a length (perpendicular to the chain) or
run length (length after the angle is applied)
Terminate the surface at a plane.
You can also flip the surface, reversing the taper angle relative to the
chain, and split the draft surface, which orients it at midplane relative
to the chain.
Figure 7-21: Draft Surface dialog box
7
72
73
74
Note: The resulting draft surfaces are not trimmed nor filleted. 756
Figure 7-22: Example: Two draft surfaces
7
78
79
Creating Extruded Surfaces 710
An extruded surface appears to be “forced” or extruded
through the chained geometry of existing entities
perpendicular to the plane of the entities. You control the
resulting surface by specifying the height and direction of the
7
extrusion (positive, negative, or both), and the axis orientation of the
extrusion.
You can also apply a taper angle to the extrusion, and rotate it, scale it,
and offset it. All transformations are applied relative to the base point,
which is the approximate center of gravity.
Figure 7-23: Extruded Surface dialog box
Filleting Surfaces
In this section, you will learn to use the following functions in the
Create, Surface, Fillet Surface submenu to fillet selected surfaces:
Fillet Surfaces to Surfaces (page 635)
Fillet Surfaces to Curves (page 636)
Fillet Surfaces to a Plane (page 636)
Fillet Surfaces to Surfaces

Use this function to create one or more fillet surfaces, 7
each of which is tangent to two surfaces. You are
prompted to select two sets of surfaces.
Mastercam attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each surface
in the first set with each surface in the second set. You can select 72
one set, but it must contain at least two surfaces. With one set, the
system attempts to create fillet surfaces by pairing each surface in
the set with every other surface in the set.
Figure 7-24: Fillet Surfaces to Surfaces dialog box 73
74
756
7
78
79
710
7
In some cases, having only one set of surfaces could prove more
time-consuming. For example, if you have multiple surface walls
and a single surface floor all in a single set, the system looks for
intersections between all walls and the floor. If, however, you select
the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the second set of
surfaces, the system looks for intersections only between each wall
and the floor.
Fillet Surfaces to Curves

Use the Fillet Surfaces to Curves function to create one or
more fillet surfaces, each of which has a defined radius,
lies on a curve or chain of curves at a rail location, and is
tangent to one or more selected surfaces.
Figure 7-25: Fillet Surfaces to Curves dialog box
Select the surfaces you want to fillet and press Enter. Chain the
curve to which you want the surface to be filleted. Click Apply or
Enter when done.
Fillet Surfaces to a Plane

This function allows you to create one or more fillet
surfaces, each having the following characteristics:
A defined radius
Lies on a curve or chain of curves at a rail location

Is tangent to one or more selected surfaces
Figure 7-26: Fillet Surfaces to a Plane dialog box
7
72
73
74
756
7
78
79
Select the surfaces you want to fillet and press Enter. Select the
plane to which you want the surface to be filleted. Click Apply or
Enter when done. 710
Trimming Surfaces
In this section, you will learn to use the following functions in the
Create, Surface, Trim Surface submenu to trim selected surfaces:
7
Trimming Surfaces to Surfaces (page 638)
Trimming Surfaces to Curves (page 638)

Trimming Surfaces to a Plane (page 639)
When trimming a surface, the trimmed surface is created as a new
surface and you choose to keep or delete the original (base) surface.
When trimming surfaces to surfaces and surfaces to curves, you can
also choose to extend the intersection curve to the edge of the surface
(or both surfaces), and split the selected surfaces into separate
surfaces at their intersecting curves.
Trimming Surfaces to Surfaces

Use the Create, Surface, Trim Surface, Trim Surfaces to
Surfaces function to trim surfaces at intersections
between two sets of surfaces—one of which must contain
only one surface—and trim one or both of the sets of
surfaces.
Figure 7-27: Surface to Surface ribbon bar
ts)
rfa t)
se
su se
im su t)
ce
e
th ce
(tr nd se
dg
bo rfa
th c o c e
o d to E
Bo se urfa
ce
es
rfa
m s
co ce
Sp Curv
el
tri st
su
Se urfa
2 ( m fir
nd
M
nd
e
s
let
De p
tri
st
te
lit
e
Ke
1(
Fir
Ex
Use current construction attributes
When you choose this option, you are prompted to select the first
set of surfaces you want to trim. When you finish selecting surfaces,
press Enter. Repeat these steps on the surface to which you want
the first one to be trimmed. Use the ribbon bar options to modify
the selections and click Apply or press Enter when done.
Trimming Surfaces to Curves

To trim surfaces to curves (lines, arcs, splines, or surface
curves), choose Create, Surface, Trim Surface, Trim
Surfaces to Curves. Then use the Surface to Curve ribbon
bar to trim surfaces to curves.
Figure 7-28: Surface to Curve ribbon bar
ge
Ed
od o
M st
cu ces
es
lit rve
ct a
el
rv
le urf
Sp Cu
Se ct s
al
nd
te
rm
De p
ew
le
le
te
72
e
No
Ke
Se
Ex
Vi
Select the surface you want to trim and press Enter. Chain the curve
to which you want the surface to be trimmed and click the part of 73
the surface you want to keep. You can also choose whether to
extend the curves to the surface edge as part of the trim function, or
to split the trimmed surface into multiple split surfaces, based on
the number of intersection curves formed from the trim. Click
Apply or Enter when done.
74
If the trimming curves do not lie directly on the surfaces,
Mastercam projects them onto the surfaces in order to calculate the
intersection where the surface will be trimmed. 756
Trimming Surfaces to a Plane
Choose Create, Surface, Trim Surface, Trim Surfaces to a Plane.
Figure 7-29: Surface to Plane ribbon bar
7
78
l
de
mo
P la c e
e
ne
le t
r fa
ep
lit
De
Sp
Su
Ke
Delete surfaces on other side of plane

79
Use this ribbon bar to trim surfaces to a plane. Select the surface
you want to trim and press Enter. Select the plane to which you
want the surface to be trimmed. Click Apply or Enter when done.
710
Extending Trimmed Surface Edges
You can create a new surface by extending the edge of a
trimmed (or untrimmed) surface with the Create, Surface, 7
Extend Trimmed Surface Edges function and ribbon bar.
Figure 7-30: Trimmed Edge Extend ribbon bar
d
t
r
fse
un
ite
p
Ro
Of
M
Fli
In the graphics window, select a surface, and then select the edge to
extend. To extend the entire edge, press [Enter]. Alternatively, choose a
second edge point, to extend the portion of the edge between the two
selected points. Use the Flip button to switch which portion of the
edge that Mastercam extends.
Mastercam extends the edge by the value you enter in the Offset field.
Use the Miter and Round buttons to choose the type of outer corners
to create on the new surface.
When extending an edge with the Extend Trimmed Surface Edges
function, Mastercam does not modify the original surface. Instead,
Mastercam creates a new trimmed surface for the extended area.
Extending Surfaces
Use the Create, Surface, Surface Extend function to extend a
surface by a defined length or to a selected plane. You can
extend the surface linearly or following the curvature of the
surface.
After you select the surface to extend, Mastercam displays a temporary
arrow on the surface. Move the base of the arrow to the location where
you want to extend the surface, and then click to set the extension
location.
Figure 7-31: Surface Extend ribbon bar
r
ea
lin
th
e
No r
ne
let
ea
ep
n-
ng
Pla
Lin
De
Ke
Le
Note: To select a blend location at an existing point, type [S] to

activate snapping. Move the base of the arrow over the desired
point, and then left-click.
When Mastercam extends a surface, it creates the extended surface as

a new surface, and you can choose to keep or delete the original
surface. You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed

edges.
7
Creating a Surface from a Solid Face
The Create, Surface, Create Surface from Solid function
uses existing solid entities to extract surface information,
72
and then creates a separate NURBS surface for each solid
face you select.
You can create surfaces from a single solid face or from the entire solid
body. When you move your mouse over the solid during selection,
73
Mastercam displays a visual cue next to the cursor. This icon changes
depending on whether Mastercam is identifying a solid face or the
entire solid body.
Solid single face Solid body

74
TIP: Make sure you have the correct visual cue (either face or
756
entire solid body) before you make your selection.
When you choose Create Surface from Solid, the Surface from Solids
ribbon bar displays. Use the ribbon bar’s buttons to create surfaces
7
with the system or solid attributes. You can also choose to keep the
solid or to delete it after the surface is created.
te
s
bu es
tt ri ibut
78
d lid
A ttr oli e So
t
m A S
lec
ste lid ep let

se
Sy So Ke De
Re
79
Creating a Surface from a Flat Boundary
Flat boundary surfaces are trimmed NURBS surfaces created
710
within a boundary defined by a closed, flat chain. You create
flat boundary surfaces by chaining existing entities.
Mastercam creates the surface and trims it to the boundaries
of the chained entities.
7
Note: When it creates the trimmed flat boundary surface,

Mastercam also creates a blanked, untrimmed base surface that
extends beyond the boundary of the trimmed surface. Although
you will rarely use this base surface, it can affect how holes are
filled in trimmed surfaces. For more information, see “Filling
Holes with Surfaces” on page 643.
A single closed chain defines the outer boundary of the flat boundary
surface. Chains nested entirely within this boundary form holes in the
surface. If chain is not completely enclosed within the first boundary
chain, Mastercam creates a separate surface. You can create multiple
surfaces by selecting chains that are not nested.
If you select open chains, Mastercam prompts you to close them
automatically. You can close the chains or remove the open chains
from calculation of the trimmed surface. If you close the open chains,
Mastercam calculates (but does not create) a curve between the two
open endpoints for the purpose of defining the closed boundary.
Figure 7-32: Flat Boundary Surface ribbon bar
s
ain
ch
in
ha
w
ins
lC
ne
ha
ua
t
dc
lec
an
Ad
Se
TIP: When you create a flat boundary surface, Mastercam

keeps the entities chained to create it and places the new
surface in the same location as those entities. To work with or
view the new flat boundary surface more easily, either delete,
hide, or move the original entities, or move the new surface.
In the Flat Boundary Surface ribbon bar, click Manual Chain ( )

to open the Chain Manual ribbon bar.
Figure 7-33: Chain Manual ribbon bar
ce
ran
ole
t
pT
lec
Ga
Se
Use this ribbon bar to select surface edges and curves, and to set a gap
tolerance between flat boundary surfaces.
7
Filling Holes with Surfaces
You can fill holes in a trimmed surface using the Create,
Surface, Fill Hole with Surfaces function. 72
The holes may be internal holes (those that lie completely
within the outer boundary of the surface) or external holes (those that
lie along the trimmed outer boundary of the surface). If the surface
contains multiple internal holes, you can fill all holes or only selected 73
holes.
Mastercam fills the hole by creating a new trimmed surface within the
boundary defined by the hole. The surface Mastercam creates is
separate from the original surface, even though it appears to be part of 74
it when you display it as a wireframe.
Figure 7-34: Fill Holes with Surfaces ribbon bar
756
t
lec
Se
When filling holes in a flat boundary surface, if you select the outer
boundary as the boundary to be filled, Mastercam fills the area 7
between the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface and the
blanked base surface, which extends beyond the flat boundary surface.
Guidelines for Filling Holes in a Trimmed Surface 78

If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface
contains multiple internal boundaries, a warning dialog box
displays. To fill all holes, choose Yes. Otherwise, choose No to
fill only the selected hole. 79
Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary, this dialog
box does not display. Mastercam closes the hole by creating a
trimmed surface within it. 710
If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that
boundary does not touch the outer boundary of the
untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base
surface is currently displayed or is blanked), the hole that gets
7
filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the

untrimmed boundaries, as shown in the following example.
This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because

the base surface of a flat boundary surface always extends
beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface.
If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that
boundary does touch the outer boundary of the untrimmed
base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is
currently displayed or is blanked), the hole that gets filled is
defined as the space between the trimmed and the
untrimmed boundaries but only along the selected trimmed
edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary, as shown in
the following example.
Note: The Fill Holes with Surfaces function differs from the
Remove Boundary from Trimmed Surface function in which
Mastercam removes the trimmed boundaries and recreates the
surface; it does not create a new surface to fill the holes.
Removing Boundaries from Trimmed

Surfaces 7
Use this function to fill internal holes (those that lie
completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and
external holes (those that lie along the outer boundary of the
surface). For each hole that you select to fill, Mastercam closes the hole
72
by removing the trimmed boundary and retrimming the surface using
the base surface.
If the surface contains multiple internal holes, you can fill all holes or
only selected holes. If the trimmed surface contains only one hole,
73
Mastercam closes it by removing the trimmed surface and replacing it
with the untrimmed base surface.
Note: This function differs from the Fill Holes function in which 74
Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces to fill the holes. When using
Fill Holes, no trimmed boundaries are removed.
756
Splitting Surfaces
When you split a surface, you break it along one of its
constant parameter directions, which are the two directions
Mastercam uses to generate the surface. Mastercam then
7
creates two trimmed surfaces within the same boundary. If the break
point you select permits the surface to be broken in two ways,
Mastercam prompts you to select the direction along which you want
to split it. 78
Figure 7-35: Split Surface ribbon bar
Flip split direction

79
Use this ribbon bar to break a surface at a fixed position along one of
the surface directions. Select the surface to split. Mastercam displays a
temporary arrow on the surface.
(You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view.)
710
Use the cursor to move the base of the arrow to the position you want
the split to pass through on the surface (the fixed position), then click
to set the position. The surface is split when you click Apply or OK. 7
Note: In the case of splitting an untrimmed NURB surface, an

untrimmed parametric surface, or an untrimmed offset of either
type, Mastercam creates two new untrimmed surfaces.
TIP: Use wireframe display to visualize the surface directions.
Untrimming Surfaces
When you untrim a trimmed surface, Mastercam returns the
surface to its base surface.
Figure 7-36: Untrim Surface ribbon bar
e
os
ep
sp
Ke
Di
Use this ribbon bar to untrim previously trimmed surfaces. As soon as

you select a trimmed surface, Mastercam untrims it and returns its
base surface to the graphics window. Use the Keep and Dispose
buttons to set whether to keep or disposed of the trimmed surface.
Blending Surfaces
In this section, you will learn to create blended surfaces using
functions in the Create, Surface submenu. These functions allow you
to smooth out part of a surface model by eliminating unwanted
features.
Creating Two-surface and Three-surface Blends

Use the Create 2 Surface Blend and Create 3 Surface Blend functions
to blend surfaces by creating an additional surface that is tangent to
two or three selected surfaces. The new surface is created tangent to
the selected surfaces.
Figure 7-37: Surface Blend dialog boxes
2 Surface Blend 3 Surface Blend 7

72
73
74
When you choose one of these blend functions, Mastercam prompts

756
you to select the first surface. When you make your selection,
Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface. Move the base
of the arrow to where you want to blend the new surface to the existing
surface. Then click to set the blend location. You can type [F] to flip the
7
curve, or press [Enter] to select the curve as is. You can also click
another surface to select it. This action finalizes the previous curve
selection. When you have picked all required surfaces, the Surface
Blend dialog box displays, and the surface appears as a “live” entity.
Use the dialog box to perform further editing.
78
79
710
7
The following examples illustrate blends created from the same two
surfaces using different parallel and perpendicular blend directions.
Parallel blend direction Perpendicular blend direction
TIPS:
To select a blend location at an existing point, type S to activate
snapping. Move the base of the arrow over the desired point,
then left-click to “snap” to it.
Choose Options ( )in the selected surface blend function

dialog box to set filleting parameters. In the Fillet Surface
Options dialog box, you define:
• the type of entities to create
• how closely each resulting fillet surface fits the surfaces to
which it is tangent
• whether Mastercam trims the surfaces
• other parameters that further affect the resulting geometry
Creating a Three-fillet Blend

Use the Create 3 Fillet Blend function and dialog box to blend three
intersecting fillet surfaces by creating one or more surfaces that are
tangent to the first three surfaces.
Figure 7-38: Create 3 Fillet Blend dialog box
7
72
73
This function is useful for rounding the corners of a filleted box. It is
similar to blending three surfaces. However, the location where the
blend surface(s) are tangent to the fillet surfaces is calculated, not
selected. When you choose this option, you are prompted to select the
74
three intersecting surface fillets in the graphics window. Before
blending the selected filleted surfaces, use options in the 3 Fillet Blend
dialog box to:
reselect the three surface fillets, as necessary
756
indicate whether to create a blend surface with three or six
sides
optionally trim surfaces and keep lines 7
78
79
710
7
Solids
Unlike wireframe and surface models, which consist of multiple
curves and surface entities, a solid model is a single entity, regardless
of its complexity. However, a solid model may consist of several solid
bodies.
You work with a solid model as a whole, like molding a piece of clay.
For example, whether you add fillets to a solid, hollow it out, or
combine it with another solid, the resulting solid model remains a
single entity. Each Mastercam function you perform on a solid entity is
saved as a separate operation on the solid. In the Solids Manager, you
can view a complete history of the operations used to create a solid,
and move, edit, or delete them.
Because a solid is a closed, organized model, Mastercam manages the
interior and exterior of the model for you, handling the complexities of
the model “behind the scenes.” This makes it easy to work with solid
modeling. When you create or edit operations on a solid, Mastercam
automatically determines the surfaces to keep or trim in order to
maintain the solid as a single entity.
Basic solid model functions include extrude, revolve, sweep, loft, fillet,
and shell. This section provides an overview of how to create, select,
and perform operations on solid models. You will also learn to use the
Solids Manager and its right–click menus to manage and modify solids
and their operations. Topics in this section include:
Creating a Solid Model: Process Overview (page 651)
Solids Associativity (page 652)
Selecting Solids (page 655)
Combining Solid Operations (page 656)
Working with Solid Functions (page 657)
Solids Manager (page 682)
Editing Solid Models (page 689)
WORKING WITH SURFACES AND SOLIDS / Solids • 651
Creating a Solid Model: Process

Overview 7
Through a few easy steps, you can create and machine a solid model in
Mastercam. The steps outlined below give you an overview of the
process. You can then adapt these steps to create your own solid
model.
72
X To create a solid model:
1 Create a base operation.
A solid is defined by one or more operations. The first
73
operation, called the base operation, creates the solid. You can
create a base operation by taking one of the following actions:
Define a solid by extruding, revolving, sweeping, or lofting
chains of curves.
74
Define a solid using pre-defined primitive shapes, such as
a cylinder, cone, block, sphere, or torus.
Import a solid from an external file format, such as
Parasolid, SAT, SolidWorks, CATIA, Pro/E, Step, and others.
756
IMPORTANT: A base operation is always listed as the first
operation under the solid in the Solids Manager. It cannot be
repositioned or deleted from the operation list.
7
2 Create additional operations.
Once you create the base operation, you perform subsequent
operations to modify the solid, including:
78
Remove material by making one or more cuts on a target
solid.
Add material by creating one or more bosses on a target
solid.
79
Smooth solid edges by adding a radius (fillet).
Bevel (chamfer) solid edges.
Hollow out (shell) solids and optionally cut entry holes.
710
Perform Boolean functions: add solids together, remove
solids from one another, find common solid volumes.
Draft solid faces.
Trim solids to a plane or surface.
7
3 Manage solid operations.

The Solids Manager tab, located in the Operations Manager
pane of the Mastercam window, lists the operations you used
to define the solid. Use the Solids Manager to check the
location of an operation in the model, edit operation
components (geometry and parameters), check a solid model
at various points in its development, and regenerate all or
individual solids.
4 Machine the solid.
Create toolpaths directly on solid geometry by choosing a
mill, lathe, and router machine definition from the Machine
Type menu. Then use functions in the Toolpaths menu to
create the necessary toolpaths. For more information, see
“Setting Up Toolpaths” on page 695.
Solids Associativity
Solids associativity is the dependent relationship between a solid, the
operations that define it, and any geometry selected in its definition.
When you perform a solid operation such as extrude, fillet, or draft
face, Mastercam associates it with the solid that it creates or modifies.
This association can be broken only by deleting the operation.
Because an operation is associated with the solid that it creates or
modifies, you cannot copy operations or move them to a different
solid. For example, when rechaining a fillet operation, all of the new
edges that you select must be on the same solid where the operation
was originally defined. To fillet edges on a different solid, you must
create a new fillet operation on that solid.
Associativity eliminates the need to recreate a solid each time you
modify it. After editing an operation’s components (geometry and
parameters), you can regenerate the solid to incorporate your changes.
The following terms describe a solid operation and the current state of
its associativity.
Clean: An operation whose defining parameters and
geometry match the associated solid. This condition applies
to all newly created operations and to operations that have
been successfully regenerated. For a solid to be stable and
current, its operations must be clean.
Dirty: An operation whose defining parameters and/or

geometry have changed and no longer match the associated
solid. Mastercam marks each dirty operation and its
associated solid with an X in the Solids Manager. You correct
7
dirty operations by regenerating them.
Invalid: An operation that fails due to a problem in its
geometry and/or parameters, which prevents it from being
regenerated. Deleting geometry that defines an operation is a
72
common cause of invalid operations. Mastercam marks each
invalid operation and its associated solid with a question
mark (?) in the Solids Manager. You can try to correct an
invalid operation by editing its parameters and/or geometry,
73
and then regenerating the solid model.
Figure 7-39: Example: Solids Manager operation states
74
Clean operation
756
Dirty operation
7
Invalid operation
78
Associativity also exists between some solid operations. For example, if
a cut operation results in a new face, and you subsequently fillet that
79
face, the fillet operation is dependent on the cut operation. If you
delete the cut operation, Mastercam deletes the fillet operation as well
because the edge that defined the fillet operation no longer exists. In
the Solids Manager, a defining operation always precedes a dependent
710
operation in the list.
Unless solids in the same file are used in Boolean combinations,
associativity does not exist between individual solids in a Mastercam
file. When you perform a Boolean operation, Mastercam associates the
7
tool body with the target body if possible, provided you do not perform
a non-associative Boolean Remove or Common regions operation.
A target body is the solid that is the target of a specific action

or operation, such as when cutting material from a body,
adding bosses to a body, or performing a Boolean operation.
When one of these operations is performed, the target body is
the surviving body that can be worked on.
A tool body is the body or bodies that are added to, removed
from, or used to keep a common region with a selected target
body during a Boolean operation. Once a solid is designated a
tool body, it becomes part of the target body. In the Solids
Manager, a tool body is listed under the solid and Boolean
operation that it helps to define, and its icon is marked with
the letter “T.”
Note: When you delete a Boolean operation, Mastercam restores

the operation's tool bodies as distinct, active solids. You can also
duplicate a tool body to obtain an active copy of the solid.
Selecting Solids
Use the General Selection ribbon bar to select entities in the graphics 7
window. This ribbon bar operates in two different modes: Standard
Selection and Solid Selection. The availability of either mode is based
on the types of entities that are in the current file and the functions
you choose from Mastercam menus and toolbars. 72
If there are no solids in your file, the Solid Selection mode is not
available; you can use only Standard Selection options.
Figure 7-40: Standard Selection mode
73
Note: For more information on Standard Selection techniques, see
“Selecting Entities” on page 174.
74
If you choose a Mastercam function specific to a solid entity, the
General Selection ribbon bar automatically switches to the Solid
Selection mode. Mastercam solid selection is very flexible. In Solid
756
Selection mode, you can choose from a variety of solid selection
options, including select edge, select face, select body, select from
back, and select last.
Figure 7-41: Solid Selection mode
7
78
Solid Selection options
Note: The Verify, UnSelect All, End Selection, and Help options
are always available, regardless of the current selection mode.
79
If you choose a Mastercam function that applies to different types of
entities (wireframe, surfaces, or solids), use the following methods to
switch between selection modes and select entities: 710
To switch from the default Standard Selection mode
to the Solid Selection mode, choose the
Activate Solid Selection button.
To switch from Solid Selection mode to the Standard
7
Selection mode, choose the Standard Selection
button.
For example, if the part file you are working with contains a surface
and a solid entity, and you want to create toolpaths for both entities,
choose a toolpath function from the Toolpath menu. Then use the
Activate Solid Selection and Standard Selection options to toggle
between the two modes and select the appropriate entities.
TIP: When creating toolpaths in files that contain both solids

and other entity types, the order in which you select and chain
entities is defined by the options you choose in the Surface
options dialog box.
Combining Solid Operations

When you create a new cut or boss operation by extruding, revolving,
or sweeping chains of curves, instead of creating a separate operation
for each chain, you can combine operations on multiple chains into a
single operation. You choose this option by selecting the Combine
Operations option in the Extrude Chain, Revolve Chain, or Sweep
Chain dialog box. You can combine operations only when creating
new cuts or bosses on an existing body.
You cannot combine operations when creating a new solid body or
modifying parameters from the Solids Manager. You can, however,
combine operations when modifying the geometry of existing Extrude,
Revolve, or Sweep Cut/Boss operations by adding new chains, even if
the Combine Operations option was not selected when the operation
was created.
You can also combine appropriate operations when you create
operations as part of finding features on a brick solid. In this case,
Mastercam aggregates operations on selected chains (for holes) or
edges (for fillets) into a single operation.
Note: A brick is a solid body with no history. Brick solids may be

imported, may be the result of a file conversion or translation from
other solid modeling software, or may be created by trim or
Boolean (Remove, Common) operations that result in a body being
split into more than one piece. In the Solids Manager, a brick is
identified as a solid in which the word “Body” is the first entry in
its operation history (added when a brick is edited).
Combining operations makes it easier to modify similar or repetitive

operations involving multiple chains, since you only have to edit
parameters once from the Solids Manager.
Working with Solid Functions

This section introduces the functions you use from the Solids menu to 7
create solids and operations, including:
Solid Extrude Solid Trim (page 669)

(page 657) 72
Solid Revolve Solid Thicken (page 669)
(page 660)
Solid Sweep
(page 661)
Remove Solid Faces
(page 670)
73
Solid Loft (page 662) Draft Solid Faces (page 671)
Solid Fillet
(page 664)
Boolean Operations
(page 675) 74
Solid Face-Face Fillet Solid Find Features
(page 664) (page 676)
Chamfer Functions
(page 666)
Solid From Surfaces
(page 678)
756
Solid Shell Layout (page 679)
(page 668)
7
Solid Extrude
The Solid Extrude function allows you to extrude planar
chains of curves and create: 78
One or more new solid bodies
Cuts on an existing body
Bosses on an existing body
Mastercam extrudes chains of curves by driving the shape of the
79
curves along a linear path using a specified direction, distance, and
other parameters that further define the results. The number of
resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains that
you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine
710
operations, and what construction method you use.
7
Figure 7-42: Solid Extrude dialog boxes
Setting the Extrusion Direction

The extrusion direction is the direction that the system drives the
shape of the selected chains of curves to form an extruded solid, cut, or
boss. The default extrusion direction is normal to each chain of curves
that you select to extrude. The sense of the normal vector is
determined by the chaining direction and the right-hand rule. It is set
so that the chain is counter-clockwise about the normal vector.
TIP: The “right-hand

rule” is a simple device
many machinists use to
7
orient themselves to the
axes’ positions. Holding
your hand as shown, the
thumb represents the X
72
axis, the index finger
represents Y, and the
middle finger, pointing
up,
represents Z.
73
Notes:
• With both thin-wall and non-thin-wall extrusions, you can
74
reverse the normal direction.
• The extrusion direction cannot be parallel to the plane defined
by the selected chains of curves because you cannot extrude a
chain sideways.
756
Editing Geometry for Extrude Operations
You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define an 7
extruded solid, cut, or boss. In addition, you can edit the faces that
an extruded cut or boss is trimmed to, provided that the Trim to
selected faces parameter was selected when you initially defined
the operation. 78
Notes:
• The Extrude operation can have more than one chain only if
there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary
around the other chains, and all of the nested chains are in the
79
same plane. The chains that are nested within this boundary
form cutouts in the solid. You cannot use the thin-wall
construction method in this case.
• You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the
710
outermost chain of curves, which defines the outer boundary, or
cross section, of the solid.
• Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the
creation of a new operation or solid.
7
Solid Revolve
You can revolve planar chains of curves to create one or
more new solid bodies, cuts on an existing body, or bosses
on an existing body. This function revolves chains of curves
by driving the shape of the curves about a selected axis,
using the start and end angles, and other parameters you provide. The
number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of
chains that you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you
combine operations, and what construction method you use.
Figure 7-43: Solid Revolve dialog boxes
Selecting a Rotation Axis

The rotation axis is the line about which Mastercam revolves the
chains of curves to form a revolved solid. You can select any line in
the graphics window to use as the rotation axis, including a line on
the selected chain of curves. The axis line is associative; therefore,
you must regenerate the solid to update the association between
the line and the solid if the line changes.
The default rotation direction is determined when you select a line
to use as the rotation axis. The endpoint closest to the cursor’s
position where you select the line defines the base point of the axis
direction vector. The start and end angles are measured in a
positive sense about the axis, which sets the rotation direction.
Note: The rotation direction follows the right-hand rule, with the
axis direction vector representing the positive Z axis. 7
Editing Geometry for Revolve Operations
You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define a revolved
solid, cut, or boss.
72
Notes:
• You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the
outermost chain of curves, which defines the outer boundary, or
73
cross section, of the solid.
• The Revolve operation can have more than one chain only if
there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary
around the other chains. The chains that are nested within this
74
boundary form cutouts in the solid and lie in the same plane.
You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case.
• To edit the rotation axis of a revolved solid, cut, or boss, you
must edit the solid’s parameters. 756
Solid Sweep
Use the Solid Sweep function to sweep closed, planar chains
7
of curves, called section chains, to create one or more new
solid bodies, cuts on an existing body, or bosses on an
existing body. Mastercam sweeps chains of curves by
translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire
distance of a single chain of curves, called the path chain. The angle
78
between the section chains and the path chain is maintained
throughout each resulting swept solid. The number of resulting solids,
cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains that you select,
whether the chains are nested, and whether you combine operations.
79
710
7
Figure 7-44: Solid Sweep dialog box
Editing Geometry for Sweep Operations

Each Sweep operation has two editable geometry components: the
underlying chains of curves (section chains) that define a swept
solid, cut, or boss and the chain of curves (path chain) that defines
the path along which the section chains are swept to form the solid,
cut, or boss.
Notes:
• You cannot delete the base chain.
• The Sweep operation can have more than one section chain only
if there is an outermost chain that defines a closed boundary
around the other chains. The chains that are nested within this
boundary form cutouts in the solid.
Solid Loft
You can loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid
body, a cut on an existing body, or a boss on an existing body.
When you use this function, Mastercam performs a loft
operation by transitioning between two or more chains of
curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled
(linear) blending between the chains and by capping the first and last
chains with solid faces. The start point of each chain and the sync
method that you use when selecting the chains affect how Mastercam
aligns the selected chains as it transitions between them.
Figure 7-45: Solid Loft dialog box
7
72
73
For a Loft operation to succeed, the selected chains of curves must
meet the following criteria:
Each individual chain of curves must be planar; however, the
set of chains that you select does not have to be planar.
74
Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary.
All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining
direction. 756
You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given
loft operation.
A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect.
Editing Geometry for Loft Operations
7
You can edit the chains of curves that define the cross sections of a
lofted solid, cut, or boss. There must be a minimum of two closed,
planar chains to define a lofted operation. 78
Time-saving Tips for Creating Lofted Solids
Lofted solids sometimes require a large amount of processing time,
especially when the lofted solid is defined by many chains or if some or
all of the chains contain splines. You can increase the calculation
79
speed for lofted solids by trying one or more of the following actions:
Limit the number of chains to four or five and select the
chains that provide the most accurate overall definition for
the solid.
710
Create the lofted solid as a ruled solid, which takes less time to
calculate, by selecting the Create as Ruled parameter on the
Loft Chain dialog box.
Use a sync method when selecting the chains. By indicating
7
how the chains should be aligned, you reduce the time it takes
for Mastercam to calculate the solid.
Create the lofted solid in multiple operations using four or five

adjacent chains at a time. Create the first lofted solid as a
separate body, then create each additional lofted solid as a
boss on the first body.
Solid Fillet
Solid filleting is a type of edge blending that results in a
rounded edge by introducing new faces that are tangent to
the edges’ adjacent faces. A fillet is also referred to as a
rolling ball blend because it has a circular cross section, as if
a ball is rolled along each selected edge and material is either added to
or removed from the ball’s path to form the smooth edge. When using
the Fillet function, you determine the extent of the fillet by specifying
the radius of the rolling ball or cross section. You can define the fillet’s
radius using a constant radius value or by varying the radius value
along the edge. For fillet operations using a variable radius, you can
also specify radius positions and values along a solid edge.
Figure 7-46: Solid Fillet dialog box
IMPORTANT: Fillets that you create on the edges of selected

faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If you add edges to
or remove them from a filleted face or body, the entire face or
body remains filleted, regardless of the change.
Solid Face-Face Fillet

Use this function to create fillets across solid faces. When
creating a face-face fillet, you select two faces or two sets of
faces.
Figure 7-47: Example: Filleting two sets of faces
7
72
The faces within each set need not be contiguous with each other nor
adjacent to the faces in the other set. The resulting fillet blends the first
face in each of the two sets and continues across other faces in the sets
to the extent that a single continuous fillet can be created. 73
Figure 7-48: Example: Face-Face fillet across non-adjacent face
74
756
Figure 7-49: Example: Face-Face fillet over embedded entity
7
78
The Face-Face Fillet Parameters dialog box options allow you to create
both rolling-ball and constant curvature fillets by selecting the
constant radius, constant width, constant width-ratio, single hold line
or double hold line methods. Use other options to propagate fillets
along tangent faces and designate a Help Point.
79
710
7
Figure 7-50: Face-Face Fillet Parameters dialog box
Chamfer Functions
A chamfer, or beveled edge, is a type of edge blending that has a linear
cross section. You chamfer solid edges by introducing new faces that
add material to or remove material from the selected edges and that
are not tangent with the adjoining faces of the original edge. You
determine the extent of the chamfer by specifying distances and,
optionally, an angle to offset the chamfer from the selected edge on the
adjoining faces.
Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid
bodies are associative. If edges are added to or removed from a
chamfered face or body, the entire face or body remains chamfered,
regardless of the changes.
Mastercam provides three functions you can use to define where the
chamfer is positioned along the edge faces:
One Distance
Two Distances
7
72
Distance and Angle

73
74
756
If you create a chamfer using either the Two Distances or the Distance
and Angle function and you select an edge to chamfer, you must also
select a reference face to be used to calculate the resulting chamfer. The
reference face can be either one of the two faces that are adjacent to
7
the selected edge, also referred to as edge faces. Mastercam uses the
reference face to make the following calculations, according to the
chamfer method that you select:
For chamfers created using the Two Distances function, the
78
reference face is used to measure the value of the Distance 1
parameter from the selected edge. Mastercam then applies
the second value (Distance 2) to the other edge face.
For chamfers created using the Distance and Angle function, 79
the reference face is used to measure the specified distance
and angle from the selected edge.
When you select an edge to chamfer, Mastercam highlights the default
reference face and displays the Pick Reference Face menu to give you
the option to select the other edge face.
710
You are not required to select a reference face in the following cases:
For selected faces. Mastercam chamfers all edges associated
with the face and uses the face itself as the reference face for
7
all of the edges. If you select two faces that share an edge, the
first face that you select defines the reference face for the
shared edge.
When the One Distance chamfer function is used. A chamfer
created with this method is symmetrical, and the same
chamfer distance is used for both edge faces.
Note: A solid body cannot be selected when creating a “two

distances” or “distance angle” chamfer.
Solid Shell
To hollow solid bodies with the Solid Shell function, choose
the material to remove and, optionally, select the faces you
want to remain open. The remaining faces are thickened by
the amount you specify. You can re-select the geometry that
defines a shell operation for editing.
Figure 7-51: Shell Solid dialog box
Note: When editing the geometry that defines a shell operation,

changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or
solid are not supported.
If you select individual faces on a solid, Mastercam hollows the solid,

opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid, and
thickens the remaining faces to form the solid’s shell.
If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces, Mastercam
removes the material from the interior of the solid, which leaves a
void, and thickens the solid’s faces to form the solid’s shell.
When you shell whole solids, there are no entry holes into the solid,
and you cannot see into the solid if it is shaded. However, you can view
the void in the interior of the solid if you use translucent shading.
Similarly, you can turn on the display of hidden lines to distinguish the
7
solid’s inner walls. For more information, see “Displaying Surfaces and
Solids” on page 616.
Solid Trim
72
Use the Solid Trim function to trim selected solids to a plane,
to a surface, or to an open sheet body. You can also choose
whether or not to keep what was trimmed as new bricks
(solid bodies with no history) and change the trimming
73
direction.
Figure 7-52: Trim Solid dialog box
74
756
7
Solid Thicken
78
The Solid Thicken function allows you to thicken an open
sheet solid and thereby convert it into a closed solid body.
You can use this function in conjunction with the From
Surfaces (stitch surfaces into solids) function to turn
79
selected surfaces into a solid that can be managed like any other solid
created in Mastercam.
Note: For more information on stitching surfaces into solids, see

710
“Solid From Surfaces” on page 678.
7
Figure 7-53: Thicken sheet solid dialog boxes
Remove Solid Faces

This function removes selected faces from a solid, resulting
in an open sheet body. You can remove faces from either a
closed solid body or a sheet entity. Typically, you use this
function to remove faces that have problems identified by
the Check Solid function or to remove faces so that new surfaces can
be constructed and then stitched using the From Surfaces function.
Removing one or more faces from a solid can result in the same kind of
sheet solid as Stitching from surfaces whose edge gaps are too large to
create a closed solid body.
Figure 7-54: Remove Faces from a solid dialog box
Draft Solid Faces

Drafting solid faces is the process of tilting the faces by a 7
defined angle and direction. When you add draft to a solid
face, it has the effect of creating a tapered wall, which is
particularly useful for mold making. The Draft Solid faces
function makes it easy to add, change or remove face draft. 72
Figure 7-55: Solid Draft Faces dialog boxes
73
74
756
You can draft virtually any solid face, regardless of whether the solid
was created in Mastercam or imported from an external file format.
For example, a filleted face can be drafted, which changes its geometry
7
from cylindrical to planar, like a chamfered face.
When a face is drafted, the adjacent faces are trimmed and/or
extended to accommodate the new geometry of the drafted face. If the
adjacent faces are unable to accommodate the new geometry, the
78
operation fails. Failure is more likely to occur with larger draft angles
or if adjacent faces are tangent (or near tangent) and are not also being
drafted. In some cases, drafting results in faces being deleted from the
solid.
79
The Draft Faces function provides various methods you can use to
draft solid faces. The method that you choose determines where a
drafted face hinges. Each method is described below.
Draft to Face—Drafts solid faces using a planar reference face. You
710
select the planar reference face that is used to calculate where the
drafted face hinges and the draft direction. The drafted face hinges
at the intersection of the original face (the face selected to be
drafted) and the reference face. The hinge point can be located on
7
or off the solid. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference

face, and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction.
Figure 7-56: Example 1: Draft to Face
Hinge point
Arrow and cone-shaped

graphic showing draft
direction and how draft angle
is calculated to the direction
Face to be
drafted
Planar reference face
Figure 7-57: Example 2: Draft to Face

Hinge point
Drafted face
Original face (replaced
by drafted face)
Faces extended to
accommodate
drafted face
Draft to Plane—Drafts solid faces using a defined reference plane. You

define the reference plane used to calculate where the drafted face
hinges and the draft direction. The drafted face hinges at the
intersection of the original face (the face selected to be drafted) and
the reference plane. The hinge point can be located on or off the
solid. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference plane,
and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction.
Figure 7-58: Example: Draft to Plane
7
72
73
Draft to Edge—Drafts solid faces using one or more reference edges.
You select one or more edges on each face being drafted. The
reference edges that you select define the hinge points for the
74
drafted faces. The draft direction is defined by a selected linear
edge or planar face. For a linear edge, the draft direction follows the
edge. For a planar face, the draft direction is perpendicular to the
face. The draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. The
756
following examples show a face that is successfully drafted using
multiple reference edges that were selected along the bottom of the
left-most face.
Figure 7-59: Example 1: Draft to Edge
7
78
79
Figure 7-60: Example 2: Draft to Edge
710
7
Draft Extrude—Drafts solid faces for an extrude operation. This

option is enabled when all of the faces in your selection are lateral
faces (walls) swept out during an extrude operation. You select
these lateral faces. The drafted faces hinge at the intersection of the
original faces (the faces selected to be drafted) with the planar
chains of curves that defined the original extrude operation. The
draft direction follows the extrusion direction, and the draft angle is
measured with respect to this direction. The following examples
show an extruded solid whose lateral faces have been drafted along
the extrusion direction. The curves that defined the original
extrude operation form the hinges for the drafted faces.
Figure 7-61: Example 1: Draft Extrude
Figure 7-62: Example 2: Draft Extrude
Selecting the Draft Direction

If you draft solid faces using the Draft to Face, Draft to Plane, or
Draft to Edge methods, the draft direction is determined by the
reference geometry that you specify. With the Draft to Face method,
the draft direction is perpendicular to the planar reference face that
you select. With the Draft to Plane method, the draft direction is
perpendicular to the plane that you define. With the Draft to Edge
method, the draft direction either follows a linear edge or is
perpendicular to a planar face, depending on the geometry that
you select to define the direction.
Boolean Operations
You can construct a solid using combinations of two or more existing 7
solids using Boolean functions to add solids together, remove solids
from one another, and find the common region defined by
overlapping solids. For a Boolean Remove or Common operation, you
can choose whether or not to maintain associativity. 72
Boolean operations are a set of functions (Add, Remove, and
Common) that enable solid construction using combinations of two or
more existing solids. Solids can be added together, and removed
(subtracted) from one another. Common regions defined by solids can
be kept while all other material is removed. For each Boolean function,
73
a target body and one or more tool bodies must be selected. The result
of a Boolean operation is always a single solid, regardless of the
number of tool bodies selected.
To initiate a Boolean operation that maintains associativity,
74
choose Boolean Add, Boolean Remove, or Boolean Common
from the Solids menu.
Boolean Add Boolean Remove Boolean Common 756
To initiate a non-associative Boolean operation, choose Non-
associative from the Solids menu, then choose Remove NA
7
or Common regions NA from the submenu.
Remove NA Common regions NA
78
Whichever function you choose, you must then identify a target body.
This is the solid that material is added to, removed from, or
overlapped. Next you select one or more tool bodies, which are the
79
solids that are added to, removed from, or overlapped with the target
body. To perform the operation, choose the End selection option from
the General selection ribbon bar. 710
IMPORTANT: Regardless of the number of tool bodies, the
result of each Boolean operation is always a single body.
If you perform a non-associative Boolean Remove or Common regions

7
operation, use options in the Solid non-associative Boolean dialog box
to choose whether to keep the original target and tool solids in

addition to the new solid created by the Boolean operation.
Figure 7-63: Solid Non-associative Boolean dialog box
In Mastercam, you cannot create disjoint bodies and maintain

associativity between them. If a Boolean Remove or Common regions
operation fails because it would create a disjoint body, you are
informed and asked if you want to create a non-associative Boolean (a
brick solid). To continue the Boolean operation and display the Solid
non-associative Boolean dialog box, choose Yes. To cancel the Boolean
operation, choose No.
Solid Find Features

Use the Find Features function to quickly locate holes or
fillets on imported bricks or other solid bodies whose base
operation in the history is “Body.” When you select a feature
to detect, you also specify whether to remove detected
instances of the feature or to recreate the operations and any
associated geometry needed to reconstruct the detected instances of
the feature. Removing features is useful when creating toolpaths that
precede or ignore the features. Creating solid operations adds them to
the solid’s history tree, where they can be modified using the Solids
Manager. When you create operations, you can also indicate whether
to combine selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single
operation.
Figure 7-64: Solid Find Features dialog box
7
72
73
74
When operating on a brick, the Find Features function modifies the 756
solid by removing features and adding operations to its history, while
maintaining the modified brick as a solid body at the top of the history
tree. The Find Features function only recognizes features on imported
brick solids or on brick solids created in Mastercam from stitching,
Boolean, or trim operations.
7
IMPORTANT: The Find Features function does not recognize
solid bodies with dirty, invalid, or suppressed operations.
Regenerate these solids and restore them to a clean state
78
before using the Find Features function. For more information
on using the Solid Manager Suppress function, see “Suppress
Solid Operations” on page 684.
79
Finding, Removing, and Creating Fillets on a Solid Body
You can detect, remove, and create constant-radius fillets on brick
solids. Only fillets whose radius falls within a specified range are
detected. Combining operations fillets similar edges as one
710
operation in history.
Finding, Removing, and Creating Holes on a Solid Body

You can detect, remove, and create through holes and blind holes
(pass through solid in one direction) on brick solids. Only holes
7
whose radius falls within a specified range are detected. Combining
operations aggregates multiple chains into one extrude cut

operation.
When finding and recreating holes in a single face, Mastercam
recognizes the contours of the face the hole cuts through. If a hole
cuts through multiple faces, Mastercam will try to extend one face
and cap the hole in a single plane. If Mastercam cannot recreate the
hole, the operation fails.
Solid From Surfaces

This function allows you to create one or more solids from selected
surfaces by stitching them together. If you select all surfaces, and edge
gaps between surfaces are within a specified tolerance, a closed solid
body is created. Otherwise, an open sheet body is created. You can also
select sheet solids and change an open sheet into a closed body by
continued use of the stitching function.
This function is useful for working on imported files
containing surface representations of a solid or for
converting newly constructed surfaces that may have been
created to replace problem surfaces. Stitching surfaces can result in
the same kind of sheet solid as removing one or more faces from a
closed solid body.
Figure 7-65: Stitch Solid from Surfaces dialog box
If Mastercam cannot create a closed solid body, a message asks if you

want to create edge curves on open edges.
To select a color for the edge curves and create an open sheet
body with edge-curve geometry, choose Yes.
To create the open sheet body without edge-curve geometry,

choose No.
You can change an open sheet body into a closed solid body by using
7
the Thicken function to thicken it. For more information, see “Solid
Thicken” on page 669.
TIP: To set default stitching parameter values for the Stitch 72

Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box, from the Mastercam menu
choose Settings, Configuration, Solids.
Layout
73
To create a layout of different views of solids in the current
file (for example, top, side, front, and isometric), use Layout.
You can choose from the following standard layouts: 74
4View DIN: bottom, front, left, and isometric views
4View ANSI: top, front, right, and isometric views
3View DIN: bottom, front, and left views
3View ANSI: top, front, and right views
756
Or you can use create your own layout containing up to four named
views.
7
78
79
710
7
Figure 7-66: Create Solid Drawing Layout dialog box
Once you create the basic layout from this dialog box, you can use the
Edit Solid Drawing Layout dialog box options to customize it further
by editing settings such as Hidden Lines, Paper Size, or Scale Factor.
You can also add, remove, and modify views.
Figure 7-67: Edit Solid Drawing Layout dialog box
7
72
73
74
756
7
78
To add a cross-section view to the drawing layout, choose the
Add Section button. You can define the cross-section view
79
based on a straight horizontal or vertical line through any
point in the part, a zigzag cross-section, or a 3D plane. In
addition to selecting the point(s) or plane where you want the
section to divide, you can set a color, scale factor, and location
710
for the section view. When you create a section view, short line
segments are added to all the applicable views, showing the
precise location and orientation of the section.
Use the Add View button to add a defined view to the drawing
7
layout, and optionally, choose a color and scale factor for the
new view.
The Add Detail button allows you to create detail drawings

that zoom in on small sections of a part. You can define a
detail view using a rectangle or circle. In addition to defining a
zoom area for the detailed view, you can set the color, scale
factor, and location of the new view.
Figure 7-68: Example: Solids Drawing Layout
Mastercam places the new drawings on a new level so you can easily
keep them separate from your original part. The default level is 255,
but you can specify a different level before saving the layout.
TIP: You can use the Layout function multiple times, for the
same solid or for different one. Each time you create a new
layout, make sure you select a new level for it (unless you want
to replace the existing layout).
Solids Manager
Use the Operations Manager pane in the Mastercam window to access
the Solids Manager tab and view information on each solid in the
current file.
Figure 7-69: Solids Manager
7
72
73
74
756
You can expand the tree structure of a solid to view all operations that
were performed to construct the solid and view any toolpaths that
were created on the solid.
7
Besides listing the operations that define a solid, the Solids Manager
tab provides options for managing and editing solids and solid
operations. To access these options, right–click a solid or operation in
the list. The following section describes how to use the Solids Manager
78
and some of the functions you can perform.
Note: Solids that you import from other applications have no

operation history and are referred to as “bricks”; the Solids
79
Manager tab reflects only the operations that you perform on the
imported solid once it is in Mastercam.
IMPORTANT: You cannot use the Undo Event function,

710
available from the Edit menu, to reverse a change you make
from the solid operation history tree.
Topics in the next section introduce the tools you use to work with
7
solid models, including:
Checking Solid Models

Viewing and Naming Solid Models (page 686)
Editing Solid Models (page 689)
Checking Solid Models

You can check solid models for errors using the following tools:
Suppress Solid Operations
Roll Back a Solid (page 686)
Analyze Check Solids (page 377)
Suppress Solid Operations

The Suppress function in the Solids Manager right–click menu acts as
a toggle to suppress or restore selected solid operations from the solid
model. You can rebuild the solid model without factoring in the
operations you choose to suppress. This function makes it easy to
check a solid model in various states without having to delete and
recreate operations.
X To suppress an operation:
1 From the Solids Manager tab, select the solid operation to
suppress.
2 Right–click and verify that the operation is not already
suppressed (no check mark appears next to this option in the
menu).
3 Choose Suppress. This activates the feature for the selected
operation and removes the operation from view in the
graphics window. In the right–click menu for the selected
operation, a check mark indicator appears next to the
Suppress function and the icon in the Solids Manager appears
unavailable.
To restore a suppressed operation, select it from the Solids Manager,
right–click and choose Suppress from the menu. Mastercam restores
the operation to the graphics window and removes the check mark
from the function in the menu.
IMPORTANT: Use the Suppress function only as a temporary

measure of the model’s integrity, and pay careful attention to
the actions you take while operations are suppressed. Due to
7
the dependent nature of solid operations, your actions could
render the model invalid when you restore the suppressed
operations.
72
Notes:
• While an operation is suppressed, you cannot edit its
parameters or geometry or select it for use in any other
73
operation.
• This function is not available for base operations.
• If an operation does not appear in the graphics window but
does not have a check mark next to the Suppress option, it is
74
dependant on a prior operation and that operation is
suppressed. The dependant operation can be viewed
(unsuppressed) only by unsuppressing the operation on which
it is dependent. 756
7
78
79
710
7
Roll Back a Solid

To mark the end of the operations that define a single solid
entity, all solids listed in the Solids Manager, including tool
bodies, end with a stop operation (Stop Op) icon.
To roll back (revert) a solid to an earlier stage in its development, you
can move the Stop Op icon to a different position in the solid’s
operation list. When a solid is in a rolled back state, Mastercam
rebuilds the model only to the stop point. All operations beyond the
stop point are suppressed and appear unavailable in the operation list.
The roll back feature is commonly used to identify and fix invalid
operations or to build a model one operation at a time when you are
editing operations.
TIP: When a solid is rolled back, operations that you perform

are added to the end of the active operations in the model
(before the stop point) instead of at the end of the operation list.
Therefore you may find the roll back function a useful way to
insert an operation in the middle of the operation list instead of
adding it to the end of the list and then dragging it to the correct
position, which sometimes fails due to operation dependencies.
Notes:
• The stop operation is inserted after the operation on which you
release the mouse button.
• To return the solid to its original state, drag the Stop Op icon to
the last operation in the list. When you release the mouse
button, the operation is inserted after the final operation in the
list.
Viewing and Naming Solid Models

Use the following tools to view and name solid models:
Rename Solids and Solid Operations
Highlight Solid Operations (page 687)
Identify a Solid Operation Based on its Geometry (page 688)
Expand and Contract Solid Operation Details (page 688)
Rename Solids and Solid Operations

The names you assign to solids and their operations can help identify 7
them when viewing the Solids Manager list. When you perform a solid
operation, you can assign it a unique name or accept the default name,
which reflects the operation type (for example, Extrude Cut, Boolean
Remove, Fillet). 72
Unlike solid operations, solids cannot be assigned unique names
when you create them. However, you can rename both solids and solid
operations at any time using the Rename option in the Solids Manager
right–click menu. 73
X To rename a solid or operation:
1 From the Solid Manager tab, select the solid or operation to
rename.
2 Right–click and choose Rename.
74
3 Type the new name and press Enter or click elsewhere in the
Mastercam window.
756
Note: You can also rename an operation by editing the operation’s
parameters and entering a new name in the Name field.
Highlight Solid Operations

7
Use the Auto-Highlight feature to quickly identify the faces of
wireframe geometry associated with a solid operation. This feature can
help you verify that the correct operation has been selected, prior to
editing.
78
Auto-highlighting is a toggle setting you access from the Solids
manager tab right–click menu. Its status is on (indicated by a check
mark in the list) or off (no check mark). 79
If auto-highlighting is on, whenever you select an operation in
the Solids Manager, the solid’s wireframe geometry in the
graphics window changes to the Solid Face Select Color that
was set in the Settings, Configuration, Colors properties 710
page. The geometry remains highlighted until you select a
different operation or leave the Solids Manager.
If Auto-Highlight is turned off, manual highlighting is
enabled. In this state, the highlighting lasts for only a couple
of seconds then disappears.
7
To specify whether Auto-highlight selects complete solids or

just faces, use the Screen properties page of the System
Note: For more information on configuring your Mastercam

installation, see “Customizing and Configuring Mastercam X” on
page 81.
Identify a Solid Operation Based on its Geometry

You can identify an operation in the Solids Manager by choosing the
Select button and then selecting geometry (a solid face) in the
graphics window.
Mastercam matches the selected geometry with the operation defined

by the geometry.
This function is particularly useful when you are working on a complex
solid that has a large number of operations. You can quickly identify
the operation you are looking for rather than checking multiple
operations using highlighting.
Expand and Contract Solid Operation Details

The Solids Manager lists the operation history for each solid in the
current file. You can expand or contract the tree structure of a solid to
show or hide a list of operations that define the solid. Likewise, you can
expand or contract the tree structure of each operation to show or hide
its editable components (for example, parameters and geometry).
Figure 7-70: Solids Manager views, contracted and expanded
7
72
73
To expand or contract a tree structure, click the plus (+) or minus
(-) sign preceding a solid or solids operation (or double-click the item). 74
Note: Imported solids have no operation history. The tree structure
of an imported solid lists only the operations that have been
performed on the solid since it was imported into Mastercam. 756
Editing Solid Models
The Solids Manager provides a number of tools and functions for
7
editing solid models. In this section, you will learn to:
Edit Solid Parameters (page 689)
Edit Solid Attributes (page 691)
Delete Solids and Solid Operations (page 692)
78
Regenerate Solids (page 692)
Duplicate Solids (page 694)
Change the Order of Solid Operations (page 694)
79
Edit Solid Parameters
You can edit the parameters that define a selected operation in a
manner similar to editing toolpath operations. Some of the original
710
defining parameters, however, may not be editable. For example, you
cannot change an extrude, revolve, sweep, or loft operation from a
create to a cut or boss, but you can change any of these operations
from a cut to a boss—provided the change would not create disjoint
7
bodies. There are no parameters available for editing Boolean and
Trim operations. For these operations, you can edit only their
geometry. To change the actual Boolean and Trim operations, you

must delete and recreate them.
X To edit solid parameters:

1 From the Solids Manager tab, use one of the following
methods to access the operations parameters dialog box for a
selected operation:
Click the Parameters tab in the operation list.
Select the operation, right–click and choose Edit
Parameters. Mastercam opens the dialog box you use to
define the operation parameters.
2 Use the dialog box fields and options to edit parameters, as
necessary.
3 To accept your changes and close the dialog box, click OK.
IMPORTANT: Changing operation parameters or geometry

may require you to regenerate the operation (indicated by a red
X on the solid and the operation icons), or may result in an
invalid operation (indicated by a question mark on the solid and
operation icons). Take the appropriate steps to restore the
operation and solid status to “clean.”
Edit Solid Geometry

Using the Solids Manager geometry tab or right–click menu function,
you can edit solid operations that are defined by geometry, such as
chains, or edges. Each solid operation is associated with the solid on
which the operation is performed. Changes that you make to an
operation’s geometry (for example, adding or deleting selections)
affect only the selected operation and its associated solid. Mastercam
does not support edits that would result in the creation of a new
operation or solid, but does support the creation of brick solids by
Trim and Boolean (Remove, Common) operations.
X To edit solid geometry:

1 From the Solids Manager tab, use one of the following
methods to access the edit geometry functions for a selected
operation:
Click the Geometry tab in the operation list.
Select the operation, right–click and choose Edit
Geometry.
If you select an Extrude, Revolve, Sweep, or Loft operation,

Mastercam opens the Solid Chain Manager dialog box.
If you select any other solid operation, the cursor is positioned
7
in the graphics window. Use the prompts work with the
operations geometry.
2 Save your changes using the available options. 72
Note: Geometry cannot be edited for Boolean (Add, Remove,
Common) or Primitive (Cone, Block, Cylinder, Torus, Sphere)
operations.
73
Edit Solid Attributes
You can edit a solid’s attributes by accessing the Solid Attributes dialog
box from the Solids Manager right–click menu. First select the solid in
74
the Solids Manager list. Then right–click and choose Attributes.
756
7
78
79
X To edit solid attributes:
1 From the Solids Manager, select a solid name from the list.
2 Right-click and choose Attributes. 710

3 Use the Solid Attributes dialog box fields and options to view
and edit one or more of the following attributes of the selected
solid
Level
7
Color
Note: Although they appear in the dialog box, the Line Style and
Line Width fields are not currently used with solid models.
4 To accept your changes and exit the dialog box, choose OK.
TIP: You can also use the Analyze function from the Analyze
menu to edit the level and color attributes of a selected solid.
For more information, see “Changing Entity Attributes” on
page 377.
Delete Solids and Solid Operations

When you delete a solid, Mastercam automatically deletes all
operations associated with the solid. When you delete an operation, all
dependant operations are also deleted. For example, if you delete an
extrude operation on which a fillet operation has been performed, the
fillet operation is deleted with the extrude operation.
Base operations or tool bodies cannot be deleted. However, if you
delete a Boolean operation, its tool bodies are restored as distinct
solids that are no longer associated with the target body.
IMPORTANT: Deleting a solid operation is a permanent

change. You cannot use the Undo Event or Undelete entity
functions to reverse the deletion.
X To delete a solid or solids operations:

1 From the Solids Manager, select the solid or solid operation to
delete.
2 Press the Delete key or right–click and choose Delete.
Note: When you delete operations, Mastercam marks the

corresponding solid with a dirty status. Regenerate the solid to see
your changes reflected in the model.
Regenerate Solids
Regeneration is the process of rebuilding a solid so that it matches its
associated operations. This is required whenever a solid becomes dirty
or invalid due to changes to the parameters and/or geometry of one or
more of its operations. When you regenerate a solid, Mastercam

incorporates your changes into the solid and restores the solid to a
clean state, if possible. Regeneration fails if a solid has one or more
invalid operations. You must edit and correct invalid operations before
7
you can successfully regenerate them.
TIP: When making many changes to a model, regenerate often.

Then, if regeneration fails, you will have to make fewer
72
corrections to return the operation to a valid state. You can
access regeneration options for a selected solid or for all solids
from the Solids Manager right–click menu.
73
X To regenerate a “dirty” solid:
1 From the Solids Manager tab, select a solid or any component
operation. 74
2 Right–click and choose Regen Solid.
If Mastercam cannot restore the solid and/or operation to

a clean status, error messages indicate the nature of the
problem and you must make the necessary corrections.
756
Then repeat this procedure.
If the regeneration is successful, the solid and the
operation appears “clean” in the Solid Manager list.
7
TIP: To regenerate all operations, choose the Regen All button
in the Solids Manager or choose Regen All Solids from the
right–click menu.
78
79
710
7
Duplicate Solids
You can make exact copies of solids, including tool bodies. Each copy
is an active solid that you can select and edit. This function is
particularly useful if you want to use the same tool body to affect
different target solids.
X To duplicate a solid:
1 From the Solids Manager, select the solid to copy.
2 Right–click and choose Duplicate Solid. The duplicate solid

and all operations appear directly below the original in the
Solid Manager tree.
Note: The Duplicate Solid option appears in the right–click menu

only when you have selected a solid—not a solid operation—in the
Solids Manager.
3 Use Rename and other functions to edit the cloned copy of

the solid, as necessary.
Change the Order of Solid Operations

The Solids Manager lists the operations that define each solid in the
current file. The operations are listed in the order in which they are
performed on the solid. You can change the order by dragging
operations to new positions in the operation list. Mastercam
automatically rebuilds the solid based on the new operation order.
The selected operation is inserted after the operation on which you
release it. As you drag an operation, the cursor changes to a downward
arrow if the move is allowed or to a circle with a slash through it if the
move is not allowed.
Observe the following guidelines, when repositioning operations:
A base operation cannot be repositioned; it is fixed as the first
operation in the list. No other operation can precede it.
If you move an operation that is dependant on one or more
operations, it must occupy a position below its “parent”
operations.
If you move an operation on which other operations are
dependant, you must position it above its dependant
operations.
chapter 8
Setting Up Toolpaths
This chapter provides an overview of the machining process
within Mastercam and discusses some of the ways in which you
set up your machining jobs. It covers the following topics:
Machining Process Overview. . . . . . . . . . . page 696
Choosing a Machine and Control Definition
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 697
Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 700
Setting Machine Group Properties. . . . . . page 709
Machining Process Overview

X This outline represents an overview of the Mastercam CAM
workflow. It identifies each major step in the process.
1 From the Machine Type menu, choose a machine definition
that will be used to cut the part.
2 Open or import a part file.
3 Set the machine group properties, including file, tool, stock,

and safety zone settings.
4 Create toolpaths and apply them to geometry.
5 Verify and edit the toolpaths using the Toolpath Manager,

Backplot, and Verify functions.
6 Post process selected machine group operations.
Note: For an overview of Machine Definitions, Control Definitions,

and Post Processors, and their relationship, see “The Role of
Machine and Control Definitions” on page 54.
SETTING UP TOOLPATHS / Choosing a Machine and Control Definition • 697
Choosing a Machine and Control

Definition
8
Mastercam machine definitions allow you to run multiple Mastercam 82
product types, such as Mill, Lathe, Router, and Wire, from a single
Mastercam window. After you select the desired machines, and
Mastercam has created a machine group for each one, you can work
with different Mastercam products within the same part file simply by
selecting the proper machine group.
83
Figure 8-1: Example: Machine Type Menu
84
85
The machine definition files for each product have unique file
extensions that represent the selected machine type:
.MMD (Mill)
.LMD (Lathe)
86
.RMD (Router)
.WMD (Wire)
When you select a machine definition from the Machine Type menu,
all of the following things happen automatically:
87
A machine group and toolpath group are created in the
Toolpath Manager.
The proper control definition is loaded. 8
The post processor is identified, based on the selection saved
in the machine definition.
A copy of the machine and control definition is loaded in the
newly created machine group and saved with the part file.
89
810
The Mastercam interface changes to support the selected

machine type. For example, if you select a lathe machine
definition, the Toolpaths menu shows Mastercam Lathe
toolpath functions. Also, you can associate toolbar states with
your machine definition, so that only appropriate toolbars—
or your own custom toolbars—display.
Note: Each machine group can have only one machine definition.
Mastercam creates a separate machine group and toolpath group
each time you choose a machine type from the Machine Type
menu.
The machine definition you access from the machine group is a local
copy of the “master” machine definition. The master machine
definition is stored in an external file. The copy is created from this
external file when you select the machine definition and is stored
locally within the part file. There is no associative link between the
master machine definition file and the part file copy. This
independent, portable structure allows you to move the part to
another Mastercam workstation and transfer the required machine
and control definition information. You can also modify aspects of the
machine definition in a machine group without affecting the machine
definition and control definition files stored in Mastercam.
IMPORTANT: A copy of the post processor is not stored with

the part file. If you move the part file to another Mastercam
workstation, you must also transfer the post processor.
SETTING UP TOOLPATHS / Choosing a Machine and Control Definition • 699
X To select a machine definition and create a new machine group:

1 From the Machine Type drop-down menu, choose Mill,
Router, Lathe, or Wire to open a submenu of existing 8
machine definitions for the selected machine type. Then
perform one of the following actions:
If the machine definition you want to use appears in the
submenu list, select it. 82
Otherwise, choose Manage list. From the Machine
Definitions Menu Manager, select the machine definition
file you want to use and add it to the list.
2 When you choose a machine definition, Mastercam 83
automatically creates a machine group and a toolpath group
in the Toolpath Manager. The machine definition becomes
active and the toolpath group appears selected.
84
Use the Toolpath Manager to modify the machining

85
properties including Files, Tool settings, Stock setup, and
Safety zone parameters.
3 Use Toolpaths functions to create toolpath operations for the
active machine group.
86
Note: You will learn more about “Setting Machine Group
Properties” on page 709 and “Working with Toolpaths” on
page 733.
87
8
89
810
Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files

Using Open dialog box options (page 700)
Opening and Importing Files (page 704)
Merging Pattern Files (page 706)
Using Open dialog box options

When you choose the File menu Open and File Merge / Pattern
functions, the same Open dialog box displays. Before using the
procedures in this section to open, import, and merge files, take a few
minutes to become familiar with the basic features and functions of
the Open dialog box.
Figure 8-2: Open dialog box
Use the Files of type drop-down list to choose the format of the files
you want to view and select from. This limits the files you can view to
only files in the selected format.
If you select a non-native file type from the Files of type list,
Mastercam enables the Options button. Use this button to open a
SETTING UP TOOLPATHS / Opening / Importing / Merging Part Files • 701
dialog box of read parameters for the selected file type. Mastercam
uses the parameters to import and convert the chosen file. The
example below illustrates options for opening and importing an SAT
file type:
8
82
83
84
Note: The default values in read parameters dialog boxes are
based on settings defined in the Settings, Configuration,
85
Converters properties page. For more information, see “Setting
Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)” on page 111.
To navigate to the location of the file you want to open, use the Look in
86
drop-down list located at the top of the Open dialog box. Or use
additional options in this dialog box to view and select the file:
Back: Return to a previously viewed folder. 87

Up one level: Navigate and view files in the next highest
level directory / subdirectory. 8
Create New Folder: Creates a new folder in the current
directory.
89
View Menu: View files in list, tile, icon, detail, or
thumbnail format.
810
Previewing a File
In the Open dialog box, activate the Preview and Descriptor panes with
the Preview and Descriptor check boxes. Use the Preview pane to see a
thumbnail of a selected file. The Descriptor pane shows the text
descriptor associated with the file. To browse files faster, deselect the
check boxes to turn off the Preview and Descriptor options.
Figure 8-3: The Preview and Descriptor panes
Switching Units of Measure

When opening a file, if the selected file does not use the same unit of
measure (English or metric) as the current configuration file, the
System Configuration (switch units) dialog box displays. This dialog
box informs you that Mastercam must switch units by loading the
alternate default configuration file.
8
82
83
Select one of the following options to switch units and open the
selected file:
Units: Uses only the units defined in the new configuration
84
file. (default)
All settings: Loads all settings from the new configuration
file.
85
Using the Places Bar
All of the file dialogs feature a customizable Places bar, in which you
can add or remove shortcuts to your own folders, as well as change the
86
order in which the folders are listed. Right-click in the Places bar to
display the menu shown in the picture below:
87
8
89
810
In the menu, choose from these commands:

Add current folder -- Adds the folder shown in the Look in
box.
Remove -- Removes the selected folder. (To select a folder,
right-click the folder in the Places bar.)
Move up -- Moves the selected folder up in the Places bar.
Move down -- Moves the selected folder down in the Places
bar.
Rename -- Renames the selected folder's label.
Restore default folders -- Restores all of the standard folders
to the Places bar. (Does not remove user-added folders.)
Opening and Importing Files

Use the File, Open function to open files including Mastercam formats
such as .MCX, .MC9, or .MC8, and a number of supported neutral file
formats such as .IGES, .DWF, .STL and others. Supported file formats
are immediately converted to the current Mastercam format (MCX)
when you open the file in Mastercam.
Notes:
• If you do not have Mastercam Solids installed, you can still 8
machine an imported solid. However, Mastercam Solids must
be installed to modify a solid, or create additional solids (with
the exception of primitives).
• You can also save .MCX files out to any supported file format.
For more information on the files types you can import and
82
export, see “Opening and Translating Files” on page 58.
X To open a native Mastercam part file: 83

1 From the Mastercam menu, choose File, Open.
2 In the Open dialog box, use the Files of type drop-down list
and select MCX, MC9, or MC8.
3 Use other options to navigate to the file location, select the
84
file, and choose OK.
4 If the selected file uses the same unit of measure (English or
metric) as the current configuration file, skip to Step 5. 85
Otherwise, in the System Configuration (switch units) dialog
box, choose Units or All settings to switch units and load an
alternate default configuration file.
5 When opening the selected file, Mastercam automatically
86
runs an integrity/efficiency check to remove instabilities in
the file. It verifies the information stored in the file, such as
associativity, machine and toolpath groups, operations, tools,
and more. 87
If the file passes the integrity check, you can begin working
with it.
If problems are detected, Mastercam reports detailed
information on all errors it finds. In some cases, you can
8
choose to have Mastercam fix the errors, or use the Details
option to view, print, and optionally save the error details
to a file. Before working with the file, you must manually
correct any reported problems. 89
Note: Mastercam part files from X2 and the initial version of
Mastercam X are not compatible, even though they both have an
.MCX extension. Mastercam automatically translates older
Mastercam X files to the X2 format when you open them.
810
TIP: If you also want Mastercam to check for and delete

duplicate entities at the same time, use the Settings,
Configuration function Start / Exit properties page to set this
default. Duplicate entities interfere with entity selection,
particularly chaining.
X To import a non-Mastercam file:

1 From the Mastercam menu, choose File, Open.
and select a non-Mastercam file format.
3 To set import parameters:
a Choose Options.
b In the read parameters dialog box for the selected file type,
complete the fields as necessary.
c To accept the parameters and return to the Open dialog
box, click OK.
4 Use other Open dialog box options to navigate to the file
location, select the file to import, and choose OK.
The selected file is imported and converted to the current
Mastercam format (MCX) using the settings in the
Configuration, Converters properties page and, if applicable,
the import read parameters you defined in Step 3. In most
cases, the default machine definition is assigned to the
imported file.
Merging Pattern Files

You can import entities from another file and merge them into the
current file. The File menu File Merge / Pattern function and ribbon
bar allow you to quickly add entity features, such as nuts or bolts, that
are used repeatedly in the part. Rather than recreate an entity each
time you need it, just import it into the current file as many times as
necessary.
Note: In addition to geometric entities, such as lines, surfaces, or

solids, you can import annotated data, such as drafting
dimensions. However, toolpaths cannot be imported due to their
complex nature.
X To merge a pattern file into the current file:

1 From the Mastercam menu, choose File, File Merge / Pattern.
8
and other options to navigate to the file location.
3 Select the file containing the entities you want to add to the
current file and choose OK. The entities in the selected file are
added to the file in the local origin position (X0, Y0, Z0) and
82
the Top view. The merged entities are “live” so that you can
edit them.
4 Use options in the Merge / Pattern ribbon bar to select a new
base point for placing the merged entities and to define their
83
scale, rotation angle, and mirror axis (X, Y, or Z).
Figure 8-4: Merge / Pattern ribbon bar
84
s
te
bu
tri
at
nt
te
t
85
r
lec
ale
rre
ta
irr
Se
Ro
Sc
Cu
Notes:
• Use the Select option to create a point that positions the center
of the pattern file.
86
• Pattern entities are created in the current Cplane.
You can also choose to assign the current attributes in the

Status bar fields to the imported entities. Because the merged
87
entities are live, as you choose values for the Merge (file)
ribbon bar fields and options, the results show immediately in
5 To accept the new entities and continue importing the same
8
set of entities from the pattern file to a different location in the
current file, click the Apply button.
6 To accept the new entities and exit the File Pattern function,
press Esc, or choose another Mastercam function.
89
810
IMPORTANT: Each time you merge a set of pattern entities

into the current file, Mastercam identifies the entities as a group
in the database for future use. Mastercam names the group
using the pattern file name and a sequential number to ensure
the uniqueness of the group name.
TIPS:
• Consider storing the files containing pattern entities in a
separate directory, such as \Patterns, so they are easy to
locate when you use this function.
• To remove merged entities in the order in which they were
added to the current file, choose Undo from the Edit menu or
toolbar.
SETTING UP TOOLPATHS / Setting Machine Group Properties • 709
Setting Machine Group Properties

8
This section includes the following topics:
Working with the Toolpath Manager (page 710)
Using the Insert Arrow (page 712)
82
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups (page 714)
Editing Machine Group Properties (page 717)
83
84
85
86
87
8
89
810
Working with the Toolpath Manager

The Toolpath Manager is a central location where you manage all the
elements of the current job. You access it from the Toolpaths tab in the
Mastercam window Operations Manager pane.
Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager / Art Manager tabs
Toolpath Manager
functions
For each selected machine

definition, a separate
machine group is created.
You can create one or

more toolpath operations Toolpath Manager
per toolpath group. list. Right-click in
the list to access
an extensive menu
of functions.
Insert arrow. Its position

determines which
machine group is the
active machine group.
Note: If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, use the Solids

tab to access the Solids Manager. In addition to listing the features
that define a solid, the Solids Manager tab provides options for
managing and editing solids. In the Art tab, you can use the Art
Manager to view the details of any Art models in your part.
However, Mastercam Art is required to use most of the functions
available in the Art Manager and from the Mastercam Art menu.
Use the Toolpath Manager to generate, sort, edit, regenerate, verify,

backplot, and post selected operations, including associative and
non-associative toolpaths. 8
The Toolpath Manager list is a nested hierarchy of folders that organize
the following types of information:
Machine group
82
Machine (machine group properties)
Toolpath group
83
Toolpath group operations
Toolpath subgroup
84
Toolpath subgroup operations
Machine and operations folders have additional levels of properties

85
and attributes that you can modify. You will learn more about this in
the following sections on “Editing Machine Group Properties” on
page 717 and “Editing Operations” on page 767.
TIP: When you position the cursor in the Toolpath Manager, the
86
Toolpath Manager options become active; any keyboard
commands you enter are executed in the Toolpath Manager.
This focus is deactivated when you move the cursor outside of
the Toolpath Manager pane, and different options become
87
active.
8
89
810
Using the Insert Arrow

In the Toolpath Manager list, use the insert arrow to indicate where to
place the next operation that you create. The machine group in which
the insert arrow is positioned is referred to as the active machine
group. The active machine group defines the options you can choose
from the Toolpath Manager, its right–click menu, and the Mastercam
Toolpaths menu. It also identifies the source and target of selected
options, such as the addition of setup sheets, or the import or export of
operations.
The default position for the insert arrow is at the end of the Toolpath
Manager list. To reposition the arrow, use the left mouse button to
select it and continue to hold down the mouse button as you “drag and
drop” it to a new position in the list. You can also press [Shift} and the
keyboard up and down arrow keys, or use the insert arrow buttons in
the Toolpath Manager menu to reposition it.
TIPS:
• Mastercam saves the most recently used plane, view, and
WCS selections for each machine group, and restores them
whenever you activate the machine group. For example, if
one machine group has toolpaths on the front of the part,
and another machine group has toolpaths on the side of the
part, when you activate a machine group, Mastercam
automatically activates the views and planes you were using
the last time the group was active.
• To activate a machine group when working in Mastercam
Design (choose Machine Type, Design), select the machine
group in the Toolpath Manager, and then right–click and
choose Make machine group active. This loads the
associated Mastercam application (Mill, Router, Lathe, Wire).
Figure 8-5: Toolpath Manager Insert Arrow
Move up one item. Position below last item in the selected operation / group. 8
Move down one item. Scroll Toolpath Manager view to insert arrow position.
82
Active machine group
83
84
85
Insert arrow indicates
the active machine
group and the position
of the next operation
you create.
86
Drag and drop the
insert arrow to a new
position, or use the
arrow buttons to
87
reposition it in the list.
8
89
810
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath

Groups
In the Toolpath Manager, you use machine groups to centralize and
organize machining properties and toolpath information. Each
machine group is associated with a single machine type (Mill, Lathe,
Router, or Wire) and machine definition.
The machine group stores important job setup information like the
stock model, safety zone, material selection, tool offset preferences,
and feed rate and spindle speed preferences.
All toolpath operations you create in the machine group are posted to
the same NC file unless you override this setting. (For more
information on changing this setting for one or more selected
operations, and on using other functions to modify operations, see
“Editing Operations” on page 767.)
Machine groups allow you to:
Organize your machining operations into logical groups.
Link toolpaths to specific machine and control definitions.
Access and modify the local copy of the machine and control
definition to make part- or job-specific changes.
Link sets of machining operations directly to job information.
X To create a machine group for a selected machine definition:

From the Machine Type menu, choose a machine type and
machine definition.
X To create a machine group using a default machine definition:

In the Toolpath Manager, right–click and choose Groups,
New Machine Group, and a machine type (Mill, Lathe, 8
Router, or Wire).
82
When you use either method, Mastercam creates a new machine
group for the selected machine definition and a new toolpath group
directly below the new machine group. 83
The new machine group and toolpath group are inserted at the end of
the Toolpath Manager list.
Both groups are assigned a unique default name, such as Machine
Group-1, Machine Group-2, Toolpath Group-1, Toolpath Group-2, and
84
so on.
IMPORTANT: The machine definition in the machine group is

actually a local copy of the machine definition file.
85
You can create as many different machine groups as you need in the
same part file. By using machine groups to organize operations, you
can include toolpaths for different machines in the same part file, even
86
for different machines types. For example, if some part features will be
cut on a mill and others on a lathe, you can include all of the
operations in the same Mastercam file by creating different machine
groups for each set of mill and lathe operations. 87
You can also create groups of toolpaths on the same machine that you
will want to post separately. To do this, use the Toolpath Manager
right–click menu Groups functions to create toolpath groups. Toolpath
groups inherit all the properties of the parent machine group. The
parent machine group is defined as the machine group that is
8
89
810
positioned immediately above the toolpath group in the Toolpath

Manager list.
Parent machine path group Properties

apply to all levels of subordinate
toolpath groups.
You can nest toolpath groups to create an operations hierarchy with

several different layers of operations.
X To create toolpath groups for the active machine group:

To add a new toolpath group at the highest level, select the
machine group in the Toolpath Manager. Otherwise, to nest
the new toolpath group, select the next highest toolpath group
in the list. Then right–click and choose Groups, New
Toolpath group.
The new toolpath group is added to the machine group, based
on the selected position, and assumes the machine group
properties.
Renaming Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups

You can rename a machine group or toolpath groups using one of the
following methods:
To use standard mouse techniques, click once on the machine
group or toolpath groups in the Toolpath Manager list to
select it. Then click again to change the name to an editable
text field.
To use the Toolpath Manager right–click menu, select the
group to rename. Then right–click in the Toolpath Manager,
choose Groups, Rename, and edit the name.
Editing Machine Group Properties

When you select a machine definition to create a new machine group,
default machining properties are automatically assigned, based on the
8
configuration settings and the machine / control definition settings. A
new toolpath group is automatically created directly below the new
machine group in the Toolpath Manager list.
In the Toolpath Manager list, machine group properties are organized
82
as property types you can display by expanding the Properties folder.
83
84
Each property type corresponds to a tab in the Machine Group
Properties dialog box.
To open the Machine Group Properties dialog box, select a property
type from the Toolpath Manager list. Then use the tabs in the dialog
85
box to view and edit the settings.
Default values for many machine group properties are saved in the
toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) file. Use the Files tab to edit them: 86
87
Defaults for some properties are set in the control definition. The
sections for the individual tabs list these.
8
In this section, you will learn to set parameters in each of the following
Machine Group Properties dialog box tabs:
Files Tab (page 718) 89
Tool Settings Tab(page 722)
Stock Setup Tab(page 727)
Safety Zone Tab(page 730)
810
Files Tab
Use the Files tab to view and define the file names and data paths used
by operations in the selected machine group. These settings affect
default values, posting, and tool and operation libraries.
The default tool library for a new machine group is set in the machine
definition as part of the General Machine Parameters. You can use the
Files tab to change the default library for the selected machine group.
No matter what the default tool library is, though, when you create a
new toolpath you can always open any tool library and select tools
from it.
Note: Many of the default paths and filenames that display in the
Machine Group Properties, Files tab are values you initially set in
the Control Definition Manager, Files and Operation Defaults
properties pages. For more information on these settings, see
“Files” on page 872 and “Operation Defaults” on page 892.
Figure 8-6: Files tab (Machine Group Properties dialog box)
8
82
83
84
85
86
To learn more about the Files tab, review the following information:
Defining the Toolpath (NC File) Name (page 719)
87
Setting up Machine Group Files (page 720)
Editing the Machine Definition (page 720)
Setting up Comments (page 721) 8
Defining the Toolpath (NC File) Name
In the Toolpath name field, type the default path and filename of the
NC file you want to create when posting operations from this machine
group, or choose the Open button to select a file. You can post only 89
operations from a single machine group at one time although you can
select one or more operations in the group you want to post.
810
Note: The combined length of the NC file name plus its path (for
example, c:\mcamx\nc_files\program.nc) cannot be more than
120 characters.
Setting up Machine Group Files

Use the Machine definition, Tool Library, Operation Library, and
Operation Defaults sections to choose the files that Mastercam will
use for the machine group and its operations. For each type of file, you
can:
Set the data path and folder for the files
Select a specific file to use from the drop-down list
Edit the file by choosing the Edit button, located to the right of
the file name
Editing the Machine Definition
By default, the Machine section displays the name of the machine
definition that was active when the machine group was created. You
can choose a different machine in the same way as choosing other
types of files.
When you select a new machine, Mastercam loads a copy of the
machine definition in your part file.When you click the Edit button to
view or make changes to the machine definition, you are changing
only the local copy stored in your part file, not the master machine
definition file.
IMPORTANT:
• If you select a different machine for the machine group, the
files and data paths are replaced with default values from the
control definition used by the selected machine.
• If there are already operations in the machine group, be very
careful when selecting a different machine to ensure the new
machine supports all the toolpath features that have been
programmed.
Note: The control and post processor are displayed only for
information purposes. To change them, you must edit the machine
definition. For more information, see “Choosing a Machine and
Control Definition” on page 697.
Setting up Comments
In the Machine Group Properties Files tab, use the Output comments
to NC file section to choose the types of comments to include in the
8
NC file. In Mastercam, you can still view the comments that you
choose to exclude from the NC file.
To record comments that apply to all the operations in the selected
machine group, select the Output group comments to NC check box.
82
Notes:
• To set the defaults and enter the maximum number of
characters allowed for comments, use the Control Definition
83
Manager, NC Output properties page. For more information,
“NC Output” on page 874.
• When editing tool parameters, you can use the Comment field
in the Tool parameters tab (Toolpath parameters tab for Lathe)
84
to enter operation-specific comments.
• You can also enter machine-specific comments when setting up
the machine definition.
85
86
87
8
89
810
Tool Settings Tab

Use the Tool Settings tab to control NC file numbering, tool offsets,
feeds, speeds, coolant, and other toolpath parameters, including
material selection. Most of the default values for these settings come
from the control definition.
Figure 8-7: Tool Settings tab
(Machine Group Properties dialog box)
To learn more about the Tool Settings tab, review the following
information:
Numbering Tools Sequentially (page 723)
Calculating Default Feed rates (page 725)
Setting Other Toolpath Configuration Parameters (page 726)
Assigning Sequence Numbers (page 726)
Using Advanced Options (page 726)
Numbering Tools Sequentially

Tool numbering options are properties of the machine group. You can
choose to have Mastercam automatically number your tools
8
sequentially, or you can choose to read the tool number stored in the
tool definition.
Figure 8-8: Using the Machine Group Properties to number tools sequentially 82
83
84
85
86
87
8
Use the Tool settings tab of the Machine Group Properties dialog box to number your tools
sequentially, instead of using the tool number stored with the tool definition. The setting shown
89
above applies only to operations created in the current machine group. See “Setting a default
tool numbering method” on page 724 to make this the default setting for future machine groups.
810
Use the Tool settings tab of the Machine Group Properties dialog box
to tell Mastercam your preference, as shown in Figure 8-8. When this
option is not selected, Mastercam reads the tool number from the tool
definition stored in the tool library when you select the tool.
Typically, this setting applies only to the current machine group. You
can make this the default setting for future machine groups by
completing the following procedure.
X Setting a default tool numbering method

Although this procedure specifically addresses tool numbering, you
can use its general outline to save default settings for other
machine group properties as well.
1 In the Toolpath Manager, click the Files icon in your group
Properties section.
2 Click the Edit button in the Operation Defaults section.

3 Scroll up to the top of the window and click Tool settings in

the Properties section.
8
82
83
84
4 Select Assign tool numbers sequentially and click OK.
5 If you work with other .defaults files, select a new file from the
drop-down list and repeat Step 4. In particular, if you program
85
in both inch and metric units, you should edit both inch and
metric .defaults files.
6 Click OK to close the Edit Operation Defaults dialog box, and
close the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
86
Calculating Default Feed rates
Use this section to define the method used to calculate the default feed
rate for an operation. 87
The tool definition for each tool contains default plunge and
feed rates. Select From tool to use these values as the default
value for each operation when a tool is selected.
Select From material to calculate feed rate based on the
8
material characteristics stored in the material library. After
choosing this option, make sure to Select a material in the
Materials section of this tab.
Select From defaults to use the feed rate stored in the 89
operation defaults file.
The Feed section of the control definition contains important defaults
for calculating feed rates and sets how the control will interpret the
feed rate values that are entered for each toolpath, including how to
Adjust feed on arc move.
810
TIP: To override the default feed rate, spindle speed, or the

calculation method that is used, simply type in a new value
when creating an operation.
Setting Other Toolpath Configuration Parameters

Use these options to tell Mastercam how to number your tools for
operations in this group and to set other toolpath options. You can
choose to override operation defaults for step and peck values, and
select coolant choices with defaults from the tool definition. (See
“Numbering Tools Sequentially” on page 723 for a detailed
information about tool numbering.)
Assigning Sequence Numbers

Enter the starting sequence number and sequence increment in these
fields.
TIP: For more sophisticated sequence number formats,

including decimal sequence numbers, use the Control Definition
Manager NC Output properties page to create defaults. For
more information, see “NC Output” on page 874.
Using Advanced Options

The default values for clearance, retract, and feed planes are read from
the operation defaults file specified on the Machine Group Properties
Files tab. Use the options in this section to replace those defaults with
modal settings from the operations in the machine group.
For example, the feed plane in the operations defaults file might be set
to 3mm, incremental. However, if you choose to use modal defaults for
the feed plane, every time you create an operation in the group, the
default feed plane is set to the feed plane from the previous operation,
not 3mm.
Stock Setup Tab

Stock models help you visualize toolpaths more realistically. Use the
options in this tab to create a stock model for the machine group or to
8
select a file containing the stock model. For Mastercam Lathe, you can
also use this tab to define chucks, tailstocks, and steady rests. You can
choose to display the stock model with the part geometry when
viewing the file or toolpaths, during backplot functions, or when
82
verifying toolpaths.
Figure 8-9: Stock Setup tab
83
84
85
86
87
8
The options that are available in the Stock setup tab are based on the
Mastercam product associated with the machine definition in the
selected machine group. You can define different stock setup
89
parameters for Mastercam Lathe than for Mastercam Mill and
Mastercam Router. Your options for defining each type of stock set up
are described below.
810
Mill / Router Stock Setup
Note: For information on Lathe Stock Setup options, see page 729.
Selecting Stock Model Types—There are several ways you can create
stock models.
Choose Rectangular or Cylindrical to create simple stock
models that are not defined by actual geometry. All
dimensions are entered in this dialog box and no geometry is
added to your part file. You can choose whether or not to
Display the stock on the screen.
Choose Solid to use a solid model inside the current part file
as the stock.
Choose File to use a solid model from an STL file as the stock
model.
Setting Stock Dimensions—You can use several techniques for setting
the stock dimensions. Type the dimensions directly into the X, Y, and Z
fields, or use one of the following methods when the exact dimensions
are unknown:
Choose Select corners to return to the graphics window and
select the two opposing corners of a 3D rectangle.
Choose Bounding box to calculate the furthest points in the
part geometry.
Choose NCI extents to calculate the furthest points in the
toolpaths, based on just the feed rate moves.
Mastercam automatically calculates the stock dimensions and
displays them in the fields. You can then edit them, as necessary.
Setting Stock Origin—Use the stock origin to locate the stock relative
to your part. First, choose a point on the stock to use for the stock
origin. In the dialog box, the cross shows you where the stock origin is:
The default position is the middle of the stock. Select a corner of the
part to set it as the stock origin.
Next, type the coordinates of this point in the Stock origin fields, or
click the Select button to choose a point from the graphics window.
Note: Use the Verify function to perform gouge checking. For more
information, see “Verifying Operations” on page 784. 8
Setting Stock View—Select a stock view to properly orient the stock
model with respect to the part. This may be necessary if you create
toolpaths in a work coordinate system (WCS) other than Top and want
to align the stock model to your part, or if you have several toolpaths in
82
the machine group that use more than one WCS. The stock view keeps
the stock model constant when the WCS changes. You can align the
stock model to any named view saved in the part file.
To do this, click the Stock View button and select a view from the
83
View Selection dialog box. The edges of the stock model are parallel
with the axes of the selected view.
Note: If you change the stock view, you might need to reset the stock
84
origin.
Lathe Stock Setup

Defining and configuring stock boundaries, chuck, tailstock, and
85
steady rest for lathe machine groups lets you take advantage of many
other Mastercam Lathe features:
When you define a stock model, Mastercam automatically
updates it across several operations, intelligently calculating
86
rapid moves to and from the home position, between
operations, and auto entry/exit vectors. The stock models you
create are also used by the Backplot and Verify functions.
To avoid collisions and gouges, Mastercam reads the
87
boundaries for the stock, chuck, and other peripherals when
calculating toolpaths.
You can view the stock and other peripheral boundaries in the
graphics window with the part geometry.
8
By defining stock and peripherals, you can program
miscellaneous operations like opening/closing the chuck,
manipulating stock, and repositioning the tailstock or steady
rest. 89
You can create stock models and chucks individually for both
left and right spindles.
You can use several methods to define each boundary:
810
Choose Parameters to enter specific dimensions and other

values. This works best with relatively simple boundary
contours.
If the boundary already exists as geometry in the graphics
window, choose Chain to select it. This option works well
when you want to create a complicated or detailed model.
If the geometry is in a separate file, choose Select to import it
into the current file. (This technique is not available for stock
models.)
After you create the boundaries, use the Tool Clearance fields to define
a clearance zone around each boundary. When you are creating a
toolpath, Mastercam will warn you every time the tool violates these
clearance distances.
Use the Display Options to selectively display or hide each
component in the graphics window.
TIP: Use the Settings, Configuration, Colors properties page

to set stock colors. See “Colors” on page 119 for details.
Safety Zone Tab

In this tab, you define a safety zone around the system origin to allow
the tool to retract to a safe position outside of this area. Safety zones
help avoid collisions that could be caused by the machine indexing or
by contact with part features or fixtures in the path of the tool.
Figure 8-10: Safety Zone tab

8
82
83
84
85
86
Setting the Safety Zone view—Similar to setting a stock view, you can
orient the safety zone with the part by assigning a specific view to the
safety zone. To do this, click the Safety Zone View button and select a
view from the View Selection dialog box. The edges of the safety zone
87
are parallel with the axes of the selected view.
You can select and further define the best fitting type of safety zone
(spherical, cylindrical, or rectangular) for the part you are machining. 8
IMPORTANT: You must enable retract moves in the toolpath to
activate the safety zone. To do this, access the Toolpath
Parameters tab by choosing Parameters in the Toolpath
Manager list, and then select retract options.
89
810
chapter 9
Working with Toolpaths
In this section, you will learn how to work with basic and
advanced toolpath functions, including:
Toolpath Chaining Techniques. . . . . . . . . . page 734
Selecting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 744
Using the Toolpath Parameters Right-Click Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 749
Editing Toolpath Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 751
Managing Toolpath Operations. . . . . . . . . page 760
Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 767
Backplot and Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 781
Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 792
Power User Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 799
Toolpath Chaining Techniques

Chaining is the process you use to select and link pieces of geometry
so that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid.
You chain geometry by selecting one or more sets of curves (lines, arcs,
and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Most toolpaths require
geometry to be chained. Usually you chain the geometry that is used in
a single operation, such as a contour toolpath or pocket toolpath.
Chaining determines the direction of tool travel during machining.
You set chaining defaults in the Settings, Configuration, Chaining
properties page. You can use the Chaining dialog box to override these
settings, as necessary.
However, you can chain together separate sets of entities to be cut in a
single operation. For example you can chain together the entities for
separate parts to be cut from the same workpiece in the same
operation.
This section provides you with general information on chaining
geometry to create toolpath operations, including:
Working with Open and Closed Chains (page 735)
Chaining Direction (page 736)
Chaining Contour Toolpaths (page 736)
Synchronizing Chains (page 737)
Using the Chain Manager (page 740)
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Toolpath Chaining Techniques • 735
Working with Open and Closed Chains

Chains are open or closed. 9
92
Open chain Closed chain 93
In an open chain, the start and end points are different coordinates.
Examples of open chains are single lines or arcs. An open chain may
consist of a single entity or several contiguous entities. Partial chaining
is a method of selecting entities as open chains. 94
In a closed chain, the start and end points share the same coordinates.
Closed chains typically consist of several entities that have adjacent
end points and that form a closed boundary. Examples of closed
chains are rectangles or circles. 95
Mastercam determines chaining direction differently for open chains
and closed chains.
In an open chain, the start point is placed at the end of the
chain closest to the selection point, and the chain direction
96
points to the opposite end of the chain.
In a closed chain, you set default values in the Chaining
Options dialog box that determine whether the chaining
direction for closed chains is clockwise, counterclockwise, or
97
based on the cursor position.
TIP: When creating open and closed chains, use options in the
Chaining dialog box to reverse the chain direction and move the
start or end position of the chain.
98
9
910
Chaining Direction
All chains have a direction. Direction for closed chains is either
clockwise or counterclockwise, while the direction for open chains
points toward one of the chain endpoints. The chaining direction
determines the direction of tool movement in a toolpath.
In surface creation, Mastercam uses chaining direction to synchronize
the chains to create a smooth, regular surface. Errors in establishing
chaining direction often result in a twisted surface that cannot be
machined. In the example below, the arrow shows the
counterclockwise chaining direction for a closed chain that consists of
several lines and arcs. The chain starts at the base point of the arrow.
Chaining arrow
Closed chain for pocket toolpath. This chain consists of

several lines and arcs and has a counterclockwise direction.
Chaining Contour Toolpaths

You can chain 2D geometry, 3D geometry, or a combination of 2D and
3D geometry for contour toolpaths. Chaining 2D geometry generates a
2D contour toolpath. Mastercam automatically defaults the Contour
type to 2D if you chain only 2D geometry.
If you chain 3D geometry or a combination of 2D and 3D geometry,
you can choose to create either a 2D or 3D contour toolpath.
2D chaining contours offset and flatten 3D geometry to an
absolute depth, relative to the construction plane.
3D chaining contours offset 3D geometry with depths
matching the chains, and then add the incremental depth
value.
Adding to a Chained Contour (Mastercam Lathe)

To define a line that will be added to the start and/or end of the 9
chained contour without creating extra geometry, you can use the
New Contour Line or Adjust Contour dialog boxes. This may be
necessary when the geometry that is chained for a toolpath lies totally
within the stock boundary. Adding a line to the contour to extend the
chain in a pre-defined direction can help ensure that the tool does not
92
rapid into the stock at the start of a pass, or rapid along the stock at the
end of a pass.
To access the New Contour dialog box: 93
Click the Lead In or Lead In/Out button on the parameters
tab for any lathe toolpath except thread, drill, and C-axis
toolpaths.
Then select the Add Line check box and button from the Lead
In/Out dialog box.
94
To access the Adjust Contour dialog box, choose Adjust start of
contour or Adjust end of contour from the Groove Shape Parameters
tab. 95
Note: In the Groove Shape Parameters tab, the Adjust end / start
of contour options are available only when the groove is defined
from chained geometry. 96
Synchronizing Chains
Many Mastercam functions, such as surface creation and ruled
97
toolpaths, use chain synchronization. Choose a synchronization mode
(sync mode) if you have attempted to create a toolpath and found that
98
9
910
it twists as shown below in the center picture. The twisting could affect
the surface of the part, making it unmachinable or irregular.
Original geometry
Sync mode set to None
Sync mode set to By Branch
When synchronizing chains, Mastercam breaks a chain into a number

of separate chains for the purpose of creating the toolpath or surface.
Use the Sync mode setting in the Chaining Options dialog box to
define how you want to divide the chains. You can also set a default
startup Sync mode in Settings, Configuration, Chaining properties
page.
Choose one of the available Sync mode options defined below:
None: Synchronizes the chains by dividing them each into an
even number of points. Certain surfaces and toolpaths require
more precision than this option provides.
by Entity: Matches the chains by the endpoints of each entity.
Requires both chains to have the same number of entities.
by Branch: Matches the chains at branch points. Can be used
for most chain synchronization.
by Node: (Applies only to parametric splines). Matches two or
more splines by the node points of each spline. Each spline
must have the same number of node points.
by Point: Matches the chains by point entities on the
endpoints of each entity. You must pre-define the points
where you want the chains to sync.
Manual: Matches the chains of areas you specify.
Manual/density: Matches the chains that you specify and

allows you to assign a density for each chain. If an area has
small radii, use a higher density (such as 2) for a better finish. 9
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
9
910
Using the Chain Manager

To access the Chain Manager, click the Geometry icon in the
Toolpath Manager for any toolpath that contains chains for its
underlying geometry.
Notes:
• Drill, surface, point, and multiaxis toolpaths do not contain
chained geometry. When you choose the Geometry icon on these
toolpaths, Mastercam displays the appropriate dialog, such as
Surface Selection for a surface toolpath.
• If you are working in Mastercam Wire, you can configure
Mastercam to open the Chain Manager dialog box immediately
after you create a contour wirepath. To do so, select the Wire
check box in the Settings, Configuration, Toolpaths properties
page, and save the settings to your configuration file.
Figure 9-1: Chain Manager dialog box
The Chain Manager is where you edit the geometry of toolpaths based
on chained geometry (rather than points). The Chain Manager lists all
the chains for the selected toolpath operation. Since chaining
determines the cut order, tool rapid moves, and the direction of tool
movement, you may find that you need to modify the chaining after
generating a toolpath.
Use the Chain Manager to perform the following chain management

and editing functions.
Select Chains: Click a chain in the list to select it. To select an
9
additional chain, or unselect a selected chain, [Ctrl]+click the
chain (hold down the [Ctrl] key while clicking). To select a
range, click the first chain to select it, and then [Shift]+click
the last chain in the range. 92
Note: You can select multiple chains even if Mastercam does not
highlight them.
Identify Chains: When you select a chain in the list,

93
Mastercam highlights the corresponding chain geometry in
the graphics window. Conversely, you can select a chain from
its geometry by choosing the Select button (above the insert
arrow buttons) and clicking a chain in the graphics window.
94
Mastercam selects (highlights) the corresponding chain name
in the Chain Manager list.
Re-Order Chains: Select and drag a chain to a new position in
the list.
95
Manage the Insert Arrow: Arrow buttons, located along the
right side of the dialog box, let you move or find the Insert
Arrow, which indicates where new chains are added in the
Chain Manager list. 96
Use the arrow buttons to move or locate the Insert Arrow as
follows:
Click the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button to move the
Insert Arrow up.
97
Click the Right Arrow button to position the Insert Arrow
immediately after currently selected list item.
Click the Left Arrow button to scroll to the Insert Arrow's
current location in the list.
98
Edit Chains: Use the right–click menu options to add, delete,
replace, reverse, sort, and analyze chains, as well as perform
other chaining functions. Right-click anywhere in the dialog
box to access these functions. 9
910
Chain Manager Right–Click Menu Options

Right–clicking in the Chain Manager displays an extensive menu of
options you can use to edit chains.
Figure 9-2: Chain Manager right-click menu
Add chain : Opens the Chaining dialog box and lets you select
one or more chains to add from the graphics window.
Change side: Swaps the cutter compensation for all chains in
the operation from one side to the other. Cutter
compensation refers to the tool offset from the toolpath (right
or left). This option has no effect on pocket toolpaths or
toolpaths that do not use cutter compensation.
Rechain all : Lets you replace all chains in the list with one or
more chains you select from graphics window.
Resync all : For some toolpaths, lets you select an alternate
synchronization method from the Sync Mode drop-down list,
which displays near the top of the dialog box.
Sort options: Opens the Sorting dialog box, where you can
re-sort chain order (by start point).
Delete chain: Deletes one or more selected chains from the
list. You can also:
Use the [Delete] key to delete one or more selected chains
in the list.
Choose the Select button, select a chain in the graphics

window, and press [Delete] to delete the chain.
Rechain single: Lets you replace a selected chain in the list
9
with a chain you select from the graphics window.
Analyze chain: Opens the Analyze Chain dialog box, where
you can select problems for Mastercam to identify in selected
chains. 92
Change at point: Opens the Change at point dialog box so
that you can edit the selected point. You can change the
depth, coolant options, retract/clearance height, insert
canned text, and make other changes that apply to either the
selected point or from that point forward.
93
Reverse chain: Reverses the direction of the selected chain.
Start point: Opens the Chaining Start/End dialog box, where
you can use the Forward and Back buttons to move the start or
end (open chains only) of a chain from one entity endpoint to
94
another.
You can also move the start or endpoint of a chain to any
position along an entity, without restricting the start/end to
an entity endpoint. If Break entities in Dynamic is selected in
95
the Chaining Options dialog box or the Settings,
Configuration, Chaining properties page, using this function
automatically breaks the entity at the start/end position.
Choose Dynamic move start/end of chain (button between
96
the Start and End controls), and then click the start or end
point of a chain, and drag it to a new position.
Edit tabs: For contour toolpaths, lets you edit tabs using the
Edit tabs ribbon bar. Use the ribbon bar options to move, add,
97
or delete tabs on the chain. You can also access the Tabs
dialog box to modify tab parameters.
Multi-Select: (Wire only) Works in conjunction with the
Change at point right–click menu item. Multi-Select allows 98
you to choose multiple points on the active chain before the
Change at point dialog box displays. Press [Esc] to end point
selection.
Reset Chain: (Wire only) Removes all Change at point data on
the active chain.
9
Rename: Lets you change the name of the selected chain.
Alternatively, you can click a selected chain and type a new
name directly. Use either method to assign meaningful names
to chains in the toolpath.
910
Selecting Tools
In this section, you will learn about selecting tools and setting feeds,
speeds, and other general toolpath parameters. For most mill, router,
and lathe toolpath types, the Toolpath Parameters tab displays after
you chain or select geometry, solids, or surfaces for a new toolpath.
You can also access this tab by clicking the Parameters icon in the
Toolpath Manager list.
Note: Changing parameters after creating a toolpath may require

you to regenerate the toolpath.
TIP: In the Toolpath Manager list, click the Parameters icon to

access all Toolpath Parameters dialog box tabs, such as
Toolpath parameters, Pocket parameters, Roughing / Finishing
parameters, and so on.
Selecting a Tool
The Toolpath parameters tab options vary, based on the selected
toolpath type. However, there are many common fields for all toolpath
types and the method you use to select a tool is basically the same. Mill
and router toolpath parameters are very similar. Lathe toolpaths share
some mill and router toolpath parameters, but also include many that
are unique to lathe machine tools. To become more familiar with the
differences and similarities between Mill / Router and Lathe toolpath
parameters, compare the following examples.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Selecting Tools • 745
Figure 9-3: Example: Mill Pocket Toolpath parameters tab
9
92
93
94
95
Figure 9-4: Example: Lathe Rough Toolpath parameters tab
96
97
98
9
910
Note: For detailed information on individual fields in the

Toolpath parameters tab for a specific toolpath type, refer to the
online Help.
Use the large area in the left section of the Toolpath parameters tab to
select a tool for the operation. All tools that have been added to or are
used in the current machine group display in this area by default.
To change the tools display, similar to setting Windows file view
options, right–click in this area and choose an option from the View
menu.
If you display tools in a list, you can sort the list by clicking on column
headers. To reorder the columns, click and drag them to new positions.
Use one of the following methods to select a tool:
In the tool display area, click the tool you want to use.
If the tool you want is not displayed, choose Select library
tool. This opens the Tool Selection dialog box where you can
select a tool from the current tool library or from any tool
library you choose.
Use the right–click menu option to Create new tool and
define the tool.
IMPORTANT: Any new tool definitions you create are stored

only in the current machine group, unless you save them to a
tool library.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Selecting Tools • 747
TIPS:
• To simplify the display, choose Tool Filter and define criteria
9
that will limit the display to only tools that meet your criteria.
• You can select a tool from the library just by entering its tool
number, provided that in the Machine Group Properties
dialog box Tool Settings tab, the option to Search tool library
when entering tool number is selected. To configure this
92
setting, click the Tool Settings icon in the Toolpath Manager
list.
• Double–click a tool to edit its tool definition, or choose Edit
tool from the right–click menu.
93
Working with the Tool Selection dialog box
94
The Tool Selection dialog box displays when you choose the Select
library tool button in the Toolpath parameters tab.
Figure 9-5: Toolpath Selection dialog box
95
96
97
98
9
Use this dialog box to select tools from a tool library and add them to
the current machine group. Adding tools to the machine group allows
910
you to select and use them in a toolpath.
Double–click a tool to add it to the current operation and

close the dialog box.
To list tools from a different library, select one from the
drop-down list located in the upper left corner. If the library
you want to use does not appear in the list, click the folder
button (next to the drop-down list) then navigate to the
library file location and select it for display.
You can also filter the tool list by a number of different criteria
to make it easier to find the right tool. Select Filter active to
apply a defined tool filter, or click the Filter button to define or
edit the selection criteria, then apply it.
When you select a tool, the other fields in the Toolpath parameters
dialog box tabs update with default values that you can override.
Default parameters can come from the tool definition, machine and
control definition, and the operation defaults. The machine group
properties define the source of the default values for many of the
parameters.
TIPS:
• Mastercam Mill and Router toolpath types can use tools and
tool libraries interchangeably.
• While working in the tool display window, click and drag
columns to rearrange them, or sort the tools by clicking on a
column header. Use the right–click menu to access more
display options.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Using the Toolpath Parameters Right-Click Menu • 749
Using the Toolpath Parameters

Right-Click Menu
9
When you right–click anywhere in the Toolpath parameters tab with
92
the exception of the Comments text box, you can choose the following
options from an extensive right–click menu.
Figure 9-6: Toolpath Parameters right–click menu
Mill / Router Lathe

93
94
95
96
Create new tool: Create a new tool instead of selecting one
from the list. The tool definition you create is stored only in
the current machine group unless you save it to a library.
Edit tool: Edit the tool definition for the selected tool. Unless
97
you save the changes to the library, they are stored only in the
machine group and do not affect the tool definition in the
library.
Get block drill: (Router) This option is available only when
98
you create or edit a block drilling toolpath. Use it to access the
Drill Block Selection dialog box where you can view, select, or
edit the drill blocks defined for the machine type. Drill blocks
must be predefined for the selected machine type using the
9
Machine Definition Manager.
Get angled head (Mill), Get aggregate (Router): Access the
Aggregate dialog box, where you can select an aggregate
tooling block and set tools in the block. 910
Tool manager: This menu item includes the current tool
library file name. Use it to access the Tool Manager dialog box
and view and manage tool libraries, the tools in your part file,
and tool definitions.
Load tool on machine: Automatically create a tool
component based the selected tool, and add it to the machine
definition. (Used only for simulation.)
View: Display the tools as large icons, a simple list, or a
detailed list.
Arrange tools: Sort the tools by tool number or tool name.
These options are helpful if you have the tools displayed as
icons without any column headers.
Popup tool: (Lathe) Set options to view a larger picture of the
tool and control the popup action by hovering the mouse over
a tool icon in the Toolpath parameters tab.
Import operations: (Mill / Router) Import one or more
operations from an operations library and automatically
apply them to the current geometry selection.
Feed/speed calculator: (Mill / Router) Use the calculator to
calculate feeds and speeds including surface speed or feed per
tooth.
Save parameters: Save all parameters defined in the Toolpath
parameter dialog box tabs to the operation defaults file
(.DEFAULTS) used in the machine group. This overwrites the
values stored in the operations defaults file only for the
selected toolpath type.
Reload parameters: Restore the values in the Toolpath
parameters dialog box tabs with those defined for the toolpath
type in the machine group’s operation defaults file.
Note: You set the operation defaults file using the Files tab in the
Machine Group Properties dialog box. Initially, the .DEFAULTS file
that displays in the Files tab is associated with the selected control
definition. To view this setting, and other machine group defaults,
click the machine group Files icon in the Toolpath Manager list.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Editing Toolpath Defaults • 751
Editing Toolpath Defaults

9
Default values for toolpath parameters and other operations are stored
in a .DEFAULTS file, completely separate from the machine and
control definition files. You will have separate .DEFAULTS files for inch
and metric operations, and for each product (Mill, Lathe, Router,
92
Wire). Typically, these are stored in the \ops folder for each product. In
addition to toolpath and operation defaults, the .DEFAULTS file also
stores default values for many machine group properties.
Because the operation defaults are stored separately from the machine
93
and control definition, if you wish you can use the same .DEFAULTS
file for all of your machines or machine groups. Users in larger shops
or with more sophisticated programming needs can create different
.DEFAULTS files for different machines or applications and
94
automatically load them with each machine definition (see “Creating
and using machine-specific .defaults files” on page 754).
To learn more about default values for other types of settings, see the
topic “Working with toolpath defaults” in the online help.
95
IMPORTANT: Default values for the Advanced Multiaxis
toolpaths cannot be saved to the .DEFAULTS file.
96
97
However, you can save default values for Mastercam’s standard
multiaxis toolpaths.
98
9
910
X Editing a toolpath defaults file from the Toolpath Manager

1 In the Toolpath Manager, click the Files icon in the Properties
section for the machine group.
2 Click the Edit button in the Operation Defaults section of the

Machine Group Properties, Files tab.
3 In the Edit Operations Defaults dialog box, if necessary, load

the .DEFAULTS file to edit by selecting it from the drop-down
list. Use the folder buttons to select a .DEFAULTS file from a
different folder.
4 Perform any of the following tasks:
To edit the default parameters for an operation, find the

operation in the list, and click on its Parameters icon.
To add a new operation, right–click in the window, and

choose it from the menu. New operations are created at
the insertion point, just like in the Toolpath Manager.
To delete an operation, click to select it and press [Delete].
5 To create a new .DEFAULTS file, or rename the existing one,

type the new name in the drop-down list. Mastercam creates
the new file automatically when you exit. 9
92
93
6 Click OK when you are ready to exit. Mastercam automatically
saves the file.
X Saving default values while creating an operation

94
Mastercam also lets you save values to the active .defaults file while
you are creating or editing an operation. This lets you try out and test
values while actually working on a toolpath, and then save the current
parameter values as defaults as soon as you get them right.
95
1 While you are working on any toolpath, select the Toolpath
parameters tab.
96
97
98
9
910
2 Right-click and choose Save parameters to defaults file.
You can do this while creating an operation or editing an existing

operation.
Creating and using machine-specific

.defaults files
Users in large shops or who need to support multiple machines can
create different .defaults files for specific machines or applications so
that the proper .defaults file is automatically loaded when a machine is
selected and a machine group created.
Use the Control Definition Manager to accomplish this. Mastercam
saves a pointer to the desired .defaults file in the control definition.
This way, when you select a control definition, you automatically
select the operation and group defaults along with the post processor
and other control settings.
X Editing a control definition to use a different .defaults file

1 Start the Control Definition Manager from the Settings
menu.
9
92
93
94
95
2 If necessary, open the proper .control file. 96
3 If necessary, select the desired control definition from within
the .control file. Click Existing definitions, select the desired
definition, and click OK.
4 Select Files from the topic list.
97
5 Select Default operation library from the File usage list.
6 Select the desired .defaults file as shown here:

98
9
7 Repeat Step 6 for both inch and metric .defaults files.
Mastercam automatically uses the proper file depending on
910
the units that you are working in.
8 Save the control definition. All machine definitions that use

the control definition will automatically load the selected
.defaults file when you create a new machine group with
them.
X Editing operation defaults from the Control Definition Manager

As a convenience if you are creating machine-specific .defaults
files, Mastercam also lets you edit the .defaults file from within the
Control Definition Manager. This has the exact same effect as
“Editing a toolpath defaults file from the Toolpath Manager” on
page 752. Everything you can do with one method, you can do with
the other.
1 While the Control Definition Manager is open, select
Operation Defaults from the topic list.
A copy of the Edit Operations Defaults dialog box opens in

the Control Definition Manager.
2 Edit your operation defaults like you normally would. You can
open any .defaults file or create new ones.
3 Because the .defaults file is separate from the control
definition, you need to save your new settings with the Save
default settings button.
4 Exit the Control Definition Manager and save the control

definition as you normally would.
Working with HST defaults

One of the advantages of Mastercam’s surface high speed toolpaths is
the power and flexibility embedded in their default files. These default
values are separate from the .defaults file used by other Mastercam
toolpaths. Most HST defaults are based on the selected tool.

Mastercam lets you configure how they are applied.
9
Configuring how Mastercam applies HST defaults
Default values for many cutting and linking parameters are
determined by the dimensions of the selected tool. When you select a
new tool, Mastercam updates the values of these fields based on the
92
new tool. This is different than many other Mastercam toolpaths,
where only feeds and speeds are based on the tool, not cutting or other
toolpath parameters. These are typically read from the .defaults file.
For example, the following picture shows the default cutting
93
parameters for an area clearance toolpath, with a 0.5-inch bullnose
endmill selected:
94
95
96
97
98
9
910
If you then select a 0.375-inch tool, many of the cutting parameters

automatically update:
Even if you have edited some of the cutting parameters, the edited
values will be overwritten when you select a new tool. This happens
even if the new tool has the same dimensions as the old one.
However, Mastercam includes an option that you can use to control
this behavior. On the Toolpaths page in the System Configuration
dialog box, deselect Automatically calculate HST defaults.
This disables the automatic update feature so that when you select a
new tool, Mastercam does not update any of the cutting or linking
parameters. Instead, you will see a new button on the Tool page: 9
92
Click Recalculate values to have Mastercam update the cutting and
linking parameters based on the current tool dimensions. In this way,
93
you can control when values are updated.
This also lets you use values from your .defaults file more like other
Mastercam toolpaths. Whether or not the Automatically calculate
HST defaults option is selected, you can still store HST default values
94
in your .defaults file. However, if Automatically calculate HST
defaults is active, many of the defaults will be overwritten as soon as
you select a tool. When this option is not active, the default values will
persist until you explicitly choose to recalculate them.
95
96
97
98
9
910
Managing Toolpath Operations

In the Toolpath Manager, each operation has a name that describes
the type of machining action it includes, such as Surface Rough
Flowline. A single part can have many operations within one or more
machine groups and toolpath groups.
Each operation has at least four parts:
Figure 9-7: Example: Operation details in Toolpath Manager
Toolpath Parameters: Includes all the machining

information, such as tool selection, number of cutting
passes, etc.
Tool definition: Information about the size and shape of

the tool.
Part geometry: Contains the geometry selections for the

part or section you are machining.
Toolpath: A separate intermediate file (NCI) that contains

all of the toolpath data. The post processor uses the NCI file
to create an NC file for your specific machine/control.
To view and edit this information, click an icon in the Toolpath

Manager list. Operations that are more detailed and specific to a
selected machine and toolpath type provide additional icons
representing information you can view and edit.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Managing Toolpath Operations • 761
Lathe-specific—For lathe toolpaths, click the Update Stock / Do not

update stock icon to enable or disable this feature. When enabled,
as shown below, Mastercam Lathe provides you with feedback on
the stock shape as it is machined.
9
Figure 9-8: Example: Lathe Operation details
92
93
Surface toolpaths—For surface toolpaths, you can click additional
geometry icons to view and edit information on the Drive surfaces,
Check surfaces, Containment boundaries, Start points menus, and
CAD files used in the operation. 94
Figure 9-9: Example: Surface Operation details
95
96
Flowline toolpaths—For flowline toolpaths, you can also view and edit
flowline information for the toolpath by selecting the Geometry -
Flowline Data icon. 97
Figure 9-10: Example: Flowline Operation details
98
9
910
Using Toolpath Manager Icons

Toolpath Manager icons are visual indicators that represent different
types of information about the operations in a machine group and
their status. Each icon you may see in the Toolpath Manager and its
purpose is described below.
Operations Folder icons

Operation folder: Contains the operation components
such as toolpath parameters, tool parameters, and
geometry or solids.
Selected operation: When you select an operation, the

folder displays a blue check mark. You select operations
to collectively perform certain functions on the selected
group, such as regenerate, backplot or verify.
Parameters icons
Toolpath parameters: Opens the Toolpath Parameters
dialog box where you can select a tool, set feeds, speeds,
and other general toolpath parameters.
Subprogram: Indicates that the operation contains one

or more subprograms and opens the related dialog box
for transform or non-transform operations. (A
subprogram is an NC program that is called from the
main NC program to repeat code within an operation.)
Tool icons
Tool parameters: Opens the Define Tool dialog box
where you can define the tool and its parameters for the
operation.
Lathe tool parameters: Opens the Lathe Tools dialog box

where you can define the tool type, insert, holder, and
cutting parameters.
Generic Geometry icon

Geometry: Allows you to edit the geometry by opening
the appropriate editing function, such as the Drill Point
Manager or Chain Manager. For more information, see
“Editing Drill Points” on page 404 and “Using the Chain
Manager” on page 740.
Solid / Surfaces icons

Solid/Surfaces: Indicates that the operation contains a
9
solid, a surface, or a combination of solids, surfaces, and
geometry. Use this option to open the associated editing
function, such as the Toolpath / Surface Selection dialog
box. 92
Geometry Drive surfaces: Provides access to the Drive
surface selection menu for surface toolpaths.
Check surfaces: Opens the Edit Drive Geometry dialog

box where you can make changes to drive surfaces.
93
Geometry Containment boundaries: Opens the Chain
Manager where you can select containment boundaries
for surface toolpaths. 94
Start points: Identifies start points of surface geometry
and allows you to reselect a start point.
Flowline: Applies only to surface flowline toolpaths and

allows you to change flowline parameters.
95
CAD file: Indicates that a CAD file was selected for a
surface toolpath. Use this option to select a different
CAD file. 96
Toolpath Operation icons
Toolpath on: Toolpath display is on. (Icon is blue.)
97
Toolpath off: Toolpath display is off. (Icon is gray.)
Toolpath not restored: The file has not been restored (via
a toolpath regeneration) since the file was opened with
98
the “restore NCI” option deselected. (Icon is light blue.)
Toolpath locked: The toolpath has been edited after

regeneration. Toolpath editor, highfeed machining, and
batch processing all lock the toolpath. Locking prevents
9
unintentional regeneration. To reverse locking, click the
Lock button located at the top of the Toolpath Manager.
Posting off: Posting is turned off for the toolpath. To

reverse the posting status, click the Post button located
910
at the top of the Toolpath Manager.
Dirty toolpath: The toolpath needs to be regenerated.

This happens if you have changed certain parameters or
the underlying geometry. To regenerate toolpaths, use
the Regenerate buttons located at the top of the Toolpath
Manager. You can choose to regenerate all invalid
toolpaths or only those you select.
Update stock enabled: Indicates that the Mastercam

Lathe update option is enabled, allowing Mastercam to
provide feedback on the stock shape as it is machined.
Update stock disabled: Indicates that the Mastercam

Lathe update option is disabled. Mastercam will not
provide feedback on the stock shape as it is machined.
Batch: Indicates that in the Tool parameters tab the

operation has been marked “to Batch.” The operation is
set to batch mode and will be processed separately from
other operations. (This parameter is not available in
Mastercam Wire.)
TIP: If you choose to backplot, verify, or post process a dirty,

unlocked operation, a message informs you that the selected
operations may require regeneration. You can choose whether
to regenerate the operations before continuing with the
function. If you choose not to regenerate, the dirty operations
are processed “as is” by the selected function. This message
does not appear if you choose to backplot, verify, or post
operations that are dirty and locked. In this case, the function
proceeds without interruption and the information in the binary
NCI file is used “as is.” For more information on using these
functions, see “Backplotting Operations” on page 781,
“Verifying Operations” on page 784, and “Post Processing” on
page 792.
Displaying Toolpaths
When you generate a toolpath, the tool motion is drawn in the 9
graphics window. Sometimes the display of multiple toolpaths can
obscure the geometry and each other. You may find it simpler to work
with toolpath display turned off.
Use the following Toolpath Manager options to simplify the display of 92
toolpaths and associative geometry in the graphics window.
Figure 9-11: Toolpath Manager tab, display options
93
Activate one or both of the following options to view toolpaths /

94
associative geometry for only the operations that you select in the
Toolpath Manager list:
Only display selected toolpaths: Displays toolpaths

95
only for the selected operations.
Only display associative geometry: Displays all

geometry associated with the selected operations,
provided that the geometry is not hidden or blanked,
96
and the geometry is on levels that are visible.
You can also use the Toolpath Manager and shortcut keys to show and
hide all toolpaths, or only selected toolpaths. 97
Showing / Hiding All Toolpaths—To show or hide the display of all
toolpaths in the graphics window, position the cursor in the
graphics window, and press the [Alt] key and the [T] key at the same
time [Alt+T]. This key sequence toggles the visibility of all
toolpaths on and off in the graphics window.
98
Showing / Hiding Selected Toolpaths—To change the display state of
one or more toolpaths, in Toolpath Manager select one or more
toolpath operations and type [T]. Mastercam turns off the toolpath
display for the selected toolpaths. To turn the display back on, type
9
[T] again. This is especially helpful if you are working with a
complex part and want to view only specific toolpaths. When you
use this technique to turn off the display of individual operations,
they are not affected by typing [Alt+T] in the graphics window.
910
They remain “hidden” until you type [T] again when the cursor is
positioned in the Toolpath Manager.
Notes:
• Toolpath Manager display options override all other toolpath
display states and settings.
• You may need to repaint the display after toggling the toolpath
display on / off.
• Toolpaths are not displayed for operations marked dirty until
they are regenerated.
Guidelines for Working with Operations

Click on the text or icon of an operation to select it. The icon
of the selected operation appears with a blue check mark.
To select multiple operations, hold down the [Ctrl] key and
click the text or icon associated with the operations you want
to select.
Copy or move operations within the list by dragging and
dropping. Operations that are copied and moved from one
group to another take on the properties of the new group.
Subgroups can also be moved into positions of parent groups.
Note: If the operation being copied or moved is not compatible

with the machine group settings, a message informs you and asks
if you want to cancel the copy/move or accept Mastercam's attempt
to modify the operation to fit the machine definition.
Use the right–click menu Undelete command to restore

deleted operations. You can undelete an operation until you
load another file or exit Mastercam.
To add a comment to an operation, click it, and then click it
again as if to rename it. When the operation text disappears,
type your comment and either click somewhere else or press
[Enter]. The comment appears at the end of the operation text
as well as in the Comments field in the Toolpath parameters
tab for the selected operation.
IMPORTANT: The text you enter in this manner overwrites any

comment text you have already entered for that operation.
To hide most of the text that appears next to the list icons, use
the Display command in the right–click menu.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Editing Operations • 767
Editing Operations
9
Toolpath Manager icons and right–click menu functions offer many
flexible methods you can use to edit operations. So far in this chapter,
you have learned about using Toolpath Manager icons to: 92
Choose a machine and control definition (page 697)
Set machine group properties (page 709)
View and edit toolpath operations (page 760)
This section provides information on how to use the Toolpath
93
Manager right–click menu and its Toolpath Editor and Edit selected
operations submenu functions.
In this section, you will learn about: 94
Using the Toolpath Editor (page 767)
Editing Selected Operations (page 773)
95
Using the Toolpath Editor
The Toolpath Editor gives you a fine level of control over toolpath
motion. You can make modifications to the tool motion created by
Mastercam and change the way areas of the toolpath are machined.
96
Use the Toolpath Editor to modify, add, move, or delete points. You can
also delete selected sections, cuts, or passes if the toolpath includes
them.
You access the Toolpath Editor by selecting a single toolpath in the
97
Toolpath Manager, right-clicking on the operation title, and then
choosing Toolpath Editor from the right–click menu.
TIP: Make all other necessary changes to the toolpath (such as 98

tool or parameter changes) before using the Toolpath Editor.
The Toolpath Editor locks the toolpath after you edit it. Locked
toolpaths are not updated by Mastercam. To further modify the
toolpath, you must unlock it. If the toolpath is regenerated after
editing, any custom modifications will be overwritten.
9
910
Figure 9-12: Toolpath Editor dialog box
Use the information in this topic to learn about:

Guidelines for Editing Toolpaths (page 769)
Editing a Toolpath Point (page 770)
Adding a Point to a Toolpath (page 771)
Moving a Point in a Toolpath (page 771)
Deleting a Toolpath Section (page 772)
Guidelines for Editing Toolpaths

Use the fields in the Position section 9
of the Edit Toolpath dialog box to
select the toolpath point position
(XYZ coordinates) to edit.
If the toolpath includes multiple
passes and depth cuts, you can also
92
choose to delete a pass (XY motion) or cut (Z motion) in that
point position.
Use one of the following selection methods:
Click the up and down scroll arrows, or click in the field
93
and use the mouse wheel or arrow keys to scroll.
Enter a number directly in the field.
Click a position in the graphics window. 94
The selected position appears highlighted in the graphics
window toolpath display. The display changes as you use
other Toolpath Editor options to move, edit, or delete the
selected toolpath point, cut, or pass. 95
Pass and Cut Position fields are unavailable for Lathe
toolpaths. For other toolpath types, Pass is available only if
multiple passes are used in the toolpath, and Cut is available
only if depth cuts are used. 96
When adding a new point, select the Before
check box to insert the new point before the
point position in the toolpath. Deselect it to
add the new point after this point position.
Use the options in the Show
97
section of the Edit Toolpath
dialog box to set toolpath
display options in the graphics window. You can view only the
pass or cut you enter in the corresponding Position field, or
98
display all cuts and passes in the toolpath.
The Delete Section option lets you remove a defined section
of the toolpath, based on the starting and ending point
positions you choose. For more information, see “Deleting a
9
Toolpath Section” on page 772.
Click Cancel in the Edit Toolpath dialog box to cancel all
changes you made to the toolpath during a single session in the
Toolpath Editor, including those made in the Section and Edit
Point Parameters dialog boxes.
910
Editing a Toolpath Point
X To edit a toolpath point position:

1 In the Toolpath Manager list, select the toolpath operation to
edit, right–click on the operation title, and choose Toolpath
Editor from the Toolpath Manager right–click menu.
2 Use the Edit Toolpath dialog box Position field to select the
toolpath point position to modify. Then click Edit Point.
3 Use the fields in the Edit Point Parameters dialog box to
change the toolpath motion at the selected point and modify
other toolpath actions at that point, such as turning coolant
on or off and changing cutter compensation.
Notes:
• If you change the feed rate, use the Change options to apply the
new feed rate as either a Modal change (effective until a
different feed rate is encountered in the toolpath), or to a
defined Section of the toolpath. The section begins with the
point you chose to edit in Step 2 and ends with a position you
choose later in the Section dialog box.
• Rapid move is unavailable for arcs.
• Feed rate is disabled for rapid moves.
4 When you finish entering changes for the selected point

position, click OK to return to the Edit Toolpath dialog box.
5 If you entered a feed rate change in Step 3 and chose Section
as the Change type, use the Section dialog box to enter the
endpoint for the new feed rate. As you choose the endpoint,
the defined section is highlighted in the graphics window. To
accept it and exit the dialog box, click OK.
6 Continue editing, or click OK to accept all changes made to
the toolpath in this session of the Toolpath Editor.
Adding a Point to a Toolpath
X To add a new point to a toolpath:

9
Editor from the Toolpath Manager right–click menu.
2 In the Edit Toolpath dialog box, select the Before check box to
92
insert the new point before the point position you choose in
the next step. Otherwise, the new point is added after that
position.
3 Click Add point and, when prompted, select a position in the
93
graphics window. The new point is added to the toolpath and
appears highlighted (red) in the graphics window.
4 Continue using Toolpath Editor options to edit the toolpath,
or click OK to accept all changes made to the toolpath in this
94
session of the Toolpath Editor and exit the Edit Toolpath
dialog box.
Moving a Point in a Toolpath

95
X To edit a toolpath by moving one of its points to a new position:
1 In the Toolpath Manager list, select the toolpath operation
you want to edit, right–click on the operation title, and choose
96
Toolpath Editor from the Toolpath Manager right–click menu.
toolpath point position to move. 97
3 Click Move point and, when prompted, select a new position
in the graphics window. The toolpath is edited to reflect the
new point position, and this position is highlighted (red) in
the graphics window. 98
4 Continue using Toolpath Editor options to edit the toolpath,
or click OK to accept all changes made to the toolpath in this
session of the Toolpath Editor and exit the Edit Toolpath
dialog box. 9
910
Deleting a Toolpath Section
X To delete a toolpath section:

Editor from the Toolpath Manager right-click menu.
first toolpath point position of the section to delete. Then click
Delete Section.
3 In the Section dialog box, use one of the following methods to
set the section endpoint:
Click the up and down scroll arrows, or click in the field

and use the mouse wheel or arrow keys to scroll.
Enter a number directly in the field.
Click a position in the graphics window.
When you choose an endpoint, the defined section is
highlighted in the graphics window. To change the endpoint,
simply choose another one.
4 To delete the defined section and return to the Edit Toolpath
dialog box, click OK.
5 Continue editing the toolpath, or click OK to accept all
changes made to the toolpath in this session of the Toolpath
Editor and exit the Edit Toolpath dialog box.
Editing Selected Operations

This section provides you with information on: 9
Editing Common Parameters (page 774)
Changing the NC File Name (page 777)
Changing Program Numbers (page 777)
Renumbering Tools (page 778)
92
Renumbering Work Offsets (page 779)
Reversing Toolpaths (page 780)
Recalculating Feeds / Speeds (page 780)
93
To access these editing functions, select one or more operations in the
Toolpath Manager, right–click and choose an editing function from the
Edit selected operations submenu.
94
95
Note: Prior to choosing an editing function from this submenu, 96
you must first select the operations you want to edit in the
Toolpath Manager list.
97
98
9
910
Editing Common Parameters

Use the Edit common parameters function and dialog box to
efficiently edit parameters shared by a selected group of operations.
The operations you can update with this function must be in the same
machine group.
Figure 9-13: Edit Common Parameters dialog box
The large area in the left side of the dialog box lists all selected
operations in ascending order by operation number.
Use the check box next to each field in this dialog box to select the
fields to edit. This flexible design lets you implement changes to one
field, all fields, or any combination of fields you choose. When you
click OK or Apply, only selected (activated) fields and their associated
values are used to edit the operations in the list.
TIPS:
• Use the Enable all and Disable all buttons,
9
located in the lower left corner, to quickly
select / deselect all fields.
• To deselect (disable) the Clearance or Retract fields for all
edited operations, select the check box next to the field and
choose Disable from the Use drop-down list.
92
Note: If a change does not fit an operation in the list, it is ignored
during the update process. For example, changes to Feed plane do
93
not affect a drilling operation. Also, before accepting a change, the
update process verifies that the change can be supported by the
machine group’s Machine Definition and Control Definition. If it
cannot, a message identifies the field and conflict, and no change
occurs.
94
After selecting a field, use one of the following methods to change it:
Type a value in the field. 95
Click the field button, and set parameters in the related dialog
box.
Select a value from a drop-down list.
To update the operations with your changes, click OK or Apply.
96
Use the Abs/Inc drop-down list to choose a plane setting for the
selected field and specified value. Most toolpaths provide Clearance,
Retract, Feed plane, Top of stock, and Depth parameters you enter in
either absolute or incremental values.
97
Absolute values are always measured from the origin.
Incremental values are relative to other parameters or chained
geometry. For example, incremental Depth and Top of Stock
parameters are relative to the location of the chained
98
geometry. The Clearance, Retract, and Feed plane are relative
to the Top of stock.
9
910
Selecting Tools
All tools added to or used in the active machine group appear in the
large area below the Tool Selection check box. To choose a tool and
apply it to all selected operations, start by selecting the Tool Selection
check box. This activates the Tool Selection option. Then select a tool
by clicking it. Use the Tool Filter check box and button to modify the
tool display. To access the Tool Selection dialog box and its options,
click the Select library tool button. You can also pick additional
options from the menu that displays when you right–click in the Tool
area.
Figure 9-14: Edit Common Parameters, Tool right–click menu
Propagating Changes
Use the Propagate button in conjunction with the operations list to
copy one or more selected fields from one operation to all other
operations in the list. First, select the operation you want to copy fields
from by clicking it in the list. The operation is highlighted to indicate
its selection. Click Propagate to update all common parameters fields
with values from the selected operation. Then select one or more fields
to apply, edit them as necessary, and click Apply. The selected fields
and values are applied to all operations in the Edit Common
Parameters list. To use another operation to propagate and update
additional fields, repeat this procedure. To accept the changes and exit
the function, click OK rather than Apply.
TIP: To update the common parameter values with those used

in a selected operation, rather than select an operation and click
the Propagate button, you can simply double–click the
operation.
Changing the NC File Name

The Change NC file name function in the Toolpath Manager 9
right–click Edit Selected Operations submenu lets you specify the
name of the NC file to use when posting output for one or more
operations. The changed setting is applied to all operations you
selected in the Toolpath Manager list prior to choosing the function. 92
Figure 9-15: Enter new NC name dialog box
93
94
IMPORTANT: This setting overrides the NC output file name
setting specified in the Settings, Configuration, Toolpath
Manager properties page for your Mastercam configuration file.
However, the NC file will be saved to the location specified by
95
the data path entered in the Machine Group Properties Files tab,
Toolpath directory field. This location displays as read-only
information in the Enter new NC name dialog box, as illustrated
above. 96
Changing Program Numbers
Use this function to assign a program number to selected operations.
97
Figure 9-16: Enter Program # dialog box
98
9
The post processor uses the program number for machine tools that
require program numbers rather than program names. The program
number displays next to the NC file name in the Toolpath Manager. 910
Renumbering Tools
The Renumber tools function makes it easy to renumber the tools
used in the selected operations, and optionally those that have been
saved with the part file but are not used in any of its operations. For
example, you might use this function when reprogramming a job for a
different machine tool.
Note: Tools are renumbered based on the current order of

operations.
Figure 9-17: Renumber Tools dialog box
The Starting tool number and Tool number increment fields

are required fields; others are optional.
To renumber all the tools that have been saved to the part file,
regardless of whether they are used in its operations, select
the Also renumber tools not used in any operation option.
Deselect this option to renumber only the tools that are
included in the selected operations.
When you return to the Toolpath Manager after accepting
work offset changes, Regenerate all selected operations.
Renumbering Work Offsets

Use this function to renumber the work offsets for non-transform 9
operations within the Toolpath Manager.
Figure 9-18: Renumber Work Offsets dialog box
92
93
94
95
Note: Tools are renumbered based on the current order of
operations.
The Starting work offset number and Work offset number

96
increment fields are required fields; others are optional.
When you apply your changes, any work offset information
previously defined for the selected operations is updated with
the renumbering information you provided. 97
98
9
910
Reversing Toolpaths
The Reverse toolpath function allows you to transpose the machining
direction and swap the side where cutter compensation in control is
applied for selected operations. If cutter compensation in control is off
in the toolpath, it remains off; only the machining direction is
reversed.
After reversing a toolpath, the NCI file is automatically locked
to prevent you from regenerating the toolpath.
Recalculating Feeds / Speeds

Use this function to adjust the feed rate, plunge rate, retract rate, and
spindle speed for multiple toolpaths based on a new stock material.
This process requires that the feed calculation be set to “from
material.” You set this value in the Machine Group Properties, Tool
settings tab.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Backplot and Verify • 781
Backplot and Verify

9
In this section, you will learn to use the Toolpath Manager Backplot
and Verify functions as part of the machining process.
92
Backplotting Operations
Use the Backplot function in the Toolpath Manager to simulate tool
motion for selected operations. This animated display allows you to 93
view the cutting process in the graphics window in a manner similar to
stepping through or running a video file.
Use Backplot to spot errors in a program before machining the
part. To begin backplotting, select one or more operations in 94
the Toolpath Manager list. Then click the Backplot button
located at the top of the Toolpath Manager
To move forward and backward through the backplot simulation, use
the Backplot VCR bar, located above the graphics window. 95
Figure 9-19: Backplot VCR bar
96
Tra t for ard
Ru ce ard
ep ck
s rw
w
Set conditional stops

St wind
St p ba
Fa fo
Re p
St y
o
Pla
Run speed slider Visible motion position slider 97

You can run Backplot in Run mode, which displays the toolpath as the
tool moves along, or Trace mode, which displays the entire toolpath
and the tool moves over it. The direction of each tool move is
highlighted as the backplot progresses. The default colors are light
98
blue at the start and red at the end of each move, but you can set them
to any color you choose.
9
910
As you step through the toolpath, the Details tab of the Backplot
dialog box displays information on the type of move, and the Info tab
displays information such as cycle time and path length for the
selected operation.
Backplot dialog box and Backplot dialog box, Info tab

Details tab (default)
The Restrict drawing button lets you remove all currently

plotted toolpaths from the screen or restore all toolpaths to
the display. When you restrict the display, only the remaining
toolpaths are plotted. Use the Turn off restricted button to reset all
9
toolpaths to their unrestricted states.
Use the Options button to customize backplot settings in the
Backplot Options dialog box, such as setting the tool display,
holder display, and tool motion colors.
92
Figure 9-20: Backplot Options dialog box
93
94
95
96
97
98
9
910
Verifying Operations
Use the Verify function in the Toolpath Manager to create a
3D simulation of machining selected operations. The model
created by this function represents the surface finish. It also
shows collisions, if any exist, and enables you to find and correct
program errors before they reach the shop floor.
Toolpath verification provides two modes of operation: Standard and
TrueSolid.
Standard mode uses pixel-based technology to represent the
machined part. If your installation does not include the
TrueSolid verification add-on, you must use Standard mode
for 3-, 4-, and 5-axis toolpath verification. For information on
purchasing TrueSolid verification, contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
TrueSolid mode uses solid modeling technology for toolpath
simulation. TrueSolid also uses OpenGL® graphics for
dynamic 3D solid rendering and animation. After verifying a
part in TrueSolid mode, you can rotate and magnify the part
to more closely check features, surface finish, or scallops.
Because of these enhanced capabilities, TrueSolid verification
is the best choice for toolpath simulation.
You will learn more about configuring the Verify function for a specific
mode of operation and setting other verify options in “Configuring
Verification Parameters” on page 787.
Notes:
• In Mastercam Lathe, use TrueSolid mode for best results.
• The Turbo feature shows the machined part without simulating
the tool motion. Selecting Turbo for either Standard or
TrueSolid verification may produce results more quickly.
TrueSolid Turbo is available only for 3-axis toolpaths in Top
view and does not support WCS or simulate part indexing.
Running the Verification

To begin verification, select one or more operations in the Toolpath 9
Manager list, and then click the Verify button. Use the control buttons
located at the top of the Verify dialog box to start, pause, rewind, step
through, and fast forward through the verify simulation.
Figure 9-21: Verify dialog box 92
93
94
95
96
97
98
9
910
Use other options in this dialog box to:

Select the tool display mode: Turbo (fastest mode, no tool
display), Simulate tool, or Simulate tool and holder.
Set display parameters affecting movement, speed, and
quality of simulation.
Set stop/pause conditions.
Turn Verbose mode on or off. When on, this setting activates
the Verify ribbon bar and displays additional details on the
machine state as you step through the verification process.
Select verification speed.
Access Verify configuration settings and features, including
slice (cross section), measure, zoom, and options to save the
stock model. (You will learn more about this in “Configuring
Verification Parameters” on page 787.)
If you select the Verbose check box on the Verify dialog box, the Verify
ribbon bar displays.
Figure 9-22: Verify ribbon bar
io n
s
te
at
ina
ns
d
ord
ff
pe
ee
/o
om
co
on
sp
e
at
rc
ion
nt
le
e
dr
d
ind
ola
tte
sit
co
Sp
Co
Cu
Po
G-
Fe
When you stop the verification process, either by using a selected stop
option or with the VCR controls, this ribbon bar displays read-only
information about the tool move that occurred just prior to the stop
position. The coordinates for the stop position also display. If you close
the Verify controls dialog box, the ribbon bar also closes.
Note: While a verification is in progress, you cannot change the

tool display mode. You must wait for the verification process to
finish, and then choose Restart.
Configuring Verification Parameters

To set parameters for the verification process, click the Configure 9
button in the Verify controls dialog box.
92
Then use fields in the Verify Options dialog box to customize:
Stock shape, file, boundaries, initial size source.
93
Tool profile, MCX and NCI file selection, tool and STL
tolerances.
Color settings for stock, collision, tool, and cut stock.
Miscellaneous options for TrueSolid simulation, cutter
94
compensation, axis display, STL file comparison, chip
removal, tool color and display, screw thread simulation.
95
96
97
98
9
910
Figure 9-23: Verify Options dialog box
Note: If you are verifying the current part file (MCX) and do not set
stock dimensions in the Verify configuration dialog box, the stock
values that are specified in the part file are used (Machine Group
Properties, Stock Set up tab). If stock values cannot be used from
the part file, the stock dimensions in the NCI file associated with
the part file are used. If you are verifying a different NCI file,
Mastercam scans the specified NCI file for the stock dimensions.
Tool Simulation During Verification

During verification, Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Router show a
solid representation of the tool as it moves through the toolpath. To set
the shape of the tool profile, use options in the Tool Profile section of
the Verify configuration dialog box:
To use the tool parameters to display the tool profile, choose
Auto.
To use the selected part file as the tool profile, choose As

defined. The part file is selected when you set up the tool.
Mastercam scales the part file by the diameter you enter for
the tool.
9
Note: If you are using an Undefined tool type, the part file is not
scaled. 92
Tool simulation in TrueSolid Turbo mode—Verify does not simulate
all tool shapes in TrueSolid Turbo mode. When verifying in TrueSolid
Turbo mode, the program simulates the tool shape by extruding it
upward from the tool tip. To properly simulate tools that perform
93
undercutting, do not use TrueSolid Turbo mode. Instead, verify parts
that use undercutting tools in TrueSolid tool simulation mode.
Using STL comparison 94

STL comparison allows you to check the accuracy of the part model
created by Verify against an STL file (a 3D model file). STL comparison
is only available in Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Router, and only in
TrueSolid Turbo mode when using box-shaped stock.
95
To enable STL comparison, select the Use TrueSolid and Compare to
STL file check boxes in the Verify Options dialog box. After running
the verification, you are prompted to select an STL file (unless you
have already associated an STL file with the part) before accessing the
96
STL Compare dialog box.
97
98
9
910
Figure 9-24: STL Compare dialog box
To view the part model against the geometry contained in the STL file,
choose Compare. In addition to the comparison, you can show the
machined model and the STL model separately or together.
You can set the colors in the STL Compare dialog box to denote areas
on the part where material is being left or where the part is gouged.
Each color represents a range of values for the amount of stock left on
the part or removed from the part. For example, the first color can
represent material greater than 0.003 left on the part. The next color
can represent any material left between 0.003 and 0.002. The
horizontal shading boundary near the middle of the dialog box
indicates the color used to show zero stock left (a correct toolpath).
Values and colors above this boundary denote areas above the stock;
values and colors below this boundary denote areas in the stock.
To change range settings, enter numeric values in the text boxes on the
left. To change the color mapped to a range, enter a value in the text
box or choose the color palette button and select a color from the
Colors dialog box.
9
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
9
910
Post Processing
Post processing refers to the process by which the toolpaths in your
Mastercam part files are converted to a format that can be understood
by your machine tool's control (for example, G-codes). A special
program called a post processor reads the Mastercam file and writes
the appropriate NC code. Generally, every machine tool or control will
require its own post processor, customized to produce code formatted
to meet its exact requirements and user preferences. In addition, you
can customize a post processor to reflect job or shop preferences, for
example, safety blocks or tolerances.
Post processors have two components.
An executable file such as MP.DLL, which is provided with
Mastercam. This is often used “as is.” Custom executables can
be developed for advanced applications, as necessary.
A post customization script (.PST) which is used by MP.DLL to
customize the post output for your machine tool. It includes
format statements, processing logic, miscellaneous integers
and custom variable definitions, system variables, etc.
Mastercam includes a wide variety of working posts for
common machines and NC controllers, which can be further
customized for specific needs.
A single post executable (such as MP.DLL) produces NC output for a
wide variety of machines by reading different .PST files. You can use
one post executable with one or more .PST file.
Post processors do not read Mastercam part files directly. Instead,
Mastercam creates an NCI file as an intermediate file format to be
used by the post processor. You can choose to save the NCI files in a
text format so that you can review them directly. This can be very
useful when customizing posts, debugging post problems, or
analyzing problems with the NC code for a particular part, because it
lets you see the exact data that the post is reading.
IMPORTANT: If you are upgrading to Mastercam X from a

prior Mastercam version, please note the following information:
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Post Processing • 793
• You must update post processors used with previous

Mastercam versions before using them with the current
version. 9
• Toolpath operations generated in previous versions of
Mastercam may be marked “dirty”, requiring you to
regenerate them before post processing.
• Mastercam X handles lathe coordinates differently than
previous versions. This requires a modification to the post
92
processor.
Post Processors and Control / Machine Definitions 93

Producing the correct NC code for your machine and application
requires properly configured machine definition, control definition,
and .PST files. 94
The machine definition file (.MMD, .LMD, .RMD. or .WMD)
describes the physical capabilities of your machine. These
include the linear and rotary axes that are mounted on the
machine; the types of linear, rapid, and rotary motion the axes
are capable of, including limits; coolant options; axis
95
orientation; tool changers; and spindles, turrets, and chucks.
The selected control definition (.CONTROL) for the machine
definition provides information to the post processor about
the processing capabilities of the control. These include
96
machining tolerance values; machine cycles and
subprograms; feed rate dimensioning; and many other
settings. The control definition also includes defaults for file
locations, operation defaults files, tool settings and offsets, 97
and other referenced files.
The .PST file reads the information from the machine and
control definition and contains the processing logic and
format statements to generate the proper G-codes, M-codes
and other commands for your machine. It also contains
98
information that Mastercam reads to customize its interface
to support the post.
Each control definition includes a list of post processors that have
been configured for the control. Use the Machine Definition Manager
9
to select the specific post that will be used with the machine or for a
specific job. Mastercam's modular architecture makes it easy to share
a single control across multiple machines; define several posts for a
single machine; or update components when your equipment 910
changes.
About PST files

The contents of the .PST file are contained in the following major
areas:
Definition area: includes format statements and assignments,
variable declarations and initialization, etc.
Postblock area: includes predefined and user-defined
postblocks. Postblocks are groups of commands that contain
the processing logic.
Post text area: includes data used by Mastercam to customize
the interface, allowing you to enter the proper data and
parameters to take advantage of your machine's unique
capabilities.
When you configure a new control definition to work with a particular
.PST file, Mastercam appends another post text area to the .PST file,
separated by a header. Through post processor customization, it is
possible to support machine tool / controller options you cannot set
through Mastercam directly. Contact your Mastercam reseller for more
information on post support.
WARNING: Customizing the .PST file is an advanced,

sophisticated task that should be attempted only by
knowledgeable users or your local Mastercam Reseller.
Programs created with incorrect post processor files can cause
your machine tool to crash or behave in unpredictable ways. If
you have any doubts, please consult your Mastercam Reseller
for assistance or more information!
Notes:
• Mastercam also supports binary post processors. These are posts
9
in which the processing logic is encapsulated in a special binary
file with a .PSB extension, which cannot be edited in a standard
text editor. Post text and similar data can still be written to a
separate .PST file, though, using the Control Definition
Manager.
92
• For more information on MP post processors, see the MP Post
Processor Reference Guide, available on CD from your
Mastercam Reseller. 93
About NCI Files
Every toolpath or wirepath operation has an NCI file associated with it.
An NCI file is Mastercam's intermediate NC format. It contains all the
94
machining instructions and information for the NC file, but in a
generic format common to all machines. The post processor uses the
NCI file to create the final NC program for a specific machine or
control. The NCI file is the primary input for a Mastercam post
95
processor. In Mastercam X, the NCI file typically contains the
toolpaths for an entire machine group.
There are actually two types of NCI files: binary and text NCI files.
When you create an operation in a Mastercam file, Mastercam
96
automatically creates a binary NCI file with the same name as the last
operation. Mastercam works with these NCI files in the background.
You do not work with them directly unless you are writing a post
processor or doing other very advanced work. 97
When you post an operation, you have the option to create and save a
text NCI file. This contains the information from the binary NCI file in
a text format so you can read it. Use the control definition to tell
Mastercam how you want to work with NCI files. Consult your
Mastercam reseller if you need more documentation.
98
Understanding the NCI data format
This section introduces the format of a text NCI file. NCI data is
arranged in pairs of lines. The first line of each pair is an operation
9
code, or NCI G-code that indicates the type of operation, such as a
linear move or a stock definition. (Note that the codes used in the NCI
file do not look like the G-codes that you are used to seeing in your NC
programs, because they have to be machine- and control-
independent.) The second line provides parameters used by the NCI
910
code. For example, operation code 1020 defines stock block size and
material. It has eight parameters, which appear below it on the second

line. The format for this particular NCI code looks like this:
G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
where 1 = X component, width (stck_ht)
2 = Y component, height (stck_wdth)
3 = Z component, thickness (stck_thck)
4 = X origin of block (stck_x)
5 = Y origin of block (stck_y)
6 = Z origin of block (stck_z)
7 = Origin corner (stck_crnr)
8 = String with the stock material (stck_matl)
In addition, parameter 7 (Origin corner)can be one of the
following integers:
0 = top of block, center
1 = top of block, upper left corner
2 = top of block, upper right corner
3 = top of block, lower right corner
4 = top of block, lower left corner
5 = bottom of block, upper left corner
6 = bottom of block, upper right corner
7 = bottom of block, lower right corner
8 = bottom of block, lower left corner
In an actual file, NCI code 1020 might appear as:
1020
1. 1. 1. 0. 0. 0. 4 ALUMINUM inch – 6061
This defines a 1x1x1 inch block of stock, made of 6061 aluminum. The
stock origin is X0, Y0, Z0; Z0 is the top of the stock model, and X0, Y0 is
the lower left corner.
For detailed reference information about NCI codes and formats, see
the Mastercam MP Post Reference Guide, which is available from your
Mastercam reseller.
Post Processing Toolpath Operations

All the operations in the Mastercam part file are listed in the Toolpath 9
Manager. Before posting operations, review the machine settings for
each machine group. These settings include the name of the post
processor and the name of the NC file that will be written.
X To create a machine-readable NC program from your Mastercam

92
part file:
1 In the Toolpath Manager, select the operations to post
process. You can select operations from more than one
machine group. All selected operations marked with a blue
93
check mark will be post processed.
TIP: To access advanced options for selecting operations,

right–click in the Toolpath Manager and choose Select. For 94
example, you can select all the operations which use a
particular tool, or which cut specific part geometry.
2 Click Post in the Toolpath Manager toolbar. 95

3 In the Post processing dialog box, set the types of files
to create and indicate whether you want to view them
in a text editor as they are created. You can also choose to send
the NC files directly to the machine tool control. 96
97
98
9
4 To generate the NC files, click OK.

910
Disabling / Enabling Posting for Selected Operations
X To disable/ enable posting for any operation in the Toolpath

Manager:
1 In the Toolpath Manager, select one or more operations to
exclude from post processing (disable). Use standard
Windows selection methods to select multiple operations. All
selected operations are marked with a blue check mark.
2 In the Toolpath Manager toolbar, click Toggle
posting. The selected operations are marked with the
Toggle posting icon, indicating that are disabled from
post processing.
3 To enable post processing for an operation that displays the
Toggle posting icon, select it and click Toggle posting again.
The icon is removed and post processing is enabled for the
selected operation.
Note: Operations for which posting has been disabled are not
posted even if they are part of a batch job.
WORKING WITH TOOLPATHS / Power User Tips • 799
Power User Tips

9
This section contains overviews of advanced CAM techniques
including:
Creating and managing operations libraries
92
Creating tools and managing tool libraries
Creating material libraries
Editing machine definitions and control definitions 93
Creating part libraries
Batch Processing Toolpath Operations (page 799)
Importing Operations (page 802)
Exporting Operations (page 803)
94
Transforming Operations (page 804)
Trimming Toolpaths (page 807)
95
Batch Processing Toolpath Operations
Batch processing lets you post a large number of toolpath operations
from one or more files at one time, in batch mode. This lets you
separate post processing from other Mastercam design and toolpath
96
generation activities and maximize use of your Mastercam system and
machine tools.
Use batch files to: 97
Generate the toolpath operation (that is, the binary NCI file)
with or without generating the NC program.
Select toolpath operations for batch processing from any
Mastercam file, not just from the current file. 98
Automatically submit toolpath operations for batch
processing by selecting the To batch option on the Toolpath
parameters tab.
Create, save, and rerun batch files (.BCH), and edit batch files 9
directly using a file editor.
Automate toolpath regeneration and file saves of batched
operations.
Set time limits on batched operations.
910
Log batch processing operations.
To begin a batch processing job, right-click in the Toolpath Manager

and choose Batch. The Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box opens,
where you can create and customize the batch job. In this section, you
will learn about:
Selecting Files for Batch Processing
Selecting Operations from a Batch File (page 800)
Selecting Batch Operations from Mastercam Files (page 801)
Tagging Operations for Batch Processing (page 801)
Running Batch Jobs (page 801)
Reviewing Batch Processing Log Files (page 802)
Selecting Files for Batch Processing

There are two ways to build a list of files for a batch processing job.
Use the Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box to read
operations from one or more Mastercam files and add them to
a list. Use this method even if the operations you want to
include are in the current Mastercam file. Operations can be
tagged for batch processing so that they are automatically
added to the batch list when you select their source file.
Open a batch file, which contains the list of operations to be
processed and their source files.
You can use the Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box to combine
both methods. This means that you can open a batch file, and then
add operations from other Mastercam files. You can then choose
whether or not to save the new list to the batch file, create a new batch
file, or just run the job.
Selecting Operations from a Batch File

Open the Batch Toolpath Operations dialog box by right-clicking in the
Toolpath Manager and choosing Batch. Click on the Open button in
the Batch file section:
Select the desired batch file (.BCH). The operations appear in the list,
along with the name of the Mastercam file they are found in.
Note: When you open a batch file, its contents overwrite whatever
is already in the window. You can only list the contents of one
batch file at a time.
If you do not want to add any other operations to the list from the
batch file, you can click OK now to run the job.
9
Selecting Batch Operations from Mastercam Files
Once a Mastercam file has been saved, its operations are available for
batch processing. If you want to include operations from the current
file, you must save the file before the operations will be available.
92
Click on the Open button in the Source file section:
Any operations that have been tagged with the To batch option will
automatically appear in the batch file list (unless you have disabled
this feature in the Advanced properties). You can add other operations
93
to the list by selecting them and clicking the red arrow.
Tagging Operations for Batch Processing 94

You can choose to tag an operation for batch processing by selecting
the To batch option in the Toolpath parameters tab for the operation:
Operations that have been tagged for batch processing appear in the
Toolpath Manager with a special icon:
95
These operations can not be regenerated like normal operations in the
Toolpath Manager. They can only be regenerated when a batch job is
being run. Also, they cannot be transformed.
To remove the batch tag from an operation, edit its Toolpath
96
parameters and de-select the To batch option. Then regenerate the
operation. You can add the operation to a batch job by selecting it
manually. 97
Running Batch Jobs
When you run a batch job, Mastercam opens each file which has an
operation in the batch list. You can set whether or not the operations
are automatically regenerated. Each operation is posted according to
98
the settings and preferences recorded in the machine group and
machine definition saved in each Mastercam file. This means that a
batch job can contain toolpaths from different machines or which
reference different post processors. As each operation is processed,
9
Mastercam will write the NC code to the file specified in the machine
group properties for the operation, so that a single batch job can result
in many NC files.
910
Note: Batch processing is not available in Mastercam Wire.
TIPS:
• Save the Mastercam file before opening the Batch Toolpath
Operations dialog box. It reads the toolpaths from
Mastercam files on your hard drive, not from system
memory, so until the current file is saved, it does not know
about its toolpaths.
• Operation types whose toolpath cannot be regenerated (for
example, Trimmed toolpaths) cannot be processed in batch
mode.
• Operations tagged for batch processing cannot be
transformed.
• Operations tagged for batch processing are not regenerated
when you regenerate operations in the Toolpath Manager.
They can only be regenerated during batch processing.
• If you clear the To batch toolpath parameter on an existing
operation, the operation must be regenerated.
Reviewing Batch Processing Log Files

Mastercam automatically maintains two logs for each batch file that
you create:
batch_name.log records every instance of the batch file being
run.
batch_name.err records every action Mastercam takes when it
processes the job. Check this log when a batch job fails to
complete properly to see exactly what Mastercam was doing
when the job failed.
Mastercam saves them in the same directory as your batch files
(typically, /mcamx/batch). Use any text editor to open them.
Importing Operations
You can import saved operations to the current Mastercam file, with or
without their geometry. Import these operations from a previously
created operations library.
You can also automatically recalculate feeds and speeds based on the
current job setup, put the operations in specific tool and construction
planes, and check for and eliminate duplicate tools.
Click the operation to select it for import. Mastercam marks selected
operations with a blue check mark. Press [Ctrl] and click to select
multiple operations or to deselect an operation. Press [Shift] and click

to select a range. Choose OK to import the selected operations.
9
Notes:
• If you have imported only the operation’s parameters, the
operations in the Toolpath Manager will be marked for
regeneration.
92
• If you import parameters without geometry, the operation will
be marked dirty. You can assign the parameters to other
geometry in your current file and then regenerate the toolpath.
93
Guidelines for importing toolpath operations
When you are importing toolpath operations and you choose
to import the operation’s geometry, choose an origin (0,0)
94
point for the imported operations. You can import the
operations multiple times by continuing to choose origin
points. Press [Esc] to return to Toolpath Manager and view
imported operations in the operations list. 95
You must import a file that contains compatible operations to
the type you are creating. Compatible operations contain
similar types of geometry. The following list shows which
toolpath types are compatible:
Contour, pocket, facing, ruled, revolution, swept 2D, swept
96
3D, Coons, loft – use chains for geometry.
Drill, point, circle mill, thread mill, auto drill – use points for
geometry.
All surface toolpaths – use surfaces as geometry.
97
Exporting Operations 98
You can easily export operations from the current Mastercam file to an
operations library. Export these operations with or without their
geometry.
You can also automatically check for and exclude duplicate tools from
9
the exported operations.
Click the operation to select it for export. Mastercam marks selected
operations with a blue check mark. Press [Ctrl] and click to select
multiple operations or to deselect an operation. Press [Shift] and click
910
to select a range. Choose OK to export the selected operations.
Transforming Operations
Use the Transform toolpaths function from the Toolpath menu to run
the same toolpaths in different locations or at different orientations in
the same part file. You can transform single toolpaths, or several at a
time. Consider using transform toolpaths when you want to:
Cut multiple copies of a part on several fixtures. You can then
assign different work offsets to each separate operation
created by the transform.
Cut the same feature at several locations in a part. You can
choose to run each operation created by the transform at a
specific coordinate distance from the original, or rotate the
copies around a center point.
Cut the same feature on different faces of a part, or a
tombstone application. You can also rotate a toolpath through
a plane other than the original toolplane. In addition to
changing the orientation of the toolpath, you can add a
coordinate translation, too.
Cut a mirror image of a part, in either the same plane or a
different one.
When you transform a toolpath, you can choose to maintain an
associative link between the original operation and the source
operation, or you can create new operations that are entirely separate.
You can also choose to create copies of the original geometry at the
new locations.
When you click on the Parameters icon for a transform operation, you
will see the Transform parameters dialog box tabs, not the parameters
for an individual toolpath. You can then edit the transformation
settings, or change it to an entirely different type of transformation. A
single transform operation can include multiple source operations; for
example, in the picture above, the transformation includes both the
slot mill and drill operations. Transform operations are associative;
this means that if you make a change to either of the source operations
or their geometry, the transform operation will be marked dirty until
you regenerate it.
Instead of creating a transform operation, you can choose to create
copies of the source operation (and optionally, their geometry). If this
option had been chosen in the above example, instead of the single
Transform by Toolplane operation, you would see additional drill or
slot milling operations in the Toolpath Manager. If you click on the
Parameters icon for these new operations, you will see toolpath
parameter settings, not transform settings. You can then edit or
customize each of the individual copies if you wish. These new
operations are not associative; if you change the original toolpaths, the
new operations will not be marked dirty.
9
Note: The transformed operations will be written to the active
machine group (where the red arrow is in the Toolpath Manager),
even if the source operations are from a different machine group.
Make sure the transformed operations are compatible with the
machine and control definition in the destination machine group.
92
Use the Transform Operations Parameters dialog box to begin creating
a transform operation. 93
Figure 9-25: Transform Operations Parameters dialog box
94
95
96
97
Select the source operations, the type of transform, and how you want
to organize the toolpaths which result. After you select the type of
transformation, choose only one of the remaining dialog box tabs
(Translate, Rotate, Mirror) to complete the operation. For example, if
98
you choose a Rotate transformation, the Translate and Mirror tabs are
unavailable.
In this section, you will learn about: 9
Selecting Operations to Transform (page 806)
Choosing Transformation Types (page 806)
Organizing Transform Operations (page 807)
Associating Work Offsets (page 807)
910
Selecting Operations to Transform

Use the large window in the center of the dialog box to select the
operations to transform. You can choose several operations by holding
down the Ctrl key and clicking all the operations you want to select.
Note: Transformed operations are created in the current machine

group (indicated by the position of the insert arrow in the Toolpath
Manager).
You can select operations from different machine groups, but because
each machine group can have a different machine associated with it,
verify that the transformed operation can be run in the destination
machine group.
Choosing Transformation Types

Use the Type and Method tab to determine how you will transform the
selected operations.
Select Translate to run the operations at a new location; for
example, cutting multiple copies of the same part at different
fixtures on the table. Select this option also when you want to
run the same operation in a different plane; for example,
cutting a contour on each side of a block.
Select Rotate to run the operation at an angle to the original
operation. You can choose to rotate the operation in the same
plane as the original operation, or through a different plane.
Select Mirror to create a mirror image of the selected
operations. Like Rotate, you can mirror the operation in the
same plane or in a different one.
Next, choose the transformation method.
Choose Tplane if the transformed operations will be in a
different orientation than the original and you want the tool
axis to transform along with the operation. You typically select
this option if you are transforming operations to different
views. This also activates the Work offset numbering section,
so that you can output a different work offset with each new
tplane.
Choose Coordinate to compute new coordinates for the
transformed operation in the same Tplane as the original
operation.
Organizing Transform Operations

Choose the types of operations you want to create with the transform 9
operations function. You can choose to create transform operations,
new toolpath operations, or both. In general, transform operations
maintain associativity with the original operations, but new toolpath
operations will let you individually edit each individual toolpath. In
addition, this option will copy the toolpath geometry to each
92
transform location.
Associating Work Offsets 93

For some types of transformations (such as tool plane and rotate), you
can choose to associate different work offsets with each transformed
operation. The Work offset numbering options will be activated
automatically when you choose a transform type which supports
them.
94
Choose Off if you do not want to output any offset code, or choose
Maintain source operation's to use the same offset as the original
toolpath. You can also choose to assign a different offset to each new
operation, based on the values you enter here. If you choose Match
95
existing offsets, Mastercam checks to see if an offset has already been
created which matches a particular transform, before it automatically
creates a new one.
96
Trimming Toolpaths
A trim operation is a special type of operation which lets you select one
or more toolpaths and trim them to one or more closed chains. Trim
97
operations are similar to containment boundaries or check surfaces,
but can be more flexible because:
They let you select a Cplane or view that you can trim relative
to.
98
You can trim any type of toolpath in addition to surface
toolpaths.
You can trim more than one toolpath with the same trim
operation.
9
When you create a trim operation, Mastercam stores it in the
Toolpath Manager like any other operation. It also keeps the
original source operation, marking it with a special trim icon.
The trim operation and source operations are associative with each
910
other, which means you can edit the parameters for each operation
separately and update the other operation by regenerating it. When

you post, you only select the source toolpaths (in this case, the pocket
toolpath), you do not post the Trimmed operation itself.
To create a trim operation, follow this general outline:
First, create the source toolpaths and the trim geometry. Note
that Mastercam will trim the toolpath right to the trim
geometry, without regard to cutter compensation, so you
might offset the trim geometry from the desired boundary by
the width of the tool. The trim geometry needs to be a closed
contour, but it does not have to be at the same Z-depth as the
part geometry or tool moves; Mastercam will project it in the
trim operation's Cplane onto the toolpath to calculate the
intersections with the toolpath.
Select Toolpaths, Trim toolpath from the menu. You will be
prompted to select the boundary chains, and then a point
(called a bias point) which tells Mastercam on which side of
the boundary you want to keep the tool movements. For
example, if you were trying to contain a toolpath inside a
circle, click anywhere inside the circle.
Use the Trimmed dialog box to select the toolpaths to trim.
You can also edit or reselect the bias point. Choose the T/C
Plane button to select a different Cplane to use as the
trimming plane, if desired. The Cplane you select determines
how Mastercam calculates the intersection of the boundary
geometry and the toolpath.
Choose OK in the Trimmed dialog box to complete the
operation. Both the original operation and the trim operation
appear in the Toolpath Manager. When you are ready to cut
the part, you only choose the source operation for post
processing. If you delete the trim operation, you must
regenerate the original toolpath.
Tips for Trimming Toolpaths

When creating a trimmed toolpath or wirepath, keep the following tips
in mind:
Arcs perpendicular to the trimming plane (construction
plane) are not trimmed. To adjust for this condition, the
trimming plane should be rotated 90 degrees to a plane
parallel to the arc’s plane.
You should backplot the toolpath to be trimmed to check the
placement of the trimming boundaries. Fit the trimming
boundaries to the screen before back plotting to see an

overlaying image.
Trimming in the 3D Cplane calculates only actual 3D
9
intersections of the trimming boundaries and the toolpath.
A maximum of 50 trimming boundaries may be defined.
Avoid using splines as trimming boundaries. If splines must
be used as trimming boundaries, they should be broken into a
92
number of smaller splines or preferably lines or arcs using one
of the Break functions (choose Edit, Trim / Break from the
menu).
Trimming does not incorporate any cutter compensation. 93
Trimming entities should be created to reflect the center line
of the cutter.
94
95
96
97
98
9
910
chapter 10
Machine and Control
Definitions
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Understanding Machine and Control Definitions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 812
Managing Machine and Control Definitions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 823
Understanding Machine and Control

Definitions
Machine and control definitions are key building blocks in Mastercam
X that let you organize your Mastercam installation to match your
shop floor. Before Mastercam X, settings that were required by your
machine tool or control unit were stored in the post processor, job
setup, or the toolpath parameters themselves. This made it
challenging to program for different machines, or move jobs from one
machine to another. In Mastercam X, settings that are specific to your
machine tool are stored in the machine definition, and settings that
are specific to your control are stored in the control definitions,
resulting in simpler and cleaner toolpath parameters and post
processors. This also lets you set up jobs for specific machines in a
much simpler and more straightforward way than ever before.
To create machining jobs in Mastercam X, you need the following
components. Each is stored in a separate file.
Machine definition—File extension matches machine type:
.MMD (Mill) .LMD (Lathe)
.RMD (Router) .WMD (Wire EDM)
Each file contains a single machine definition.

Control definition—Stored in a .CONTROL file. All products and
machine types use the same file extension. Each .CONTROL file can
store several control definitions, so that the .CONTROL file can be
shared by multiple machines and can access multiple post
processors. Think of a .CONTROL file as a library of control
definitions. It works the same way as tool libraries, which store sets
of tool definitions so that individual tools can be accessed by
different machines. If you have multiple machines and post
processors to support, you can use .CONTROL files to determine
which posts can be used with which machines.
Post processor—Stored in a .PST file. (Encrypted posts are stored in a
.PSB file.)
Each control definition is linked to a specific post processor.
In Mastercam X, the .PST file also stores the post text and
miscellaneous values, so that the .TXT file used in earlier
versions of Mastercam is no longer used.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Understanding Machine and Control Definitions • 813
The most common arrangement for most installations will be to link a

single machine definition file, a single control definition in a
.CONTROL file, and a single post processor together. In this model,
selecting a machine definition is similar to selecting a post processor
10
in earlier versions of Mastercam. For advanced users, the machine
definition and control definition architecture lets you configure a
single post to be used with multiple machine definitions, or single
machine definitions that can use several different posts.
102
Using Machine and Control Definitions
Before creating any toolpaths or machining operations, you need to
103
select the machine that will run the toolpaths. All of your available
machine definitions are listed on the Machine Type menu at the top of
your Mastercam window.
104
105
When you select a machine, Mastercam creates a machine group in
the Toolpath Manager.
106
107
108
The machine group is where Mastercam stores all of your toolpaths for
the selected machine. The machine group and its properties contain
most of the Job Setup functions from earlier versions of Mastercam. 109
To create operations for another machine, select the new machine and
Mastercam automatically creates a new machine group for it.
10
For example, if your part requires both milling and turning operations,
you can create separate lathe and mill machine groups just by
selecting the proper machines. You can save them all in the same part.
Each machine group stores a complete job setup for the selected
machine.
While you will work with machine definitions every time you create
toolpaths, for most day-to-day tasks, you will not need to explicitly
work with .CONTROL files. Just like in a real machine tool, the control
is “bolted on” to a machine definition, so that when you select the
machine definition, the control gets selected with it.
When you select a machine from the Machine Type menu, several
other things happen:
A post processor is automatically selected. It is possible to
configure a machine definition with several available post
processors. In this case, a default post processor is
automatically selected when you pick the machine, but you
can select any allowed post from the machine group
properties (see “Selecting a Different Post Processor” on
page 841).
Mastercam loads a set of operation defaults (.DEFAULTS file).
Mastercam’s interface changes to match the selected
machine. If you select a lathe, for example, the Toolpaths
menu lists only Mastercam Lathe toolpaths. In addition, the
set of toolbars that display change to match the selected
machine. For example, when you select a lathe machine
definition, toolbars for lathe toolpaths and functions are

displayed instead of mill functions.
TIP: You can choose which set of toolbars to load with a

10
specific machine. For example, you can choose to display the
toolbars for multiaxis toolpaths when a 5-axis mill is selected.
Select the toolbar state in the Machine Definition Manager: 102
103
Then select Toolbar States from the Settings menu to
customize the selected set of toolbars. For more information,
see “Creating and Saving Toolbar States” on page 101.
104
Machine Definition Components
The machine definition has several major parts. First, there is a set of
105
general machine properties:
106
107
108
109
10
Second, there is a component model that tells Mastercam exactly what

axes and peripheral equipment are attached to the machine:
For each component, you can set properties such as travel/rotary

motion limits and the axis orientation with respect to the machine
world coordinate system. Mastercam Router users will use this section
to define aggregate machining heads and drill blocks. You can also
10
define axis combinations for machines with multiple sets of axes, such
as multi-spindle lathes.
Finally, there is the selection of a control definition file (.CONTROL)
and a default post processor (.PST / .PSB):
102
103
104
When creating a machine definition, first select the .CONTROL file.
Mastercam then displays the list of available post processors in the
Post-processor list so you can select one.
For most users, who will only configure a single control definition and
105
post for each machine definition, this list will only contain a single
post. You can use the Control Definition Manager to add posts so that
they are available in this list (see “Adding posts” on page 862).
Operators will then be able to select any post that appears in this list as 106
part of the machine group properties, but the post that you select here
will be the default.
107
108
109
10
To create and edit machine definitions, select Machine Definition

Manager from the Settings menu:
See “Using the Machine Definition Manager” on page 824 to learn

more.
TIP: For users who develop post processors, most of the

machine definition settings are available to your post processor
via operation parameters. The Mastercam X Post Parameter Refer-
ence (available as a .pdf file in your \Documentation folder)
describes these parameters in detail and how to access them.
Control Definition Functions

The control definition serves a number of functions.
It stores settings about your control unit and its capabilities.
For example, configuring feed rates, cutter compensation
options, tolerances, arc and helix creation options, as well as
canned cycles and subroutines are all control definition
settings.
It contains a link to the post processor. Each control definition
can point to only one post processor (.PST/.PSB file). This
means that each .CONTROL file contains a complete set of
control settings that can be customized for each post. It also
means that each post contains a complete set of post text and
miscellaneous values that can be customized for each control
or machine. 10
Note: The same post can be used by more than one control
definition, provided the control definitions are stored in different
.CONTROL files or used by different types of machines. 102
It configures the posting environment. In addition to the
name and path of the post processor, this includes the files to
create (.NC, .NCI, .OPS), their paths, and the communication/
DNC settings. For example, if you have a part with several
103
machine groups, you can select all of the groups and post
them at once, even if they use completely different machine
types. Mastercam automatically selects the proper post and
creates the proper set of files for the toolpaths in each group,
based on the settings in the control definition used by each
104
group.
It sets values for a number of pre-defined post variables. For
example, many of the tolerances settings initialize predefined
variables that in previous versions of Mastercam could only
105
be set within the .PST file. Other settings include many NC
output variables, such as sequence numbers and their format.
For users who develop post processors, control definition settings are
transmitted to the post in several ways. As mentioned, some control
106
definition settings initialize specific pre-defined post variables. Many
of the other control definition settings are available to your post
processor through operation parameters.
The Mastercam X Post Parameter Reference (available as a .pdf file in
107
your \Documentation folder) lists the post variables and parameter
numbers corresponding to each control definition setting.
In addition, the control definition provides the mechanism for
transmitting post text and miscellaneous values from the .PST file to
108
the rest of Mastercam.
TIP: Users familiar with earlier versions of Mastercam will

notice that all of the numbered post questions have been 109
replaced by control definition settings.
Although each .CONTROL file can store several individual control

definitions—each corresponding to a different post processor or
machine type—most users will store a single control definition in each
10
.CONTROL file, so that each .CONTROL file corresponds to a single

post processor.
Use the Control Definition Manager in the Settings menu to create
and edit control definitions.
If the .control file contains more than one control definition, select the
post processor which identifies the desired control definition:
(See “Adding posts” on page 862 to add posts to this list.)

Edit the control definition settings for that post by selecting control
topics from the list. Mastercam organizes all of the control settings in
properties pages.
See “Using the Control Definition Manager” on page 848 to learn

more.
Post Processor Sections

Mastercam users experienced with earlier versions of Mastercam will
recall that post processors consisted of two separate files, a primary
.pst file and a .txt file that contained post text and miscellaneous
values. In Mastercam X, these have been combined into a single file,
the .pst file. (Mastercam X also supports binary and encrypted posts,
.psb files. In general, references to .pst files in this document apply
10
equally well to .psb files.)
Your post processor has two main sections:
The first section has the post blocks, processing logic, variable
102
declarations, and formatting statements similar to pervious
versions of Mastercam.
The second section is the post text section, It contains
separate copies of post text for every control definition that
103
references the post processor. This lets you customize the post
text for specific controls or machines. For example, you could
have a generic mill post that serviced two machines in your
shop. The .pst file would have two complete post text sections,
one for each machine.
104
See “Editing Post Text” on page 853 and “Editing Miscellaneous
Values” on page 861 to learn more.
Differences in Toolpath/Machine Group (local)

105
and Disk (master) Copies
When you select a machine definition and create a machine group,
Mastercam stores a local copy of the machine definition and its
106
control definition in your part file, as part of the machine group. To
users familiar with earlier versions of Mastercam, this is similar to the
way that Mastercam loaded a copy of the tool definition in your part
file when you selected a tool from a tool library. This let you create
107
job-specific edits to the tool definition, and it saved the tool
information in the part file so you could use the part file on any
Mastercam workstation.
Mastercam X does the same thing with the machine and control
108
definition—except that they are stored as part of the machine group,
which lets you use multiple machines in the same part file. You can
make job-specific edits to the local machine group copy, or you can
edit the master copy stored on your workstation’s hard drive—just like
how, in earlier versions of Mastercam, you could edit the local copy of
109
the tool definition or save changes to a tool library.
10
Access the Machine Definition Manager from the Machine Group

Properties dialog box to make job-specific edits to the local copies of
the machine and control definitions saved in the machine group.
To edit the master copies stored on your hard drive (or create new
machine and control definitions), choose Machine Definition
Manager and Control Definition Manager from the Settings menu.
MACHINE AND CONTROL DEFINITIONS / Managing Machine and Control Definitions • 823
Managing Machine and Control

Definitions
10
This section describes a number of setup and maintenance tasks that
102
you can perform with machine and control definitions.
“Working with Machine Definitions” describes how to use the
Machine Definition Manager, and includes specific sections
about a number of common tasks.
103
“Working with Control Definitions” on page 847 includes a
overview section that describes how to use the Control
Definition Manager, as well as specific sections on editing
post text and miscellaneous values. It also includes a
reference section describing the settings you can define on
104
each Control Definition properties page.
Working with Machine Definitions 105

In this section, you will learn how to perform a number of important
tasks related to machine definitions.
“Using the Machine Definition Manager” on page 824
106
provides an overview of editing machine definitions.
“Working with Default Machine Definitions” on page 831
describes how to choose default machine definitions and how
to start Mastercam with specific machines already loaded. 107
“Selecting a Different Machine Definition” on page 836 tells
you how to change the machine definition used by an existing
machine group. This is useful if you want to run a machining
job on another machine. 108
“Selecting a different .control file” on page 838 tells you how to
change the .control file associated with the machine
definition. This determines which post processors are
available for that machine.
“Selecting a Different Post Processor” on page 841 explains
109
how to use a different post processor for toolpaths that have
already been created.
“Locking machine and control definitions” on page 845
describes how to password-protect the master copies of your
10
machine and control definitions.
Using the Machine Definition Manager

Use the Machine Definition Manager to create, edit, and save machine
definitions. For most tasks, you will start the Machine Definition
Manager by selecting it from the Settings menu. If your current part
file already has one or more machine groups, Mastercam warns you
that it is loading the machine definition of the active machine group.
This message is for your information only; click OK to clear it and

continue.
By default, Mastercam loads the machine from the active machine
group, but you can work on any machine definition you choose. Once
the Machine Definition Manager is loaded, select the Open button
and select the desired machine.

To create a completely new machine definition, click the New button.
The diagram on the next page gives you an overview of how to use the
Machine Definition Manager to build a machine.
Figure 10-1: Working with the Machine Definition Manager
10
General Machine Parameters has settings that affect the entire machine. 102
Some buttons are only used Open the Control Definition Manager to edit the selected .control file.
for simulation and event-
driven programming functions. Create axis combinations for machines with multiple axes sets, like multiple spindle lathes.
Lock your machine definition with passwords.
103
D
104
A
105
106
C
107
B
108
Start by dragging empty subassemblies from window A to the Machine Configuration window C. Then
drag individual components B (such as axes and turrets) onto each subassembly. Choose only those
components that are actually present on your machine. Click the Component File button to open other
109
libraries of specific components. When a component has been added to the “tree” display, double-
click it to set its properties, such as travel/rotation limits and axis orientation.
Use section D to select the control unit and post processor. First, select the .CONTROL file, and then
select the post processor. Mastercam automatically populates the list with just the post processors
10
from the .CONTROL file.
Editing the Local or Master Copy

How you choose to edit the machine definition depends on whether
you are making job-specific changes to the current part, or whether
you are making permanent changes as part of a new installation or
machine setup. To perform either task, you will need to use the
Machine Definition Manager but you access it in different ways, each
of which is described in the following procedures.
“Making job-specific (local) changes to the machine
definition”.
“Making changes to the disk (master) copy of the machine
definition” on page 827.
See “Differences in Toolpath/Machine Group (local) and Disk (master)
Copies” on page 821 if you do not understand what these terms mean.
X Making job-specific (local) changes to the machine definition

To make job-specific changes to the current machine definition,
you need to go through the machine group properties in the
Toolpath Manager. Changes that you make apply only to the active
machine group and are saved in your part file.
1 In the Toolpath Manager, click the Files icon in the machine
group.
2 Click the Edit button in the Machine section.
Mastercam opens the Machine Definition Manager.

3 Make the desired changes. Some of the options are
unavailable. For example, you cannot select a new .CONTROL
file when you are editing the local copy. However, you can
select a different post if the .control file has more than one
post available; see “Selecting a different post processor—
machines with multiple post processors” on page 842.
4 Click the OK button to save the changes back to the machine

group properties and close the Machine Definition Manager.
X Making changes to the disk (master) copy of the machine

10
definition
To make changes to the master copy of the machine definition
stored on your workstation’s hard drive, access the Machine
Definition Manager from the Settings menu.
102
1 From the Settings menu, choose Machine Definition
Manager.
If your part file already has at least one machine group in
103
the Toolpath Manager, Mastercam alerts you that it is
loading the machine definition; click OK to clear the
message from the screen.
If your part file has no machine groups, you are prompted
to open an existing machine definition or to select a
104
machine type to create a new one.
2 If necessary, click the Open button to open a different
machine definition. 105
106
3 Make changes as desired. See “Working with the Machine
Definition Manager” on page 825 for an overview of the
different options.
4 Save your work:
107
Click the Save button to save the changes in the
current file, or
Click the Save As button to create a new machine
108
definition.
5 Click OK to close the Machine Definition Manager. Since the

changes that you have just made were saved to the disk
109
(master) copy of the machine definition, not to the machine
group (local) copy, Mastercam asks if you want to replace the
machine group copy with the new version.
6 Click Yes or No when prompted. If you click No, your active
10
machine groups will not include your changes.
Machine definition requirements

The Machine Definition Manager offers a great many features and
options that let you model a machine with high degree of
sophistication. However, not all of these features are useful for all
applications.
All Mastercam products except MultiTasking—including all levels of
Mill—only require a parameter-based machine definition. This means
that you do not need to create solid models of your machine
components. These machine definitions do not support machine
simulation or event-driven programming. Machine definitions need to
meet the following requirements:
All linear and rotary
axes must be
represented in the
component tree.
The axis orientation
and labels must be
set properly.
In addition, each
component group
that includes a
programmable axis
must include either
a tool-holding component (such as a tool spindle) or work-
holding component (such as a table or chuck).
Aggregate tooling heads and blocks must also be defined in
the component tree.
You must have at least one axis combination. Axis
combinations tell Mastercam which axis components define
the coordinate system for a given operation. For example, a
twin-spindle lathe will have two possible Z axes, depending
on which spindle is in use.
Most 3-5 axis mills and routers will only have a single default
axis combination:
Multi-turret, multi-spindle lathes will typically have several

axis combinations that need to be individually defined:
10
102
You must select a control definition and post processor. All of
your control definition pages should be completed and
103
reviewed, since many post variables are initialized directly
from their values.
104
105
For each component, you only need to complete the Parameters tab
for the component properties:
106
107
108
Most of the General Machine Parameters are optional. Some of the
tabs let you set useful defaults, such as tool libraries and construction
planes, while other settings such as travel and motion limits are
available to your post processor as parameter values. 109
10
Mill users who want to use the highfeed machining features need to
complete the Machine dynamics tab:
Lathe users who want to use a VTL need to set this up on the Cplane,
WCS, HTC/VTL tab:
Working with Default Machine Definitions

Configuring Start-up and Default Machine Definitions 10
Mastercam’s machine definition architecture provides extensive
flexibility in organizing your machine definitions and configuring your
default machines. For this reason, it can be confusing to coordinate all
the different options so that Mastercam works in the most efficient
102
way for you. The topics in this section explain how to configure default
machine definitions for different uses in Mastercam.
Figure 10-2: Loading a machine automatically when Mastercam starts 103

104
105
106
107
108
109
10
Loading a Machine Definition When You Start Mastercam

Follow these steps to select a machine that will load automatically
whenever you start a new Mastercam session. To start up with a
machine other than the one associated with the default product, see
“Starting up Mastercam with a different machine definition” on
page 834.
X Specifying a start-up machine definition

1 Choose Configuration from the Settings menu.
2 Select the Default Machines page.
3 Choose the default machine definitions you want to use for

each machine type.
4 Select the Start / Exit page.
5 In the Startup product drop-down list, select the product to

load at start-up. If, for example, you want Mastercam to start
up with a machine group for your default mill machine,
choose Mill as your start-up product.
6 Click Apply to save the settings in your .CONFIG file.
Mastercam uses default machine definitions in the following
instances:
When you select Default from the submenus in the Machine
type menu.
When you select File, New. In this case, Mastercam reads the
product type (for example, Mill or Lathe) from the active
machine group, and then gets the default machine for that
product from the .CONFIG file.
When you import a part file from an earlier version of
Mastercam.
Understanding Other Default Machine Definitions
In addition to the default machine definition that you choose as
described above, Mastercam also includes special machine definitions
for each machine type (Mill, Lathe, Wire, Router) that encapsulate
Mastercam’s system default values.
These default machine definitions, such as MILL DEFAULT.MMD, do
not represent actual machines and have nothing to do with your
default settings. They are provided for you to use as a starting point for
creating new machine definitions—use Save as to save it with a new
name before changing any values—or for troubleshooting other

machine definition problems.
10
102
?? 103
104
105
106
107
108
109
10
Overriding the Default Machine Definition

You might find it more convenient, when creating new part files, to
keep using the current machine definition instead of the default
machine as described in “Specifying a start-up machine definition” on
page 832. To make this change, select the Apply last machine
definition option in the Settings, Configuration, Files properties
page.
Selecting this option accomplishes the following:

When you create a new part file by selecting File, New from
the menu, Mastercam automatically creates a machine group
with the same product type and machine name as the active
machine group.
When you import parts from earlier versions, Mastercam
creates a machine group based on the most recently used
machine in the current Mastercam session.
Even if you select this option, you should still set up a default machine
definition. Mastercam uses the default machine definition when you
select Machine type, Default from the menu. Mastercam also uses the
default machine definition if it cannot determine the most recently
used machine. For example, if you are importing Mastercam Version 9
lathe parts, and you have not used Mastercam Lathe in the current
session, Mastercam creates machine groups using the default lathe
machine definition you have configured.
Starting up Mastercam with a different machine definition

By adding a command line switch for a specific Mastercam product,
you can force Mastercam to start with the default machine definition
for that product, rather than with the start-up product specified on the
Start/Exit page. This is most useful when you have several Mastercam
products installed and want to start each one with a specific machine. 10
The command line switches are simply the first letter of each product
name:
Mill
Lathe
/m
/l
102
Router /r
Wire /w
If you wish, you can attach the command line switch to your desktop
103
shortcut. Simply right-click on your Mastercam icon and choose
Properties. Add the command line switch to the Target field:
104
105
106
107
108
109
10
Selecting a Different Machine Definition

Typically, you select a machine definition before creating toolpaths.
Mastercam stores a copy of the machine definition in the machine
group, along with a copy of the control definition and a pointer to the
post processor. Mastercam displays this information in the Files tab of
the Machine Group Properties dialog box:
If you need to, you can replace the current machine definition with a
different one. You might need to do this for a couple of reasons:
You originally created the toolpaths for one machine, but
need to run the job on a different machine.
You want to use a different post processor, and the new post
processor is attached to a different machine definition.
When you replace the machine definition, Mastercam validates the
existing operations and informs you of any incompatibilities—for
example, if a toolpath uses a rotary axis that is not present on the new
machine. Mastercam also adjusts feeds and speeds that exceed the
limits of the new machine definition and informs you of any changes.
Note: Changing the machine definition does not affect the tooling
that has been selected for operations that have already been
created. It is your responsibility to ensure that the selected tools
and holders are available on the new machine.
X Selecting a different machine definition

group properties.
10
2 In the Machine Group Properties Files tab, click the Replace
button in the Machine section.
102
103
3 Select the desired machine definition.
Mastercam validates the existing operations against the

new machine definition. If there are any incompatibilities,
Mastercam displays the following message:
104
105
106
Click the Details button to learn more. In this case, the
spindle speed of an existing operation was greater than the
107
maximum spindle speed of the new machine, so
Mastercam adjusted it downward.
108
109
10
If there is a major incompatibility—meaning that the

new machine simply cannot perform an operation—
Mastercam does not replace the machine, and displays
the following message:
Click the Details button to learn more. In this case, an

operation used a rotary axis that was not present on the
new machine.
4 Click OK to close any messages, and then click OK to close the

Machine Group Properties dialog box.
Selecting a different .control file

Selecting a different .control file is not a task that operators would
routinely perform or be required to perform. Typically, this is a one-
time or infrequent setup task: for example, when the control unit on a
machine tool is being replaced or upgraded, and a new .control file is
needed to accommodate the changes.
X Selecting a different .control file

1 Start the Machine Definition Manager from the Settings
menu.
10
102
103
104
105
the Toolpath Manager, Mastercam will alert you that it is
106
loading that machine definition; click OK to clear the
Note: Because this procedure affects the disk copy of the machine
definition, you cannot perform it from the Machine Group Proper-
107
ties.
108
109
10
2 Select the new control from the Control Definition drop-

down. In this example, the current Fanuc control is being
replaced by a Fadal control.
3 Select the default post processor from the Post Processor

drop-down.
See “Adding posts” on page 862 to learn how to add post

processors to this list.
4 Save the machine definition.
Selecting a Different Post Processor

Selecting a post processor in Mastercam X or newer versions is similar 10
to earlier versions of Mastercam. The major difference is that instead
of selecting the .PST file directly, you need to select the machine
definition that has been configured for the post processor. You can do
this before creating your toolpaths: 102
103
or after your toolpaths have been created, through the machine group
properties in the Toolpath Manager: 104
105
The following procedure describes this in greater detail.
106
Note: Some shops might be configured so that each machine defi-
nition has multiple posts. In this case, the procedure is slightly
different. See “Selecting a different post processor—machines with
multiple post processors” on page 842 to learn more. 107
X Selecting a different post processor
This procedure applies to typical users whose machine definitions
are set up to allow only a single control definition and post 108
processor. In this case, you will select the new post processor by
loading a different machine definition.
109
10

group.
2 Click the Replace button in the Machine section.
3 Select the machine definition that contains the desired post.

Mastercam displays the name of the new machine definition
with the post processor.
4 Click OK to close the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
X Selecting a different post processor—machines with multiple

post processors
If your shop uses machine definitions that have been configured to
support multiple posts, follow these steps to use a different post
processor for the current job. The new post selection will be saved
as part of the machine group properties so that when you post
toolpaths from this machine group in the future, the new post will
be used, but it does not affect other parts or Mastercam files.

group.
10
102
103
104
105
3 Select the new post processor from the list. 106
107
The list displays all of the post processors in the .control file
108
that have been configured for this machine type. If the post
that you want to use is not listed here, it needs to be added to
the list as described in the next section.
4 Click Yes when Mastercam asks you if you want to replace the
109
existing control definition.
10
5 Click OK to close the Machine Definition Manager.

Mastercam should then display the name of the new post:
6 Click OK to close the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
X Selecting a different post processor—default for machine

Follow these steps to select a different post processor as the default
post for a machine definition.
1 Start Machine Definition Manager from the Settings menu.

loading that machine definition; click OK to clear the
2 If necessary, open the desired machine definition.
10
102
3 Select the new post processor from the list.
103
104
The list displays all of the post processors in the .control file
that have been configured for this machine type. If the post
105
that you want to use is not listed here, it needs to be added to
the list. “Adding posts” on page 862 tells you how to do this.
4 Save the machine definition and click OK to close the
Machine Definition Manager.
106
Note: If the machine definition that you edited is currently being
used in a machine group, Mastercam will ask you if you want to
update the machine group with the new definition.
107
Locking machine and control definitions
Mastercam lets you secure your machine and control definition files
108
with password protection. You can lock each file separately. When a
file is password-protected, users can open the file for viewing, but
cannot make any changes.
When you lock a machine definition file, only the .mmd/.lmd/
109
.rmd/.wmd file is protected.
When you lock a control definition file, only the .control file is
locked. 10
The Set password protection button is available on the toolbar of

both the Machine Definition Manager and the Control Definition
Manager. When it displays an unlocked state,
the current file is not password-protected. Click the button and enter a
password to protect it.
When the button displays a locked state,
the file is protected from changes. Click the button and enter the
password to unlock it for editing.
The protection applies only to the master copy of the machine
definition or .control file stored on your workstation’s hard drive. The
machine group copy stored in your part file can still be edited and the
changes will be saved with your part file.
When you try to open a protected file, Mastercam will prompt you for
the password. If you do not know the password, click OK to open the
file for viewing. You can look at all of the parameter pages, but cannot
edit any values.
IMPORTANT: Locking the .control file does not affect the .pst
files for any post processors referenced by its control defini-
tions. Locking or encrypting post processors is a separate
process.
X Locking machine and control definition files

1 From the Settings menu, select either Machine Definition
Manager or Control Definition.
Click OK if you see a message about editing the current
machine definition.
definition or .control file, you cannot perform it from the Machine
Group Properties.
10
102
103
2 Click the Set password protection button on the toolbar.
104
3 Enter the desired password.
4 Re-enter the password to confirm it, and click OK to close the

105
dialog box.
5 Save the machine definition or .control file.
6 Click OK to close the Machine Definition Manager or Control

106
Definition Manager. The password protection will apply to
the next time someone tries to open the file.
Working with Control Definitions

107
This section describes some key control definition functions. For the
most part, these are advanced configuration functions that are
performed only when a machine is being set up or significantly 108
updated. Most Mastercam users do not perform these tasks to create
machining jobs.
“Using the Control Definition Manager” below describes how
to edit control definitions in general. 109
“Editing Post Text” on page 853 describes how to use the
Control Definition Manager to edit post text, how post text is
organized, and how to import text from another post.
“Editing Miscellaneous Values” on page 861 describes how to
10
work with miscellaneous integer and real variables.
“Adding posts” on page 862 describes how to add additional

post processors to a .control file. When that .control file is
used by a machine definition, any of those posts can be used
with the machine without changing the machine definition.
Using the Control Definition Manager

Use the Control Definition Manager to create, edit, and save control
definitions. Control definition settings are logically grouped into a
number of different properties pages which are listed in the Control
topics window.
Figure 10-3: Control Definition Manager Control topics list
Pages that have not been opened in the current session have a
question mark next to them:
Pages that have been already viewed in the current editing session
have a green check mark next to them:
Note: Switching to a new page does NOT save any changes that
were made to the page you were on. The green check mark does
NOT mean that the changes on that page have been saved.
10
The list of pages that are available, as well as the specific options on
each, varies depending on the kind of machine you are creating a
control for—for example, mills, lathes, routers, or wire EDM machines.
102
Controls for mill/turn machines let you access both mill and lathe
options. See “Control Definition Properties” on page 869 to learn more
about each page, or click the Help button on each page.
103
TIP: See the Mastercam X Post Parameter Reference (installed
as a PDF file in your \Documentation folder) to learn more
about how each control definition field corresponds to a post
variable or parameter. 104
Most of the data that you enter with the Control Definition Manager is
saved with the control definition in the .CONTROL file, but there are
two major exceptions: 105
Settings from the Operation Defaults page are stored in the
.DEFAULTS file. See “Operation Defaults” on page 892 to learn
more.
Settings from the Text pages and Misc Int/Real page are
stored in the .PST file. For more information, see “Editing Post
106
Text” on page 853.
107
108
109
10
Editing the Local or Master Copy

How you choose to edit the control definition depends on whether you
are making job-specific changes to the current part, or whether you
are making permanent changes as part of a new installation or
machine setup. To perform either task, you will need to access the
Control Definition Manager differently. These are described in the
following procedures.
“Making job-specific (local) changes to the control
definition.”
“Making changes to the disk (master) copy of the control
definition” on page 851.
See “Differences in Toolpath/Machine Group (local) and Disk (master)
Copies” on page 821 if you do not understand what these terms mean.
X Making job-specific (local) changes to the control definition

To make job-specific changes to the current control definition, you
need to go through the machine group properties in the Toolpath
Manager. Changes that you make apply only to the active machine
group and are saved in your part file.
group.

3 Click the Edit control definition button.
10
102
Mastercam opens the Control Definition Manager.
4 Open individual pages and make changes, as necessary.
Note: When you are working from the machine group, you cannot
103
edit post text or miscellaneous values.
5 Click the Save button to save the changes back to the

machine group properties.
104
105
X Making changes to the disk (master) copy of the control
definition
To make changes to the master copy of the control definition stored
on your workstation’s hard drive, access the Control Definition
106
Manager from the Settings menu.
107
108
109
10
1 From the Settings menu, select Control Definition Manager.
2 If necessary, click the Open button to select a .CONTROL file

to work on.
3 If necessary, select the specific control definition to work on.

Remember, each .CONTROL file can contain several control
definitions for different post processors. Click Existing
definitions to select a specific control definition.
4 Open individual pages and make changes, as necessary.
5 Use one of the following methods to save your work:

To save the new control definition in the current
.CONTROL file, click the Save button.
To create a new .CONTROL file, click the Save As
button.
Editing Post Text

Even though you use the Control Definition Manager to work with post 10
text, Mastercam stores post text in the .PST file, not in the .CONTROL
file with the rest of the control definition data.
To support cases where you want to use the same post with multiple
control definitions, each .pst file can store several sets of post text. 102
Mastercam creates a new set of post text entries each time you add the
post processor to a .control file and create a new control definition
with it.
Each set of post text is identified by a header key which consists of the 103
machine type and name of the .CONTROL file. For example, the
following header:
[CTRL_MILL|GENERIC HAAS 4X MILL]
indicates that the post text which follows it is for a Mill control that is
104
saved in the file Generic Haas 4X Mill.CONTROL. The section
identified by the header includes post text, miscellaneous values, and
canned text.
105
106
107
108
109
10
Figure 10-4: How post text is organized inside the .pst file
Control definition #1: Fanuc.control (Mill)
Post processor: MyShop.pst
Default post text
Control definition #2: Haas.control (Mill)
Post text for CD #1
Post text for CD #2
Post text for new CD
New control definition: 4ax-Haas.control (Mill)

Each time you create a new control definition
that uses the .pst file, Mastercam creates a
new post text section in the .pst file. The initial
values come from the DEFAULT section in the
.pst file. You can then customize them in the
Text page of the Control Definition Manager.
Because each .pst file maintains separate copies of post text for
different control definitions, when you decide to work on the post text
for a particular post processor, the first thing you need to do is identify
which control definition the desired post text applies to. Then you can
load that control definition in the Control Definition Manager.
IMPORTANT: Because of header structure in the .PST file,

when you work on post text, your changes only affect a single
control definition. To make changes that apply to several control
10
definitions, use the Import function (see page 858) to copy your
changes to the post text sections in the .PST file.
Post Text Format

102
There are three possible text formats:
Empty field (no text)
“” (pair of double quotes)
103
Any other text string
Table 2, “Post text entries,” on page 856 describes how Mastercam and
the Control Definition Manager process each type of entry. Text is read
from the .PST file when a control definition with that post is loaded
104
into Mastercam. Text is written to the .PST file when you save it from
the Control Definition Manager.
105
106
107
108
109
10
Table 2: Post text entries

Type of text entry Writing to the PST file Reading from the PST file
Text field is empty Empty fields are not written Mastercam uses the default
to the post. If all fields under system text.
a header are empty, then the
category header is not
written.
“” (two double quotes) “” is written to the post. A String is empty, and the
category header is corresponding edit field is
generated. disabled.
Any text The text is written to the The text is read and replaces
post, and a category header any existing text.
is generated.
Use the following procedures to edit and import post text. Because
these procedure affects the .PST file, you cannot perform them from
the Machine Group Properties Files tab.
X Editing post text

10
102
103
104
105
2 If necessary, click the Open button to select the desired
.CONTROL file.
106
107
108
109
10

You only need to do this if your .CONTROL file has been set up
to support multiple posts. If so, click Existing definitions to
select the control definition linked to the post processor you
want to edit.
4 Select Text in the Control topics list. The set of post text
entries is organized into different subpages that are specific to
each machine type. Open individual pages and make changes
as desired.
Each page is organized like a spreadsheet into rows and
columns. The columns indicate different categories.
Click a cell to select it. Double-click to edit it. Right–click
for more editing options and to import text from other
sources.
Press [Tab] or [Shift+Tab] to move between data cells in
data entry mode.
Refer to the online help for detailed information about
how Mastercam interprets different types of entries and
where the entries are used within Mastercam.
5 Click the Save button to save the changes to the .PST file.
X Importing post text

Follow these steps to copy post text entries from one post text
section to another. Remember that each .pst file can contain many
sections of post text, one for every control definition (see Figure 10-
4 on page 854). You can import text from another .pst file, or you
can import text from another post text section in the same .pst file.
For example, if you wanted to use the same .pst file with two similar
controls, you can create a new control definition which references
the original post, and then import the post text from one section of
the .pst file to the post text section for the new control definition.
TIP: You can also use this feature to copy post text values from
a pre-Mastercam X .TXT file to a Mastercam X .PST file. 10
102
103
104
105
106
2 If necessary, click the Open button to select the desired
.CONTROL file.
107
108
Remember, each .CONTROL file can contain several control
definitions for different post processors. Click Existing
definitions to select the control definition linked to the post
processor you want to edit.
109
4 Select Text in the Control topics list.
5 Find the desired sheet or cell and decide how much text you
need to import. You can import post text for:
10
all the sheets listed in the Text section
an entire sheet
an entire column of entries in a single sheet
a single cell
6 Right-click in a data cell. Select Import from the menu and the
desired amount of text to import.
To import text from a Mastercam X post file, complete

Step 7.
To import text from a pre–Mastercam X .TXT file, skip to
Step 8.
7 Select From post to import from a Mastercam X post file.
Select this option even if the text you are importing is in a
different section in the current .PST file.
a Select the post processor. Mastercam lists all of the post
text headers that are in the .PST file.
b Select the header to import, and then click OK. Continue

with Step 9.
8 Select From text to import post text from a pre-Mastercam X

.TXT file. Mastercam displays the following dialog box.
10
102
103
104
a Select the type of post you are importing from.
b Select the Mastercam version number of the .TXT file.
c Click Browse and select the .TXT file. 105

d Click OK.
9 Click the Save button to save the imported text to the .PST
file. 106
Editing Miscellaneous Values
Miscellaneous values (user-defined integer and real variables) are
stored in the .PST file in the post text section. Working with
miscellaneous values is a two-stage process.
107
First, use the Text page in the Control Definition Manager to
create the text labels. Follow the procedures in “Editing Post
Text” on page 853. 108
Then use the Misc Int/Real Values page to tell Mastercam
how to initialize them. You can enter default values on this
page or direct Mastercam to get the values from the
.DEFAULTS file. By separating the defaults from the variable
labels in this way, Mastercam lets you easily create and import
109
generic sets of variables while maintaining separate default
values.
Refer to the online help on the Misc Int/Real Values page for detailed
information about how the defaults work.
10
Adding posts
Follow these steps to make additional post processors available to a
machine definition. Completing these steps will let operators select a
different post processor without changing the machine definition.
This lets them select and use different post processors just like in
earlier versions of Mastercam, with the added security that they will
only be allowed to select posts that are appropriate for their current
machine.
When you select a post processor in the Machine Definition Manager,
Mastercam actually reads the list of posts from the .control file:
Therefore, you will use the Control Definition Manager to build and
configure this list.
X Adding additional posts to the machine definition

1 Start the Machine Definition Manager from the Settings
menu.
10
102
103
104
105
a If your current part file has one or more machine groups in
106
loading the machine definition used by the active group.
Click OK to clear the message.
107
definition, you cannot perform it from the Machine Group Proper-
ties:
108
109
10
2 If necessary, open the desired machine definition.
3 Click the Edit control definition button.
4 Mastercam opens the Control Definition Manager.
5 Click the Post processors button.
6 Click Add files and select the post processors that you wish to
add. (You can select more than one file at a time.)
Note: Mastercam will warn you if the selected post processors have
not been updated to Mastercam X.
7 Click OK to return to the Control Definition Manager.

The new posts will be listed in the Post processors list, but
with “plus sign” icons next to their names instead of green
check marks.
8 Select one of the new posts.

9 Click the Save button to save it to the .control file.
10
102
The “plus sign” icon will be replaced by a green check mark.
This indicates that the new post is OK and can be selected in
the machine definition.
103
104
10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 for each post that you wish to add. 105
What Mastercam does behind the scenes
When you clicked Save in step 9 above, Mastercam created a new copy
of the control definition settings in the .control file. A .control file
configured for use with several posts actually contains many
106
individual control definitions—each control definition corresponds to
a single post processor. This lets you customize each control definition
for a single post processor.
When you add a control definition for a new post processor to the
107
.control file—like you just did in the previous procedure—Mastercam
populates the control definition pages with default values. Where do
these values come from? These are the values that you see when
Default setting for control type is selected in the Post processor list. 108
109
10
Edit the values for the new control definition by typing new data
directly in the pages, or you can import settings from another control
definition used by a different post. To do this, right-click in any page:
You can choose to import data for a specific page, or all the pages.
TIP: Read the topic “Organizing control definition defaults” in

the online help to learn more.
Post text and miscellaneous values—Because Mastercam X lets you

customize post text and miscellaneous values for each machine or
control, a post that has just been added to the .control file has default
values for these as well. Since these are stored directly in the .pst file,
not in the .control file, if you want to use text or miscellaneous values
from another post, you need to import them separately.
Go to the Text page and choose Import from the right-click menu:
You can choose how much text to import, from a single cell to all the
sheets. Choose From post to import the text from another Mastercam
X post, or From text to import from a pre-Mastercam X post text file
(.txt file). See “Editing Post Text” on page 853 to learn more.
Post processor status indicators

Each post processor that appears in the Post processors list includes a
status icon:
10
102
103
104
These icons indicate whether it is OK to use the post processor for
posting, or if Mastercam detects a problem. For example, problems
can occur if the control definition has not been properly saved, or if
the .pst file is missing or has been moved. A properly configured post
processor file meets the following criteria:
105
A control definition that associates the post processor with a
specific control type has been created and saved to a
.CONTROL file. 106
Using the information in the control, Mastercam has verified
the location of the .PST file that is stored on your system and
has verified that it is actually there.
A header exists in the .PST file with the control type and name
of the .CONTROL file followed by the post text for the control.
107
This header is automatically created when you create and
save the control definition. The format of the header is:
[Product key | Control Key]
where
108
Product key = CTRL_MILL, CTRL_MT_MILL,
CTRL_LATHE, CTRL_MT_LATHE,
or CTRL_ROUTER 109
Control Key = .CONTROL filename
10
The following table explains each possible post status icon:
The .PST file exists and the post processor has been
properly configured in the control definition. Status is OK
for posting. This is the only status that is approved for
posting!
Mastercam cannot find the .PST file and the post processor
has not been configured in the Control Definition Manager
properties pages.
The .PST file exists and the post processor has been added.
You see this icon when you first add a post processor to the
list and have not yet saved the control definition. Save the
control definition to the .CONTROL file to change its status
to OK.
The post processor has been configured in a control

definition, but Mastercam cannot find the .PST file. This
status can appear if you move the part file to another
workstation that does not have the necessary .PST file
loaded on it, or the file is not in the specified location.
The .PST file exists but has not been configured for use
with a control definition. Select the post processor and
create a control definition with it. You can use it after you
save the control definition to the .CONTROL file.
Unknown; Mastercam is unable to determine the post

processor status. Try saving the control definition to see if
this corrects the problem and restores the status.
IMPORTANT: The post status icons do not indicate that a post

has been properly customized for a particular machine or appli-
cation. Creating a control definition and configuring the post as
10
described here is not a substitute for writing, editing, and prop-
erly testing the .PST file to make sure that its output is compat-
ible with a particular machine. That must be done in addition to
any steps described here, and is outside the scope of this docu-
102
mentation. For more information, contact your Mastercam
reseller or see the MP Post Processor Reference Guide.
Control Definition Properties

103
The Control Definition Manager provides a number of different
properties pages you use to define controls. In this section, you will
learn about the settings in each page, including: 104
Tolerances (page 870)
Communications (page 871)
Files (page 872)
NC Dialog (page 873)
105
NC Output (page 874)
Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values (page 876)
Work System (page 877)
106
Tool (page 878)
Linear (page 880)
Arc (page 881)
Rotary (page 883)
107
Feed (page 884)
Cutter Compensation (page 885)
Machine Cycles (page 887)
108
Subprograms (page 891)
Operation Defaults (page 892)
Text (page 893) 109
10
Tolerances
The properties you define in this page are used to set pre-defined post
processing variables. You can also record the control’s minimum
tolerance requirements for creating surfaces, splines, and other
geometry. The minimum and maximum arc radius values may be used
by the toolpath filtering functions.
Figure 10-5: Tolerances properties page
(Control Definition Manager)
Note: Only Mastercam CAM functions use the tolerances you

define here. To set tolerances for CAD functions, use the Settings,
System Configuration function and dialog box. For more
information, see “Setting Defaults and Preferences
Communications
Use the Communications page to configure the serial
communications settings between the control and the computer
10
running Mastercam.
Figure 10-6: Communications properties page
(Control Definition Manager) 102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
10
Files
Use this page to specify the location of the files needed by the control
definition and to establish default settings for saving different types of
files. You can change the default operations file (.DEFAULTS) or the
operations library (.OPERATIONS) for a particular machine group,
assign a default .SET Setup Sheet template, and set post and C-Hook /
NET-Hook program .DLLs.
Use the other option groups in this page to configure the posting
process, including how to log post processing errors and messages,
setting up Post Processing dialog box defaults, and defining how to
manage NC parameters.
Figure 10-7: Files properties page
The File usage and Data paths fields list the different types of items
for which defaults can be set. Select an item to see the current default
displayed in the field next to it. Choose the Folder or File cabinet icons
to select a new value.
Other options allow you to define how Mastercam logs errors and
display messages when using the control.
Notes:
• When creating a new control definition, the default names and
10
paths of the toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) files are read from
the Settings, Configuration, Files properties page settings. For
more information, see “Files” on page 131.
• Use the Control Definition Manager, Tool properties page to
edit and create new toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) files. For
102
more information, see page 878.
NC Dialog 103
Use this page to enable different options in the Toolpath parameters
tab. Deselect any features that are not supported by the control.
Figure 10-8: NC Dialog properties page
104
105
106
107
108
Notes:
109
• The Rotary axis button is enabled through the Machine
Definition Manager.
• All control types use this page, but not all options appear for
each type.
10
NC Output
You can set a number of options that affect how the NC code is
formatted and presented, including:
Absolute/incremental, Post file debug, Comments in
NC (page 874)
Sequence numbers (page 874)
Spaces and end-of-block characters (page 875)
Figure 10-9: NC Output properties page
Absolute/incremental, Post file debug, Comments in NC—The

selections you make in these sections are defaults you can override
when using the control. For example, you can modify NC
comments using the Files tab in the Machine Group Properties
dialog box.
Sequence numbers—All of the information in this section is written
directly to the control definition. Mastercam supports both integer
and real values for sequence numbers. To activate this feature,
choose Use decimal sequence numbers. When decimals are
enabled, you can enter real numbers in sequence numbers fields,
limited by the Number of places you specify. You can override the
Initial sequence number and Increment sequence number fields
using the Files tab in the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
Note: This section centralizes information that was set in several

locations in previous Mastercam versions. 10
Spaces and end-of-block characters—The values you set in this
section are read directly by the post processor.
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
10
Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values

Miscellaneous values are custom variables that you can define in your
post processor. Operators can then enter specific values for each
toolpath by clicking the Miscellaneous values button in the Toolpath
parameters tab when creating a toolpath.
You can create a set of integer variables and a set of real
(decimal) variables.
Each set can include up to 10 different variables.
Use this page to tell Mastercam how to initialize the sets of custom
variables that you can create for the control definition. Each
miscellaneous variable defined in the active post will appear here as
an editable field. See “Editing Post Text” on page 853 and “Editing
Miscellaneous Values” on page 861 to learn more.
Figure 10-10: Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values properties
page (Control Definition Manager)
For each active field, you can enter a new or different default value.
When you save the current control definition, the new values will be
written to the text section of the active post.
The values that you enter here will normally be the defaults for all
operations created with this control definition. You can choose to
override this behavior with the Initialize toolpath operation options.
To create different default values for each operation type,

select From default operation. Then use the Operations
Defaults page to enter the desired values for each operation
type and save them to a .DEFAULTS file.
10
For mill/turn controls, Mastercam will let you store two sets of
miscellaneous variables, one for milling and one for lathe operations.
To create the second page, choose the Use separate mill and lathe
text and values option. In the Control topics list, you will then see
102
separate topics created for each set of values which you can then edit
independently.
For mill/turn controls, you can define two sets of miscellaneous
variables, one for milling and one for lathe operations. To enable this
103
feature, choose the Use separate mill and lathe text and values
option. Separate mill and lathe Misc. Int/Real topics display under
Text in the Control topics list.
104
Notes:
• Use the NC Dialog page to enable or disable the Misc values
button that displays in the Toolpath parameters tab. You can
use post text to change the label that appears on the button.
105
• You can also configure Mastercam to run a C-Hook when the
Misc values button is pressed. Use the Settings, System
Configuration function Files tab to specify the C-Hook. You can
specify a different C-Hook for each Mastercam product (Mill,
106
Lathe, Router and Wire). For more information, see “Files” on
page 131.
Work System 107

The Work system page lets you select the work coordinate system used
by the control:
Setting Typical post interpretation 108

Home position G90/91
Local work offsets
Work offsets
G92
G54, E1
109
Other Custom
10
Note: In previous versions of Mastercam, these parameters were

typically set in the Miscellaneous values dialog box (by entering 0,
1, or 2).
Figure 10-11: Work System properties page

Use the Tplane field to assign work offsets to all Tplanes or just those
which are being transformed.
Tool
Use the Tool subpages to set the defaults for tool offsets, numbering,
and home positions that apply to mill, lathe, router, and mill/turn
control types. (Some of the field labels are slightly different for lathe.)
For mill/turn machines, you can access separate subpages for mill and
lathe tools.
Figure 10-12: Tool properties page

10
102
103
104
105
Tool offsets—Choose one of the following methods used to transmit
tool offset information to the post processor: 106
Read tool offsets directly from the tool definition
Create an offset number based on the tool number plus the
number you enter here
Tool numbers—Select the options that describe how the post
107
processor handles tool numbers and head/station numbers.
Home position—The home position is where the tool goes for tool
changes. You can set the home position in several different places,
including:
108
Machine Definition
Tool Definition (Lathe)
Toolpath Parameters for an individual operation 109
Use this section to set the default source of the home position. You
can always override the home position default on an operation-
specific basis.
10
Linear
Use these options to define how the control interpolates 3D linear
motion. (Only Lathe and Wire machines have corner rounding
options.)
Note: For Mill/Turn controls, separate linear subpages for Mill and
Lathe are provided so you can configure these settings separately.
Figure 10-13: Linear properties page

For each plane, choose one of the following options:

Do not break linear motion. Allow 3D interpolation for both
rapid and feed rate moves.
Break rapid moves in two components (for example, an X-Y
move component followed by a Z move component), but
allow 3D interpolation for feed rate moves.
Break all moves, including both rapid and feed rate (the post is
responsible for breaking the feed motion).
TIP: To link duplicate fields in each plane control section and

make them easier to maintain, select the option to
Automatically set duplicate dialog items the same. This allows
10
you to change only one field and update all duplicate fields in
this page.
102
IMPORTANT: Plane definitions apply to the tool direction, not
the linear axis direction.
After setting the linear motion for each plane, use the Corner rounding 103
/ Exact stop fields to define how the control handles corner rounding.
Before selecting the exact stop mode for corner rounding, verify that
this mode is supported by the post processor.
Arc 104
This page allows you to define how the control supports arcs and
helixes.
Figure 10-14: Arc properties page
105
106
107
108
109
Lathe controls share the same page with Mill/Router controls, except
that for Lathe, there is only one plane available and no options for
10
helix support. For Mill/Turn controls, you will see separate subpages
for Mill and Lathe settings. Mastercam uses this information when
filtering toolpaths.
Rotary
Use the settings in this page to further customize the rotary axis
parameters from the machine definition. You can choose to break
10
rapid rotary moves when they exceed the rotary axis limits set in the
machine definition. You can also allow Mastercam to calculate
bi-stable solutions for rotary axis positions. This allows the post
processor to attempt the second solution in order to stay within limits 102
or reduce machine motion. Depending on conditions and the post
processor, this may cause a tool retract and reposition.
Figure 10-15: Rotary properties page
104
105
106
107
Select the planes in which the control can create arcs. Settings
in this page are disabled for unselected planes. For mills,
108
indicate whether helixes are supported and, if so, in what
planes.
For each plane in which arcs are supported, choose how the
control defines the centerpoint. Select a method from the
109
drop-down list.
Indicate whether the control allows 360-degree arcs. If it does
not, define whether to break the arcs at quadrants or
180-degree increments.
10
Select the error check routines to process when posting.
Feed
The options in this page allow you to define how Mastercam interprets
the feed rate values that are entered for each toolpath operation
created using the control.
Figure 10-16: Feed properties page
Set feed and rotary options for each axis group that applies to
the control: 3-axis, 4-axis, and 5-axis.
Define how the units for the feed rate are dimensioned. Set
the dimensions separately for linear and rotary feed rates.
You can also choose to output rapid moves as linear moves at the
maximum feed rate and, if necessary, adjust feed rates for arc moves.
Notes:
• Make sure that the control has the internal logic to support the
options you select.
• To set maximum and minimum feed rates, use the Machine
Definition Manager.
Cutter Compensation
Use this page to tell Mastercam how your control implements cutter
compensation and which compensation options will be available to
10
the user.
Figure 10-17: Cutter Compensation properties page
103
104
105
106
The first check box determines if the control supports cutter
compensation at all. If this option is not selected, users will not be able
to select Control as the compensation type, but they will be able to
107
select Computer to have Mastercam calculate compensated toolpaths.
If this option is selected, the other options are enabled.
If your control allows you to activate cutter compensation on
arc moves, select that option here.
108
Selecting the Control supports… options enables the wear
compensation features. These will appear in the list of
109
10
compensation types available to your users when they are

creating toolpaths:
If appropriate, select the option to tell Mastercam that this

control turns cutter comp on/off above the part. This setting
does not change the toolpath or NCI file, but is available to the
post and needs to be implemented there. Typically, this option
is used together with the options to Plunge after first move
and Retract before last move options in the Lead In/Out
dialog box.
Select Optimize Toolpath to enable this option as the default for new
toolpaths. It causes Mastercam to eliminate arcs from the toolpath if,
in the compensated toolpath, they would be smaller than the radius of
the selected tool.
Machine Cycles
Use the subpages of machine cycle properties to define how the
control implements different machining cycles.
10
Figure 10-18: Machine Cycles properties page
102
103
104
105
106
For mill/turn machines, an additional option is added to this page:
Use separate mill and lathe drill cycle enable options. When
selected, this option creates separate subpages for mill and lathe drill 107
cycles, allowing you to independently set and maintain their options.
All control types use the same version of this page. In the following
section, you will learn to use additional detail pages to set more
specific options for drill cycles and lathe canned cycles, including: 108
Drill Cycles (page 888)
Lathe Canned Cycles (page 890)
109
10
Drill Cycles
Select all drill cycles that produce canned cycle output. The drill cycles
that you do not select in this page can still be used in the toolpaths you
create with this control. However, using them results in long-hand NC
code.
Figure 10-19: Mill Drill Cycles properties page
Note: Custom drill cycles do not result in long-hand code.

Figure 10-20: Lathe Drill Cycles properties page

10
102
103
104
105
For mill/turn machines, you can maintain separate versions of this
page for mill and lathe drilling operations. There is a separate page for
activating and configuring lathe canned cycles. 106
The options you set in this page affect the following lathe toolpath
tabs:
Lathe drill cycle parameters tab
Mill/Router drill cycle parameters tab
107
Note: To edit the name / label of each cycle, and to specify
parameters for each cycle, use the Control Definition Manager,
Text page. For more information, see page 893.
108
109
10
Lathe Canned Cycles

You can also define how the control supports other canned cycles
besides drilling. To enable each toolpath type supported by the
control, select the corresponding check box.
Figure 10-21: Lathe Canned Cycles properties page
Groove and thread toolpaths also have a number of secondary options

for supporting specific features. These correspond directly to options
and fields that appear in the parameters tabs when using the control
with the selected machine type to create toolpaths. Options that are
not enabled in this properties page are disabled or hidden.
The options you set in this page affect the following lathe toolpath
tabs:
Canned groove shape parameters tab
Canned groove rough parameters tab
Thread cut parameters tab
Subprograms
Mastercam uses subprograms in two ways: 10
Transform subprograms are created by toolpath transform
operations.
Non-transform subprograms are created by depth cuts and
drilling operations. Non-transform subprograms are available
only with Mastercam Mill and Router.
102
In the Subprograms properties page, you define how the control
supports both types of subprograms.
Figure 10-22: Subprograms properties page 103
104
105
106
107
Options in the Mirror / rotate routines section apply only to

108
transform subprograms. Select the transformation types for which the
control can create subprograms. When transforming toolpaths, you
can still use the options you did not select in this page. However,
Mastercam will create long-hand output rather than subprograms for
109
the unselected options.
10
Operation Defaults
Use this page to create and edit sets of toolpath operation defaults
(.DEFAULTS files). This page does the same thing as the Edit Operation
Defaults dialog box, which you typically access from the Machine
Group Properties. It is provided in the Control Definition Manager as a
convenience, so you can access toolpath and operation defaults while
working with the control settings. Separate Inch and Metric pages let
you work with the default files for inch and metric operations.
Note: Use the Settings, Configuration function to define whether

inch or metric mode is the preferred Mastercam default. This
preference is not defined in the control definition. See “Setting
Defaults and Preferences (Configuration)” on page 111 for details.
Figure 10-23: Operation Defaults properties page

IMPORTANT: Settings on this page are saved to the

.DEFAULTS file, not the .CONTROL file. If you change operation
defaults settings, you must click the Save default settings
button to save your changes to the .DEFAULTS file. Mastercam
prompts you to do this when you leave this page.
Text
Use the individual subpages under the Text heading in the Control
topics pane to create, view, and edit post processor text entries in a
10
number of categories.
Prior to Mastercam X, posts were divided into two files:
A .PST file, which contained post variables, questions, and 102
other processing logic.
A .TXT file, which contained text data used by the post
processor and which was frequently used to customize the
Mastercam interface with machine- or control-specific
parameters.
103
In Mastercam X, all of the post controlled text in the .TXT file has been
brought into the control definition, and its text strings are now part of
the .PST file. Instead of editing the .TXT file directly, you now use the
Text page in the Control Definition Manager to access the text data in
104
the .PST file. See “Editing Post Text” on page 853 and “Editing
Miscellaneous Values” on page 861 to learn more.
Mastercam's control definition architecture means that each .PST file
can have several sections of post text. Every time you configure a post
105
processor for use with a specific control definition, Mastercam writes a
new post text record and appends it to the .PST file. The records are
separated by headers which contain the name of the control and type
of machine. For example, the header:
106
[CTRL_MILL|BPT-DX32]
refers to a Mill control definition which is stored in a control file
named BPT-DX32.CONTROL. This means that in a single .PST file, you
can store different sets of post text with unique values for different
107
controls.
In addition, there is a section in the .PST file that contains default post
text. Use the right–click menu in any of the Text subpages to import
post text sections from other control definitions in the same .PST file
108
or from completely different .PST files, or to restore values from the
defaults.
109
10
Figure 10-24: Text properties page

Choose a topic from the list to view its text entries in a spreadsheet-like
interface. To enter or edit a value, double–click in a field and type the
new value.
Figure 10-25: Example: Text properties subpage
10
102
103
104
105
Note: For misc. ints/reals, the default values are embedded in the
text string. For more information, see “Miscellaneous Integer / Real
Values” on page 876. 106
Right–click Menu Options—For more editing options and to import
text from other sources, use the following options that display when
you right–click in the Text properties page. 107
IMPORTANT: The right–click menu is available only when you
right–click in a row that is in use and in a column other than
Description. 108
Import: Import to an entire sheet, a category, a single cell, or
all text pages from another post processor, or import an entire
sheet from a .TXT file created with a prior version of
Mastercam.
109
Default: Choose the source of the default values for the
current sheet, category, cell, or all text pages, either system-
wide default values, or the post processor default. The post
processor default is the generic text originally found in the
10
post text file.
Restore: Replace the contents of a sheet, category, cell, or all

text pages with the system default values.
Export: Write the current sheet to a delimited text (.TXT) file.
Save as Default: Select this option to save the post text under
the Post text header in the specific control file and under the
default header for post text. The default text is used as the
source of the default text values, as defined above for the
right–click menu Default option. It is also used as the source
of default text values when you select the post processor in the
Control Definition Manager.
• 897
Index
Numerics creating points in center................... 274

2D / 3D creating polar.................................... 282
working in ......................................... 199 arcs
4-axis control definition defaults................ 881
toolpaths ........................................... 523 area clearance toolpaths....................... 449
5-axis Art
selecting geometry for toolpaths ...... 525 Art Manager .......................... 20, 21, 710
toolpaths ........................................... 523 documentation ..................................... 7
menu............................................. 40, 51
toolpaths........................................... 381
A associativity
about ....................................................... 67 Solids................................................. 652
advanced multiaxis toolpaths toolpath .............................................. 35
axial shift ........................................... 577 attributes
cut pattern......................................... 537 about................................................. 190
depth cuts ......................................... 573 assigning to transformed entities..... 345
entry and exit macros ....................... 568
feed rate optimization ...................... 576
feed rate optimizer............................ 576
changing ................................... 194, 196
setting ....................................... 191, 192
AutoCursor
116
gap handling ..................................... 565 about................................................. 162
gouge-check ...................................... 559 Along mode....................................... 172
limits ................................................. 557 customizing ...................................... 166
linking moves .................................... 563 power keys ........................................ 168
Machine Definition tab..................... 577 relative position ................................ 171
multipasses ....................................... 571 using FastPoint mode....................... 165
plunge roughing................................ 572 using Overrides................................. 169
pocketing .......................................... 572 using visual cues................................. 28
roughing............................................ 571 AutoSave / Backup................................ 133
stock definition ................................. 571 axis combinations......................... 236, 817
surface selection ............................... 540 high speed surface toolpaths............ 520
tilting strategies.........................549–554 axis substitution
tool axis control................................. 548 high speed surface toolpaths............ 521
tool contact point.............................. 555
Utility tab .......................................... 575
aggregate heads..................................... 429 B
analyze backplot
defaults.............................................. 115 defaults ............................................. 115
entities............................................... 365 operations......................................... 781
arc entities backup
creating ............................................. 281 configuring ....................................... 133
898 • MASTERCAM X2 / Reference Guide
block drilling ......................................... 423 color

breaking entities.................................... 332 defaults ............................................. 119
setting attributes............................... 191
C setting, changing .............................. 197
communication
CAD
configuration settings....................... 120
defaults.............................................. 117
control definition defaults................ 871
editing ............................................... 240
comparing files ................................. 42, 74
in Mastercam .................................... 162
components
calculator................................................. 36
axis combinations..................... 236, 817
constants ............................................. 38
machine definitions..............34, 54, 236
math functions.................................... 39
post processors ................................. 792
operators ............................................. 38
configuration
unit symbols........................................ 37
about ................................................. 111
canned cycles
analyze defaults ................................ 115
control definition defaults ................ 890
AutoSave / Backup defaults.............. 133
canned text ............................................ 893
backplot defaults .............................. 115
C-axis
CAD defaults ..................................... 117
contour toolpaths (mill / turn )......... 594
chaining defaults .............................. 118
drilling toolpaths (mill / turn)........... 594
color defaults .................................... 119
Chain Manager...................................... 740
communications defaults................. 120
chaining
converter defaults ............................. 121
Chain Manager.................................. 740
default machines .............................. 123
contour toolpaths.............................. 736
dimension attribute defaults ............ 126
defaults.............................................. 118
dimension settings defaults.............. 128
direction ............................................ 736
dimension text defaults .................... 127
open and closed ................................ 735
file type defaults................................ 131
overview .............................................. 31
grid settings defaults......................... 139
solids .........................................186, 189
leaders / witness defaults ................. 130
synchronizing.................................... 737
note text defaults .............................. 129
techniques......................................... 734
post processing defaults ................... 135
wireframe geometry.......................... 186
print defaults .................................... 136
wireframe tips ................................... 189
screen defaults .................................. 137
chamfers
shading defaults................................ 141
creating.............................................. 308
Solids defaults................................... 142
Change Recognition................... 42, 71, 74
start and exit defaults ....................... 143
Check surfaces
tolerance defaults ............................. 146
high speed surface toolpaths ............ 447
toolpath defaults............................... 148
C-Hooks
Toolpath Manager defaults .............. 149
running user applications................... 52
verify interface defaults .................... 153
Zip2Go................................................. 60
verify settings defaults ...................... 155
circle entities
configuration files (.CONFIG)
creating.............................................. 281
about ................................................. 111
creating from center point ................ 281
managing .......................................... 112
creating from edge points ................. 283
merging ............................................. 158
circle toolpaths
construction planes
Mill / Router ...................................... 394
about ................................................. 207
• 899
contour toolpaths defaults ............................................. 121

about ................................................. 384 coordinate systems
chaining ............................................ 736 about (Lathe) .................................... 236
chamfer ............................................. 385 about (Mill / Router)......................... 206
creating tabs...................................... 388 and machine definitions .................. 215
onion skin ......................................... 388 views and planes............................... 206
oscillating .......................................... 387 coordinates
ramp .................................................. 386 displaying ................................. 216–217
remachining...................................... 386 entering in FastPoint mode.............. 165
Control Definition Manager Cplanes
about ................................................... 33 about................................................. 207
arc defaults........................................ 881 setting ............................................... 209
canned cycle defaults........................ 890 setting in Lathe ................................. 238
communication defaults................... 871 curves
cutter comp defaults ......................... 885 generating on surfaces and solids .... 316
drill cycle defaults ............................. 888 customizing
feed defaults...................................... 884 AutoCursor ....................................... 166
file type defaults................................ 872 drop-down menus.............................. 91
helix defaults ..................................... 881 Mastercam workspace.................. 54, 82
linear motion defaults....................... 880 right-mouse button menu.................. 99
machine cycle defaults ..................... 887 shortcut keys..................................... 107
misc integer / reals defaults.............. 876 toolbars ............................................... 87
NC dialog box defaults...................... 873 cutter compensation
NC output defaults............................ 874 control definition defaults................ 885
operation defaults (.DEFAULTS) ...... 892
rotary defaults ................................... 883
subprogram defaults......................... 891
in control .......................................... 885
Cview
utility................................................. 598
116
text defaults....................................... 893
tolerance defaults ............................. 870 D
tool defaults ...................................... 878
defaults
using.................................................. 848
configuration settings............... 111, 113
work system defaults ........................ 877
high speed surface toolpaths............ 757
control definitions
machine group properties.......... 56, 751
about ...........................................54, 812
toolpath ...................................... 56, 751
and post processors .......................... 818
delete / undelete................................... 242
choosing............................................ 697
deleting ................................................. 243
editing ............................................... 847
depth cuts
local copy ..................................821, 850
advanced multiaxis toolpaths .......... 573
locking............................................... 845
Design
master copy...............................821, 850
about................................................. 162
password protecting ......................... 845
editing ............................................... 240
properties of...................................... 869
dialog boxes
toolpath defaults .........................56, 754
working with ....................................... 23
control files (.CONTROL)
dimension attributes
selecting ............................................ 838
defaults ............................................. 126
converters
dimension text
converting files.................................... 41
defaults ............................................. 127
documentation editing ............................................... 332

post processor reference................... 239 live, fixed, phantom ............................ 30
resources ............................................... 6 selecting ............................................ 175
door setting color ...................................... 197
creating geometry ............................. 305 shading.............................................. 141
drafting transforming (Xform) ......................... 48
default properties.............................. 125 undeleting......................................... 244
dimension attribute defaults ............ 126 entry and exit macros
dimension defaults ........................... 128 advanced multiaxis toolpaths .......... 568
dimension text defaults .................... 127 entry/exit moves
leaders / witness defaults.................. 130 advanced multiaxis toolpaths .......... 563
note text defaults............................... 129 events
drill cycles undo and redo .................................. 240
choosing ............................................ 400 extending entities ................................. 332
drill points F
editing ............................................... 404
FastPoint mode
selecting ............................................ 401
using.................................................. 165
sorting ............................................... 403
feed rate values
drill toolpaths
block drilling blind holes .................. 426
feeds / speeds
creating.............................................. 399
recalculating ..................................... 780
feature-based drilling........................ 407
feeds/speeds
drop-down menus
optimizing for advanced multiaxis
adding functions ................................. 96 toolpaths ........................................... 576
adding submenus................................ 97 fields
adding to toolbars ............................... 97 entering values.................................... 26
creating................................................ 94 locking and unlocking ........................ 26
customizing......................................... 91 File Tracking ..................................... 42, 70
deleting................................................ 95 files
deleting functions ............................... 97 Change Recognition ..................... 42, 74
moving functions ................................ 96 configuration defaults ...................... 131
renaming ............................................. 95 control definition defaults................ 872
conversion defaults .......................... 121
E merging ............................................... 41
editors opening and translating ..................... 58
selecting a file editor ........................... 63 opening with other applications ........ 62
engraving Project Manager.................................. 64
toolpaths ........................................... 612 saving .................................................. 59
entities ................................................... 243 sharing ................................................ 60
“live” editing...................................... 269 tracking ......................................... 42, 70
analyzing ........................................... 365 filleting toolpaths.................................. 515
changing attributes ........................... 194 fillets
creating.............................................. 267 creating ............................................. 308
creating views from........................... 224 functions
deleting.............................................. 242 adding to toolbars............................... 89
deleting duplicates............................ 242
• 901
G entry moves ...................................... 498

gap handling filleting .............................................. 515
advanced multiaxis toolpaths........... 565 fitting and trimming ......................... 510
General Selection horizontal area.................................. 457
about ................................................... 29 linking techniques ....504, 505, 510, 513
using the ribbon bar.......................... 174 pencil ........................................ 453, 454
geometry radial ................................................. 461
creating ............................................. 267 raster ................................................. 458
modifying .......................................... 331 rest roughing..................................... 450
gouge-check retract moves .................................... 505
advanced multiaxis toolpaths........... 559 rotary motion.................................... 521
graphics view scallop............................................... 456
about ................................................. 207 spiral ................................................. 465
graphics window steep/shallow areas .......................... 500
about ................................................... 14 stock to leave .................................... 489
changing the appearance of ............. 201 tool holders....................................... 474
grid settings....................................... 139 tools .................................................. 470
viewsheets ......................................... 203 transition moves....................... 496–500
groups trochoidal loops................................ 490
activating from Toolpath Manager... 712 waterline ........................................... 460
creating ............................................. 714 holders .................................................. 474
machine ............................................ 714 home position....................................... 512
managing ............................................ 14 horizontal area toolpaths ..................... 457
Gview horizontal machining center
about ................................................. 207 tombstoning ..................................... 234
116
H I
HASP inch units .............................................. 159
about ..................................................... 3 insert arrow (Toolpath Manager)
helixes (entry) using ................................................. 712
control definition defaults ................ 881 interactive prompts
Help using ................................................... 22
about ..................................................... 4
menu ................................................... 53 J
using...................................................... 4 joining entities ...................................... 332
high speed loops ................................... 490
high speed machining........................... 444
high speed surface toolpaths ................ 444
K
key mapping (.KMP)
about ................................................. 444
about................................................. 108
adaptive stepdown............................ 477
keyboard shortcuts ......................... 82, 107
area clearance ................................... 449
axis combinations ............................. 520
core roughing.................................... 448 L
creating ............................................. 467 lathe
cutting techniques ...................477, 480, construction planes (Cplanes) ......... 238
482, 490, 496–500, 514 coordinate system ............................ 236
defaults.............................................. 757 tool and machine definitions ........... 236
toolpath types ................................... 578 default ............................................... 831

leaders / witness lines editing ............................................... 823
defaults.............................................. 130 file extensions ................................... 812
learning mode local copy .................................. 821, 826
activate / deactivate ............................ 28 locking............................................... 845
Level Manager master copy .............................. 821, 826
setting the main ................................ 260 password protecting ......................... 845
using the right–click menu ............... 262 selecting ............................697, 699, 836
levels machine group properties
about ................................................. 260 about ......................................... 709, 717
setting attributes ............................... 191 file options ........................................ 718
setting the main ........................198, 260 stock .................................................. 727
libraries tool settings....................................... 722
(operations, tools, materials) .............. 35 machine groups
material ............................................... 36 creating ...................... 54, 699, 714, 715
operations ........................................... 35 machine types..................................... 48
tool ...................................................... 35 machining (CAM)
line entities about ................................................. 695
creating.............................................. 275 main level
creating by bisecting/midlines ......... 278 setting ....................................... 198, 260
creating by closest position .............. 277 mapping keyboard shortcuts................ 107
creating by endpoints ...............275–277 masking
creating by tangency ......................... 280 about ................................................. 177
creating parallel ................................ 279 quick masks ...................................... 180
creating perpendicular ..................... 278 Mastercam documentation .............. 6, 239
setting attributes ............................... 191 Mastercam Launcher................................ 2
linear motion (interpolating) material libraries
control definition defaults ................ 880 about ................................................... 36
linking moves menus
advanced multiaxis toolpaths........... 563 adding functions to............................. 89
live entities merge
about ................................................... 30 configuration files............................. 112
editing ............................................... 269 pattern files ......................................... 41
locking / unlocking fields........................ 26 metric units........................................... 159
Mill
M specialized toolpaths ........................ 416
toolpath types ................................... 383
machine cycles
mill / turn toolpaths.............................. 593
mirroring entities (Xform) .................... 343
machine definition
miscellaneous integer / real values ...... 861
requirements..................................... 828
Machine Definition Manager
editing ............................................... 893
about ................................................... 33
miscellaneous shapes
using .................................................. 824
creating ............................................. 287
machine definitions
moving entities (Xform)........................ 343
about ...........................................54, 812
MRU
and coordinate systems .................... 215
choosing............................................ 260
components ......................... 34, 54, 236
• 903
configuring................................111, 131 setting ....................................... 207, 208

multipasses
advanced multiaxis toolpaths........... 571 P
part orientation
N changing Tplane / WCS ............ 227–233
NC password protection
changing the file name ..................... 777 machine and control definitions...... 845
creating a program from a part file... 797 pattern
dialog box defaults ............................ 873 files...................................................... 41
output defaults.................................. 874 PDF
NCI files Mastercam documentation.................. 6
about ................................................. 795 viewing.................................................. 8
nesting pencil toolpaths .................................... 453
tips and guidelines ............................ 611 machining area................................. 454
toolpaths ........................................... 608 reference tool diameter .................... 454
NetHASP planes
about ..................................................... 3 Status bar options............................. 209
node points views and coordinate systems.......... 206
creating ............................................. 273 planes / views / WCS
note text setting ............................................... 206
defaults.............................................. 129 Status bar options............................. 209
plotting
O about................................................... 67
plunge roughing
offsetting entities (Xform) ..................... 343
operation defaults (.DEFAULTS)
editing .........................................56, 751
pocket 116
toolpaths........................................... 409
setting................................. 56, 751, 892
pocket, morph
operation libraries................................... 35
operations
point entities
adding a toolpath point .................... 771
create by position ............................. 271
deleting a toolpath section ............... 772
create dynamically ........................... 272
editing a toolpath point .................... 770
create in arc center ........................... 274
editing functions ............................... 767
create node points ............................ 273
folder icons ....................................... 762
create point by endpoints ................ 274
libraries ............................................... 35
creating ............................................. 271
moving a toolpath point ................... 771
creating in uniform segments .......... 273
post processing ................................. 797
setting attributes............................... 191
toolpath editing guidelines............... 769
point position
using the insert arrow ....................... 712
creating ............................................. 271
verifying ............................................ 784
position coordinates
Operations Manager ............................... 15
entering............................................. 164
about ................................................... 20
entering relative................................ 172
customizing......................................... 18
post processing
docking/undocking ............................ 16
about................................................. 792
hiding and displaying ......................... 15
control/machine definitions57, 793, 818
origin
defaults ............................................. 135
changing............................................ 213
post processors right-mouse button menu

about ...........................................57, 820 customizing ........................................ 99
adding to machine definition ........... 862 rotary motion
canned text........................................ 853 control definition defaults................ 883
changing............................................ 841 high speed surface toolpaths............ 521
components ...................................... 792 roughing
documentation .................... 7, 239, 819 advanced multiaxis toolpaths .......... 571
editing text ........................................ 853 Router
miscellaneous values ........................ 853 block drilling ..................................... 423
post text ............................................. 853 creating door geometry .................... 305
running the post................................ 797 creating stair geometry..................... 301
selecting .............................................. 57 specialized toolpaths ........................ 416
status indicators................................ 867 toolpath types ................................... 608
text defaults in controls..................... 893 running Mastercam .................................. 3
post text
editing .......................................853, 893 S
miscellaneous values ........................ 861
safety zones
power keys
machine group properties ................ 730
AutoCursor ........................................ 168
scallop toolpaths...................440, 456, 482
pre-selection
screen display
configuring ........................................ 138
changing ........................................... 204
primitive entities
defaults ............................................. 137
creating surfaces and solids .............. 323
shading.............................................. 141
printing.................................................... 67
selection
defaults.............................................. 136
examples ................................... 181–185
project folder management .................... 64
masking methods ............................. 177
Project Manager ...................................... 64
settings.............................................. 177
using General Selection ...................... 29
Q separators
quick masks........................................... 180 adding to menus ............................... 100
adding to toolbars............................. 100
R removing from menus ...................... 101
removing from toolbars.................... 101
radial toolpaths ..................................... 461
sequence numbers
raster toolpaths ..................................... 458
defaults ............................................. 874
redo / undo......................................42, 240
shading
reference points .................................... 512
defaults ............................................. 141
reference tool diameter......................... 454
using.................................................. 616
relative position..................................... 171
shortcut keys
rest roughing toolpaths......................... 450
about ................................................... 33
adjusting stock model ....................... 478
adding ............................................... 109
ribbon bars
customizing ...................................... 107
docking and undocking ...................... 27
modifying.......................................... 109
navigating............................................ 25
removing assignments...................... 110
working with ....................................... 24
SIM licensing
right–click menus
about ..................................................... 3
using .................................................... 31
• 905
Sketcher horizontal area.................................. 457

about ................................................... 29 pencil ................................................ 453
using the toolbar ............................... 268 radial ................................................. 461
smoothing ............................................. 440 raster ................................................. 458
Solids scallop............................... 440, 456, 482
about ................................................... 46 spiral ................................................. 465
associativity....................................... 652 waterline ........................................... 460
checking ............................................ 684 surface rough toolpaths
creating ............................................. 651 area clearance................................... 449
defaults.............................................. 142 core roughing ................................... 448
displaying.......................................... 616 high speed......................... 444, 448, 449
editing ............................................... 689 rest roughing..................................... 450
operations ......................................... 657 surfaces
primitives .......................................... 323 creating ............................................. 622
rolling back ....................................... 686 displaying ......................................... 616
suppressing ....................................... 684 representing...................................... 623
Solids Manager toolpath types ................................... 432
about ...........................................20, 682
spiral toolpaths ..................................... 465 T
spline entities
terms and concepts ................................ 13
creating ............................................. 312
text (post processor)
creating automatically ...................... 313
creating from blend .......................... 315
tolerances
creating from curves ......................... 315
creating manually ............................. 312
end conditions .................................. 314
stair
high speed surface toolpaths............ 514
setting system defaults ..................... 146 116
tool axes (Lathe)
creating geometry ............................. 301
rotating ............................................. 237
start / exit
tool axis control
defaults.............................................. 143
Status bar
tool burial.............................................. 490
2D / 3D mode.................................... 199
tool holders ........................................... 474
about ................................................... 14
tool libraries............................................ 35
planes / views / WCS ........................ 209
tool planes
stock definition
about................................................. 207
advanced multiaxis toolpaths........... 571
tool settings
block drilling ..................................... 428
machine group properties................ 722
rest roughing .............................452, 478
tool tilting strategies ..................... 549–554
stock setup
tool tips
machine group properties ................ 727
using ................................................... 23
subprograms
toolbar states (.MTB)
about................................................. 101
support and services ................................. 9
creating ............................................. 104
surface finish toolpaths
deleting ............................................. 105
cutting methods................................ 482
loading .............................................. 104
high speed ....................... 444, 453, 457,
458, 460, 461, 465 toolbars
high speed cutting methods ............. 480 about................................................... 21
adding ................................................. 89 block drill .......................................... 423

adding drop-down menus .................. 97 C-axis contour (mill / turn) .............. 594
adding functions ................................. 90 C-axis drill (mill / turn)..................... 594
adding separators.............................. 100 chamfer contour (Mill / Router)....... 385
customizing......................................... 87 circle (Mill / Router) ......................... 394
customizing settings ........................... 83 contour (Mill / Router) ..................... 384
deleting functions ............................... 90 drill.................................................... 399
hiding / showing ............................... 102 engraving .......................................... 612
moving functions ................................ 90 general turning (Lathe)..................... 578
opening, saving, and resetting ............ 87 Lathe ................................................. 578
renaming and deleting........................ 91 Mastercam X Art ............................... 381
states ................................................. 104 Mill .................................................... 383
using the right–click menu ............... 106 mill / turn.......................................... 593
Toolpath Editor miscellaneous operations (Lathe) .... 600
adding a point ................................... 771 multiaxis ........................................... 523
deleting a toolpath section ............... 772 nesting .............................................. 608
editing a point ................................... 770 onion skin (Router / Nesting) ........... 388
editing guidelines.............................. 769 oscillating contour (Mill / Router).... 387
moving a point .................................. 771 overview............................................ 381
toolpath groups pocket (Mill / Router) ....................... 409
creating.............................................. 714 ramp contour (Mill / Router)............ 386
Toolpath Manager remachining contour (Mill / Router) 386
about ...........................................20, 710 Router ....................................... 383, 608
backplotting operations.................... 781 specialized (Mill / Router) ................ 416
defaults.............................................. 149 surface............................................... 432
file options......................................... 718 wireframe.......................................... 410
icons .................................................. 762 toolpaths
machine group icons ........................ 762 about ................................................... 34
machine group properties ........709, 717 adding a point................................... 771
safety zone options ........................... 730 associativity ........................................ 35
solid / surfaces icons......................... 763 chaining ............................................ 734
tool icons ........................................... 762 creating advanced multiaxis............. 537
toolpath display ................................ 765 defaults ...................... 56, 148, 751, 757
using the insert arrow ....................... 712 deleting a toolpath section ............... 772
toolpath operations displaying.......................................... 765
adding a point ................................... 771 editing a point................................... 770
deleting a toolpath section ............... 772 editing common parameters ............ 774
editing a point ................................... 770 editing functions............................... 767
editing guidelines.............................. 769 editing guidelines ............................. 769
guidelines .......................................... 766 moving a point.................................. 771
icons .................................................. 763 parameters........................................ 749
managing .......................................... 760 reversing ........................................... 780
moving a point .................................. 771 setting system defaults ..................... 148
safety zones ....................................... 730 synchronizing chains........................ 737
using the insert arrow ....................... 712 WCS and tool planes......................... 233
toolpath types tools
advanced multiaxis ........................... 535 automatic inspection........................ 472
• 907
control definition defaults ................ 878 creating from normals ...................... 226
definitions ......................................... 474 managing .......................................... 218
holders .............................................. 474 measuring origins............................. 220
numbering ........................................ 723 named............................................... 212
renumbering ..................................... 778 planes and coordinate systems ........ 206
selecting ............................................ 744 setting for vertical turret lathes ........ 238
Tplanes standard............................................ 208
about ................................................. 207 Status bar options............................. 209
and WCS............................................ 233 top..................................................... 217
changing example.....................227–233 Tplane / Cplane (example)............... 213
tracking files ......................................42, 70 viewsheets............................................. 203
transform visual cues
assigning entity attributes ................ 345 dragging and dropping toolbars......... 89
using (Xform) .................................... 343 using AutoCursor.............................. 162
translators
converter defaults ............................. 121 W
file types .............................................. 58
waterline toolpaths............................... 460
trim / break / extend
WCS
using.................................................. 332
changing example .................... 227–233
trochoidal loops .................................... 490
example .................................... 234, 235
turning toolpaths
Status bar options............................. 209
Lathe ................................................. 578
Tplanes ............................................. 233
views, planes, coordinate systems ... 206
U wire backplot defaults .......................... 157
undelete / delete ................................... 242
undo / redo .....................................42, 240
work offsets
renumbering..................................... 779 116
units of measure (metric / inch) work system
changing............................................ 159 control definition defaults................ 877
unzoom / zoom..................................... 202 workspace orientation............................ 12
user applications
running ............................................... 52 X
Xform
V assigning entity attributes ................ 345
verify transforming entities .......................... 48
defaults.............................................. 153 using ................................................. 343
operations ......................................... 784
running ............................................. 785 Z
vertical turret lathes
Z depth
setting views for ................................ 238
setting ............................................... 198
View Manager ....................................... 213
Zip2Go
viewports
sharing files......................................... 60
setting................................................ 204
zoom / unzoom .................................... 202
views
changing in a viewport...................... 205
changing origins ............................... 221
creating by rotating........................... 225
creating from entities........................ 224
671 Old Post Road
Tolland, CT 06084 USA
www.mastercam.com
Printed in the USA

Mastercam X2 Reference Guide 1-883310-55-5

MCAMX2 RefGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MCAMX2 RefGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference Guide

Mastercam® X2 Reference Guide

regulations of the country of destination of a permitted export or re-export, and any

Trademarks Mastercam® is a registered trademark of CNC.

Printed in the United States of America.

1. Introduction to Mastercam X ......................................... 1

X Mastercam Menus ............................................................. 40

2. Customizing and Configuring

Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar Files..................... 87

Printing ....................................................................... 136

3. Drawing and Design Basics ........................................ 161

X Chaining ............................................................................. 186

Horizontal Machining Center / Tombstoning ........... 234

4. Creating Geometry ........................................................... 267

Create Point Position ......................................................... 271

Create Spiral ....................................................................... 295

5. Modifying Geometry ....................................................... 331

Analyze Distance ................................................................ 368

6. Toolpath Types .................................................................. 381

Pocket Toolpaths ............................................................... 409

Using the Transition pages ......................................... 494

Tailstock Operations .................................................. 605

7. Working with Surfaces and Solids.......................... 615

Extending Trimmed Surface Edges.................................... 639

Rename Solids and Solid Operations ......................... 687

8. Setting Up Toolpaths ...................................................... 695

9. Working with Toolpaths ............................................... 733

Chaining Contour Toolpaths ............................................. 736

Using STL comparison ............................................... 789

10.Machine and Control Definitions.............................. 811

Selecting a different .control file ................................ 838

Index ....................................................................................... 897

Note: For information on installing Mastercam (including using

In this section, you will learn about:

IMPORTANT: If you have upgraded from a previous

Although you access Mastercam from a single executable, it is actually

Note: This document does not include information on Mastercam

Note: You can also switch between Mastercam products by

Learning about HASP and NetHASP

Refer to the Mastercam X2 Installation Guide or contact your local

Using Online Help

The Field / Button definitions tab provides pop-up topics of dialog

Some topics include drop-down menus that provide links to related

information on installing upgrades and update codes, on

X To view a PDF document:

TIP: To display the PDF document in its own window, rather

2 To navigate through the document, use the bookmark list in

Continuous-Facing—Arranges the pages side by side, with the first

Note: For more information on working with PDFs, refer to the

Mastercam Support and Services

www.emastercam.com Mastercam global user forum

www.mastercam.com CNC Software, Inc. corporate Web

www.mastercamedu.com CNC Software, Inc. Educational

For assistance with installing Mastercam, its SIM or NetHASP, or to

 Be ready to describe the problem in detail. Write down what

TIP: Use Mastercam’s Zip2Go utility to gather Mastercam part

Important Contact Information 1

Phone (860) 875-5006

Fax (860) 872-1565

FTP Address ftp://ftp.mastercam.com

Internet Address http://www.mastercam.com

The Mastercam Workspace

Figure 1-1: Mastercam interface element overview

Be ready to describe the problem in detail. Write down what

Graphics Window Status Bar

Operations Manager Toolpath, Solids, and

Toolbars Interactive Prompts

Tool Tips Dialog Boxes

Ribbon Bars Learning Mode

AutoCursor and General Selection

Sketcher Live, Fixed, and

Chaining Right–Click Menus

Shortcut Keys Machine Definition /

Toolpaths Libraries (operations,

Function Mastercam’s Calculator

The Toolpath Manager tab is where you define setup

If your Mastercam installation includes Mastercam Art, the

Levels Manager View Manager

Toolpath Manager tab Solids Manager tab

Tool parameters tab Art Manager tab

Tool Manager Chain Manager

Drill Point Manager Machine Definition

Post Text page (Control Materials List